Archive of Our Own ^beta

Chapter Text

People talking, "Hello everyone."

People thinking, "Damn you all."

Demon talking, "I will eat you."

Demon thinking, "This tastes worse than shit."

Disclaimer: I do not own Naruto, Masashi Kishimoto does.

Attention, Minato is OoC in the first chapters. If you don't like this, do not pass this point.

Prologue

Konohagakure no Sato (Hidden Leaf Village), was experiencing one of its greatest catastrophes since the first Hokage, and Madara Uchiha founded it. The Kyūbi no Yōko (Nine-Tailed Fox) had appeared in the village out of nowhere and began to destroy it, causing extensive damage and casualties.

Hiruzen Sarutobi, aka the Sandaime Hokage, was organizing the troops that would take care of the Kyūbi. He had planned a direct attack, where the principal clans of the village would be the 'bait' so that he can have time to summon Enkōō Enma (Monkey King: Enma) to use one of the Jutsu that made him the Shinobi no Kami (God of Shinobi). That Jutsu was the Henge: Kongōnyoi (Transformation: Adamantine Staff), and he intended to use it to pull the Kyūbi away from the village, to reduce the collateral damage that the fox was causing.

Having everything ready, the Sandaime commanded the troops to carry the plan out.

With the Kyūbi away from the village, everyone thought that they could now make a better plan to contain the demon fox outside the village.

It seemed that everything was fine until everyone felt a tremendous amount of chakra that came from the Kyūbi, turning around and looking up, they could see that the Kyūbi was creating a giant chakra ball right in front of his snout.

Hiruzen, who was aware of this technique, felt panic, but he but could not show weakness; he had to protect his village, so he gave new orders.

"Anyone who can use the Earth Element, step forward and use the Doton: Doryūheki. We need to hold back that attack or everything will be lost." The Sandaime said while all the Earth users began to use the Jutsu, but it was too late since the Kyūbi was about to throw the Bijūdama (Tailed Beast Ball). However, just when everybody had thought that they would die, a huge toad appeared out of nowhere and fell upon the Kyūbi, and a second later, the Kyūbi had disappeared from that place.

Hiruzen, who was closer, could just think "Minato."

Minutes before

The Yondaime Hokage had been in a fierce battle against a mysterious masked man. That strange man was powerful. However, it wasn't his power what worried him, but his final words, "I'll be back, and the Kyūbi will be mine," and after that, the man disappeared into a swirling distortion.

However, Minato could not worry about that now since the Kyūbi was still in his village and he had to protect it.

He would not allow this to continue; he had to seal the Kyūbi again, and he could think of one thing that might work only.

Now

The Yondaime Hokage had transported the Kyūbi to a place far away from the village, where the beast would cause no more damage. He disappeared in a yellow flash and reappeared in the same way. This time, a red-haired and very tired-looking woman, who carried in her arms two bundles wrapped in blankets of orange and black color, accompanied him.

These people were Kushina Uzumaki, the wife of the Yondaime Hokage; Menma Uzumaki; and Naruto Uzumaki. They were their children, and both of them were blond and had dark blue eyes.

The Yondaime was exhausted, but he still had to seal the fox. Kushina realizing what her husband had in mind became concerned. Therefore, chains made of chakra came out of her back that coiled around the Kyūbi, keeping him still.

"Minato… you can't do this if you do that; we'll condemn the lives of our children. Let me do this, I will take the Kyūbi along with me, and I will delay his rebirth." Kushina pleaded with difficulty as she tightened the chakra chains.

Minato didn't want to do this either, but he didn't know where the Kyūbi could reborn, and his rebirth would be much worse if anyone else caught him.

Therefore, he placed a barrier around the area and told Kushina about his short battle with the mysterious man.

"I understand…" Kushina said after hearing all that, but she still was undecided; she knew that their children would have a hard life with much pain and loneliness if they did this, but she was confident that they could master this power, and protect those who despised them.

Then Minato continued with the ritual, he summoned two stones and placed both of their children there. Then he explained what he would do.

"Kushina, I will use the Shiki Fujin (Sealing Jutsu: Reaper Death Seal) to seal the Kyūbi's power in Menma, and the Hakke no Fūin Shiki (Eight Trigrams Sealing Style) to seal the Kyūbi's consciousness within Naruto. I trust in Sandaime-sama; he will take care of our children, and he won't let that anything bad happen to them." Minato stated as he did the seals to summon the Shinigami (Death God). He already knew that this would cost his life, but it was for the sake of the village and the Elemental Nations.

The Death God was visible for Minato, so he continued with the ritual. Then a transparent blue hand came out from Minato's stomach, which headed to the Kyūbi until grabbing him. Minato extracted as much chakra as he could from him, it was about 95% of the Kyūbi's total power, and he quickly sealed it inside Menma, but this was not over yet. So he quickly performed more hand seals and shouted "Hakke no Fūin Shiki (Eight Trigrams Sealing Style)," and he immediately sealed the rest of the Kyūbi's power and consciousness inside Naruto.

"Done." An exhausted Minato said as he looked at the Shinigami. While he was waiting for his fate, he never realized that he was archly smiling. Therefore, when he thought that the Shinigami had spared his life, he turned around to see Kushina, who was not moving. He quickly ran to her, but it was too late, so he turned around again and furiously glared at the Shinigami.

"What did you do?" Minato asked, but the Shinigami could not stop smiling. He raised his sword and pointed it to where his children were, more specifically, to where Naruto was.

Minato realized that his son began to convulse while a red cloak surrounded him. He quickly ran towards him and tried to raise him, only to find out that it was like touching the acid. Therefore, he turned around to look to the Shinigami, but this time with an eye of hatred, only to find out that he was gone.

He turned around to see Naruto again, who had stopped moving, and the cloak of red chakra had disappeared. Minato panicked and picked his son up, only to find out that he was not breathing. He tried to do something but then realized that it was too late. He cried on his chest as several ANBU along with the Sandaime arrived at the scene.

The Sandaime had seen everything, and even though he couldn't see the Shinigami, he knew that Minato had summoned him. Nonetheless, he didn't know why Minato was still alive. So he asked himself what the Shinigami did. Therefore, he approached Minato, placed a hand on his shoulder and whispered a few words.

"Minato, let's go back to the village," He said as gently as he could. He was also quite sad, this little creature didn't do anything wrong, and he had died. Minato turned around to try to say something, but he noticed that his son began to move. He thought it was just a case of catalepsy, but then he noticed something, his child's hair started to change to a red color, and his eyes turned red with vertical-slit pupils. To say that Minato was scared would be an understatement; he was terrified. He thought that the Kyūbi took possession of the body of his son. So, unconsciously, he dropped Naruto from his hands and before he touched the ground, Hiruzen caught him.

Minato's behavior surprised Hiruzen, who could ask only, "What happened?" Minato turned around as he looked at Naruto with hate, "The Kyūbi took possession of the body of my son, and he killed him. That is no longer my Naruto; he is the Kyūbi!" Hiruzen was in shock; he did not believe that something like this had happened.

Minato knew he was irrational and that he came to that conclusion very quickly, but all that had happened would not let him think clearly.

Hiruzen thought that Minato has been just tired, so he said. "Minato, I think you should rest, and we will see what happened to your son. Don't say such things. That might just be a side effect because you sealed the Kyūbi within your child."

Maybe what Hiruzen had said was true, but Minato would not think clearly. He was mad, mad with himself for not doing things properly, mad because his wife died and it seemed that the Shinigami took her soul rather than his and killed his son in the process.

He raised his hand and pointed it at Naruto while saying, "If that's true, why Menma wasn't affected?"

This statement took Hiruzen by surprise, and he didn't know how to answer. Therefore, Minato let out a bitter laugh and continued. "I already guessed it… That's not my son, not anymore. The Kyūbi killed him and took possession of his body, if you want to worry about him, fine do it. But I won't acknowledge that demon as my son, take him out of here before I do something that I might regret." He wanted to kill him immediately, but if he did it, all would be in vain.

The Kyūbi would be reborn again, and the masked man could catch him at that right moment, or even worse, the Kyūbi could go into the body of his other son to possess him as he did with Naruto.

He turned around while taking Menma with him, after that, he looked to the front and faced Hiruzen, "Gather the council, I have to tell them what happened here, and we have to see what we'll do with the demon. But remember, he's not my son." Minato menacingly said and disappeared in a yellow flash.

Hiruzen, who had the child in his arms, saw him peacefully sleeping. So he gave him a loving look and thought, "I hope that your foolishness doesn't cause regrets in the future. Especially for you, Minato."

Council Chamber (10 hours later)

Many people had been gathered in the council chamber; there were the clan leaders of the village. The Hyūga, Nara, Uchiha, Akimichi, Aburame, Inuzuka, Sarutobi and Yamanaka, with their respective main heads. Besides there were the elders, Danzō Shimura, Homura Mitokado and Koharu Utatane and several civilian members (they didn't have any power, and they were only there due to societal pressure). Many of them were murmuring the reason of why the Hokage assembled them while the others waited for the Hokage to explain the events of yesterday.

Suddenly the council doors opened, and all the conversations ceased. The Yondaime Hokage, who had a scowl, entered the council's room and sat in his seat; he looked to the front and saw that everyone had confused expressions on their faces, so he decided to speak.

"As you already knew, yesterday was the most terrible day in our village. The Kyūbi attacked us, and it caused severe damage to our village, as well as innumerable civilian casualties and Shinobi alike." He calmly said, then he proceeded to tell everything that happened yesterday to his council, but omitting a few things, like the masked man who attacked him, the fact that he sealed the power of the Kyūbi inside his son Menma. And of course, the fact that Naruto was his son, but not that he had sealed the Kyūbi inside him.

At the end of his tale, the civilian council members, together with some people of the Shinobi Council, clamored for the Demon child's head before he lost control and killed everybody in the village. But before things got out of control, someone else spoke.

"Poor fools." Said someone in the room, everybody got silent and saw Danzō standing up from his seat. Many asked themselves what he had in mind, but Minato and Hiruzen knew what he wanted to do, so he continued. "Do you not understand? We could make of this child the greatest weapon that Konoha could have ever made. With my training, he will protect this village, and he will not be able to oppose to us." He murmured, and was about to continue, but Hiruzen decided to speak before he could.

"Danzō, we understand what you mean, but he is just a baby, we cannot consider him a weapon. We should just let him have a quiet life, and when he is old enough to enter the academy, we could send him there and when he is ready, he will protect this village as a Konoha Shinobi, not as a weapon." Hiruzen ended.

Minato wanted to give Danzō the Demon child, but he knew that he would use him as his personal weapon only, and that was something that he wouldn't accept. All his efforts and Kushina's sacrifice would be in vain. Then he took the floor and said.

"Sandaime-sama is correct. We cannot consider him as a weapon, at least not yet. Therefore, since the child has no parents, I will put him in an orphanage and the people from there will take care of him. Besides that, nobody can adopt him. I don't want that anyone of you have him in your clan and want to consider him as a weapon too, this meeting is over, dismiss." Minato ended; he just wanted to stick a kunai in the Demon's head, but he could not do it. He would have to endure his hatred for the sake of the village.

With a "Hai Hokage-sama" the members began to withdraw, except for Hiruzen and Minato, the first one gave his Hokage a sad look.

"You know very well that the words spoken here will expand throughout the village, Minato, and in no time, everyone will know that he is the container of the Kyūbi. You should…"

But before he could continue, Minato hit his desk abruptly as he spoke. "He is not the container; he's the damn demon fox that took possession of the body of my son. I should have killed him, but I cannot ignore the sacrifices of my son and Kushina. If the people of the village want to do something to him, fine then, I don't care. That demon won't die so easily. He won't want to leave this place too soon, send one of your personal ANBU if you want to protect him, but it cannot be more than one." He ended with a look of hatred, but not towards Hiruzen.

Hiruzen just sighed and turned around. "Fine, but I hope you don't regret this decision in the future," He said, and then Hiruzen left the room as he called one of his ANBU to protect the child

Meanwhile, Minato was still in the room with some thoughts. "That damn demon, someday, I will discover how I can get rid of you so that you can't come back to live again. And when that day comes, I will personally kill you." Then he stood up and disappeared in a yellow flash to go home. He still had a son whom he had to care for, and he could not fail this time.

Five years later - October 10

A five-year-old boy with reddish hair and whisker marks on his cheek, who looked rather scrawny, was walking through the streets of Konoha as he asked himself. "What did I do? Why do the people hate me so much? Why do they always have to hit me on my birthday? Why no one wants to recognize me?"

This boy was Naruto, he didn't have a surname, but he still was happy to have a name. He wondered if his parents also hated him, and if they just gave him a name to disappear later.

He was tired, tired of this village; he promised that one day he would make pay to each one of the inhabitants. No one showed compassion for him, so, if he were to become stronger, he would not show any sympathy for these vile people.

So he continued walking around the village, taking care not to run into drunks that abounded this day or he would pay it dearly. He was hungry, the people from the orphanage had expelled him two years ago, and he only ate what was among the garbage from the restaurants and food stalls.

He just wanted to have an ordinary birthday, dammit! Like those, he saw the other kids having in the orphanage. However, they never celebrated one for him. They had always said. "Stupid demon, you don't deserve anything." Then they always ended up hitting him and giving him tiny portions of food.

So after leaving the orphanage, he tried to steal some food to soothe his stomach a bit. Nevertheless, when the people saw him doing that, they beat him until they were satisfied, but it was well worth it if he could calm his stomach a little bit. He would be dead by now if it weren't for a supernatural being that lived within his body, but he was not aware of him, at least not yet.

He was so deep in his thoughts that he didn't realize that he entered an area where people were celebrating the victory of their beloved Yondaime Hokage against the Kyūbi. One of those who were there noticed his presence and said.

"Look what we have here; it's none other than the demon brat. I guess he came here to finish what he couldn't five years ago." They always told him that, but he didn't understand why they said that.

The others who were with the man turned around and looked at Naruto with looks of hatred and malice.

One of them said. "Today we'll get rid of this demon and become the heroes of this village." After saying that, he pulled a knife out and another group approached them as they surrounded Naruto, who panicked.

"What are they going to do to me?" Naruto asked himself. He had to run, run away from them and hide in one of his hiding spots.

He was able to sneak away from them and started to run. However, these men would not let him get away that easily, so everybody began to chase him. It was like a mob of 20 people who were pursuing him with all their speed.

Naruto cursed himself; if he had been stronger. If he would have had more power. He thought that he should just stop running and die at last. After all, if this were all his life was going to be, maybe he should stop trying.

He began to shed tears from his eyes as he continued running. However, his legs were tiny and eventually those men would catch him. However, he couldn't surrender this quickly; he needed to keep trying, and that's why he thought the following. "I will never surrender; these bastards still have to pay. I only need to run and manage to escape from here. Dammit, I wish I were stronger!" He ran so much that he reached one of the training camps of the village, but unfortunately for him, he had stumbled, and the people were finally able to catch him.

A man approached him and took him by his neck to say. "Stupid demon, you can't escape now. When we're done with you, we'll be the heroes of this village, and maybe, we'll get paid for killing you." Naruto noticed that the breath of this man smelled like hell, it was obvious that he was drunk, but Naruto could not say anything because the man was grabbing him by his neck vigorously.

Then the man threw him to the ground and proceeded to beat him hard. The others approached too since they also wanted to do something to 'the demon brat'. They would not let this man have all the fun, so they started to kick him, throw stones at him, and the man who found him began to stab him in his legs. Naruto could do nothing; he was dying.

Nevertheless, after a moment, Naruto realized that he now was elsewhere. The place looked like a sewer, and it had several leaks, besides, he didn't feel any pain in this place except a burning sensation in his eyes, he thought he was in heaven or maybe even hell. Then he heard a grunt, so he approached the place where he heard that noise.

When he arrived, he saw an enormous cage with a piece of paper with the word 'seal,' so he got closer to the cage just to hear someone speaking.

"We finally meet brat; I can see that you're having problems." The voice said. It sounded furious, but he realized that the anger was not directed at him.

Thus, he approached towards him. "Who are you?" He asked, he wanted to know, this thing, whatever it was, was talking to him, and for once, there wasn't hate in those words.

The thing inside there spoke hoarsely. "Who am I? That doesn't matter right now, the only thing that now matters is that you have to survive, brat. If you die, then I would die too." He replied.

Naruto looked at him for a moment, but then he crossed his arms as he spoke, "Hmph, unless you tell me who you are I won't do anything. Besides, what can I do? Those men caught me, and I'm not strong enough to do something, I don't know what I can do." He finished clenching his fists.

The Kyūbi growled and looked at him. "Fine then, I am the Kyūbi no Yoko, but before you start with your questions, we need to survive. Don't worry about your wounds, I'll take care of that, you only have to take care of these bastards. I know that you'll come up with something; I'm sure of it." He ended with a smile, but Naruto couldn't have seen it since he was behind the bars and it was quite dark back there.

He was surprised that he was the Kyūbi; he thought that the Yondaime had killed him, maybe he lived inside him, and maybe that was the reason for the hate towards him. However, it was not the time for questions. He had to survive first, and after that, he could ask all the questions he wanted.

"Okay, can you do something?" He asked; he also wanted to survive; he had to make everyone in this stupid village pay, every one of them.

The Kyūbi looked at him and nodded. "Don't worry, I have everything covered." After that, Naruto disappeared from his mindscape and reawakened when most of the men had stopped hitting him, many of them had satisfied looks on their faces, but everything changed when they heard a growl coming from Naruto, so they turned around, and one of them said.

"Well, it seems the demon won't give up, I think we should kill him conclusively." At the end of his speech, he pulled a knife out and proceeded to try to stab him in his heart.

He approached him, and he noticed some disturbing things, first that his eyes were not reddish anymore; rather they were purple with a ripple-like pattern while a red cloak began to surround him, healing his wounds very fast. The man was scared, he tried to run away, but it was too late.

Naruto stood up with a big grunt. All he wanted to do was to make these people, who had caused him so much pain, disappear; he didn't know what he was doing; he was not aware of his actions. He heard a few words in his mind and repeated them only. "Shinra Tensei (Almighty Push)," Saying those words, things happened quickly; all those people were thrown and were crushed by a massive force. They could do nothing and all of them ended up dead.

After that, Naruto fainted while his eyes returned to normal, and while he rested in the center of the crater he made. Meanwhile, someone inside him smiled satisfactorily. "This will be interesting for both of us, Naruto." He ended up with a wicked smile.

In the distance, a man who was wearing a black robe and an unconventional mask had observed everything that had happened very carefully. Therefore, he thought, "I must inform Danzō-sama about this." Then he disappeared in a puff of smoke.

He left Naruto in that crater; the place was well away from the suburbs, and people would take long to find him. Hence, after he informed his master about what he saw, he would calmly pick him up from there.

Chapter Text

Person talking, "Hello everyone."

Person thinking, "Damn you all."

Demon talking, "I will eat you."

Demon thinking, "This tastes worse than shit."

Disclaimer: I do not own Naruto or its characters, Masashi Kishimoto does.

Chapter 1

Root HQ minutes later

"So that's what happened, Torune," Danzō said as he stared at one of his most loyal members who was kneeling before him. "And I guess that you’ve completed the other mission I’ve assigned you," Danzō stated while his only visible eye narrowed dangerously.

Torune, who knew the character of his leader about failed missions, continued, "Hai, Danzō-sama. The ANBU assigned to protect Naruto by the Sandaime never noticed anything. Besides, I took care of his ninja equipment." Torune finished, not wanting to wake the fury of his leader.

Danzō looked up again and then turned around to leave the room. However, he then turned his head to look at Torune and finished, "So, go and bring Naruto-kun here. We don’t want anyone else find him and think that something's wrong with our little weapon." Danzō then left the room with a smile on his face.

"Excellent. He can use the power of the Kyūbi after all, and it seems more than I had thought, to crush so many people with just chakra. Haha, stupid Minato, you can fool the rest of the population, but not me. Your little Menma may have almost all the power of the Kyūbi, but without the consciousness of the Kyūbi, it will be impossible for him to control so much power. You only made things easier for me. However, now I just have to take care of Naruto-kun and then erase his pathetic emotions." Danzō thought as he imagined himself as the next Hokage.

Naruto's Mindscape - 5 hours later

Naruto had woken up in the same place than before; he thought that everything that had happened was just a nightmare, but it was indeed reality. However, now it was the time to ask the questions and get the answers, maybe something good could come of this meeting.

With that in mind, Naruto walked across the complicated halls of his subconscious until he reached the place where the huge cage was and before he could say something, he heard another voice.

"So we survived, to be honest, I didn’t believe that you'd be able to perform such carnage. There’s no doubt those eyes of yours are something to be scared of," The Kyūbi stated lazily.

He realized that Naruto approached and stopped in front of his cage as he spoke. "What are you talking about? I don't remember anything about what happened after being here… And what about my eyes?" To be honest, he had no idea what the Kyūbi meant. Carnage? His eyes? The Kyūbi should start answering his questions; he was exhausted.

The Kyūbi only laughed at the anxiety of his container and then he began to talk. "It seems that you can't remember the time when you crushed those fucking bastards. My guess would be because that you were in a state of shock, and that's why you can't remember anything, but don't worry about that. You can do that again later on. And about your eyes…" The Kyūbi replied as he waited for a second to give more ‘drama.' "You have the eyes of my father; I can only say that he called them the Rinnegan. I don't know much about them. You will have to discover on your own what your eyes can do. I just know that those eyes can create things out of nothing and give consciousness to said things, but that’s still out of your league, brat." The Kyūbi stated as he waited for his container to ask him something else... and he didn't disappoint him.

"What the hell?! Do you have a father? And I have the Rinegen..." "Rinnegan, brat."  The Kyūbi corrected, and Naruto continued.

"Yeah, whatever… Rinnegan. So, are you saying that I can make things out of nothing and that I just have to find out what else I can do?" Naruto asked.

The Kyūbi nodded, and Naruto stated, "This is fucking great! With these eyes, I can do what I always wanted, get revenge on this stupid village and be the strongest of all. But coming back to the case, I can't see anything different in my eyes." He had seen his eyes the whole time in the reflection of the water, and he could clearly see his red eyes.

The Kyūbi spoke again to soothe to his container, "That's because you have them turned off right now. First, you need to learn how to use your Chakra correctly. Then you will need to channel your chakra into your eyes, and when you do that, you will have your Rinnegan turned on. You need training, brat, and unfortunately, I can't give you that. You will have to find help from someone else."

Naruto upon hearing this instantly felt deflated. Who the hell would help him in this place? After all, he was just the 'demon brat.'

However, he decided to put this problem aside, for now. He would solve that problem later, so he asked more questions. "Now seriously, can you tell me why you are not dead. And how did you end up in my body?" That was what he thought from the first moment that he told him that he was the Kyūbi.

The Kyūbi let out a sigh and looked at Naruto. "Well, first of all, I am a being composed only of chakra, I can't be killed. I will just disappear and reborn elsewhere after a certain amount of time. All that your pathetic father could do to stop me was seal my consciousness within you, and the rest of my power inside your little brother, or that was what he thought." Naruto was confused again, and this time even more than before. Wait! Did he say that he has a father and a brother? Oh no. He didn't mean that, right? Damn he did!

The Kyūbi seeing the expression of realization on his container could only chuckle and add, "Little Ningen (human). Haha, I'm surprised that you didn't notice this a long time ago. The people of this village may be stupid, but I thought you would be different; you are the spitting image of the Yondaime and his stupid bastard son. You just suffered a few "changes" because you have my consciousness and so little of my power." The Kyūbi stated waiting for the outburst of his container, but after a few moments nothing happened. He carefully looked at him and realized that he was completely still.

"I think I broke him." The Kyūbi thought. He didn't see anything wrong with saying something like that. Therefore, he patiently waited until his container softly spoke, "So, is the Yondaime Hokage my father and the little 'prince' my brother?"

The Kyūbi raised an eyebrow in confusion, "I thought I made it clear." But then Naruto burst into laughter, "Hahaha, great! Now I have better reasons to kill that bastard. I don't care what his motives were for abandoning me or why he did what he did; that's the past. Now I have to find someone who can offer me training and do whatever he tells me. At least for a while, until that person is no longer useful to me, but I still have some questions. Tell me, why did you attack this village and why the hell are you so small? I thought you were the size of a mountain." Naruto asked. Now that he could see behind those bars, he asked himself why he was so small.

However, the Kyūbi didn't take the last question very comfortably; he furiously growled, "Stupid brat, watch your mouth! Small or not, I can still kill you easily, and I am of this size because your bastard daddy sealed a tiny part of my power and my consciousness only. Regarding your other question. I'm not sure what happened. Your mother, my previous Jinchūriki, was about to give birth; I took that opportunity to escape. Don't get me wrong, I didn't attack this village because I wanted to, I just wanted to get out of here and get away as much as possible from the damned humans. I didn't want to be sealed again, but then… I'm not sure what happened, I managed to escape, but then, all I could see were those damn eyes and a chakra as despicable as of Madara Uchiha. Then your father sealed me and now I'm here talking to you." Naruto understood almost everything. Hopefully, his mother wasn't like his 'fucking' father. It would never hurt him to know that, at least, his mother didn't hate him. Nonetheless, he would ask more about his mother later.

Thus, he asked again, "What do you mean by 'damn eyes'?" The Kyūbi replied, "It’s a Doujutsu like yours. The Sharingan, they descended from the Rikudō Sennin, the creator of the ninja world, my father. But I will not give you history lessons. So, if you want to know more about him, you will have to ask someone else, brat." The Kyūbi stated. He was tired; he just wanted the interrogation to end. He was still tired, even after six years, and he still needed, at least, two more years to be fully recovered.

However, Naruto then said something that made him maliciously smile, "So, we just have to take your power back, and then we can destroy the village. It will take years, but it will be worth it, or do you not agree with this, Kyūbi?" Now he had more opportunities than before; it seemed that the fate was on his side for once in his life.

The Kyūbi could only smile, "It seems that we’ll get along, brat." Naruto nodded and then looked around as he analyzed the place. He couldn't have an ally living in a place like this.

The Kyūbi raised an eyebrow, curious on what Naruto was planning to do. But then he saw something that surprised him, the sewers had changed to a current Konoha; surprisingly it was accurate in every way.

He realized that he grew a lot too and that they were on the Hokage Rock. He confusingly looked at his container who spoke. "Consider this as a part of my payment for helping me in the future; I memorized every street in this village because someday it could be beneficial to me. I could also increase your size, I didn't believe that it could be possible, but I think it's because you are in my mind. Now it only depends on you to add anyone you want to this place. I believe you have enough power to do that, I will leave now. Have a nice day, Kyūbi." Naruto stated, and the Kyūbi quickly got out of his shock to call him. "Wait! My name is Kurama, brat. It was nice to meet you." Naruto nodded and began to disappear, "We'll talk later, Kurama, goodbye." Then Naruto disappeared from his mind.

The Kyūbi had a big smile on his face, and then he set out to try out what Naruto said. "I can add anyone to this place, huh?" Kurama asked himself, and to prove his point; two men appeared each in different ways. The first one appeared in a yellow flash and the other one in a swirl distortion.

The first one said. "Stop right there, Demon Fox! You won't cause any more havoc in my village; I will defend it as the Hokage, and I'll take care of you." While the other one continued, "Oh my little pet, you were able to escape, but don't worry, you'll be under my control as you always have been." The Kyūbi could not help but smile and mentally stated, "I love my Jinchūriki!"

Five Hours Later - Root HQ

Naruto began to move again; he was completely healed from the wounds that those men had caused him. He noticed that he wasn't in the same place that he was hours earlier. Now he was in a windowless room, with a small table beside the bed. There was a plate of cookies and a glass of milk, so he shrugged and gobbled them. If someone had put them there, they were to be eaten, right?

He was also starving, so he didn't care about it. He then leaned back in the bed, which was very comfortable. Naruto still remembered all that he had spoken with Kurama, but he also asked himself where the hell he was.

He got out of bed to try to open the door, but it was locked, so he softly cursed and waited for someone to come and open the damn door. He didn't wait too long because a really old looking man with a walking cane did it.

He had black, shaggy hair, and his right eye was bandaged. He wore a white shirt, with a black or dark gray robe over the top of it covering from his feet, to just over his right shoulder. He also had a blank expression on his face.

Naruto could not see nor feel anything from this man, no hatred or killing intent. Nothing, he could only see a blank expression. He looked at him for few seconds and then Naruto asked, "Who are you and what am I doing in this place?" He did not know who this man was or what he wanted from him. So he decided to wait until the man decided to talk.

After a few seconds, he replied, "My name is Danzō Shimura, Naruto-kun, and you are here because I have seen that you are someone very promising. I can see in your eyes that you want the power, and I can give you that. With my training, you will be one of the strongest people in this village...and my personal weapon." He mentally added the latter, not wanting to scare him and ruin everything.

Naruto looked at him for a few seconds and asked, "Well, you seem to know the 'demon brat.' But, why do you want to train me? What do you really want?" Danzō was surprised, this child was brilliant, and he didn't doubt that he would be one of his best agents. Therefore, he answered, "Please don't compare me with those silly villagers, Naruto-kun. I was always aware of your potential, but unfortunately, our beloved Yondaime never allowed me to get near you. But the events of a few hours ago helped me to approach to you, Naruto-kun. I can train you; I can make you one of the strongest Shinobi that this village has ever produced, and what do I want? I just want to make you strong enough to protect this village with all your strength." Danzō finished and stretched his hand out to Naruto.

Naruto meanwhile was thinking about this, "Ha! Protect the village? Pff, but this is an excellent opportunity, I will only say that I agree. He doesn’t need to know anything more; I'll receive his training, and when I'm ready, I will leave this place." With a big smile, Naruto shook hand with Danzō, waiting for his training as he followed Danzō through the halls of the place.

If they provided him training and food, he would not complain. Danzō, on the other hand, was euphoric and had his thoughts. "Yeees! Just wait a few more years, Minato, and the Hokage position will be mine." Yes, Danzō had his own plans.

Root HQ 3 Years Later

An eight years old boy—who approximately had 126 cm, wore a black ANBU outfit and an 'Oni' mask of the same color—, was quietly whistling atop a pile of Root members. Some of them were unconscious, and other ones had severe injuries. After a few seconds, Danzō appeared from a room with a disapproving look on his face. "Oni, I explicitly told you not to use that style with Root members," He stated, now in full sight.

Naruto turned around and let out a sigh as he replied. "Hey, don't blame me. I just wanted to try and see if I could use this style again without killing anybody, and I haven’t used my Kenjutsu. If I have done it, you wouldn’t have a pile of unconscious people, but rather you will have parts of their bodies."

The Bōnkurasshā (Bone Crusher) was terrible. At first, it was only Taijutsu, which focused on attacking and breaking the bones of the opponent, where the weaker bones were, and this was extremely easy for him because of his unique flexibility. After a while, he thought of combining that style with Kenjutsu and adding Futon or Raiton to his Kenjutsu made him very deadly.

Danzō was not sure if he could block one of these attacks and emerge uninjured. Anyone who would dare to have a Taijutsu or Kenjutsu combat against this child would be dead. It was better to keep the distance.

Danzō shook his head and spoke again, "Okay, maybe you're right, but remember not to use that style in the Root ever again. Now follow me, I have an important mission for you." Danzō turned around and walked away.

Naruto could not help smiling. This old fool could not apply his stupid seal on him, nor break him mentally. He owed Kurama a lot because of that; he still remembered how Danzō wanted to apply the seal to him two years ago.

Flashback Two Years Ago

Naruto was training with the Justus of Fūton and Raiton that Danzō had provided him. Who would have thought it? It seemed that the Rinnegan gave him the ability to use the five elements of chakra, which was a big surprise for him and especially for Danzō, who at this time was heading to where Naruto was.

Naruto felt his presence, and he quickly stopped everything he was doing. "What can I do for you, Danzō-sama?" He politely asked as he turned round. He still needed the help of this old man. He was not strong enough to carry out his plans yet; he had to wait.

Danzō hated that, how could he detect him? He was not a sensor, and besides that, Danzō suppressed his chakra as he could to make it harder for him. However, he always did it. Perhaps he was a sensor, and if that were the case, then he could exploit that ability; it would be useful for Danzō in the future.

Danzō left his thoughts for later and replied, "Naruto-kun, I want you to come with me, I have something to give you." Naruto shrugged and followed him, perhaps he would now give him some Doton jutsu since he needed some of them.

They quickly arrived in a room filled by Root members; all of them were kneeling before their ‘leader’, poor fools. He asked himself what the hell those freaks were doing here.

Nevertheless, he continued following Danzō until they stopped right in front of a desk. Danzō pulled a scroll out and wrote something with his blood. After that, he put it back into the desk and talked. "We are gathered here today because we have a new member among us, a member that I'm sure everyone has heard of…the kid with the five elements, Naruto." Danzō said, many members upon hearing this began to whisper, but a single look from Danzō stopped all the whispers.

Then he proceeded to talk again. "Naruto, your joining into our organization is unprecedented since its founding. Since you seem not to value the ties, I see that it is unnecessary to put you under "the special training", and since you have accomplished the assigned missions without opposition and failure, I officially declare you as a Root." Naruto didn't know what the hell was going on. That amount of people just for this? And what the hell? He thought that he had been a Root member since a long time ago. It seemed that he was wrong.

Therefore, Naruto shrugged and replied, "Thanks, Danzō-sama." Then Danzō continued to speak, "From now on, your codename will be Oni." After that, he gave Naruto a black ANBU outfit and a mask.

Naruto thought that was all, but Danzō beckoned him to come closer, and so he did. "Oni, please stick your tongue out." Danzō asked, and Naruto thought that it was weird. "What the hell does he want to do with my tongue?" Naruto asked himself, but then he thought that there was nothing wrong with it, so he did it.

Danzō then proceeded to touch the center of his tongue with the tip of his index finger as he spoke, "It's done, everybody, dismiss."

With a "Hai Danzō-sama", everyone in the room withdrew, and only Danzō remained in the room. "Now I'll have complete control over you, Naruto, haha, and you won’t be able to do anything about it." Danzō thought as he left.

Meanwhile, Naruto was having a conversation with Kurama, "Hey, Kurama. Do you know what the hell the old man was trying to do? What did he want?"

Kurama growled and answered, "Yes, I know. He wanted to put a seal on you, to control you with it in case if you would ever go against him. But don't worry, I took care of that after you left the room. Never again people will control to the great Kyūbi no Yoko, and I hope you don't let that happen to you again."

Naruto frowned and mentally answered, "You know very well that no one controls us. The old fool thought that now I would be mentally broken after all the torture that I had to go through, but I must thank you. Without you, I would be like one of those stupid freaks of this place. But I also have to thank that old man, those tortures helped me to strengthen my body, and now I can hardly feel any pain." To be honest, he hated ‘Danzō's training sessions’.

Danzō was quite sadistic, but after a while, he had suddenly stopped. It seemed he got tired of trying to break Naruto physically and mentally, and now he attempted to control him in another way. Too bad for him, nothing he tried could control him.

After that, Naruto went to a training camp. He still had to master his Rinnegan techniques, especially those which involved gravity. He already knew some of them, but the cooldown of his Shinra Tensei (Almighty Push) and Banshō Ten'in (Universal Pull) was far too long, he needed to find some way to reduce the time. Thirty minutes was too much, and it would not help him in a difficult situation if he already used his shot.

Then he went to meditate for a few hours before trying to move objects with his Gravity Element.

Flashback End

Naruto couldn't help smiling when Danzō found out that he didn't have the seal. He attempted to put it on him again like eight times, all with the same results, and then he had stopped trying.

He always kept that expressionless face, but Naruto knew that he was boiling inside and complaining that he couldn't control his ‘little weapon.’ Haha fucking idiot, nobody controls Naruto, maybe the old man finally noticed it and stopped trying to control him.

Naruto left his thoughts when he realized that he was in the same room when he became ‘a member of the Root’ while Danzō turned around and spoke.

"Oni, I will assign you a mission. It will be paramount; failure is not an option. Due to your record on missions, and you completed them without any inconveniences, I will give it to you. Stealth will be the key on this, and being detected is not an option. If they do... Well, just avoid being caught and don't leave any clues that you were there, do you understand?" Danzō asked.

Naruto was not sure what the mission was, but at least, they were never stupid one, and he could always kill someone. Then Naruto replied, "Understood, but what is the mission?" Danzō looked at him for a few seconds before answering, "The extermination the Uchiha clan."

Naruto's eyes widened behind his mask. He asked himself if Danzō was talking seriously, of course he did!

This old fool never talked nonsense. Then Naruto rushed to ask, "Why do we need to exterminate the Uchiha clan? I thought that those damn 'almighty' arrogant guys were the greatest strength of the village, and you always said that you must have the best of the best. Even though I hate to admit it, these copycats are really good." Naruto said waiting for Danzō's response.

Danzō at this hit the floor with his cane and replied, "That's because the Uchiha's are planning a coup. They want to overthrow the Hokage and take control of the village, and we cannot allow that. The Hokage already tried to find another exit, but eventually, he concluded that my solution would be more effective, you have the permission of the Hokage. Although someone else was initially assigned to this mission, we decided to distract him with another mission. This man is someone of great talent, and we cannot afford to lose someone like him."

Naruto raised an eyebrow at this. He wondered who could it be until a person came to his mind. After a while, he decided to talk again, "Uchiha Itachi?" In the Root, everyone knew about him, that bastard was quite famous.

Danzō once again had hit the floor with his cane to attract Naruto's attention and replied, "Yes, Uchiha Itachi. His contributions to the village and his power are something that we cannot deny, nor can we afford to lose, don't worry about him. He will not return to the village for two weeks, and when he comes back, it will be too late. So this mission will be appropriate for you, nobody is stealthier than you are, so I'm sure that you can perform this task without problems. Your mission starts in two days at five in the afternoon; you will have a time of three hours to complete the mission. This is an SS rank mission, if you fail, or if someone discovers you, it will cost you your head. Don't underestimate to the Uchiha, if you have a chance to kill, do it. Remember, don't leave anyone alive."

Then Danzō gave a scroll with the parameters of the mission to Naruto, who quickly read it and then burned it. Danzō nodded and then he proceeded to leave the room, but he stopped and added, "You are important to the Root, Oni. Don't fail this mission; I know you can do it." After that, he left the room leaving only to Naruto, who had a dark grin on his face.

However, after that, he started talking to his tenant who now would be jumping for joy. "Old fool 'you are important for the Root.' Tch, just because you can't control me, you want me to have an emotional attachment to you. Anyway, did you hear that Kurama?" Naruto mentally asked, and Kurama replied, "Brat, you are truly lucky. To have the privilege of destroying that damn clan, now I can say that I envy you. At least, I will be able to see all this slaughter." Kurama said with a big dark smile on his face as he crushed some people in the Konoha of Naruto’s mindscape.

Then he continued, "Now go and get ready, brat. Keep everything ready for this great mission of yours, and don’t fail! We still have many things to do in this filthy village before we can leave."

Naruto growled in annoyance, "Who the hell do you think I am?! I don't know the meaning of failure, and I won't learn it just for killing some copycats. Trust me, I won't fail this. This will be easy, these Uchiha have a lot of confidence in their eyes, but before they can activate their ‘almighty eyes’, they will already be already dead, and a few clones can always help. But I get a terrible headache when I use them with my Rinnegan." Naruto said as he unconsciously rubbed his forehead while Kurama growled his reply.

"Don't get stupid now. You know very well that when you use your shadow clones with your Rinnegan, they share their field of vision with you, so I think that's what it gives you a headache, and that's something that you have to fix," Kurama replied.

Naruto rolled his eyes, "Why do you have to be so serious all the time? Anyhow, let's put that aside, we must prepare ourselves for this mission." Naruto ended while he proceeded to prepare himself for his great mission.

Two Days Later - 4:50 pm

Naruto was well hidden in the Uchiha compound; he had suppressed his chakra so even the best sensor could not detect him. He wore the standard ANBU uniform, consisting of black clothing, a gray flak jacket, metal arm guards and gloves, ninja sandals and a Japanese katana of approximately 55 centimeters tied on his back.

He was quietly watching the Uchiha entering into their compound when he thought, "It's show time!" 

Chapter Text

Person talking - "Hello everyone."

Person thinking - "Damn you all!"

Demon talking - "I will eat you."

Demon thinking - "This tastes worse than shit."

Disclaimer: I do not own Naruto, Masashi Kishimoto does.

Chapter 2

Hokage Tower - Two Hours before the Massacre

Minato Namikaze was sitting behind his desk, signing a stack of papers. He had a lot to think, especially about what would happen within two hours. He stopped when he heard a knock on his door and said, "Come in." When the door opened, Danzō Shimura made his presence known. Bowing slightly, he spoke, "Hello, Hokage-sama. You have called me, might I know the reason for this little meeting?" He calmly spoke as he sat down in a chair in front of Minato's desk.

Minato stared at him for a few seconds until he made a signal and his ANBU left the room. He then placed a privacy seal and spoke, "Danzō, you know very well why I've called you. I agreed with the extermination of the Uchiha clan only because we would keep Itachi in the village. You offered to send your Root, but you haven't given me any information on how many members you commanded on this task, and how they will operate. You know very well that all this must be done in the most discreet manner as possible so that the authorities of the village don't get suspicious."

Danzō listened carefully to each of his words and then he showed a half-smile. "Hokage-sama, I’ve only sent one of my Root, and I can assure you that this agent is one of the best that I have. Besides, let me tell you that I trained him," Danzō replied with a bit of pride in his words.

Minato raised an eyebrow at this, "Just one? Tell me the identity of this man that you say that is so skilled." Minato thought that it was very strange that Danzō would do this kind of thing; he always took care of sending a good amount of his Root on the most challenging missions.

Danzō smiled and replied, "Come on, Hokage-sama. You have given me the most difficult missions to assign them to this agent, and let me tell you that he has always returned. I think you know who I'm talking about." Minato upon hearing this opened his eyes in shock and clenched his fists tightly, "The damn demon." He thought.

Danzō was playing with fire, and Minato knew that he was aware of it. However, Danzō continued talking.

"Don't worry Hokage-sama; Oni won't fail this mission. I won't be any different from the other missions that he has been on; you can put your trust in him." Danzō looked at Minato, waiting for him to say something. But what he had said next caught him off guard.

"Danzō, I've allowed you to keep that kid just because I hoped that you would be able to eliminate his emotions and keep him under control, but I've realized that this didn't happen. Moreover, he has turned into someone quite violent. That's why I'll take him out of Root when this mission is over." Minato stated, and Danzō quickly thought of something to say.

"Hokage-sama, if I may. I'm training this kid to be the defender of the village; you cannot take him out of Root. What will he do? You know very well that he will go crazy if we don't give him missions. Besides, are you thinking of sending him to the academy? That would not be appropriate, Hokage-sama." Danzō objected. He mentally cursed Minato, always trying to mess up his plans.

Minato thought about this for a moment and then replied, "Yes, that's what I'm going to do. We need him as a defender, but we can't make him too powerful, it won't be wise. If he has any problems with this, I'll put him in the lowest levels of the ANBU prison, and he will never see the daylight again. Now get out of my sight, or perhaps do you want to discuss what the Sandaime-sama had said to you about Root? I can stop everything I'm doing now to talk about that issue." Minato threatened. He had to put a stop to Danzō and the demon brat; he would organize all this later, and maybe he could order the demon brat to protect his son if someone tried to attack him.

He knew that those stupid of Iwa wanted to do something, but he still could not prove anything; he just had to wait.

Danzō quietly got up from his seat, but in his mind, he only wanted to kill the bastard who was in front of him. Maybe he could try out his new acquisition to order the stupid Yondaime to stab himself. But it was not convenient, not yet. He had something else in mind to use that eye, and he could not use it in this bastard.

So again, he turned around without waiting for any order to retreat, and just when he was to get out of the office, Minato spoke again, "Danzō, I want you to send the boy here immediately after he finishes his mission. I have a mission for him; I'll personally give it to him, and Danzō; I hope you're not angry with this decision, it's for the sake of the village." Then he told Danzō to get out and so he did.

Danzō left the Hokage tower to go to the Root's base as he thought, "Looks like I'll have to accept Orochimaru's proposal about his invasion plan. It will take years, but that idiot will fall. When that happens, Naruto-kun will be my personal weapon, and then he won't oppose to me." Danzō chuckled with a dark smile on his face.

Meanwhile, Minato was mentally cursing Danzō. "That idiot! He knew that I would accuse his Root of treason after finishing that mission. But he sends the demon brat; he knows that I can't kill him, or I would have problems! How didn't I see this before?!... Damn you, Danzō, and damn you too, Demon Brat!" With that thought, Minato let out a big sigh as he saw the stack of papers, so he thought again, "Sometimes I wonder why I took this job." Then he continued with his obligations.

Konohagakure no Sato - Ninja Academy

A kid with blue eyes and spiky blond hair was arguing with a child who had onyx eyes and black hair. "I'm telling you, Sasuke. My father is the most brilliant man in the world. There is no one stronger than he is." Said the child. Now, the boy identified as Sasuke, replied, "Hmph, Menma. My father is the chief of the village's Police. Besides that, he is the head of the Uchiha clan."

The now identified as Menma, growled, "So? My father is the Hokage, and he doesn't come from any prestigious clan, but he's stronger than anyone in your clan." He crossed his arms with a triumphant smile on his face.

Sasuke also growled and answered, "Oh really? Well, Itachi-nii will surpass your father in a few years, and then I'll do it. He would be the next candidate for the Hokage title if you didn't know."

Menma was about to add something, but someone else shouted, using the infamous Big Head no Jutsu. "SILENCE!" The class teacher, Umino Iruka, a Chunnin that had lost his parents in the Kyūbi's attack, yelled.

Both kids instantly stopped while they looked at their sensei, sweating heavily. "S-sorry, Iruka-sensei. We didn't mean to talk so loudly, you know. But the Teme usually gets on my nerves. So I couldn't control myself." Menma said.

Sasuke glared at him and replied, "You're the Teme, TEME!"

Iruka shook his head and shouted again, "Enough is enough! Very well class, we'll do some exercises outside." After saying that, he made a sign to the class to get up and follow him.

Sasuke and Menma looked and smiled at each other; they waited until everyone was out and Menma was the first one to speak, "Well, I didn't believe that it would work, these history classes are boring. We should be practicing kunai throwing and maybe some sparring, but my Oto-san doesn't want to train me yet. He says that I have to 'live my childhood.' I have to do everything by myself." Menma finished with a pout on his face and crossing his arms, and then Sasuke spoke, "I understand you, my Oto-san didn't want to teach me before, but I think he changed his mind because yesterday he was supervising my training with my Katon jutsu." Sasuke said with a big smile.

Menma looked at him and said, "Seriously? You're lucky, I only hope that my Oto-san also teaches me some Jutsus, but he says that I am not ready. But hey, let's go before Iruka-sensei gets angry again." With that said, both left the class to practice with Kunai.

With Naruto - Time of the Massacre

"It's show time!" Naruto thought as he put on a fox-shaped mask to cover his face. Besides that, he was using a Henge to make himself look like a taller person.

He jumped over one of the roofs of the compound and thought. "Are you ready, Kurama?" He knew that his tenant was awake for this.

Kurama growled and answered, "More than ready, I wouldn't miss this for anything in the world." Naruto smiled at this and stated, "Well, too bad. You know? I suddenly had an attack of moral, and my moral and sense of honor tell me that this is wrong. So, I won't do it..." Naruto said with a severe expression on his face.

There was silence for a few seconds and then Naruto could hear laughs in his mind, "HAHAHA! You? Moral and sense of honor? Ha! I didn't think you would be so funny. But hey! It was amusing, brat." Kurama said as he wiped a small tear from his eye.

Naruto smiled, "Well…you know me, honor and morals are for the samurais, and I'm not a fucking samurai. Okay, it's time to get serious. I have something to show you. Do you remember when you told me about your father and that he can create things from nothing and give them consciousness?"

Kurama nodded, and Naruto proceeded, "Well, I can't do that yet, it's fucking hard, but I can do something similar. At first, I had no idea I could do something like this, but then, when the idiot of Danzō showed me the hand seals for the summoning technique and when he tried to make me sign one of his contracts without success, I found out that I could summon animals by only imagining them. It's a great skill. Look, I'll show you; this will be our trump card." With that said, Naruto activated his Rinnegan and mentally shouted, "Kuchiyose no jutsu (Summoning Jutsu)," At the end of his words, a puff of smoke showed up, revealing a little chameleon; its eyes also had the Rinnegan.

Kurama paid attention to it until he decided to ask out of curiosity, "All right, brat. What are we supposed to do with that little thing? I can see that it has the Rinnegan too; you've said that using clones who have their Rinnegan activated caused you to have a headache since they shared their field of vision. Will you endure it now?"

Naruto shook his head and replied, "Yes, but this is different from my clones. I can order my summoning to stop sharing their field of vision with me, and don't underestimate this little creature. This thing can camouflage itself and become undetectable. Besides that, it can be as big as a two-story house."

Kurama now seemed to see the point of it. If they could camouflage themselves and increase their size while they were hiding, they would be a very lethal weapon. And since the Uchiha believed that they were safe in their compound, they would never expect that something like that could be hiding to kill them.

Naruto didn't wait more and again made more hand seals, summoning several chameleons. Naruto gave orders to each summon, and they proceeded to sneak in different parts of the Uchiha compound.

Naruto watched his work and then went to the Police Station of the Uchiha Clan.

Konohagakure no Sato – Three Hours Later

Uchiha Sasuke was currently walking quietly through the streets of the village; Iruka had detained him longer today because he and Menma decided to fight again in the training session. It was a little late; the lights illuminated the streets, which had a lot of movement.

He asked himself if his Kaa-chan would be mad at him for being late, but it was Menma's fault. He and his foolishness always exasperated him.

He entered a street, and then he saw the walls of the Uchiha compound. He was happy because his nii-san would return in two days from his mission, and perhaps, he could train with him a little.

He arrived at the entrance and saw that it was very dark. Besides that, the streets were empty. He had a bad feeling, so he ran directly to his house; maybe everyone was in a clan meeting or something like that, right? With that in mind, he sprinted toward his house.

With Naruto

"Who are you, dammit!? Show your face, you piece of shit!" A man yelled with his Sharingan spinning furiously, alongside this man was the body of a woman, with long black hair and a white skin, her name was Mikoto Uchiha.

Fugaku didn't know how all of this had happened. He had been reading the tablet of the Uchiha clan trying to discover its secrets until he had seen enough. After that, he had gone to the Police Station, seeing dozens of dead bodies everywhere, none of them showed signs of fighting.

Therefore, he had concluded that the Hokage found out about his plan to take control of the village, and now he was acting.

So he quickly ran to his home, believing that it was not too late. He thought that he could still save his wife and his little son. However, when he arrived at his home, he saw his wife on the floor, apparently killed by the same person who killed the others in the Police Station, since she showed no signs of fighting.

Since he got no answer, he yelled again, "Who the hell are you?! Are you a fucking dog of the Hokage?! And how the hell did you do all this by yourself?!" He suddenly heard a dark laugh coming from the walls. He was not really sure where it was coming from, though. "Not even my Sharingan can see remains of chakra in the room. Who the hell can do something like this?" Fugaku thought.

A slightly mature voice answered, "How do you know that I did all this by myself? Are sure that no one else helped me?" Fugaku shook his head and replied, "I have seen the bodies, you have done something to those who were at the Police Station, and also to my wife. None of them showed signs of fighting or that you have poisoned them. I don't know what the hell you did, but I know you're the one responsible for all this. Now answer me, who the hell sent you here?!" Fugaku was calmer now; maybe if he made him stay longer, the ANBU would arrive and would catch this guy.

He was sure that the Hokage sent him to do this, and if they captured him, he would be accused of treason, wily bastard.

Once again, the voice spoke derisively, "Oh, wow, you are very perceptive, and I thought that the people in the Uchiha clan were a bunch of mindless puppets. I thought that was the reason you guys copied the techniques of other people." Fugaku clenched his fists in anger, extracting some blood of them.

The voice continued speaking, "It's okay; I will illuminate your limited brain. I'm a demon who lives in the shadows, a demon that does not distinguish between good and evil, a demon that is here to take revenge against your clan for enslaving my partner, and listen to this…" He paused for a few seconds and now spoke with a demonic voice, "I'm not anyone's dog! Much less of that bastard who you call 'Hokage.' I'm just following his orders so that my plans don't get affected, and I do this because I'm returning a favor to my partner." He ended, releasing large amounts of killing intent.

Fugaku felt his knees as a pressure forced him to do so. He was breathing hard, and he could swear that he saw his death. Just when he thought that he would die by suffocation, the pressure stopped, and he began to cough due to the lack of air, hearing the voice continuing, "As for who I am..." Just then, a big chameleon made its appearance while it opened its mouth to reveal a man in a fox-shaped mask and an ANBU battle outfit. "Your worst nightmare... Banshō Ten'in (Universal Pull)."

Listening to the last words, Fugaku felt his body being pulled directly toward that mysterious man who was waiting for him with a strange blade, stabbing him in his right shoulder and throwing him to the floor. Then he felt that the man placed a hand on his head, holding him firmly. In the end, the man uttered, "As for how I did all this... Feel honored. Don't take what I did to your clan personally, it's just that you guys enslaved to the wrong demon."

Fugaku looked at him and weakly asked, "W-wha-at t-the h-hell are you-u talking a-about? What demon? W-we have n-never enslaved anyone." He was getting weaker, and he was unable to move because that weird blade was restraining his body.

Naruto approached to his ear and whispered, "Kyūbi." When he said that, Fugaku opened his eyes in shock. It couldn't be him! He was supposed to be dead; he activated his Sharingan one last time and saw that indeed it was a child who would have been about eight years old. How could someone so young have killed the entire Uchiha clan? He wanted to say something else, but it was too late.

Naruto whispered, "Ningendō (Human Path)" And that was the last thing Fugaku heard before Naruto yanked the soul out of his body and released it into the air.

Naruto looked at his body and sighed, "Done. Hey, Kurama, this was fucking easy. Was he supposed to this be the father of Uchiha Itachi? Pathetic."

Kurama, who had a big smile on his face, replied, "This was the funniest thing I've seen in more than five hundred years. Brat, I'm glad that you have been my container, I can't imagine being in the body of a hyperactive idiot shouting that he would be the next Hokage." Upon saying that, both of them felt a shiver running down their backs, and Naruto replied, "If that were to happen, I'd kill myself." Kurama smiled, and he was about to add something else, he heard Naruto saying in his mind.

"Banshō Ten'in (Universal Pull)" And a boy, a little smaller than Naruto, was pulled towards him.

With Sasuke - Moments Before

Sasuke was now walking around his home. He was scared because his home never had the lights off, and at this time, his mother was always making dinner.

He continued walking through the corridors of his house and started whispering, "Kaa-chan…Oto-san, Where are you? I-it's not funny anymore; p-please, stop hiding." He kept walking until he heard a hit on the second floor.

He quickly walked upstairs, stumbling over some steps on the way. He came up to the room of his parents and stood there, hearing two people whispering. Therefore, he opened the door slightly and what he saw surprised him: a tall, red-haired man with a mask was holding his father's head.

He realized that the man whispered something to his father, and the next thing he saw was his father falling to the floor, apparently dead. He looked sideways and saw his mother lying on the floor, showing no signs of life.

Sasuke's face was filled with tears; he let out a small sob, which he quickly covered with his hands. He started running away but then he felt a strange force drawing him to that man. He panicked; he could do nothing, but accept his destiny.

Now

Naruto caught the child and quickly put him on the floor. Naruto stared at him as he remembered the description of Itachi's little brother and that he should let him live, or that he would regret it. Like he was afraid of Danzō's threats. "Kurama, should I kill this boy?" Naruto mentally asked.

Kurama growled and answered, "Of course you should! A good Uchiha is a dead one! Kill him right now and get out of here, remember that you can’t stay here too long. Soon, the forces of your 'daddy' will arrive, and if they see you, they will catch you." Naruto thought about that a moment and then decided that he would kill him.

Sasuke saw that the man pulled out from his sleeves a strange blade and directed it toward his skull to stab him with it.

Sasuke closed his eyes, but after a while, he realized that nothing had happened. He opened his eyes a little and could see that the blade was just millimeters away from his eyes. He pulled himself away quickly not to lose his eye while he asked with fear in his words, "W-wh-ho a-are y-you? Why did you do this?" He asked again, and this time, he started to cry.

Naruto ignored him and mentally spoke again, "I think I'll do something else, maybe this kid can give me some fun in the future."

Kurama didn't like this and shouted, "What the hell are you talking about?! Kill him right now, you can’t let him live, if he unlocks his damn eyes and discovers how to pass them to the next level, he could control me aga-", but before he could finish his speech, Naruto interrupted him, "Enough Kurama!... Do you think that I'll be stupid as to allow someone to control you again? I promised you that I wouldn’t let anyone else do it again. I may be a bastard, but I keep my promises. You're my only friend, and I won't let that some foolish eyes can take control of you. Besides, I have some better eyes, remember?"

Kurama was silent for a few seconds, until he let out a big sigh, "You're right. Sorry, it’s just that I hate those damn eyes, and I didn't think clearly. Do what you have to do while I watch you." With that said, Naruto looked back to the kid who was in front of him, and he hoarsely spoke, "You don't need to know who I am." Then he turned Sasuke's body and stabbed three of his blades in him, not in his vital points. Two of them in his legs —one in each respective leg—, and the other one in both of his hands.

Sasuke cried out in pain, but then he realized that he was seeing some kind of illusion, where at first he seemed to see some weird eyes staring at him, but it only lasted for a few milliseconds. The next thing he saw was something that would leave a scar on him forever.

It was a black and white illusion that it seemed to vibrate; there he saw some huge chameleons catching with their long tongues to his relatives before they could realize what was happening, coiling them until their bones were broken. Then those chameleons proceeded to swallow them.

He wanted to do something, anything. But he could only watch. Even if he closed his eyes, he could still see the illusion. He saw the man who had been in front of him, but now he was sneaking into the police station of his clan, catching them and killing them in almost the same way that his father had died, killing them all with relative ease. 'The Konoha Military Police Force' was what made the Uchiha clan so proud, dropping like flies by just one man.

Then he saw that the man left the building and walked around the streets that were already empty. He quickly arrived at his house, and Sasuke saw his mother dying in the same way as the others.

Sasuke at this point was already in a state of shock, and when he was about to release foam from his mouth, he felt that one of the blades sent him a small electrical jolt, which pulled him out of his shock. Just to see his father talking apparently to nothing, and after a few minutes, the same man appeared, catching Fugaku, in the same way, he did with Sasuke and killing him after a few seconds.

The illusion then ended, and he saw that the man was now standing in front of him and looking at him while the blades that had been in his body before were now in his hands. If Sasuke could see through that mask, he might have been able to see the face of amusement that Naruto had. But he couldn't, so he just desperately asked, "Why?"

Naruto answered, "Because you clan is cursed, if they were still roaming around the world, then they would have brought the end to this world. I just took precautions to prevent that from happening."

Sasuke looked at him furiously and yelled, "Well, what are you waiting for? Kill me!" Naruto looked at him and shook his head, "Nonono, I am giving you a chance to avenge your clan. I'm giving you the opportunity to continue living and to make yourself strong. But listen carefully; you will never be able to defeat me, not in the way you are now. You saw what I did, right? I killed all the people your pathetic clan without even pushing myself; your pathetic father, the head of this disgusting clan could do nothing, and he died like the others. Your mother...What can I say? A beauty... Maybe after this I can have some fun with her bod-" But before he could finish his sentence, Sasuke stood up angrily and tried to hit him.

Naruto dodged it and hit him in the neck, and then he continued speaking, "Yeesss...this is how you will become strong, fill your heart with hate and contempt, never trust anyone, kill those who oppose you, train and become strong. But if you have distractions such as friendship and love, you will never be able to defeat me. You will hear from me again when I believe that you are ready and I realize that you are strong enough to face me. Don't love, don't cry, don't feel compassion, there is no honor in us. If you do this, you will be a true Shinobi like me. We'll meet again, Sasuke-kun. Goodbye." Then Naruto proceeded to hit Sasuke in his neck and left him unconscious.

Naruto then walked out the Uchiha compound, hearing Kurama speaking in his mind, "Wow...you really are the biggest bastard I've ever seen in my entire existence. Heck! Even I might haven't been able to say what you said to that brat. Hahaha, I like you more every day, Naruto!"

Naruto smiled and spoke as he jumped over the houses of the village towards the base of Root, "Wow, you flatter me, Kurama. Surprising you is quite an achievement. Oh, and what happened? Why am I not a 'brat' anymore?" Naruto asked playfully.

Kurama sighed and smiled, "Well when I saw that kid crying like a baby, I realized that he is a brat, and I just can't put you in the same category as him." Naruto smiled again; he could not avoid being happy, the truth was that he wanted to kill all those Uchihas a long time ago.

They supposedly were the police of Konoha, but they never did anything to keep the villagers away when they gave him those terrible beatings. However, now they would no longer be a problem for him, nor for this world or the next one. Now the Shinigami would have to deal with them.

He then returned his attention to his way when he noticed that he arrived at Root headquarters, with Danzō waiting at the entrance with his characteristic blank expression.

Danzō saw that Naruto had arrived, and thirty minutes before the scheduled time. He carefully looked at him and saw that he didn't wear his traditional mask, but he didn't care about that. He also realized that he didn't have a single drop of blood or injuries on his body, as usual.

When Naruto was in front of him, he hit the ground with his cane to get his attention, "I can see that you’ve completed your mission, Oni. And perfectly, as always.”

Naruto shrugged, "What can I say? This mission wasn't that hard; it seems that the Uchihas can only fight with their Sharingan. Too bad for them, I didn't allow them to use them. They never realized what happened, only when they were already dead." Naruto replied as if it were nothing.

Danzō watched him and thought, "Maybe Minato is right, he is getting too powerful. Besides, he doesn't care about anything nor anyone. Maybe he will be a threat to the village someday, but I still have an ace up my sleeve, and then I will have him under my control. But it is still too early for that. Minato, I'll let you continue with your stupid plan, and when the time comes..."

Danzō stopped his line of thought when he realized that Naruto was already leaving, so he quickly called him, "Oni, Hokage-sama has requested your presence in the Hokage Tower. Now is late, but tomorrow morning you have to go there and listen to whatever he has to say." Danzō ended waiting for a response, but he only saw a shrug while Naruto continued his way to the base.

Danzō clenched his fists at such behavior, and he thought, "Damn brat. You'll see, very soon you will show me the respect that I deserve." After that, he also walked into the base.

Konohagakure no Sato - The Next Day

Naruto got up a little later than usual since he had to meet with 'Hokage-sama.’ However, he didn't want to see that bastard. With a sigh, he put on his ninja outfit and then headed to the Hokage Tower.

According to Danzō, he must go with his full equipment set, with the mask and everything. He did not know why but he thought it was the best, maybe he would not recognize him; Naruto was sure that the bastard knew he was his son.

He arrived at the tower and entered the building; he saw the secretary and told her that he had a meeting with the Hokage. Thus, he gave her a paper that contained a verification. She told him to wait for a moment and that she would be back. He waited, and after about three minutes, she appeared again saying that the Hokage would receive him.

He walked up the stairs, and when he was in front of the office, he knocked on the door. He had never seen this man in person, and he didn't want to do it. After a while he heard a 'come in,' so he entered the office.

There was the 'Almighty' Yondaime Hokage, the man who defeated to the Kyūbi...yeah sure, moron…, sitting behind a desk and signing some papers.

He entered the room and softly spoke, "What can I do for you, Hokage-sama? It’s an honor to be in your presence." Naruto then thought. "Damn! Maybe I should devote myself to acting! ...Yeah sure."

Minato looked up and saw a boy a little taller than his son, with the typical Root uniform and an Oni mask. He paid more attention to the mask and thought, "Yes, that mask is perfect for you, damn demon." He pulled away those thoughts and quietly spoke, "I believe you know the reason you’re here. We'll talk about the mission that you had yesterday, which involved a clan of the village." Minato got up from his seat to look out the window to his village; he breathed the fresh air and then turned again before continuing.

"The truth is that I didn't expect that someone so young would do this mission, and Danzō said that this wouldn't be a problem for you. I had my doubts at first, but after the ANBU had arrived at the compound, they told me that everything was spotless, that there wasn't a single drop of blood around the Uchiha compound. Well, except for Fugaku's house. Could you be kind enough to explain to me how you did all of this without spilling a single drop of blood? They also told me that no one showed signs fighting, Fugaku only. And explain to me, why did you leave the little Sasuke alive?" Minato ended giving Naruto a signal to talk.

Naruto thought about how to get out of this situation. He couldn't say that he extracted the souls of every bastard of that clan and that he had used some of his summonses to make them eat the Uchihas... No, he had to come up with something ingenious, until he thought of something. "I'm sorry Hokage-sama, but the method I have used is a secret. It's a skill that I've developed over time. We're Shinobi, and as you'll know, we keep our best cards under our sleeve. I don't want to talk about this ability of mine; all my work could be exposed if anyone knows how it works. Besides that, we're not alone in this room, and something could leak out from here." Naruto replied.

Minato looked at him while he ordered his ANBU to withdraw as he placed a privacy seal. "You're kind of astute, like a real demon." He thought but continued. "Okay, but why did you leave Sasuke alive? I was told that he had multiple injuries around his body and that he was in a severe state of shock. Explain to me what happened." Minato demanded.

To Naruto, this was easier, so he answered. "Well, I let him alive because Danzō informed me that you wanted to keep Itachi Uchiha in the village. I thought the only way that he would do it was if he had someone to take care of in this place. As for the other question. Well, I first attacked the young Sasuke because I thought he was someone who was able to escape from me. I detected him just after killing his father. Maybe that was the reason he was in shock, watching someone of your family dying in front of your eyes must be sorrowful." The latter was uncalled for, and he merely said it to see what kind of reaction the Yondaime would have. He was sure he saw his wife dying in front his eyes and then 'he' to become later the 'Demon Brat.'

"Hehehe, it seems that he didn't take it very well." Naruto thought as he watched his father tensing in his place and clenching his fists tightly, with a look that was much colder than before.

Then he heard something that would be imperceptible to any human ear; it sounded like, "You have no idea" and "Demon." Too bad for him, the advantages of having a demon fox inside you improved the hearing and other senses. He did not care about this, and he just waited for his father to leave his pathetic lament.

He did not wait long because he spoke again, "Okay, Danzō informed me that your codename is Oni. Therefore, from now on you're out of Root, and you will be reinstated as a citizen of Konoha. In one month from now on, you'll have to go to the Ninja Academy. You'll be there until you complete the four years of training and then we'll assign you to a team, do you have any objections?"

Naruto meanwhile was thinking about this. "So... Does he want me out of Root? From the place where there would always be eyes on me, and where I couldn't properly train with my Rinnegan? And besides that, he is giving me the opportunity to go to the pathetic Academy, where I can just leave a shadow clone while I train at one of the training grounds? This man is dumb. I just exterminated a ninja clan, and he wants to send me to a place filled with children. But hey, I have to take this chance."

Naruto shook his head and answered, "No Hokage-sama, I don't have any objections. What's more, I like the idea. Spending so much time in Root isn't good for anyone. The place smells terrible and besides that, you have to deal with a one-eyed old man 24 hours a day."

Minato laughed at this until he realized who made him laugh, "Wait... Have I laughed for what this demon said? Damn it! What's wrong with me?! He is the killer of my son!"

Naruto also noticed this and thought, "Uh! What happened daddy? Do you think that your little son is funny?"

Minato cleared his throat and continued, "*Ahem* Well, as I was saying, I will return your old identity to you. You just have to sign these papers, and I will give you an apartment where you can live, and the money from your missions. You must return all your gear and never talk to anyone about your relationship with Root or yesterday's mission. If you do it, you'll be accused of treason, and you will be prosecuted and then executed. Now take your mask off and sign these papers." Minato then placed some papers on the desk.

Naruto shrugged and took his mask off. He noticed a slight gasp from his father, but he only signed the papers before handing them back. "Very well," Minato said, "Here are the keys to your apartment and in this scroll is the money from your missions. You can do whatever you want with that money, as long as you don't go telling about their origins." Minato finished, giving him the keys.

Naruto had already given him all his equipment while he accepted the keys. The Hokage was about to order him to leave until Naruto requested, "Hokage-sama if you don't mind, I want to keep my katana. It's something really special to me." Minato was curious to know why 'the Demon' had something special. Hence, he asked, "Can you tell me why?"

Naruto shrugged. "Well, I won that katana in my first kill, from a stupid samurai who wanted to have a duel with me. I didn't pay him attention and I killed him quickly. That's why it's special to me," he answered as if it was something ordinary.

Minato didn't see anything wrong with that, but a small part of him felt sorry for him, killing at that age...No! He killed his son! He had no reason to feel sorry for him.

Minato sighed, "Okay, you can take it. Now, you're dismissed.” After that, Naruto quickly grabbed his katana and disappeared with a fire Shunshin.

Minato was slightly surprised of such ability, a Shunshin was something easy to do, but adding an element to it was quite hard.

However, he sighed and continued with the bane of his existence…paperwork.

With Naruto

Currently, Naruto was jumping on the roofs of the village, looking for his new home. He did not care about Danzō or Root; he thought that the old fool knew all this. Thus, he did not see the point of returning to the base and tell him that he was leaving. Besides, he did not have anything to pick up from there. But not everything was bad. They gave him his money and identity again.

He knew that the Hokage said nothing about hiding his status as a Jinchūriki, so he was sure that everyone in the village would know within a week that the 'demon brat' had returned to the village to 'kill them all.' Poor fools, now he was not the defenseless child from three years ago, now he would break some bones if anyone dared to do something against him.

After a few moments, he came to the address where his apartment was, and when he saw it, he could only think of one thing. "This is a sty."

He continued to settle in this place and think what he would do in this whole month before going to the academy. And he could only think of one thing… training.

With that in mind, he left his apartment and headed to an area far away from the village. He had to find out what more he could do with his eyes. He had almost mastered his gravity techniques. Now he only needed two minutes to use those techniques, and the Ningendō (Human Path) seemed to have no cooldown.

He created about 50 clones to practice Ninjutsu as he tried to figure out what else he could do with his Rinnegan. Then he started with his training. "Okay! Looks like things will be more interesting for us from now on, eh…Kurama?" Naruto asked, and he quickly got his answer. "I don't doubt it."

Here is the profile of Naruto

Name: Naruto

Last Name: (None)

Birthday: October 1 (The day that is shown on his birth certificate. Minato modified this to avoid suspicion. In the orphanage, Naruto found out that his real birthday was October 10).

Weight: 26kg

Height: 127cm

Characteristics: Red spiky hair, red eyes with slit pupils, whisker marks, enlarged fangs, slightly toned body due training

Skills: High knowledge in Kenjutsu combined with the style Bōnkurasshā; great skills in Futon and Raiton techniques; average knowledge of Katon techniques; low in Doton techniques; null knowledge in Suiton techniques. He can use his Rinnegan and use gravity to repel and attract objects. Also, he can summon any animal by only imagining them; he can also extract souls of his opponents and read their minds when he does this, or just read their minds if his target is not for killing. Specialty in stealth and infiltration techniques. Low in Genjutsu and sensor type skills in development.

Hobbies: Train or kill people (if he is on a mission). 

Chapter Text

Person talking, "Hello everyone."

Person thinking, "Damn you all!"

Demon talking, "I will eat you."

Demon thinking, "This tastes worse than shit."

Disclaimer: I do not own Naruto, Masashi Kishimoto does.

Chapter 3

Two Weeks Later - Hospital 11:30 am

Sasuke Uchiha had woken up a few minutes ago, just to hear the conversation of some nurses that he was the only one survivor of the Uchiha clan.

At that moment, he remembered everything that had happened, how the man killed his father and everything that he had said, and what he could remember better was. "You will never be able to defeat me, not as you are now." "Fill your heart with hate." "Never trust anyone." "Don't show mercy." "We will meet again." He thought about this for a few moments before reviving the images of that man killing his father and the rest of his clan.

He recalled how that guy looked, but he could only remember a few strands of red hair. Yes, since that day, Uchiha Sasuke began to hate redheads. He would have to get stronger. He had to start taking some serious training from now on, Sasuke couldn't waste any more time.

Just then he heard the door opening slowly; he asked himself if they were his annoying fans, perhaps they had already heard that he was here, and they came to bother him. When the door opened completely, Sasuke could see his brother entering the room.

He realized that at first he showed happiness in his eyes, but after a few seconds, they changed to sadness. Itachi proceeded to talk, "How are you, Otouto?" He was genuinely concerned about his brother.

They had told him how they had found him, besides the mental state in which he was in—that was the reason he took so long to get back to consciousness. At first, he was furious at what they did to his precious brother, but then he had been thankful because they left him alive.

Itachi knew that he should have been the one responsible for the massacre, but at the end, they decided to keep him in the village and allow someone else to do it.

Now he had more reasons to protect the village. Itachi didn't need to dirty his hands, and besides that, his brother was still alive. Therefore, he would be able to educate him, and, probably, Sasuke would not be like the rest of his cursed clan.

Sasuke ignored the question and spoke with a somewhat dull voice, "Itachi, I want you to train me seriously after leaving this place. I can't lose my time anymore. What happened hours ago was a wake-up call for me, that guy made me look pathetic. I couldn't see how he looked like; I could only see his red hair. All I know is that he said that he would return when I was ready. So please, train me. If that guy comes back and sees that I'm still weak, he wouldn't hesitate to kill me. I saw what he did to our clan; he didn't even try hard, and he annihilated one of the greatest clans in the Elemental Nations. Maybe if you had been there, you could have caught that guy." Sasuke ended, squeezing as hard as his little fists allowed him, and Itachi could see that Sasuke had a pleading look on his face.

That didn't help Itachi to stop feeling sorry for his brother; he couldn't tell him that if he had been there, he would have been the one who would have killed everyone and not that mysterious man.

To be honest, he didn't know who the assassin was, not even ANBU handled that information, it was an exclusive matter of the Hokage, and he couldn't be asking for the identity of the man, even if he wanted to.

Itachi looked at Sasuke for a few more seconds and then nodded. "Sure, Otouto. But now you have to rest. When you leave, we'll start your training." Sasuke nodded and laid back on the bed, and after a while, Itachi left the room

After Itachi had left the room, Sasuke frowned, now he had to dedicate himself to his training and stop wasting time with Menma and his nonsense. Maybe he would also start his training, but in any case, Uchiha Sasuke would not be the same kid as before.

With Naruto

Naruto was calmly walking through the streets of the village; it seemed that the news that he had returned had spread like the plague because the insults and the hateful glares had returned.

He didn't care what these bastards thought, as long as they didn't dare to do anything stupid, like getting in his way. He would not mind, but there were always stupid people calling for a beating. And it seemed that some of them were begging for one right now since four men appeared out of the crowd and had surrounded him while they stared at him with pure contempt.

Naruto didn't even look up and coldly spoke, "I'll only say this once, you have ten seconds to get out of my way, or you'll be sorry."

One of the guys who were in front of him, replied, "Ha! Did you hear that? It seems that the demon has become braver; I think we have to remind him his place." After that, many people began to cheer him and tell him to strike first.

Naruto was listening to all this and couldn't help shaking his head. "Well, I gave them a chance; I have no other option but to kick their miserable asses." Naruto thought.

Kurama growled in approval and replied, "Yes, teach these bastards what would happen if they mess with us, don't leave any of these idiots unharmed."

Naruto smiled as he stood in the stance of his original Taijutsu, with his left leg forward and the other one backward. He stretched his left arm completely, and the right one at the half.

The man in front of him was about to laugh and ask what the hell he wanted to do, but Naruto spoke first, "Your time is over." When he said that, he gave a powerful kick with his right foot to the man's knee, the result was a broken knee and a man screaming in pain.

However, Naruto didn't stop there; he quickly grabbed the man's right arm, and he bent it until it made a sickening snap, saying that he had successfully broken the bone. He wanted to do something else but realized that the man had already fainted, so much pain made his body collapse, and, therefore, go to the world of unconsciousness.

He was about to attack the others, but he saw that two of them began to run, and only one of them stood there. It seemed that he still had a bit of courage, and Naruto would gladly take it away from him.

He approached the man and jumped into the air, dropping his left foot right on the man's left shoulder, effectively dislocating it.

He was about to continue, but right then an ANBU appeared in front of him and spoke with a feminine voice, "That's enough, Naruto. You've had enough fun with these bastards. Leave them and don't waste more time with these idiots." She had a rabbit-shaped mask and Naruto could see that she had purple hair.

This woman was Yugao Uzuki, she was one of the few people in the village who didn't see Naruto as the incarnation of the demon, and she didn't like the treatment that he was receiving. But she couldn't let him kill some civilians, although she knew that they deserved it.

Naruto looked at the ANBU for a few more seconds; he couldn't detect any hostility in her words. It seemed that she was just doing her job.

Naruto shrugged and replied, "Sorry, Usagi-san (Rabbit). I just wanted to make a point clear, and that point was what would happen to any of these poor bastards." He looked at the multitude and then to the fallen guys, while he continued, "If they dared to mess with me again. As you can see, I like to keep my physical integrity, and I also like to kick some asses. But hey, if they don't get in my way, then we could save the latter and no one would get hurt. Now if you'll excuse me, I will continue with my little tour. Take care of these bastards, I'm leaving." And with that said, he made his way through the mass of people who looked at him with fear.

Yugao sighed and said to the crowd, "All right all of you. Continue with whatever you have to do." And instantly they dispersed and returned to their previous activities.

Yugao then turned around and looked at the two men who were on the ground and commanded, "Inu (Dog), Saru (Monkey)." Just at that moment, two ANBU appeared, one had a dog-shaped mask and the other one a monkey-shaped mask.

"Hai, taicho!" Both said. Yugao looked at them and stated, "Grab these guys and then take them to the hospital. We don't want them to die in the middle of the street on our shift, right? I'll report this to Hokage-sama." And then she disappeared in a puff of smoke.

Hokage Tower - Minutes Later

Yugao had reached the Hokage tower a few minutes ago, and she had exactly reported what happened with Naruto and those men.

Minato carefully listened and then nodded. "Very good, Usagi. You can leave, thanks for telling me this." Yugao nodded and disappeared in a puff of smoke.

After Yugao was gone, Minato let out a big sigh and thought, "I hope it wasn't a bad idea to send him to the academy. I don't believe he'll be so stupid as to attack some kids, but this was the only thing that came to me to keep an eye on him. That demon is very elusive, and besides that, he knows how to hide his presence." Minato left his thoughts for later as he looked at his biggest enemy right in front of him..., the paperwork.

With Menma – Moments earlier

Menma was calmly eating ramen at his favorite place called Ichiraku. The place seemed to have improved since he and his father decided to eat some occasional bowls here; he didn't know the reason for it, but he didn't care.

Right now, he was with Shikamaru and Chouji eating until they heard screams in the street. Menma and Shikamaru saw that Chouji went outside to see what was going on, both shook their heads, but they decided to follow him.

There they saw something shocking. A boy, no bigger than them, had brutally beaten two men before leaving the place as if nothing had ever happened. After a few moments, they heard a few whispers that sounded like, "Demon" and "Kill…all." They couldn't understand very well since they were talking in whispers and words became mixed, but then an ANBU dispersed the multitude of people, and after a while, only Menma and the other two stood in the street.

They looked at each other and then they headed to the park. When they arrived, Chouji was the first one to talk.

"Whoa...did you see that? That kid almost killed those men." Chouji stated, really surprised while he ate some crisps, Shikamaru only said. "How troublesome." Then they remained silent.

After a few minutes, Menma spoke, "But, how did he learn to do all that? My Oto-san has told me that he is an orphan who lives in the red light district of the village. Besides that, most of the village hate him, so I don't think that anyone could have taught him something, but what if he is a..." But he stopped. "No, I don't think so; my Oto-san would already know it. It doesn't matter; I'll find that boy, and I'll demand him to tell me how he learned all that." Menma stated with confidence.

Chouji looked at him as if he were crazy and Shikamaru was the one who spoke next, "That would be troublesome, Menma. You saw what he did to those guys, don't you? I don't think he would care that you are the son of the Hokage. He said he would do the same to anyone who stood in his way. That would be troublesome for you, and maybe he would kill you."

Shikamaru had always been the voice of reason among them, but Menma didn't care about that and replied, "It doesn't matter, if he tries to do something to me, my Oto-san will send him to a cell. Kakashi-nii will be with me, with him nothing can happen to me. I'll see you tomorrow at the Academy. Bye, guys." Menma said as he left the park.

Chouji and Shikamaru sighed and then Chouji asked, "He's going to die, right?" Shikamaru sighed and replied, "Troublesome."

With Naruto

Naruto currently was in the Forty-Fourth Training Ground also known as the Forest of Death. He had discovered this area by accident, and after a few days, it had become his favorite training ground, though he knew that the Chunin exams took place here.

Working for Root taught him the important points of the village, but he never expected that this field could be like this: giant bugs; man-eating plants; areas of quicksand; and more dangerous elements were in this place, which was perfect for his training.

Presently, he was trying to improve his gravity element. He had discovered that his element allowed him to float for a few seconds, but the usage of chakra was massive. He had to control his element first, and then the chakra consumption would be less, and perhaps, he would be one step closer to master the abilities of his Tendō (Deva Path).

He stopped doing what he was doing when he got tired of the person who had been watching him from a while ago. Therefore, he decided to talk, "Come on; get out of there. I've been asking myself if you were waiting for me to drop my guard or something like that to attack me, but let me tell you something...I never drop my guard."

Just when he finished saying that, a bunch of snakes caught him and held him tightly, and among the bushes a woman showed up, with light brown pupil-less eyes and violet hair that was styled in a short, spiky, fanned-ponytail.

She wore a tan overcoat with a purple in-seam, which had a pocket on both sides, and complete with a fitted mesh body suit that stretched from her neck down to her thighs, she also wore a dark orange mini-skirt, as well as a forehead protector and shin guards.

The woman looked at Naruto and replied, "Oh really? And how do you explain that I've caught you so easily? I'm surprised that you could detect me, but my snakes are technically undetectable. Now tell me what you are doing here before turning you into food for my snakes." The strange woman looked at him with a sadistic smile on her face.

Naruto didn't flinch and calmly answered, "I'm here because this is the best place I've found to train without any interruptions, or so I thought. As for the other, I always knew that your silly snakes were approaching. And regarding your first question." Then the 'Naruto', who was being held by the snakes, disappeared in a puff of smoke.

The woman was surprised, but then she could feel the coldness of the metal on one of her thighs while she heard the voice of a boy. "You've never caught me, at the moment you sent your snakes; I replaced myself with a clone while I patiently waited for what you had to say. Now, can we talk like civilized people? My name is Naruto, what's yours?" Naruto politely asked, pulling his kunai away from her. He could be a bastard most of the time, but in front of a beautiful woman, he always kept his sanity, as long they didn't attempt to kill him.

Even though this woman had attacked him, he didn't feel bad intentions from her, so he decided to let that go overlooked.

As for Anko, she was still surprised, this brat, of not more than ten years old, had caught her with her guard off. Besides that, he had detected her snakes and herself from the beginning! And it was supposed that the stealth was her specialty.

Now she was more curious than before to know more about this boy; she didn't know him personally, but she had seen and heard how the village treated him due to his state as a Jinchūriki.

She had been through something similar like this before when her former sensei had put the Cursed Mark on her body and betrayed the village. Since then, she had been known as 'The Snake Whore'... Bastards.

She pulled those thoughts away and answered, "My name is Anko... Anko Mitarashi, but don't think that you are the big thing just for catching me with my guard off; I just wanted to test your skills, haha." Anko finished with a rather nervous laugh.

Naruto rolled his eyes and replied, "Yeah sure. Whatever you say, miss. Could you now get back to doing whatever you were doing before interrupting my training? And can you leave me here alone?" Naruto finished crossing his arms.

Anko took advantage of this to make a joke and spoke sensually, "What? Do you not want some female company? Maybe I could give you a little kiss." Anko winked at Naruto, who smiled and chuckled at this.

Maybe she thought that he would be ashamed of her words, but he had been trained to resist the Kunoichi's seduction techniques. Thanks to Danzō and Kurama, something as simple as that would not be enough.

Naruto shook his head, "Well, I'll save that kiss for the future, even though I find you very attractive I'm still too young for that stuff. Now I've lost a lot of time, and it's time to return to my apartment. I'll see you later, Anko-san." Then he disappeared in a fire Shunshin.

Anko smiled and then thought, "Naruto, eh? A fascinating boy. Maybe, when you're a little bigger, you can have some quality time with your dear Anko-chan." After that, Anko left the area.

Konohagakure no Sato – Ninja Academy - Two Weeks Later

It had already passed the month that the Hokage gave Naruto to prepare himself to attend the Ninja Academy. To be honest, he just wanted to defect the village right now, but he couldn't do that yet. He still needed to do many things in this place, and among them was how to recover Kurama's power.

It wouldn't be easy, but he trusted that someday he would know how to.

Naruto at this moment was listening to the class teacher, Iruka. He was saying things about how he had to behave and stupid things that he didn't care about, Naruto just wanted to get out of there.

A few seconds later, he told Naruto to follow him because he was going to introduce him to his new classmates.

Naruto sighed at this, coexisting with immature kids would be the most annoying thing that could have happened to him, or that's what he thought until Iruka opened the classroom door and he saw two children who may kill his boredom. He couldn't help but mentally smirk at this.

Classroom - Moments Before

Menma was sitting next to Kiba, Shikamaru, and Chouji. Since the massacre of the Uchiha clan, Sasuke was no longer the same as before. He barely spoke to anyone and also ignored everyone, and when lessons ended, nobody saw him until the next day.

He sighed when Chouji asked, "So, Menma. Did you have any luck finding that boy? You had said that you would search for him, and when you found him, you would demand him to tell you how he learned all that. And as I can see that you are still in one piece, I think that I already know the answer."

Menma growled and answered, "Just so you know. Yes, I did search for him, but after that incident, I didn't see him anywhere, not even with the help of Kakashi-nii. He says that that boy is very elusive." Menma ended, just as the door opened and Iruka entered the classroom along with the boy that they had been talking about moments ago.

Shikamaru was the one who spoke now, "How troublesome."

With Naruto and Iruka - Now

Iruka cleared his throat to get everyone's attention and announced, "Kids, listen to me. From today, we will have a new student with us. He was on a trip for a few years, and he returned to the village a few weeks ago, that's the reason he didn't join the Academy with you, kids." He paused and then continued, "So, can you introduce yourself to the class?" Iruka asked, wanting Naruto to finish his words.

He waited a moment, and since he saw that Naruto stood completely still, he insisted, "Come on. Don't be shy and tell everyone who you are."

Naruto stared at him for a few seconds and then calmly stated, "For what? I'm sure that their bastard parents have already spoken to them about me, but okay. My name is Naruto, known as the 'Demon brat'; it's my displeasure to meet you, fucking idiots."

Iruka was about to reprimand him, but someone else did it. "Shut up, fucking dobe! Who the hell do you think you are?! Show respect, damn demon!" Yes... Uchiha Sasuke was furious.

He was thinking about what that man had told him when Iruka opened the door, and when he saw the boy's hair color, he just lost it. He asked to himself who could have that hair color besides that murderer and this boy, it wasn't a very typical color in Konoha.

But then what he had said at the end was the straw that broke the camel's back, that they were a bother for him? Yeah, right. He was the demon; his mere presence was despicable.

His father had talked about him a lot, and he always blamed him for the Uchiha clan's current condition. He said that Naruto was the Kyūbi's incarnation, and he trusted his father since he had never lied to him.

He was about to add something else when Iruka shouted, "Enough, Sasuke! You too, Naruto. No one will fight here or elsewhere, don't make me repeat it or I'll give you a punishment." Naruto dismissed the threat by moving his hands and then proceeded to sit down in one of the empty seats, next to a blonde haired girl with blue eyes who was looking at him with interest.

After a while, she smiled and waved with her fingers as she spoke, "Hello, my name is Ino."

Naruto looked at her and replied, "I think you know mine. Regardless, mine is Naruto, nice to meet you."

Ino smiled amusedly, "I thought it was a 'displeasure.'"

Naruto shook his head, smiling and answered, "You know, I only said that because I could perceive two strong smells of idiots in this place, and I have a great displeasure for that peculiar smell." Naruto stated, looking at Sasuke and Menma, who looked at him at that very moment.

Naruto smiled and waved with his middle finger to each of them. They both glared at Naruto, who cavalierly ignored them.

Then he put his attention on Ino, who was still looking at him amusingly. "You are amusing. But, why do you dislike the son of the Hokage and Sasuke-kun?" Ino asked.

Naruto didn't see anything wrong with that question, so he answered, "Well, you know, I have a skill that makes me feel and identify the arrogant bastards. And let me tell that you that my senses tell me that they are on the cusp of arrogance." Ino was surprised at what he said, not for having a 'skill', but due to the way he spoke, it was somewhat eloquent but sometimes sarcastic.

He was someone very mature for someone of his age; maybe the way in which the other villagers talked to him forced him to be like that.

He was about to continue his little conversation until Iruka spoke, "Very well class, that's enough. Open your books and we'll proceed with the class. Today we'll talk about the Third Shinobi World War and the great hero of this conflict." After saying that, Menma gave fast claps and stated that everyone would be learning more about how cool his father was.

Naruto rolled his eyes and said, "*Cough* bastard *cough* baby *cough*." After saying that, the whole class burst into laughter, and Menma glared at him.

Iruka cleared his throat and called everyone's attention again. "Naruto that was your last joke, one more time and you will leave the class..."

Naruto replied sneering, "Oh no! That would be terrible! If you do that, then I will miss this great class and in the future, I would lose the ability to kill my enemies of boredom with these stupid stories."

Most of the class let out a "Uuuuuuhhh." Iruka meanwhile was boiling inside; maybe Naruto knew that he couldn't kick him out of the classroom until the classes ended. It was an order from the Hokage; he wasn't sure why, but he clearly said that he should remain in the classroom until the departure time.

Iruka sighed in defeat and continued with his class while Naruto had a triumphant smile on his face.

Naruto turned around and saw that Ino was looking at him with a hint of admiration in her eyes, so he asked, "What's wrong?"

After a few seconds, Ino laughed and answered, "Nothing, it's just that Iruka-sensei had never lost a fight of words, and you annihilated him. You should teach me how to do that after class."

Naruto raised an eyebrow at this; this girl was quite coquettish for someone of her age, and he liked it. Naruto then sat back and responded, "I'm sorry, but right now, that isn't possible. Maybe another day. I'll let you know when I can. You see, dealing with lots of angry villagers is something tiring, and I don't think that someone as cute as you can endure the angry stares for a long time."

Ino blushed a little at the word 'cute'. However, she frowned and replied softly, "The villagers are stupid, my father told me about the burden you have. He says that you're not the demon and that the villagers can't understand that because they've lost many of their loved ones in that tragedy. There are other clans don't believe that you're the demon, like the Nara, Akimichi, and Yamanaka. Maybe there are more, but I only know of those because my friends are of these clans and their parents usually go to my house. I know about this because I accidentally heard my father talking about this a while ago. You're not angry because I know this, are you?" Ino asked. To be honest, she didn't want to annoy Naruto.

She thought he was cute due to his whisker marks that made him look so adorable, like a kitten, or that's what she thought.

Meanwhile, Naruto was digesting all this information while thinking. "Hmm, it seems that not everyone in this village are bastards. Maybe I could leave some of them alive and Ino could be useful in the future."

Naruto then remembered Ino's question and answered, "Don't worry, Ino-chan; I would never be mad at you." Naruto ended with a charming smile on his face causing a big blush on the face of Ino. Naruto smiled at her reaction and then decided to get some sleep.

A little behind them, a pink haired girl was watching all this interaction and thought, "That Ino-pig, I'm sure that she only wants to make me believe that she is no longer interested in Sasuke-kun and then take him away from me. I can't allow it, and Naruto-baka insulted Sasuke-kun! How can she even talk with him?!" Yes, Sakura Haruno had her own fantasies.

Time Skip - Four Years Later

Konohagakure no Sato - Ninja Academy - Graduation Day

Naruto was quietly sitting in his respective place, waiting for the arrival of the other students. He had grown up a lot in these four years; he now was 161 centimeters tall and only was 13 years old. He was someone quite high compared to his classmates.

He wore a black jacket with the kanji "Demon" written in red on both sleeves and the face of a fox on its back; black ANBU pants; and he tied his Katana around his waist.

He recalled everything that had happened in these four years since that day when he had entered the academy for the first time.

He had trained almost until breaking his back. He had also allowed Ino to train with him from time to time. He had met with Anko a couple of times; he had talked about some things with her and discovered that she also had resentment toward the villagers.

Then he met a girl named Sakura. The only thing he could think of when he heard her squealing for the first time was to cut her throat; she was like a fucking banshee, screaming things about the "True Love" and stuff like that. He thought that attitude was pathetic in a Kunoichi.

He had learned some interesting things; it seemed that Sasuke took his threat seriously. Hehe, the poor bastard had turned into a fucking asocial. He had learned that he and his 'dear Otouto' had been best friends, but now they didn't even speak to each other.

The only thing for him was to train with his brother, which he discovered when he spied on them to gather some information about them. He needed to know the fighting style of the Uchiha clan, and spying on them was something enriching.

He had also noticed that the aggressions against him decreased drastically after that little show he had with those two poor 'bastards' years ago. His 'daddy' had also doubled his eye on him, and it was becoming more and more difficult for him to escape from those ANBU bastards.

He didn't hear anything about Danzō for a long time; it seemed that Danzō locked himself in his base and started complaining about losing his little weapon.

He also remembered the day when his idiot brother demanded him to tell him where he learned his moves. Too bad for him because he decided to go alone to say such stupidity. He ended up in the middle of the Forest of Death and after two days his daddy had found him there, hehe.

After all that, nothing exciting had happened, just going to those stupid classes. He couldn't use clones because it appeared that his father was aware of that ability from his, and Iruka always took care of throwing something at him to make sure that he wasn't a clone.

He also met a boy named Aburame Shino. Shino sat him well; he wasn't like the rest of the brats, he was intelligent and objective, and he would say things bluntly and wasted no time explaining things. Naruto thought that he would become a true Shinobi.

Naruto was taken out from his musings when someone hit his table sharply, he looked up and saw someone who seemed to cry out for another walk in the Forest of Death, it was Menma, and he appeared to be irritated.

They both stared at each other, and it seemed that neither of them would give in until Menma looked away and spoke. "Listen very well, dobe. My father is coming today to watch the exams, and you will behave. Try not to embarrass this class."

Naruto snorted and replied sarcastically, "Whatever you say, Hime-sama." Naruto smiled at the reaction of his brother, given the fact that he pulled his hairs and then he sat down in his place.

He heard an amused laugh next to him. He turned his head and saw Ino; he hadn't noticed at what moment she arrived. Moreover, he didn't even notice when everyone entered the class. Wow, he really was deep in thoughts.

Then he paid attention to the girl next to him. "Oh, I must be dead because I'm seeing angels." Naruto flirted; he had to admit that she had become very pretty in these four years. Now she had longer hair tied in a ponytail with a purple colored dress, and bandages on her legs.

He had asked her the reason for that, and she replied that her father didn't want her giving shows to the people of the Academy.

Naruto had laughed the first time, but now he saw the point of it. That mutt named Kiba drooled all the time over every girl he saw passing by, and he didn't like such an attitude. Shinobi shouldn't be drooling over every woman they saw, Kiba would die faster than the blink of an eye if he continued with that approach.

He realized that Ino had enormously blushed as she tried to say something. Hehe, he loved doing that. However, all fun ended when the drama queen entered the room followed by his fans and that girl named Sakura, screaming even louder than before. Damn it, Naruto thought that maybe she had a Kekkei Genkai (Bloodline) from hell.

Naruto had already endured her for four years, and now he was more than tired. He looked at Sakura, who was fawning and almost kissing Sasuke's feet.

He shook his head, opened his kunai holder and pulled a kunai out. He threw it directly at her. Nonetheless, he didn't have the intention of killing her, just get her attention, and he had succeeded since he realized that she was watching him now with fear in her eyes while the others believed that he had finally decided to kill the 'banshee.'

Naruto stood up from his seat and walked toward her; he realized that she started to go backward as she stumbled on the stairs of the class.

Naruto approached her and bent down to look at her directly in her eyes, and then he decided to speak. "You know, I should kill you right now," Naruto stated grimly, getting Sakura's eyes to open in shock while turning pale.

She wanted to say something, but Naruto continued speaking, "And save yourself the suffering of being caught on a mission and being used as a sexual object by a band of mercenaries or be the slave of some sickening merchant. With this pathetic fangirl attitude of yours, all you will get will be that, and also the eventual death of your whole team because they will have twice the work. The completion of the mission and of protecting you. You're about to be a Kunoichi, and you continue drooling over the drama queen. God dammit! Keep that attitude if you still want after all I said, but at least, do a favor to humanity and stop screaming like a fucking banshee!" He shouted the last words, after that he proceeded to sit in his seat.

He realized that the whole class looked at him with astonishment, and he roared, "What the fuck are you looking at, you fucking idiots?! Do you want to die instead of her?! I'm not in the mood right now, my fucking ears hurts." Naruto leaked a little of his killing intent to back up his words.

Immediately everyone stopped looking at him, and just then the door opened, showing a euphoric Iruka.

The first thing Iruka noticed was that Sakura was lying on the floor, and it seemed that she had seen a ghost. He also realized that the class was quieter than normal, perhaps because today was graduation day? Yes, maybe.

Then he ordered everyone to return to their seats, and he proceeded to speak, "Hi everyone, I want to say that I am proud of each of you-" But he was interrupted by a voice that he began to hate a long time ago. "*Cough* Proud of my balls *cough*." Yes, Naruto, not even on the last day in the academy, would cease to interrupt him.

Iruka looked at him with a popping vein on his forehead, and then he continued, "Yeah, proud of most of you..., and I'm very happy that you will now become part of this great tree which makes the village. I'm sure you all will defend and protect this great tree with all your strength, and to top it off, the man who keeps this great tree will honor us with his presence to watch your exams. Please, Hokage-sama. If you would be so kind as to come in."

Just then, the "almighty" Kiiroi Senko (The Yellow Flash) entered the room. Instantly, all the students stood up and greeted the Hokage. Well, all but one; it wasn't his fault that he was already sleeping.

Iruka noticed this and threw an eraser at his head as he shouted. "Naruto! Show your respect to Hokage-sama! Did you not realize that he entered the room?!"

Naruto slowly raised his head while drool came out from the corner of his lips, "Hokaque?" He had already noticed that idiot's presence from the moment he walked into the building. The arrogant bastard didn't even bother to hide his presence; he wanted everyone to be aware of his great power.

Iruka shouted again, "Ho-ka-ge! Could stop behaving like a stupid person, at least, this day? Today is your graduation! You should worry more about your career!" Then he saw that Naruto began to scratch his head and laugh like an idiot. "Oh! Sorry, Iruka-sensei, you know how I am, I get bored quickly when 'nothing' interesting happens, you see, you see." Naruto laughed as if he felt guilty.

Iruka sighed and apologized to the Hokage, who just shook his head and said that it was all right, but he was thinking differently. "Damn demon! If you keep this attitude, I'll show you how interesting I can be," Minato furiously thought. After that, he told Iruka to proceed with the exams while he took a seat on one of the observation tables.

The first test was to make a Kawarimi no Jutsu while Iruka threw at them some weapons of practice. Naruto shook his head at this; they should, at least, use real weapons, and if the person couldn't use the jutsu properly, then they should let them suffer the consequences for not training properly.

The test was easy as everyone performed the jutsu without issues.

After that, another stupid test came, more than the first one. They had to make a few simple Bunshin no Jutsu. Here his brother had some problems, and he only managed to make two clones when the others managed to do more than four. Vast reserves of chakra and pitiful control of them, Naruto thought.

Afterward, they did the Henge no Jutsu. At this point, Naruto thought that they were just forming cannon fodder, with these techniques, most of these guys would die in their first real mission. Again, all of them performed this test without problems.

Iruka smiled at his students, and then he looked at the Hokage, who nodded to his unspoken question. Hence, Iruka proceeded to speak, "Very well class, there's still two tests left. If everyone were as kind as to go outside, I would be grateful." Everyone nodded and walked to the training field.

Once everyone was there, Iruka started to explain this test. "Okay, this test consists of throwing kunai and shuriken to these moving targets. You will have ten shots with kunai and another ten with the shuriken. Hitting each target will give you 10 points, and hitting them all without missing will give a total score of 150. It's the same with the shuriken throwing, but if you can hit every shot; you will get a total score of 400. Let me tell you this is something that only a few people have managed to do, Hokage-sama is one of them." Iruka said.

Minato nodded and approached to give everyone their shuriken and kunai; he stopped at his son and wished him good luck. Then he continued with his delivery until he reached Naruto, who had a bored expression on his face.

Naruto looked at him and whispered so that only Minato could hear him, "You know that I don't have to do this, just give me the headband so I can leave this place."

Minato shook his head and replied, "I told you that you would do this. I asked you that day if you objected to my decision, and you replied no, or do you now have a problem?" Minato narrowed his eyes.

Naruto sighed and grabbed the weapons and walked away to see the students performing the test.

Minato also moved away to watch the test. The first to go was Chouji; of the ten attempts with kunai, he hit six and five with the shuriken, which gave him a score of 110 points.

Then Shikamaru gave a step forward with a tired expression on his face. Of the ten attempts with kunai, he hit five and five with the shuriken, which gave him a score of 100, just enough to pass the test, putting more effort was very troublesome for him.

Then it was Ino's turn; she gave seven hits with kunai and six with shuriken, giving her a score of 130.

After that, Naruto closed his eyes, waiting for his turn. He didn't care about the others; he just wanted to leave this place. He opened his eyes when he heard too much noise from people wishing luck to his brother, so he decided to pay attention.

He made nine hits with his kunai and nine with the shuriken, giving him a score of 180. Menma nodded happily with his performance, and his father had a look of pride on his face. Subsequently, Menma returned to his place.

Naruto realized that Sasuke and he were the only ones left. They called Sasuke first, and he surprised the whole class as he had managed to make ten hits with the kunai and nine with the shuriken, achieving a score of 240, very above the others. Sasuke smiled with arrogance, and Iruka and the Hokage congratulated him.

Then it was Naruto's turn; he wandered to the circuit. "Can I do this with just a kunai and a shuriken? I just want to leave this place once and for all." Naruto asked tiredly.

Iruka looked at him as if he were crazy and replied, "Well...Yes, you can, but that will just give you a lower score."

Naruto looked at him and shrugged. "Don't worry about it." Then he looked at the circuit and saw that some manikins were moving from left to right and others from right to left.

The others curiously looked at him at because he had been quiet, doing nothing.

Naruto nodded after understanding the sequence and grabbed a kunai and a shuriken. He put them together as he charged Raiton chakra into his weapons before throwing them sharply, hitting each and every one of the targets.

Then he turned around just to see their shocked expressions. "Nobody said anything about not being able to add chakra to the weapons. Now, if we've finished this foolish test, can we please end this nonsense?" He asked, growing impatient.

Iruka, who was still surprised, shook his head and stated, "Y-Yes follow me. Here will be the last test. We'll have some fights, and we'll choose the winner as the Rookie of the Year." After saying that, Menma and Sasuke looked at each other, and then they looked at Naruto, who was cavalierly ignoring them.

Both of them growled before walking to where they would perform the last test.

When they arrived, Iruka spoke again, "This test consists of combats of one against one. We'll divide it into two categories, men, and women. If everything is clear, we'll start with the last test. The girls are going to do it first, now everyone, walk away." Everyone left the field to give rise to the combatants.

Naruto already knew who would win this, so he closed his eyes to get some rest. After about 30 minutes, he heard Iruka speaking again while he gave the results, and Naruto wasn't surprised.

"First place and Female Rookie of the Year goes to Ino Yamanaka, followed by Hinata Hyūga and Sakura Haruno. Please, congratulate your classmates." Immediately, everyone started to clap.

Naruto looked at Ino, who noticed the gaze he had on her. Ino saw a smile and a wink before seeing him lying down again.

Ino blushed slightly and thought while the men's tournament started, "When this is over, I will do it; I can't wait anymore."

As expected; Menma, Sasuke, and Naruto reached the finals easily. "Winner and finalist Uchiha Sasuke. Now please, Menma and Naruto, come forward to decide the other finalist of this tournament," Iruka announced calmly.

Both came forward. Naruto smiled maliciously in his head while his face was blank. On the other hand, Menma had a look of determination. Behind them, Minato was watching this with concern. "Damn demon, you'd better not do anything stupid, or you'll regret it for the rest of your life." Minato thought.

Then Iruka pronounced, "You know the rules, this continues until one gives up or is knocked out. It's forbidden to kill your opponent. If you both are ready... Start!"

They both remained quiet for a few moments until Menma stated, "Listen up, dobe. Today, I will show you the place where you belong. Do understand? You'll be begging for mercy in a few moments. Now get ready, because here I go." With that said, Menma went on the attack, throwing punches and kicks at Naruto, who was just dodging them.

He realized that his brother's attacks were neat; he was at Genin level, but Naruto was much more than that.

Menma continued his assault; he was becoming increasingly frustrated because he couldn't land a single hit on Naruto, who got tired of dodging, so he caught one of Menma's fists with his hands, holding it tightly.

Naruto then spoke, "Now it's my turn." He would not use his Taijutsu with this little bastard because he knew if Menma got hurt permanently, he would be in trouble. He just needed to use an 'improvised Taijutsu'. Therefore, he raised him in the air before crashing Menma to the ground with a strength that would knock out an average person.

Most of them were surprised, Naruto had never participated before in any combat in the Academy. Most of them believed that he was just a weakling but with attitude. But others knew exactly why—as Shikamaru and Chouji—and seeing how he defeated one of the best students in the academy, left them surprised. When they left their shock, they saw Menma bruised and unconscious on the ground, with Naruto right beside him.

Naruto looked at him and shook his head; he didn't even put much strength in that attack. He waited a few minutes until Iruka returned with Sasuke, who glared at him while Iruka spoke. "The winner and finalist, Naruto. Now we will have the last fight so we can choose the Rookie of the Year; the fight will be Naruto against Sasuke. You know the rules, they're the same as the other fights. If you both are ready, begin!" Sasuke didn't wait and quickly threw a few shuriken at Naruto, who moved aside to dodge them.

Sasuke quickly approached him and began using the Uchiha Taijutsu. Naruto didn't know if Sasuke was aware that his Taijutsu only worked with his Sharingan, every punch that he threw to him left big openings that he could take advantage of. But he still wanted to have fun with the little boy that he left alive in his massacre.

Sasuke realizing that his Taijutsu didn't work, he jumped away from him while he made some hand seals before shouting Katon: Hōsenka no Jutsu (Fire Release: Phoenix Sage Fire Technique)!" Then small balls of fire appeared, which approached to Naruto from all directions.

Naruto saw the attack coming and quickly left that area. Sasuke then saw his chance and made more hand seals and shouted another jutsu, "Katon: Gōkakyū no Jutsu (Fireball Jutsu)." A huge fireball headed to Naruto, who could do nothing to dodge it and received the full attack.

Most of the crowd had expressions of horror because they thought that Sasuke killed Naruto while Minato felt a stab in the heart. When the attack stopped, he sighed in relief as realized that Naruto wasn't there. Minato at no time noticed his own emotions.

Naruto then jumped from a tree, landing in front of Sasuke. "What did you try to do, Sasuke-chan?" Naruto lazily asked as he wiped one of his ears.

Sasuke growled with fury and shouted, "Damn you demon! I'll kill you, do you understand?! Take me seriously or you're going to pay it!"

Naruto stopped wiping his ears and replied, "Do you want me to take you seriously? Okay, try to survive this." Naruto made a Kage Bunshin, and both began to make hand seals at full speed.

The Naruto clone finished first with his hands seals and shouted, "Katon: Gōkakyū No Jutsu (Fire Release: Great Fireball Technique)," a fireball much smaller than Sasuke's headed to him and he just moved away a little from the impact zone.

He smirked when he thought that was all, but all that changed when the original Naruto spoke, "Futon: Dai Dageki (Wind Release: Big Blow)," then a big wind blast mixed with the fireball, increasing its size considerably.

Sasuke didn't have time to dodge the new size of the attack completely, and it burned most of his right leg in the process; the damage wasn't severe but enough to leave a mark on his leg.

Naruto smiled; he didn't charge much chakra in his attacks. He could have burned Sasuke entirely, but if he did that, he would have been in a serious problem right now.

Sasuke saw that smile and growled, "What's so funny, demon?! It was just a lucky break; don't think that it will happen again!" Sasuke stood up slowly from the ground while he started to feel the pain in his right leg.

Naruto shook his head at the arrogant attitude of Sasuke and then sighed. He was already bored of this; he just wanted to go to his house and get some rest.

He didn't want to keep playing with Sasuke. Hence, he caught the attention of Iruka and stated, "I surrender," which surprised everyone in the area.

Iruka asked if he was serious and Naruto answered, "Sure, I had enough fun with the Princess. Besides, I don't want a stupid title as the Rookie of the Year. Give it to the dummy; I don't want it. It'll only give me more problems." After that, he walked to his resting place, until he heard an annoying voice. "Cha! Sasuke-kun is the best! Naruto-baka surrendered because he realized that Sasuke would fight seriously." Then he heard other girls screaming things like that.

Naruto shook his head. Idiots, it seemed that they didn't understand that they would die or that something worse would happen to them in their missions.

He shrugged and kept going until he heard Sasuke shouting, "Damn demon! Stop trying to be cool! I'll show you that no one turns away and ignores me." After saying that, he ran towards Naruto to attack him. However, Iruka stopped him half way, "Stop it, Sasuke. You've already won; Naruto surrendered. You're now the Rookie of the Year. I won't tolerate unnecessary fights in the Academy, now get back to your place so I can give you your headbands." Sasuke growled again and then he went to his place.

Then Iruka cleared his throat and spoke, "Congratulations to all of you, from this day on you are Genin; you will be Shinobi of this village. You will take care of protecting it and its people. Be proud, not everyone can be a Shinobi, and you are one of those who have had the privilege. Now, step forward and Hokage-sama will give you your headbands."

After a few minutes, everyone had their headbands and Minato gave a speech about the Will of Fire and that crap that Naruto didn't desire to hear.

After that, Iruka spoke again. "All right, everyone. You will return in two days to know which team we'll assign you to and who will be your Jounin sensei. That would be all; now you can go outside with your parents." Iruka stated, and everyone started to leave.

Naruto walked to the exit and was about to cross it when he heard someone calling him softly. "Hey, Naruto-kun...over here." Naruto recognized Ino's voice; he shrugged and walked to where she was.

Naruto noticed that she was bowing her head, but then she raised it, and Naruto saw a slight blush on her cheeks. Naruto mentally smiled at this as he deduced the reason she had called him.

Ino opened her mouth and spoke. "Naruto-kun, do you think we'll be on the same team? I thought it would be great if you and I were on the same team. To be truthful, I would like that."

Naruto wanted to play a little bit with her and replied, "Oh? Why would you want to be on my team? You know, those things of being the companion of the demon wouldn't be good for you."

Ino opened her eyes and quickly answered, "I don't care about what the ignorant people think. You're not a demon to me! Y-You're..." And she stopped there.

Naruto spoke again and asked, "Am I 'what' Ino? An idio-" But before he could finish, Ino had jumped on top of him and started kissing him.

Naruto quickly returned the kiss, and after a few seconds, he pushed his tongue against Ino's lips, asking her permission to enter.

She gladly gave it and then they both fought with their tongues. Naruto won, and after a few seconds, the two separated with a spit trail.

Naruto saw that Ino still had a lost look on her face. Therefore, he spoke, "Well... if this is what I will get for being on your team, then I'll be praying to Kami to be there." Naruto then gave her a short kiss, which pulled Ino out of her frozen state.

Realizing what she did, Ino blushed. "I-I'm s-sorry. I d-didn't mean to do that, p-please forgive me for being such a rude person." She quickly said, bowing slightly.

Naruto chuckled and replied, "Don't worry about that, Ino-chan. Let me tell you that that kiss was quite pleasant. You have a talent for this; I'll be eagerly awaiting the next one. However, now I have to leave. Maybe you should do the same; your parents are probably waiting for you outside. See you the day of the team assignments. Goodbye."

Ino was about to say that he didn't have to leave, but she saw him disappearing with a lightning Shunshin. At first, she was surprised that he knew a jutsu like that, but then she thought that he was just too cool. Therefore, he would know how to do those things. Then she went with her parents and thought about the kiss she had with Naruto.

With Naruto

Naruto had arrived at his apartment after a few minutes; he thought that he would finally be free of that stupid Academy. He just had to go there in two days for the last time, and he would never step in that place again, or so he thought.

After taking a quick shower and eating something, Naruto decided to have a talk with his tenant.

"Kurama I want you to answer me something. Why the hell my hair is starting to have tufts of blonde color? You said that I suffered changes because my father sealed only a fraction of your power and your consciousness inside me. Could you tell me why this is happening?" Naruto curiously asked. He had to dye his hair from time to time to avoid suspicion; he couldn't allow his hair to turn blond, or everyone would notice whom he really was.

Kurama growled and replied, "That's because you've been in your dear Otouto's presence for a long time. It seems that the power that is within the brat is somehow affecting your seal, and that's why your features are returning to their original state. The longer you are close to him; the restoration process will increase its speed. I've noticed that I can't stop this, and eventually, you will have blond hair and blue eyes. Therefore, I recommend you to avoid that brat if you don't want that all our plans be affected just because your body suffered some changes. I'm sure that the stupid Yondaime will realize that you are his child once you experience all these changes; he thinks that I am you, as I told you. But if he sees that you are returning to your original state, he wouldn't hesitate 'to get you back' since I had felt on many occasions that he have feelings of attachment to you, like today, when that Uchiha brat tried to burn you. I could feel his anguish." Kurama ended.

Naruto thought about this for a moment and then replied, "As if I'm going to let that bastard get close to me in that way. If he comes to realize who I am, it will be too late. We won't be here when that happens." Naruto then cut the mental connection; he went to brush his teeth and then he go to sleep until the next day.

He had to rest; he had spent too much chakra this week trying to master his gravity element. Now he could float in the air without spending hardly any chakra. Nevertheless, when he attempted to move in the air, he quickly spent his chakra reserves, which was the reason he couldn't do much. He was just steps away from mastering his element; he was trying to find a way, and perhaps in the not too distant future, someone could help him with that.

Jōnin Room – The Next Day

Right now most of the village Jōnin were listening to the Hokage; he was talking about who were going to be the teachers of the new graduates of the Academy. He had already assigned the first teams.

Asuma then stepped forward and spoke, "Hokage-sama, if you would allow me. I would like to train the new Ino-Shika-Cho team, and take the heirs of those clans as my students."

Minato nodded and assigned them as Team 10; Kurenai then stepped forward and asked, "I would like to take Hinata Hyūga, Kiba Inuzuka, and Shino Aburame." Minato nodded again and assigned them as Team 8.

Minato then looked at Kakashi, who nodded and spoke, "I would like to take Menma Namikaze, Sasuke Uchiha, and Sakura Haruno as my students." At that moment, people started whispering about Kakashi's decision on taking a Genin team. One of them was the son of Hokage and the other one, one of the last Uchiha. They thought that his decision was strange because he had never approved any of his former students.

Minato ordered them to be silent, but then he nodded. "Leaving all that aside, there's only one more person left. You all know him, so...who want to be his Jōnin sensei?" Minato asked; the truth was that he hoped that no one spoke, because if he didn't have a teacher, Minato wouldn't have to assign him missions. Thus, Naruto wouldn't be able to get out of the village.

When he thought that nobody was going to speak, he heard people complaining because someone was pushing them. Minato then saw that Anko stepped beside the other Jōnin Sensei as she expressed. "I would like to train that brat; I've seen what he can do and let me tell you that he's excellent at stealth, and that's my specialty."

Minato looked at her for a few seconds, but then he thought that it would be a good idea. Perhaps the demon would get bored of her and then he would ask him for another sensei, something that he wouldn't agree. Yes… Everything would be okay, or that's what he thought.

"Okay," Minato replied. "Anko, you will be in charge of Naruto, you two will be a team." Minato ended causing several murmurs from the crowd because they had never before seen a team with two people only.

However, Minato continued, "However, you must get the remaining members on your team. You will be Team 13. Now all of you, dismiss." Everyone left the room with a Shunshin, except for Kakashi, who stayed there reading his famous orange book. Nonetheless, he closed it with a sigh and left the room walking.

Minato sweat dropped at the lazy attitude of his student, but then he also withdrew from the place to return to his home. Today he had the day off, so he decided to spend the day with his son.

Notes:

First, I'm sorry for not updating this yesterday. I had a lot of problems this week. I'm telling you that I'm not sure if I will update this the next Friday. I have exams at my college, so I need to study.

I don't need to explain why Naruto left the combat with Sasuke; you should know why.

Uh-oh, and Menma will be like the Naruto of the canon, I mean, a guy who fights for his friends and that crap.

I felt necessary the thing with Sakura. You all know how she was at the beginning of Naruto. So I'm trying to change her, I'm not bashing her. It's just that this is her attitude, and Naruto hates that kind of attitude.

Ino is not like her in my fic, since she had four years to realize how Naruto's attitude was, and she always heard that he hates the fangirls and the girls who don't take their training with seriousness. (That's why she trained with him sometimes).

I also need to say that Naruto has enormous chakra reserves thanks to his Rinnegan. I remember that I heard that Nagato had nine times the chakra of Naruto (canon) because of his Rinnegan. But if you add the Rinnegan plus the 5% of the Kyūbi's chakra to Naruto…that's a lot.

See you!

Chapter Text

Person talking - "Hello everyone."

Person thinking - "Damn you all!"

Demon talking - "I will eat you!"

Demon thinking - "This tastes worse than shit."

Disclaimer: I do not own Naruto, Masashi Kishimoto does.

Attention, this chapter has a lemon.

Chapter 4

Konohagakure no Sato - Next Day

Naruto had woken up a few moments ago; he just wanted to sleep peacefully until the day of the team's assignment, but not everything could go as one planned.

He had risen from his bed; he had wolfed down something before brushing his teeth. After that, he went outside and walked through the streets of the village.

Today he had to take that stupid ninja photo for his records.

Naruto continued walking, but with a grin on his face as he looked at the villagers. Now they could do nothing because he was a ninja, and if anyone dared to attack him, he could use force without consequences.

There were still a few hours left to take the photo, so he decided to walk a little more. He sought Ino for a few moments but with no result.

Naruto shrugged and decided to warm up a bit until he had to go to take that photo. He went to a training camp; it was a simple one since he wouldn't do anything flashy today.

He was about to train when he saw that people were occupying the place. Naruto concluded that there was nothing wrong with using the same training camp, so he made some clones and started fighting with them.

After a few moments, Naruto felt that two presences approached at him real quick, so he put himself on guard when they were already in front of him.

One of them shouted, "YOSH! LOOK, LEE-KUN! HERE WE HAVE SOMEONE WITH HIS FLAMES OF YOUTH BURNING TO THE LIMIT! I BELIEVE HE CAN BE A GREAT SPARRING PARTNER. WHY DON'T YOU CHALLENGE HIM TO A COMBAT?"

Naruto tried to say something, but the now identified as Lee exclaimed loudly, "YOSH! GAI-SENSEI, I WILL SHOW YOU THAT MY FLAMES OF YOUTH ARE ALSO BURNING TO THE LIMIT!" Then he looked at Naruto and shouted again, "PLEASE, TELL YOUR NAME, MY DEAR FRIEND. MY NAME IS LEE, NICE TO MEET YOU; PLEASE, ACCEPT MY CHALLENGE!"

Naruto noticed that these two guys were strangely alike; both of them had a green spandex; bowl-type haircut; and super bushy eyebrows.

Naruto was scared; he wanted to do something, but he didn't know what until Naruto heard a voice in his mind that yelled the best course of action, "Damn it, Naruto! Get us out of here before these guys make you say that crap too! Run, boy. Run!"

Naruto quickly got out of his daze. He was about to run until he heard a familiar voice. Hence, he sighed in relief. "Lee, Gai-sensei, could you stop scaring Naruto-kun like that? Not everyone is Neji and me who are used to your nonsense. By the way, hello, Naruto-kun. What are you doing here?" Asked a girl as she approached him.

She had brown eyes, long brown hair tied up in two buns, a pink blouse, and dark blue pants.

That girl was Tenten; Naruto had met her at the Academy when he was practicing with his Kenjutsu.

Tenten had seen him training and asked him if he could be her sparring partner. Naruto replied yes because it was strange for him to see girls who took their training as Kunoichi seriously, and Tenten cared a lot for it.

Right next to her was a white-skinned boy with dark brown hair. He had crossed arms and a rather arrogant attitude.

Naruto completely ignored the others and greeted his rescuer. Naruto hadn't talked much with her after she had graduated from the academy; maybe he could catch up with her now.

"Uh, hello, Tenten. Don't tell me that they’re your teammates. The truth is that I feel sorry for you; I don't think I would have endured too much time without killing myself or killing them, trust me." Naruto stated.

Tenten giggled, and she was about to add something, but Lee interrupted her, "SO YOU ARE NARUTO. YOOOOSH! NARUTO-KUN, TENTEN SPEAKS A LOT ABOUT YOU, AND SHE SAYS THAT YOU ARE THE ONLY PERSON WHO CAN FIGHT WITH HER IN A DUEL OF WEAPONS! THAT MAKES YOUR FLAMES OF YOUTH ASCEND EVEN MORE! COME ON, NARUTO-KUN, FIGHT ME!" Lee was now more determined to have a practice fight with Naruto.

Tenten shook her head and called Lee to scold him, "Lee, stop bothering Naruto-kun and..." but before she could finish, Naruto raised his hand to stop her.

Naruto stared at Lee for a few seconds and replied, "Okay, we'll have a fight. You put the rules, and I'll do my best to follow them."

Lee's eyes shined with excitement while Gai jumped in front of them. "YOOOSH! NOW ONE OF YOU IS GOING TO PROVE WHO THE WIELDER OF THE BRIGHTEST FLAMES OF YOUTH IS! The rules are simple Naruto-kun, THIS WILL BE A TRAINING COMBAT WITH TAIJUTSU ONLY. Tenten says that you are good in that too. So, LET'S DO IT!" Gai shouted.

Lee also shouted, "YOSH, GAI-SENSEI! I WILL SHOW YOU THAT MY FLAMES OF YOUTH ARE MORE INTENSE THAN HIS, AND IF I CAN'T DO IT, I WILL DO 500 LAPS AROUND THE VILLAGE WITH MY HANDS ONLY!"

Naruto sweat dropped as he wondered if these idiots were like this all the time.

Everyone moved away from the fighters, and Neji decided to speak. "That loser has no chance against Lee; his destiny is to be a loser. He should reject the challenge because losers will always be losers." Neji arrogantly stated while Tenten glared him.

"Shut up! You know nothing about him! He's quite strong even though no one has ever trained him seriously." Tenten replied angrily at Neji's comment, and he just chuckled again.

Meanwhile, Gai added, "Indeed. I can see that Naruto-kun has great physical and mental strength. He's almost as strong as Lee; this will be a hard test for both of them. I just hope that they don't overstep the rules." With that said, Gai shouted again, "YOSH! LEE-KUN, NARUTO-KUN! IF YOU BOTH ARE READY...START! "

Lee didn't wait anymore and jumped toward Naruto while shouting, "Konoha Senpuu (Leaf Whirlwind)!" Naruto saw the attack coming and blocked the kick with his forearm, but he got surprised when he felt the strength behind that blow.

Naruto jumped back and looked at Lee, who was smiling. "YOSH, NARUTO-KUN! THERE’S NO DOUBT THAT YOUR FLAMES OF YOUTH ARE BURNING!" Lee outrageously shouted while Naruto rubbed his arm and thought, "That kick hurt me, what the hell? How can he hit so hard? If I had been someone else, then I would have a broken arm." Now he would take this guy seriously. Lee certainly was someone excellent in Taijutsu.

Naruto took a breath and stood in the same stance he had used years ago against those bastards that tried to attack him. Lee and Gai raised an eyebrow at the stance that Naruto was taking. They did not know that style, so when Lee was about to ask about it, Naruto spoke. "Lee...You are someone strong in Taijutsu. Let me tell you that the kick you gave me hurt me, and that's a difficult accomplishment, so I give you my respect. Now I'll show you my original Taijutsu, the Bōnkurasshā (Bone Crusher)."

Lee didn't know that style at all, so he decided that he didn't want to find out how it would feel if one of his blows landed on his body. If it was like the name said, well, it wouldn't be good for him.

He then saw that Naruto ran toward him to attack him right on his knee. Lee went out of his way and mentally smiled. That was what he needed; he needed someone as good as him in Taijutsu so that he could learn faster in this way. Even if two people were better than him on his team, they never took him seriously. Gai-sensei for being his teacher and not wanting to hurt him, and Neji for being too arrogant, believing that he wouldn't worth his time.

Naruto continued with his attacks; he had to admit it, Lee indeed was splendid at Taijutsu. Lee was almost on par with him or was even better than him; Naruto thought that as Lee shouted again, "Konoha Daisenpū (Leaf Great Whirlwind)!" Naruto barely blocked those simultaneous kicks since Lee was getting increasingly difficult to match, so he decided to increase the level of the fight slightly.

He focused a small amount of his chakra to the bottom of his feet, moving even faster than before and giving Lee a kick in his face, which he couldn't block because he was surprised by Naruto's sudden increase of speed.

Lee smiled and spoke again, "Naruto-kun, you certainly are a worthy opponent. Therefore, I have to take this fight to another level." After saying that, Lee looked at his sensei, who gave him a thumb up.

Lee nodded and sat down on the ground as he pulled off his orange leg warmers along with some weights.

Naruto raised an eyebrow at this; he didn't believe that something like that would take this fight to another level. Thus, he just waited to see what Lee had in mind.

Lee then stood up again and spoke, "Done," and then he disappeared from his sight.

Naruto opened his eyes in surprise, not even he was that fast, without using chakra, of course. He calmed down and tried to feel Lee's chakra signature; it was quite difficult since he noticed that his chakra levels were very tiny, almost as if they hadn't developed, maybe this was the reason he used Taijutsu only.

Just then, Lee appeared behind him. He ducked and rolled to move away from Lee. If it hadn't been for his years of experience, then he would have taken a sharp hit in his neck.

Lee disappeared again, only to reappear in front of Naruto and throw a devastating blow to him. Naruto rolled on the ground before looking at Lee to say, "I must admit that you're superior to me in speed and Taijutsu. But, what do you think if we change the rules from now on?" Then he made five clones, who instantly rushed to attack Lee, who was now dodging the blows of the clones.

Then he saw that the original Naruto finished some hand seals and shouted, "Katon: Goukakyuu no Jutsu (Fire Style: Fireball Jutsu)!" Then an enormous ball of fire came out of Naruto's mouth, heading toward Lee, who at the last moment jumped out of the attack area.

He landed on the ground and looked at Naruto. "Naruto-kun I thought this would be a fight with Taijutsu only, why did you break the rules?" Lee asked.

Naruto shrugged and replied, "Well, I decided to take you seriously. I realized that Taijutsu wouldn't be effective against you, and we're ninjas, rules mean nothing to us when we fight. Besides, I neglected my Taijutsu, and now I'm paying for it. However, I have to thank you. Thanks to this battle, I realized that I must improve my Taijutsu and find a way to increase my speed. By the way, how did you get so fast?" Naruto asked. He knew the reason; he just wanted confirmation.

"Well, it's all thanks to Gai-sensei and his training, those weights that I dropped helped a lot to improve my speed. You're quite fast indeed, and that you do not use weights." Lee said, and Naruto nodded again. "Yes, but is not enough. Tell me, do you know another way to train without using weights? It's because I don't want to use heaters on my legs." Naruto requested.

He saw that Lee thought for a moment before shaking his head. "No, I'm sorry, Naruto-kun. I don't know another way to increase your speed without weights. Gai-sensei might know more about that," Lee replied, and just then, Gai appeared with a bright smile on his face as he looked at Naruto with a thumb up.

"I know another way to increase your speed, Naruto-kun! When you finish your fight, I'll tell you." With that said, he turned around to return with Tenten and Neji.

One of them still had the arrogant expression and the other one a surprised look—since she didn't know that Naruto could do all that.

After Gai had walked away, Lee and Naruto retook their fighting stances, and Naruto spoke, "Lee, attack me with your best shot, or I'll defeat you with my next technique." Lee processed those words. Therefore, he decided to use his trump card.

Lee untied the bandages on his arms as he looked at Naruto to say, "The lotus of Konoha blooms twice! Remember that for our next fight, Naruto-kun." Then he moved even faster than before, and before Naruto could react, he was already flying in the air, with Lee right behind him.

He asked himself what he had in mind until the bandages on his arms started to wrap him. Lee held him strongly and plummeted toward the ground while he rotated on his own axis at a ferocious speed, "Omote Renge (Primary Lotus)!" Lee shouted, sticking Naruto's head in the ground

Behind them, Tenten saw that with concern and shouted, "NARUTO-KUN!"

Gai, on the other hand, narrowed his eyes as he thought, "That boy is very skilled."

Meanwhile, Neji scoffed and stated, "Like I said, his fate already marked him as a loser, a loser will always be a lose-" But before he could finish, that 'Naruto' disappeared in a puff of smoke.

Moments before that, Lee had heard Tenten’s scream, and just then he thought that he had overstepped with Naruto as he saw that Naruto wasn’t moving at all.

He worried a lot; what would happen if he killed a fellow Konoha ninja just in combat training? What would people think of him?

But all the concern disappeared when saw Naruto disappearing in a puff of smoke as he felt a hand holding him firmly by his ankle. Then he heard a voice that stated, "It's over! Doton: Shinjūzanshu no jutsu (Earth Release: Double Suicide Decapitation Technique)." When he heard the name of the technique, Naruto drew him underground, leaving only his head visible, and Naruto just above him.

Lee sighed in defeat. "How?" he asked since he was sure that he grabbed Naruto with his Front Lotus.

Naruto smiled and replied, "Well, when you sent me flying, I quickly replaced myself with one of my clones that I hid among the trees. I always have hidden clones for difficult situations, but let me tell you that you caught me off guard. That last technique of yours is quite dangerous. I don't know what would have become of me if I didn't replace myself at that moment. However, I don't blame you. You did what you had to do; you're a great Shinobi, better than any of these pathetic kids who think they're ninjas only for having a headband." Lee nodded in appreciation because Naruto recognized him as a real ninja.

He was about to say something else when he saw Tenten running toward Naruto and hug him tightly, "Naruto-kun! Are you okay? You had me anxious over there; I thought I lost you." It seemed that she was unaware of her words, so Naruto decided to remind her. "Don't worry about my Tenten, but...Did you say that you thought that you lost me? Why, Tenten-chan?" Naruto whispered near her ear.

Tenten could feel her private parts getting wet as her face turned red. She pulled herself away from Naruto and replied, "N…no, I…I d-didn't want to lose my Kenjutsu’s partner. You know, there’s almost no p-people who are good at it in this village. D…Don’t get me wrong." Tenten was red, and she felt even wetter when she saw Naruto approaching at her with a seductive smile on his face.

She was about to jump on him, but Gai interrupted all of this as he called everyone's attention, "*Ahem* If you both have finished showing your GLORIOUS YOUTH! We could talk about this fight." He stopped and hit Lee—who had already come out of the ground with the help of Neji—on his face.

After that, Gai exclaimed, "LEE! I'VE TOLD YOU TO USE THIS TECHNIQUE WITH ONLY ONE CONDITION, AND I DON'T SEE THAT YOU'VE ACCOMPLISHED THAT CONDITION HERE!" Lee quickly apologized saying that the adrenaline of a fight against a great and serious opponent made him use the attack unconsciously.

Gai continued scolding him before turning around to see Naruto saying more things to a more than red Tenten, who couldn’t lift her head even if she could.

Gai cleared his throat, calling the attention of both of them again. "*Ahem* as for you Naruto-kun, let me tell you that...YOUR FLAMES OF YOUTH ARE SHINING LIKE NO OTHER! I didn't think you would have such a good Taijutsu. Besides that, you were able to use Jutsus of THREE elements. Even though I heard about your test in the academy, YOU ARE SOMEONE WHO REALLY LIVES HIS YOUTH TO THE LIMIT!" Gai shouted again.

Naruto scratched his head and replied, "Um well, let's just say that I was very lucky that an old man decided to train me and show me some things, like the chakra paper test and a few jutsu of my elements."

Gai then asked, "And who is this sensei of yours? I would like to know him." Naruto lowered his head as if he was sad. "Sorry, but that isn't possible… Unfortunately, he was killed a few years ago." Naruto responded as he lifted his head with a sad smile; he was a fantastic actor.

Gai quickly apologized saying that he didn't know it. Thus, Gai said nothing more about that; he changed the subject, "Okay, Naruto-kun. Regarding what you asked in the fight with Lee, let me tell you that I know another method that is more effective than Lee's. I didn't give it to Lee, because, unfortunately, he’s incapable of molding chakra since he has tiny chakra reserves." He made a short pause before continuing.

"Therefore, it wouldn't have worked for him. You must also have great chakra reserves if you want to do this training with no problems, and in this village, there's no one with more chakra than you have! Even I can't pass from a certain point, so I have to combine it with my weights. But that wouldn't be a problem for you. With nothing more to say, I'll show you this training method." After saying that, Gai pulled from his ninja bag two black wrist guards that had some seals around them out.

He handed them over to Naruto, who looked at them with confusion just like everyone else because those things did not seem to weigh more than 100 grams.

Gai when seeing their confusion decided to speak, "Those are different wrist guards. Each of them contains gravity seals and are the best of the best. They will help you to improve your speed and your strength. You just have to have them always with you, and adding chakra to them will increase your gravity. These wrist guards will always weigh around 100 grams, but they will increase your self-gravity on the earth.”

He paused so they can process his words before continuing. “The more chakra you add to them, the more gravity you will feel. These wrist guards can only increase and return to the normal gravity of Earth; they can't put you bellow it. Now listen very well; their use is straightforward. Just send chakra in them to increase your gravity. Once you get used to that gravity, the wrist guards will turn blue, and black again when you put more chakra to them. Preferably twice the amount than before. If you stop sending chakra to them and if you say 'Kai,' you will return to the normal gravity of Earth."

He paused and continued. "You will realize then that you increased your speed and strength. This training is very dangerous, because every time you want to increase your gravity, those seals will consume more and more chakra from you, and they may eventually kill you if you try to force them. That's the reason I didn't give them to any of my students because nobody has enough chakra to handle them. But you're different, Naruto-kun. As I said before; you have more chakra than anyone does in this village. Now put on those wrist guards and do what I said." Gai ended.

Everyone looked at him as Naruto placed on the wrist guards, only for them to shine in a dark red color.

All were stunned because the seals went out of the wrist guards and now they seemed to stay within Naruto's body.

Naruto looked at Gai and asked, "This is supposed to happen, isn't it?"

Gai rubbed his chin and replied, "No, this shouldn’t happen. It seems that your body has assimilated those seals and made them part of you. Okay, try to concentrate chakra around your body and tell us if you feel any difference." Naruto nodded, and he concentrated a lot of his chakra because he wasn't sure how much he should use.

He quickly felt being pulled toward the center of Earth, falling to the ground while he shouted, "Kai!" Then he tried it again, but this time with less chakra.

He rose up from the ground and looked at Gai, who was thumbing up and smiling widely. "YOSH! NARUTO-KUN, it seems that those seals still work. YOUR FLAMES OF YOUTH WILL NOW SHINE BRIGHTER THAN BEFORE!" Gai scandalously shouted while everyone shook their heads. Well, all except one who quickly wrote down all that his sensei had said.

Naruto thanked Gai, who was giving some tips to Lee. Meanwhile, Naruto was having a conversation with Kurama. "Hey, Kurama. Did you do something to the seals?" Naruto mentally asked.

Kurama growled in denial and replied, "No, I think that your body assimilated those seals due to your Uzumaki blood. As I told you before, your mother was one, and the Uzumaki's were experts in Fuinjutsu." Naruto nodded and decided it was time to leave.

He interrupted Lee and Gai, who were talking about the power of youth and that nonsense which was already starting to bother him, "Thank you for your help, Gai-sensei. And thank you for this fight, Lee. It will end up helping me a lot. But now I have to do something else. With nothing to say, goodbye to you Lee, Gai-sensei and you too, blind boy." Everyone laughed at the nickname of Neji, who was boiling with anger.

Naruto turned around and saw that Tenten blushed and looked away.

Naruto smiled and walked toward her. Then he took her by the chin, making her look in his eyes. "As for you...Tenten-chan," Naruto sensually spoke, wetting her intimate parts as he slowly approached his lips to hers, "He’s going to kiss me! Naruto-kun is going to kiss me!" She thought as she closed her eyes, happily awaiting the kiss.

Naruto smiled, and at the last second; he kissed her on her cheek before saying, "We'll see each other soon." After saying that he disappeared with a regular Shunshin.

Tenten opened her eyes and sighed with disappointment when she realized that Naruto didn't kiss her on the lips. But he still had kissed her, not the way she expected but it was still a kiss.

That made her smile as Gai shouted, "OHH! IT SEEMS THAT TENTEN HAS FOUND SOMEONE TO SHARE HER FLAMES OF YOUTH FOR ALL ETERNITY. EVERYBODY...LET'S GO AND CELEBRATE THIS BIG DAY FOR TENTEN!"

Tenten blushed when she heard that and replied, "S...shut up, Gai-sensei! It’s n-not what you think, Naruto-kun and I are just...friends," Tenten whispered the last word.

Neji growled and spoke while leaving, "You can do whatever you want. If you wish to be with a loser, nobody cares." After saying that, Neji left, and everyone looked at him with confusion.

After a few minutes, each of them left the area to do what they had to do. Tenten thought about how she reacted when Naruto spoke to her, and Lee started doing his self-imposed task for losing against Naruto while Gai helped him.

With Naruto - One Hour Later

Naruto was currently heading to the Hokage Tower. He wasn’t used yet to his new weight or gravity or whatever that was. But the true was that he was feeling very slow. Nevertheless, he knew that this would help him a lot.

He had yet to deliver his photo for the ninja record. He wasted about 45 minutes to take a simple picture because the stupid photographer refused to photograph the "Demon Brat". But with a little bit of his killing intent plus an unsheathed sword, the poor bastard decided to do it right away.

He arrived at the Hokage tower and went to one of the many rooms to deliver his photo to the person who was receiving them. He saw a door that said: "here for the registration's photos." Thus, Naruto opened it.

However, he didn’t expect to see that person in the room, which made him smile.

"Hello, old Hokage. What are you doing here?"

The man was Hiruzen Sarutobi, the Sandaime Hokage. Naruto had been seeing him from time to time in these four years; he was the only person who had approached him or had given him food, and sometimes, a place to spend the night when he was very young.

He even did something that no one else would have done, but that was a story for another moment.

Naruto respected him immensely; Hiruzen was one of the reasons he hadn't left the village yet.

Hiruzen smiled back and replied, "Oh, hello Naruto-kun. I can see that you've come to deliver your photo for the registration. Regardless, I'm here because our Hokage is busy with some things, so he asked me to take care of receiving the pictures of the new Genin."

Naruto nodded and handed the photograph to the Sandaime, who gladly received it, believing that Naruto would finally protect the village with all his strength.

He raised an eyebrow when seeing that Naruto had a scowl on his face in the photograph. He already knew the reason but didn't want to touch that point.

He wanted to ask Naruto how his day had been. However, the door's room suddenly opened and an eight years old boy entered the room shouting, "If I defeat you now, the Yondaime will know that I'm better than you, and he'll make me his successor!"

The child had a shuriken in his hand and ran toward him, only to fall and hit his head at the same time.

Naruto saw the kid squirming on the floor while rubbing his face because he took a big hit spot-on. At that moment, a man dressed all in blue, except for black colored glasses entered the room.

He noticed Naruto's presence. Hence, he stared at him with contempt.

Naruto noticed this, but he ignored it and was about to say that he was leaving. However, he couldn't because the boy stood in front of him and yelled, "You made me stumble!"

Naruto just ignored him and spoke to the Sandaime, "If you'll excuse me, old Hokage; I  must leave. See you later."

He was about to leave, but the man at the door yelled, "Don't ignore Konohamaru-kun! He's the grandson of Sandaime-sama and, therefore, you worthless brat must show respect to him!" Naruto stopped when he heard that, then he looked at Konohamaru before looking at the former Hokage.

Konohamaru had a look of arrogance at this time, but he thought that Naruto was just like everyone else in the village that only saw him as the grandson of the former Hokage, the man who saved the village several times.

He left his thoughts when he heard Naruto speaking, "I don't give a fuck whoever the hell he is. You just have to know if he gets in my way again; I will kill him." And with that said, Naruto left with a Shunshin, leaving a disgusted Ebisu by the attitude of the 'Demon Brat' for 'disrespecting his superiors.'

The Sandaime was embarrassed due to the way that things had turned out, and for not putting a stop in due time. Meanwhile, Konohamaru had stars in his eyes due to what Naruto did, and because he didn't see him just as the former Hokage's grandson.

Konohamaru after seeing that Naruto had left the room, he had tried to follow him, only to be stopped by the Sandaime’s voice. "Konohamaru-kun. Please, don't bother Naruto-kun right now; you can talk to him later. Naruto is in a bad mood right now, and I think if you start asking him questions, I'm afraid that he will fulfill his threat...and I don't want you to die." He sighed.

But Ebisu demanded that the 'Demon Brat' should be put in his place, but a stern look from Hiruzen shut him up instantly.

Konohamaru didn’t know why the fool of his sensei called him that, but it was more than clear that this guy Naruto was much cooler than his silly sensei would ever be.

He sighed in defeat, swearing to himself that he would see him at some other time.

With Naruto

Naruto was walking through the streets of the village. He only wanted to rest peacefully in his apartment.

As he walked, Naruto saw that the night was about to come, which made him remember everything that had happened today, especially the gravity seals' moment.

Perhaps this would help him to master his gravity element; maybe this was what he needed. However, he would only discover it when he got used to the new gravity with which he was moving through.

He left his thoughts when he heard a quite interesting conversation thanks to his enhanced senses. "I'm telling you, Kazuo; with this particular test, you will be able to become a Genin. Just get the secret scroll from the Hokage Tower. After that, you have to learn a technique from that scroll, and you will pass the test. Here I will test your learning and infiltration skills. If you do this correctly without anyone seeing you, and if you give me the scroll, I will approve you. You will be a Genin from tomorrow on; now I'll wait for you, Kazuo, in Training Ground 37."

Naruto could recognize that voice; it was from his other sensei in the academy, Mizuki. That idiot concealed his contempt for him pretty well, but he couldn’t fool him.

Mizuki hadn’t gone yesterday at the Academy for the graduation exams; he didn’t know why but Naruto didn’t care.

Naruto could easily tell that he was lying to Kazuo, a child from a civilian family; he was one of the few kids who had failed the exam, and he concluded that Mizuki was trying to use this to obtain the Hokage's secret scroll for him.

When Naruto heard where Mizuki would meet that boy, he quickly disappeared from the place to go there, maybe he could take that scroll if that boy could steal it, and if not...well he could kill Mizuki.

Training Ground 37 – One Hour Later

Naruto was hiding amongst the trees. The truth was that he was already bored, maybe Kazuo had been discovered, and Naruto was waiting like an idiot all this time for no reason.

He decided that it was enough, and when he was about to leave, he felt the presence of the child approaching the area.

He saw that the boy sat down on the ground a little away from him and then noticed that the boy unrolled the scroll and began to read it.

Naruto realized that the scroll was big and probably contained the best techniques of the village, the techniques of the previous Hokage. Therefore, he decided to wait any longer and went silently behind the boy, hitting him in the neck and knocking him out in an instant.

Naruto saw the scroll on the ground, seeing the jutsu that the boy was reading; It was the Kage Bunshin (Shadow Clones).

Naruto quickly grabbed it and sealed it in a storage scroll.

He mentally thanked Danzō for teaching him these things, though he had a natural talent for these things. Now he didn’t have to worry that someone would see him with a huge scroll tied to his back as he ran back to the village. Instead of the large scroll, he now had a small scroll that entered in his ninja bag smoothly.

He didn't want to see the outcome of this. Hence, he left the field to go directly to his apartment.

Naruto's Apartment - 30 Minutes Later

Naruto had come to his apartment minutes ago, and he had started to read the Secret Scroll. There were many jutsu of every kind, from Fūton to Suiton, jutsu of all elements.

There were so many jutsu that Naruto didn't think that he could learn them all. He was quite excited and was even more when he unrolled the scroll to find a section that said, 'Hokage Techniques.'

Here it stated that the current Hokage should put the steps to make some of their jutsu so that the next Hokage could be prepared if there was a threat to the village.

Naruto read the Shodaime Hokage's explanation on how he managed to combine his Doton, Suiton and some Yōton (Yang Release) to create the Mokuton (Wood Release).

He also explained that only a person with all these three elements—and only if that person had mastered these elements—would be able to use the Mokuton. It had their respective steps to master these elements, along with some Mokuton jutsu.

Naruto read two jutsu of the Nidaime Hokage. One of them was the Suiton: Suishōha (Water Release: Water Colliding Wave) and the one the Kuchiyose: Edo Tensei (Summoning: Impure World Reincarnation). He wrote that he couldn't complete the last jutsu, but that it worked.

However, the jutsu was only to be used as a last resort because it could temporarily bring someone from the world of the dead, and the user could use them at will. In addition, the jutsu needed three human sacrifices to bring one person from the world of the dead (imperfect version).

Naruto had found the technique interesting; maybe he could use it in the future and improve it a bit.

The Sandaime Hokage had put two techniques in the scroll as well, one of them was the Tōmegane no Jutsu (Crystal Ball Jutsu).  

He explained in several steps how to perform the technique. Hiruzen wrote that he used it to observe other people, but the user of this technique needed to know the chakra signature of the person that they wanted to see.

It would not work with someone who knew how to change their chakra signature constantly; something that Naruto knew how to do very well. Besides, the user should be in a range of four kilometers.

Naruto said to himself that he would have to learn this technique shortly, something like this would help a lot with his plans. There was also the Katon: Karyūdan (Fire Release: Fire Dragon Bullet), this was a short-range Ninjutsu; it would be excellent for attacking multiple targets near him.

Naruto then proceeded to unroll the scroll a bit more to see which techniques his 'beloved daddy' put in. He put two jutsu; one of them was the Rasengan (Spiralling Sphere).

Naruto read that the technique had three steps, which had to be mastered to perform the technique. Then he read that the technique was incomplete, and to complete it, the user had to add his or her element to the jutsu and thus this way the user would have a much more devastating attack, but before he could do that, the user had to master their natural element.

The other one said Hiraishin no Jutsu (Flying Thunder God Technique). Naruto tried to see the steps of this jutsu since he knew the jutsu very well.

That was the jutsu which gave him the nickname Konoha no Kiiroi Senkō (Konoha's Yellow Flash); such a technique would also help him a lot in his plans. However, he realized that some kind of blood seal protected it. Maybe his father made this so that only his beloved son Menma could see the jutsu when he was the next Hokage.

Naruto had bitten his thumb and had put some of his blood on the seal, only to find out that nothing had happened. He analyzed the reason this didn’t work and concluded that maybe it only worked with his father's blood.

Naruto then sighed, closed the scroll, and re-sealed it so that no one could find it. After that, he went to his bed and thought about all the techniques that he now had to learn; he couldn't see all of them.

He didn't even believe that he saw the one-fourth of the total jutsu; this would take him a lot of time, but several shadow clones always helped.

He also thought of his father's technique; that technique should be his top priority, if he were able to master it, his father would get a big surprise when he killed him with it. Yes, Naruto was euphoric, but now he had to sleep.

Tomorrow was the day of the team assignment, and he had to be there early.

He decided to sleep with his gravity seals on because he had to learn as fast as possible to master his current gravity.

Ninja Academy – The Next Day

Naruto had awakened early in the morning, Kurama had congratulated him for the great idea he had yesterday. In addition, he told him to learn all these techniques since it would help him a lot in the near future.

Afterward, Naruto prepared a quick breakfast and went to the academy with his typical clothes, with his jacket and his ANBU pants. He was using his headband as a belt and tied his katana to his waist.

He had arrived at the academy a little late that day; he opened the door slightly and saw that everyone was already there waiting for Iruka, who hadn’t yet arrived, which was strange because he was never late.

Naruto shrugged and opened the door; he noticed that everyone turned to look at him, and many of them quickly looked away because they didn't want to annoy him while other people stared at him.

Sasuke and Menma, both with anger. It seemed that being beaten by him had bothered them. Hence, Naruto lifted his hand and showed to both of them his middle finger.

Both became even angrier, but they did nothing since they thought that they would have their revenge on him in the future.

Then he saw that Ino was staring at him, but she looked away when he placed his eyes on her.

However, Naruto appeared next to her in a Shunshin. The class looked at him in shock when he used this technique because that jutsu was something that the teachers of the academy didn't teach. After that, they were even more shocked due to the next thing that Naruto did.

Naruto waved Ino and then proceeded to give her a hot kiss on her lips. Ino was surprised at first, but then she returned the kiss with the same intensity. Some of the boys looked at Naruto with envy, and some girls as well, while others with indifference. Some people thought it was funny, so they started to whistle and applaud.

After several seconds that felt like minutes, both stopped. One of them because he that thought it was enough and the other one from the lack of air.

The redhead then decided to ask, "So tell me, Ino-chan. How was your day?"

Ino let out a happy sigh and replied, "Never so well."

Naruto smiled at her response before motioning Ino to sit down on his lap.

She blushed a bit but decided to do it. After she had done it, Naruto welcomed her gladly. Meanwhile, most of the class already believed that both were in a relationship.

At that moment, the door of the class opened, and a bandaged Iruka entered the class.

Many of them were instantly worried, and they asked him what happened. Iruka replied, "Thanks for your concern. Yesterday there was an unfortunate event in the village. Sadly, Mizuki killed Kazuo and escaped with the Hokage's Secret Scroll. I had a fight with Mizuki, but I had to protect Kazuo. He was already dead at the time, but I didn't know it. So Mizuki took advantage of that and then ran away. That's why I'm late this day; I went to report about this to the Hokage and notify Kazuo’s parents about his death." When Iruka finished, all the students became sad.

Okay, Naruto was the obvious exception; he was mentally smiling. Now he didn't have to worry about being found out. They believed that it had been the stupid of Mizuki. Hehe; this couldn't be more than an advantage for him.

So due to the excitement, he began to play with Ino's crotch. She became completely red due to Naruto's groping. Therefore, she turned her head to look at Naruto, who was giving her a very sexy smile, which made her even wetter.

Naruto noticed this, and he stuck a finger into her vagina as he began to put it inside and outside slowly. Ino almost screamed, but she had bitten her lip to hide it; she thanked the heavens that she decided to sit at the back of the class, where no one ever took a seat.

She allowed Naruto touch her while she released soft moans of pleasure. Meanwhile, Iruka started talking about The Will of Fire and their duty to protect the village from now on. After that, he began to announce the teams.

Ino at that moment turned her head and spoke, "Na-Naruto-to-kun, s-stop it. I-I'm about to c-cum; I'm going crazy. P-please, s-stop."

Naruto, however, ignored her request and stuck two more fingers, increasing the speed with much more enthusiasm.

After a few seconds, he grabbed her by her neck and gave her a passionate kiss, putting his tongue into Ino's mouth and hiding the scream of her orgasm into the kiss.

Naruto then took out his fingers from Ino's vagina. Her juices soaked his fingers, so he began licking them very slowly, and Ino, who saw this, almost felt another orgasm.

Naruto smiled when seeing the clouded eyes of the pleasure of Ino. Therefore, he stated, "Hmmm, I think I could get used to this flavor, and perhaps one of these days I may have the main course." As he said this, he stroked her crotch again.

Ino allowed him again; she didn't care. She didn't mind giving her virginity to Naruto anymore. If he wanted it, he could do it after leaving this place. She was a Kunoichi now, wasn’t she? If she was old enough to kill, then she was old enough to have sex, right? Who cares about what other people might say?

She then replied, "Whenever you want, Naruto-kun." And she kissed him; Naruto smiled and returned the kiss.

Then Iruka shouted, "Hey you two there in the back! You can do that at another moment! Now I'm saying the teams, pay attention!" Iruka was watching them for a while; he had not seen anything unusual besides caresses and kisses. He wasn't against displays of affection, but they should, at least, pay attention now, later they would have time for that.

Then he continued, "Team Seven: Menma Namikaze, Sasuke Uchiha, and Sakura Haruno, your Jounin sensei is Kakashi Hatake... Oh, wow." When he said that, Sakura jumped from her seat and started saying things about the true love always won and stuff like that.

Menma was happy that his nii-san would be his sensei and Sasuke accepted him since he had heard from Itachi about the feats of this man.

Then Iruka continued, "Team Eight: Kiba Inuzuka, Shino Aburame, and Hinata Hyūga. Your Jounin sensei will be Kurenai Yūhi." They all nodded allowing Iruka continue.

Just then, Ino got excited because only she, Naruto, Chouji and Shikamaru, didn't have a team yet. Ino believed that she would be on the same team as Naruto.

Iruka then continued, "Team Nine: still active. Team Ten: Chouji Akimichi, Shikamaru Nara, and Ino Yamanaka. Your Jounin sensei will be Asuma Sarutobi." Shikamaru and Chouji sighed with relief because they wouldn't be on the same team as Naruto while Ino sighed sadly and put her head on the desk because she wanted to be with Naruto, who was now stroking her hair.

"Don't worry about it Ino-chan. It's not like we are going to stop seeing each other or something like that; you and I will have a good time, even if we aren't on the same team." When he said that, Naruto pinched Ino's ass, and she gave a surprised squeal, which made everyone in the class turn around and look at them.

Ino blushed in embarrassment and Naruto yelled, "What are you looking at, you bastards?! Look straight ahead or I will cut you into pieces!" Naruto let out some of his killing intent and everyone felt a chill running down their spines, which made them turn around again. Naruto hated people who suddenly turned around to look at him.

Iruka shook his head at his attitude and then continued, "Well, and finally, Team 13: Naruto. Anko Mitarashi will be your Jounin sensei." When he said that, Naruto got surprised along with the others in the room.

Then he smiled inwardly. Anko...hmm so cool, he would do many things with her, and many of them were not exactly training or doing missions. His thoughts were interrupted when an annoying voice yelled angrily.

"Why does this demon have a personal sensei? He won’t have to be wasting his time with other stupid teammates! I'm the one who should have a personal sensei! Not that unworthy demon!" Sasuke yelled angrily.

Ino glared at Sasuke for calling Naruto in such a way. Menma glared at him because he called him stupid and Sakura watched all of this with concern.

Iruka just sighed, "Sasuke...Hokage's orders, now shut up." Naruto didn't care about what Sasuke said about him, as he had already showed how pathetic he was, and when the time came, he would kill him.

Iruka then continued, "Now everyone wait here for your Jounin sensei. They will arrive here in no time. So stay alert because they will enter here and take you out to get to know you. Now I'm leaving; I hope that everyone have a good future in your ninja careers." Then Iruka left the room.

After a few moments, the Jounin began to arrive and take their respective teams.

In the class still were the teams from 7 to 10 and Naruto, who was kissing Ino right now.

Then Asuma and Kurenai arrived, just to see the scene between Naruto and Ino. Both narrowed their eyes and Asuma decided to interrupt, "Okay, Team 10, follow me."

Ino just sighed sadly, as she stood up from Naruto's lap, seeing that his knee looked a little wet.

She blushed a lot and proceeded to leave, not before Naruto told her that he would see her later.

Again, Asuma and Kurenai narrowed their eyes at that attitude, and Kurenai added, "You too, Team 8, follow me." And with that said, Team 8 stood up and followed their sensei.

Naruto then rose from his seat and spoke, "I can finally get out of here."

Team 7 turned around when they heard this and Menma asked, "What do you mean, dobe? Your sensei hasn’t arrived yet; you can't leave before she gets here."

Naruto snorted and spoke sarcastically, "But that's what makes us different, Hime-chan. I'm so cool that I don’t need to wait for my Jounin sensei. Besides that, I won't have to spend my time with a banshee and a drama queen. Now if you'll excuse me, I'm leaving, losers."

Afterward, Menma and Sasuke growled in fury. They wanted to attack him, but Naruto disappeared in a Fire Shunshin, leaving everyone around with an expression of surprise. Sasuke and Menma looked with a hint of envy, and they asked themselves at what point he learned all that.

Both let out a sigh, and they returned to their seats waiting for their sensei.

Forest of Death - Five Minutes Later

Naruto had reached the forest three minutes ago and had sat down in one of the places where he always trained as he waited for someone.

After five minutes, he felt a presence that had been watching him for about two minutes. "Hey, Anko-chan get out from there. I know you've been observing me for a while. Why don't you come over here and show me your beautiful figure?" Naruto brazenly asked as he heard a cheeky giggle, followed by a woman’s voice.

"Do you want to have more fun with your dear Anko-chan, Naruto-kun?" Just then, Anko appeared and kissed Naruto.

She had to duck her head a little to do it. She was just a little bit taller than Naruto was, and Anko knew that Naruto would be far taller than she would in a few years.

Naruto returned the kiss. "You know, having someone as beautiful and sexy as you as my Sensei is fucking awesome. Until now, I can only remember having male teachers. Tell me, did you have something to do with it?" Naruto asked wiggling his eyebrows.

Anko pulled back a little, and she sat down on a rock as she replied, “Indeed. As no one offered to be your sensei, I saw the perfect opportunity to do it; I couldn't let my cute kitten alone. What would have become of you?" Anko feigned sadness.

Naruto growled while squinting, "I'm not a 'kitten.' You know I hate being called that; don't say that again."

Anko smiled and walked sensually over to Naruto to ask, "What would you do if I say it..., kitten?"

Naruto replied, "This!"

Naruto jumped over Anko and threw her to the ground, taking off her clothes as fast as he could while he did the same to himself. The truth was that what he did with Ino had left him with desire, and Anko was more than willing to complete that desire.

When Anko was completely naked, Naruto looked at her neck and stated, "I swear it. I'll kill that bastard Orochimaru when I see him, nobody hurts what is mine and gets away with it!"

Anko smiled, and she teasingly asked, "And who says that I'm yours, eh?"

Naruto smiled back, "Looks like you'll never learn. I think I have to teach you good manners again." Naruto replied and slowly approached his head to Anko's breasts. He saw that her nipples were slightly hardened, so he suck on one of them while he began to stroke her other breast with one of his hands.

Anko moaned while Naruto continued with his caresses. After a few minutes, he stopped and moved to the other nipple, sucking it more harshly and pinching the other one, which made Anko scream while leaking fluids from her vagina. "I'm cumming!"

Anko smiled with excitement when she saw Naruto's penis in all its glory. At first, she had been surprised by its size, but she loved it.

She wanted to grab it, but Naruto quickly stopped her and spoke, "Nonono, Anko-chan. I told you that I would show you good manners. You can't do whatever you want while your punishment lasts."

After that, Naruto quickly got up from the ground and put her on top of him, making his cock rub against Anko's vagina, who was getting desperate because she wanted his cock inside of her.

That continued for a few seconds until Anko could not resist it anymore. Thus, she shouted, "Okay, Naruto-kun! I'm sorry; I didn't mean to call you a kitten! It's just that we didn't have sex like in three weeks. I was tired of it; I won't call you that anymore."

Naruto had a triumphant smile on his face and asked, "Do you promise?" Anko quickly nodded. Then Naruto put all the length of his cock in her pussy with one single thrust, touching her womb. When Anko felt that, she smiled broadly and arched back, releasing her second orgasm of the day.

Naruto then whispered in the ear of Anko—who hadn’t recovered yet from her last orgasm—as he began to move slowly, "If you want to do it, just go to my place and see if I’m there." After that, Naruto started thrusting in and out, each time faster in Anko's pussy, who was moaning and screaming as loud as she could.

"Yes. More, Naruto! Harder! I missed this so much! Cum inside!" Anko was shouting now, lost in the pleasure that Naruto was giving her.

The truth was that Naruto sent small electrical currents to Anko's body, to increase the pleasure she was feeling.

After a few minutes of constant thrusting, Naruto could feel Anko's vaginal walls beginning to tighten strongly, making Naruto release a large amount of semen inside of Anko, who arched her back and released another orgasm.

They were joined for few more seconds until Naruto pulled out his penis from Anko's pussy. His cock was soaked with the fluids from both of them, so Anko looked at his penis and licked it until it was completely clean.

After that, Naruto rose up from the ground and began to dress. Anko did it as well, smiling with satisfaction.

Naruto was still able to do far more, but he said himself that it wasn’t the time nor the place to do something like this.

He then turned around to see a fully dressed Anko, and he asked with a smile, "Could you remind me how you and I ended up doing this?"

Anko smiled back and replied, "Well, that's easy. About six months ago, in this same place, I told you what Orochimaru made me see when I was his student. You said you didn't care because you could understand me. Besides, you promised me that someday you would take this mark off of my body. After that, you told me about your past and your plans, and I said that I would help when the time came, but without harming those who have become 'potential allies.'" Anko finished and sat down on the ground.

Naruto sat down as well and stated, "And you know very well that at some point I'll have to leave the village, and I won't be able to return for a while; only when I have everything ready." Maybe the jutsu of his father could help him return from time to time, but he had to find a way to unlock the seal that was blocking the Hiraishin of his father.

In some way or another, Naruto would need to get some of his blood to release the seal because he was sure that it only reacted to his blood.

Anko nodded and replied, "Don't worry. I know you'll find a way to show up here without anyone detecting you, not for nothing you have those eyes."

Anko also knew about his Rinnegan. There was no person in who Naruto trusted more, except for Kurama.

He felt something strange when he was near Anko. Naruto felt he could tell her everything without the fear that she would do something with that information. He knew it was wrong to have so much confidence in someone after all that had happened to him for that kind of naivety.

But with Anko, it was simply different. He felt she was a person whom he could have a real connection with. But obviously, Naruto wasn't that deep with his feelings, and though that was what he really felt, he decided to ignore it and not to think much about it.

Naruto quickly pulled those thoughts away and stated, "Putting that aside, what do we do now? Do I have to take a test or something? I know the Jounin sensei have to test their students to be Genins of the village; they always told us that in Root."

Anko looked at him and shrugged, "Well, I see no point in giving you a test. You're stronger than I am. So I don't know what test I could give you. I know your abilities very well. Don't worry, I'll just lie and tell the Hokage that you completed your test, and from tomorrow on, you’ll be a lovely Genin."

Naruto groaned and replied, "And from now we’ll have to do those stupid D-rank missions." He crossed his arms; he didn’t want to do those silly tasks.

Nonetheless, before he could continue complaining, Anko stated, "Ha! Who do you think I am? I don't do stupid D-rank missions; we won’t be doing missions below the C-rank, but I'll tell you that we’ll do very few of those, protecting people or killing mercenary bastards is so stupid."

Naruto nodded and approached Anko to kiss her on her lips before speaking, "If we have nothing else to do, then I'll leave. I have many things to do. Oh, did you hear what happened yesterday? About the Scroll of Seals." He asked.

Anko thought about this for a moment and then she opened her eyes in shock. "Was it you? But how?" She asked genuinely surprised.

Naruto shook his head and replied, "It wasn't really me; I just had a lucky break. I could hear Mizuki’s plans; I waited until the child has stolen the scroll before taking it away. Iruka said that the boy died, but I just knocked him out. It seems that the bastard of Mizuki became angry and killed him, hehe. But now he is paying for something that he couldn’t accomplish." After saying that, Anko laughed too.

Then they said goodbye to each other and walked away from the forest to complete their own agenda. Anko had to inform the Hokage about the completion of the "test" that Naruto took, and Naruto had to read more techniques of the scroll and test some of them.

Notes:

First, sorry for taking so long.

I think I handled the fight Naruto and Lee very well. Naruto said he wasn't that fast, but without using Chakra.

The gravity seals for Naruto to master his gravity element was okay too, and who besides Gai-sensei would have something like that?

I don't want to explain anything about Ino and Anko since I think it's obvious.

I thought it was appropriate the thing about the Scroll of Seals; Naruto couldn't let pass that opportunity.

See you!

Chapter Text

Person talking - "Hello everyone."

Person thinking - "Damn you all!"

Demon talking - "I will eat you."

Demon thinking - "This tastes worse than shit!"

Disclaimer: I do not own Naruto, Masashi Kishimoto does.

Chapter 5

Konohagakure no Sato - Two Weeks Later

Naruto was walking through the streets of Konoha. It had been two weeks since Anko and Naruto had their encounter in the Forest of Death.

In these two weeks, Naruto began to practice several techniques from the Hokage Secret Scroll; he had also increased the gravity of his body because after a week his body had become used to the previous gravity. That was all he did, and for that reason, he had ventured into the Forest of Death in those days, in a place where not even Anko would find him.

He had discovered that his Rinnegan helped him to learn the jutsu extremely fast. He didn’t realize this until now because he would just occasionally use his Rinnegan in Root. Besides that, after leaving Root, he could no longer get new jutsu, but now he had plenty of them. In addition, he no longer was in a place where he always had to watch his back, which made him realize of this peculiarity of his Doujutsu.

He hadn’t tried the Hokage's jutsu yet, except for the Rasengan. He spent most of these two weeks mastering the first and second step of the Rasengan. And since he knew that his type of chakra was dextrorotatory, it had been easier for him to master the first step. In the scroll said that some water balloons could help with training and also the 'How to Use.'

He managed to explode the water balloon in three days, which consisted of the rotation of chakra in the balloon, and a full week to burst the balloon without water because it was harder to imagine how it should rotate the chakra. Although he had an excellent control of chakra, it was still quite difficult for him to perform the steps without appropriate advice.

Now only the third step remained, which was to combine the two previous steps, and hold the chakra without leaking. The balloon didn't have to explode or move; if that were to happen, he would have mastered the technique. However, he still didn't find the way to do it; it was quite difficult.

He had to admit that the bastard of his father was a fucking genius. Until now, he could only make a ball, but it didn't have the consistency or the power of the full Rasengan. Nonetheless, he didn't care about this since he would have enough time to accomplish the last step. He wouldn't worry about not being able to do it; he would find a way to do it in due time.

Naruto stopped remembering that when an ANBU landed in front of him, an ANBU with whom he had spoken to before.

The ANBU then spoke, "Naruto-san, Hokage-sama requests your presence in the Hokage tower. He has a mission ready for you."

Naruto nodded. "Thanks, Usagi-san. I hadn’t seen you since that day when those idiots attacked me. After that, the villagers didn't bother me again. Maybe that's the reason you didn't show up again. Am I wrong?" Naruto asked, and Yugao nodded, "Hai, Naruto-san. After that day, we haven’t seen the villagers trying anything against you. Now I must leave, goodbye, Naruto-san." Then Yugao disappeared from the area in a Shunshin.

Naruto stared at that place for a moment as he thought about the words of Yugao, a name that Naruto didn’t know yet.

He knew that his father hadn’t assigned the ANBU to protect him, but to keep an eye on him because Naruto believed that his father just wanted to put him in a cell..., he couldn’t be more than right.

He stopped thinking and walked slowly toward the Hokage Tower. He could have used a Shunshin to arrive faster, but he didn't want to.

Hokage Tower - 30 Minutes Later

Naruto had finally reached the Hokage tower; he had walked as slowly as he could by walking around the streets for a while.

When he realized that enough time had passed, he stopped roaming the streets and headed to the tower.

The secretary received him with a cold stare, but Naruto ignored her and told her that the Hokage had called him. She told him to wait, and Naruto did so. After a few minutes, she came back and said that the Hokage would receive him.

Naruto nodded and went to the Hokage's office. He knocked on the door and heard his father saying, "Come in."

Naruto opened the door and entered the room just to see Tenten, Lee, Neji and Gai in there. Naruto waved Lee, Tenten, and Gai before addressing to his father.

"Did you call me, Hokage-sama? He asked.

Minato looked at him with a tic in his eyebrow and replied, "Yes, 30 minutes ago. Tell me, why did you take so long?" He asked squinting.

Naruto then put a finger on his chin as if he was thinking. He then quietly answered, "Sorry, Hokage-sama. I got lost on the road of life."

At those familiar words, Minato’s eyebrow had another tic.

In another place of the village, a silver-haired man, who was reading an orange book, suddenly sneezed and looked to the sky as he thought proudly, "I can feel that someone has begun to follow my philosophy." 

After that, he looked at his team and said, "Come on Team 7. You still have to capture Tora, hurry up. These D-Rank missions won't be done by themselves." All of Team 7, who were full of scratches, just groaned in pain; they still had to capture the Demon Cat. Who would have said that a stupid cat would be so difficult to catch?

Back in the Hokage Tower, Minato watched the Gennin in front of him and spoke, "Okay, I have a C-Rank mission ready for you. We have received reports that in Katabame Kinzan, a small village in Kawa no Kuni (Land of Rivers), has been recently attacked by a clan, and they began to kill the villagers for no apparent reason. They call themselves the ‘the Kurosuki Family.’ Your mission is to go there and see if these reports are correct. If they are, the mission will turn to B-rank because you will have to expel that family from the area, and if they don't cooperate, you will have to use deadly force. We, as an allied village of Kawa no Kuni (Land of Rivers), cannot allow strangers attack them."

Everyone nodded and Minato spoke again, "The leader of this mission will be Naruto," but then Neji growled.

"Why does this loser get to be the leader of our team? He has only been a Genin for two weeks, and he is now leading a team? That seems stupid and pointless to me," Neji stated staring at Naruto, who looked at him mockingly while his team shook their heads at his attitude.

Minato sharply hit his desk before asking, "Are you trying to ignore a direct order from the Hokage? Do you want to face a court-martial? I don't owe you any explanations, but I'll tell you why I chose Naruto as the leader of this mission. First, because his Jounin sensei has requested this to me as a test. If he completes this mission, then they won’t be doing any D-rank missions ever again. But if he fails, then they will have to do D-rank missions for five consecutive months. Besides that, on this mission, stealth is essential, and Naruto is excellent at that. So, shut up or I'll throw you into a cell for three weeks."

When Neji heard the latter, he quickly straightened up, nodded to his Hokage, and said nothing more.

There were more reasons why he had chosen Naruto, like being a former Root member; being in multiple missions harder than this one, and for being the leader of some Root members in some of his past missions. But of course, he couldn’t say all that.

After that, Minato spoke about the mission. "Now, according to the information that Gai-san has provided to me, the leader of this clan could be one of the Kiri no Shinobigatana (Ninja Swordsmen of the Mist), Raiga Kurosuki. According to reports from Kiri, Raiga was one of them. Although he’s not as strong as the others are, he’s dangerous since he has in his position the Kiba (Fangs). According to Kiri, he stole them, and then he became a missing-nin. I shouldn’t tell you to beware of the Kiba because I think you should know something like that. However, be cautious, those swords are very powerful at Raiton. So Naruto, as a user of Fūton, will have more chances of defeating him, now dismissed."

With that said, everyone started to leave, but Naruto stopped his team and began to give them orders, which consisted of going home and getting supplies for the mission, as well as checking their ninja equipment.

After that, he told them to be at the gates of the village at 11:50 a.m. They all nodded and began to leave.

Minato couldn’t help smiling proudly when seeing Naruto doing that. Nevertheless, he quickly realized what he did and frowned as he thought, "Why I am proud of Naruto? He’s not my son! Remember, Minato! He's not your son! …Wait, did I just call him by his name? What the hell is happening to me!?" 

After that, he shouted to his secretary, "Megumi! Suspend all my appointments for today. I will go home early," then he disappeared in a yellow flash without even waiting for his secretary's consent.

He had a lot to think, and even more about Naruto.

Somewhere in Kawa no Kuni (Land of Rivers) - Two Hours Later

Naruto and the team under his command had run for two hours without stopping through Hi no Kuni (Land of Fire) until being near to Kawa no Kuni (Land of Rivers).

After a few minutes of running in Kawa no Kuni, Lee perceived a smell the air and spoke, running in that direction, "Curry,"

More to his front, Naruto could see a curry restaurant while the others just walked quietly to where Lee went. When they arrived, they saw that he was carrying a tiny old woman, giving her turns around the air. After a few moments, the old lady invited them to eat something.

After a few minutes of being in the place, Lee began to tell the story when he had just become a Genin and how the woman's curry saved his life. The old lady nodded to all Lee's words and then she brought a plate of curry for each of them.

It looked weird; it was black, and it seemed to bubble. Lee devoured it and after a moment, Naruto did it too. Naruto felt nothing wrong because he had eaten worse things before, but Tenten and Neji seemed about to explode.

After Tenten and Neji had drunk some water, Lee spoke again, "By the way, Obaa-san, where is Karashi-san?" He asked since he hadn't seen Karashi for many months and Lee asked to himself how he had been.

Lee could see the old woman becoming sad, so he listened to her next words carefully, "I'm sorry, after he saw you training so hard, Karashi became very energetic and left the village. Maybe because I told him that he had to get stronger. He said that he would be strong and that he would train with the Kurosuki clan. But don't worry; I don't blame you, you know it."

After saying that, Lee stopped eating and squeezed his fists tightly as he said, "It's my responsibility." The old woman shook her head, but Lee ignored her, "Naruto-kun! Please! Add the recovery of Karashi-kun to this mission."

Naruto, who was eating quietly, stopped when he heard Lee's request.

Naruto just replied calmly, "Negative, if this guy Karashi joined that clan, then he must be involved in the assassinations. Therefore, if he gets in our way, I'll have no choice but to kill him."

Lee lost all enthusiasm while the old woman got scared since she didn't know that Karashi was doing such things. Besides, she was also worried by the fact that they wanted to kill him.

Lee became angry. "Naruto-kun! You've lost your flames of youth. Karashi is my friend, and I will save him! Even if you don't want it!" Lee stated firmly.

Naruto looked at Lee for a few seconds and retorted, "Listen to me, Lee. With this kind of attitude, you'll never be a great ninja. We have a mission assigned by the Hokage; he gave us clear instructions that we must follow. But as I said if that guy gets in our way and refuses to cooperate, then we'll have no choice but to kill him. Now sit down! Or I'll put in the report that you tried to insubordinate." Lee wanted to object again, but he decided to heed Naruto's warning. Maybe Karashi wouldn't do anything stupid, and they wouldn't need to kill him.

Then Neji added, "I agree with the los… I mean, Naruto. The Hokage has assigned us a mission, so we must complete this mission as he told us, we can't fail."

Naruto then decided to speak, "Whatever you say, Neji. Now, you can go to rest or train. Or whatever you want to do, but I want you to be ready for tomorrow. We’ll continue with the mission tomorrow morning. If you are going to train, don't strive too much. I want you to have enough energy for the mission. I'm going to train a bit; I can't be wasting time even on a mission." Then Naruto got up from his seat and left the building, heading toward the forest.

Tenten quickly apologized to the old woman and followed Naruto to train a bit, or something else. Neji just shrugged and went to one of the rooms that the old lady had offered them, and Lee was appeasing her, saying that nothing bad would happen to Karashi.

With Naruto

Naruto had reached a clearing in the forest; he had decided to practice there with his Taijutsu, to adapt himself to his new weight because when they had left the village, he had increased the gravity of the seals a little more. He felt much stronger now since that day when Gai gave him those seals and his body had assimilated them. He had to thank him in some way in the future; maybe he could let him alive.

He left his thoughts when he felt a familiar presence approaching. "What can I do for you, Tenten-chan?" He asked as he began to do some pushups.

Tenten was initially surprised that Naruto had noticed her presence, but she left that aside and replied, "Naruto-kun. Don't you think that you've been a little harsh with Lee back there? I believe that Karashi is his friend, and what he just wants to help him. What would you do if a friend of yours was in the same situation?"

Naruto stopped doing his pushups and rose up from the ground as he turned around to look at Tenten, who blushed slightly at Naruto's intense gaze.

Naruto then responded, "First, Tenten-chan; I just told him what I had to say. He has to know that he can't solve everything with nice words. The Shinobi world doesn't work that way, people choose their sides, and I don't give a damn that that guy has joined to them. What I tried to make Lee see is that certain things are more important, like completing a mission or making a tough decision even though a friend is involved. We still have to complete the assigned task. Besides I would do the same thing I told Lee, I'm a person who hates betrayals, and if a person who has my trust betrays me... Well, that would be the last thing they would ever do."

Tenten could understand what Naruto was saying since she had heard about his childhood; she didn't blame him. Then she asked while shrugging a little, "Do you trust me, Naruto-kun?"

Naruto stopped again and looked at Tenten, who looked at him with expectant eyes. Naruto sighed, "Tenten-chan, confidence for me is crucial, and it's something that I can't just give. You know who I am and how I grew up, that's why I'm cautious in some things. Don't get me wrong, I like you. However, I will know if I can trust you in the future. I'm not saying that I'm cautious around you; rather, some things will require a lot of you, and you're still not ready."

Tenten understood Naruto, all she had to do was win his trust in the future. Then she blushed because he had said that he liked her. "Naruto-kun, I will do whatever it takes to win your confidence when the time comes. I don't know much about how you have lived in your childhood, but I admire you because, despite all the adversities you went through, you are still firm. You didn't let this to be an impediment for you. B-but, what do you mean when you said that you like m-me?" She asked the latter with a blush on her cheeks.

Naruto smiled, "Well, you're beautiful and besides that, you're not a pathetic fangirl; you are a true Kunoichi, who takes her training seriously. Let me tell you that in the Academy, I met many fangirls, and I hate that kind of woman. If I don't kill them, it's just because I will be in trouble. So I prefer that they experience the real Shinobi world, once they are dead or worse." Naruto finished as he began to perform some squats.

Tenten looked at him doing squats, and she nervously asked, "W-what about you and Ino? Aren't y-you both d-dating?" She wanted to know. There were many rumors about this, so she wanted to be sure.

Naruto laughed and replied, "Well, we are; we have something. But I wouldn't call it 'love.' I don't know the meaning of that word. Ino knows that I don't love her and that I will never do it; I esteem her. Besides that, I'll never let anyone touch or damage my women. If someone tries to do it, they'll be dead; I want what is mine in perfect shape."

Tenten frowned and stated, "That sounds sexist, and what do you mean by 'your women'?"

Naruto stopped what he was doing and looked at Tenten directly into her eyes, "You're just misinterpreting things and the meaning of the word 'sexist'; I'm not one. I just have a sense of belonging due to the way that I grew up. Since I had nothing, I stuck myself to what I could have. And as for the other, you know very well what I mean." Then he stood right in front of Tenten, who blushed a lot.

Tenten stuttered, "B-but, w-wha-at w-would I-Ino think-k? You already have a relationship with h-her, I-I cannot get into that." She didn't mean that; she really wanted to say yes, but she didn't desire to ruin someone else's relationship. Damn her luck! If she had been faster, then it would be she instead of Ino.

Naruto smiled, cutting a little more the distance and replied, "She wouldn’t mind. Besides, we’re Shinobi; we aren’t civils. Leave the family morals to them. We can die on any mission. People say that we Shinobi have a life expectancy of 30 years, so why should we worry about such things? We should enjoy the pleasures of life, rather than complain about something that could have been. I've already spoken with Ino about this, and she agreed as long as she can be with me. What do you say, Tenten-chan? Do you want to be part of this? You don’t have to worry about Ino; I'll tell her all about it."

He ended and kissed Tenten, who didn't return the kiss at first. But at the end, she relented. She didn't care about anything that might happen after this.

Naruto was right, better to enjoy life before she died on a mission and then she bemoaned that nothing had happened. She knew that Naruto wouldn’t love her, but she knew that he would treat her very well. She also knew that Naruto was good with women, as long as they weren’t fangirls.

Tenten after kissing Naruto for about forty seconds, she looked at him with eyes full of lust, "Naruto-kun, please, I need you."

Naruto smiled but shook his head. "I'm sorry, Tenten-chan, but this isn’t the place nor the right time. We’re on a mission, and I need you to be in optimal conditions tomorrow. Besides that, I don't think you want that your first time to be in a place like this," Naruto replied.

Then he looked at the sky and continued, "I think we've spent enough time here, the sun is setting, and we must go back. Maybe when we're in the village, we could finish what we have started here; it's a promise." Tenten nodded, and she followed Naruto back to where Neji and Lee were.

The Next Day

Naruto and the rest of his team were hiding on a hill, watching the Kurosuki clansmen whipping some people that were carrying stones in some baskets. That was until an old man, who looked quite tired, collapsed to the ground along with all his stones. At that moment, the men who were whipping the others stopped.

They approached the old man and threatened him as they beat him.

Naruto looked all this impassively; he still didn't see the need to act. He would only do it if he saw that they killed someone or if they tried to do it, and only then, it would start his other mission. However, Lee declared, "Naruto-kun, we can't let this unyouthful act continue! Please, let me put those men in their place."

Naruto shook his head and replied, "Negative, we're here to watch. Only if those men kill this guy, we'll intervene. Now sit down and be quiet."

Lee clenched his fists; he didn't care what Naruto said. He jumped down and ran toward those men, who were still beating the old man. After a few seconds, Lee had knocked-out all of them.

He smiled with satisfaction but stopped when he felt a sharp punch in his face, which made him fall to the ground.

After falling to the ground, he heard a voice, which started to piss him off. "Damn it, Lee! I hope this is the last time that you are disobedient. I may be a Genin, but I take the damn missions seriously. If you had been in an ANBU team and you had done this, then your captain would have killed you in the act! I hope that the next time you'll think about the consequences before you act!" Naruto stated as Neji and Tenten approached the area.

Tenten looked at this with concern; she didn't want this to end in a fight, and Neji watched all this impassively but inside he was amazed at Naruto's maturity. Maybe he judged him too fast, and Naruto wasn't the loser that Neji had thought he was.

He left his thoughts when he heard Lee's voice. "I'm sorry, but I couldn't allow them to continue beating this poor man. He did nothing wrong. I couldn't let him die like that!" Lee replied, rubbing the place where Naruto punched him.

He realized that Naruto had punched him very strongly, but due to the way that he had hit him, it wasn't with all his strength. He also noticed that Naruto was much stronger since their fight, which was two weeks ago.

Naruto approached him and stated, "Understand, Lee! We're Shinobi! We're not fucking heroes! You should stop thinking about being a hero, or you'll never be a great ninja! I'll pass this insubordination in the report, but this will be your last chance." Lee just stood in his place, but he was starting to dislike him. He didn't know that Naruto was so cold, and he didn't like that.

After saying that, Naruto approached the man who was shaking, and when he saw Naruto, he quickly grabbed him and asked, "What have you done?! Fast! Knock me out too! If the others find out that I'm the only one who didn't suffer any injuries, then it would be my end! Do it now!"

Lee told him to calm down, that nothing bad would happen to him. However, after Lee had finished saying that, Naruto had hit the man in his neck, effectively knocking him out.

Lee became angry again and shouted, "What was that, Naruto-kun?! That man did nothing wrong! There was no reason to hit him. Naruto-kun you've lost your Flames of Youth!"

Naruto just ignored Lee and paid attention to the other workers, who looked at everything with fear.

Naruto pointed at one of them and ordered him to come closer. The man balked at first but then he followed Naruto's order.

When Naruto saw the man in front of him, he asked, "Now answer me. Why was this man so scared? Explain to me what is happening in this place." Naruto was commanding, surprising everyone there.

The man replied shyly, "Uhm...okay...The Kurosuki clan took control of our village a few months ago, and their leader, Raiga, started to organize funerals for people who betrayed him or didn't follow his orders."

Tenten blinked at this and asked, "What do you mean by 'funerals'?"

The man then replied again, "Raiga buried people alive who didn't do what he said. He also cries bitterly and openly laments when he performs the funerals." When he finished talking, they heard the sound of a gong above the mountain, the place where they saw a building.

The man spoke again, "That's the funeral bell, yesterday Jin tried to kill Raiga, and that's why Raiga is doing his funeral. Jin thought that he could kill Raiga and free us all, but unfortunately, Raiga found it out. His funeral will take place on the other side of the mountain, where the cemetery is. Now if you'll excuse me, I must continue with my work, I won't be the next one." Then the man left to continue with his duties.

Naruto saw the man leaving, so he spoke, "Well, it seems that the information is correct. We'll give them the option to surrender, and if they don't do it, we'll use deadly force, which I hope we do. Now we have to hurry before they kill that poor bastard." Then all of them disappeared.

With Raiga

Right now, Raiga was crying at the peak of the mountain as he watched his men bring Jin to bury him while he said some words, "Jin...he was a good person. I remember when I said that I would save his mother, he was so happy. He was a good guy. I love funerals; they are very exciting." He finished, wiping the tears from his eyes.

Suddenly, he heard a voice on his back, "Raiga, some people are coming. They will show up soon."

Raiga raised an eyebrow at this and stated, "Hmm? Who can they be? I wasn’t aware that someone has betrayed me recently." After saying that, he continued watching the funeral.

With Naruto and the others

"Okay, you know the plan, just wait here and if they refuse… Well, you know what to do." Naruto said while the others nodded, seeing Naruto disappearing in a Shunshin.

The men who carried a white coffin stopped because right in front of them a small whirlwind of leaves appeared, and from there a redheaded boy came out. They lowered the coffin and stood in defensive stances.

Therefore, Naruto decided to introduce himself, "Hello, members of the Kurosuki clan. My name is Naruto. I’m here by order of the Hokage to expel you from this place and to see if you comply with this order. You may not agree with this, though, but you will pay the consequences of it."

They all openly laughed while one of them stood in front of Naruto and looked mockingly at him, "Ha! Konoha scum, as if there's anything you can do. Can't you see? We are more; we will kill you easi…" But the man's words ended there, because Naruto quickly unsheathed his katana from his waist, cutting the man's head off.

The blood spurted while the Kurosuki's saw all this with horror. Then they looked to where Naruto was, but he had already disappeared from the area. Instead of Naruto, now Neji, Tenten, and Lee were there. Meanwhile, one of the men fled from the place.

Neji didn't hesitate and quickly killed three of them with his Juuken. Tenten hesitated at first but at the end, she killed two of them with some explosives tags, while Lee only knocked-out the last one.

Naruto reappeared in that place as he evaluated his team, "Very well, Neji. I'm frankly surprised; behind that arrogant facade of yours, there is an excellent Shinobi. You too, Tenten. Don't feel bad for killing them, they were a bunch of bastards who deserved to die. As for you Lee, the order was clear, and I see that you haven't done it, disappointing me once again." Then he stabbed the man's heart that Lee didn't kill.

Tenten and Lee looked at him with eyes wide open, because he didn't seem to flinch, not even a little when he took the life of someone away. Neji just looked and began to respect the redheaded in silence.

Naruto turned around and spoke, "Okay, Lee. It seems that you can still prove yourself. There's one left behind those tombstones, go and kill him; it will be a good experience for you."

Lee didn't want to do it, but Naruto was right. Even if he hated to admit it, Lee would have to learn to do this at some point or another, or he wouldn't become the great ninja he wanted to be.

He quickly ran toward the man as he stretched out his arm. The man got scared, but just when Lee was about to give a mighty blow that might have broken his skull, he stopped and looked at the man who fell to the ground, revealing a person of about 16 years old or so.

Then Lee hesitated, "You are..." Naruto appeared next to Lee and asked, "Who is he?"

Lee then replied, "Well, he's Karashi-kun."

Naruto wasn't surprised, and then Neji and Tenten appeared. "So he's Karashi, then he and Sanshou-obaasan..." Tenten stated while the now identified as Karashi crossed his arms and looked away.

Lee then spoke, "Karashi-san. Is it correct that you've joined the Kurosuki clan by choice as Shanshou-baasan says? Is that correct?" Naruto rolled his eyes when he heard Lee's questions; it was obvious that he willingly joined; it was stupid to think otherwise.

Karashi then replied, "And what if I did? Raiga-sama is…" But he was interrupted because Naruto unsheathed his katana to behead him.

Karashi opened his eyes in horror and pure fear. But in an instant, Lee grabbed Naruto's katana, with both hands and with much difficulty, extracting some blood from his hands. He stopped the katana to mere millimeters from Karashi's face.

Lee then shouted, "Naruto-kun! Please! Don't be hasty, maybe this is a mistake. I don't believe that Karashi-san has done all those terrible things, please forgive him. I will be responsible for what he does from now on!" He then released the katana and bowed to Naruto.

Naruto sighed and pointed with his katana to Karashi, "Okay, but if he does something stupid again, I'll kill him, and I'll put in the report that you tried to help a criminal. Understood?"

Lee quickly nodded and thanked Naruto. He turned around to see Karashi who was pale; he shook him out of his stupor and exclaimed, "Please. Promise me that you will leave the Kurosuki clan!"

Karashi stood up, and then he bowed deeply, "I get it. I'm sorry, I'm sorry." Lee nodded happily and Naruto said, "I hope that you’ve said that seriously; I don't give second chances. If you try to betray me, then I'll kill you. Not even Lee will save you." Lee wasn’t worried because he trusted that Karashi wouldn’t betray him again, would he?

Karashi turned pale again and replied, "H-Hai, ninja-san." Naruto nodded and went to the coffin, seeing that this guy Jin was already dead, perhaps by suffocation.

While Neji saw Naruto checking the body, he felt the need to look up to the mountain. When he did it, he felt that some red eyes observed him.

Neji paused, got scared and asked, "What is this? What is this killing intent?"

Lee quickly approached to Neji and asked him if he was okay, while Naruto, who heard what he said, left the body in the coffin and approached Neji to answer his question. "Those are the next bastards who we have to kill. Don't tell me you got scared of that little killing intent? If you want, I can show you how it feels a real killing intent." Naruto amusingly said.

Neji, who realized his loss of composure, just growled at the comment, but he gave an imperceptible smile to Naruto, who spoke again, "All right, we just have to kill those two bastards and the ones who I presume that are in the compound near the mine. Now, let's finish this to return to the village."

They all nodded while Lee turned around to look at Karashi and said, "Karashi-san, please go back to Sanshou-baasan; she's waiting for you." He nodded and saw that Lee and the others started climbing to the top of the mountain.

After a while, Naruto and the others reached the top of the mountain and then Neji said, "There's no one here."

Naruto shook his head, "They’re here, but something or someone is hiding their presence. I stopped feeling them just when we began to fight with those idiots down there, but I knew that here are two more; they have hidden well."

Just then, a dense mist began to form around them; Naruto knew this technique well because he saw it many times in Kirigakure in his days as a Root member.

Then he heard a laugh and the name of the technique, "Kirigakure no Jutsu (Ninja Art: Hidden Mist Jutsu)." Naruto realized that Lee pulled out a notebook and gave information about the technique, which he already knew.

Naruto then commanded, "Neji, use your Byakugan and try to find the enemy." Neji had already activated his Byakugan, but Naruto couldn’t see it because the mist was very dense.

Neji, who had a look of frustration on his face, replied, "I can't! I've been trying it for a while, but I can't see anything." Lee was surprised and said that it was impossible that Neji's eyes couldn’t see through this jutsu.

Naruto had his suspicions and silently activated his Rinnegan.

With Raiga – Moments before

Raiga right now was in a slightly higher position than Naruto and the others, there he asked, "What do you see, Ranmaru?"

Suddenly, the same voice of before spoke from his back, "It's amazing. One of the four can see the energies of the others; it seems to be a Kekkei Genkai (Bloodline)."

"Can he see us?" Raiga asked.

Ranmaru shook his head and answered, "Don't worry about that. I have more power than he has." However, he stopped at that instant when he felt that some strange purple eyes with a ripple-like pattern were observing him.

Hence, Ranmaru nervously said, "R-Raiga, there is one more. He seems to have a powerful Doujutsu, n-not even mine is s-so p-powerful; he already found us, and he is heading here really fast. W-We must escape now or h-he will kill us."

Raiga was about to say something, but he heard Ranmaru's voice again, "Raiga, get down!"

Raiga instantly did what Ranmaru said, dodging the cut of a katana that went directed to his neck. He saw that the fog was still up, and then he saw someone in front of him. Therefore, he asked, "Who are you?"

Naruto wickedly smiled and replied, "Your worst nightmare!" He then threw another cut at Raiga, who blocked it with a strange katana.

Naruto assumed it was the Kiba (Fangs). But then he saw with amazement what happened next.

With Naruto – Moments earlier

Naruto had activated his Rinnegan without the others realizing it. Then he made something that he discovered just a few days ago. His pupils constricted, and in that instant, Naruto obtained the vision of the whole place.

He could clearly see the chakra flows around the area, and he saw from where it was coming from the thing that was interfering with his sensory abilities and Neji's Byakugan. He saw a man; he assumed it was Raiga. Thus, he quickly ran to that place while Neji and others were still unable to see him.

After a few seconds, he appeared in front of Raiga, unsheathing his katana from his waist to try to cut his head, but he heard another voice that warned Raiga.

He failed and prepared himself to continue with another attack, but Raiga asked, "Who are you?" He looked into Naruto's eyes, but he saw nothing that looked like a Doujutsu, which made him thought that he had turned them off, or that Ranmaru had made a mistake, but that had never happened before.

Naruto stopped for a moment as he maliciously smiled, "Your worst nightmare." He quickly threw another cut at Raiga, who blocked Naruto's cut with the Kiba (Fangs), and they began to glow brightly.

Naruto realized that he was using Raiton on his katana, so he did the same, but he was shocked when the Kiba cut his katana into two with ease.

Naruto leaped back and got angry; that katana had been special to him, but now it was nothing but trash.

Raiga then maniacally smiled and exclaimed, "I will remember your face deep in my heart. I will make a funeral for you! I am sure that I can cry for you!" He quickly ran toward Naruto, only to be repelled by a great force, which made him crash hard to the ground.

He noticed that Naruto had stretched out his hand, but he didn't know what technique it had been.

However, Raiga stopped thinking about it when he heard Ranmaru crying out in pain. He got scared and pulled Ranmaru off his back as he shouted, "Ranmaru! Ranmaru, are you okay?" He fearfully asked because Ranmaru received the full force of the impact.

Ranmaru opened his eyes just a little and gave a small smile as a trickle of blood dripped from the corner of his lips. He answered with difficulty, "R-Raiga *cough*...I t-told you if we stayed here, we would d-die. *Cough* All my bones are b-broken, *cough* *cough* *cough* I will not s-survive."

Raiga quickly grabbed him and stated, "Fool! You can't die! Not without I die before! Come on, Ranmaru! Resist! I'll get you out from here!" He said while shaking Ranmaru, who had closed his eyes and had stopped breathing.

Raiga realized that he was already dead, and then he shouted as he cried on Ranmaru's chest. Then he heard the boy's voice behind him. "You fucking bastard! Do you know what you have done? That katana was very special to me! It was the loot of my first kill! But now I'll take yours after I fucking kill you. You idiot!" Naruto exclaimed furiously.

Naruto Shippuden OST - Emergence of Talents

Raiga's mourning stopped as he turned to Naruto and looked at him with eyes full of anger while black-colored clouds appeared in the skies.

He raised his Kiba and yelled, "You'll pay for this! It's time for your funeral." At that, moment thunderbolts fell from the sky, and they wrapped Raiga, who then lowered his Kiba's and pointed them at Naruto before sticking them in the ground, sending the Thunderbolts toward Naruto.

Naruto saw the attack coming, and he smiled as he made some hand seals in a few seconds. It was time to try one of the jutsu of the scroll on a larger scale. He thanked that the mist was still around and that Neji and the others seemed to fight against nothing. However, he noticed that they realized of this because they had stopped.

He hurried to finish this for once. Naruto ended the seals and shouted the name of the jutsu, "Futon: Tatsumaki Shinsei (Wind Release: Sacred Whirlwind)!" Then a huge whirlwind, which furiously spun, appeared right in front of Naruto.

Naruto threw his technique toward Raiga and saw the whirlwind absorbing Raiga’s jutsu, combining itself with it, and now, instead of being a mere whirlwind, it was one with thunderbolts around. Naruto didn’t know that it was possible, so he found it impressive.

Raiga saw the whirlwind approaching at him. He could have escaped, but he had spent all his chakra on his last jutsu. Besides, there was no reason to continue fighting. Ranmaru was dead, and he couldn't do anything about it.

He threw his Kiba to the side because he saw that his opponent was worthy, and, therefore, Raiga would hand over the Kiba, which had to accept him as their new master, or he would suffer a painful death by electrocution.

The whirlwind was right in front of him, and he accepted his fate. The jutsu hit him and destroyed everything in its path, and a few moments later, the jutsu disappeared, along with the body of Raiga.

Naruto smiled with satisfaction when seeing the destructive power of his jutsu; he could have charged much more chakra, but that would have called the attention of the others.

He waited several minutes and then Tenten, Neji and Lee landed right in front of him. Neji looked at him with the same disinterested position, but Naruto realized there was a bit of respect and amazement in his eyes. Lee and Tenten had expressions of astonishment when they saw the destruction of the landscape.

Tenten spoke, "What happened here?"

With Neji - A Little Before

Neji and the others had stopped fighting after they noticed that they were struggling against no one. Neji also realized that Naruto wasn’t there.

He quickly looked with his Byakugan to the north and saw a man throwing a powerful Raiton jutsu toward Naruto. He could see Naruto doing some hand seals at an impressive speed before seeing something that left him in shock. A huge whirlwind appeared right in front of Naruto and then he threw it to the man, who received it entirely, tearing his body apart.

Neji at that moment knew that Naruto was someone extremely powerful and that he was someone who he couldn't beat right now. Neji asked to himself how he became so powerful; he would ask him later.

He came out of his stupor and told Tenten and Lee to follow him. They hadn't seen anything, but they had felt a strong wind gust. They nodded and followed Neji.

After running for a while, they were surprised to see the clearing where Naruto was. The mist was gone, so they could see everything clearly.

There were some marks, a little thin, on the ground, compared to the other ones, which were much bigger and thicker, right in the middle of the field. The more prominent mark began where Naruto was, and it ended further forward, right where the thinnest one originated. Then they all assumed what had happened there.

Tenten then asked, "What happened here?" Naruto looked into her eyes and replied, "I fought Raiga, I threw an attack at him, and he died. That was all. Now we're leaving here; we haven’t finished this mission yet."

Everyone looked at him with eyes widened, and Lee spoke this time, "Are you saying that you defeated a Kiri no Shinobigatana (Ninja Swordsmen of the Mist) by yourself? Woah Naruto-kun, your Flames of Youth are burning again!"

Naruto shrugged and stated, "That guy was feeble, and I guess he was only strong thanks to the child that was on his back. He seemed to have a kind of Doujutsu, which prevented Neji from seeing with his Byakugan and my sensory abilities. Well, now let's get the hell out of here!" Everyone nodded and didn't ask anything more.

Then he turned around as he walked away, completely forgetting the Kiba. Nonetheless, he suddenly heard a voice.

"What is that? Wow! Such beautiful swords; I think I'll take them." Tenten stated as she walked to grab the Kiba. However, Naruto moved at full speed and grabbed her hand.

Naruto looked at her and warned, "Tenten-chan, I recommend you not to touch these swords. I've heard that you seem to have difficulties in molding your chakra, and these swords need someone with a very powerful Raiton affinity. Otherwise, these swords would electrocute you until death. Trust me, don't touch them."

Tenten quickly pulled her hand away and then she watched in fear when Naruto grabbed both swords. But that expression changed to one of amazement when she saw some small bolts appearing and wrapping Naruto's arms for a moment, which didn't make him flinch. Then she saw that he pulled out a sealing scroll from his ninja bag, sealing the Kiba inside.

Naruto after doing that, spoke, "The bastard of Raiga broke my katana in two with his, and now I'm taking them. Apparently, they've accepted me as their new owner."

Tenten looked at him with surprise after remembering something. "Wait ...Can you also use Raiton?! That means that you can use four types of chakra nature! That’s awesome!" Tenten exclaimed admiringly.

Naruto froze and mentally cursed, "Stupid! Stupid! Stupid! Damn it! How did I forget something like that?" 

Then he heard another voice in his mind. "Ha! You're a fool; that's what you get for showing off in front of this girl. It seems that I’ve managed to weaken you regarding the opposite sex, eh?" Kurama amusingly asked in Naruto's mind, who groaned and answered, "Furball! Where the hell have you been? You've been silent these past few days. And well, just so you know, let's say you succeeded. What can I say? I love women, as long as they don't try to kill me or have bad intentions. But leaving that aside. What have you been doing these days that kept you silent?" Naruto curiously asked.

Kurama replied, "Well, I have been busy in the new place you gave me, I must say that this recreation area is refreshing. Besides being able to control my size inside your mind makes me enjoy it immensely. Now I just need some female company; I wonder if I can add Matatabi to this place..."

"Who?" Naruto asked Kurama, who replied, "Oh yes, she's the Nibi (Two-Tails), I can only say that she is hot, boy!"

Naruto sweat dropped and then asked, "Isn’t she your sister? Would you have sex with your own sister?" 

Naruto then heard a scandalous laugh in his mind and his sweat drop grew even more. "Hahaha, you silly human. For us, demons, those things mean nothing. We may have the same father, but we don't share that, which you call 'blood ties.' Now let's cut this conversation, it seems that the human girl is worrying."

Tenten looked with concern at Naruto because he stood completely still when she spoke about his other element. Perhaps it was something that he didn’t want her to know, so she quickly apologized, "Sorry Naruto-kun, I didn't know it was a secret. I promise you that I won’t tell anyone else." Then she saw Naruto shaking his head.

"Oh, don't worry about it, I just remembered something. But I would appreciate if you don't tell anyone about my fourth element; it's a secret, and Shinobi must keep their secrets," Naruto stated, and Tenten nodded.

Then they approached Lee and Neji, who were already waiting for them. Naruto then spoke, "Very well! Let's finish this!" Then they all disappeared from there, running towards Katabame’s village.

Near the Village - Three Minutes Later

Naruto and the others saw that all the villagers were at the entrance of the village, and Karashi was there waiting for them. Lee happily smiled when seeing that he was safe. Therefore, he ran with the others.

Naruto, for his part, felt multiple presences above them as they ran, so he guessed that this guy Karashi had broken his word, which meant his death.

With Karashi

Karashi watched with amusement as Lee and the others approached to their deaths. Karashi realized that one of the men who were there got up and shouted, "Ninja-san! Stay awa-" But Karashi quickly covered his mouth with his hands. One of the elders who were there looked at Karashi and expressed, "Karashi, I thought you had regretted."

Karashi snorted and replied, "And go back to my old self-selling curry? Now!" He shouted making a sign to the men at the peak. They nodded and threw huge rocks at Naruto and the others who were still running down the mountain.

With Naruto and the Others

They had seen what Karashi had done, and Naruto stated, "Lee, you know what this means..."

Lee was about to say something, but they all watched in horror as huge stones headed toward them. They could do nothing, or so they thought.

Naruto saw the stones, so he made hand seals at full speed. It was time to try another jutsu that he learned from the scroll.

When he finished making the seals, he placed his hands on the ground and shouted the name of the jutsu, just when the stones were about to hit them, "Doton: Taju Doryūheki (Earth Release: Multiple Earth-Style Wall)!" Then multiple earth walls emerged from the ground, protecting Naruto and the others, absorbing the full impact of the rocks. The walls resisted quite well since Naruto put enough chakra to withstand the attack of a powerful Raiton jutsu.

Tenten, Neji, and Lee looked in amazement at Naruto; they wondered how powerful he truly was. But after that, they sighed in relief because he saved them.

Naruto turned around, wiping the dust off his hands and then he stared at Lee, "Lee. You saw it, Karashi will die. You or I will kill him. You'll decide that as we kill the bastards who are there; you have three minutes."

Lee refused furiously, "But Naruto-kun! Karashi is my friend! You can't ask me to do this! What will I say to his mother?! We can't do this!"

Naruto didn't flinch and replied, "I don't give a fuck!" He almost sang, "We'll comply with the parameters of the mission! And if you oppose to this, then I'll kill you too! But for insubordination! I made my choice. Karashi won't live to see another day, and you'll accept this order without protesting!" Everyone was surprised again when hearing Naruto's commanding voice; they realized that they couldn't object anymore.

Neji now respected him more than before. Tenten could feel her heart racing as she watched this facet of Naruto, which seemed very attractive to her. And Lee began to hate Naruto, but he said nothing, he had to think about Karashi's.

His team leader gave him an order that he had to comply, even if he didn't like it. Lee didn't know if he would be able to kill his friend. Therefore, he started thinking about it.

Then the members of the clan Kurosuki appeared with satisfied smiles on their faces, because they had never seen Naruto's jutsu. Nor could they see the walls of earth, because the rocks covered them completely.

One of them then uttered, "Ha! That happens for screwing with us! Now everyone will learn that nobody messes with the-" But he was interrupted by Naruto, who had cut off the head of another person, but this time with his new possessions, the Kiba.

Naruto wiped the blood from his sword, as he looked at the others, who looked at him in terror. One of them shouted, "He has the Kiba of Raiga-sama! Let's run!" All of them nodded and started running in the opposite direction of the village.

Naruto and his team saw them running. Neji approached at Naruto and curiously asked, "Will we let them escape?"

Naruto shook his head as he made a few hand seals. He puffed out his chest and released the jutsu, "Katon: Gouryuuka no Jutsu (Fire Release: Great Dragon Fire Technique)." Naruto spat a great dragon of fire from his mouth, which went toward those men.

They could only scream in pain when they received the jutsu while being burned by it in an instant, no one survived, and when Naruto saw his work completed, he nodded.

Tenten then asked, "Naruto-kun, do you like killing people?" Naruto turned and looked at her and quietly replied, "Yes, I like it a lot, but I only kill the bastards who deserves it or annoys me. I'm not a bloodthirsty madman who only thinks of killing. I like to do it, but only to those who deserve it."

Tenten then asked again, "But, how do you get used to it? I still feel bad for killing those men back there. How do you do it?"

Naruto shrugged and replied, "Well, I don't know. Maybe after killing so many people, I stopped feeling sorry for them, but if you start killing innocent people, then you will become someone crazy and sanguinary, something that I haven't done yet, and I hope not to." Tenten nodded and kept those words in mind, which would help her a lot in the future when she had to kill someone else again.

Naruto then turned to Lee, who continued thinking about what he said, "So, Lee. Have you made up your mind yet? Who will be the one to kill that traitorous bastard? You or me?"

Lee dropped a tear and replied, "I-I can't do this Naruto. You can do it; I don't have the guts to kill my friends... I'm not a monster."

Naruto didn't care what Lee said at the end. If he wanted to be pathetic and sentimental right now, Naruto wouldn't care. That would be good for him, and maybe he would stop being so stupid. "Okay, let's go and finish with this so that we can return to the village once and for all!" He shouted as he started running toward the village.

None of the others moved until Tenten shouted, "Lee! Why did you say those things to Naruto-kun?! He's right! That boy broke his word, and Naruto-kun clearly said what would happen if he did that! You don't have reasons to be angry!"

Neji nodded and added, "Tenten is right, Naruto-san warned you what would happen if he broke his word. Now let's follow him to end this."

But then they heard Lee speaking in a entirely voice different from his usual self, "Shut up! Everyone in the village is right. He's nothing more than a demon! Someday I'll take care of him! And not even you, demon lovers, will be able to do something."

When he said that, Tenten growled angrily and exclaimed, "What the hell is wrong with you, Lee?! Don't talk about Naruto-kun in that way! It's thanks to that kind of mentality that he's so cold now. I don't blame him; I understand him. And now if you're done with your pathetic lament, let's finish this mission."

Lee glared at Tenten, who seemed to be about to attack Lee.

Neji, however, decided to put a stop to this. Although he didn't like being called a 'demon lover,' he said nothing about it and seriously spoke, "That's enough you two! Understand Lee. This is part of your mission, and this will make you grow. And you Tenten, don't insult Lee. Now let's go!" Lee and Tenten nodded and followed Naruto, who was waiting for them more to the front.

Naruto had heard the whole conversation from his place; he couldn't help but smile, maybe he could trust Tenten after all and Neji seemed to respect him. As for Lee, perhaps he would stop being so foolish, and if so, he would become a splendid ninja. He didn't care if Lee hated him now, he wanted Lee to become stronger, so then Lee might be able to give him an exciting battle in the future.

He went out of his thoughts when the others appeared in front of him. He indicated them to follow him, and they quickly arrived at the village.

When they arrived, they saw the villagers surrounding Karashi, who had a look of horror when he saw Naruto there and was even more after seeing what he had done to his mates. Nevertheless, he sighed with relief when he saw Lee with them; maybe he could save him again.

Naruto cut distance with Karashi and declared, "By order of the Hokage, for being a member of the Kurosuki clan and for wasting the opportunity to leave when you could, I sentence you to death."

Karashi turned even paler and replied with a nervous laugh, "B-but i-it was just a joke! You didn't take it seriously, did you? Hehehe…"

He looked at Lee, who didn’t seem to have the same bright look in his eyes, "Come on, Lee. Tell your friend that it was just a joke; tell him to forgive me, you know me." He saw that Lee clenched his fists but said nothing.

Naruto then spoke, "I'm sorry, but Lee-san can't do anything. I've given him an order which he must fulfill. Now I will give you the opportunity to commit seppuku or allow me to kill you. What do you prefer?" He muttered as he took one of his Kiba out of the scroll.

In that instant, Karashi began to shed tears, holding Lee's legs tightly, "Please, Lee! Help me! Don't let him kill me. Please! I will do the Curry of Life as before! But don't let him kill me, please!" Karashi begged as more tears flowed. Lee ignored him, but it was obvious that he was crying too.

Naruto then spoke again, "Well, I will do it... Neji, Tenten," He said, attracting their attention, "Hold the boy while I do this."

Both nodded and took Karashi away from Lee, who clenched his fists again, but, this time, extracting blood from them.

Karashi started screaming to let him go; that he wouldn’t do it again. However, Naruto just ignored him and continued, "I should cut your head off, but I met your mother. Therefore, I won't do it. I will allow her to see your miserable face after this. I will stab you in the heart. Don't worry; you will feel nothing. You should have thought twice before ignoring my warning. See you in hell…Goodbye."

After that, he stabbed Karashi right in the heart. As Naruto had said, Karashi felt nothing, since he had died almost instantly. Neji and Tenten released the body when it was over, and they could see that Lee had a blank expression on his face.

Lee approached the body and picked it up before taking it elsewhere.

Naruto then spoke, "Okay, all of you, your village is now safe. We’ll now withdraw from this place. Neji, Tenten, it’s time to return to our village. It’s still quite early, and we can get there before the sun goes down. Let's go back to the old woman's house to take Lee with us; I think he went to that place."

Tenten and Neji nodded and followed Naruto, who ran toward the curry restaurant, ignoring the shouts of joy for the Konoha ninja.

Thirty Minutes Later - Curry Restaurant

Naruto, Neji, and Tenten had arrived a few minutes ago, to see the body of Karashi in the room and with his mother crying on his chest. Meanwhile, Lee was just standing there doing nothing.

Naruto didn't care that this woman was crying by the death of her son, so he said, "Lee, it's time to return to the village, after that, you will also be able to whine the death of this bastard. Now we’ll head back to the village, and when I say this, I mean now. It's an order, you too Neji and Tenten. Follow me." They nodded and followed Naruto silently.

Lee clenched his fists again as he thought, "Damn demon! I swear that you will pay, and those who call themselves my teammates and friends too! But you Naruto...you will pay more; this is your entire fault!" After that, he knelt down and hugged tightly the old woman, who was still crying.

Lee then said that he would come to the funeral of Karashi within a few days since he wanted to give his goodbyes to her son. After that, he got up and followed Naruto and the others.

Hokage Office – Three Hours Later

Right now, Naruto had ended his report to the Hokage, who nodded to all his words, feeling proud of Naruto by completing another mission without problems. Besides, hearing from the other team members about his qualities as a leader increased that feeling. Lee said nothing at any point, which was strange.

Minato had been thinking about the reactions he was having with Naruto, and he thought that maybe he had made a mistake thirteen years ago. However, he couldn't just go and tell him that he was his father.

First he had to be sure he wasn't wrong and then make up for all those years that he couldn’t be there for him. It was a shame that he didn’t know that Naruto knew that he was his father and that Naruto cared little about his 'love.'

Minato then spoke, "Okay, you have obtained the Kiba. Unfortunately, neither Kiri nor I can do something because one of the legendary swords have chosen their master, and it seems that they have accepted you as their new owner. Don't worry, Kiri won't say anything about that; you can have them for now. They will ask it back once you die or lose them somewhere so Kiri can retrieve them. Now dismissed."

Then they all began to leave from his office, all towards their respective houses.

They were all exhausted, and everyone had a lot to think about, and the common subject was Naruto, who now was smiling and mentally talking, "Heh! It seems that this stupid mission was productive, after all. I could get my hands on one of the legendary swords and besides that, I found out something interesting...I think you’ve also noticed it. Right, Kurama?" He asked his tenant, who nodded. 

"Indeed. It seems that your daddy is starting to realize that you're his son after all, and not just my incarnation. This will be funnier than I thought."

Naruto just nodded at Kurama's words as he continued to his apartment. He had a lot to do yet, read the scroll, master the last step of the Rasengan and get some blood from his father to see the technique that made him famous.

With that in mind, he continued walking to his apartment.

Notes:

Sorry for the delay.

Hmm… About the talk between Naruto and Tenten, you'll know why she was so horny in chapter 7.

When Naruto talked with Tenten about killing people, he said that he didn't kill innocent people, but that was a lie, he didn't want to give bad advice to Tenten.

The sudden change of Lee was because his friend was killed in front of him and he could do nothing to avoid it. And besides all what he heard about Naruto in the village made him accept that as a fact. Lee will be very OOC in my fic. I won’t bash him, never! Lee is awesome.

And you noticed Neji was a little OOC in the confrontation with Tenten and Lee, but in the next chapter, you will know why he is not a 100% bastard.

About the elements of Naruto, only Minato and Danzō know that he can use the five elements. So he wants to keep that as a secret. The people may think that he can use Raiton just because the Kiba.

About the poll, it was obvious that you people would vote yes to Kushina (I will close the poll when I update the new chapter of the original story).

Goodbye.

Chapter Text

Person talking - "Hello everyone."

Person thinking - "Damn you all!"

Demon talking - "I will eat you."

Demon thinking - "This tastes worse than shit!"

Disclaimer: I do not own Naruto, Masashi Kishimoto does.

Chapter 6

Konohagakure No Sato - One Month Later

One month had passed since the mission in which Naruto had obtained the Kiba, a month in which he did many missions with Anko. Besides that, he had practiced some seals from the Fuinjutsu section of the scroll.

There weren't much, but at least, it had the basics, like the correct use of the brushes, the appropriate calligraphy and some practice seals, which he improved quite a bit, like explosive tags and storage seals.

This art was extremely easy for him. His calligraphy was perfect, it always had been, and Kurama had said it was due to his Uzumaki blood. Thanks to his father and the seal he used on him, besides his Rinnegan, those factors increased his qualities and Uzumaki blood to the limit. Kurama had said that maybe that was the reason his hair had turned red.

He needed new seals to practice because he had already learned all those that were in the scroll. Kurama told him to go to the ruins of Uzushiogakure (Hidden Eddy Village), but Naruto knew he couldn't go there just like that. No, he didn't want to raise suspicions that he knew about his Uzumaki blood. Besides, he didn't want that his 'daddy' asked him unnecessary questions.

He needed the help of someone, and that someone was Danzō. After four years, he would have to see the old man again.

He had also mastered the third and final step of the Rasengan in this month; it had been by accident. He was so frustrated about not being able to keep the chakra in the palm of his hand when he was about to throw a Shinra Tensei and destroy something.

But he had forgotten to cancel his Rasengan, and by adding some gravity chakra into the palm of his hand, he realized that the Rasengan had absorbed some of that chakra, and it was able to stay still without leaking.

The result was a happy Naruto and several trees and rocks destroyed in the Forest of Death thanks to his new jutsu. He wouldn't be able to use that jutsu in public, though, because if he did, people would know that he had stolen the Hokage scroll.

Naruto had also practiced with his Kiba. He noticed that it was a very easy weapon to use if the user had a strong affinity in Raiton. He wanted to try to see if he could add another element to his Kiba, but until now, it was impossible. Naruto thought that he first had to learn to master his elements, something that Naruto would have to learn quickly.

He also increased his gravity seals several times. Naruto hadn't tested yet how fast and strong he was at this point. He had decided to keep the seals activated, and deactivate them only when the time required it.

But not everything had been missions and training, many interesting things happened during this month. First, Naruto had spoken with Ino about Tenten; he didn't see the reason for it, but he did it just because he promised Tenten.

Ino wasn't angry; he knew that she wouldn't be because he had made it clear some time ago. Ino saw nothing wrong as long as Naruto spent time with her, which he almost couldn't do because Ino's father had heard about their relationship and he didn't let her spend much time with him.

It was different with Tenten; her parents were civilians who had come to the village after the Kyūbi attack. So they didn't hate him, nor see anything wrong with Tenten dating him. Naruto didn't do anything "extreme" with Ino and Tenten yet, but it wouldn't be for long.

Naruto had also seen the Sandaime and his grandson sometimes. It turned out that the boy wanted to become Hokage just so that the people would stop seeing him as the "Honorable Grandson." Naruto said nothing, but he would ensure to have that child as an ally. He would be someone important in the village, and Naruto should have an ally like him.

But undoubtedly, the most interesting thing that happened was a talk he had with certain Hyūga a few days ago.

Naruto was sitting on a bench in one of the parks of the village as he remembered that day.

Flashback Two Weeks Ago

Right now Naruto was practicing with his Kiba; he had discovered how to throw thunderbolts out of them, but the power wasn't the desired one yet. He didn't train with Anko because he didn't want to bother her at her work in the T&I department. Besides, there was little that she could teach him.

She had tried to teach him her jutsu, but he needed the snakes' contract, and Naruto could not sign it. Therefore, she let Naruto train on his own since she didn't want to bother him.

Naruto then stopped because he felt that someone had been watching him for quite a while, and he knew whom he was.

He couldn't have come at a better time, "Aren't you bored of admiring me? Or do you still want to watch me among the trees? Eh...Neji?" Naruto asked without turning around.

When he said that, Neji landed where Naruto was and replied, "You're not what the people say; it seems that you're not a loser."

Naruto raised an eyebrow. "Well, you know how the idiots in this village are; they're 'good' at judging people. Tell me Neji, do the people of this village judge you?" Naruto asked as he approached Neji.

Neji crossed his arms and answered, "Why would they do that? Didn't you hear? I'm the genius among the Genin; I'm the best." He said the latter arrogantly.

Naruto shook his head and replied, "Well, that wasn't what I heard. I've heard that you're just a slave of this village, merely cannon fodder. Besides, you're not the best, and that's the reason you're here today." Naruto now stood right in front of him

Neji became enraged by his comment and abruptly said, "What's wrong with you?! Who dared to say that? Besides, I'm stronger than you! I just wanted to know a little more about you because you were not the loser I had believed!"

Naruto shook his head again and responded, "That's what you think, Neji. But, do you want to know who said what I've heard? Very well. They were the same people who say that you are the 'genius' of the Hyūga clan and the most powerful among the Genin. But let me tell you something, Neji; you will never be a 'genius' or a 'prodigy' for them. They will only see you as the slave that this village forced you to be when they placed that seal on your forehead."

When Naruto said the latter, Neji unconsciously touched his forehead. However, Naruto kept speaking, "Yeah, right there. Did you think I wouldn't know something like that? Neji, you and I are alike. We both have seals, which separate us from society. Society, which sees you as a slave and cannon fodder, and me as the 'weapon' that will defend this village someday, a village that has despised me since my birth. Besides that, we both want power, and I know that there is a shred of resentment at this village within you and that your greatest desire is to make everyone pay." Naruto stated, looking straight into the eyes of Neji.

Neji didn't look away. "You're wrong; you may be right on some points, but I don't feel any resentment towards this village. Tell me, why would I have that feeling?" Neji asked; he supposed the reason, but there was no way that Naruto could know it.

Naruto mentally smiled, but he kept his cold gaze and answered, "For killing your father and sending him to do something he didn't want to?"

Neji's eyes opened in shock as his hands began to tremble, but Naruto continued speaking, "Didn't you know Neji? This village killed your father! And for their own interests! They didn't care about your dad nor you! Thanks to this village, your mother killed herself! Thanks to this village, your life has been a misery!" Naruto stated, raising his voice even more.

Neji retorted, "You're lying! Hiashi-sama gave me a letter from my father! He wrote that he wanted to be free from his bonds, and that's why he agreed to be the replacement of Hiashi-sama! You're lying!" Neji replied, taking a few steps backward.

Naruto shook his head and answered, "Neji, that's what the idiot of Hiashi made you believe. Did you think that your father wrote that note? Your father didn't even have time to write something because they quickly did the exchange! An Uchiha faked his handwriting! Someone with the Sharingan can do it easily. Do you think that your father would have left you, his beloved son and your mother, alone to your fate? No, Neji. The village sacrificed your dad; they believed that your family was serving its purpose, as cannon fodder!"

"NOOOOOO!" Neji shouted as he threw a weak punch at Naruto, who caught it easily. Naruto could see that Neji had some tears in his eyes, so he said something to culminate it.

"Your dear cousin Hinata has also lied to you all this time. What did she tell you, that she would join the Hyūgas? That was another lie, Neji. If you didn't know, the son of the Yondaime is engaged to your dear cousin, and once they're married, your cousin will join to the Hokage's family, and she won't be able to do anything to change your family." Naruto stated, whispering at Neji, who had collapsed to the ground while shedding some tears.

He couldn't believe it; he didn't know any of this. Why did Hinata lie to him? After all the work that had cost him to accept her. He was aware that she was in love with the son of the Hokage, but he didn't know that it was that far. He also wondered how Naruto knew all this, and he was about to ask about it when Naruto spoke again.

"Neji, everyone in this village has been lying to you all this time. Join me, Neji. Together; we can make these bastards pay. The bastards who have made us suffer for their own interests without regarding our feelings. I promise you that I will give you the power that you want. I also promise you that I will remove that seal on your forehead."

Neji was surprised when he heard Naruto's promises, and he could only ask, "How?"

Naruto looked at him. "How about if I give you the scroll with all the Hyūga techniques? I can get it for you; it wouldn't be difficult. As for the other, I will see how, but I promise you that sooner or later, that seal will disappear from your head." Naruto replied firmly.

Neji didn't understand why Naruto wanted to do this, so he asked, "Why are you doing all this, Naruto? You don't even know me." Neji lowered his head slightly.

Naruto shook his head and replied, "Because I'm tired of this fucking village taking advantage of people! These bastards have done the same thing to my sensei! A woman who has given everything for this village. And how do they pay her? Calling her the 'Snake Whore.' Or to me, the 'Demon Brat.' To Me! The one that prevents these idiots from suffering the wrath of a demon fox. These hypocritical people make me sick, and it sicken me even more that they believe that their attitude doesn't affect anyone or has no consequences! So join me, Neji. I promise you that we are going to make those, who have taken advantage of us, pay." Naruto then extended his hand to Neji.

Neji looked at Naruto's hand for a moment; he wasn't sure about this, but then he remembered what Naruto said and quickly grabbed Naruto's hand. He decided to follow Naruto from this day onward.

Naruto had opened his eyes, and he knew that Naruto was right. He always had thought that it was strange that his father had left him, and his mother to their fate, even the letter of his father had left him unsatisfied. But now that Naruto told him all this, he realized that Hiashi deceived him and that his father never agreed with anything that had happened.

Neji then stared at Naruto before kneeling to say firmly, "I promise that I will follow you, Naruto-sama. I'll do anything you ask."

Naruto mentally smiled and Kurama as well, but then he shook his head and replied, "Ah-ah-ah-ah, no 'Naruto-sama,' just Naruto, okay? You won't be my servant; you'll be my right hand. My servants will be others, and you won't be part of them. Got it Neji?"

Neji nodded, "Hai, Naruto-san. But let me ask you. Why do you want me to be your right hand?"

Naruto looked at him and shook his head again. Neji apparently didn't understand that he didn't want to hear honorifics coming from him, but better 'san' than 'sama.'

He knew that Neji wouldn't stop calling him that, so he replied, "Because I always respected you, Neji. Though I saw you as an arrogant bastard, I knew the reason. Also, as I said, we're alike, and those that are equal stands together."

Neji nodded and asked another question. "If you don't mind, Naruto-san, how do you know all this? How do you know that my father didn't want to be part of that day?"

Naruto scratched his head and then replied, "Okay, I'll tell you. But you can't tell anyone about this. ANYONE or we're both dead, understood?" Naruto asked Neji, who quickly nodded.

Naruto sighed and continued, "As you know, I'm the container of the Kyūbi."... "Sorry Kurama, I know you don't like that title, but it's just to talk to him." Kurama nodded and allowed Naruto continue with his explanation.

Neji nodded, everyone in the village knew about it. Only someone very young, or foreigners didn't know it. Hence, he let Naruto continue.

"Tell me Neji, what have you heard about me? Where did they say that I've been all this time that I haven't been in the village?" Naruto asked.

Neji quickly replied, "From what I heard, you were on a trip. But I think it was a lie because it's strange that they would give you permission to leave the village. So, where have you been?"

Naruto nodded and stated, "That's another reason I respect you; you're very perceptive. You're right, I've never been on a trip, I was in a secret organization of the village for three years, I was in the Root ANBU, a group led by Danzō Shimura, the man who trained me and who helped me to shape my skills."

Neji got surprised. That explained a lot about Naruto's abilities, if he previously was an ANBU, even if it was a secret one, he knew it wasn't a game to be there, and maybe those ANBU were better than those that everyone knew. But this still didn't answer his question, so he just nodded.

Naruto then continued, "Okay, now I'll tell you how I know all this, so don't interrupt me. Well, when the whole incident happened between Kumo and Konoha, my 'leader' had assigned me one of my first missions of great importance. I was supposed to spy on the Head Ninja of Kumogakure, and if he tried something against the village, I was supposed to assassinate him." Naruto paused for a second and then continued.

"As you know, this man wanted to kidnap the heir of the Hyūga clan, who in this case was your cousin Hinata. I found this out before he affected his plan, so I decided to assassinate him right after he did the kidnapping and left the village. Afterward, I would have brought Hinata back to the village, to avoid suspicion against the village. But unfortunately, the head of the Hyūga clan wasn't among my plans, and I never knew that that moron could act so imprudently, killing a diplomat from a country with which they had just achieved 'peace.' After that, I returned to my base, to report to my leader about my failure, but then he told me that that wasn't my real mission and that he knew that the head of the Hyūga clan would do that. What he wanted was to know was what would be the decisions of the commanding heights of the village to solve this problem, and he wanted me to tell him all of it."

Naruto sighed and continued, "After that, Kumo had demanded the head of the Hyūga clan leader as compensation, as you already know, Neji. The Hokage didn't want to accept this, and he was about to send everything to hell and invade Kumo, but then Hiashi gave a solution, and guess what the solution was, Neji." Naruto paused as he looked at Neji.

Neji thought about it a moment and then his eyes widened in shock. "Do you mean that he offered my father? Did he offer my dad to make peace?!" Neji shouted as he clenched his fists.

Neji clenched them even more when he heard Naruto's response.

Naruto nodded and replied, "Indeed, you're right, Hiashi gave your father's head on a silver platter, just to save his miserable ass. One of the councilor idiots, Mitokado Homura, gave the 'great' idea of using an Uchiha to falsify your father's handwriting to give it to your mother. But unfortunately, they realized that your mom had heard everything, and, sadly, she 'killed herself.' That was another big lie Neji, the village killed her, and they made it appear that she did it. I'm sorry for not telling you this at first, but I couldn't tell you the truth without you hearing the story. Anyway, after killing your mother, they gave the letter to Hiashi, and he would take care of giving it to you after the funeral of your parents. But before that, they gave some strong drugs to your father, to make him lose the ability to speak, but also to kill him as he arrived at Kumo. They did not only kill your father, but they also made him suffer until his death. Then I reported all this to my leader because he believed that he could use that information in the future." Naruto stated, finishing his story, waiting for Neji's response.

He realized that Neji just stood still in his place, with his head down, and just when he was about to say something else, Neji spoke again, "So...that's what they did? And aren't you lying?"

Naruto nodded and replied, "Yes, nothing that I have said is a lie. I have an excellent ability that allows me to suppress my chakra in its entirety, and that was the reason my leader assigned me that mission and the reason I wasn't detected."

But Neji then shouted, "I swear by my parents that this village will pay for what they have done, especially that idiot of the Hokage and-" Neji stated. But Naruto interrupted him saying " Ah-ah-ah, no-no-no, that idiot is mine, my dear friend. I'll make him pay, don't worry about it; you can take care of the idiots behind all this, Hiashi and the elders of your clan." Naruto said.

Neji nodded. But he wanted to know why Naruto wanted to make the Hokage pay, perhaps for sealing the Kyūbi inside him. He decided not to ask, he would leave that for another time, so he said. "Okay Naruto-san, you already have my word, I hope you fulfill yours. Let me know when you get that scroll, and when you can remove the seal of my head, maybe we can do the same with all the members of the branch family and get more allies."

Naruto nodded and replied, "Don't worry, I will give you that scroll soon, I know very well where Hiashi hides it; I was often in your compound. And you're right, we may get more allies with the branch family, so you have to be a leader for them, but don't raise suspicion. Remember not to talk to anyone about this, and don't do anything stupid prematurely. When the time comes, this village will fall, and we will be those who will take care of bringing justice to this place."

After finishing talking, Naruto and Neji decided to train a bit with their Taijutsu.

Flashback End

Naruto smiled when remembering that. Without a doubt, Neji would be one of his biggest allies; he didn't lie about anything that he had said. He had observed Neji a lot when he was on his missions because Neji was somewhat like him, on how this filthy village had ruined his life and killed his mother.

After a few years, he had talked much with Kurama about his mother. Though he knew that Kurama didn't like to speak about it, by what Kurama said, his mother loved him, and Naruto loved his mother. For him, she was the only one who deserved his love. She had given her life to him and also, she had tried to prevent his 'daddy' from sealing Kurama within him, or at least, not do all the nonsense that he did.

He had thought much about the technique of the Nidaime Hokage and bring his mother to live for a moment, to talk to her. But for now, it was impossible. The technique was too complicated, he had to learn a lot more about seals to use it, and he had to talk with Danzō one of these days, so he could get a 'mission' for him to go and get his inheritance in Uzushiogakure.

He pulled those thoughts away, as he decided to go and see what Ino was doing. He didn't see her much because of her father; he knew that her father didn't hate him, but he thought his reasons were stupid, she was already a damn ninja; she could do whatever she wanted.

He rose up from the bench and walked out the park. He noticed the glares he was receiving, so he let his killing intent flow, just enough to freeze the people in the area. After that, he went to the training camp in which Ino usually trained with her team.

Training Camp 23

Chouji, Shikamaru, and Ino were resting on the ground after a day of training with Asuma. All were surprised when Ino asked for a real training and stop lazing around so much.

Almost nobody liked Ino's idea, each for different reasons. Shikamaru because that was "troublesome." Chouji because he disliked training hard and Asuma because he was as lazy as Shikamaru was.

After spending some time on the ground, Chouji spoke, "So, Ino. Is it true that you and Naruto have something going on? We have never talked about it since we became a team. Besides, we never saw you with him. They're just bad rumors, right?"

Ino was surprised at first by the question, but then she replied, "So what if I have a thing with him? That's not your problem; you guys shouldn't care who I'm dating with."

Shikamaru, who was listening to all this, stated, "How troublesome you women are."

Ino looked at Shikamaru and asked, "What was that Shika? Why am I troublesome, uh?!"

Shikamaru sighed, "Well, everyone knows that this guy Naruto is pretty troublesome. Besides all those rumors out there about him, and what Menma's father tells him about this guy makes me see him as someone very troublesome."

Ino growled and stated, "Yes, they're just rumors. You guys don't know him! He can be quite sarcastic most of the time, but he is a gentleman, and he never disrespected me or made sarcastic remarks about me. Maybe you guys should ask him some tips to get a girlfriend to stop being so bitter."

Asuma, who was listening to the whole conversation, decided to give his point of view, as he lit a cigarette and dragged a bit of it. "Ino..." He said as he released the smoke in their faces, making them start to cough.

"They're right, that guy isn't convenient for you. You should find someone else. I've heard that you were in love with the Uchiha boy before Naruto joined the academy; maybe you should try your luck with him again." He finished as he took another drag.

Ino shouted annoyingly, "What's wrong with you, guys?! Why do I have to be your subject of conversation so suddenly?! Besides, if he is like that, it's because of people like you! The only thing you've done is judge him! And I don't like that stupid Uchiha! For me, he should drown in his own arrogance."

Asuma shook his head and replied, "Ino, I'm just saying this for your wellbeing. Nothing good will come out if you hang out with that boy." He finished, releasing his cigarette smoke in the face of all of them.

Everyone started coughing again, and when Ino was about to tell him to stop doing that, she saw a thunderbolt appear, which went at full speed toward Asuma, who jumped back to avoid the attack.

When he thought everything was fine, he felt a kunai on his back along with the voice of a person, "Asuma-san, I can allow you and those two little bastards talk all you want about me. But I can't allow you to harm the health of my woman in such a disrespectful way. Did you know that I care a lot about her health and wellness? And the poor idiots who try to do the opposite to her, they're better off dead."

Asuma in that instant felt the kunai on his back starting to move to stab him, and faster than anyone could have seen, Asuma pulled out his blades from his sleeves and stabbed Naruto, who was behind him.

All were surprised when seeing Asuma's reaction, especially Ino, who was about to run in that direction. However, she felt a hand on her shoulder as well as a well-known voice, which made her heart start beating faster, "Hehehe, wow Asuma-san! I didn't think you would react in such a way. I must say that you have good reflexes. Anyway I was telling the truth when I said that I don't want you to throw that damn poison at Ino. If you do it again, I will make sure not to fail the next time." Naruto stated as he looked at Asuma, who still had his Chakra Blades on his hands.

Asuma then approached at Naruto, who was staring at him. "For doing something as foolish as that, I could call ANBU and make them lock you up for a while. But if I do that, my father would be angry with me. You're lucky that my father appreciates you, or else I would have made sure to put you in your place a while ago, brat," Asuma stated.

Naruto chuckled, "I doubt you can put me in my place. Now that I think about it... How is it that someone as pathetic as you are was able to become a Jounin? Perhaps your father just felt sorry for you and gave you the rank when he still was the Hokage." That was a lie, and Naruto knew that he was someone very powerful who could give him a good fight. But Naruto just wanted to piss him off.

Shikamaru and Chouji thought that Naruto was crazy to challenge a Jounin like that, and they thought that maybe he already wanted to die. But Ino knew that Naruto just wanted to annoy her sensei. She could easily tell when he was trying to get on someone's nerves, but she didn't know who would win in a fight between them. From what she had seen, Naruto was someone much stronger than a Genin, but her sensei was a Jounin, so she wasn't sure who would win, but she trusted Naruto.

Meanwhile in Asuma's mind, Naruto's words were repeatedly repeating, but then he decided to speak, "Looks like you're very brave. What do you say if we fight here and now?" The truth was that he believed Naruto was just showing off, according to reports from the academy, he was nothing special. Besides the Kyūbi within him, there was nothing special about this guy. Yes, he had heard that Naruto had beaten someone named Raiga, but for what he heard, that man was just a C-rank ninja and that he only obtained one of the Legendary Swords by pure luck.

Then he spoke again, "Very well. brat. Let's see if you can back up those words of yours." He said as he stood in battle stance and put his Chakra Blades on his hands.

Naruto smiled and went into a fighting stance, as he pulled out his Kibas to point them at Asuma, "Those Chakra Blades won't work against my Kiba, even if you put Fuuton on them. My Kiba will cut them easily; they're much stronger than yours." With that said, his Kiba began to glow.

Asuma was surprised to hear this; he didn't know that Naruto was aware of these things. Besides that, he had one of the Legendary Swords; he couldn't be overconfident; a false hit could cost him dearly.

Meanwhile, Ino and the others moved away, and Shikamaru stated, "How troublesome, it seems that sensei will kill your boyfriend, Ino. Why don't you go and do something?"

Ino turned her head and replied, "I trust Naruto-kun. I've trained a few times with him, and I know that he's strong. I can say that his level is higher than a Chunnin; he's just holding back a lot. Besides that, every time I trained with him, he was also holding back. He still hasn't shown me all his skills and I hope to see them soon." She didn't say that because she was a fan of Naruto or something. Ino said that because she was sure of it and she knew that Naruto could do those things and more.

Shikamaru blinked a few times and then replied, "I think you're just exaggerating. Yes, Naruto is strong, perhaps stronger than any of our generation, but I don't think he is as strong as you say. How troublesome, it seems that they will start, just don't cry to me when sensei kills Naruto."

Then Shikamaru proceeded to sit under one of the trees to watch everything while Ino glared at him and Chouji paid attention to the fight.

In that instant, Naruto and Asuma took a great leap forward to attack each other, but they abruptly stopped when a great puff of smoke appeared among them.

When the puff of smoke cleared, they could see three ANBU standing there. Naruto only recognized one of them and exclaimed, "Ah, what a nice surprise, Usagi-chan! I was getting worried; we haven't seen each other for a week."

Yugao chuckled and replied, "I'm sorry, Naruto-kun, but you haven't had recent missions in all that time. So I couldn't see you. Besides, you were well hidden this week. Anyway, I can see you were about to have some fun around here. What did I tell you Naruto-kun?"

"Yeah, yeah, yeah, yeah... 'No fighting between Shinobi of the Village, if it isn't approved by the Hokage or a superior.' But he's the one to blame." Naruto replied pointing to Asuma, who was surprised that Naruto was blaming him for something that he had started. "That idiot was poisoning my woman, and that's something that I can't allow! I had to put him in his place, but you came, and you've missed the beating that I would have given him."

Naruto's lack of respect made Asuma angry, and he was about to shut him up, but Yugao spoke again. "Well, Naruto-kun. That might be true, but don't do it again. Do it for me, if you do it, I'll give you a big bottle of Sake (rice wine)."

Hearing this last statement, Naruto quickly regained his composure and stated, "Consider it done." To be honest, Naruto had no taste for almost anything, but one day he drank some Sake and from that day on it had become his favorite drink, and the mere mention of it made Naruto thirsty.

Yugao took out a bottle of Sake from her ninja bag and handed it over to Naruto, who quickly pulled it out of her hands. He took a big gulp and then exclaimed, "Aaah! This is why I love you, Usagi-chan! You're the best, never change. But tell me, where did you get this wonderful sample?" Naruto asked taking a sip.

Yugao blushed slightly at Naruto's words but then replied, "That's a secret, Naruto-kun. But that isn't the reason I came here, Hokage-sama has requested your presence immediately in the Hokage tower."

Hearing this, Naruto instantly felt deflated. "Damn it! I didn't want to see that idiot for at least several months! Uh, oh yeah, sure Usagi-chan! I will go there immediately. Just let me say goodbye to someone, and then I'll follow you."

Yugao nodded as she watched Naruto walking away. Asuma, who had seen all their interaction, approached her and stated, "It seems that you get along very well with the boy. But, he's too young to drink Sake."

Yugao cocked her head toward Asuma and answered, "Yes, we get along very well; I'm the only ANBU, who can approach him, without him simply ignoring them or ends up attacking them. That's why I'm the ANBU assigned to contact him, and we don't want unnecessary fights. I don't know the reason for that, but I would advise you to stop doing whatever you did to that girl. Naruto-kun can be very protective, and when someone makes him angry, he can be very dangerous. Not for nothing he has those Katana. Besides, he said that if he was old enough to kill, then why couldn't he drink? I didn't see anything wrong and every time he did things well, I gave him a small bottle of Sake. He's not as people say; you just have to know how to approach him." Yugao answered.

Meanwhile, Naruto had grabbed Ino and had walked away from all of them. When Naruto and Ino were at a proper distance, he asked, "Hello, sweetie. How have you been? Does your father still don't allow you to see me?"

Ino, who for several days had been unable to be alone with Naruto, could not help but jump on Naruto and kiss him passionately. After a few seconds, she pulled back a little and replied, "Yes, but what can I do? It's my father; he's just overprotective. I've missed you so much these days and thanks for defending me back there. The truth is I also was upset with Sensei, although I didn't think you would go this far just because of that. That's why I love you; you care so much for me."

Naruto sighed, "I know, Ino-chan. But you know that-" But he didn't finish because Ino shut his mouth with one of her fingers.

"I know...but that doesn't mean that you don't worry about me, and with that alone I'm happy," She said, giving him a kiss on the lips.

Naruto then grabbed Ino and threw her to the ground, as he began to kiss her and caress her, increasing the temperature between them. Ino then moaned of joy when she realized where this was heading, but the joy turned to disappointment when Naruto stopped all contact.

"I'm sorry, Ino-chan. How about if we finish this after I return from whatever I have to do? My father called me, and I think that he will give me a mission. His missions are very long; Anko-chan probably is already waiting for me there, so I have to hurry."

Yes, Ino had been the other person who knew Naruto's secret, but he omitted the information of his Rinnegan. Nonetheless, he didn't doubt that he would tell her soon.

Ino nodded and replied, "Every day I hate that bastard more. If he hadn't called you, the two of us could be doing something much more interesting right now. But anyway, tell me later about your mission and I hope to have my turn soon. I'm sure that you do this with your sensei on your missions."

Naruto just smiled and raised Ino to give her another kiss, "You are very smart. And don't worry; soon it'll be your turn. Oh yeah, Tenten says she wants to talk to you. I was supposed to tell you this a few days ago, but I couldn't see you. I don't have the slightest idea what she wants, but hey, I'll see you when I return from my mission, and I hope you're ready for what is coming."

"Of course, I am," Ino replied, giving one last kiss to Naruto, who used a Shunshin and reappeared with Ino on the field where all the others were.

Yugao gestured Naruto, who nodded and disappeared along with the other ANBU, each with their respective Shunshin.

When Ino saw that Naruto left, she could only sigh longingly and think about what would happen once Naruto returned from his mission. She had to get ready and ask Tenten what she wanted.

Shikamaru just shook his head at the attitude of his teammate and stated again, "How troublesome women are."

Chouji nodded to Shikamaru's words while Asuma approached them and gave a clap to attract the attention of his Genin. "Okay, all of you. We've already finished our session of today. You can go, and I have to see someone."

Ino smiled and added, "Oh, I just hope you don't do the same you do with us to Kurenai-sensei, send her my greetings." She meant to his bad habits with the cigarette.

Asuma blushed when she discovered him. He was about to say that she was wrong when Asuma saw that Ino was already leaving the training ground.

He sighed and also left. He had to think about what had happened a few minutes ago. He still couldn't believe that a child had made him lose his composure.

Shikamaru and Chouji also withdrew from there; they had nothing to do. Menma had gone to his first C-rank mission, and he was the one who organized everything they did. Besides, they were tired; they didn't believe they could do anything else.

After a few minutes, the camp was empty.

Hokage Tower - Minutes Later

"Please, Usagi-chan! Tell me your name. We've known each other for quite some time, and I still don't know your name. I promise you that I won't tell anyone. Besides no one is around; no one will know that you've told me." Naruto begged.

They were on the roof of the tower, the other ANBU had withdrawn, leaving them both alone, that's why Naruto took this opportunity to ask her that question.

Yugao, on the other hand, knew what she was about to do was wrong, but it was Naruto, and she knew that he wouldn't tell anyone about true her identity. She didn't know why she was about to do this, not even her boyfriend Hayate knew her identity as an ANBU.

He knew she was an ANBU, but not which one, because they were forbidden to see their couples when they were in service or tell them about their identities. If they did, they would lose their job.

However, Naruto was different. She didn't understand what happened to her when she was near him. Yugao knew that it wasn't a good thing. However, she could not help but want to see him, or getting excited when they said that she had to report things to him. Maybe she was starting to have feelings for him.

No, it couldn't be that. Maybe there was another explanation, but even though she tried, she could not find another reason.

She then shook her head and answered Naruto's question, "Okay, Naruto-kun, I hope you don't tell anyone about this. My name is Yugao Uzuki."

Naruto then grabbed Yugao's right hand and gave her a kiss, "Nice to meet, Yugao-chan. It's a beautiful name; I just hope to see your face one of these days. I have the certainty that it will be just as beautiful as your name."

Yugao blushed behind her mask; she thanked for having it, or Naruto might have seen it. She then tried to regain her composure and said, "T-Thank you, Naruto-kun. But now we must hurry and go to see what Hokage-sama wants, we're already late." Naruto nodded and followed Yugao through the corridors of the tower until they reached Minato's office.

Yugao knocked on the door a few times until they heard Minato's voice saying that they could enter. Both did it, and Naruto could see that his father smiled for a fraction of a second.

Naruto just sighed at his dad's attitude. Naruto had already noticed a while ago the new feelings of his father towards him, and this was one of the reasons that he didn't want to see him. He thought it was stupid that he began to see him in that way after everything he had done.

He suddenly came out of his thoughts when someone grabbed his head and placed it between her big breasts as she shook him in there. "Ah, Naruto-kun! You kept me waiting here a long time. Besides, I haven't seen you for a week; your dear Anko-chan has missed you, especially to a certain friend of yours." She said as she pulled Naruto out from her breasts to brush her hand against the underside of Naruto, who just smiled at the contact.

Yugao narrowed her eyes behind her mask when seeing the last contact, but she said nothing. Minato was the one who showed his discomfort. "*AHEM!* All right you two, I didn't call you to do that sort of thing in my office! I called you because I have a mission for you. Now, stand still and listen carefully!"

When he said that, both straightened, but neither of them could pull out the smile on their faces. Minato shook his head and continued, "You will be the support team of Team Seven. One of the Ninken (Ninja Dogs) of Kakashi Hatake requested a support team to help them on a mission. I've assigned them a C-rank mission, but the information was false. He estimates that it could become an A-rank mission. The mission is in Nami no Kuni (Land of Waves), Kakashi has an advantage of one day; you must hurry and go there as fast as you can. I repeat, you just have to support them, Kakashi and his team has their own mission. Now withdraw, go and take what you need and then run to Nami no Kuni."

Naruto and Anko nodded and withdrew from there, but not before Naruto said goodbye to Yugao, still calling her Usagi in public. Yugao also was ordered to withdraw.

When the room was empty, someone came out from the shadows and spoke, "Your two sons on a mission, huh, Minato? And I must add that that kid is a lucky bastard."

Minato sighed, "Only one of them is my son, Sensei. The other one isn't. And don't say perverted stuff, please."

Jiraiya shook his head and replied, "Hey, but you know that's my nature." Jiraiya stated joking a bit, but then he sobered, "But... Do you still believe that? I think we've been wrong all these years. Maybe if you had asked for the help of a Yamanaka, you might have realized if he really was who you think he was. But now I believe that it's impossible. After all that training with Danzō, I believe that he will now have some impressive mental barriers."

Minato lowered his head and replied, "That's something I've been wondering to myself this last month. But what can I do, Sensei? I can't approach him and say that I'm his father just like that. He would hate me more than he hates me now. I don't know what to do. What would have done Kushina in a situation like this?"

Jiraiya put a hand on Minato's shoulder and answered, "She probably would've killed you for doing something like that with one of her children."

When he said that, he realized that Minato became even more depressed, so he quickly added, "But hey! Don't blame yourself, you were just very sad that day. The truth is if Kushina were alive, none of this would have happened. Besides, you can't continue blaming yourself now. I know you'll find a way to talk to your son about this; you know how to solve problems."

Minato felt a little eased; he was right, it wasn't the time to mourn anymore, but to solve his problems and have his son back with him. However, he couldn't just do it. He had to wait for the right time, and he had to find the absolute proof that proved he was his real son. A blood test would be stupid; he would have to find another way, and he had to think about what it could be.

He went out of his thoughts because Jiraiya spoke again, "But that isn't the reason I've returned to the village. I've received information that you might want to know. It seems that a few years ago, a group called Akatsuki appeared; they are all missing-nin from different villages, and everyone is S-rank."

Minato nodded and asked, "Do you know their goal?"

Jiraiya nodded. "It seems they want to gather all the tailed beasts and that means the Jinchūrikis too. I still don't know what the purpose of this is, but I believe that nothing good will come out of this. Minato...I think that they know that Menma has all the power of the Kyūbi sealed inside of him."

When Minato heard this, he quickly got up from his seat and exclaimed, "But how?! That's the biggest secret of the village, no one besides the Sandaime, you and I know it. It's impossible that anyone else can know it."

Minato was thankful for removing all his ANBU moments before, and he was aware that his sensei had placed privacy seals in the room, or else they would have been in trouble now.

Jiraiya didn't know how these guys got that information, but maybe it had to do with the masked man, who fought against Minato that night. It was a hypothesis only, and he didn't want to worry Minato more.

Therefore, he just said, "I don't know, but if they go after Menma, that means they will also try something against Naruto. I found out that they have already caught the Yonbi. However, they won't be doing anything else for three years; I don't know what the reason is, perhaps the technique that they used to extract the demon inside of the Yonbi's Jinchūriki wasn't perfect. But this is only a theory. Now you just have to train Menma seriously, so that he can be strong enough to deal with those men by himself in the future."

"But what about Naruto?" Minato asked.

Jiraiya smiled and replied, "Heh! The Chunin exams are in a few months, right? I'll take care of him when he passes to the third round."

Minato smiled and asked, "Huh? How are you so sure that he will pass to the third round?"

"Well, according to what you told me, the brat is someone strong, and as far as I'm concerned, I think he will pass to the finals easily," Jiraiya replied.

Minato nodded and stated, "You're right, but I still have to put two more members into his team, and his sensei hasn't gotten anyone yet. If this continues, I'll have to add any Genin I can find to his team."

Jiraiya pervertedly smiled and stated, "I think she doesn't bother to look for other brats because she wants the full attention of Naruto for herself. Hehe, lucky bastard, that brat gave me great ideas for my next book."

Minato's eyes narrowed dangerously, and he threatened, "I hope you're not thinking of doing that nonsense. If you do it, Kushina will return from the afterlife, and she will kill us both. She'll kill you for your stupidity and me for allowing them."

When Jiraiya heard this, he turned pale and stated, "I hope that Kami-sama doesn't allow that. If that were to happen, you'd deader than I would be. Now if we've finished talking, I should go. I have to do some research for my next book." With that said, he disappeared from the office in a puff of smoke.

After Minato had seen that, he recalled everything that they had spoken about. Besides, when his son returned from his mission, he would have to give him a hard training, so that he could face those criminals in the future.

Then there was Naruto's issue; he still didn't know what to do with him. He needed to take away that doubt in his mind before he could tell him the truth.

Minato knew it wouldn't be easy, not after how he had behaved with him and how he had left him to his fate.

When Minato thought of the latter, he couldn't help hitting his head against the desktop. He had been a fool and for not thinking things clearly, now he was paying for it. He mentally scolded himself for not listening to the advice of the Sandaime.

After that, he sighed and continued his work.

Too bad, he never realized that a tiny bug with strange eyes had been in the room at all moment.

Outside the Village

Naruto and Anko had quickly gathered their equipment. They had already talked to the guards at the entrance, and they were about to leave when Naruto suddenly stopped.

Naruto and Kurama narrowed their eyes when they heard all that information, and Naruto mentally spoke, "Akatsuki. It seems that they want the power of your brothers, Kurama. What do you think about this?"

Kurama growled and replied, "Hmm, I don't care. As I said, we don't have those ties that you humans have. What annoys me is that they want my power, and that is unacceptable; it's something we cannot allow."

Naruto nodded and answered, "Indeed, but I think it's a great opportunity. If we join them, we might be able to recover your power and even more! They know how to extract the energy of the Bijū, and if we discover how, we can take your power back and perhaps the power of your brothers! I could make you the strongest Bijū and make myself the most powerful of the Jinchūrikis! With a power like that, no one will oppose us, and perhaps it may be possible to get you out of my stomach temporarily. But as I read in the scroll, it's impossible for you to be free completely. Not without me dying, and then it would take you hundreds of years to reborn. But then there is the other thing. It seems that my father has realized that I'm not you. That wasn't in my plans; I'll just have to feign ignorance and try to avoid him." Naruto stated. He had to contact these men and discover their secrets, and he had to avoid his father from now on.

Kurama smiled and replied, "I think you're right, Naruto. If we do that, I believe that we can get my power back or even more. But don't worry about your father; we must concentrate on our plans. If he finds out that you are his son, you just have to ignore him. He can't force you to go back with him now. Just concentrate, now go and continue your mission; you have to help your 'dear little brother', and that's another issue. We should have avoided that boy as much as we could, not to increase the restoration process, but it seems that we can't avoid it."

Naruto nodded and just then, Anko spoke. "What's wrong, Naruto-kun? What happened?" Anko asked.

Naruto looked at her and smiled while he told all this new information to her as they ran towards Nami no Kuni (Land of Waves) at full speed.

Notes:

Sorry for the delay. But it's getting hard to translate my story. All because of my college. So, sorry again.

I think the next chapter will take longer because I think I have mumps. Tomorrow I will have to go to the doctor for a checkup.

I will just write the following because I don't want to make a big note. The compromise between Menma and Hinata is true. But I will not write anything about them.

And of course. Kushina will join the Harem. But that will be in Shippuden. Don't worry; I have everything it in mind. The relationship between Kushina and Naruto will be very slow.

See you!

Chapter Text

Person talking, "Hello everyone."

Person thinking, "Damn you all."

Demon talking, "I will eat you."

Demon thinking, "This tastes worse than shit."

Disclaimer: I do not own Naruto, Masashi Kishimoto does.

Chapter 7

Near to Nami no Kuni (Land of Waves)

Kakashi and his team were in big trouble because he was inside a Suirō no Jutsu (Water Prison Technique). Meanwhile, Zabuza’s water clones and a masked person were cornering Sasuke and Menma.

Kakashi felt the air in his lungs decreasing considerably every time he attempted to breathe. He could only sigh in sadness as he recalled what happened moments before.

They reached Nami no Kuni without any problems after the Oni Kyōdai (Demon Brothers) attacked them, Menma and Sasuke had easily defeated them.

But now it was different, their current opponent was someone who was out of their league, this man was Momochi Zabuza, Kirigakure no Kijin (The Demon of the Hidden Mist).

Menma and Sasuke had been defending themselves very well against Zabuza's clones while Kakashi was fighting the original one. Menma and Sasuke didn't find it tough to keep up with these clones. They were strong, yes, but they were able to defeat them.

Zabuza had noticed that they were beating his clones quickly. He had believed that they were just brats because initially they both were very scared.

But after Kakashi had said a few words, he realized that they had regained their serenity.

Recognizing that problem, he made a signal and at that very moment, a person with an ANBU mask and a battle kimono appeared on the battleground.

Zabuza had told that person to deal with the brats while he created some clones and sent them to attack Menma and Sasuke. Noticing the arrival of the new person, they prepared themselves for everything. But it didn’t help because that individual plus the clones of Zabuza made things even more difficult for them.

They saw that Zabuza had captured their Sensei and sent more clones to attack them. They did all they could until Kakashi shouted, "Sasuke, Menma, Sakura!" attracting the attention of his students.

"Take Tazuna with you and escape from this place! You must complete the mission! I don't know when the reinforcements will arrive, so you must escape until they can help you. Especially you, Menma. Don't argue my decision."

"But Nii-san!" Menma shouted as he dodged a few ice senbon of the masked person.

Sasuke growled since he didn't agree with that order. He had to be able to beat these guys if he wanted to have a chance with the man who exterminated his clan. Sakura just watched all this with fear as she protected Tazuna, who was trembling more and more.

Zabuza watched all this with amusement and stated, "Well Kakashi, it seems that your reputation is just a lie. You're will run out of air, and my subordinate is going to kill your students within a few seconds. Why don't you just surrender and let me kill the bridge-builder? That's my mission, but I think you won't accept that because I know very well that the Shinobi of Konoha are all pathetic and..." but before Zabuza could finish his sentence, he heard another voice exclaiming.

"Rakurai doroppu (Thunderbolts Drop)!" Zabuza then saw that multiple Raiton attacks headed straight for him, which were glowing intensely in a deep blue color, and they had a rather extended form.

Zabuza instantly recognized what type of attack it was; his eyes narrowed as he dodged the attack. But when he did that, he released the jutsu that restrained Kakashi.

When Kakashi felt the jutsu being interrupted, he quickly grabbed as much air as he could, as he coughed noisily.

Kakashi looked up a little, and he could see that Anko and that boy Naruto landed right in front of him. Kakashi saw that Anko began to check him before she nodded towards Naruto, who also nodded.

Anko when seeing Naruto's nod, she grabbed to a confused Kakashi, who realized that he disappeared from there in a Shunshin, to appear in a few moments where his students were, resisting the attack of the clones of Zabuza and the masked guy.

Kakashi with his remaining strength helped Anko to destroy Zabuza's clones. The masked person, noticing their new numbers, fled and hid among the trees while waiting for Zabuza.

All the Genin of Team 7 and Tazuna sighed in relief after both adults came to their aid. However, Menma and Sasuke narrowed their eyes due to the next thing that Kakashi said, "Thanks, Anko. But why did you leave that boy face Zabuza alone? Are you crazy? That boy has no chance against him. Call him back, I'll take care of Zabuza, I still have enough strength to finish him." Kakashi stood up and carried his right hand to his ninja bag to take a soldier pill.

When he had the pill close to his mouth, Anko grabbed his arm and said heatedly, "Kakashi, first, that 'boy' has a name, and that name is Naruto, and you better remember it very well. Second, you don't need to worry; Naruto is more than enough to deal with Zabuza. And besides, your mission is to protect the old codger. We're the reinforcements; so I let Naruto, as his Jounin sensei, to take care of Zabuza. Now, shut up and just watch."

Tazuna got a little angry due to the way that Anko had called him, but after a moment, he pervertedly smiled when seeing her garments. Kakashi just sighed and accepted Anko's words.

Who was he to argue with her? She had her orders, and he knew that she must comply them. He didn't want to argue with her because he didn't want to end up in a meeting at the Department of Interrogation and Torture with her. Shivering, Kakashi thought, "Anything but that."

Kakashi sighed again; he looked at his Genin and ordered, "Very well Team 7, your orders are not to intervene in Naruto's fight. Stay in your place. If we see that Naruto needs help, we're going to help him. Is that clear?"

Sakura nodded quickly; Menma nodded reluctantly, but Sasuke was the one who spoke against his orders, "Why does the Demon get to fight someone like him?! I'm the one who needs severe challenges to get stronger to be able to avenge my clan! Not that Demon. His only purpose is.." But a kunai that cut his cheek interrupted him.

Sasuke looked up and could see Anko with her hand outstretched. He was about to scold her when she ordered, "Listen very well, brat. You're just a Genin. And the decision was taken by two Jounin. Now shut your little mouth or you will have a session in the Department of Interrogation and Torture with me, for disobeying the orders of your superiors." After finishing, Anko turned around to watch Naruto's fight.

Sasuke touched his cheek as he wiped the blood. He wanted to scold her furiously, but, this time, he was interrupted by Kakashi, who put one hand over his mouth, murmuring, "Sasuke, listen very well. You don't want to have a session in that place with her. A single session is necessary for her to do the most terrible things you can imagine. I recommend you not to bother her, because if she says she will, it's because she will. Now keep silent. If that boy Naruto needs help, Anko and I are going to help him."

Menma and Sakura just gulped when they heard that statement while Sasuke just growled and narrowed his eyes as he stood next to his teammates.

Meanwhile, Haku was just looking at Naruto, and for some reason, she felt something odd when she did it. She didn't know what that feeling was. All she could feel was that her lower parts started getting hot, and she began to get excited. But she didn't know the cause of that. Hence, she just kept watching him, until Zabuza needed help, or he decided that they had to withdraw.

Returning with Naruto, he smiled when he could perceive an odor to which he was already used by someone who was receiving his 'attack.'

He had learned this ability from Kurama, who had told him that he was able to release pheromones to excite and attract people of his own kind, but of the opposite sex. Naruto did this to see whether the individual who was with Zabuza was male or female, since the chakra signature of this person was confusing, and he could not identify it.

Therefore, he decided to release some of his pheromones to Zabuza's subordinate to discover what her gender was. And in fact, she was a woman, since she reacted to his stimulus.

Zabuza saw Naruto smiling. Hence, he decided to speak, "Alright brat, I don't know what's so funny, but for your own sake, I suggest you return the Kiba; you're not a Shinobigatana. Those swords shouldn't be in your hands. You may have been lucky to take them off of the fool of Raiga, and that they have accepted you, but if you aren't one of us, you can't use them!"

Naruto just smiled, "Oh! Is that true? Then I should listen to you. Come and take them if you can. But as I know, my lovely Katana must accept you as their new master, and you must be a powerful Raiton user if you don't want to suffer a painful death by electrocution. But according to reports, you're a Suiton user. Or do you have another element, Zabuza?"

Zabuza growled at this; he knew very well about that requirement, so if he just killed the brat and then he took them carefully, there would be no problems.

Zabuza raised his giant sword and pointed it at Naruto, "Alright, brat, you asked for it. Show me how good you are with those swords." After saying that, he went into a battle stance.

Naruto just smiled and accepted the challenge as he also went into his battle stance. Then he continued, "Okay, but just so you know, I haven't had a serious fight with a good swordsman for a long time. I recommend you to take me seriously, or you'll pay the consequences." Naruto was solemn in his proclamation.

For some reason or another Zabuza felt that he had to take the brat seriously, and then he asked, "What's your name, brat? I need to know the name of the person of whom I'm about to kill."

Naruto smiled and replied, "My name is Naruto, but let's see if you can do that."

Naruto then went on the attack; he raised both Kiba, and when he was in front of Zabuza; he quickly lowered them with great forces. He still hadn't charged Raiton to his swords, since he wanted to test Zabuza's skills first.

Zabuza blocked his advance as fast as he could and was surprised to feel the force behind the attack. He then moved the Kiba to the side and spun in an attempt to cut Naruto in two. When Naruto saw this, he jumped back to dodge the cut.

Naruto then nodded and commented, "Hmm, you're too slow, it seems that the Kubikiribōchō makes its user very slow, but it gives you a good defense. That attack should have halved your sword, but it's a legendary sword after all. But now it's going to be different." At that moment, his Kiba glowed blue.

Zabuza was surprised that the brat could deduce that so easily. He then noticed the intense brightness of the Kiba and he concluded that now he was disadvantaged. Thus, he decided to end this fight quickly.

Zabuza jumped into the air as high as he could; he had to finish this battle with a single blow. Upon being at an optimal height, Zabuza descended rapidly towards Naruto, putting his Kubikiribōcho forward, in an attempt to crush Naruto with all his strength.

When Naruto saw this, he quickly raised his Kiba and put them in an 'X' form to resist the attack. Just when he did this, Zabuza hit his Kiba with overwhelming force, creating a small crater bellow Naruto.

Zabuza was doing more and more strength, and Naruto’s sword had cut his Kubikiribōcho a little bit, but it was nothing serious since he didn't hit on the edge of the Kiba's.

Zabuza realized that Naruto began to loosen his resistance, but that was what Naruto wanted him to think; he wanted Zabuza to use as much force as he could in his attack, which left Naruto very surprised since his strength was considerable.

Further back, everyone saw the fight with surprise. Well, all but Anko, who right now was ogling at Naruto, since she rarely saw his displays of power, and seeing him in this way always made her feel excited.

Among the trees, Haku was also feeling something similar, but she wasn't paying attention to that feeling. She just paid attention to her father figure in case he needed help.

Returning with Naruto, he realized that if he continued enduring such force, nothing would come out as he planned. Therefore, he released his remaining resistance, making Zabuza go directly towards him since there wasn't anything stopping him.

But Naruto quickly turned his Kiba, and blocked the Kubikiribōcho again, but this time with their edges, getting a deeper cut in the Kubikiribōchō. But it still wasn't enough, and Naruto knew it very well, so he threw himself back on the ground and decided to use one of his Taijutsu techniques. He gave a kick charged in Raiton to his Kiba, increasing the cutting range significantly.

Zabuza was shocked after seeing what Naruto did. However, he didn't have time to remove his Kubikiribōcho since Naruto had already cut it in half.

Zabuza quickly jumped back; he saw no problem in having his sword cut in half, he could repair it at any time. He just needed the blood of Naruto and done. Yes, he was calm, but that calm disappeared due to the next thing that Naruto had said.

"Hmm, the Kubikiribōchō," Naruto spoke, attracting the attention of Zabuza.

Naruto then continued, "Without a doubt, the weaker and most pathetic of all the Legendary Swords. I can see why they gave it to you. It was because you are the weakest among the Shinobigatana, besides the most pathetic one."

"You fucking brat! I'm going to kill you!" Zabuza shouted with rage and anger. After that, he ran straight at Naruto, throwing senseless stabs, devoid of strength and speed.

Naruto indeed achieved his goal, which was to upset Zabuza and make him attack by his emotions and not his head, which would cost him the battle.

Zabuza continued with his stabs, which were becoming increasingly sloppy and slow. He furiously growled because he couldn't get a single blow at Naruto, which made him exclaim, "Stop moving, you fucking brat! Let me kill you at once!"

Naruto when hearing this, answered, "Okay." And in that instant, he stopped.

Zabuza didn't know why he did that. Therefore, he took the opportunity and gave a stab at Naruto's shoulder. In an instant, the blood came out of his shoulder, and it spread everywhere. A lot of blood from Naruto went to Zabuza's face, who was maniacally smiling.

In the distance, Anko saw this with horror while the others saw it with indifference. Except for Menma, who felt his a twist in his stomach. It wasn't repugnance or something like that; it  was different; it was something he couldn't explain. It was like a feeling of discomfort.

Zabuza then withdrew the Kubikiribōchō from Naruto's shoulder, and due to the state in which he was, he didn't notice that Naruto's blood didn't repair his Kubikiribōchō. Then he moved closer to Naruto and decided to speak, "Hahaha, stupid brat! That's what happens when you're so over confident. Before I kill you, any last words?"

Naruto raised his head and replied weakly, "Boom."

Zabuza didn’t understand what Naruto said, so he asked, "What did you say?"

Naruto smiled wickedly and then repeated his words, "Boom," and at that moment, Naruto burst into a massive explosion, and Zabuza received it completely.

Zabuza flew several meters back, until he hit a tree, stopping his travel. He weakly opened his eyes and saw that he had multiple wounds all over his body besides severe burns on his skin. Miraculously, he didn’t lose any limbs in that explosion. However, he couldn’t move his extremities; all he could do was lift his eyes, just to see Naruto in front of him, who was smiling with mockery.

Zabuza then heard Naruto speak, "You’re a fool. I didn't believe that you would be able to fall into something as silly as that. Zabuza, let me tell you this: that which you attacked was a Bunshin Daibakuha, and you were dumb enough to stay near my clone. But hey, someone as pathetic as you are don’t deserve to live anymore. Therefore, I’ll spare you the pain, and I’ll finish you off here and now." Naruto took one of his Kiba and directed it towards Zabuza's heart.

But at that moment, Naruto felt another presence, and right in front of him appeared a mirror ice. Haku made an appearance, carrying an ice sword and blocking his attack. Naruto wasn’t surprised at her sudden appearance, but he was a little curious on the jutsu that she had used.

Haku then spoke, “I’m sorry, Naruto-san, but I can’t let you kill with Zabuza-sama; we still have many plans. So I can’t let you destroy them." After that, Haku grabbed Zabuza and his Kubikiribōcho, as she disappeared with a Shunshin. Haku had paid attention to the whole battle, so she learned the name of Naruto. She didn’t know why, but she hoped to meet him again.

Naruto just looked towards the direction where Haku went; he could still feel her presence and Zabuza’s, but he saw no reason to chase them. He had already humbled Zabuza enough. Besides that, he and Anko were on this stupid mission just to help his little brother and the others.

After that, he sighed, kept his Kiba in a storage scroll and turned around. When he did it, a more than happy Anko hugged him, "You're an idiot! You had me in suspense over there. I thought you were going to die. You'll have to buy the best Dango for me once we get back to Konoha." She then gave Naruto a small kiss on his lips.

Naruto smiled, "Whatever you want, Anko-chan, and what's more, we can make a tea ceremony once we get there. Let me tell you that you’re making that to become one of my hobbies too."

Anko smiled with pure happiness, and she was about to say something when Kakashi interrupted. "*Ahem* Can you tell me what are you two doing?" Kakashi asked with some jealousy since he felt something for Anko, but his lazy and disinterested attitude never let him say something.

Naruto smiled and asked, "Do you mean the kiss? Well, it's simple, Anko and I are a couple, and that's what couples do, right?" Naruto then pulled away from Anko, who reluctantly let him go.

Kakashi felt a depressive aura surrounding him, but he quickly pulled it away. "Oh, okay; I'm no one..." Said Kakashi, but Naruto interrupted him. "You're right," Naruto added.

Kakashi sighed; he ignored the lack of respect and continued, "As I tried to say. I'm no one to get between you both. But leaving that aside, I think that you've to explain a lot of things once we arrive at Tazuna's house."

Naruto smiled and replied, as he moved his finger in a negative signal. "Ah-ah-ah, stop right there, scarecrow! I have nothing to explain to you; you're not my Sensei. I can only do that if Anko-chan asks me. What do you say, Anko-chan? Do I have to explain to him what happened here?"

Kakashi sighed again at the disrespect, so he looked at Anko, who put a finger on her chin as she took a thinking pose, "Hmm, let me think. I don't know ... maybe, you should…" but she was interrupted because Naruto pinched her butt, sending small currents throughout her body.

She quickly realized that Naruto didn't want to play around, and she knew that that meant no sex if she continued doing it. Therefore, she resumed, "N-no, y-you don't have to explain anything. We're just in this mission as reinforcements. Besides, you're my cute Genin, not of this fool." She was getting increasingly excited since Naruto hadn't stopped stimulating her.

Kakashi sighed as he asked himself at what point people stopped respecting him. He shook his head, turned away those thoughts and added, "Well, it's time to continue the mission. We're now heading to Tazuna-san's home. He's waiting for us with my team over there."

Hearing the latter, Naruto seriously said,  "Kakashi-san, I hope you can control your Genin. I don't want them to ask me stupid and unnecessary questions. If that happens, I will take care of experiment with them the new techniques of my Kiba," Naruto ended.

When Kakashi heard this, he had a shiver running down his back. He realized that Naruto was serious, but he wouldn't allow him to do something like that to his Genin.

Kakashi nodded and replied, "Okay, I'll do my best, but it isn't a promise, questions will come. You just have to know which to answer and which to ignore." Then he looked further down, and he could see that Naruto was stroking Anko's butt. He blushed behind his mask and turned around quickly to hide the nosebleed that was visible through his mask. After that, he advanced to where the others were.

Naruto then remembered what he was doing, so he stopped stroking Anko, who was very excited. After she realized that he had stopped, she quickly looked at Naruto to say, "You're so mean, Naruto-kun. You can't leave me like this; we have to do it now. I-I can't take it anymore." She then stroked Naruto's crotch, who felt that someone was awakening.

He shook his head and replied, "Sorry, but we'll do it once we're in the house of that Tazuna guy, and once they're all sleeping."

Anko nodded, but she still wanted to be sure and asked, "Do you promise?"

Naruto nodded and replied, "I promise, now let's go with those suckers. Now I have to suffer the stupid's questions of my Otouto and the drama queen. I don't think that the Banshee will ask me questions, but one never knows." Anko nodded, and she ran along with Naruto to where Kakashi and the rest of his team were.

Tazuna's house - 1 hour later

Naruto and the others had reached Tazuna's house about 30 minutes ago; it was still quite early when they arrived since it was not even noon.

As he had predicted, Menma attacked him with several questions, while Sasuke demanded the Kiba, but Naruto just ignored them as they headed to Tazuna's house.

When they arrived, they all went into a room; there they put Kakashi on a Japanese futon since he seemed more damaged than he appeared. He said that spending so much time in that prison filled his lungs with water, and every breath made him feel achy.

After settling in, Kakashi spoke, "Very well team. As you all know, Zabuza isn’t dead. Unfortunately, Naruto couldn’t finish him, so you better get ready, because I'm sure that he’ll return to finish what he couldn't."

After saying that, the Genin, Tazuna, and his daughter turned around to look at Naruto. He wasn’t paying attention to Kakashi because he was resting with closed eyes among the big breasts of Anko, who was playing with his hair.

Naruto, who felt that they were observing him, opened one eye and asked, "What are you looking at?"

Sakura stood up and pointed at him, "Naruto-baka! Why didn’t you kill Zabuza?"

Naruto shrugged as he could and replied, "Hmm, I could have done that, but I couldn't because the masked ninja took him away."

Then Menma continued, "But if you could do that to Zabuza, you could have done the same with that guy!"

Naruto sighed, "Sure, I could also have done that, but I don't kill women, only if they threaten me, or if they are so fucking screaming." He said the latter as he stared at Sakura, who blanched at the implication.

Sasuke growled, "But, what are you saying, Demon? How do you know that masked person was a girl?"

Naruto smiled and replied, "That's my secret, but trust me when I say she's a woman ... A woman who can kick your ass!"

Sasuke growled strongly to hear this, and he almost rebuked him, but again fate didn't allow him to do that since he listened to a child's voice, "Don't get cocky." The boy stated.

He wore a green jumpsuit with a yellow shirt, and he also wore a blue and white striped hat under the brim.

When the people in the room heard the new voice, they all looked towards the door, to see a child standing there, frowning.

Menma saw him and pointed at him, "Who are you?" But he got no response because Tazuna spoke.

"Oh, Inari! Where were you?" Tazuna asked spreading his arms.

Inari quickly ran towards Tazuna, hugged him and said, "I'm home, grandpa." And Tazuna returned the hug.

After that, Tsunami approached them and stated, "Inari, say hello to them. These are ninjas that escorted grandpa."

Tazuna started stroking Inari's head while saying, "Come on, come on, it's okay. Right, Inari?"

Inari looked towards the others in the room. He narrowed his eyes and then looked at his mother after separating from his grandfather, "Kaa-chan, they're going to die. There's no way a person can win by going against Gatō." Inari stated

Naruto's eyes narrowed when hearing that name, while he thought, "That stupid idiot. What the hell is he doing here?"

Kurama growled at this and replied, "I don't know, but you have to find out." Naruto nodded and continued listening.

Just then Menma got up and shouted, " What the hell did you say, brat?! Listen up. In the future, my father will give me his position, and I will be the new Hokage! A hero!" After that, he raised one fist and continued, "I don't know who this Gatō or Chocolat is, but he's no match for me!"

Inari hung his head and snorted, "A hero? You look like an idiot. There's no such thing as a hero!"

Menma was about to do something when Naruto started laughing, "Hahaha, I like this brat. You're absolutely right; heroes are a fucking lie. Those who believe they're heroes are those who die faster and are the ones who usually have the worst deaths."

Menma growled and then glared at Naruto. Inari meanwhile looked at the one who spoke, and he could see Naruto. He was still resting on Anko, who seemed amused. When Inari heard this, he could only remember how his father died, and then he left the room.

Tazuna saw this and said, "Where are you going, Inari?" Inari turned his head slightly and replied, "I'll watch the sea." After that, he kept going.

Tazuna was sorry and wanted to say something, but Kakashi slowly rose up from the futon and uttered, "Very good, Team 7. It's time to make you stronger, follow me; I will give you training. You can also come, Anko; I could use your help."

She was about to say no, but Naruto spoke, "Let's go, Anko-chan. I want to see what the great Hatake Kakashi can do; I want to see if the stories about him are true or just pure bullshit."

Anko pouted, but then she remembered something and nodded, "Just for your tonight's promise, Naruto-kun." Naruto smiled and nodded.

Hearing this, all asked themselves what she meant. Well, all except Kakashi, as he knew exactly what Anko meant, since after reading so many erotic books, it made him realize about those things quickly.

Then Kakashi stood up, leaning on a crutch as he wiped a drop of blood from his nose without anyone realizing it, and then he called everyone to follow him.

5 Minutes Later

Kakashi had taken Naruto and the others towards the forest of the village; Kakashi went to the front.

Naruto suspected what the supposedly training was, so he decided to ask. "Hold on; is your training Climbing Trees?

Kakashi gave an eye smile and replied, "Yes, this training will help you-"

This time, Menma spoke, "What?! Nii-san, I learned to do that a few months ago, my father taught me this."

Sasuke nodded and added, "He's right, I learned this a few months ago too, Itachi taught me. Don’t you have anything better to teach?"

Kakashi put a finger on his chin and began to think. Then something came to his mind, "Okay, do you know how to walk on the water surface?"

Menma and Sasuke shook their heads, and Kakashi gave an eye smile again and continued, "So, it's decided. That's what we are going to do now."

Sakura, who had heard all this, raised her hand, "Uhm, Kakashi-sensei, I don't know how to walk in the trees."

Kakashi stopped and looked at her, "Hmm that will be a problem because I won't be able to supervise you and the other boys at the same time, what can I do? ... Oh, I know!" Kakashi exclaimed, looking towards Anko, who had a bored expression on her face.

She realized that Kakashi was watching her, and she instantly understood what that meant. "No way, Kakashi. You teach the brat; I already have a Genin to teach!"

Kakashi became discouraged, but then he thought of something and spoke his mind, "Look, I'll teach Naruto to walk on water while you teach Sakura. What do you say?"

When Anko heard that, she looked at Naruto, who was looking at Kakashi as if he were a stupid person. She knew why, so she said it, "Kakashi, do you not remember that he was able to walk on water when we showed up to save your ass?"

Kakashi facepalmed and then continued, "You're right, we're going to do the Climb Trai-" but before he could finish, Naruto spoke.

"Come on, Anko-chan; teach Sakura something, I think a bit of training with you will change that attitude of hers. I'm sure if you give her some lessons, she can become a true Kunoichi. And if you do it well, you will have a great reward. Whatever you want."

Hearing this, Anko became excited, "Whatever I want?" Naruto nodded, and Anko whispered in Naruto's ear what she wanted.

Naruto listened intently to what she said, and he nodded; it wouldn't be difficult to do what she wanted, "Okay, but it will be once we return to the village since I don't think I can get that here. But hey, I'll take a walk around this village. Maybe I’ll find something interesting." Anko nodded and approached Sakura, who looked at her with pure fear since Anko was smiling sadistically at her.

Kakashi called Menma and Sasuke to follow him before they caused unnecessary fights with Naruto, who had already disappeared in a Shunshin.

Meanwhile, hidden behind a tree, Inari watched all this. After that, he walked away as he thought, "Even though you make all that, it’ll be useless.”

Then he stopped walking and remembered his father, as well as Naruto's words, which were repeating in his head all day. Inari clenched his fists tightly and continued walking.

In an Unknown Location – Zabuza's Hideout

Haku was treating Zabuza's wounds, who was still in his bed, saying nothing. He was thinking a lot about Naruto; all he wanted was to get well and put his hands on him to tear him to pieces. The humiliation that he suffered; he would never forgive him. Zabuza would make sure of making him suffer before he died.

Haku after treating his wounds, she put a blanket over him as she sat in a chair next to his bed. She was also thinking about Naruto, but her thoughts were different from Zabuza's, "That boy Naruto. Why was I feeling that when I was observing him? Why do I want to see him again? Why don't I want Zabuza-sama to kill Naruto-san? This is very confusing..." She asked herself.

She continued watching Zabuza for a few minutes, and he hadn't moved a millimeter since they arrived at their hideout. Suddenly, the door of the room opened. She turned her head slightly to see who it was, and instantly she could identify who was the one who walked into the room.

He was a short man with a black suit and glasses of the same color. This man was Gatō; two other men accompanied him, each with a Japanese Katana.

Gatō put a mocking smile on his face and spoke, "Really, even you were defeated and came back here? The ninja from the Hidden Village of the Mist must really suck. You call yourself a Demon when you can't even make up for what your subordinate did? Don't make me laugh."

Zabuza didn't answer and continued in the same position. Haku then quickly rose up from her seat, throwing the chair to the floor.

Gatō’s men unsheathed their Katana at the hostile act as they covered Gatō, who watched all this with an arrogant smile. Gatō then made a sign with his hand and continued, "Wait" with that said; he walked towards Zabuza, "Don't be so quiet. Why don't you say something?" He then raised his left hand and directed it towards him.

But just as he was about to touch him, Haku stopped Gatō’s hand and squeezed his wrist tightly. Gatō turned his head to see Haku, who said with a scowl. "Don't touch Zabuza-sama with this filthy hand!" She then squeezed even harder, making him scream in pain because she had broken his wrist.

Gatō’s men tried to unsheathe their Katana to defend their boss, but they noticed that their Katana were no longer in their hands but on their necks. They looked down and opened their eyes in shock because they didn't see Haku moving from her place.

Now Haku had an angry look on her face and threatened, "You better stop; you're making me angry!" She then threw the Katana away from them before approaching Zabuza.

Gatō quickly ran to his guards and shouted while pointing at Zabuza and Haku, "Next time! If you screw up next time, you can consider yourselves expelled from this place!"

After that, Gatō ordered his guards to follow him, and a few seconds later, they had left.

When Haku realized that Gatō left the room, she raised her chair and sat down next to Zabuza again, just to hear him speak, "Haku, you didn't have to do that." He said with a Kunai in hand.

"I know. I just ... It's too early to kill Gatō now. If we cause a ruckus here, we'll be chased again. We have to resist for now." She replied with a smile.

Zabuza trembled a little because of the pain he felt due to his injuries, and then he added, "Yeah; you're right." Then closed his eyes to sleep. He had several severe burns as well as some broken ribs. All this was because of Naruto's explosion, so he needed as much rest as possible to heal faster.

Back to Naruto

Naruto was quietly walking through the streets of the village. He couldn't help but feel a kind of nostalgia for being walking around this place. He wasn't sure why he was feeling this. Besides, he didn't know the reason he couldn't help looking to the East.

Kurama, who was feeling the emotions of Naruto, pondered, "Hmm, I can see that your Uzumaki blood is making the rounds again. The reason you feel this way is because the place where you're now was Uzushiogakure before. Well, a part of it. If you want to find the ruins of your ancestors, you must go further to the East. That's why you are looking towards that direction."

"And when were you going to tell me about this?" Naruto mentally asked while walking.

Kurama shrugged, "I don't know; I was sleeping. I only saw your fight with that guy and then I fell asleep, I must have the energy to see the action of tonight!"

Naruto rolled his eyes and added, "You fucking pervert. But tell me, why am I the only one feeling this? Why not the fool of my brother?"

Kurama growled and replied, "How many times do I have to say it?! Your Uzumaki blood improved to levels that almost make you a pureblood Uzumaki, or perhaps a better one. Your brother doesn't feels what you feel or reacts to the seals like you do because his blood is not as strong as yours."

Naruto nodded, "Okay, but don't be so bitter; I just forgot that detail. So... Should I go and take a look?"

Kurama shook his head, "No, I don’t recommend that. We should wait since you'll need a long time to reach the capital. As I've heard from my former Jinchūrikis, the village has several natural protections as well as seals defenses. You just need to finish this mission and once you do it, go back to your filthy village, get the necessary preparation and talk to that stupid old man so you can go there."

Naruto nodded and didn't argue further with Kurama; he had learned some time ago that it was better to listen to his advice.

Hence, he continued his walk. He had noticed that the people in this place lived in extreme poverty, especially the children. That reminded him very much of his miserable childhood, but without the beatings and insults.

When Naruto thought that there was nothing interesting in this place, he could see that further forward a crowd began to gather. Naruto then decided to go and investigate what was going on. "Stupid old man! Who do you think you are? Do you want to see Gatō killing your whole family?" A man asked.

Naruto saw that this man had a katana in his hands and was pointing it at an elderly man who was lying on the ground.

The old man bowed while saying, "I'm sorry! But that's all the money I could gather. Please forgive my family! Kill me, but don't do anything to my family; I beg you!" Naruto looked a little behind him, and he could see some people. He assumed they were his family.

Naruto thought this was a perfect opportunity to get Gatō’s location. Thus, he decided to intervene.

"Well, I'm sorry, old man! After I kill you, I'll take care of your sons and your wife. Now, say good riddance!" The extortionist exclaimed as he moved his katana to kill the old man. But just as he was about to do it, everyone saw that a redhead boy appeared on the scene with a glowing katana oh his hands, easily cutting the katana of the extortionist.

The extortionist was about to yell, but Naruto quickly grabbed him and used a Shunshin to disappear along with him. The people standing there asked themselves whom that guy was. But after a while, everyone dispersed, while the old man's family hugged each other while they all thanked the mysterious boy.

Returning with Naruto, he had already tied the extortionist as he stared at him "Now I want you to tell me this, where’s Gatō?"

The extortionist just laughed mockingly and stated, "As if I would say something to an idiot like you. You can't do anything to get information from me."

Naruto growled and quickly pulled out one of his Kiba, severing the right hand of the man who cried out in pain. Naruto then grabbed him from his head and threatened, "Tell me right now where is Gatō, or I swear to you that you won't have rest even in the afterlife."

The man smiled and looked up to see Naruto. However, it changed to a look of horror when he saw Naruto's eyes.

He didn't know what those purple eyes were, but he knew they were nothing good because he could feel the sense of death that they conveyed. He tried to say something, but he couldn't find the words to speak.

Naruto growled again when not hearing the man's response. He would kill him no matter what. He only wanted to intimidate the guy so he could speak, but it didn't work. He then shook his head and whispered, "Ningendō (Human Path)." After that, he extracted the soul of the extortionist, who fell lifeless to the ground.

When Naruto processed all the information, he quickly did some hand seals and shouted, "Goukakyuu Katon no Jutsu," and he spat the fireball at the lifeless body of the extortionist, turning him into ashes.

Naruto growled in frustration and thought, "Damn it, that idiot knew nothing. Apparently, Gatō recruited him only a week ago, and he didn't have the chance to meet Gatō yet, damn it! Anyways, I know that that dwarf will appear eventually; I just have to wait." Kurama just nodded and went back to sleep.

Meanwhile, Naruto headed back to Tazuna's house.

Tazuna's House - 10 Minutes Later

Tsunami was cooking the dinner right now. There were still many hours left before her father and the others returned, but she wanted to have everything ready for that moment. She knew that her father had lunch at the construction site and that he came back just for dinner, and Inari was probably watching the sea at the pier. He was usually there for hours until he decided to return home. Hence, she did not want to bother him.

She had already overcome Kaiza's death, but she felt sorry for her son because he was still mourning about it. It was not his fault, so he didn't have to continue blaming himself for that. But nothing of what she or her father said made sense into her son.

Then she thought of the ninja team who came with her father; she was happy that a large group of ninjas was willing to help their village. Her father had told her that he lied about the mission parameters. Despite that, they decided to help, and they even sent reinforcements.

Then she thought about these reinforcements; she could tell that Naruto and Anko had a relationship. She didn't see anything wrong with that; she had heard how the lives of the ninjas were. Also, she thought Naruto looked much older than what he said; he was several centimeters taller than she was, and just a few centimeters shorter than his sensei. Therefore, she wouldn't say anything about it. She wouldn't even ask; it's not like she cared, or so she thought.

Just then, she heard the kitchen door opening slightly, and she could see a reddish hair peeking in the door.

She instantly recognized the person who came in and spoke, "Oh, Naruto-san. What are you doing here so early? I thought you were training with your friends."

Naruto chuckled at the question and replied, "Friends? Tsunami-san, those idiots are anything but friends, except for Anko-chan. And right now, she is taking care of 'training' a certain pink haired girl. Also, everything that they're learning now, I've already learned it years ago."

Tsunami turned off the stove and then wiped her hands. She turned around to look at Naruto and saw that he was sitting in one of the dining chairs.

She decided to accompany him since she never had anyone to talk to and it seemed that Naruto had no problem with that, "What's the reason for it, Naruto-san? Why don't you see them as your friends?"

Naruto scratched his head and replied, "First, because they're poor idiots who believe that being a ninja is just a game. They don't know the actual meaning of the Shinobi word. And the other reason is that they're a bunch of arrogant bastards. They believe that just because they've born with everything that gives them the right to do whatever they please."

Tsunami nodded at his words and added, "I think you're right. When Gatō came to our village, he thought he could do whatever he wanted just for having money and power. In the beginning, we opposed to this. But then he started to bring mercenaries and killed those who opposed him. Since that day, people stopped protesting. Or that was until..." She stopped at the end.

Naruto raised an eyebrow because he was confused, but then he realized what was happening. "Don't tell me; I understand if it's personal."

Tsunami shook her head and replied. "No, it isn't that. It's just that a few years ago I married a man named Kaiza; he was superb and attentive to us. Besides that, he was the hero of this village, but all that changed when he decided to oppose to Gatō. Unfortunately, he was killed in front of Inari and most of the people of the village. I wasn't there, but I felt terrible for a while until I could overcome it. But Inari couldn't; that's the reason he's like this. Inari blamed himself for this since he could do nothing. But he also blamed Kaiza because he believes that he lied when Kaiza said that he would never die." She said, finishing her story.

Naruto nodded and asked, "How many years have been since this?"

Tsunami thought for a moment and replied, "It was about two years ago, it was a few months after Gatō took the control of our village."

Naruto nodded again and stood up from his seat. Kurama, who had awakened just now, understood what Naruto wanted to do. Therefore, he got himself down to work.

Naruto stopped and stood in front of Tsunami, who looked at him in confusion. She then began to feel weird between her legs, and unconsciously she pressed there.

Naruto then knelt and looked at Tsunami, who had lowered her head a little to see him. Then he whispered, "So, have you been alone for two years without any man treating your needs as a woman?"

Tsunami, who began to feel increasingly hotter, replied, "Y-yes, b-but t-tha-at's not important." Tsunami was using all her willpower to resist her impulses.

She knew that Naruto was right; it's been a while since the last time she had been with a man, and she had already given up a long time ago that anyone would feel an interest in her again.

Naruto shook his head and said as he stroked her cheek, causing a great blush on her, "How can you think that? You're a beautiful woman; you don't have to think about those things. Tsunami-san, I will make you feel again as the beautiful woman you are."

Tsunami, who was increasingly losing her willpower, could only say one last thing, "W-What about Anko-san? W-we can't do this to her."

Naruto gave a charming smile, "What would you do if I told you that she wouldn't care if we do this?" That was all Tsunami needed.

She put her hands on Naruto's face and gave him a passionate kiss, which Naruto returned gladly.

Naruto didn't feel sorry for what he did. Yes, he had used his pheromones in great measure on her, but that was just to increase the speed at which things would develop. If Tsunami weren't interested in him, his pheromones wouldn't have done their work. Kurama had said that it would only work with people of the opposite sex, but besides, only if these individuals had an interest in him. That was the reason Sakura didn't feel anything on the fight against Zabuza, and also because Naruto tried to block out as much of his pheromones in her direction. Naruto would have cursed his life if she came to have an interest in him.

Naruto got up from his kneeling position and grabbed Tsunami from her seat. After that, he lowered his head, so that Tsunami could kiss him more easily.

After being kissing each other for several seconds, Tsunami pulled back from him. She whispered with a blush. "Not here... Let's go to my room."

Naruto nodded and followed Tsunami, who guided him to her room while they kissed again. When being in front of the door of her room, she awkwardly opened it, giving way to Naruto, who hadn't ceased kissing her all the way there.

Naruto pulled back a little from her and carried her in bridal style to the bed. He kissed her and slowly put her down on the sheets.

He then stood up and asked, "Are you sure you want to do this?" Naruto already knew the answer. But what the hell, at least, he could ask, right?

Tsunami nodded and replied, "Don't worry; come over here," while opening her legs to him.

Naruto nodded and took off his jacket. After that, he slowly took off the mesh he had under his jacket, showing his sculpted body to Tsunami, who couldn't help licking her lips.

After that, he took off his ANBU pants, remaining only with his underwear. Tsunami had also taken off her clothes, staying only with her underwear.

Tsunami sat near Naruto, and she could see the erection behind his boxers. She crawled on the bed and went over to Naruto, staring at that area. Naruto noticed this and coaxed, "Come on, Tsunami-chan. You can do whatever you want."

She blushed a little by what she had done since she did it unconsciously. She nodded and swallowed some saliva. She lowered his boxers, and then she licked her lips when she saw Naruto's cock.

She then stuck out her tongue and began to lick Naruto's member slowly, who grunted and encouraged Tsunami to continue, saying that she was doing it very well.

She felt flattered at those words and now sucked slowly, but she could not stick it entirely in her mouth due to the gag reflex. Then she began to move, sucking as much as she could.

As she did the blowjob, she also played with her vagina, which was already quite wet.

She continued for a few minutes until Naruto groaned, "Tsunami-san, I'm c-cumming."

At this, Naruto grabbed Tsunami's head and forced her to swallow his cock entirely as he released a large amount of semen in her throat.

Tsunami felt that her eyes were watering and also felt a great orgasm, which she didn't have for years.

She gulped the semen and slowly pulled out the member from her mouth with an audible 'pop' at the end. She noticed that a drop of semen remained on the tip, so she wiped it with her tongue.

After that, she sensually smiled and leaned back on the bed as she said in a voice filled with lust, "Come here, Naruto-kun; you'll enjoy this." After this, she spread her legs and motioned Naruto to come closer.

Naruto smiled back and crawled towards her, and when he reached her, he looked carefully at her body.

She was worried that Naruto wouldn't like her body because she was a woman who already had a son. However, before she could worry more, Naruto smiled and started licking her navel, causing her to moan softly.

Naruto stopped, lifted his eyes and stated, "You're sexy, Tsunami-chan. The baggy clothes you use don't do you justice. You should use the tightest clothes that you can find to show a little more your great figure." Then he continued licking even lower.

When Tsunami heard this, she felt that her heart started pumping faster. When was the last time that someone gave her a compliment? She then looked down and saw that Naruto was removing her panties. She just sat back and prepared herself for what Naruto was going to do.

When Naruto removed Tsunami's panties, he threw it to the floor, and then he put his face right in front of her vagina. When Tsunami saw this, she blushed quite a lot, so she said, "Don't stare at it."

Naruto smiled, breathed the scent of her private part and stated, "This smell is simply intoxicating." Tsunami blushed again, but she threw her head back and moaned as she felt Naruto's tongue in her folds.

Naruto then started licking, while Tsunami placed her legs on his shoulders. After a few seconds, he stopped licking, introducing his tongue in Tsunami's vagina, who arched back because she almost felt another orgasm.

Naruto increased the speed, and then he felt that her walls began to squeeze his tongue, which meant that she was about to cum.

He looked at her clitoris and replaced his tongue with his fingers. He approached his head and gave it a smooth bite. Tsunami gripped Naruto's head, forcing him to swallow all her fluids, and Naruto did it gladly.

When Naruto realized that Tsunami's orgasm had stopped, he looked up and saw her blurred vision as a bit of saliva came out from the corner her lips. He smiled at her expression and said as he placed himself on top of her. "I hope you can still continue because I'm still not satisfied." When Tsunami heard this, she went out of her trance and gave him another kiss as she opened her legs a little more.

She then encouraged, "Go ahead; do it already." She then put her legs on Naruto's hips, who slowly began to introduce his member into her vagina.

She started to moan with pleasure when she felt Naruto's member entering into her cavity. But then Tsunami opened her eyes a bit when she felt that his penis was touching her womb, and it seemed that it wouldn't stop. Tsunami was feeling full as never before. Just as she was about to say something, Naruto started his thrusts.

She hugged Naruto even more, as she moaned and screamed, "Aaahhh ... You don't know how much I missed this! Please Naruto-kun; move faster! Don't stop!"

Naruto began moving faster than before and exclaimed, "You're so tight, Tsunami-san. I can't believe that you've had a child. This sensation feels great!" He couldn't believe her tightness, and the pleasure he was feeling was fantastic. Naruto supposed that her tightness was due to being so long without sexual activity. He even thought that this guy Kaiza never touched her. Naruto had concluded that Kaiza wasn't the biological father of Inari.

Naruto then turned Tsunami, which caused her to get on top of him. She instantly understood what Naruto wanted and started to move her hips up and down with a lot of speed while Naruto played with her breasts which were bigger than they seemed to be.

After several minutes of constant movement, Naruto held her hips, so they wouldn't move, increasing in this way the penetration speed. After two minutes, neither of they could stand it anymore. Naruto felt his member being sucked in, and Tsunami felt the member of Naruto increasing inside of her.

Then they both shouted that they were cumming, and once again, Naruto released a lot of cum inside Tsunami.

Tsunami didn't mind this. Naruto had already broken her completely; she couldn't think anymore, she just wanted more of Naruto because she never had sex as wonderful as this. And this boy, no, this man had given her that.

Fuck it all, if she got pregnant, she would gladly have his son. But it was a shame that it wasn’t possible yet.

Naruto then pulled his hands off from her hips and by doing so, she fell and caught herself on him while she placed her hands on Naruto's pectorals. Tsunami looked up and could see that Naruto was smiling at her wickedly.

She was about to ask him what was wrong, but Naruto didn't allow her since he got her up as he put her in the doggy style. Naruto began to stroke her butt as he said, "Tell me, Tsunami-'chan.' Have you ever used this hole before?" As he said this, Naruto popped one of his fingers into her anus.

She got excited and moaned at that contact, which made her stutter, “N-No, b-but I don't think that you'll fit in there; you are so big."

Naruto smiled again, but this had no malice. He then said, "Well, we should try. I assure you that you'll enjoy this."

Tsunami looked at his member and saw that the tip was trying to break into her small entrance. She collapsed, but Naruto grabbed her hips well enough so that she wouldn't fall entirely.

Tsunami then bit her lip to keep from shouting since this was hurting her, but simultaneously, she was feeling much pleasure. She was about to tell him to stop, but then, he stuck his penis completely into her. Tsunami screamed and orgasmed again.

Naruto smiled and uttered, "It seems it was able to fit. What do you think about this feeling?" Then he pulled out his member a bit before sticking it back into her, causing a moan of pleasure from Tsunami.

She tilted her head at Naruto and smiled with lust, "It feels ... wonderful. I never thought that this could feel so good. Go ahead, Naruto-kun. I will get used to this sensation."

Naruto needed no more; he pulled out his cock from Tsunami, who to realize this, felt an unpleasant sensation of emptiness. But that feeling quickly faded, since Naruto completely refilled her.

Tsunami couldn't describe what she was feeling; the pleasure was indescribable. She regretted never trying something like this before, but then she thought it wouldn't have had the same effect since her previous husbands weren't like Naruto.

She couldn't see it, but Naruto could see her face filled with pleasure. She had her tongue out from her mouth and saliva escaping from there as she seemed to look at nothing while she received his thrusts with pleasure.

That expression pleased Naruto, which made him increase the speed of his thrusts, causing more moans from Tsunami, who after a few minutes, shouted, "Naruto-kun you're filling me so much! I can't still believe that you're giving me such pleasure!"

Naruto smiled; this was because Naruto never stopped releasing his pheromones, and besides that, he occasionally sent electrical currents through her body.

Naruto had already decided to make Tsunami part of his "Harem", or this was how Anko called to his small group of girlfriends. Although Tsunami wasn't a Kunoichi, she had earned a spot with honors; she would only have to wait for a while until he could come to visit her again.

Naruto continued his strong thrusts until he could no longer resist, releasing another big load of cum in Tsunami, who arched back and screamed, releasing another powerful orgasm. But this one was much more than the previous ones since it messed the bed sheets.

When they finished, Naruto took out his cock from Tsunami's ass, who moaned in disappointment as she felt his member leaving, "I want it in, forever." Tsunami stated with pleasure in her words.

Naruto smiled, "That's not possible, but we can continue this until the others arrive."

Tsunami smiled happily at this, and she quickly turned around to hold Naruto's penis as she started to lick it, "Nothing would please me more than that ..." Then, they continued doing it, for several more hours.

Kurama, who had been watching all this, just smiled. Without a doubt, he liked the fact that Naruto was his Jinchūriki. It couldn't be anyone better.

Tazuna's Home - 6 Hours Later

Right now, everyone was at Tazuna's house, eating quietly the food that Tsunami prepared, and she couldn’t pull the smile of satisfaction away from her face. Her father had asked her the reason for her happiness, but she said nothing.

However, Anko knew that face very well, a face that she usually had after having sex with Naruto. She just smiled and looked at Naruto, who smiled back. She went back to eating her food quietly, waiting for her turn tonight.

Naruto was also eating his food, and he couldn't stop throwing compliments about the excellent dinner to a blushing Tsunami. No one seemed to find that strange, well the other Genin thought it was unusual to see Naruto polite and attentive, but beyond that, nothing else. But this only served to consolidate the suspicions of Anko.

Sakura looked like crap; it was as if she had fought against an army of ninjas with tied hands. Naruto knew very well why, so he mentally congratulated Sakura for surviving one of Anko's training, since he had also been a victim of them.

Menma and Sasuke didn't look that bad; they just looked tired and wet. Regardless, what annoyed Naruto was that those two idiots were competing with the food. Did they not realize that this family was humble? Fucking idiots, did they believe that everyone had their money?

But his patience ended when he saw that they threw up the food. He hit the table and growled, "Goddamn it, you fucking idiots! If you do that again, I'll cut your stomachs open with a rusty kunai and then I will put the food back inside of you! Goddamn it! Don't you know what respect is? Do you think that Tsunami-chan made this wonderful dinner for you to be throwing it up?!" He yelled, releasing big amounts of killing intent, which made Kakashi open his eyes in shock to feel such a sense of death, which throughout his long career he never felt. Not even when Kushina saw him reading his books.

But the feeling ended when Tsunami put a hand on Naruto's shoulder and reassured, "Don't worry about it, Naruto-kun. I thank you for that. But we have enough food, so there is nothing to worry about."

Naruto looked at Tsunami, who was smiling. Naruto smiled back and then calmed himself down before continuing eating. Meanwhile, the people who were affected by the instinct sighed in relief when they felt the pressure disappear.

Meanwhile, Tazuna saw the interaction between his daughter and Naruto with suspicion, and so he asked, "Okay, what happened between you two?" At this, all paid attention to Tazuna. Anko smiled with amusement while Naruto thought if he should say it or not.

Tsunami, on the other hand, blushed and replied, "W-what d-do y-you mean, father? Nothing happened between Naruto-kun and me." She tried to hide her blush.

Tazuna narrowed his eyes at his daughter's attitude because this only made him even more suspicious. "Hmm, I say this because you’re suddenly very attentive to him; that smile on your face; you’ve started calling him 'Naruto-kun' and you've never done that with anyone but Inari. That just makes me think…" Then he looked at Naruto, who had a proud smile on his face and Tsunami was covering her face in embarrassment.

Tazuna then opened his eyes in shock, "N-no, d-don't t-tell me that you and he h-had..." And he stopped there; he didn’t want to say the last word.

Then Anko burst into laughter, "Tell them, Naruto-kun; you're not the type of person who hides these things!"

Naruto sighed and asked, "Tsunami-chan?" He then looked at Tsunami, who nodded.

Naruto rose up from his place and took her by her waist, giving her a kiss. That caused different reactions. Menma and Sasuke spat the food that they had in their mouths. Kakashi mentally cursed Naruto for his luck. Tazuna and Sakura had opened their eyes and jaws in shock. And Anko, well, she was just saying things like, 'Welcome to the Sisterhood' and 'the more, the better.'

After a few seconds, Naruto and Tsunami ended the kiss, and they prepared themselves for whatever that was to come. They waited several seconds since no one changed their expressions.

Tazuna spoke again, but this time with anger charged in his words, "Damn brat! What did you do to my daughter?" He yelled, as he jumped towards Naruto, who just moved to one side and Tazuna ended up crashing into the wall.

Tsunami corrected. "Father, Naruto-kun did nothing to me; I agreed to do it."

Tazuna rubbed his head and retorted, "But Tsunami, he’s just a child-" But he was interrupted by Naruto who argued, "Stop there! A child, me? Remember that I can kill you with a single move. If you want to know who the children are, you have four of them in this room." He then pointed to Inari, Sakura, Menma, and Sasuke.

Sasuke and Menma yelled, "Dobe! / Demon!" Sakura didn’t care, but she was surprised at what Naruto did. She would tell Ino without a doubt. Maybe this would destroy her, which Sakura would love to see. Too bad she didn’t know that Ino wouldn’t mind.

Inari, for his part, saw this with mixed emotions. First, he looked at his mother as a traitor, because he believed that she betrayed his father. But he also felt a kind of happiness, considering that Naruto could be his new father, but his sorrow was greater than his happiness. He said nothing, just stood quietly struggling with his emotions.

Tazuna then rose up from the floor and looked at Naruto, who also was staring at him. Then Tazuna spoke, "I want you to tell me your intentions with my daughter."

Anko then whispered, "Sex, the best sex a woman can feel." But everyone in the room was able to hear it, which made them all blush, except for Naruto, who smiled and winked at her.

Then he paid attention to Tazuna and replied, "My intentions? That's something we can discuss another time. I don't want to talk about that if unwanted people are around." Naruto emphasized his last words, as he looked at Kakashi and his Genin, who felt offended by Naruto's words again.

Tazuna looked at him for a few seconds and then sighed in defeat. Who was he to tell his daughter what to do with her life now? He had no authority. So he sat back in his seat.

Naruto once again kissed a blushing but happy Tsunami, who clumsily returned the kiss. Then she grabbed the empty plates from the table to wash them.

Naruto sat in his place again, and he could see that everyone was watching him. He just sighed and ignored them. However, he couldn't avoid being angry about the next thing he heard, "Hmph. I don't understand what you see in a demon like him. I'm sure he uses his demon powers to do this to the women."

Tsunami and Anko got angry, and Anko was about to teach some manners to the brat, but she couldn't because Kakashi spoke first, "Sasuke, we all know about Naruto's condition, but you can't be talking about this in places other than Konoha. That's a crime, and I see no reason for you to speak with so much hatred in your words. Naruto can be a sarcastic person, but you know why he is like this." Kakashi didn't hate Naruto, but he neither appreciated him. He accepted the sarcastic comments of Naruto just because he knew how his life had been, and Kakashi thought that he used that as a shield, to hide his real feelings.

Sasuke growled, "I can't stand him, that mocking smile he always gives me, besides that damn hair color that he has. I can't stand being so much time around him! Seeing him reminds me to that fucking bastard. Who can have that hair color?! Just a son of a bitch!" Naruto was completely angry to hear this. People could insult him all they wanted because he didn't care what they said, but not to the woman who gave him birth!

He almost beat up Sasuke, but he saw Menma hitting Sasuke's face, making him fall to the floor. Then Menma exclaimed, "Damn it, Teme! You know very well that my mother had that hair color. I don't care what you say about Naruto, but I don't want to hear you disrespecting my mother!" After that, Menma returned to his place.

Everyone watched this scene with different reactions. Sakura watched it with concern. Tazuna with concern too, since he didn't want that his protectors ended up fighting and killing each others in his home. Inari was indifferent. Tsunami was angry with that boy again because he insulted Naruto's hair color. Kakashi also looked a little angry due to Sasuke's words; that woman had been the wife of his Sensei, after all.

Anko with amusement, since she knew that the brat would die sooner than Naruto had planned to him if he continued with that attitude.

She then chuckled, "Hehehe, it seems that the Hokage brat had put you in your place, eh?"

Sasuke rubbed his cheek and looked at Anko with anger as he exclaimed, "Shut up, Snake Whore!"

That was all Naruto needed to attack Sasuke; faster than anyone could see, Naruto appeared in front of Sasuke, who opened his eyes in shock to see the speed, just like everyone else in there.

Naruto then gave a sharp blow to Sasuke's stomach, who spat a lot of blood.

Naruto looked straight into his eyes, lifting him off the floor and taking him by his neck. "You can insult me all you want, you fucking bastard. But if you insult one of my women again, I'll rip your tongue out. Understood?" His voice had chilled the blood of all those who were there. Naruto released a vast amount of killing intent again, but this time, all were feeling it.

It was worse for Sasuke—who began to shake with fear—because he was in front of Naruto. He could also see a vision where Naruto fulfilled his word. No one moved from their places, not even Kakashi, who was doing his best to do it.

Naruto squeezed Sasuke's neck even harder, releasing more of his killing intent. "I thought I've asked you if you understood it."

Sasuke when feeling more of that killing intent, he nodded as he could while he began to wet his pants. Naruto then released him, and when Sasuke was practically falling unconscious, Naruto gave him a severe knee in his stomach, knocking him out.

Naruto then pointed to Sakura and called her, "Come here." She nodded and walked fearfully towards Naruto, who spoke again, "Grab this idiot and take him to his room, if I keep watching his repulsive face, I will kill him."

Sakura looked at Sasuke's unconscious body, but she couldn't move because Naruto was still releasing his killing intent. Naruto when seeing that Sakura didn't move growled and yelled, "Move, goddamn it! Grab this idiot and take him to his room!"

"H-hai!" Sakura shouted, and she quickly grabbed Sasuke's body to take him to the room he shared with the men of her team.

When Naruto noticed that Sasuke left the room, he stopped releasing his killing intent, and everyone released a collective sigh.

Anko then grabbed Naruto a kissed him passionately as she spoke, "Ah, Naruto-kun. You don't know how excited I'm right now. We have to do it now!" Hearing this, all the men except for Inari and Naruto had a nosebleed. Without a doubt, they all were perverts.

Tsunami scolded her father for such an attitude, as he began to apologize and wipe the blood that dripped from his nose with a rag.

Kakashi and now Menma cursed the redhead's luck as they also cleaned up their noses. Kakashi then looked at Naruto, "I understand your reaction, Naruto. But attacking Shinobi from the same village is something that is frowned upon. Don't ever do something like that again."

Naruto growled at this, he pulled away a little from Anko and replied, "Well, I warned you. I told you that if these idiots said stupid things, then they would pay it. And I'll fulfill my threat if that idiot disrespects any of my women again." All blushed again to hear the part about 'Naruto and his women.' But nobody said anything else.

Just then, Sakura returned to the room and looked at Naruto with fear. She walked away as fast as she, stopping at one of the corners of the room. Menma could understand the attitude of Sakura. He wasn't stupid; Menma could tell by what happened tonight that Naruto could be very dangerous and that he wouldn't hesitate to kill him if he kept saying stupid things. Therefore, Menma thought it would be best to try to avoid conversations with Naruto and ignore his mocking and sarcastic remarks.

After a few minutes, Tsunami brought more tea to the table, which Naruto and Anko gladly received, just like everyone else.

Sakura then noticed where she stood, and she could see a picture frame on the wall, "Uhm, why do you have a broken photograph on the wall?" Then she turned her head slightly to look at Inari and continued, "Inari-kun didn't stop observing it over dinner. It seems like someone purposely removed this person from the photo."

Hearing that, everyone who knew that man tensed. Tsunami replied, "He was my late husband."

Tazuna then continued, "The man who was once called the hero of this village." Inari rose up from his seat and left the room before the conversation continued.

Tsunami followed Inari and she stopped to say at the door, "Oto-san! I told you not to talk about him in front of Inari!" Then she also left the room.

Everyone looked towards the direction where Inari and Tsunami left while Tazuna began to tremble with sadness.

Sakura then spoke again, "What's wrong with Inari-kun?"

"There is a reason behind this," Kakashi added as he looked at Tazuna. Naruto already knew the reason for this. But he decided to hear Tazuna's version.

Tazuna then began to tell the same story that Naruto had heard from Tsunami, only a bit more detailed.

After concluding with his story, Naruto stood up and said, "Very well. Anko-chan, I think it's time to go to sleep. What do you say if you come with me?" Anko when hearing this quickly got up from her seat and followed Naruto to his room.

The others, seeing those two leaving, blushed since they knew what those two would do now, but they said nothing. They realized it was very late too, so they all decided to go to sleep as well.

Back with Naruto, he had reached his room along with Anko, who had quickly stripped off her clothes. Naruto then placed a privacy seal in the room, and he prepared himself for what was coming.

But just then, they heard someone knocking on the door. Anko growled and told Naruto to ignore that person. Nonetheless, he just smiled, told her to wait a moment and that he would come back soon.

When he opened the door, something left him surprised. A blushing Tsunami, dressed in a nightgown was at the entrance of the room. Naruto then saw that she opened her mouth and spoke, "Can I come in?" Naruto nodded, and Tsunami entered the room.

Anko, who saw Tsunami, smiled cheekily and stated, "Oh, it seems that someone wants a little more of the great cock of Naruto-kun. That's why you're here. Right, Tsunami-chan?"

Tsunami blushed even more at the words that Anko chose to express what she was feeling right now. But she was certainly right. Hence, Tsunami nodded and took off her nightgown, showing a very revealing underwear.

Naruto, who had already closed the door, stood next to Tsunami and whistled, "Wow, you look damn sexy in this set. But how did you get ready so fast? I thought you followed your son."

Tsunami lowered her head and replied, "I already knew where Inari wanted to go, so I didn't bother him. I took advantage of that to prepare myself because I knew that you would do this tonight. So I thought that maybe I could join you."

Naruto looked at Anko, who nodded quickly. Naruto then started kissing Tsunami's neck as he expressed, "Hmm, you have done something very naughty, Tsunami-chan. You have done something like that just to have some sex."

Tsunami, who was moaning, replied as she could, "T-That's n-not t-true-e, I just wanted to ..." but she was interrupted because Anko quickly grabbed her and pulled her next to her.

"Just shut up, and let's do this!" Anko exclaimed as she helped Tsunami take off her underwear.

Naruto saw this and thought to himself, "Hey, perverted Fox; I hope that you're dying of envy right now."

Kurama hearing this laughed, "Ha! As if I could envy to a pathetic human!" But clearly that was different, and he knew that Naruto could detect the lies in his words. But still, Kurama was proud. Everything he had taught to his container was bearing fruit.

Done.

That's it. I won't write more than one lemon in a single chapter. First, if you want to tell me something about Naruto's pheromones. I wrote it and period; there is nothing more to say. If you think this is illogical, you should now that there is nothing logical in the anime.

Well, as we have seen, Naruto and Anko arrived to save some asses. Haku had to intervene because Sasuke and Menma were better than they expected.

The Bunshin Daibakuha is not a jutsu from the scroll. Naruto learned that jutsu in his years as Root.

Kakashi wasn’t in love with Anko; it was something else. Hmmm... He felt attracted to her body or something like that.

About Tsunami and Naruto. Don't say I forced it. Tsunami was a woman who didn’t have sex for years. Besides that, Naruto's pheromones are unyielding, which made her fall easily. Don’t think that Naruto is getting rid of Tsunami.

No, Ladies and Gentlemen. The Land of Waves will have much relevance in the future.

Regarding, the Land of Waves and Uzushiogakure. I decided to do this due to the plot.

Then there is the thing about Gatō and Naruto; it seems that they have a past. In the next chapter, we will see the outcome of this as well as the outcome of the Land of Waves Arc.

I want to dedicate this space to the lemons.

It's something difficult thing to write, but I still do it to entertain you. There is no other reason; it's mere entertainment.

The words, the actions, everything is entertainment. As a porn movie or a doujinshi. If I wanted to write something realer, the 'entertainment' factor would be lost, and this is what the fanfics are for, aren't they?

So I announce that from now on that the lemons that I'll write will be pure entertainment. Rarely there will be ‘romantic’ scenes. However, my primary focus is the entertainment.

Some of you won't like this, but another vast majority will do. I hope you understand, and if you don't, you should stop reading now.

Remember to add me on Facebook. You can contact me there quickly. There I will say when I will post the new chapters.

See you!

Chapter Text

Person talking, "Hello everyone."

Person thinking, "Damn you all."

Demon talking, "I will eat you."

Demon thinking, "This tastes worse than shit."

Disclaimer: I do not own Naruto, Masashi Kishimoto does.

Chapter 8

Nami no Kuni - 6 days later

Six days passed from that night in which Naruto had 'fun' with Anko and Tsunami. Nothing unusual had happened in those six days, besides that. However, didn't do that all nights, just like the night before.

Naruto had decided to train the whole night because he didn't want to get used to that routine. He had another one, which was to train at night, although he didn't mind taking a day off to do 'other things'. But he had stopped training for almost a week.

That's why he was in the forest; he had been training from very early and had fallen asleep because he spent a lot of his chakra. He had begun training in the mastering of his elements. He made hundreds of shadow clones and divided them into five groups, each group for a particular nature. He didn't make any clones for his gravity element because Naruto knew he had mastered it at this point. He knew the steps to master each of his elements, since he had read it many times in the scroll and memorized the steps.

Meanwhile, he had been looking for a way to improve his Taijutsu since he wasn't as small as he was before. Hence, it was hard to him to make some moves that he could previously do more easily.

He continued training with his Taijutsu for several hours, trying to find a way where he could use it from now on and in the near future since Naruto knew that he would keep growing. Regardless, Naruto had forgotten something crucial, and that was to remind to his clones not dissipate themselves all at once.

When Naruto had decided to take a break and get some sleep, he felt that all his clones disappeared at once. He felt a terrible headache, which made him fall unconscious on the spot.

Naruto woke up in his mental landscape and could see a smiling Kurama. He sighed and said, "You don't need to tell me. I forgot about that detail. I didn't believe that my clones would be so stupid as to dissipate all at once. But I don't care. I was about to sleep. And I see that those idiots made good progress. The Fūton group in particular. They already managed to cut the leaves. I didn't think that they would do it so quickly. "

Kurama chuckled but said nothing. Naruto looked at his mental landscape and realized that Kurama had made several changes again. Now, besides being a recreation place, it also had great prairies, as well as several normal sized foxes running in the surrounding area. He didn't mind this since he had given Kurama freedom to modify the landscape as he pleased. It was he the one who lived here, after all. After that, he ended the connection and went to sleep.

7 hours later

A girl with a pink kimono was collecting some forest herbs. That girl was Haku; she had come out of the hideout to get some medicine for Zabuza to continue healing his wounds. She continued collecting more herbs until she saw several broken trees in the area, as well as several cracks in the ground. She looked forward and saw Naruto lying on the ground. That caused her heart to pump faster, but she also felt a sense of worry when seeing Naruto there.

She quickly ran to see if he was okay, but when she was right in front of him, she recalled how easily he defeated Zabuza.

She had to finish him; she couldn't disappoint the man who took care of her. She then leaned down and headed her hand to Naruto's neck, who still seemed to be sleeping.

Haku didn't want to do this; she didn't know why. Had she fallen in love with Naruto by just seeing him once? That was what she wondered all these days, and she couldn't find an answer to that question.

However, just as she was about to grab him by his neck, she lost her will and slapped Naruto's shoulder, shaking it while saying, "You're going to catch a cold if you sleep here."

Naruto then opened his eyes, got up a little and said, "Hmm. I was asking myself when I would see you again. Tell me, how is Zabuza?" Haku was taken aback.

She hadn't brought anything with her to fight against Naruto, and she knew that if he wanted to kill her, he would have no difficulty to do so. Hence, she smiled and replied, "Who is Zabuza? I don't know who that man is."

Naruto rolled his eyes and responded, "Come on, you don't need to lie. And don't be afraid; I would never attack a girl as pretty as you. I know you tried to do something a few seconds ago, but I was confident that you wouldn't do anything."

Haku blushed, but she quickly regained her composure and replied. "Naruto-san, you and I are enemies, so we shouldn't be talking right now. Zabuza-sama is about to recover from the wounds that you caused him, and after that, we'll end up with what we started."

Naruto smiled and exclaimed, "Wow! You know my name, but I don't know yours... "

"Haku," she replied

Naruto smiled and commented, "Hmm, it's a beautiful name for a lovely lady." Haku couldn't help blushing again. Naruto then continued, "Haku-chan, we shouldn't be enemies. Rather than fighting, we should stop. Haku-chan, tell me, what are you doing with a bastard like Zabuza?"

Haku wanted to scold him for the word he had chosen to describe Zabuza. Nevertheless, she couldn't since she began to feel the same thing when they first met again.

Therefore, she replied with difficulty. "Na-Naruto-san, I m-must leave; I'll see you again soon." Then she got up, but before she could walk away, Naruto grabbed her hands and continued, "Come on, Haku-chan. Stay a little longer; I just want to know you more."

Haku had bitten her lip to hide a moan. Haku could swear that she felt a kind of electric current traveling through her body, which made her feel even hornier. However, Haku shook her head and replied, "I'm s-sorry Naruto-kun, but I really can't stay any longer, I must return with Zabuza-sama." But then, she bit her lip again when she felt Naruto caressing her hands.

Naruto led her back to the ground and spoke, "Come on, Haku-chan! What's so important, anyways? Why don't we talk just a minute? So we can get to know more. Perhaps we might even have something in common."

Haku didn't know what was happening. She just wanted to jump on him and do whatever he told her. But she was trying very hard to resist her impulses. She then nodded and replied, "O-okay, what do you want to talk about?"

Naruto smiled and stopped attacking her with his pheromones. He then replied, "Well, I already know what your name is, and you also know mine. So, why don't you tell me how you ended up in the clutches of Zabuza?"

Haku, who was still a little 'horny', answered. "I don't know if I should talk about this, but..." Then she told Naruto about her childhood. About how her father killed her mother; that she became a street orphan; and that Zabuza 'adopted' her.

She didn't know why she told him all that. However, she felt that she needed to.

Naruto listened intently to every word, and he honestly said, "Hmm. Without a doubt, you and I have a lot in common. Haku-chan, why don't you come back to the village with me? There we'll have much more time to talk, and alone." He grinned, releasing his pheromones, but, this time, more than before. He moved closer to Haku and began to caress her cheek with his thumb.

Haku, this time, could not help moaning, which made her blush considerably. She looked away and replied, "Na-Naruto-kun, I-I ca-can't, I-I-I'm a man."

Naruto instantly stopped and stared at her with a serious face. But, in the end, he couldn't help it and laughed, "Come on, Haku-chan! Tell me something cleverer than that, hahaha," wiping a tear from his eye; he continued, "But hey, Haku-chan. I'm giving you the opportunity to come with me. If you continue with Zabuza; you'll continue being miserable. Come with me; I promise you that we'll have a good time there."

Haku sighed in disappointment when Naruto stopped touching her; it felt so well. The only thing she wanted was to him to keep touching her. But then she remembered his words and replied, "But I can't, Zabuza-sama..."

But before she could say more, Naruto put a finger on her lips and continued, "Haku-chan, don't you see it? That bastard is just using you. Once he sees that you're no longer useful to him, he'll get rid of you without hesitation. I also went through something like that before. The difference is that I didn't let them use me. That's why I'm saying that we're very similar. "

Haku realized she was losing her resistance. She had to leave this place, or else she would end up accepting his proposal. Thus, she got up again, and without saying anything; she walked in the opposite direction.

But she felt Naruto grabbing her hand again, turning her around, "Naruto-kun, I can't-" at that moment, she felt Naruto's lips against hers.

She was surprised at first, but as she felt Naruto's lips, Haku couldn't help returning the kiss.

She was in heaven; she never thought that she would kiss someone. Could she have a normal life like the other Shinobi? Without worrying of ninja hunters?

Haku realized that she had lost the little resistance that she had left; she already knew it. She had fallen for Naruto, with just seeing him and talking a bit with him. She had read about that in novels, but she didn't know that something like that could happen to her. Who would have thought it?

She then felt Naruto's tongue inside her mouth playing with her tongue; she shyly did the same. After a few minutes, they separated. Haku with a blush on her cheeks and Naruto with a more than sexy look on his face

Haku then lowered her head and asked, "Why me? Why do you want me to go with you, Naruto-kun? We barely know each other, and you already want me to follow you. Tell me why do you want that?"

Naruto approached her and sat Haku down on the ground. Then he answered, "Because I hate seeing people using others, and even more for pathetic interests. I know about Zabuza and his failed coup d'état, and I know that he wants to do it again. But the only thing he will accomplish is death, along with everyone wishing to help him. He doesn't have the power nor the intelligence to accomplish something of that magnitude. He believes that he can go to Kiri and do whatever he wants with just wishing it. Haku-chan, you don't have to waste your life on something that will fail no matter what. Come with me, Haku-chan; I promise that your life won't be the same as it had been. You've already paid your debt to Zabuza. It's time for you to be in charge of your life. Besides that, you're beautiful, intelligent and a great Kunoichi. I can't allow that someone like you waste her life in such a way."

Haku upon hearing this felt her heart warming. She could see the sense in Naruto's words, and he was right. She had already paid her debt to Zabuza quite some time ago; here was a new opportunity, a chance that she was willing to accept.

She nodded and hugged Naruto while saying, "I agree, Naruto-kun; I will go back to your village with you. I don't want to escape from the hunters anymore. Please, promise me that you won't leave me."

Naruto began to caress Haku's hair and answered, "It's a promise, and I keep my promises. All I want you to do now is go back with Zabuza and act as if none of this has happened; just keep doing what Zabuza says. Kakashi is about to recover too, and he'll take care of Zabuza. He's no match for someone like Kakashi. Once Zabuza is dead, you'll come with me. Don't worry, nothing bad will happen to you. That's up to me."

Haku nodded and decided to give a little kiss to Naruto, who smiled at that. She then asked, "What will we do once we are in your village? What are your plans?"

Naruto smiled and replied, "My plans? Well..."

Meanwhile - Tazuna's house

"Here you go," Tsunami said while giving a bowl of food to Sakura, who thanked her. Tazuna then spoke. "Naruto didn't return last night, right?" Tsunami and Anko sighed in disappointment since they did nothing the last night. However, Anko replied. "No... Naruto said that he wanted to train a bit, that he didn't want to get used to having sex every night and that he had to return to his routine." She replied as she put some food into her mouth.

Listening to Anko's sincere words, everyone in the room blushed. Then Tsunami added, "I wonder if he is alright, our country nights are cold."

Kakashi had imagined Naruto along with Anko and Tsunami doing 'that,' which gave him a nosebleed. But now he was cleaning it, so he replied. "Don't worry, Naruto it's an excellent Shinobi. Besides, I think it's impossible for him to get a cold." Tsunami was already aware of his condition as a Jinchūriki, so she just nodded.

Sasuke spoke then, "Hmph, I don't know anything about that. Maybe that demon is dead." Everyone in the room looked at Sasuke as if he were a fool. Just a few days ago, Naruto nearly killed him, and he continued with that attitude. It seemed that some people would never learn. Even Sakura had already realized that Naruto was someone to be afraid of.

Sasuke got up from his seat to leave the room. Sakura saw this and asked, "Sasuke-kun?" Sasuke didn't turn and replied, "I'm going for a ride." And then he left the room.

Sakura was about to tell him that they were about to eat, but she saw that Sasuke had already eaten all his food.

Menma also stood up and declared, "Kakashi-nii, I will finish the training. I can almost achieve it. I'm sure that this evening I will have it ready." Kakashi nodded at the words of his 'brother'. After that, Menma also left the room.

Several minutes later, the house remained empty. Kakashi went to oversee the training of his students. Sakura followed Tazuna to the bridge to protect him since she already knew how to walk on trees. After all, that crazy training with Anko was useful.

Anko went to look for Naruto, and if she were lucky, she could 'catch up' with him.

Tsunami stayed to do the chores at home and Inari could only think of Naruto.

Zabuza's Hideout - 2 hours later

Haku had returned to the hideout a few hours ago. She had given Zabuza the medicine, and he already seemed recovered. She could only think of Naruto, and she was euphoric for having a chance like that.

She heard about Naruto's plans, and she decided to help him. His plans were better than Zabuza's, and she knew that someday Naruto would be someone very powerful and feared in the Elemental Nations.

She went out of her thoughts after seeing Zabuza crushing an apple with his hands, and seeing this; she stated, "Much of your strength is back."

Zabuza checked his arm and added, "Okay. It's almost time, Haku."

Haku answered with a "Hai" as she thought, "Yes Zabuza-sama. I appreciate what you've done for me, but it's time that I decide in my life. I’m sorry, but soon, you will have to die. I'm really sorry..."

18:00 o'clock - Somewhere in Nami no Kuni

A pair of drenched and tired boys had smiles of triumph on their faces since both of them had completed the training that Kakashi had given them. And speaking of Kakashi, he had already left several hours ago because he got bored of watching them.

Then Sasuke, without opening his eyes and with the same smile as before, said. "Time to go back."

Menma smiled even more and answered. "Sure!"

Back at Tazuna's house

Everyone was there, except for Menma and Sasuke, who didn't arrive yet. Sakura, noticing this, said, "They didn't come yet. Neither Sasuke-kun nor Menma-kun." Then Tsunami started serving the meal to everyone, and just as they began eating, the door opened.

Everyone turned around and saw Menma and Sasuke walking in, both looked quite tired. Tazuna spoke first, "What happened to you two? You look exhausted and soaked."

Menma smiled a little and replied, "We've managed to stay on the water surface."

Kakashi gave an eye smile and continued, "Okay, Menma and Sasuke. You will protect Tazuna-san next time." They both smiled and nodded as they sat to eat at the table.

Naruto didn't care. His mission was to reinforce them, not to protect Tazuna. Though he would do it since he didn't want Tsunami suffering for his death.

After that, he started eating quietly, throwing compliments at Tsunami for the excellent dinner.

A few minutes later, everyone had finished the dinner and Tazuna spoke again, "The Bridge is almost complete. It's thanks to you."

Tsunami, who was clearing the dishes with the help of some clones of Naruto, added. "But don't push yourself so much."

Tazuna didn't pay much attention to it; he knew that his daughter cared deeply for him. Tazuna was grateful, but he was doing all of this for the sake of his village. He then settled in his chair and looked with a serious expression at everyone, "I wanted to ask this before, but ... Why are you still here when I lied about the request details?"

Upon hearing this, Kakashi crossed his arms and replied, "Not doing right when you know it is right is a coward's way. There are no weak soldiers led by a brave commander." Tazuna was a little surprised to hear those words from Kakashi, who added. "Those are the teachings of the Hokage."

Inari snorted and looked at Menma, who seemed to rest. Then he looked at Naruto, who seemed to be talking about something interesting with Anko since she was smiling and nodding at every word.

At that moment, he remembered that day when his father saved the village; the day when Gatō executed his father in public, and finally, the words that his father told him years ago, "Protect whatever is important to you with these two arms." Then he shed some tears and asked, "Why?" That attracted everyone's attention; they looked at Inari, who had bowed his head.

Inari then hit the table with both hands, stood up and yelled, "Why are you trying so hard that you end up like that? You can't beat Gatō's men even if you train! No matter how hard you try and say those good-looking words. Weak people will always lose against strong people!" Everyone was surprised, all but Naruto, who chuckled.

Inari heard that and shouted, "What's so funny?! Shut up! It pisses me off when I watch you! You don't know anything about this country, and you're nosy! I'm different from you! You're someone who doesn't know any real pain and just laughs all the time!" He exclaimed while more tears ran down his cheeks.

Naruto laughed again, "Hehehe. Brat, if you were to have the life that I had, then you would have died a long time ago. But so what? The life that I had only made me powerful. You said that weak people lose against the strong ones. You are right. But a weak person can become strong, just like I did. But if all you do is cry, you will never achieve anything in this life, and in the end, all you will do is cry more and more. Stop crying and do something by yourself, brat. You are lucky to have a mother and a grandfather who care about you, when people in other places don't even have that, and they fight to survive every day on their own. Your attitude disgusts me, and if I haven't killed you from the moment that you started to cry, it's because you're the son of Tsunami-chan, and I would never make her feel sad." Inari was surprised to hear those words, words that made him shut up, but he was still crying.

Naruto then rose up from his seat and continued, "Change of plans, Anko-chan. I'm going to rest earlier today; we will postpone 'that' for another day. Night, Anko-chan, Tsunami-chan, old man, idiots, pervert, and crybaby."

Anko pouted but said nothing. She knew that the words of that kid didn't affect him, but she knew that remembering his childhood bothered him. Not because it was bad, but because he was someone weak and pathetic back then.

The others whom Naruto put a nickname to, felt a bit offended, but they said nothing.

Then Inari also left the room to watch the sea. Kakashi saw this and decided to follow him later. After a few minutes, Kakashi got up from his seat, went to where Inari was, and when he was there, asked. "Can I?" He didn't expect an answer and sat next to Inari.

"Naruto can sometimes be someone who says things as they are and speaks plainly. As I've heard, he's someone who gets angry easily. We heard about your father from Tazuna-san. Naruto is similar to you because he didn't have a father when he was a child. He didn't even meet them; we still don't know who his parents are. He neither had friends because, in our village, most people hate and despise him. All for an incident that occurred in our village 13 years ago. Everyone blames Naruto, but he was just a baby when that happened. But anyway, people are like that..."

Inari was surprised to hear this, and he paid more attention to the words of Kakashi, who continued. "I didn't see much of his childhood, but I know it was terrible. He even disappeared for a few years from our village, with the purpose of getting stronger. When he returned, he didn't allow anyone to touch him, because, before that, people in my village took care of beating him daily."

Inari was even more surprised; did he become strong so that nobody else could hurt him? Was that even possible? But then he asked. "But, why did no one help him? Why did no one protect him? I thought that in a ninja village, the ninjas of the village protected the people from danger."

Kakashi sighed and replied, "Well, most of the ninja population also saw Naruto as a nuisance, and they cared little if anything happened to him. I include myself among those who didn't care what could happen to him. But it wasn't because I hated him. It was because I had other obligations, and I couldn't take care of him. All I know is that he is someone very strong; I might even say that he is almost at my level. I don't know how that's possible, but you can see it; if someone gets tired of being treated like garbage, and if that someone decides to do something about it, then they can achieve it. Think about it, Inari. If you want to change things, then you have to do it by yourself, and don't wait until others do what you can do on your own." Then Kakashi stood up and said goodbye to Inari. Tomorrow everyone would protect Tazuna, so he would have to be with all his strength.

Meanwhile, Inari stayed to think about Kakashi's words, and especially, about Naruto.

The next day

"Kakashi-san, are you all right now?" Tsunami asked.

Kakashi smiled and answered, "Yes, kind of."

Then Anko added, "Hey, Tsunami-chan. Take good care of Naruto-kun; I didn't wake him up because I know he won't want to go to protect this perverted old man. So be sure to treat him very well, you know what I mean." She said the last thing while moving her eyebrows.

Tsunami blushed a little and nodded. Then Tazuna said goodbye to her, and they all went to the bridge.

Somewhere else

"What are you doing? I didn't hire you for charity." Gatō said through a phone, and then continued, "Hey, are you listening? Zabuza? Hey!"

Zabuza was listening Gatō speaking through a transmitter, so he ended up shattering it with his feet and commanded, "Let's go, Haku."

Haku, who was along with Zabuza in a boat, responded, "Hai, Zabuza-sama."

They both looked up and saw the bridge, hearing the sound of working men.

Back at Tazuna's house

Naruto was waking up. He realized that everyone went to the bridge since he couldn't feel the presence of anybody in the house, except for Tsunami and Inari. He rose up lazily from the bed and walked to the door; he walked down the stairs and went to greet Tsunami. Upon arrival, he could see that she was washing a few dishes. He sidled up, stepped behind her and grabbed her by her waist, turning her around to give her a kiss on her lips.

Tsunami dropped the plate on the floor and returned the kiss as she put her arms around Naruto's neck. After several seconds, they separated, and Tsunami said, "Sit down, Naruto-kun. I'll bring you breakfast; I'm sure you're hungry."

Naruto nodded as he sat at the dinner table. "So... Did they all go to the bridge? Even Anko-chan?" Naruto asked.

Tsunami nodded as she made Naruto's breakfast and replied, "Yes, they left about an hour ago, Anko-san said she didn't wake you up because she thought that you would get bored if you protected my father." Then she turned around and gave him breakfast and some tea to Naruto, who gladly received it as he began to eat.

Then he said, "She knows me very well. But good, that means that we are alone, which means…" Tsunami got excited, and she was about to prepare herself, but suddenly the door of her house was cut into several pieces. Naruto and Tsunami could see two men at the entrance, each with a katana.

They entered the house, and one of them, who had a hat, exclaimed, "So you're the daughter of Tazuna. Sorry, but you have to come with us."

Naruto then rose up from his seat and replied, "Hmm, it's a shame because that's not possible."

The two men looked at Naruto and then they started laughing, "Hahaha, what are you going to do, punk? Can't you see?" Asked the other one as he moved his katana.

Naruto just smiled, "Oh, well, I don't know... maybe I should kill you both. I was having a very pleasant conversation with Tsunami-chan, and you dared interrupt us. Yeah, I think I should kill you both." Just then, Inari appeared and saw the men, and to say he was scared was an understatement, he was horrified.

He deduced in an instant that they were men of Gatō, so he screamed, "Kaa-chan!"

Tsunami saw him and shouted, "Inari, go away!" Then the two men turned and looked at Inari, while the shirtless man continued, "What do you want, kid?" Then he looked at the man with the hat and asked, "Should we take him too?"

"We just need one hostage," Replied the other one.

Inari was more scared than before, but then he heard another voice that made him sigh in relief, "Hey, idiots! I'm still here in case you don't remember, and I believe I've said that I would kill you both." The men turned around, and the largest one raised his katana and yelled, "Shut up brat! This has nothing to do with-"

However, he couldn't finish his sentence because Naruto moved at full speed, giving him a powerful kick in his stomach, throwing him outside through the hole he had caused, crashing severely into a pole.

His friend shouted in shock, "Waraji!" He quickly ran to his partner and stood beside him.

What he saw scared him; his friend had died and with a single kick. He turned around and tried to run, but he felt a hand on his arm and heard a voice, "Where are you going? I thought I had said that I would kill you. Don't tell me that you want to miss the excellent opportunity of dying. "

Zōri saw Naruto, and he couldn't help being afraid since he could feel the killing intent of Naruto, who had a blank expression.

A little behind them, Inari saw all this with excitement, as well as Tsunami, who turned on when seeing Naruto fighting for the first time.

Zōri was between a rock and a hard place, and he did the only thing that he could do in a situation like this. He quickly bowed down to Naruto and pleaded, "Please forgive me, I'm just following Gatō's orders." Naruto stopped and looked at Zōri before grinning, "Gatō, eh? I want you to tell me where that dwarf is. If what you say is useful, I may forgive your life."

Zōri quickly responded, "Okay! Gatō will go today to the bridge, along with his men to assassinate Tazuna along with Zabuza and the ninjas of Konoha; that's all that I know! Please, forgive me!"

Naruto became serious, "So, today is the day, huh?" He thought and then continued, "Well, this information was very useful, you can leave." Zōri smiled at that as he thought, "Stupid brat, don't think that I'll forgive you."

Nonetheless, the next thing he heard from Naruto had him paling, "But not alive." Naruto then grabbed Zōri by his neck; he raised him off the ground as he whispered a few words "Fūton: Shinkū Kūki (Wind Style: Vacuum of Air)" Then he gave a soft punch on Zōri's stomach, dropping him to the ground.

Zōri got up quickly and nervously asked, "W-What have you done to me?"

Naruto, who had opened his fist, smiled and asked, "Do you want to know?" Then he closed it slowly.

At that moment, Zōri felt that the air in his lungs started to disappear. And as much as he tried, he couldn't intake any air. He begged as he much as he could, "P-plea-ase... F-for-orgive…"

Naruto grinned and snorted, "After what you've done? After threatening my woman? I don't think so." Then he completely closed his fist, causing Zōri to lie down on the ground, clutching his neck by the lack of air, as well as starting to squirm.

In seconds, his face turned blue, and his eyes turned red, indicating that he had died from suffocation.

After a few seconds, Tsunami ran towards him and gave him a big hug while saying, "Naruto-kun! Thank you, I don't know what would have happened if you weren't here."

Naruto smiled and replied, "If I hadn't been here, I would have found you no matter what, and I would have killed those two bastards, but in a much worse way."

Tsunami smiled and was about to kiss Naruto when they both heard something that shocked them.

"Oto-san!" Inari shouted as he ran to hug him too. Naruto, who had a look of disbelief on his face, asked stupefied, "What did you just say?" Inari smiled widely and replied, "Well, if you are Kaa-chan's boyfriend, then that means that you are my new Oto-san!"

Naruto still had the same expression and replied, "Hey! Yesterday you said that you couldn't stand me, why the sudden change?"

Inari smiled and responded, "Well, I had a talk with Kakashi-san, and I realized that you were right. That's why I now accept you as my Oto-san."

Tsunami saw all this with amusement, Naruto sighed in frustration and added, "Okay, we'll talk about that later, but don't call me in that way, it's annoying. Call me Naruto-san or something like that. But Oto-san? Really?"

Inari just laughed at that, but he said nothing more. He was euphoric; he didn't need to cry anymore.

Naruto then turned around and looked at Tsunami to say. "Okay, I will leave some clones with you in case you have problems. I'll go with Anko-chan; she may need help. Besides, when I get back, I will bring someone else with me. See you in a few hours, Tsunami-chan."

Then he disappeared in a Shunshin of Fire, leaving Tsunami and Inari surprised when something like that.

Inari then ran towards the village. Tsunami saw this and shouted, "Inari! Where are you going?"

Inari smiled and answered, "It's time that the people of this village become strong! I'll help Oto-san and his friends, with the help of all of us!"

Tsunami, after hearing that, she felt happy. At last, her son had returned to normal, and she could only thank Naruto.

On the Bridge - Minutes Before

Kakashi and the others had arrived on the bridge, only to see an unpleasant scene. All the workers were dead. Kakashi instantly knew who did this.

A few seconds later, a mist appeared around them, and they were all put on guard, waiting for the enemy.

Kakashi then spoke, "It seems that he'll finally appear." After saying that, Sakura asked. "This is the Hiding in Mist Technique, right?"

Then they heard a voice, "Sorry for making you wait, Kakashi. Are you still carrying those children? By the way, tell me, where is the red-haired boy? I want to kill him with my own hands."

Before he could say anything, Anko spoke. "Hehehe, it seems that you're still a fool who won't learn things for his your own good. Naruto-kun isn't here right now. He's elsewhere, having some fun."

Zabuza growled, "Damn it! But it doesn't matter; I will kill you first and then I'll take care of the brat." Then several clones of Zabuza appeared around them.

Menma and Sasuke smiled at this. Kakashi noticed it and directed, "Get them, boys!" At that moment, Zabuza's clones went on the attack. However, Menma and Sasuke quickly took care of them.

Then Zabuza and Haku appeared, while Zabuza spoke, "Oh. It seems that you have progressed. Those clones were much better than those of the last time were. Haku you know what to do." Haku just nodded and stood in battle stance.

Menma and Sasuke looked at each other, and both shouted, "Yan-Ken-Po (Rock-paper-scissors)!" 

The others could not help sweatdropping. Then they heard Menma sighing and Sasuke saying a 'Hmph" in acceptance.

Haku saw Sasuke stepping forward and talking, "Don't think that I'll forgive you as that demon did on that occasion, I have no problem with killing you."

Haku said nothing, but she narrowed her eyes behind her mask. She would put this brat in his place; she wouldn't hold back. Therefore, she began to spin until she turned into a whirlwind, which approached at Sasuke, who stood in a defensive stance. And just when the whirlwind was in front of him, Sasuke blocked Haku's senbon with his kunai.

In the distance, Zabuza thought, "Oh, he was able to block her at that speed." Then he saw something that made him smile.

Haku was trying to push more power onto her senbon, but she realized that it was impossible. Therefore, with her other hand, she began to make some hand seals, which surprised everyone because they didn't know that something like that was possible. When she ended the hand seals, she spoke, "Sensatsu Suishō (Thousand Flying Water Needles of Death)." She hit the ground with water and in an instant, several senbon appeared in the air, which headed towards them. Thus, Haku jumped back to avoid the attack.

When being at an optimal distance, Haku realized that Sasuke was gone. She turned around and could feel Sasuke punching her face, which caused her to return towards the place where a surprised Zabuza was.

"It seems that I'm faster," Sasuke smirked.

Kakashi became serious and continued, "You can't make fun of our team just because we have kids. Sasuke is the number one rookie of Konohagakure; Sakura is the smartest Kunoichi of the village and Menma is the son of one of the greatest Shinobi of the Elemental Nations and future Hokage of our village." That raised the morale of Kakashi's team, who looked ready for anything.

Zabuza then laughed, "Haku I'll leave the rest to you; I'll take care of Kakashi until the other brat arrives." Haku nodded and then she saw Zabuza launching himself into the attack.

Kakashi then shouted, "Sakura! Protect Tazuna! Menma you go and help Sasuke. We don't know what she can do, so the best thing is that you go and help Sasuke. And you Anko..." But he couldn't finish because Anko interrupted him, "Hey, I'm just here to assist you if you are in trouble, and I don't see that you have it. So fight against that fool while I watch all this." Kakashi sighed and just then, Zabuza tried to stab him, and he barely managed to block it.

Menma followed Sasuke and just then, both could feel the air starting to cool down. Haku made a seal with her hands, and immediately, she made ice mirrors appear around them, completely enclosing them.

They watched in awe as Haku entered in one of them before appearing in all the mirrors.

Kakashi saw that, but he couldn't do anything because his battle with Zabuza had already started. He realized that Zabuza was now fighting better than the last time. Therefore, he quickly pulled up the headband that covered his left eye since he decided to fight seriously from the beginning.

Haku then spoke, "Let's begin. I will show you my true speed." Then she threw several senbon at Menma and Sasuke, who could do nothing to dodge them because her attacks were too fast.

Sasuke got tired of it, so he made some hand seals and shouted "Katon: Goukakyuu no jutsu (Fire Release: Great Fireball Jutsu)," spitting the big fireball at the mirrors, just to discover that nothing had happened. Haku, who saw Sasuke's surprise, stated, "You cannot destroy these mirrors with so little power."

Menma and added. "Well, now it's my turn... Fūton: Kazekiri no Jutsu (Wind Release: Slash)." Then he threw the wind slash against Haku's mirrors, only to get the same result as Sasuke.

Haku shook her head and continued, "I already told you; you cannot destroy these mirrors with so little power. I will teach you how to use a jutsu properly." Then all the mirrors began to glow, and Sasuke and Menma were thrown into the air before crashing hard on the ground.

Menma got up quickly and exclaimed, "Damn! Where’s the original?! I can't see her!"

Haku shook her head and replied, "There's no point in following me with your eyes. You’ll never catch me."

Menma growled again and crossed his fingers, "I don't care, I'll destroy each of the mirrors, and I’ll find you. Kage Bunshin no Jutsu (Shadow Clone Jutsu)" Then three clones appeared.

Haku asked herself what he had in mind until she saw something she considered highly dangerous.

In the palm of Menma and one of his other clones, a blue sphere appeared. Menma then yelled, "Rasengan!" and he and his clone quickly ran in different directions to try to crash the ball of chakra into her mirrors.

In the distance, Naruto, who had arrived a few moments ago, got surprised when seeing his brother using that jutsu.

He didn't intervene yet since Zabuza was still breathing, so it wasn't his time yet. He also knew that Haku wouldn't lose against those two. Hence, he wasn't worried.

Kakashi smiled and thought, "It seems that Sensei hasn't wasted any time."

Zabuza didn't pay attention since he knew that Haku wouldn't have problems with that technique inside her dome of mirrors.

Haku then moved at full speed within the mirrors, and she quickly destroyed the clone and then grabbed Menma's hand before throwing him to the ground, causing his technique to crash into the ground and create a big crater.

Menma growled in frustration and thought, "Damn it! I can't even use the Rasengan; I'm still not fast enough."

Sasuke, who saw the power of the technique, said, "You idiot, where did you learn that technique?"

Menma turned to Sasuke and smiled, "That's the original jutsu of my father. He taught me a few weeks ago. He was surprised at how quickly I mastered it. But it was thanks to the shadow clones that I managed to learn it so fast."

Sasuke nodded. He knew the power of his father, in addition to the difficulty of his techniques. If Menma did something like that, then it was somewhat surprising. He then returned the smile and continued, "Heh, don't think that I haven't been training. From now on, I'll fight seriously." Then he closed his eyes for a moment before opening them.

Menma after seeing this gaped, "Sasuke, you..." Sasuke just smiled and was ready for anything. Haku could see that Sasuke's eyes had changed; now instead of being black they were red with two tomoe on one side and one in the other. Those eyes reminded of Naruto’s eyes.

Meanwhile, Kakashi continued his fight; he didn't seem to be in trouble yet. Zabuza had managed to cut him a little, but he was aiming for that.

Naruto was also surprised; it seemed that the survivor of his massacre was progressing. He just kept looking around without anyone noticing his presence.

Meanwhile, in the dome, Haku was having problems since Menma kept sending more and more shadow clones, some of them with the Rasengan while Sasuke threw some fireballs.

She then decided to end this at once. She focused on Menma, who was giving her more problems. Thus, she began to throw him a rain of Senbons, which all hit the target.

Sasuke was surprised but also worried about Menma because after all this time, they had begun to talk, and even began to be friends. He could see with his Sharingan that the masked enemy was still throwing senbon at Menma.

He didn't hesitate and quickly pushed Menma out of the way, and Menma seemed paralyzed by the senbon in his legs, which Sasuke was also starting to feel.

Haku, who was feeling her chakra depleting, refocused on Menma, but this time, to lay a trap to Sasuke because he was already reading her movements.

She came out of one of her mirrors, and frantically, she went directly towards Menma, who was behind Sasuke.

Sasuke could see through her actions, but he didn't have the time of pulling Menma away from there. Therefore, he did the only thing that he could do in that situation.

After a few seconds, Menma opened his eyes; he had lost his consciousness for a few moments, but he had already recovered it. Then he saw something that made him smile. The masked enemy was lying on the ground, so he thought that Sasuke defeated him.

So he was about to congratulate him when he realized that Sasuke was standing right in front of him, with several Senbons around his body. His happy face instantly changed to one of concern.

Sasuke turned his head slightly towards Menma and said while giving a half-smile, "Look at you *argh * you idiot."

Menma didn't see anything funny about that and asked as he stood up, "Why?! Why did you protect me?"

Sasuke smiled again and replied, "Who... knows..." Sasuke then started to remember his childhood days with Menma and how they had fun playing pranks, as well as the training and missions that he had with him as a Gennin.

Sasuke then stumbled a bit, "I... I told myself that I would never be your friend again. I tried to hate you."

Menma got up and questioned, "Then why? Why did you protect me?" Menma clenched his fists and shouted, "I didn't ask you to!"

Then a small tear came out of Sasuke's eye, who whispered as his voice grew weaker and weaker, "Who knows, my body moved on its own, you idiot." He then began to fall.

However, Menma quickly caught him. Once he had him in his arms, he shouted, "Sasuke!"

Sasuke gave a sad smile as he looked at Menma, "That man... I didn't want to die until I had killed the man who exterminated my clan." Then he looked at Menma, weakly raised his hand, and stated, "Menma, don't die."

Then Sasuke's arm fell heavily. Menma went completely blank, as he gave a hug to Sasuke's body.

Haku rose up from the ground, as she walked to one of her mirrors. She then asked, "Is this the first time you saw a comrade dying in battle? That is the way of the ninja." Then she entered into one of the mirrors

"Shut up! Me too, I tried it, but I couldn't… I always saw you as my friend," he said as he put Sasuke's body on the ground: then a steam surrounded him.

In the distance, Naruto squinted while Kurama growled, "That brat is trying to use my power; it's unacceptable!"

Naruto, who heard this, mentally replied, "Don't worry about that. Someday, I'll recover what belongs to you, that and much more."

Kurama nodded and said nothing more. Meanwhile, Naruto took something out of his ninja bag as he began to do something.

Inside the dome, Menma spoke again. "You will pay for this..." Then the steam became denser. And then Haku saw something that left her in shock. She could see Menma's chakra very clearly, which was red and quite gloomy.

Naruto OST - Need to be Strong

"I'm going to kill you!" Haku got frightened, and she thought, "What is this chakra? It's taking shape, and what an awful chakra."

Then she noticed that Menma's wounds began to heal quickly, as his features began to change. Seeing him like that, she could only think of Naruto, but a bit wilder.

She then understood what was going on. This kid was a Jinchūriki, and he was using the power of his Bijū.

Then Menma turned to Haku, and she was surprised to see those eyes, they were identical to Naruto's. But she was also surprised to see the hate and anger in them.

Meanwhile, Kakashi and Zabuza stopped when they felt the demonic aura; instantly Kakashi thought "Naruto? No, he's not here. Who can it be?" Then he turned a little to see the dome and he understood it, "No, no way. Menma? Does he? But how is it possible?"

Zabuza was also very disturbed to feel this chakra, and he didn't know where it came from. Just then, he heard Kakashi's voice, "Can you hear me, Zabuza? I think we've had enough fun. What do you say if we end this?"

Zabuza chuckled from his place and replied, "Interesting. What can you do in this situation? Show me, Kakashi."

Meanwhile, inside the dome, Haku was having problems. Although she attacked Menma, he didn't seem to be affected by her attacks. Besides, his speed had increased considerably, and she had spent most of her chakra with the mirrors, which Menma started to destroy with his fists.

She then saw an opening and jumped towards Menma, who rolled in the air and dodged her attack. She tried to return into one of her mirrors, but she realized that Menma had already caught her. She was surprised, and even more when she felt his chakra near her.

Haku noticed that he was preparing a mighty blow. Therefore, she prepared herself to take the hit. Nevertheless, a small glowing ball appeared right in front of them. That called Menma's attention, so he directly looked at it, which was a big mistake.

The little glowing ball then opened itself, revealing a paper with the kanji 'suppress,' which made Menma instantly lose his chakra and forces, becoming unconscious.

Haku didn't know what was happening, but she could only thank the person who had helped her.

Haku then heard a voice, and she opened her eyes, "Tired, Haku-chan?"

Haku turned around to see a smiling Naruto. She ran to him and hugged him, "How long have you been here?" She asked.

Naruto took off her mask and replied, "Long enough to see him lose his temper. But tell me, the little princess isn’t dead, is he? I can still feel chakra in him."

Haku shook her head, still hugged to Naruto, and replied, "No, I didn't kill him. I saw no need to do it."

Naruto smiled and gave a little kiss on her lips. She blushed at the feel of it, but it didn't last as long for her liking, but she didn't complain.

She then heard Naruto talking again, "Haku-chan, it's time." Haku nodded and followed Naruto.

After walking for a while, they noticed that the mist was already dissipating, and then Haku looked forward and thought. "Now I'll live my life. Rest in peace, Zabuza-sama."

She then saw Kakashi pulling his hand out from the chest of Zabuza, who had several dogs—that were holding him— over his body.

Kakashi sighed when he thought it was over. But then he saw Haku with Naruto and ordered, "Naruto! Explain what you are doing with the enemy!"

Naruto frowned at that and replied, "She's not the enemy. And she's with me because she'll return with us to the village."

Kakashi did not like this, "We can't; she's the enemy! Besides, where are Sasuke and Menma?"

Naruto growled and replied, "I don't give a fuck what you say! You're not my Jounin-sensei. Anko-chan." He called and in that instant, Anko appeared beside him,

"Can we take her with us back to the village?" She smiled and continued, "Oh, and what will happen if I say no?"

Naruto pouted, and Anko understood it, so she said, "Okay, okay. Yeah, she can come with us. But, don't tell me that she?" Naruto nodded, and Anko gave a gentle nudge in Naruto's ribs, while she said, "You really work fast, Naruto-kun." She stated, giggling.

Kakashi also appeared beside him and sighed, "It seems that I can no longer say anything. But tell me, where are Menma and Sasuke?"

Naruto shrugged and pointed backward with his thumb. Kakashi looked in that direction and saw something that alarmed him. But before he could say anything else, Naruto spoke again, "Don't worry; those bastards are still alive. They’re just unconscious. And before you start asking me stupid questions, the demonic power wasn’t from me; it was from Hime-sama."

Kakashi became shocked at that statement, but before he could ask questions, everyone heard a scream, and they could see a pink flash running in that direction. "Sasuke-kun!" Naruto shook his head but said nothing. Kakashi didn't either since he was still surprised by what he just heard.

Then all those present heard someone hitting the ground with a cane. Everyone looked to the side of the bridge, and they could see Gatō and dozens of men along with him, "Oooh, it seems that you have killed that bastard. Hehehe; you've saved me a lot of money."

Naruto instantly recognized that voice, "And that bitch apparently is still alive. Well, well, I can personally take revenge for what she did to me." He held up his bandaged hand. "I'm sorry, but all of you will die here," Gatō stated.

Everyone got into a battle stance, but Naruto stepped forward, "Hold on, I'll handle this." Kakashi was about to say that he didn't have to do anything, but Naruto gave him a look which said he wouldn't accept objections.

Kakashi sighed and said, "Okay, do what you have to do."

Naruto then turned around and looked at Anko and Haku, "Don't worry, I'll return in a moment." He said before walking towards Gatō's place.

Gatō watched Naruto approaching from the distance. For some strange reason, he was someone very familiar to him, and something told him that it wasn't good. However, he chose to ignore that.

He then saw Naruto right in front of him, with crossed arms and closed eyes. Gatō smiled arrogantly and asked, "He! What do you want, punk? Do you want to join me?"

But then Naruto opened his eyes, and the next thing he said made him quite pale, "Dwarf, I'm back." Then he grabbed a pale Gatō and used a Shunshin to appear away from everyone.

Gatō's men became alarmed, and they were about to go to his rescue when they heard him shouting, "Stop! Stay in your places!" They instantly stopped and waited for him in case he required help.

In the distance, Haku and the others watched this with curiosity; they didn't know what Naruto was trying to do.

Gatō had recognized that voice, and especially those red eyes. Therefore, he shakily asked, "Na-Naruto-sama? W-what are you doing here? Forgive me for what I said a moment ago but I didn't know you were here. I haven't seen you for four years." He tried to bow, but Naruto stopped him and said, "What do you think you're doing, you stupid? Don't bow to me in front of so many people. You're an idiot. Tell me, did I command you to come to this place?"

Gatō shook his head, and Naruto continued, "You know what it means to disobey me, don't you? You knew what would happen to you if you disobeyed me."

Gatō became even paler, and he tried to bow again, but he remembered Naruto's words, so he pleaded, "Na-Naruto-sama, please forgive me. I didn't know what to do; you disappeared for four years, and l stopped hearing from you. I was just trying to continue the business." He was becoming increasingly fearful.

Naruto stated, "Hmm, it could be, but I told you on several occasions that you might stop hearing from me for a while. I thought you would understand those words; I didn’t see the need to explain them to you. But fine, I'll let this disobedience pass for now. But listen to me, the next time you disobey me, I will take away the other half of your soul. Got it?"

Gatō sighed with relief and then responded with obedience, "Hai, Naruto-sama, it won't happen again."

Naruto looked at him and added, "I hope so, remember that I can take it away whenever I feel like. I had to do it when I heard that you were in this place. Anyway, I want you to 'retire' from this location, but what I really want you to do is that you bring the base of operations here. I want that you command to build a base in this direction, but without anyone knowing that you're the one who's doing this." Then Naruto gave him a paper with the coordinates.

Gatō quickly took the paper and then nodded. Naruto spoke again, "Very well, the next thing I'll do is throw you off the bridge, and then I'll kill all the idiots that you've hired. A friend of mine will make sure that you don't die when you fall. It'll take you away from here and then I want you to come back to do what I said, and I never want to hear from you in this place again. If that does happen, you know what it means. Now get ready."

Gatō freaked out when he said he would throw him off the bridge, but then he sighed in relief when Naruto said that someone would help him. He then saw Naruto doing some hand seals and putting his hand on the ground.

Gatō saw a tiny chameleon that started climbing on his clothes before hiding itself in a pocket. Then he realized that Naruto grabbed him and threw him with great forces towards the horizon.

When he was far away from the bridge, he noticed that the chameleon grew considerably in size; then it put him in its mouth, which made him terrified throughout the trip.

Naruto then wiped his hands and returned to Haku and the others who looked at him with surprise. Then he said, "That dwarf is no longer a problem."

Everyone nodded until Gatō's men yelled in rage, "Oi, Oi, Oi. You damn brat! You just killed our boss; now we don’t have anyone to pay us." Then one of them shouted, "Now we have to attack the village and steal everything that has value." The rest of Gatō's men nodded at this.

Kakashi then declared, "This isn't good..." Naruto sighed and answered, "It's not good for you, I can wipe out all those idiots with a single move, and I think I'll do it now, don't bother."

Menma and Sasuke had awakened already, but they didn't see Haku yet since they were further back.

Then one of the men shouted, "Come on!" and then everyone went on the attack.

Naruto started doing some hand seals but stopped when he saw an arrow falling right in the way of the men. Everyone looked back.

Suddenly, they heard a voice, "Anyone who approaches this island, will die by its defenders!" Then they heard several shouts of affirmation. Naruto concluded that the villagers decided to do something at last.

Naruto then heard Tsunami shouting, "Naruto-kun!" and then he looked at Inari, "Heh, it's like as you said. The weak people can become strong! We're here to help you, Oto-san!"

Naruto almost fell backward when hearing that; didn't he tell him to stop calling him that?

Kakashi and the others also were surprised, but they said nothing, except for Tazuna, who began to shed some tears, "Inari ... All of you."

Gatō's men when seeing so many people got scared. So they decided to escape. Nonetheless, the villagers wouldn't allow that and decided to follow them.

Naruto noticed this and made a sign for them to stop, so they did and looked what he had planned. Naruto made a few hand seals and shouted, "Doton: Doryūdan (Earth Release: Earth Dragon)" Instantly, a large Earth Dragon emerged from the ground of the bridge.

Naruto didn't put much chakra in it, not wanting to damage the bridge, so he just charged enough chakra to kill that bunch of people.

The dragon moved quickly toward the mercenaries, who could do little to escape. They received the attack, and all died on the spot. Some of them were pushed off the bridge while it crushed others.

All the villagers were surprised, but Inari brought them out of their shock when he shouted, "Oto-san is great! We did it!" Then everyone burst into cheers.

Naruto shook his head. Apparently, he would have to get used to it; then he approached the others, just to see a very unpleasant scene. Menma and Sasuke seemed about to attack Haku. But Anko and Kakashi were stopping them. "Sasuke, calm down. She is no longer the enemy; she will return with us to the village,"

Sasuke growled, "I don't care! She attacked me, so she has to be treated as the criminal that she is."

Naruto then decided to speak, "Teme-chan, if you don't like the fact that Haku-chan's going to return with us, then you can say it to me. But remember, if I don't like your wording, I'll have to teach you good manners again." He stated as he cracked his knuckles.

Sasuke glared at him, but he only said, "Hmph" and nothing more. Menma wasn't angry. She didn't kill Sasuke, so there was no reason to get mad at her. Also, he didn't want to bother Naruto. Hence, he said nothing more.

After that, some people stayed to clean the bridge while Tazuna and the rest returned home to rest.                                                                                                                                                                         

Four days later

Four days had passed from the day when Naruto had ‘killed’ Gatō and his henchmen. Everyone in the village seemed to be happy because now they could thrive and have peaceful lives.

Currently, Naruto and the other ninjas of Konoha were on the already finished bridge along with a big crowd that was there to see them off.

Right in the front of the crowd was Tazuna along with his family. Then Tazuna talked, "We have completed the bridge thanks to you, but now we will lose you."

Naruto at this replied, "Don't worry, old man. I'll be back to visit you, especially to Tsunami-chan." The truth was that Naruto would return quite often in the not too distant future, but he didn't have to say that yet.

Inari at those words began to tremble, trying not to cry, "Do you promise, Oto-san?"

Naruto got already used to it. However, in those four days, he had tried to make him stop calling him that. Unfortunately, it seemed that he wouldn't.

Naruto smiled and replied, "Of course. Do you think I'll leave your mother just like that? As for you, Tsunami-chan, once I'm back, we'll catch up." Most people from the crowd could understand what he meant, so a lot of them blushed while others began to whistle.

Tsunami just nodded; she knew that Naruto would return soon, but she didn't know the reason. After that, Tsunami saw them leaving.

She was a little sad because Naruto left, but if what Anko said was true—that he always kept his promises—then there was no reason to worry about.

When Tazuna saw that they were far away, he spoke, "Naruto managed to change the heart of Inari and Inari changed the hearts of the villagers. Heh, it seems that he will be a good son-in-law after all. Hahaha." Many also laughed with him.

"And how will we call the bridge?" Asked one guy in the crowd, "How about 'Naruto Ōhashi (The Great Naruto Bridge),” another one contributed.

Tsunami smiled and replied, "It's a good name."

Meanwhile, Naruto and the others were walking quietly towards the village. Naruto now would have to convince his father to make Haku a Kunoichi of the village, and besides that, he had to get that mission from Danzō and the scroll for Neji. He would certainly be very busy.

Haku followed Naruto and Anko in silence. She was excited to have a normal life for Shinobi standards, and besides that, she found a man who treated her like the woman she was.

Kakashi was thinking about what happened on the bridge, and everything revolved around Menma. He would definitely have a talk to his sensei when they arrived.

There's not much to be said in this chapter.

You'll see the history between Gato and Naruto in a few chapters. It's something tremendous.

And finally, even though I didn't write it, Haku now owns Zabuza's sword.

That should be all.

Goodbye.

Chapter Text

Person talking, "Hello everyone."

Person thinking, "Damn you all."

Demon talking, "I will eat you."

Demon thinking, "This tastes worse than shit."

Disclaimer: I do not own Naruto, Masashi Kishimoto does.

Chapter 9

Hokage's Office - 1 day later.

It took one day to Naruto and the others arrive at Konoha; they didn't hurry since they wanted a slow return. Before leaving Nami, Naruto had told Haku to take the Kubikiribōcho since she had been with Zabuza for a long time, so he said that she should have it.

Sasuke didn't like this, so he had demanded to take the Zanbato, but before Naruto could do something, Kakashi had told him that Naruto was right and that Haku should keep it until the Hokage decided what to do. Sasuke just grunted but said nothing more on the way home.

Haku then had taken the Zanbato with great difficulty, and Naruto had told her to seal the Zanbato until they arrived at Konoha, and once there she could train to get used to the weight of the Kubikiribōcho. Haku had nodded, and Naruto had sealed the Zanbato before handing the scroll to Haku.

On the way, Anko had asked Haku many questions, and she couldn't help blushing due to the explicit way that Anko expressed herself. She was able to reply little, because of the embarrassment she felt, which Anko wanted to accomplish. Without doubts, she would be someone excellent to have in her team, since Naruto had already said to her about his desires.

After that, they reached the village without any problems, and then Kakashi had said that everyone had to go to the Hokage Tower because both Jounin had to do the report.

Upon arrival, they were welcomed by a smiling Yondaime Hokage; he couldn't help it because everyone was okay.

Kakashi had taken a step forward and gave his report. He told almost everything that had happened on the mission. At the end of his story, Minato smiled again.

Without a doubt, he had made a good choice to send to Naruto as reinforcement. He wasn't surprised that Naruto had been able to defeat Zabuza because he knew that Naruto was someone who had, at least, the level of a low Jounin. And if he didn't give him that rank yet, it was due to the wrong decisions he had taken in the past.

He then turned his head and looked at Haku, who shrugged in her place because one of the most powerful and famous men in the Elemental Nations was looking at her. Minato opened his mouth and asked, "So, do you were Zabuza's partner? Tell me, why did you leave Zabuza?"

Haku glanced at Naruto, who smiled at her. She blushed and looked down while saying, "H-Hokage-sama, before anything, it's a great honor to meet you. The reason for leaving Zabuza-sama is that Naruto-kun gave me the opportunity to rebuild my life. Even though I didn't agree when he first told me, I decided that I couldn't pass up the opportunity. I was Zabuza's partner only because he was the person who saved me. But I realized that I had already paid him long ago and that it was the moment that I should take my own decisions."

Minato nodded and added, "Very well, you can be a Kunoichi of this village. However, that won't be so simple. First, you must have some sessions with the Interrogation Department. After that, you'll have six months of probation so we can be sure that you're not just a spy."

Naruto narrowed his eyes. Six months? That was a lot of time, so he stepped forward and responded, "If you'll excuse me, Hokage-sama, I want to take the responsibility of Haku-chan. Under the laws of the village, a Shinobi can take another Shinobi as a protégé if they aren't affiliated the village. So I want to take responsibility and take care of Haku-chan, to avoid the six months of probation. And if she tries anything, then I'll also take the punishment."

Minato gave a small smile; the truth was that he didn't want to put Haku on probation since he knew she only returned to the village for Naruto. He wanted to do everything possible to keep Naruto happy, in order to recover the lost time. But he had to follow the laws of the Village, and Naruto gave a perfect solution to avoid that law with another one.

Haku blushed again at Naruto's words, "But what did that mean?" she wondered. Meanwhile, Anko smiled, she knew what that meant, but she said nothing. The members of Team 7 also didn't know what that meant, but they were a little surprised that Naruto knew the laws of the Village.

Minato then cleared his throat and asked, "*Ahem* Okay, do you agree with Naruto's solution, Haku?"

Haku nodded without thinking, and Minato continued, "Very well, from now on, you'll be living with Naruto."

Haku blushed again. Living with Naruto? That wasn't good; she was already doing her best to resist her impulses, and if she lived with him, it wouldn't be long until something happened between them.

Then she heard that the Hokage continued talking. "You can do whatever you want, as long as you know that your actions will have repercussions in Naruto. However, you still have to go to the Interrogation Department once a day for two hours for a month. We can't avoid that. "

Anko stepped forward and added, "Hey, Hokage-sama, I want to be the one in charge of the interrogations. Besides, I want Haku-chan to be on my team." She didn't want to be in charge of the interrogations for torturing her, but to embarrass her even more, and to let her know what to do with Naruto when her 'big day' came.

Minato thought about it for a moment. He had been thinking about incorporating two Genins without a team to Anko's team, but he knew that Naruto would be furious, but now Anko was presenting Haku. Perhaps, if he accepted, Naruto wouldn't be so angry about it.

He replied, "Hmm, I think that would be possible. As long as Haku and Naruto agree to this." Minato then saw that both nodded, so he continued, "Very well, from now on you will be a member of Team 13. You can't perform missions yet, once your interrogation sessions end and your incorporation as a Konoha Ninja are ready, you'll be able to do missions with your team. For now, you can only participate in training and maybe on some D-rank missions, but Team 13 doesn't do these missions."

Sasuke, who was listening to everything, couldn't help saying after hearing the latter, "What! Why is the demon not doing those stupid missions and why do we have to do them? The demon doesn't deserve special treatment!"

When Sasuke said that, Haku, Anko, and even Minato glared at him. Sasuke didn't realize this because he had closed his eyes as he stood in the same arrogant stance. Kakashi noticed the reaction of his sensei, but he said nothing, once everyone had left, he would ask him some things.

Minato then spoke, "Listen, Sasuke. You don't have to know my reasons, but if you ever interrupt me again, you will do D-Rank missions for the rest of your life. Understood?" Sasuke's eyes widened, but he quickly took the same stance as always and replied, "Hmph, okay."

Minato kept speaking as if Sasuke had never talked, "Well, everything is ready. You can withdraw your money from his mission in the bank. As for you, Haku. I know that you have the Kubikiribōcho; I'll let you keep it since Naruto also has one of Kiri's swords, and they're already aware of this. So I'll just tell them that you will have it 'temporarily.' Now if there is nothing more to say, you're dismissed."

All who were there began to withdraw, all but Kakashi who told his team that they could go home to rest and that tomorrow they will have a training session. They all nodded and left the tower, heading to their respective homes.

When Kakashi realized everyone had left, he spoke, "Sensei, we need to talk... in private." Minato understood what he meant and made a sign to his ANBU to withdraw from the room.

He placed a privacy seal and asked, "What do you want to talk about, Kakashi?"

Kakashi took a seat in front of the desk and replied, "Sensei, I didn't tell you everything that happened on the mission. There was something else; I want you to tell me if you know something about this."

Minato, not understanding what Kakashi meant, requested him to continue. Kakashi nodded and continued, "It's just when I was on the bridge fighting against Zabuza, in a moment I could feel an evil Chakra in the area. At first, I thought it was Naruto and that somehow his seal had weakened. Therefore, he was accessing the power of the Kyūbi. But I concluded that that was impossible. Firstly because he is strong enough to fight a Jounin without that power, and besides that, the only person of that level near us was Zabuza, and I was fighting against him at that time. Secondly, he wasn't on the bridge when that happened. And he told me that it wasn't him, but Menma."

Minato opened his eyes considerably. Kakashi realized this and asked, "Please, Sensei. Tell me, what happened that night?"

Minato sighed and replied, "Alright, Kakashi. You've always been someone brilliant and hide it from you will be useless. I only ask you that once you hear this, you don't tell anyone."

Kakashi nodded and allowed his Sensei to continue, "I've lied to everyone; I made everyone believe that Naruto is the one who has the power of the Kyūbi inside him when in fact I just sealed his consciousness within him. The one who has the power of the Kyūbi is actually Menma."

Kakashi opened a bit more his only visible eye and replied, "But that's not all, is it?"

Minato nodded and continued, "You're right, that's not all... Naruto is also my son."

Kakashi fell off the chair in surprise, as he opened his eye in shock. How didn't he notice this before? They were so alike that it was no joke.

But then he got up quickly and replied, "B-But the records says he was born on September 28. Weeks before Kushina-sama gave birth to Menma."

Minato sighed, "I modified those records to avoid suspicion. I didn't want anyone to know that Naruto had any kind of relation to me."

Kakashi sighed in disappointment. "But why, Sensei? Why did you do that to Naruto? You and Obito were the ones who taught me that we must never abandon anyone. How could you do that to your son? What would Kushina-sama say?" Kakashi asked, more like demanded.

Minato could not help feeling sad and guilty. "I-I ... That day I was not thinking clearly, Kakashi. Kushina had died, and I thought that did Naruto as well. And that the Kyūbi had reincarnated in him. Naruto was just like Menma in appearance. But after I sealed the Kyūbi's consciousness in him, Naruto suffered all the changes that you can now see. And I don't know what Kushina would say, maybe she would be doing honor to her nickname of 'Hot-Blooded Habanero.'"

Kakashi replied fast, "But you said that happened when you sealed the Kyūbi's consciousness within Naruto. Are you sure he's not his reincarnation as you say?"

Minato sighed and answered, "Well, I don't know, Kakashi. That's what I've been asking myself the past days. I believe I've been wrong; I'm not sure, Kakashi. Maybe I should take the advice that Sandaime-sama had given me. Maybe I should enter his consciousness to see if he's truly the reincarnation of the Kyūbi. But I never did that because of my stubbornness."

Kakashi also sighed, "Excuse me, Sensei, but I think you are a big fool." Minato wasn't offended. He was right; he was a fool and much more than that. It was time to see if Naruto was truly his son. That's why he would ask Inoichi for his help.

He had to do it without him noticing it. It would be difficult because Danzō had said that Naruto was a ninja sensor, and besides that, he never lowered his guard. It would be difficult, but not for nothing he was the Hokage and one of the most feared men in the Elemental Nations. "Anyway, what do you think of Naruto, Kakashi?"

"Well, he's a very sarcastic person, but he can also be very dangerous. I remember the killing intent that he released when we were on the mission. I have never felt anything like that. It was dark, and I felt a huge bloodthirstiness... Sensei, this is another thing I wanted to ask you. Why is Naruto so powerful for someone of his age? What did happen to him in those three years that he disappeared?"

Minato sighed again, "Eight years ago a crowd tried to assassinate him. He survived and after that, I allowed Danzō to take Naruto to Root."

Kakashi opened his eye again; he hurried and replied, "But Sensei. You know how Danzō and his Root are, if Naruto was in that place; then he had to go through terrible things. Sensei, I'm very disappointed."

Minato then hit his desk and shouted, "Do you think I don't know?! I'm also disappointed with myself! I'm disappointed by the bad decisions I made, and for ruining the life of one of my sons! So you don't need to tell me! I know very well that it's my entire fault. If I had paid attention to Sandaime-sama... if I had been a better father. Naruto wouldn't be as he is now. Kakashi, please understand; this isn't easy for me. For every day that goes by, I can feel that I'm increasingly far from recovering Naruto, and I don't know how to make him forgive me... W-What can I say? That I thought he was the reincarnation of the Kyūbi, and that's why I hated him? I'm sure he's aware of the glances of hatred, that I, his own father, threw him for my mistakes. You know very well what I mean, Kakashi. So please, don't condemn me for this. I will try to correct my mistakes soon."

Kakashi could feel the sadness and bitterness in the words of his sensei; he shouldn't have said that, but he was angry too. He was mad at himself for not helping Naruto when he needed it, but he knew nothing about this before.

But that was no excuse; he had to help him somehow, because that's what Obito taught him, always help your comrades, and everyone in this the village were his comrades.

Kakashi sighed and apologized, "Sorry, sensei. I shouldn't have said that, and you're right... I understand what a mistake can cause."

Minato also sighed, "Now there's another issue we have to talk about, and this is of utmost importance. It's about an organization, Akatsuki."

With Naruto

Naruto had left the Hokage Tower along with Anko and Haku. He wanted to show Haku a little of the village, but a few ANBU and Anko said she would have to go to her first interrogation session. At first, he was angry, but he saw Yugao among the ANBU, and was there Anko too, so he had no reason to be worried about her.

She would be okay, and he knew that Anko would teach her later where his apartment was; it was not the same garbage as before. He had changed it for a better one since he never liked living in that place; he had enough of that in his childhood.

That was why our redheaded friend was walking through the streets of the village. He didn't know what he could do. Naruto thought of training, but he didn't want to. Then he thought of going to talk to Danzō, but it was still very quick since he had returned to the village just today, so he left that for later.

Then he thought of going in search of Ino, but maybe she was training, and he didn't want to bother her. He wanted her to become strong and feared in the future, so if he were bothering her at every moment, then she wouldn't be able to achieve that.

But then something came to his mind. Maybe he could now go and get the scroll for Neji. He had nothing else to do, and also, he had promised it two weeks ago.

It was time to take that scroll. When he decided what he would do, Naruto went to take the things he needed for this self-imposed mission in his apartment.

Near the Hyūga compound 30 minutes later

Naruto was observing the Hyūga compound, seeing that not much had changed since the last time he had been here. The only different thing was that the wall —which divided the families— was a little bigger than before. He didn't mind this, so he went right where the main house was, to bypass the vault.

He quickly approached the place. Upon arrival, he could see that there were several branch member guards. Naruto activated his Rinnegan; he knew that the Hyūga clan would improve their compound after the failed attempt to kidnap the heiress. He could now see that the walls, ground, and roofs had multiple seals. He could recognize them as pressure seals and blood seals. He assumed that those seals didn't get activated because the Hyūga shared the same blood.

Without doubts, they were good at seals, but he had been practicing that art a lot in the last month. Naruto then put his hand into his ninja bag and pulled out a small scroll.

After he had opened it, he whispered, "Fuinjutsu: Kyanseru (Seal Style: Cancellation)" then he put the scroll on the ground, and many 'kanji' were visible, while they spread throughout the compound.

However, they were just visible thanks to Naruto's eyes. It was a sealing technique that disabled most of the sealing techniques. However, it only worked for a few minutes. Hence, he had to hurry up before they were re-activated.

He quickly jumped over the wall and whispered another jutsu, "Tōton Jutsu (Transparent Escape Technique)." It was a very useful technique for spying.

Naruto was certainly grateful to the Gama Sennin (Toad Sage) for creating this jutsu, and he also thanked the Sandaime for putting that jutsu on the scroll. A jutsu like this would have helped him a lot when he was in Root.

Naruto then became transparent and suppressed his chakra so that not even the Byakugan could be able to detect him. He stealthily went to Hiashi's vault, passing through a training camp. There he could see Hinata having a fight with her sister. Naruto didn't know her, but he could see that Hinata was winning easily.

Naruto shrugged and then came to the vault. It was in the basement of the mansion; he could clearly see the chakra suppressor seals and the ones of paralysis. Undoubtedly, Hiashi's bastard was unwilling to share his secrets, and he could tell that the Hyūga clan was a certainly privileged family. To have all these seals they should be.

Meanwhile, a clone that Naruto had created before entering the Hyūga compound had finished writing some seals on one of the buildings of the Hyūga clan. He charged some chakra in them and didn't wait to see the result as he had disappeared.

After receiving the information, Naruto waited a few moments until he heard a tremendous explosion that shook the building's foundation. He just smiled as he continued writing his seal.

Meanwhile, the members of the Hyūga clan —who were on duty— stopped patrolling and headed towards the source of that sound.

When they arrived, they could see multiple Hyūga injured while some of them were already dead. They hurried to give orders. A few of them would try to find the enemy while the others would help the wounded.

Hinata and Hanabi had stopped their training and had also approached the place of destruction. Hinata couldn't help but cry when seeing so many dead people.

She ran to help them, but before she could get there, she heard a voice. "Hinata-sama! Stay away from that place! It can still be dangerous!"

Hinata turned to see Neji, and still with tears in her eyes, she protested, "But Neji-niisan, we must help them. We can't leave these people without assistance."

Neji shook his head and replied, "Hinata-sama, the members of the Branch Family are already taking care of the wounded. You don't need to worry. Go and get some rest, Hinata-sama. You've been training a lot today; we'll take care of the wounded from the Main Family. You too, Hanabi-sama." The truth was that he wanted her to be there, to try her luck, but he had to endure it.

Hanabi nodded quickly; she hardly cared what happened to those bastards because they would also put the Caged Bird Seal in her in a few months, just when she turned 12 years old.

Hinata hesitated at first, but then nodded and went along with her sister to one of the resting areas of the clan.

Meanwhile, Neji was mentally smiling, as he recalled the words of a certain redheaded person. "Neji, remember this. The day that I'm stealing the scroll of the Hyūga clan for you, there will be great fireworks."

He then turned around to go and help his 'lords and masters', as he prepared himself for the next 'firework'.

Returning to Naruto, he had just finished writing his seals. Therefore, he rose up from the floor while looking at the big steel gate in front of him. He had many ways to destroy it, but all of them were showy, so he didn't know what he could do. After thinking for a few seconds, something came to his mind.

He pulled out his Kibas, which then began to glow. He nailed them to the door and started to make an entrance where he would be able to enter. Naruto was at first surprised by the thickness of the door, but then he didn't care, since the he was easily cutting it.

After being like this for a few minutes, Naruto managed to make a hole where he would be able to get in. After he had done it, he noticed that the vault had virtually no security. He believed that the Hyūga thought that no one could outwit the other seals; too bad for them.

He continued walking until seeing a small steel box covered with seals. He also saw that there were several traps connected to it. He guessed that the techniques were there, so he sauntered toward it.

After disabling the traps and removing the seals, he took the box. He opened it and saw that there were several notes. He pulled them out and began to read them. Several of these letters were from Hyūga ancestors, so he ignored them until he found the Hyūga scroll.

He opened it and saw several techniques; it was nothing like the Hokage scroll, but there were several Jutsu, and he was sure that they would be useful. After that, he took out another scroll and began to copy all the techniques. That's why he did the distraction; he would need time to copy them. Thus, the distraction would help him to avoid unwanted interruptions.

After Naruto had finished copying it, he let out a big sigh. He could have just stolen the scroll, but if he did it, then the Hyūga would have suspected that Neji had stolen it when he used its techniques. Naruto then was about to leave when he saw another scroll inside the box.

That caught his curiosity, he grabbed it and then could see that the scroll said "Caged Bird Seal."

He quickly opened it and took a quick read. It didn't mention how to remove the seal, but how to activate it and the steps to put it on someone else. Naruto also copied the content of that scroll.

He would properly look at it when he had more time; now Naruto was in a hurry since the seals around the compound were about to be re-activated, and Naruto couldn't reuse his Fuinjutsu because he could only use it once a day.

He activated the seal that was in the basement and walked out slowly. Once he was on the surface again, Naruto could see that several ANBU and Hyūga surrounded the area, carrying the wounded people to Konoha's hospital.

He smiled at the destruction that his upgraded explosive tag had caused; then he kept walking quietly without anyone seeing him, due to their shocked state.

Hiashi Hyūga, who had been talking with the other clans of the village at the time of the explosion, had arrived a few moments ago since an ANBU had informed him of the situation.

Upon arrival, he grabbed one of the branch Hyūga's and asked, more like demanded, "How did this happen?" The Hyūga was quite scared to hear Hiashi's tone and replied, "W-we don't know, Hiashi-sama, we were patrolling the area when the explosion occurred. We didn't see any intruder entering the compound."

Hiashi growled and exclaimed. "Did you check the explosion zone? Did you find any chakra trail? It's impossible to hide something like that!"

The Hyūga shook his head and replied, "Sorry, Hiashi-sama. It seems that this person was able to suppress his chakra entirely, we didn't find even the slightest indication that an individual had been here. It's as if a ghost caused this."

Hiashi growled again and bellowed, "Incompetents!" He then took a position with his hands and activated the seal of all the branch Hyūga, who were near, which made them fell to the ground and hold their heads due to the tremendous pain they were feeling.

But before something bad might happen to them, Hiashi canceled the seal, because he could see in the distance. Hiashi quickly ran there, and upon arrival, he saw that nothing remained of his house.

Hiashi worried a lot because he believed that his daughters were there, but before he could scream, he saw that Hinata and Hanabi appeared on the scene.

"Father!" Hinata shouted as she approached him.

Hiashi hugged her. "Are you okay, Hinata? Where were you?" He asked, completely forgetting about Hanabi, who didn't care about not having her father's attention. This behavior was something from a long time ago, and she was already used to it.

Hinata then nodded and replied, "Yes, I'm all right, father. Hanabi-chan and I were in one of the resting houses since Neji-niisan told us to take a break after our training. Father... Who is doing this? Who is attacking our clan?"

Hiashi sighed and replied, "I don't know. All I know is that I'll find the bastard, and I'll take care of killing him. Now you two go to my father's house. I have to go to an emergency meeting at the council."

They nodded and left; they noticed the seriousness in the words of their father, so they didn't want to contradict him.

Hiashi clenched his fists, cursing to whoever had attacked his clan. He then saw that several ANBU and also a few Hyūga landed near his position. After that, they began to inspect the area in search of wounded or dead people.

Afterward, he went to the Hokage Tower to go to the council chamber.

Training camp 24 - minutes later

"So this is..." Neji started as he received the scroll with the Hyūga techniques from Naruto, who smiled and replied, "Yeah, did you believe that I wouldn't fulfill my promise?"

Neji also smiled; then shook his head and replied, "Of course not, Naruto-san. I'm just amazed at everything you did only to get this scroll. But tell me, why did you destroy the house of Hiashi-sama? Many members of the branch family worked there."

"Well, I had to kill some of the other branch members too, or the Main Family would have believed that you guys did it. Besides that, the scroll I gave you is just a copy; I made sure to keep the original one in the vault, which the explosion destroyed. But I'm sure that the box that contained it resisted the blast; it looked quite resistant." He paused, took out another scroll from his ninja bag and continued, "Besides, I found something fascinating." He showed the scroll to Neji, who upon seeing the name that the scroll had, widened his eyes.

Neji then asked, "I-Is that?" Naruto shook his head, which caused Neji to sigh in disappointment, but before he could say something, Naruto spoke, "This doesn't contain the formula to remove the Caged Bird Seal. But it does say how to do it and place it on people. I will try to find the formula to remove it. I have the steps to create it; I just have to find a way to undo it. It will be difficult, but I'm sure I can do it." He stated.

Neji nodded and then said, "Naruto-san, I think there's something you should know ... It's about Lee."

Naruto raised an eyebrow. After that mission in which he killed his friend, he hadn't heard anything more about him. He made a sign and Neji continued, "Well, I think that he wants to kill you."

Naruto chuckled and replied, "It doesn't matter. Let him try. Moreover, I think that's great. From what I could see, Lee trains according to his mood. And if he's now more serious and mature than before, it makes me believe that our next battle will be much more exciting than the first one. Don't worry, Neji."

Neji shook his head at that and replied, "No, you don't understand. I'm not worried about you, but for Lee. Although he's been stupid in the past, now he seems more serious and determined than before. He even stopped challenging me. I think I'm starting to respect him."

Naruto nodded and responded, "Don't worry. I also respect Lee; it's just that I find his training motives stupid. But leaving that aside, I want to ask you something."

Neji nodded and waited for Naruto's request, "I want you to be the one who makes the members of your branch see the cruel reality in which they live. I don't want you to be hasty. Right now, they will be grieving over the death of the branch family members. I'm sure that Hiashi's bastard will just give the bodies to their families and won't allow burial within the Hyūga grounds. It always has been like that, and it always will be. Try not being caught and start with small groups to whom you have confidence, since I'm sure that some Hyūga in your branch likes the treatment they receive. If you see any of these, let me know. Give me their names and descriptions; I'll take care of them so they won't be able to betray your branch. I can even make them believe that the Main Branch is starting to kill the Branch Family due to pure paranoia. I have many ways to incriminate the Main Branch, especially now."

"Now we'll train a bit; I want you to be able to see the 360 degrees with your eyes." Naruto knew that Neji didn't have 360 degrees vision, which was a great weakness for a Hyūga if they relied on their eyes.

That's why he wanted him to overcome that weakness, or be aware of it so that he wouldn't get attacked in a blind spot.

Neji nodded as he stood in the Juuken stance and activated his Byakugan. "Okay, but I want you to know that I don't train... I fight."

Naruto smiled and nodded as he waited for Neji's attack.

Meanwhile – Council Chamber

The council chamber was replete; the heads of each clan; the village elders; the members of the civilian council; the Sandaime, and Minato, who had heard of the situation after he had finished talking with Kakashi about Akatsuki, were there. Although, who wouldn't have seen or heard that big explosion?

Minato observed their expressions. Some of them were of concern, others of anger and others were indifferent.

Minato then cleared his throat and spoke, "* Ahem * I've summoned this emergency session due to the incidents in the Hyūga compound. We still don't know who are behind this, but I've already sent several ANBU to the area to search for clues that could lead us to the guilty."

Hiashi, who had clenched fists, muttered, "Well, I hope so. This aggression won't be forgotten. Those who dared to attack the greatest clan in the village deserves nothing but death." He finished hitting the table, no longer being able to hold his anger.

However, before anyone could say anything, several ANBU appeared in the Council Room. They knelt down, and one of them approached Minato, whispering some words in his ear.

Minato nodded to all the words and after that, the ANBU's disappeared from the room.

Minato sighed and transmitted his words to the council, especially to Hiashi, who looked very expectant, "It seems that there are no clues. All they know is that the cause of the explosion was due to some explosive tag. Even the best ANBU sensors couldn't detect traces of chakra or anything that could hint that someone had been there. The investigations will continue, but whoever did this is a professional, and a good one. Moreover, they say this person tried to access the vault of the Hyūga clan, but he couldn't obtain anything and then decided to destroy the site. But what worry me the most is that they believe it's someone from the village since the barrier team didn't detect any intruder. That's the hypotheses in which ANBU is working on right now."

Hiashi could not avoid hitting the table again, "How is it possible that the ANBU couldn't find this person? That person must pay! Many Hyūga died in this attack; it's something I can't forgive!"

Minato understood the emotional state of Hiashi, and he was about to say something when he heard a familiar voice, "Do you mean that they were unable to find traces of chakra or that someone have been there?"

Minato turned his head slightly to see Danzō. Minato raised an eyebrow at the question and asked, "Yes, do you know anyone capable of doing that?"

Danzō shook his head and replied, "No, Hokage-sama. I know no one capable of doing that. I just think it's incredible that a person is capable of such thing." But his thoughts were clearly different, and he was thinking about it, "Hmm, I know only one person capable of doing that... Oni, what's going through your mind? It's been four years in which you were with your reins loose; I think it's time to control your steps again. And now is the right time."

The discussion continued for several more minutes, but Minato realized that arguing would solve nothing. Therefore, he ordered everyone to leave, but not before telling Hiashi that he would catch the culprit.

When they left, Minato was about to do it too when he heard a voice behind him, "Wait, Hokage-sama; we have something to talk about."

Minato turned to see Danzō with his usual stick and asked, "What do you want now, Danzō?"

Danzō replied, "It's about your son... Naruto-kun."

Minato opened his eyes widely and asked dangerously, "How do you know that, Danzō? You better not be trying to do anything stupid."

Danzō smiled and answered. "Hokage-sama, did you believe that I would be so stupid as not to realize that Naruto-kun is your son? Anyway, I don't care why you did that, and don't worry; I don't want to do anything with that information. I want to talk about something else, and it's the following. As you know, Naruto-kun is on a Genin team, and I heard that they obtained the second member today. But to able to enter to the Chunin exams, his team needs three people. I just want to give one of my boys to join Naruto-kun's team; they have already worked together, so I don't think it will be much to ask."

Minato mentally sighed; he didn't know what he would do if Danzō told everyone that Naruto was his son. That was something he wanted to do personally, to right his wrongs.

However, he shook his head when remembering Danzō's request and replied, "Why should I do that? I could place any Genin without a team on Naruto's team."

"Well, Naruto-kun is most likely to end up killing the boy for being an incompetent. What I am offering is someone with experience and a lot of knowledge about Naruto-kun. He participated in some missions with him in the past, so he knows how Naruto-kun performs his missions, and he is also at his age."

Minato sighed again, Danzō was right, if he placed to just any Genin on his team; that would only make Naruto get even angrier. Or worse, Danzō's theory might end up happening. Perhaps he should listen to Danzō now, so he asked, "Who is this guy, Danzō?"

Danzō smiled and snapped his fingers. At that moment, Torune appeared, and he asked, "Do you want something, Danzō-sama?"

Danzō looked down and replied, "Yes, go and bring our little artist here. Tell him that from now on his Code Name will be: Sai."

Torune nodded and disappeared in a puff of smoke; Minato looked at this and continued, "I hope your ANBU doesn't say anything about what we were talking."

Danzō shook his head and replied, "Hokage-sama, don't misunderstand me, but my ANBU are not like yours. Mine are dedicated, and they know when to keep their mouth shut. Regardless, how about if we discuss some topics while Sai arrives?"

Minato didn't like what that meant. But hey, what else could he do? He sighed and listened to Danzō while they waited for the new possible member of Naruto's team.

With Naruto – Hours Later

After training for a few hours with Neji, he went to his apartment, thinking about the Hyūga's seal formula and at some counterseal for it. He knew it wouldn't be easy, but he might do it.

When he arrived at his apartment —which now was in the residential area of Konoha— Naruto unlocked the door, and as he entered, he could smell a pleasant aroma in the air.

He went to the source of that smell and came to the kitchen; there he could see that Haku was making dinner, putting some spices into the food. Now she was without her battle kimono and instead she wore casual clothes with a kitchen apron.

Naruto wandered towards her, and when being right behind her, he turned her around, kissing her on her lips.

Haku was surprised at first, but she instantly noticed that it was Naruto. Thus, she put her arms around his neck, and Naruto put his hands around her waist.

They were like this for a few minutes, until Naruto finished the kiss, causing a sigh to come out from Haku's lips.

Naruto then looked at Haku's figure. She indeed was a beautiful woman, and he couldn't deny it. "So, how was your day?" Naruto asked.

Haku, who was now stirring the food, answered. "It was okay. I spend several hours with Anko-san; it wasn't bad. They asked me some questions about Zabuza-sama and why I came to the village. After that..." But she didn't finish since she spent a lot of time talking with Anko, who had told her many 'things' about Naruto. She didn't want to repeat those words because it caused her embarrassment. Even if she wanted to find out if they were true.

Naruto raised an eyebrow but didn't ask her what she meant, because he had an idea of what could have been. Then he asked something else. "And where did you get those clothes? I don't remember you bringing clothes with you."

Haku turned around and smiled, "After leaving the department, Anko-san took me around the village. There we encountered a blond girl and another girl with buns."

Naruto then raised an eyebrow and asked, "Oh yeah? And what did they do?"

Haku smiled as she put two bowls on the table and carried some soup in them.

Naruto tasted it a bit and was surprised. "This is delicious! I didn't know you were such a good cook, Haku-chan!"

Haku felt flattered and blushed a little at his words. "Thanks, Naruto-kun; I learned how to cook because Zabuza-sama didn't know how to. Regarding your other question, they found out that I would be part of your team, and they asked me many questions as they dragged me along with Anko-san to a mall to buy some clothes. I think their names were Ino and Tenten. Oh yeah, they also told me they are your girlfriends."

Naruto chuckled and replied, "And, are you not angry because I hid this from you?"

Haku smiled and answered, "Why should I be? You gave me the opportunity of a new life. Maybe I'd be dead now if it weren't for you. Besides, I'll be living with you, so I'm going to spend more time with you than them."

"Good point," Naruto replied as he continued eating the soup. "It's also good to know that you're not angry about living with me."

Haku shook her head and continued, "No. Indeed, I think it was the right decision. Because if you hadn't said that, then it would have been several months on probation, and I would be living elsewhere."

Naruto, who finished eating his soup, replied. "Well, that will never happen. You are mine, Haku-chan, and you should know that while you're with me, you won't need anything, absolutely nothing to worry over."

Haku had a lovely blush on her cheeks and nodded gratefully. She also finished eating and asked, "But tell me, Naruto-kun. Where have you been all day? The girls and I looked for you everywhere and we couldn't find you."

Naruto smiled and answered, "Well, I was kind of busy today organizing a fireworks display."

Haku didn't understand this at first until she remembered those big explosions that were audible around the village. "Did you have something to do with those explosions?" She asked.

Naruto nodded and replied, "Yes I had to get something for a friend, and I had to use those explosions to distract some foolish people and hide my tracks. But don't worry, I'm a professional."

"Did someone die?" Haku asked a little worried.

Naruto nodded and replied, "Yes, I think a few dozen of arrogant bastards who did no good to the world. But also, some people who loved being treated like shit." That was another reason he destroyed Hiashi's house; he knew that the branch family members who worked there needed to be very reliable, which meant that they loved being humiliated.

Haku just nodded, after her talk with Naruto in the forest, she could tell that he knew what he was doing and that everything he did had a reason. She didn't wonder more and was about to take the dishes to wash them when Naruto stopped her. "Sorry, Haku-chan. But you have already made this delicious dinner. Let my stupid clones take care of this."

At that moment, two clones appeared with narrowed eyes, and they asked in unison "Stupid clones? Who the hell do you think you are?"

Naruto growled and replied, "Shut up, now do what I say or you'll be sorry."

One of the clones snorted and asked, "And what will you do?"

Naruto looked at him and dissipated him. He looked at the other clone and asked, "Do you want to be funny too?"

The clone quickly shook his head and replied, "Of course not, boss!" And he picked the dishes to wash them.

Haku laughed and asked, "Do you problems controlling your clones?"

Naruto sighed and answered, "Yes. I don't know what happens, but every time I create clones outside battle, they seem to have their own awareness, and they ignore everything I tell them. They're exasperating, but they can be very useful. Anyhow, it's late; it's time to sleep, Haku-chan."

Haku stopped laughing at that and asked, "Where am I going to sleep, Naruto-kun?"

Naruto gave a half-smile as he headed to his room, "But what a silly question. With me, of course, Haku-chan."

Haku blushed, "I-It w-won't be necessary; I don't want to bother you."

Naruto turned around and answered, "You'll never be one. Now come here and let's go to sleep. Tomorrow we'll train a bit with Anko-chan and then I will accompany you to the Interrogation Department."

Haku weakly nodded and followed Naruto to his room, hoping she could resist her impulses as she didn't want Naruto to think she was an easy girl.

It was a tough night for Haku, but nothing had happened since they had both fallen asleep due to the tiredness that they felt.

Notes

Chapter done

About Hanabi, her age, about the seal, and everything I did was if I want to add her to the harem in the future. That will be my decision only.

Greetings to everyone and until next time.

Chapter Text

Person talking, "It could be."

Person thinking, "I don't like this idea."

Demon speaking / Invocation talking, "No doubt you are someone to be reckoned with."

Demon thinking / Invocation thinking, "His heart is dark."

Disclaimer: I do not own Naruto, Masashi Kishimoto does

Chapter 10

One Week Later 8:00 a.m.

A week had passed since Naruto had stolen the Hyūga scroll, and there had been a lot of activity the whole week. Rumors said that a terrorist lived in the village and that the authorities couldn't find him, which made the population live in fear of another attack.

However, our "terrorist" friend didn't want them to catch him yet. In that week, he had mastered several of his elements such as the Fūton, the Suiton, and Doton. He left the other two, but he didn't doubt that he would master them all shortly. He had also accompanied Haku to all her Interrogation sessions, and then they did a bit of team training along with Anko, who was euphoric to have another Genin on her team and even more because she was one of her 'sisters.'

However, our dear redheaded friend opened his eyes, seeing two women hugging him at each side. Naruto looked to the left and saw that one of them was a blond-haired girl, and the other one had brown hair. Both were naked, and Naruto asked himself, "How did this happen?" then he began to recall the events of a few hours ago.

Flashback - A Few Hours Ago

After training, Naruto decided to visit Ino at her house; he thought that Ino would probably be there. After walking for a few minutes through the streets of the village, he spotted the Flower Shop.

Ino was behind a counter, and when hearing the door opening, she looked at it.

She ogled him, which Naruto noticed. Tenten, who had her elbows resting on the counter, turned around, having the same expression as Ino.

Naruto then approached them and asked, "Hey girls, what's up?"

Ino and Tenten then smiled and then nodded. Tenten spoke, "Naruto-kun, it's been a week since you returned from your mission, and you haven't bothered to visit us at least once. Also, we found out that Haku-san is living with you, and we think that's unfair."

Naruto scratched his head with nervousness and answered. "Aaah, excuse me, girls. But I had to go with Haku-chan to her interrogation sessions. Besides that, I had to train with her to adjust myself to her style, and I also showed her the village."

Ino then moved from behind the counter to stand beside Tenten and replied, "That's no excuse, Naruto-kun. You promised me something before you left, and I see that you haven't fulfilled that promise. I think you deserve punishment."

Naruto was stunned, and he was about to reply when he saw that Tenten threw several Kunai and Shuriken at him. He instinctively took out one of his chakra rods under his sleeve and blocked the attacks.

He was about to tell them to calm down when saw that Ino finished some hand seals before extending her hands towards him.

"Shintenshin no Jutsu (Ninja Art: Mind Transfer Jutsu)" After saying that, Ino's body fell limp, but Tenten quickly caught her.

Tenten looked up towards Naruto, who had bowed his head, but that only lasted a few seconds before seeing him giving a thumb up while smiling. "Hehehe, I got into his body. Now let's get down to work."

Tenten nodded happily and followed "Naruto" to the second floor of the house, but not before Ino, in Naruto's body, closed the shop and Tenten picked up Ino's body.

Meanwhile, Naruto was in his mindscape with crossed legs watching all this. "Who could imagine that women could be so crazy? But hey, I'll let them have their fun."

Kurama smiled and replied, "Ha! I think they caught you cleanly. Hehehe, it seems like you're getting rusty, Naruto."

Naruto smiled and answered, "Shut up, but you're right; they caught me cleanly. Who would have thought that they were planning something like this? Although I can regain control of my body at any time, I prefer that they take the first step. But I don't want you to do anything, so just watch, Perverted Fox." Kurama smiled but nodded.

Returning with Ino and Tenten, they had led the manipulated body of Naruto to one of the rooms of the house. There, "Naruto" turned around to see that Tenten had put Ino's body in the room before asking, "Are you ready, Tenten? Remember that this was your idea."

Tenten smiled and answered, "I've been ready since that mission I had with Naruto-kun. Now get back to your body and let's have our special moment with Naruto-kun."

"Naruto" nodded, but before she could finish the jutsu, Naruto regained control of his body and continued. "That won't be necessary, Ino-chan."

Tenten then released Ino's body as she began to move.

Ino stood up and smiled. "I seemed strange that I couldn't see anything in your mind. Anyway, Naruto-kun. What do you say if we get started?"

Naruto shook his head and replied. "Ino-chan, Tenten-chan, you don't have to do this. It's not necessary; I'll like you even if you don't do this."

Ino and Tenten smiled as they approached Naruto, each grabbing one of his arms.

Tenten replied, "Well, it's your fault; you pushed us to this. If you weren't so good to us, we would never have done this. Moreover, on that mission, you also promised me to do this. So Ino and I decided to have our first time with you once and for all."

Naruto looked at Tenten and asked. "Is this what you wanted to talk to Ino-chan that time?"

Tenten nodded, and Naruto smiled. "Well, okay. I can't keep you sad and anxious. However, tell me, Ino-chan, where are your parents? I don't think it would be good if they see me here. It's not that I mind, I just don't want to hurt you."

Ino smiled and kissed Naruto's neck, and he began to pull her clothes off.

Tenten saw this and did the same while Ino continued. "Don't worry, Naruto-kun. My parents aren't here. My mother left the village to buy supplies for the store, and she won't return for a few days. And my father went to a mission outside the village, and he won't return for a week. We have all the time in the world. "

Naruto then grabbed both by their waist and lowered his head to give Ino a long kiss, which she returned while playing with Naruto's tongue.

When Tenten thought the kiss was long enough, she grabbed Naruto's head and kissed him too.

Naruto smiled and kissed her back with the same intensity. Then they separated, and Naruto grabbed Ino while a shadow clone grabbed Tenten and removed the rest of her clothes, much to the surprise of Tenten, who didn't realize when Naruto did the seal to create his clone.

The original Naruto then put Ino on the bed as he began to remove the bandages on her legs. After having Ino completely naked, he looked at her figure; it was definitely a beautiful thing to behold. However, he left that aside and asked, "Are you sure about this, Ino-chan? There's no turning back."

Ino got up a little, kissed Naruto and then replied, "I've been ready for quite some time ago."

Naruto nodded and just then, his clone put Tenten next to him. Naruto also looked at her and thought she was charming. "Are you ready, Tenten-chan? Then it's your turn." Tenten nodded too, but she couldn't say anything because the clone began to do his work. The clone started licking Tenten's nipples, who could only moan out of happiness.

Naruto then looked at Ino and was about to do the same, but before he could, Ino begged. "Please Naruto-kun, don't make me wait. I need you." Naruto was surprised to see the lust filled eyes of Ino. He nodded and pulled off his pants and underpants.

Ino seeing Naruto's member unconsciously licked her lips. She opened her legs a little and continued, "Be gentle."

Naruto then put his member in front of Ino's lubricated entrance, "Hmm, I see why you wanted to go straight to it. You are very wet, Ino-chan."

Ino blushed and looked away. "Come on, Naruto-kun, hurry up." She said as she moved her hips in an attempt to get Naruto's member inside her intimacy.

Naruto smiled and took her by her chin. "Okay." Then he kissed Ino and slowly began to introduce his member into her vagina, and Ino when feeling her vaginal walls being opened could only moan as she put her arms around Naruto's neck.

When Naruto felt the hymen, he stopped and kissed Ino before looking into her eyes. Ino nodded, and Naruto kissed her again, pushing his member until he broke it.

Ino couldn't help that a few tears run down her cheeks. Nevertheless, she said nothing since she continued kissing Naruto, who didn't move so that she can get used to the feeling. After a few seconds, Naruto felt that Ino started moving and moan softly, so he slowly pushed his member into Ino's vagina.

"*Hah*, N-Naruto-kun. That feels good; I hope that this won't be the only time we'll do this." Ino said as she felt the pleasure throughout her body.

Naruto smiled and began increasing the speed of his thrusts. "Of course not, Ino-chan. We'll do it whenever you want because; you're officially mine. Moreover, no one can touch you but me. Understand?" He asked, giving a powerful thrust into Ino.

Ino arched back, releasing the first orgasm of her life, which was a powerful one. "No one can touch me, Naruto-kun! Only you, only you, only you!" she shouted completely lost in the pleasure since Naruto didn't stop attacking her sensitive cavity.

Naruto then grabbed Ino's arms; he turned around and put Ino on top of him, grabbed her butt and managed to penetrate her even deeper.

Ino then also began to cooperate with Naruto, moving up and down with more speed.

After a few minutes, Naruto felt Ino walls began to squeeze him tightly, and he stated, "Ino-chan, y-you're squeezing a lot."

Ino felt that her second orgasm was coming, so she shouted: "Let's cum together, Naruto-kun!"

Naruto then grunted, and they shouted their names at the same time while Naruto released his load inside of her.

Ino when feeling the amount of sperm inside her could only think of children with red eyes and blond hair. Meanwhile, Naruto was grateful to have the deal with Kurama, or else he was sure that Ino would have gotten pregnant right now; he still wasn't ready to be a father.

He then pulled out his penis from Ino's vagina, and she fell limply to Naruto's chest as he stroked her hair. "How was it?" Naruto asked.

Ino got up a little bit and smiled, a bit tired, "That was amazing... I never imagined that something could feel so good." She replied.

Naruto smiled back and added, "I hope you can still continue." Then he looked to his clone who was presumably licking Tenten's latest orgasm. The clone then realized that Naruto was looking at him, and they quickly changed of partners.

The clone looked at Ino, who didn't seem recovered yet. He smiled and started rubbing his cock against her intimacy, and she turned her head just to see the smiling face of 'Naruto.' However, before she could say anything, the clone spoke, "Second Round, Ino-chan," the clone introduced all his cock into her vagina, and she couldn't help moaning in satisfaction.

The original Naruto then looked at Tenten, who didn't notice the change, since she looked like she was still enjoying her last orgasm.

Naruto then snapped his fingers in front of her and indicated, "Tenten-chan, it's your turn." Tenten said nothing; she merely spread her legs.

Naruto nodded at her reaction. Therefore, he slowly introduced his member inside of her. However, he never felt any barrier, so he asked out of curiosity, "Are you not a virgin, Tenten-chan?"

Tenten quickly left her stupor and answered. "O-of c-course I am, Naruto-kun! It's just, it's just…," she said, unable to finish her sentence.

Naruto then decided to motivate her a little, so he slowly pulled out his member.

Tenten quickly put her legs on Naruto's hips, not wanting to let him go, "Wait, Naruto-kun! It's not what you think! It's just ..."

Naruto pulled out his cock a little more, and Tenten shouted "Naruto-kun! I only gave pleasure to myself! It's just that from that day on our mission, I was so excited and wanting to do it with you, and since we couldn't talk much since that day, I couldn't help it. Sorry, Naruto-kun, I didn't want to."

Naruto shook his head and sighed at that. "I'm disappointed, Tenten-chan" Naruto replied making a few tears come out from Tenten's eyes, and she was about to say she was sorry when Naruto continued. "I think I'll have to punish you."

He then placed Tenten on top of him as he introduced his member inside of her with a single thrust, touching her womb, which made her scream in pleasure.

Tenten asked to herself what her punishment would be until she felt something rubbing against her ass. She turned around, seeing another Naruto, who was smiling, and this one then spoke. "You said that you were excited since that day, Tenten-chan. Let us fix that problem for you," he continued rubbing his cock against Tenten's back entrance, who looked down to see the original Naruto smiling. "I hope you like your punishment, Tenten-chan."

Tenten then looked a little worried and stated. "W-Wait Naruto-kun, I don't think that you can fit in there, Waaaait!" and she shouted at the end because she felt Naruto's clone began to introduce his cock slowly.

The clone stated, "Hah, you're tight over here, Tenten-chan. This feels great!"

Tenten released soft moans, and though it hurt her a little, she couldn't deny that she was enjoying herself.

Once she felt filled, she released a sigh, but she couldn't say anything because the two Naruto's began to move slowly in perfect sync, one came out while the other one entered.

Tenten couldn't help shouting, "Wait! No! This… This is… This is great! Please Naruto-kun, faster! Punish me more!"

Both of them smiled and decided to comply her request, making Tenten shout due to the great pleasure, "This is heaven, *Hah*!" she shouted as both members filled her even more.

The thrusts' speed increased since Naruto, and his clone felt about to reach their climax, which made Tenten moan increasingly.

Then both gave a final thrust, releasing their load in Tenten's holes, who arched back and released a massive orgasm, which soaked the bed blanket.

Naruto, seeing her orgasmic expression, couldn't help releasing a bit more of cum into Tenten's womb, who exclaimed, "Naruto-kun, if you keep this up, I'm going to get pregnant!"

Naruto grunted and replied, "Don't worry about it. You're squeezing so much, Tenten-chan; you're great." He stated, finally ending releasing his load.

Ino, who had seen all this, started kissing the original Naruto. She then pulled back and asked, "I want you to punish me too, Naruto-kun."

Naruto nodded and then asked, "Are you sure your parents won't come over?"

Ino replied, "Sure."

She didn't need to say anything else since Naruto grabbed her, coming out of Tenten; and in doing so, some of his cum escaped from her.

However, before Tenten could complain, two clones appeared to entertain her while the original dealt with Ino.

Naruto then put Ino in the same position in which Tenten had been moments ago while he created another clone to help him out, "I hope you're ready, Ino-chan," then both of them penetrated Ino, who cried out in ecstasy.

That continued for a few more hours, and Ino and Tenten could not help but feel satisfied.

Flashback end

Naruto smiled, Ino and Tenten definitely wanted to do it, and he could not deny anything to his women.

Naruto then moved slightly, causing Ino and Tenten to moan. He chuckled and kissed each of them on their foreheads, causing them to open their eyes slowly. "Wake up, girls. It's time to get up; I have a few things to do today."

Ino stretched out a little and kissed Naruto, but on his lips, "Good morning, Naruto-kun. It wasn't a dream what happened yesterday, was it?"

Naruto smiled and shook his head, "Of course not, it was all real."

Ino smiled too, and then Tenten kissed Naruto, who returned the kiss "Where do you have to go, Naruto-kun? Can't you spend the day with us?"

Naruto shook his head and replied, "I'm sorry, Tenten-chan. Although I would like to do that more than anything, this is something that I've been putting off for a week. I can't wait any longer; I have to do it today."

Ino, who was getting dressed, asked again. "And what do you have to do, Naruto-kun?"

Naruto also got up and started getting dressed as well as Tenten. "I have to visit an old goat who lives under a root."

Ino instantly understood what Naruto meant, but not Tenten, who asked. "What do you mean, Naruto-kun?"

Naruto after putting on his ANBU pants walked over to Tenten and replied. "You'll know it soon, Tenten-chan, don't worry."

Tenten just nodded; she knew that Naruto still didn't tell her everything, but she was confident that he would do it soon.

When they finished dressing, they looked at the bed. Ino and Tenten couldn't help blushing as they recalled the details of the evening, making them smile with happiness.

Then Naruto shook his head and said, "This is a disaster. Ino, is this your parent's room?"

Ino blushed even more and replied. "Y-Yes, Naruto-kun, their room has a fairly large bed, so... That's why we brought you here. My room's bed or the other beds are much smaller compared to this one."

Naruto replied, "Hmm, you're very naughty, Ino-chan. What would your parents think if they knew about this? Maybe I should punish you by myself so that they won't have to."

Ino was about to say that he could do it, but Naruto spoke again. "But ... that won't be possible today, so I'll have to forgive you."

Ino sighed, and then she saw three clones appearing out of nowhere, surprising Ino and Tenten again due to the way in which Naruto used that jutsu.

Two of the clones picked up the blankets and left the room while the other one went downstairs to make breakfast, "Okay, now your parents won't realize anything. My clones will wash those blankets and then they will place them back on the bed. My other clone is preparing your breakfast. Go downstairs and eat, I have to leave now before that goat can escape from me."

Tenten replied, "Won't you eat anything, Naruto-kun? Are you not tired from ... from last night?" Tenten asked, blushing slightly.

Naruto shook his head and answered, "Not eating breakfast is nothing new to me; I remember going weeks without eating."

Ino and Tenten got sad because of the childhood that Naruto had to go through. Nonetheless, he quickly continued. "But hey, don't be sad. That's the past; things are entirely different now. What I was made me what I'm now. If I hadn't become what I'm now, I wouldn't even get to know you. Or is that what you want?"

Almost instantly, Ino and Tenten shook their heads. Naruto smiled and finished. "See? Don't be sad for something like that. My past could have been bad, but I'm no longer that weak and emaciated child. Nevertheless, enough of that; it's annoying, and I don't want to make you feel sad. Now go and eat, and maybe I'll see you later."

Both nodded, walked downstairs and arrived at the dining room. Meanwhile, Naruto was about to walk out the Flower Shop door until he saw his chakra rod on the floor; he quickly approached to pick it up. "Whew, luckily they didn't notice this. If they had done it or if I had forgotten of this, I would have been in trouble."

He then walked out the door before using a Shunshin to get away from there.

Somewhere in the Village - One Hour Later.

Danzō was currently reading some of the reports about Naruto and his mission as a Genin; it didn't surprise him that he completed them successfully. Then he thought of the attack against the Hyūgas. Danzō wondered if Naruto did that because he wanted to do something like he did to the Uchiha clan, but then he shook his head.

No, Naruto wasn't like that; he knew that his mind was very complex, and to guess what he had in mind was difficult. Firstly because he didn't leave any evidence and because he didn't steal anything.

It seemed that he only went there just to kill a few Hyūgas. He then sighed wearily; a few months remained until the Chunin exams and his plan to overthrow the Yondaime was marching to perfection. He couldn't wait until that bastard was dead and 'a new' Hokage appointed to make Konoha the most feared Nation in the world.

He then rose up from his desk and left the room; he walked through the corridors of the base and decided to see his soldiers training. However, once there, he found a rather disturbing scene.

More than three dozen of his best men were lying on the floor; he quickly turned to one of the rooms and touched a button. At that moment, several Root ANBU appeared kneeling before him, "How did this happen? Who did this?" He demanded calmly, but on the inside, he was furious.

One of the ANBU replied. "We don't know, Danzō-sama. We didn't detect anyone in the base, and we are still looking for the culprit. We believe that we will find..."

However, that ANBU couldn't finish because an ANBU, who was there, got up and started laughing. "Oh, old man; your ANBU are becoming more pathetic every day, and I had thought that they would have improved after all these years I was out of Root. You disappoint me."

All the ANBU quickly stood up and were about to attack the intruder when Danzō hit his cane against the floor, stopping them instantly. "Hmm, what a pleasant surprise. What are you doing here... Oni?" Danzō asked.

Most of the ANBU couldn't help being surprised when hearing the codename of the one who once had been one of the best members of Root despite his young age.

Naruto took off his mask and the black suit he was wearing, and replied, "Hmm, I'm here for something crucial, which I have to talk to you about. Also, don't worry, I didn't kill any of your Root, they're just unconscious. I'm probably doing you a favor; all those idiots had their guard down. I can't believe they call themselves ANBU of Root."

Danzō nodded and replied, "You're right, Oni. That's something I'll have to fix once they're awake. And if you came here to talk to me, it's probably for something very important."

Naruto nodded and stated. "Yeah, it is. But stop calling me by my codename."

Danzō paid no attention to the latter and then ordered his ANBU to retreat and take the wounded to another site.

After that, Danzō told Naruto to follow him, and after a few minutes, they came to a room.

Danzō sat behind a desk and asked, "And what do you want to talk about, Oni?"

Naruto sighed when hearing his codename again, but then he turned serious and replied, "I want a false mission so that I can go to Uzushiogakure."

Danzō opened his one visible eye slightly, and then replied, "Direct and to the point, as always, Oni. However, tell me, why do you want to go to the ruins of the Uzumaki clan? "

Naruto then sat down and replied, "You already know why; I want to claim my heritage as an Uzumaki."

Danzō lips curved slightly and continued, "So you knew it. How did you find out about this?"

"That's none of your business; I have come here for something else, and I want you to do it," Naruto replied undeterred.

Danzō chuckled and asked again. "And why should I give you that mission? Moreover, why do you think I can do that?"

Naruto growled and replied about to lose patience. "Danzō, stop this stupid game. I'm not one of your stupid ANBU, who can't think for themselves. Do I have to remind you that I don't have your stupid seal?"

Danzō also got serious. "Naruto-kun, come on. We don't need to get aggressive; I just wanted to talk with one of my most promising boys quietly, since we haven't spoken for four years." Danzō replied.

The truth was that he knew that Naruto was right, without the seal, he couldn't stop Naruto from talking about all the dirty deals he had done. In addition, it would be a big problem if anyone knew of such deals.

Naruto then rose up from his seat and stated. "It seems that you don't want to cooperate. Maybe I should give some of your documents to the ANBU barracks; I'm sure they will know what to do with you." He then turned around and was about to leave when he heard Danzō hitting the floor with his cane.

He turned again to see Danzō starting writing something on a scroll; he smiled and sat down again. "Okay, Naruto-kun. You really know how to persuade people. Here's your mission, take it." He said handing the scroll to Naruto, who received it and began to read it.

"Those are the 'parameters.' You will have the mission ready for tomorrow; you can go through the gates of the village tomorrow morning. Give the scroll that I just gave you to the gate guards so that you can leave the village without problems. I will deliver the mission with the false information in a few hours. But I think you already know all of this."

Naruto then finished reading the scroll; he nodded and kept it in his ninja bag. "You're right; I know about this... and even more. Now if you'll excuse me; I have more important things to do than stay here all the day." Naruto then turned around and left the room.

Danzō when seeing the door closing, he couldn't help clenching his fists, "Just wait, Oni-kun. Not even you will be able to avoid my Genjutsu, and when I do it, you will be my weapon forever." Danzō thought before leaving the room to go and talk to a certain artist to accompany Naruto on his mission.

With Naruto

Naruto after leaving the Root base, he went to see Haku to his apartment. Naruto didn't tell her that he wouldn't return yesterday and suspected that she would be worried. Besides, a few hours remained for her session, so he supposed that she would be there.

After walking for a few minutes, Naruto came to his neighborhood. He went to a building and walked upstairs before putting a key in his door.

When he entered and walked in, he instantly felt someone hugging him from behind, "Naruto-kun, where were you all? I thought that something bad had happened to you."

Naruto turned around to see Haku, who had a sad expression on her face, "Don't worry, Haku-chan. I stayed with Ino-chan and Tenten-chan to sleep. I didn't speak to them for a week, so they were angry with me. So I had to make peace."

Haku didn't understand this and asked, "What do you mean with 'make peace'?"

Naruto smiled and stroked her chin. "Something that you will know very soon, Haku-chan." Then he went to take a shower.

Haku thought about this a moment before her eyes opened dramatically. She blushed a lot and went to prepare breakfast for Naruto.

The next day

The previous day, Naruto had accompanied Haku to her session again. After that, they had trained with Anko a little bit, and Naruto noticed that she was in a bad mood.

He supposed it was because they hadn't done it for a week, thinking that he could resolve that shortly.

After that, he visited Tenten and Ino, who had radiant smiles on their faces all day long, and nothing and no one could take them off.

Naruto knew the reason, but he didn't see the need to tell it to everyone.

Now Naruto was running alone towards Nami no Kuni; the scroll said that he must go alone. He had given the scroll to the guards, Izumo, and Kotetsu, before running towards there.

He needed to make a stop there to visit a certain subordinate before going to Uzushiogakure. He could fly to there, but he didn't since he was still pretty close to Konoha and didn't want anyone to know about that skill yet.

He kept running until he stopped abruptly. He turned around and looked at a tree before saying, "I knew that Danzō wouldn't give me this mission without one of his puppets starts bothering me. Get out of there or I will kill you."

Instantly, a black-haired boy with white skin came out of the trees. Naruto concluded that he was a Root ANBU due to his facial expression, "Your skills are just as sharp as before, Naruto-senpai." After that, the strange boy grinned, and Naruto could tell that it was the fakest smile he had ever seen in his entire life.

Naruto sighed and stated. "I don't know who you are, but I don't want you to bother me. I could kill you right now, but I have no desire to do something like that right now. So go away and I'll spare your life."

The boy stopped smiling and got the same blank expression he had at first. "Sorry, Naruto-senpai, but Danzō-sama ordered me to follow you, and I can't fail him. You can call me Sai, you and I have already done some missions in the past. However, I'm not surprised that you don't remember me."

Naruto sighed and replied, "Look, go away. I have something important to do, and if I have to wait for you to keep up with me, I'll never arrive at my goal. So I don't want to repeat it, get out of here before you regret it."

Sai gave another fake smile and replied, "If time is your problem, Naruto-senpai. Then I have something that can solve that."

Naruto saw him pulling out a scroll and a brush from his ninja bag. He put some ink on the brush and with an inhuman speed; he drew something on the scroll. "Ninpou: Chōjū Giga (Super Beast Imitating Drawing)" Naruto heard and then he watched in amazement as a big Hawk came out of scroll and began to flap.

Then he saw that Sai jumped up on the Hawk and stated. "I know very well that I am no match for you, Naruto-senpai, so I can offer my services so you can reach your goal faster." He said blankly.

Naruto thought about it for a moment; perhaps he wouldn't be able to see Gatō as he expected. He knew that Danzō sent him to spy on him, but anyway, he would think of something to get rid of Sai.

Naruto nodded and jumped on the hawk. "I hope you know how to use this," Naruto said with raised eyebrow.

He had no problems with falling since he could fly and then kill Sai if he did something as stupid as that.

Sai gave another of his fake smiles and replied, "Don't worry, Naruto-senpai. The reason Danzō-sama assigned me to accompany you is because I can help you to get to Uzushiogakure faster."

"Listen very well. When I order you to stop following me or do something, you will do it. Do you understand?"

Sai nodded with another fake smile, "Hai, Naruto-senpai."

"Why do you keep calling me like that? I'm not your senpai." Naruto asked

Sai returned to his blank expression and replied. "Like I said. You and I have done some missions in the past. And as I read this book," Sai said, pulling out a book from his ninja bag, "it says that a person who has been a companion of another one are called Senpai, to show respect for those who have more experience than them. And you're a veteran to many in Root."

Naruto sighed and replied, "Okay, now hurry up and fly this thing; we must get to Nami no Kuni as soon as possible." Sai nodded and ordered his Hawk to take flight.

Tazuna's House - A few Hours Later

Tsunami was currently washing the dinner dishes. Things in her village were improving little by little, all thanks to the bridge and a person she had been missing a lot this past week.

The villagers had chosen her father as the Daimyo of Nami no Kuni, although he had refused, he accepted because she had convinced him. Also, that was the reason her father wasn't at home, he was taking care of some things so they could make it official, which made him spend much more time out of the house, and Inari was at the house of one of his friends, spending the rest of the day.

She sighed sadly; she missed Naruto a lot, and she could not deny it. She knew her father and Inari also missed him. Although he had promised he would visit her; he never said when, and that's why she couldn't help be a little sad.

Just then, she heard a knock on the door and went to open it. "Good morning, what do you want?" She asked smiling. Then she looked and saw a man completely covered.

She was a little frightened, but then the man spoke. "Do you know this man?" The person at the door asked, showing Tsunami a photograph.

She took the picture and could see Naruto with a grumpy expression on his face. She would have found that expression funny in another situation, but she was suspicious of the man standing at the door. "What do you want with Naruto-kun?" she asked.

The man grunted and objected, "That doesn't matter; I asked if you know him, and it seems to be the case. Now tell me where he is or I will take it out of you by force!" When she heard this, her eyes widened and tried to close the door, but the man stopped her and pushed her inside.

Tsunami fell to the floor and tried to get up, but she realized that the strange man positioned himself on top of her, holding her tightly. "Now, I want you to tell me where he is, or I will do something that you won't like."

When hearing this, Tsunami began to move, trying to push the man away. However, his grip was strong, and she could do little.

She glared at the man and replied, "No matter what you do, I won't say anything about Naruto-kun. Go to hell." She then looked the man's face and realized that he was smiling.

She was about to ask him what was so funny when the man began to kiss her. She tried to push him away but couldn't do anything.

However, a small puff of smoke revealed Naruto instead of the man.

Naruto then looked at her shocked eyes and waved. "Hello, Tsunami-chan. I'm sorry; I just wanted to know what you would do in that situation."

At the end of his explanation, he received a slap from Tsunami, "Uhm, I think I deserved that."

Tsunami then threw him to the floor and started kissing him. After doing that for several seconds, they separated and Tsunami, feigning anger, scolded. "Naruto-kun! That was very mean. I really thought that someone wanted to do something bad to you. Don't ever do something like that again." She then stood up and turned around, crossing her arms.

Naruto smiled and replied. "Okay, okay. Come on. Don't get mad. Look, I'm here, as I promised."

However, Tsunami stood in the same stance.

Naruto sighed, walked over to her and whispered in her ear with a lot of sensuality, "Tsunami-chan," giving it a lick.

Tsunami couldn't help shivering and that her intimacy gets wet. "Don't be mad, Tsunami-chan... Please, forgive me."

"Naruto-kun…" Tsunami whispered, starting to heat up increasingly.

Naruto then grabbed her breasts and continued. "Please, Tsunami-chan. I didn't want to do that. I just wanted you to be ready for that situation." He then put his hand inside and started playing with her nipples, which made her moan.

"I'm n-not a-angry, Naruto-kun. I was ju-just playing with you. I-I can't be angry with you. After all, y-you are… You are my man." She stated

Naruto smiled, grabbed Tsunami and then sat her on one of the couches in the living room. Then he bent down and looked at Tsunami's intimacy, and she clearly understood what he wanted.

Therefore, she spread her legs a little. "G-Go ahead, Naruto-kun."

Naruto smiled and pulled Tsunami's pants off before doing the same with her panties.

Tsunami when seeing his tongue approaching, exclaimed, "Naruto-kun, I'm glad you're back!"

Then she felt Naruto's tongue in her intimacy, and she couldn't help arching back when feeling Naruto's expert tongue moving from side to side.

Naruto smiled and put some fingers to replace his tongue. "Well, I promised you that I would." He bent down again and continued with his work.

Tsunami then began to breathe hard as she kept moaning, "Naruto-kun, how can you be so good at this?"

Naruto said nothing and continued until he felt that she started squeezing his tongue.

He looked at her clit and gently squeezed it with his fingers without taking his tongue out from Tsunami, who arched back, releasing her fluids on Naruto's face, who drank them entirely.

Naruto then stood up and looked at Tsunami, who didn't recover yet from her recent orgasm.

He sat next to her and began to stroke her hair. "Are you okay now?" Naruto asked.

Tsunami wiped some sweat from her forehead and nodded. "Yes, Naruto-kun. Thanks for this, I needed to freshen myself up."

She then got on Naruto's lap, looked into his eyes and began to rub herself against Naruto's member, which started to come alive.

However, Naruto stopped her and said, "Wait a minute, Tsunami-chan. We can do this tonight. I have someone waiting outside, and I wanted to ask you if we could stay here today. Tomorrow we have to go east. I have a mission there. So, I took the opportunity to visit you."

Tsunami was disappointed, but Naruto said that they could do it at night, so she nodded and replied, "Of course, Naruto-kun. You can bring your friend here. There is still some dinner if you want to eat something."

She then pulled down from Naruto's lap; she put on her panties and pants before going to the kitchen to get some food.

Naruto then went outside and could see Sai with the same blank expression. "Come in," Naruto said, giving way.

He saw that Sai placed his hand in his ninja bag, and Naruto quickly stopped him, "Sai, enough of your stupid books. All you did on the trip was talk about them. If you want your emotions back, get a new brain or something. But I don't want you to say anything, okay?" Naruto stated

"Hai, Naruto-senpai," Sai replied as he walked into Tsunami's house.

He followed Naruto to the dining room and upon entering; they could see that Tsunami had already put some food for them on the table. Naruto thanked her for the food and Sai just sat down there without saying or doing anything.

Tsunami looked at Naruto's companion, and she thought that he had a rather strange appearance. His skin color was entirely white and wore a so short shirt that showed much of his stomach.

"What's your name?" She finally asked Sai, who said nothing.

Naruto growled and added. "Sai, you're an idiot; I didn't mean this."

Sai then looked at Naruto and replied. "Sorry, Naruto-senpai but one of my books says that when a person..."

"Yeah, yeah, yeah, yeah; I know what you mean. But... Argh, damn Danzō and his Root."

Tsunami didn't know what he meant, but she guessed it had to do with his village. Therefore, she decided not to get into that.

After finishing eating, Tsunami told Sai to take one of the rooms of the house, while she and Naruto headed to another one. Naruto instantly placed a privacy seal in the bedroom, and then Tsunami and Naruto began to catch up.

The next day

Naruto had woken up quite early and got out the bed, trying not to wake Tsunami up.

He left the house to see if Gatō had started with his base. He began running, and when he reached his destination, he was surprised to see that they had built it almost entirely.

He approached the entrance and saw two guards, one of them stopped him, "Stop right there. You can't enter."

Naruto looked at them, noticing that they were twice his height. He sighed and replied, "I'm here to see Gatō, tell him that Kyōfu is back," now he looked at them with a serious face.

The two men upon hearing this felt that a mark on their wrists began to burn them. They sweated nervously, knelt down, and one of them said, "Ky-Kyōfu-sama, we didn't know it was you. It's a great honor to meet you. Please, enter over here. Gatō-san is in the lowest part of the base. This base is the same as the others, so I don't think you can get lost." Naruto nodded and entered the base.

Both men sighed in relief, and one of them said, "Whew, I can't believe we've seen Kyōfu-sama. We were about to die."

His partner nodded and replied, "You're right, I can't believe that someone so young is the leader of this organization. Anyway, you know how things are. We can't talk about him."

The other man nodded and replied, "Of course not, I don't want to die so early. Kyōfu-sama also pays quite well; I don't want to lose this job." They both nodded and then returned to their positions.

Meanwhile, Naruto was walking through the base; Gatō certainly did things fast. He also noticed that almost everyone were aware of his return.

After walking down several stairs, Naruto reached the bottom room; he opened it and could see some women around Gatō.

Naruto sighed and stated. "* Ahem* I hope you're not spending my money on whores, Gatō."

"Who said that?!" Gatō shouted, pulling the women away from him, and when he had a better view, he could see Naruto standing at the door with crossed arms.

He opened his eyes in shock and replied. "O-Of c-course not! Kyo…" but he couldn't finish because one of the women approached at Naruto and began to caress him.

"Oh! Hmm, who is this handsome boy, Gatō?" she asked, still touching Naruto, who didn't move even an inch and stood in the same stance that he initially had.

Gatō opened his eyes even more and yelled. "Get away from Kyōfu-sama, you dirty whore!"

The woman upon hearing the name became frightened and pulled herself away from him. "K-Kyōfu-sama, I'm s-sorry, I d-didn't know it was you. Please don't do anything to me!" She begged quite nervous as she bowed to Naruto.

Naruto looked at her and replied. "There are several things I hate in a woman..."

The woman became even more frightened and started to say she was sorry, but Naruto continued, "I hate fangirls, who don't take their training seriously, and women who do what you did without a reason. However..."

He paused and helped the woman to stand up, which made her open her eyes, "This is your job, so I can't punish you," he smiled at the end, which caused a slight blush on that woman.

Then he walked away and continued, "I hope this is a lesson for you. These behaviors bring losses to our business; you must be selective. That goes for all of you too. You work for me. I don't pay you to mess around with people, especially with those who don't have a place to lay their heads. You can have sex with everyone, as long as they can pay for you. Is that clear?" He finished, smiling again.

The women smiled too and replied. "Hai, Kyōfu-sama!" They thought they were so lucky for having a compressive boss like him. However, they didn't want to try their luck, so they decided to remain silent after that.

Naruto nodded; people in his organization knew him as "Kyōfu (Godfather)." He didn't want anyone to know his identity as the leader of the Yakuza, an organization that was gaining a lot of weight around the Elemental Nations.

Even if some people had seen him now, they were part of his organization, and there were some "security measures" to avoid the leaking of information.

There were several requirements to join the organization, the main one was absolute fidelity, besides carrying the symbol of the Yakuza on the wrists, which allowed Naruto to know where the disloyal people were, among other things. But that was something quite unusual.

Naruto then approached Gatō, who was kneeling before him. "Excuse me, Kyōfu-sama; I didn't know you would return so soon."

Naruto looked at Gatō and replied, "Never mind, but I'm surprised; you really work fast, Gatō."

Gatō smiled stupidly and replied. "Sure, Naru... I mean, Kyōfu-sama. When you ordered me to build a new base, I hired several men to get to work here, day and night. Anyway, what do you wish, Kyōfu-sama?"

Afterward, Naruto motioned, and the women left the room. Then he stated. "Gatō, you're hiring too many prostitutes. You know that's not our main focus."

"Of course not, Naruto-sama; you're right. However, since Nami no Kuni is destined to grow quickly, I thought that some men would like some female company."

Naruto sighed and replied. "Gatō, I never want to see you as I did just before. I'm giving you many liberties, but I don't want you to spend my money without meditating on the consequences. Anyway, I want you to give me a summary of how things are going around here."

Gatō ran to his desk, took some papers out and began to read them. "Very well, Naruto-sama. The organization has grown a lot in these four years. We have twenty bases spread around the Elemental Nations and several hundred of establishments, being the most prominent ones in Tanzaku. In addition, the join requests we receive per day are increasing significantly; we receive about 150 applications, of which about 10 are accepted. All the members when joining go through the ritual for the placement of the seal on their wrists. Oh yeah, and the Princess Koyuki was asking for you when she found out that the leader of the Yakuza had appeared to retake control. She says that she wants to see again the hero who saved her country."

Naruto smiled and replied. "Oh yeah, Koyuki-chan. I don't see her since that day when I ended up saving them. Tell her not to worry and that I'll visit her in a few months. Anyway, what else you got? "

Gatō nodded and continued, "I want you to know that the Cannabis is quite popular. We didn't know that this herb could get so popular, and people are willing to pay the cost. Besides, we're creating drugs that people just can't stop buying. Then are others, which only a few Daimyo consume. Of course! The Daimyo of the Water Country sends his greetings. He says he wants to meet you personally and talk about some things of mutual interest. He also sends his thanks; he says that the drugs helped him to eliminate his pessimistic attitude." Naruto just nodded.

"I also want to let you know that there were some cases of people who tried to leave the organization, but we've taken care of them," Gatō finished, waiting for his boss to say something.

"Okay, Gatō. You've certainly managed to handle things in this organization during the four years I was gone. Therefore, I'll let you take the base that you want, except for this one." Naruto spoke.

Gatō smiled widely, then he bowed and stated, "Thank you, Naruto-sama! However, everything is because your great plans and ideas. If it weren't for you, we wouldn't have all this. I promise that I won't disappoint you."

Naruto nodded and asked. "How is the training of our soldiers going?"

Gatō got up; he went to get another paper from his desk and answered. "Well, they're making progress, we still don't have a big army, but we have enough squads. The scientists from Yuki no Kuni (Land of Snow) have created several Chakra armors, and only the squad captains can wear them. They say they want you to go there someday; they've created a special armor just for you."

Naruto nodded and then stated. "Good job. If you continue working in the same way, you won't lose your soul. Now I have to go; I have a companion with me, and I can't raise suspicions. Oh yes, I want you to send money and presents to the new Daimyō of Nami no Kuni. Tell him that the Yakuza leader sends them as a token of appreciation and congratulations."

Gatō nodded and watched Naruto disappearing in a swirl of leaves.

He smiled happily and went to check some papers to choose a base for him.

Back at Tazuna's house

Naruto returned to Tazuna's house a few minutes ago, satisfied with everything he had heard.

He promised himself to go to Yuki no Kuni after leaving Konoha. He entered through the window of the room and saw that Tsunami was still sleeping.

It was still early, so he didn't want to wake her up. He made a shadow clone and told him to lay down beside her.

The clone happily nodded and went next to Tsunami, who upon feeling the heat source, she hugged it.

Naruto saw that his clone smiled stupidly, which made him have the desire to punch him in his face. Nevertheless, he said nothing and left the room to go to Sai's bedroom.

Once there, he knocked on the door, and a blank-looking Sai opened it. "Good morning, Naruto-senpai. Are we ready to continue the mission? Or will you continue your reproduction acts with Tsunami-san?" Sai asked.

Naruto facepalmed and then replied. "Sai, you're stupid. Anyway, you're right; it's time to continue my mission. Get everything ready; we're heading to Uzushiogakure. It's not too far from here, so I think we'll arrive there in about 30 minutes."

Sai nodded and left the room. "I'm ready; we can continue."

Naruto also nodded, and they turned around to leave until they heard a voice, "Oto-san!"

Naruto almost fell from the stairs and turned around just to see Inari hugging him.

Naruto sighed and stated. "Inari, I have to go on a mission. One of my clones is with your mother. You can ask and talk about anything you want with him once he wakes up. But right now I don't have time for this."

"But Oto-san, when did you get here?" Inari happily asked.

Naruto shook his hair a little bit and answered, "Just yesterday, now go to your bed. It's still too early, and you have to rest. You can talk to my clone later."

Inari nodded and went to his room again.

Sai looked at this interaction, and he was about to add something when Naruto stopped him with his hand, "Sai, I don't want to hear anything about your stupid books. Now let's go to Uzushiogakure and let's see what we'll find there."

Sai nodded, and both ran towards the ruins of Uzushiogakure.

Notes:

I hope you dear readers have liked the lemon. However, I think the reactions of the girls were… expected, and you know why.

Naruto's organization was something that came to my mind when I was writing the chapter (a few weeks ago.) I didn't plan it, nor the thing that you will read in the next chapter.

Until the next chapter.

Chapter Text

Person talking, "It could be."

Person thinking, "I don't like this idea."

Demon speaking / Invocation talking, "No doubt you are someone to be reckoned with."

Demon thinking / Invocation thinking, "His heart is dark."

Disclaimer: I do not own Naruto, Masashi Kishimoto does.

Chapter 11

"So we have to go east, and you said that this place has many natural defenses. How do you know all that, Naruto-senpai?" Sai asked as he looked to the sea.

Naruto growled and replied, "That's none of your business. Anyways, all the villages have some kind of natural defense. Don't they teach anything in Root anymore?"

Sai gave a fake smile and answered, "Sorry, Naruto-senpai. But there's little information about this village. And I just thought it was strange that you knew something about a village that disappeared before the Second Shinobi War." Sai finished returning to his typical blank expression.

Naruto sighed, "Sai, just shut up. Now make one of those hawks of yours. Maybe you can be helpful after all." Sai nodded as he created an ink hawk.

Both jumped, and it flew to the direction that Naruto had instructed Sai, who spoke again, "What do you expect to find there, Naruto-senpai? Danzō-sama hasn't said anything about that. He just wanted me to follow you."

Naruto shrugged, "I don't know. I just want to go there, and if I find something important, I'll take it."

"Well, you could have asked your father," Sai replied smiling falsely again.

Naruto raised an eyebrow and asked, "What do you mean?"

Sai gave his emotionless stare and answered, "We're aware that you're the Hokage's son. Although we can't talk about this with other people besides you because we all have the seal, everyone but you."

"Well, that's fine for me; for the first time, I agree that you all have that seal. But how is it that everyone found out about it?" Naruto asked out of curiosity.

Sai replied, "Danzō-sama told us."

Naruto nodded and asked no more. He just kept watching the sea.

They continued flying for a few minutes until they saw an island. "Sai, over there!" Naruto shouted pointing out the place to Sai, who nodded and began to decrease the height.

However, Sai suddenly felt that they were falling at a faster rate than expected, so he shouted, "Naruto-senpai! It seems that something is attracting us toward the land. I can't control my ink hawk; we're going to crash into the ground!"

Naruto grunted and shouted, "Well, do something, goddamn it! I don't want to crash into the ground."

Just then, the hawk exploded, and both fell even faster. Both of them opened their eyes in shock since an enormous pressure surrounded their bodies.

Naruto couldn't think of anything but his first experience with the gravity seals, but this time, it was much worse because he couldn't cancel whatever it was that was attracting them towards the land.

He couldn't do anything because his hands felt too heavy.

Even though Sai kept the same expression, he felt a bit of fear of crashing into the ground; both couldn't do anything.

They saw the ground and prepared themselves for the impact. Naruto covered himself as much as he could while Sai continued watching.

Nonetheless, just when they were about to touch the ground, something glowed on the ground, and it reduced their speed sharply, which made them regain their mobility.

Naruto then put a foot on the ground as he thought, "What the hell was that?"

Kurama replied, "Maybe it was one of the seals that your ancestors placed on this island before falling. Maybe these seals were designed to react to any intruder, and surely, these seals recognized you as an Uzumaki and canceled the effect. Anyway, that's what I believe."

Naruto, listening to his tenant, answered, "You may be right, I just hope not to find any more surprises." Kurama just nodded and continued observing his Jinchūriki.

Naruto turned around and saw that Sai was staring at him with a very strange gaze, "Sai, don't look at me that way; you look weird."

Sai kept looking at him the same way and answered, "Sorry, Naruto-senpai. But this is my usual look, but I feel something that you call 'curiosity.' Curiosity to what has happened."

Naruto stretched a little bit and answered, "Why do you think I know what has happened? We fell and then we stopped. I don't know what the hell has happened, but now we must continue with our walk."

Sai nodded and followed Naruto, who already had advanced a little.

Sai then caught up with Naruto, who kept looking around the village. "This village is very different than the other ones in which I have been. The buildings look very modern, and the structures seem to be of a very durable material. Several years have passed, and some buildings remain standing; it's impressive." Naruto stated.

Naruto, for every step he took, he could feel his head burning. However, he dismissed it and kept walking until he could see a quite battered doll on the ground.

He approached and grabbed it, but in doing so; his pupils dilated.

Naruto shook his head and saw he was elsewhere. "Where am I?" Naruto wondered as he looked around.

He instantly concluded that it was Uzushiogakure, but before getting destroyed.

He looked to the side and saw that a red haired girl was watching him; he believed it was an illusion until the girl pointed him and motioned for him to follow her.

Naruto thought that was very unusual, "Ha! Pathetic! Don't tell me that you are still afraid of ghosts, Naruto?" Kurama asked amusingly.

Naruto shook his head again and replied, "No, it's not that; I just think this is very strange. Besides, that girl looks familiar. But I can't recognize her."

Naruto followed the girl through the streets of the village, which were empty; he didn't know why and wouldn't stop to find it out.

He kept walking for several minutes until he got tired and shouted to the girl who was still running, "Hey! Wait! Where are you taking me?" Naruto could hear one thing, and that was a giggle from the girl, who ran a bit faster.

Naruto growled as he thought, "I hope this is worth it. And seriously, where the hell is Sai?"

Kurama was watching all this with attention too because that girl also looked familiar to him, "I have no idea; this isn't a Genjutsu. So maybe you're inside of one of the defenses of the village, but I don't know. You just follow that girl; I think she'll show us something important." Kurama replied.

Naruto nodded and ran even faster until he was standing beside the girl. He could see that she was about nine years old and had violet eyes, round face, and long red hair.

These features reminded him about the descriptions that Kurama gave him about his mother.

Naruto then realized that the girl smiled as she turned on a corner to enter into a temple. Naruto did it too, and as he came in, he saw several flags hanging around the temple with the whirlpool symbol and statues of people that Naruto didn't know.

Naruto then moved closer to the girl, who was pointing to an altar on which a small sphere with strange inscriptions and of a golden color was. Naruto asked, "Do you want me to touch that?"

The girl just nodded. Naruto shrugged and walked slowly toward the circular object, which began to glow for every step that he took.

Standing in front of the sphere, Naruto looked at it with interest and then he looked with a raised eyebrow to the girl, "Are you sure that nothing bad will happen me if I touch it?" The girl nodded and again she pointed towards the sphere.

Naruto sighed and put a hand on the sphere, in doing so, he felt that everything began to spin at breathtaking speed while hearing a voice in his head, "Young Uzumaki; you honor us with your presence. We had lost all hope that one of our descendants would come to our lands. Uzumaki Naruto, by coming to this place you have agreed to see the memories of your ancestors, by coming to this place you have agreed to accept our heritage, by coming to this place you have agreed to be our future."

Naruto heard this as he held his head because he could hear that voice deep inside him.

Naruto tried to contact Kurama, but he got no response, so he shouted, "Who are you?! How do you know my name?! What the hell are you doing?!"

The voice continued, "Naruto Uzumaki, by coming to this place you have agreed to share your memories with us."

Naruto growled and replied, "What the hell are you talking about?! What do you mean by 'us'? Besides, I didn't accept anything."

Naruto then heard many more voices, which made him put both hands on his head, "Naruto Uzumaki. You are our legacy; you are our future. You are a true Uzumaki; you shall see our tragedy."

Naruto noticed that everything around him began to glow and that structures began to form around.

Naruto stood up shaking his head, feeling a hand on his shoulder along with a voice, "This way, Naruto Uzumaki. You shall see how those people who called themselves our allies betrayed us and helped to make us fall into disgrace."

Naruto then looked to the side and saw an old man who wore a blue ninja armor. He had long white hair, a mustache, and a squared-off goatee.

Naruto then realized that the man started walking, but he yelled, "Stop!"

The man stopped and asked, "What do you want, Naruto Uzumaki?"

Naruto sighed and asked, "Who are you? And how do you know my name?"

The man moved closer to Naruto and replied, "I am just a representation of my former self. I am just here to guide those who will be in charge of guiding our people. About how we know who you are, we already told you. You have agreed to share your memories with us by coming here. Now follow me."

Nevertheless, Naruto didn't do it and stated, "You haven't answered me anything, but I'm sure if I ask you that again, you will answer me the same. What I want you to tell me now is: who was that girl of a few moments ago?"

The representation of the old village leader replied, "We have seen your memories. That girl was the one you call mother. Now let us continue."

Naruto was surprised and asked, "But how? I never saw her; you can't show me something I've never seen."

The appearance replied monotonously, "You did not, but he did."

Hearing this, Naruto assumed he was referring to Kurama, so he nodded and asked one last question, "Why do you say 'us' and not 'I'?"

The appearance then turned around as he continued his way; he motioned Naruto to follow him who did it begrudgingly. "Because we are different representations of your ancestors. We keep the body of our former leader due to respect and appreciation." Naruto nodded and followed the old man.

Now he realized that the village streets were full; men, women and children, everyone with red hair, and the elder ones with white hair.

Everyone seemed jubilant, and Naruto couldn't help smiling with happiness, which he found odd.

"Everything started here," the representation stated and then Naruto noticed that they had suddenly appeared in a room with several people. He instantly recognized one of them. He was equal to the man who was showing him this; he assumed that he was the former leader of the village.

Naruto could also see other people next to him, much younger, all with red hair.

In front of them was another group. Naruto moved a little bit and could see the headbands of Konoha.

Naruto carefully listened to their conversation, hearing that they had come to withdraw some things to strengthen their alliance.

The leader had nodded, and Konoha's ninjas retreated from there. After that, everything had changed as before; now Naruto was in another room and saw several bodies on the floor. "Here, those who called themselves our allies caused our tragedy." The representation spoke and once again.

Naruto, meanwhile, heard another voice, "Are you sure it's here, Aoi?" The voice asked. Naruto looked to the side and could see the ninjas of Konoha, some of them were cleaning the blood from their Katana. "Hai, Shodaime-sama told us that this is the place where the seals of the barrier that protects Uzushiogakure are. If we destroy these seals, then this village will fall. And once we do this, the attack will start. Everyone is ready; we just have to launch the signal once we finish here."

Naruto clenched his fists in anger; he wanted to do something and stop these men, but he knew that he could do nothing because it was a vision.

He then saw that the men put several seals on the pillars, which had the most complicated seals that Naruto had ever seen.

When they finished placing them, one of the men stated, "Shodaime-sama did a good job tricking that Uzumaki bitch to create these counter-seals. Hehehe, she'll never know what really happened here."

Then all the men nodded and defused the barrier seals. They quickly went out of there, and one of them threw a fireball into the air.

Again, everything changed and Naruto realized that now there were several ninjas from different villages within Uzushiogakure, wreaking havoc everywhere.

He could recognize ninjas from Iwa, Suna, and Kumo. Three of the Five Great Shinobi Countries were attacking one village, plus Konoha that had caused all this.

Naruto clenched his fists tightly since he could do nothing. He could only watch and see how a bunch of cowards killed his clan.

"Dieeee dirty bastards!" Someone yelled.

Naruto turned around and saw that an Iwa ninja threw an Earth attack at a group of kids who looked pretty scared.

"Nooo!" Naruto yelled as he tried to do something to stop the attack, but he could only watch in horror as the jutsu crushed these children of no more than five years old.

"Damn it!" Naruto yelled as he fell to the ground, hitting it with both fists.

He then heard another man yelling, "Damn bitch! Now I'll show you what it's like to be with a real man!"

Naruto turned his head slightly and saw a Kumo ninja grabbing a girl no older than the kids that were crushed before.

The man threw her to the ground and violently stripped the girl, who had tears in her eyes while she screamed for help.

Naruto, seeing this, made a Banshō Ten'in to attract that despicable man to his hands to finish him off, but nothing happened, and he could only watch helplessly.

But just when the man was about to commit such barbarity, Naruto could see that an Uzumaki man approached behind the man and placed a seal on him, causing him to squirm on the ground.

Naruto sighed in relief and saw that the Uzumaki led the girl to somewhere else.

But things didn't stop there, and many didn't run with the same fate of that girl. And seeing all this caused Naruto's heart to twist. It was a feeling he hadn't felt in years; it was sadness.

He could see that the Uzumakis were doing their best to defend themselves. They had managed to kill several of the invaders, but the attackers were extensive, and they quickly began to overshadow them and push them back.

Naruto wanted to do something to help them because each death made him feel miserable and useless.

Then everything changed again, and now Naruto was in the same temple where he had been at the beginning, just not so dilapidated. "Ashina -sama, the room is sealed. We're ready to perform the separation, my Lord." Naruto heard a middle-aged woman saying.

Naruto saw the clan leader nodding as he sat on the floor and clasped his hands —just like several Uzumaki—, and forming a circle among themselves. "We can't allow them to pass further from this point. We must save our secrets and not allow these people to obtain them, or it will be the end of the Elemental Nations. We will use the Discharge."

Naruto didn't know what the "Discharge" was, so he just simply observed.

He could see that several Uzumaki nodded to that, but others were a little scared. "The Discharge will kill us, just like every living being in the village, now bring the Apple; we must end this."

Naruto then saw the girl from a few moments ago bringing the same sphere that Naruto touched a few minutes ago, but this time, it was glowing intensely.

The girl then went to the center and put the 'Apple' on the floor.

"Now I want you all to keep a bit of your Chakra within the Apple. I'm sure that an Uzumaki will return someday, and with this, we are going to explain what happened on this unfortunate day."

All the Uzumaki nodded and kept some of their chakra inside the sphere, which became blue briefly.

Ashina then spoke again, "Done; now we must prepare ourselves for the separation. It's the only way to save the civilians from the Discharge." Everyone nodded again and several seals glowed and spread throughout the room.

Naruto then appeared in the place where he and Sai arrived, seeing a large land expansion behind him, with some buildings, which still didn't look damaged.

He concluded that this place would be Nami no Kuni.

After that, Naruto saw that some strange seals appeared, which seemed to spread all over the island, but didn't go further his position.

He watched in amazement as the earth began to split and the place where he was moved away from the other portion of land at a considerable speed.

"Amazing!" Naruto could only say since he reappeared in the temple. "The division was successful, Ashina-sama. The civilians will survive. Besides, we have activated the memory suppressor seals so that they will forget everything related to us."

Ashina nodded and stated, "It will be better if they don't remember anything about us, so they will not suffer our same fate. But now we must activate the Discharge and stop the invaders."

"Hai, Ashina -sama!" everyone shouted.

Ashina then rose up from his place and walked slowly towards the Apple.

He took it with one of his hands and raised it as high as he could. Naruto then saw that Ashina released the Apple, and it began to float.

The Jinchūriki watched the ball spinning at an impressive speed before it suddenly stopped, releasing a beam of white light, which began to expand itself rapidly.

Naruto saw that the Uzumaki held their heads, as they fell writhing on the floor.

However, after a while, they stopped abruptly, stood up from the floor and the next thing Naruto saw made his eyes open in shock.

Everyone grabbed a Katana before stabbing themselves.

"No..." Naruto whispered releasing some tears, but then everything changed again, and now he was outside the temple, where several ninjas were trying to break in.

Nonetheless, the light beam appeared and caused the same effect on all of them.

The beam continued its way until it covered the whole village, killing everyone on that piece of land.

Many Uzumaki —who were fighting— accepted the decision of their leader in silence, but the invaders knew nothing and could only receive the beam, ending their own lives.

"Damn it!" Naruto yelled hitting a wall beside him.

He then saw that the representation reappeared beside him and stated, "Your pain is something that certainly gives us tranquility, young Uzumaki. Certainly, you're the one."

Naruto then realized that they reappeared in the temple, but, this time, it was the current one. "Why did everyone kill themselves?! Wasn't there another solution?" Naruto yelled angrily.

He didn't know why, but seeing all that caused him an immense sadness and all he wanted was to be there to help his family.

"That was the Apple's Discharge, Naruto Uzumaki." Ashina's representation replied quietly.

"But what do you mean by that? What's the Apple?" Naruto asked.

Ashina raised a hand, and a sphere identical to the Apple appeared in his hand. "The Apple of Eden..." Ashina spoke, pausing for a few seconds, "This was what made us so feared. This artifact was our greatest invention, although we only used it to energize all the seals in the village. But somehow, the Elemental Nations found out of the other features of this object. We never intended to hurt anyone. But fear guided the leaders of the other villages. Hence, they decided to kill us, but they also wanted to have this in their power."

Upon hearing this, Naruto raised an eyebrow and replied, "But that wouldn't prevent the other Nations from sending their scouts and try to get your "Apple." Indeed, it would be easier for them to get it once the village had no defenders."

Ashina nodded, "You are right, Naruto Uzumaki. But you have witnessed what would happen to any intruder who wished to get into our lands."

When Naruto remembered that, he nodded and asked. "You're right, but what was the 'Discharge'? Why did everyone commit suicide?"

The appearance made disappear the ball of his hand and answered, "The Apple has many capabilities, young Uzumaki. To provide energy is just one of dozens of it. Not even we managed to get all its secrets. It's a great artifact that has hundreds of years of existence. It was created several generations before ours. We have the belief that the Apple contains the power of the Rikudō Sennin; that's what makes it so powerful. We, with the passing of time, managed to improve it, but we could never get all its secrets due to different factors."

Naruto asked, "That's great, but what the Discharge was? And what were those factors?"

"Do not hurry, young Uzumaki." Ashina stated, but then continued, "The Discharge uses a main feature of the Apple, which is to control the mind of the affected person and make them obey its orders without being able to refuse it. No matter how strong your will is, you cannot say no to the Apple's order. But the downside is that it uses too much of the vital energy of the user. That was one of the major impediments of our ancestors. Some of them used the Apple believing that it had no consequences, but they ended up dying quickly. Though we have the characteristic of an incredible longevity, excessive use of the Apple causes our life to be much shorter. But that is only when you try to use its main features only."

Naruto was surprised to hear everything that a small sphere was capable of doing, but then he yelled, "But if you had something like this in your possession, why didn't you do something before all that happened?!"

"As we have said, we never had the intention of hurting anyone with the Apple; we just wanted to live a peaceful life. But you are right, if we had done something, none of this would have happened. That's why you are our future, Naruto Uzumaki. You will be the one who will decide what to do from now on with the Apple. Now it belongs to you and don't worry about the side effects. I am sure that 'he' will not let anything bad happen to you, we can feel a great connection and friendship between you." Ashina stated.

"But how were you sure that an Uzumaki would return here one day?" Naruto asked out of curiosity.

Ashina moved away from him and answered, "We were not sure about that. Though most Uzumakis died that day, many managed to survive thanks to those who migrated elsewhere. We thought that maybe the children of those people would return one day to want to know more about their roots. We can feel that your blood is truly powerful, Naruto Uzumaki. Although your father is not an Uzumaki, you had the good fortune of inheriting our qualities. When you are ready, reattach our lands, Naruto Uzumaki. You are our future. And now you shall know the other thing that made the Uzumakis feared. If you can survive this, you will be our future, if you do not, we will patiently wait for another Uzumaki to come to this place. The Apple belongs to you from now on; use it wisely. And make that the Uzumakis arise again!" Ashina stated as he began to fade away.

Naruto noticed this and shouted, "Wait! I still have many questions!"

However, the representation ignored him and vanished completely.

Naruto then heard a noise coming from the altar where the Apple was, and he noticed that a beam of light wrapped him.

Sai had been looking at Naruto with interest since he didn't know why he suddenly stood frozen; he had grabbed that doll and didn't do anything else for a while.

Sai approached him and asked. "Are you alright, Naruto-senpai?"

Just then, Naruto fell backward and looked around with surprise, "What the hell? How did I get here so fast?"

He then grasped his head while saying, "Ah. Damn, my head burns."

He then noticed that Sai was looking at him emotionlessly, "Hey, Sai...Did you see something?"

Hearing this, Sai shook his head and asked, "What do you mean, Naruto-senpai? You only grabbed that doll and stayed still for about 30 seconds."

Naruto's eyes opened a little as he thought, "Only 30 seconds? Hey, Kurama, did you see something?"

Kurama growled and answered, "No, I could only see until you touched that sphere. For some strange reason, I find it very familiar. Do you have any idea what it is?"

Naruto nodded and was about to say something when he felt that his head was about to explode.

He grabbed his head tightly as he began to shout, "AAAAAAAAAAAAHHH!"

Naruto rose up from the ground as he began to walk around, still holding his head and stumbling with each step, all without stopping screaming. "Aaaaah! GRRR, AAAH!"

Sai quickly ran to Naruto and asked, "Hey, Naruto-senpai, what happened?"

Sai got no answer since Naruto was still in the same state.

Afterward, Sai noticed that Naruto stopped and fell hard to the ground, so he approached and grabbed him by his head. "Hey, Naruto-senpai, wake up."

He then began to slap Naruto's face a few times, and he didn't give any sign of reaction.

Sai sighed and said, "This is a problem, if something bad happens to Naruto-senpai, Danzō-sama will be infuriated."

He created an ink hawk again and put Naruto on there. He went up and headed for Konoha.

Meanwhile, Kurama saw Naruto in his mental landscape with great concern, "Hey, Naruto; what's wrong?" Kurama asked as he approached Naruto's body, seeing him writhing on the floor.

He received no answer, and though Kurama was trying to find out what was wrong, he couldn't, since something or someone was preventing that.

Therefore, Kurama calmed down as he thought, "What the hell is wrong him? I can see that he is suffering a lot; I've never seen him like this."

He then tried to give him some of his power to calm him down. But as much as he tried, his energy wouldn't get into Naruto.

"AAAAHH!" Kurama heard Naruto screaming one last time before becoming unconscious within his mental landscape too.

Kurama saw Naruto's body turning pale as he trembled. The Biju guessed he had a great fever, so he approached him and covered him with his tails to give him some heat. "Don't worry Naruto; I'm sure you'll get well," Kurama stated with concern in his words.

He wouldn't let his only friend dying in this way; he would do everything within his possibilities to help him.

Kurama then snuggled Naruto closer to him, to provide him more heat.

Konohagakure no Sato - Six Hours Later

Sai after arriving at the village had thought about where to leave Naruto since no one could know that they were on a mission. And since there were no materials to treat him in Root, he decided to leave him in front of Konoha's hospital. After that, he disappeared and went to his base to report Danzō about everything.

Naruto, who still looked pretty bad, was lying right in front of the doors of the hospital, then an ANBU —who was patrolling the area— saw Naruto's body and quickly landed near him.

He took his pulse and just then, someone else landed next to him, "What did you find, Inu?" Asked that ANBU, unable to see what he was checking.

Inu then got up, and the ANBU could see Naruto's pale, sweaty and tired body.

Seeing this, she quickly approached Naruto to take his pulse, which was quite weak, "What happened to him? Quick, Inu. Help me to get him to the hospital."

Inu nodded, and both picked Naruto up.

"We need some help over here!" Yugao shouted as she put Naruto on a stretcher that was inside the building.

A doctor quickly came over and asked, "What happened, ANBU-san?"

"He needs your help," Yugao replied, showing Naruto's body, which began to bleed from his ears and nose, increasing Yugao's concern even more.

The doctor nodded and looked at the stretcher, but when seeing Naruto's body, he sneered and stated, "Sorry, ANBU-san. Right now…, we're full and don't have personnel who can take care of him. So please, do me a favor and take him out from here."

Then he turned around and started walking away, but he stopped as he felt a cut on his cheek.

The doctor turned around and saw the stretched out hand of Yugao.

"Now, you bastard, this is the order of an ANBU. Do you want to spend the rest of your life in a cell? I'll look forward to making your stay unpleasant."

The doctor didn't flinch and walked away again as he stated, "You can do whatever you want. If the demon dies, it'll be the best thing for the whole village."

Yugao growled and was about to attack him, but Inu stopped her and said, "Stop, Taicho. Inform Hokage-sama about this; I'll make sure to protect Naruto-san. Don't worry."

Yugao looked at Inu; she nodded and used a Shunshin to reach the Tower quickly.

Hokage Tower

Minato was reading the mission parameters that he had given Naruto yesterday. He thought it was strange that someone had exclusively asked for him, and for some reason he had a bad feeling.

He sighed as he thought, "What is this feeling? Why do I feel that something important is about to happen?"

Just then, he saw that Yugao appeared kneeling down before his desk.

"Oh, Usagi-san, what is the reason for your visit?" Minato asked quietly with a smile on his face.

Yugao then looked up and replied, "It's about Naruto-kun."

Minato changed his expression to one of seriousness and asked, "What happened?"

"We don't know, but Inu and I found him at the doors of the hospital. His condition is severe. We don't know what happened to him, and worst, the local doctors refuse to provide him care. Hokage-sama; I think that Naruto-kun is dying."

Minato's eyes opened widely; he got up from his seat, put on his coat with flames and seriously spoke, "Usagi, go to the Yamanaka compound and tell Inoichi to proceed to the hospital immediately. Tell him it's time; I'll handle the rest."

Yugao nodded and watched him disappearing in a yellow flash.

Yugao then got up and got out of there, heading to the Yamanaka compound.

Back in the Hospital

Minato appeared in front of the hospital doors. He hurried into the building and saw Naruto in an effectively deplorable state of health next to an ANBU.

He growled with anger when seeing that doctors just passed around without caring that Naruto was there.

He hurried over there and saw that the ANBU knelt before him, "Hokage-sama, we don't know what happened to Naruto-san, and I'm sure that Usagi-san has already reported that the doctors refused to provide him medical attention."

Minato seeing Naruto in that way felt his heart twisting, so he picked him up and yelled, "I need a fucking doctor!"

After saying this, several doctors approached him, "What's going on, Hokage-sama?" the same doctor of a few moments ago asked.

Minato pointed with his eyes to Naruto's body and yelled, "Can't you see?! Hurry up and tell me what he has!"

The doctor seemed not to notice the concern and anger in Minato's words, so he replied, "Hokage-sama, don't you see? He's the demon. Just leave him there alone. If he dies, the entire village will be happy, and we wouldn't have to worry about this abomination anymore."

Minato grunted and yelled furiously, unaware of his words, "He's not the demon, he is my son! And you better hurry, or you'll regret it!"

Everyone stopped abruptly; some of them dropped their things, and others covered their mouths with their hands.

Minato heard whispers, but no one seemed to be moving. Therefore, he released his killing intent, which made them tremble in sheer terror.

Minato handed Naruto to the ANBU before grabbing the doctor by his shirt. "Did you not hear me? Do you want to die?" Minato asked while a blue ball appeared in his right hand.

The doctor quickly shook his head and replied, "No, I don't want to die, Hokage-sama! I'm sorry, I will take care of your son immediately!"

Minato's eyes opened wide at that. "Did I call him my son? Argh! Shut up, Minato! It's not the time to think about this now! Inoichi will come in a few minutes, and he'll take me out of my doubts once and for all." He thought.

Minato then saw that several doctors came and put Naruto on a stretcher while they took him into surgery.

Minato followed them and upon arrival, he realized that the hands of all the medics were glowing green while they passed their hands over the body of Naruto, who was barely breathing.

Just then the door opened, and Minato could see that Inoichi, "Hokage-sama, I came as fast as I could."

Minato nodded as he continued watching to the medics working. "Thank you very much, Inoichi. Once the doctors finish, you'll make me enter into Naruto's mind."

Inoichi nodded, seeing the doctors working intensely. After intense minutes, one of the doctors approached Minato, who took him from his shoulders and asked, "What does he have? Will he be okay?"

The doctor sighed as he shook his head. "Hokage-sama, it's a miracle that he's still alive; his brain is inflamed, and it doesn't want to stop for some reason. We don't know why. Besides, our Medical Ninjutsu isn't working on the patient. He has gone into a coma, and we don't know when he'll wake up. It could be in a few weeks, a few months, a few years or a lifetime. He's also having trouble to breathe, so we must take him urgently to a room and put him on a ventilator."

Minato felt his heart twisting even more, but he couldn't say anything because the doctors took Naruto to a room.

Minato quickly ran behind them and entered the room. They quickly connected the ventilator to Naruto, as well as an intravenous serum, since Naruto was dehydrating quickly.

After having everything ready, another doctor approached Minato while wiping some sweat from his forehead, "Hokage-sama, your… son is stable right now. We apologize for our attitude at the beginning. We didn't know that he was your son. Now we'll withdraw and leave you alone." Then all the doctors left the room.

Minato approached Naruto as he put a hand on his forehead, realizing that he had a pretty high fever.

Minato heard someone knocking on the door, and he told him to come in.

Inoichi entered and looked at Minato, who nodded. "All right, Hokage-sama. You'll go in there; I'll observe everything. However, I won't be able to be there physically, only you. I'll get you out immediately if something bad happens."

Minato nodded as he took a deep breath. Then he looked to Inoichi, "I'm ready." Minato stated, Inoichi then nodded and performed a few hand seals.

Minato closed his eyes, and when he opened them, he realized that he was now in a sewer. "Hokage-sama, Naruto's mind is extremely complicated; you have to find your way on your own. I can't help you from here." Minato could hear Inoichi's voice echoing around him.

He nodded and started walking around the various corridors of the place. For some reason, he felt that he was taking the right path.

Seconds later, he heard whispers. Thus, he hastened his steps.

He arrived at a place where a huge cage was, and in front of said cage Naruto's body was, which was shaking uncontrollably.

He skipped to him, but before he could grab him, huge paws came out from behind the bars.

Minato jumped back while hearing a furious voice, "What are you doing here, you bastard?! Get out of this place immediately or you'll be sorry!"

Minato moved closer and saw Kurama behind the bars. "Kyūbi, it's you. Then that means..."

But he couldn't finish because Kurama growled and yelled, "GET AWAY FROM HERE, BASTARD. YOU HAVE NO RIGHT TO COME TO THIS PLACE OR TRY TO AMEND YOUR MISTAKES. NARUTO ISN'T STUPID, AND UNDERSTAND THIS WELL; HE WILL NEVER COME BACK TO YOU!"

Minato frowned and replied, "Shut up, you damn demon! You're nobody to tell me what to do with my son…"

However, he couldn't continue because Kurama interrupted him again, "HAHAHAHA! Now he is your son? Damn stupid human! Don't make me laugh! You have no idea what Naruto went through because of you! And just by coming here, do you think you can amend your mistakes as if nothing had happened? Go away; you're just wasting your time!"

Minato lowered his head at this, but then he got it up and firmly said, "Well, it doesn't matter! I'll do my best to correct my mistakes; not even you will be able to avoid that. And besides, it's your damn fault! Everything was because of you!"

Kurama chuckled, "My fault? Did I force you to take that stupid decision? But I thank you that you did it. If you hadn't done that, Naruto wouldn't even be half of what he's now."

Minato was about to say something when he saw and heard Naruto complaining and nosebleed.

Minato worried, so he approached him and cleaned some of that blood before looking at Kurama, "Why aren't you helping him? What have you done?!" Minato asked, glaring towards Kurama, who tried to break his cage.

"Worthless human, you better leave this place. I'm losing my patience!" He then sent some of his Chakra at Minato, who opened his eyes in shock as he moved away.

"How is it possible that you still have power?! I took care of extracting all the power that you had!" Kurama ignored this and kept sending more of his chakra towards Minato.

As he dodged that dangerous Chakra, he heard another voice, "Hokage-sama! I'll get you immediately out of there. You've already got the information you needed."

Kurama then saw that Minato's figure vanished from there, so he sighed and then the entire mental landscape returned to be as before.

He approached Naruto and wrapped him up again, "Naruto, you better wake up soon; it seems that you'll have problems." He sighed and began to sleep.

Minato noticed that he reappeared in Naruto's room; he looked back and could see Inoichi with a severe facial expression, "What will you do with this information, Hokage-sama?" Inoichi asked looking at Minato, who put a chair at Naruto's side as he began to caress his face.

Then he turned his head to look at Inoichi, "Well, I plan to tell Naruto the truth once he wakes up. Besides, I'm sure that this information is already spreading across the village. Tell the ANBU that they have to inform the council members that we'll have a meeting tomorrow afternoon. Inoichi, thanks for your help, you can leave."

Inoichi nodded and replied, "Whenever you like, Hokage-sama, now I'm going to tell my daughter that her… boyfriend is in this state. I'm sure that she won't like the news."

Minato nodded and said, "Don't worry, go and tell your daughter; I don't have any problems if she comes by. Moreover, I should thank her; she gave my son the happiness that I couldn't give." Minato then clenched his fists while a solitary tear ran down his cheek. Then he placed his eyes on Naruto again.

Inoichi nodded and said nothing more. Although he was genuinely surprised by this information, he didn't want to upset his Hokage with questions that could hurt him even more than he already was. Then he left the room to go home.

Meanwhile, Minato began sobbing and cursing himself for what he had done, now all he wanted was that Naruto forgave him and came back with him and Menma.

The Next Day - Streets of Konoha

Menma was heading for a training session with Kakashi, who decided to train his team with much more "cruelty" than before.

He kept walking, noticing that many people around him were throwing him strange looks, as if in sorrow or something like that.

He didn't mind it and kept walking until he heard some people talking about his father. He stealthily approached and listened, "Did you listen to what happened yesterday?" Asked one man to another one.

"No, what happened?" Replied the other man.

"How is it that you didn't hear the rumors? You're an idiot," replied the other one.

"Hey, don't call me that! I can't be aware of everything that happens in the village; I have more important things to do than hear the gossip. Anyway, what happened?"

"Listen to this, yesterday, Yondaime-sama entered furiously in the hospital demanding that they provide help to someone. Guess who," replied the man.

"I don't know; who was it?" Just then several people began to inch closer to listen since many of them didn't know anything about it.

"You know, 'that boy.'" After that, everyone thought about it.

However after a few seconds, they understood it, and one of them shouted, "Why would Yondaime-sama want to help the demon? That demon should be dead."

The gossiper shook his head and answered, "No, you don't know what really happened. Yondaime-sama said that he is...his son."

After he had said this statement, they opened their eyes in shock, just like Menma, who almost fell from his hiding place, "Whaaat?!" several people exclaimed.

The man nodded and stated, "It's the truth. The medics heard that from Yondaime-sama; they said he was angry and that he was about to kill several medics because they didn't provide medical care for Naruto-san. Besides that, he looked apprehensive about his condition."

Everyone was surprised again, and one person in the crowd shouted, "But why didn't we know about this? Why did Yondaime-sama never say that he was his son?" Everyone nodded at that statement.

"Well, as I've heard, Yondaime-sama assigned Naruto-san a mission to see our behavior. Yondaime-sama wanted to know how people would behave when they knew that a villager had the Kyūbi sealed within." Obviously, that wasn't true, but rumors always appeared out of nowhere.

An old woman asked, "So, was it a test? Did Yondaime-sama just want to know our behavior? How would we react in such a situation?"

The man nodded and replied, "Yes, it was a test, and I think Yondaime-sama is disappointed with us. He hasn't left the hospital since yesterday. According to what I've heard, Naruto-san was on a very dangerous mission outside the village. And he returned quite wounded, and after that, he went into a coma. Doctors believe that he will never wake up again."

Many covered their mouths while some of them fell to the ground, hitting it with their fists. "How couldn't we realize this before? He's identical to Yondaime-sama, and he's obviously the brother of Menma-sama. We were so stupid," one of the men on the ground stated.

An elderly woman approached him and stated, "I have always thought it was strange. I have always believed that he had some kind of relationship with the Hokage's family. That was one of the reasons I never said anything against him. I always had my suspicions."

Meanwhile, Menma just sat there in silence without moving or saying anything. But then he dashed towards the hospital; he needed some answers, and he could only get them from his father.

He ran as fast as he could and in a few minutes, he arrived at the hospital, which several ANBU surrounded while the civilians tried to enter to apologize to the Yondaime and his son.

Menma jumped to the hospital roof and entered the building. He went to the receptionist and asked with fatigue, "Where is... Where's Naruto's room?"

The receptionist, seeing the Yondaime's son, replied, "Menma-sama, your brother's room is 301. But I suggest you to..." but before she could finish, Menma quickly ran to the room.

He walked upstairs, and when he was in front of the door, he opened it abruptly, just to see his father looking out the window. "Oto-san, we need to talk."

Minato then turned around, and Menma could see that his eyes were swollen from crying.

Minato then sighed, "I know; Menma...we have much to talk about. Take a seat. I will tell you the whole truth of the Kyūbi's incident; you have a lot to know about that day."

Menma's eyes opened a little as he took a seat. He turned his head slightly and looked at Naruto's body, and once again he felt a tightness in his chest when seeing Naruto in such a way.

Perhaps that was why he felt the same when he thought Zabuza killed Naruto; it was because he was his brother.

Afterward, he shook his head to pay attention to his father, who wiped his eyes a little bit before sighing, "Menma, you're the true Jinchūriki of the Village."

Notes:

Hehehe, sorry for the cliffhanger. :P

Well, chapter finished. Naruto had his mission in Uzu; there he saw many things. And he got something important.

The Apple of Eden is an object of the 'Assassin's Creed' game; it's a very powerful artifact.

It was something crazy. Initially, I didn't even thought about it. Not even when I was writing the chapter.

It came to my mind when I was trying to give a cool name to the sphere that Naruto touched and then I remembered the Apple of Eden.

I want to say that I don't think that Naruto will use that artifact too much, but it will be important in the story.

He will use the Apple to show the power of Uzushiogakure and once Naruto gets out of his coma, his new goal will be to rebuild Uzu.

About Naruto's coma, when he touched the artifact, all the information the Uzumaki's stored there (seals, secrets, etc.), were transferred to Naruto, and it was so much information that caused him to go into that state.

Minato took advantage of the weakened state of Naruto to enter in his mind since perhaps this would be his only chance to do it. In the next chapter, Minato will tell the whole truth to Menma, and the secret that Naruto is Minato's son will expand at an impressive rate, not only in the village but also across the world.

Minato is someone famous, and news like that doesn't remain hidden for long.

I think Kurama's reaction was understandable; he doesn't want Minato near Naruto after all that he caused him.

This won't be an Assassin's Creed crossover.

That should be all, if you have any questions, don't hesitate to ask them in the reviews.

Farewell and until the next time.

Chapter Text

Person talking, "It could be."

Person thinking, "I don't like this idea."

Demon speaking / Invocation talking, "No doubt you are someone to be reckoned with."

Demon thinking / Invocation thinking, "His heart is dark!"

Disclaimer: I do not own Naruto, Masashi Kishimoto does.

Chapter 12

Konohagakure no Sato (at an unknown location) - A Few Hours Before

"That's what happened, Danzō-sama," Sai informed, kneeling before Danzō, who had a blank expression.

"And do you think that Naruto has some attachment to that woman? How are you sure?" Danzō asked.

Sai raised his glance and replied as he pulled a book out from his ninja bag. "Well, I've noticed that Naruto-senpai did many things that this book says. It says that people who have a relationship spend the night together to have lots of sex. I don't know much about that, but I realized that they did that since I could hear things like 'Naruto-kun, you are the best' or 'Naruto-kun, keep it up' or..." Sai couldn't finish because Danzō hit the floor with his cane.

"Enough! I don't care about those things, what I do care is to know what Oni-kun took in Uzu, and what left him in the state in which he is now. I'm sure they'll soon realize that he's in the hospital. You should have brought him here, but that doesn't matter anymore. Sai, I want you to say the following to any available squad; tell them to go to Nami no Kuni immediately. Their mission is to capture this woman and keep her in captivity until we can take advantage of her once Oni wakes up. You won't be on this mission, remember that you will be Oni's new teammate."

Sai nodded and disappeared from there in a swirl of ink.

Meanwhile, Danzō left the room as he thought, "What did you find there, Naruto-kun? I just hope that it wasn't the Uzumaki Apple. Shodaime-sama and Tobirama-sensei told us about the capabilities of that artifact and the story behind it, besides that they could never find it because of the defenses in Uzu. If so, it would be best to put you under my Genjutsu once and for all, so you don't spoil my plans. The best part would be that I'll also have that artifact in my possession and with something like that, nobody will oppose to Konoha or me."

After those thoughts, Danzō then left the room to continue his affairs.

Hospital - Present

"Menma, you're the real Jinchūriki of the Village," Minato stated.

Menma opened his eyes in shock; he couldn't believe it.

Minato knew that this was a delicate issue, so he had already put the privacy seal in the room; he didn't want anyone to know about something like this.

Minato then noticed Menma's expression and could see that he didn't leave his troubled state yet. He approached him, placed a hand on his shoulder and asked, "Menma, are you okay?"

Menma looked up, seeing the sad expression on his face. He shook his head to disperse the fog in his mind and exclaimed, getting angry, "Oto-san, you must be kidding me!"

Minato sighed and shook his head, "I'm not lying, Menma. You're the real Jinchūriki of the Village; it's a very well-kept secret, very few people know about this," Minato replied, expecting a reaction from his son.

Menma then turned his head and looked at Naruto, who still showed no signs of improvement. "But you always told me that Naruto is the one who has the Kyūbi, in addition to all those things you said about him."

Minato lowered his head as he clenched his fists. After a few seconds, he raised it and Menma could see that his eyes were glassy, but before he could say anything else, Minato spoke. "Well, I didn't lie. Naruto does have the Kyūbi inside him. Well, just his consciousness, but you're the one with all the Kyūbi's power; it was the only thing I could think of that night. As for the other..."

Minato stopped there while a small tear ran down his cheek. "It was the biggest mistake I've made in my life. It's something that is causing a lot of pain in my heart; I know what I did doesn't deserve forgiveness. But I still want him to forgive me, what I did was due to an unfounded fear. Menma, although I think you already know it, Naruto is your twin brother."

Menma was furious, but in the end, he let out a bitter laugh and replied, "You know, Oto-san? Now that you mention it, I realize how stupid I've been all my life. Well, not just me, but all the people in this village. How couldn't we see something as obvious as this?" Menma then rose up from his seat and approached Naruto to have a better look.

Menma frowned and asked, "But what happened to him? Naruto is someone very strong; I don't think anyone could leave him in this state. Do you know what happened, Oto-san?

Minato shook his head and answered, "No...I don't know; my ANBU found him at the entrance of the hospital in this state. I don't understand what happened to him; he should have been on a mission, but he mysteriously arrived here, it's almost like..." And Minato stopped there, opening his eyes significantly.

Menma realized this; he looked with concern to his father and asked, "What happened, Oto-san? Do you know who left him like this?"

Meanwhile, Minato was thinking of a person, with he would have to talk to later. He then shook his head, pushing those thoughts away and responded, "No...It's something else. But Menma let me ask you something. Are not you angry because I hid this from you?"

Menma turned around and replied, "Of course I'm mad at you, Oto-san, and also very disappointed." Hearing that, Minato was even sadder and was about to say something when Menma continued, "But...I can't lecture you; I should have been a little smarter. If I didn't let you influence me so easily, maybe I would have realized this long ago."

Menma then looked back at Naruto, smiled and continued talking, "Well, now I have a real brother. Although I always saw Kakashi-nii like my brother, I always felt that I needed a real one. And now I have one. Oto-san, Naruto is our family, and he should be with us."

When Minato heard this, he smiled and went to Menma, hugging him strongly. "I'll make sure of that, Menma. Once he wakes up, I'll apologize for everything I did. I'll make sure he returns to our family." Minato stated, unable to hold back the tears.

Menma smiled at his father, but then he frowned, "But, Oto-san, how will you do that? On the last mission I had with him, I realized that he doesn't like people who mess with him. How do you think he'll react when he hears this?"

Minato just sighed; he couldn't say anything more because someone knocked on the room's door.

Minato pulled down the privacy seals, walked to the door and opened it, there he saw that three doctors were waiting at the door, one of them said, "Excuse us for interrupting you, Hokage-sama, but we are here to check the status of Naruto-san. Besides, we must clean him and change his clothes. It's just protocol."

Minato nodded and gave way to the doctors, who upon entering, headed towards Naruto. One of them started to examine him with his medical jutsu while the others prepared themselves to clean him.

A few minutes later, the doctor, who was checking on Naruto, shook his head and sighed.

Minato approached him and asked, "Do you already know what he has? Will he be okay?"

The doctor shook his head and answered, "I'm sorry, Hokage-sama, but my Medical Ninjutsu isn't working on Naruto-san. The only thing I can say is that his brain functions are minimal, and I can't see any improving. I'm sorry Hokage-sama, but I think that Naruto-san won't wake up. And if he does, he won't be the same as before."

Minato and Menma felt a stab in their hearts, and Minato quickly went to the man, grabbed him tightly by his shoulders and shouted, "That can't be possible! You're the best medics in Konoha! You must find a way to heal him."

The medic could feel a slight amount of killing intent, which made him start to sweat, and he replied as quickly as he could, "H-Hokage-sama, I understand your concern. However, if our Medical Ninjutsu doesn't work, we can do little. Only time will tell if Naruto-san can recover. I-I'm sorry."

Minato growled but let him go as he exclaimed, "There has to be someone who can help him!"

The doctor sighed in relief and answered, "Maybe Tsunade-sama, but we haven't seen her since..." But the doctor couldn't finish because Minato announced, "That's it! Tsunade can treat him. Menma, you can stay here or return home; I have to go to a meeting with the council."

Before he could hear Menma's answer, Minato had disappeared from the hospital in a yellow flash.

Menma sighed and observed the medics cleaning his brother. "My brother..." Menma thought, and instantly a smile appeared on his face.

Gates of the Village

"Mendokuse, this mission was boring. I'd have preferred to stay here and watch the clouds instead of going on that annoying mission." Shikamaru stated tiredly in his words.

Team 10 had gone on an escort mission.

Ino sighed, "For once I agree with you, Shika. Anyways, we came back at last. I just want to go home and take a good shower." Everyone nodded at this.

Then they approached the guard post; there were the same guards; Kotetsu and Izumo, one of them had a bored expression on his face while the other one had an attentive look.

Asuma approached them, putting a scroll in front of them. "Hello," he said.

Izumo smiled and asked, "Oh, Asuma. How was your mission?"

Before Asuma could answer, all his Genin said in unison, "Boring."

Asuma smiled and then asked, "Anyway, anything interesting you wish to share?"

Izumo and Kotetsu got serious, which Asuma found strange since they never were that serious. "Yes, something really interesting happened. If you take a walk around the village, I'm sure that you'll find out what it is," Izumo replied with a straight face.

"Okay… Well, thank you very much. Now we're going to Hokage-sama's office," Asuma stated.

After that, he motioned for his Genin to follow him, but before they could leave, Kotetsu spoke, "Well, that's not going to be possible. Hokage-sama won't be able to receive you."

"Why?" Asuma asked, turning around again.

Izumo and Kotetsu looked at each other and then nodded. "Well, the ANBU found Naruto at the hospital's entrance yesterday, and he seemed to be seriously hurt," Kotetsu replied.

Ino approached and asked, more like demanded, "What did you just say?!"

Izumo sighed and responded, "As you've heard, we don't know what happened, but all I know is that he's in a severe condition."

Ino was about to say something, but Asuma spoke again, "And what does Hokage-sama have to do with this?"

"Well, Hokage-sama has everything to do with it. This is what happened while you were out. Hokage-sama recognized Naruto as his son." After saying this, Asuma and Chouji's jaws dropped.

Ino worried; she already knew it, but she was more concerned about other people's reactions, and she wanted to know what happened to Naruto.

Shikamaru sighed and stated, "Mendokuse, it seems that I was right."

Chouji left his state of stupefaction and asked, "Did you know about this, Shika? Why did you never say anything?"

Shikamaru replied, "Because it was very troublesome. Besides, I didn't know how Menma would react to something like that. And I also thought that Hokage-sama never said that for some reason. It was very obvious that Naruto had some relationship with Menma's family, the similarities were always in sight. If the people of the village didn't realize this, it was because they hated Naruto due to the Kyūbi."

Chouji nodded and said no more.

Asuma then left his shocked state and asked, "Are you sure this information is correct? Are you sure it's not a rumor?"

Izumo and Kotetsu shook their heads, and Kotetsu answered, "No, there's more. Hokage-sama spent the whole night in the hospital with Naruto; they say that he nearly killed several medics because they didn't want to treat him."

Asuma sighed and tried to say something more, but he couldn't because he saw Ino running towards the village. "Ino, where are you going?!" Asuma shouted.

Ino turned her head slightly and replied, "You know where I'm going, Sensei! You don't even have to ask!"

Asuma sighed, pulled out a cigarette, lit it and started smoking it.

Izumo asked out of curiosity, "What happened? She was like this since we said Naruto's name."

Shikamaru just said, "Troublesome," as he crossed his hands behind his head.

Asuma replied nothing and continued smoking as he began walking towards the Hokage's Tower along with Shikamaru.

Chouji was the one who answered. "Naruto's girlfriend." With that said, Chouji also followed them.

"So, a couple; huh?" Kotetsu stated.

Izumo sighed and answered, "They said so..."

And they said nothing more; they just stood there, quietly waiting for another Team or visitors.

Near the Department of Interrogation and Torture

Anko and Haku were about to arrive at the Department of I&T for Haku's daily session.

Haku was concerned because Naruto didn't return home yesterday, so she decided to ask Anko about it.

"Anko-san, do you know where Naruto-kun went? Naruto-kun told me he would go on a short mission, and that he would be back yesterday. But he didn't return. I'm worried; I have a bad feeling."

Anko turned her head slightly and replied, "Don't worry, I know Naruto-kun very well; he can take care of himself. I'm sure nothing bad will happen to him."

Haku shook her head at her explanation and retorted, "No, it isn't that. I know he can take care of himself. He already made it clear when he defeated Zabuza-san, but I feel that something terrible has happened him."

"Come on, come on. Don't be so worried; he must be having quality time with your other little friends, and that's why you haven't seen him yet. Or do you also want to have some quality time with Naruto-kun?" Anko replied shamelessly.

Haku blushed a lot at her words, as she thought how it would be like to have 'quality time' with Naruto.

They reached their destination and walked through a few corridors, stopping in front of a door.

Anko opened it and could see Ibiki standing there with a blank expression. "Oh, what are you doing here, Ibiki? I thought you were interrogating some poor bastards. It's strange to see you in the session of my cute Genin." Anko asked, a little surprised to see him there.

Ibiki said nothing. Instead, he looked at Haku, who felt a little intimidated by the look that he was giving her.

He motioned for her to come closer as he said, "Haku-san, it's good to have you here. Sit here; we need to talk."

Haku nodded and went to the seat, but Anko stopped her and asked, "Hey, wait, Ibiki. What do you have in mind? You only use that tone when you're going to interrogate someone. Tell me, what's going on?"

Ibiki looked at her and answered, "It's not that. I just want to talk about her future in the village since Naruto can't be her protector anymore."

Anko and Haku were surprised to hear this; Haku became very concerned because she believed that Naruto got bored of her, and that made her feel a great sadness.

Anko thought it was strange because Naruto had made it clear that he would always help her.

Therefore, she decided to ask before Haku could misunderstand the conversation. "What do you mean, Ibiki? Naruto-kun would never do that; tell me what's going on."

Ibiki then said again, "Sit down… both of you." Anko then released Haku, who quickly took one of the chairs in the room, but Anko stayed standing with crossed arms.

Seeing that, Ibiki sighed, and then he shook his head.

He looked at Haku, who had a sad expression, so he continued. "It seems that you have misinterpreted my words. Naruto didn't say that he didn't want to be your protector anymore. What happened was that Naruto is 'indisposed', and that's why he can't continue being your protector."

Haku felt relieved, but then she asked worriedly, "What do you mean with 'indisposed'?"

Anko also got worried, but she said nothing; she just let Ibiki continue.

Ibiki looked at both and stated, "Naruto was found yesterday in front of Konoha's Hospital in critical condition. From what I have heard, he's in a coma and the medics said that he won't wake up."

Anko and Haku's eyes widened in shock; they tried to say something, but they couldn't due to the revelation.

Ibiki patiently waited until one of them talked, but after several seconds, Anko walked away as she took Haku's hand to get her out of the room.

Ibiki exclaimed, "Hey Anko! Wait! Where do you think you're going? I haven't finished talking to her."

Anko stopped at the door; she turned her head and replied, "I have to see that with my own eyes. I'm Naruto-kun's Sensei; I know what he's capable of, and I can't believe he's in the state that you said," she then left the room along with Haku, heading to Konoha's Hospital.

Ibiki when seeing Anko leaving, he mentally smiled as he thought, "Hehe, it seems that Anko found someone who can stand her attitude, I just hope Naruto wakes up soon, or else Anko will discharge her fury in the interrogations. Haha, I will enjoy watching that."

After that, Ibiki walked out to start working.

Konoha's Hospital - 10 Minutes Later

Menma was still in the hospital watching Naruto; the truth was that he was confused.

He was angry because he father didn't tell him that he had a brother and that this brother was Naruto. But hey, he couldn't blame everything on his father, since he also had acted like a jerk. He would be a hypocrite if he put the blame on his father only.

On the other hand, he was happy, happy because he had a brother, even more since it was Naruto.

He thought that he could learn a lot from him, because of what he had seen so far, Naruto was someone completely different to the other Genin of his generation.

He didn't believe what the doctors said.

Menma was sure that Naruto would wake up at some point, and when that happened, he would try to build a friendship with his brother and apologize for his pitiful behavior at the Academy.

However, his father's words still surprised him. He was the true Jinchūriki of the Village and not Naruto, another reason to apologize because he had to go through all that abuse for something that he didn't have inside.

He also knew that the rumors that said that his father gave him a 'mission' was a lie, and he guessed that someone who heard the facts wrong initiated it.

Menma then looked at Naruto; there was still a doctor in the room. He was monitoring Naruto's vital signs, which still looked pretty bad.

Menma sighed, he got up from his seat and said, "Doctor-san, please take good care of my Nii-san." After saying that, Menma's eyes opened little because he called Naruto 'his brother' inadvertently.

He smiled a little, but then he shook his head and looked at the doctor, who turned around to him. "I have to train with my team, I'm sure that they've been waiting for me for a while," Menma stated.

The doctor nodded and replied, "Don't worry, Menma-sama. Your brother will be in excellent hands. If anything happens, we will inform Hokage-sama immediately. You can go and do your affairs, Menma-sama. As I said, don't worry."

Menma nodded satisfied with the turn of events. He turned around to leave the room but suddenly the door opened abruptly, giving way to four women; Anko, Haku, Ino, and Tenten, along with Neji.

Neji was quiet in comparison to the women who looked quite concerned, except for Anko, who still didn't believe that Naruto was in the condition that she had heard from Ibiki.

Menma looked at Neji strangely, since he didn't know that he had some friendship with Naruto.

Neji noticed the look that Menma was giving him, but he ignored him and looked around the room since he couldn't see well because Menma was covering the entrance. Menma realized this and stepped back.

By doing so, Ino and Tenten quickly entered the room, followed by Anko, Haku, and Neji, who slowly came in.

Since Ino and Tenten came in first, they confirmed that Naruto was indeed comatose in bed.

Their eyes widened and were about to stand beside Naruto when the doctor stopped them and stated, "Sorry, but these are not visiting hours. Naruto-san is in a very delicate state, and we can't allow this amount of people in this room. Therefore, I will kindly ask you to leave."

Ino and Tenten became angry. "You don't understand, we're friends of Naruto-kun, and we're here to see him. You can't deny us that." Ino refuted with anger in her words.

Ino didn't say that she was Naruto's girlfriend since she didn't want that the people harassed her just for being the girlfriend of "the Hokage's lost son."

No, she didn't want that, plus she knew that Naruto wouldn't like that, and neither would she.

Tenten nodded and added, "She's right, we're his friends, you can't do this." After saying this, Anko also approached the bed along with Neji, who kept looking at Naruto. He thought that this issue was strange.

Since that mission in Kawa no Kuni, he had seen Naruto as someone strong. And after his conversation and the successful infiltration into the Hyūga compound, he started seeing Naruto as someone powerful and capable of doing almost everything.

That was the reason he thought it was weird. He knew that Naruto would never let down his guard, and if someone did this to him, it must have been someone very powerful. However, he didn't believe that someone had done something to him since he couldn't see signs of fighting or something like that. Therefore, he assumed that his condition was due to something else, which he would ask when he recovered.

Just then, Neji heard the doctor speaking, "I understand what you say, but as I said, Naruto-san is in a delicate state. Besides, it wouldn't be good for Naruto-san that so many people be in his room. So, if you want to visit him later, you can go to the reception desk and make an appointment. Now do me a favor and leave; I still have work to do."

All the girls were angry at this, especially Anko. From the moment she saw Naruto in that bed, she was automatically worried, but she said nothing and just kept her composure, enduring the doctor's words.

She was his sensei and lover; she could visit him whenever she wanted, a stupid doctor couldn't prevent her from that.

However, her patience finally snapped at the doctor's words. That was why she took a step forward and was about to say something when they all heard Menma speaking.

"Doctor-san, what's your name?"

The doctor turned and answered, "My name is Kitō, Menma-sama."

Menma nodded and continued, "Kitō-san, if you don't mind, I'd like that they stay in the room. I see nothing wrong with that, and my Oto-san wouldn't either. I believe that it's now when my Nii-san needs his friends."

"Oh well, if you believe it's okay, I don't think I can say no, Menma-sama," stated the doctor.

Then he turned to the others and saw their dumbfounded expressions.

He didn't understand it at first, but when Kito did, he stated, "Oh?! Did you not know? Naruto-san is the son of Hokage-sama."

The news was already spreading through the village, so he thought there was nothing wrong with telling them.

That pulled them out of their states and Ino asked quite surprised. "Did you just call Naruto-kun 'Nii-san'?"

Menma nodded, "Yes, my Oto-san told me the truth; Naruto is my brother."

Ino narrowed her eyes at his confession, with her voice crackling with slight rage, "Really? Now is he your brother? Did you accept him so quickly after what you said about him in the academy?" She thought Menma was a hypocrite after everything he said and did to Naruto in the Academy.

Menma sighed and answered, "You're right, I'm a hypocrite, and I know what I did was wrong. So I'll apologize to my Nii-san once he wakes up."

Ino disagreed again, and she was about to say something else when everyone heard Neji's voice. "Kitō-san, what is the status of Naruto-san?" Neji asked, causing everyone who had just arrived to calm down and wait for the doctor's response.

Kitō took some papers and read them before answering, "Naruto-san's condition is delicate. I did some studies, and I detected higher brain functions; it seems that it's processing a lot of information, but suddenly his brain stops working abruptly. It's something strange. Naruto-san doesn't show any external damage, and the problem is in his brain. It seems that someone overloaded his brain in some way, and also used some Jutsu so that Medical Ninjutsu can't heal him. It's strange."

Neji nodded, satisfied with the response while the girls were even more worried, and Menma asked out of curiosity, "Why didn't you tell that to my Oto-san?"

Kitō scratched his head and replied shamefaced, "Sorry, Menma-sama but your father left before I could give him this new information. But once he returns, I will tell him." Menma nodded.

Haku was still uneasy and asked, "But will he be okay?" The truth was that she knew little about medical issues, all she wanted to know was if Naruto would get well.

All of them looked at Kitō intently, waiting for a favorable response.

Kitō sighed before responding, "Sorry, Miss..." "Haku," Haku supplied, answering the unspoken question of Kitō, who nodded and continued. "I'm sorry, Haku-san, but we believe that Naruto-san won't wake up again. His state is severe. He can't even breathe on his own; he does it with the ventilator."

Everyone opened their eyes in shock; they couldn't believe it. Would Naruto never wake up? It should be a joke. That was why Anko stepped forward and grabbed the neck of the doctor's coat strongly as she said, "What does that mean? You're a damn doctor! I refuse to believe that, and for your own good, I suggest you to find a way to make him wake up." Anko stated angrily, pulling some snakes out from her sleeve.

Kitō turned pale since he knew about Anko and her reputation in the village. Hence, he quickly objected, "W-wait, w-wait Anko-san. Hokage-sama said he would bring Tsunade-sama to treat Naruto-san, and I'm sure she will find a way to heal Naruto-san." Kitō spoke hastily and with much fear because the snakes were on his body.

Anko calmed down a bit; she let him go and withdrew her snakes while stating, "That's better."

Kitō sighed in relief; he tried to get up, but he couldn't because someone jumped over him, throwing him to the floor again.

He looked up and saw Tenten. "Will Tsunade-sama come to take care of Naruto-kun personally? Now I'm sure that Naruto-kun will get well!" Tenten exclaimed with stars in her eyes; she really admired Tsunade, after all.

Kitō pushed Tenten aside, stood up, dusted off his clothes, and answered, "It could be, Hokage-sama said he would call her to heal Naruto-san, so that will be up to him." Tenten nodded and returned with the others.

Haku had heard a little bit about the Legendary Sannin, but what she knew was that Tsunade was the best Medical ninja of the Elemental Nations, and maybe she could help Naruto.

She didn't know how long it would take Naruto to awaken, but what she did know was that she would have to train hard and become stronger for the time when he woke up.

She didn't want to be a burden in the future; Naruto had already made clear the difference of levels between them, and she would have to train hard if she wanted to help Naruto in his plans for the future. Besides, she would have to adapt herself to the Kubikiribōcho, and she was sure that Anko could help her with that.

Ino was truly sad, she couldn't deny it, but she was sure that Naruto would wake up. Although she didn't know much about her, she knew that Tsunade was a famous Kunoichi due to her capabilities as a physician.

If she would help Naruto, then his recovery would be faster. The Hokage would just have to do things right for Naruto at least this time; that was what she thought.

Neji looked impassively. Yes, he was also worried; Naruto was the only person he could trust, and to be honest, he wanted Naruto to recover.

He didn't want that because Naruto could get the seal off his head, but because he considered Naruto as one of his friends.

Naruto had told him the truth; the seal removal was just a bonus.

Anko had mixed feelings; she was anxious because he was in a weakened condition.

She was sure that the Hokage had entered into his mind, and that was the reason behind the buzz that he was his son.

Why else would he tell the brat that Naruto was his brother? Yes, she was sure. Besides, nothing would prevent him from entering into his mind again, and if so, Naruto's plans could be compromised.

Besides that, she was angry, angry with Naruto because he didn't tell her anything. He didn't say he would leave on a mission; she just knew it because Haku told her.

That made her angry but also guilty. She had been a bit distanced from Naruto since the day they had returned from Nami no Kuni, just because they weren't having sex.

If she hadn't done that, maybe Naruto would have told her where he would go, and she would have been able to offer her help. Therefore, he wouldn't be in this condition.

Menma couldn't help smiling; his brother had friends who cared about him. He would do his best to convince Naruto to return with them and be the family that they should have been.

However, now he wouldn't demand anything; he didn't want to say anything that could create more distances between them.

Menma then shook his head and said, "Kitō-san, if something happens, please tell my father. I have to go to the training session."

He looked at the others, who had approached Naruto and uttered, "Bye, guys. Take care of my Nii-san."

Menma heard some noises in agreement, so he retired without saying anything else.

After Menma had left, Neji also went to the door and said, "I have to go too, see you later."

He stopped when he heard Tenten speaking. "Neji, wait. Why are you leaving so soon? Gai-sensei gave us permission to come here." Tenten asked.

Neji turned around and replied, "I have to leave, remember that we can't leave Lee alone, that idiot could kill himself at any time thanks to the weight he's carrying. Although Gai-sensei is with him, one more person never hurts."

Tenten only nodded at his explanation; Lee had changed a lot since the day when Karashi died. But hey, Lee knew what he was facing when he decided to become a Ninja.

Since he heard nothing more, he headed to the field where they used to train. He just wanted them to be there because he didn't want to go looking for them.

After a few moments, Kitō also withdrew, but not before saying he would return in a few hours, and he asked if some of them could look after Naruto.

They all volunteered, and Kitō couldn't say no. He headed for the Hokage Tower to give the new information to Minato.

Then the girls started talking about Naruto and everything they would do once he woke up.

Some topics weren't "soft", and Haku blushed because of it.

Meanwhile - Council Chamber

All the prominent clans and the most prestigious merchants of the village were in the room, waiting for the arrival of their Hokage, who suddenly appeared in a yellow flash.

He sat in his usual seat, looked at everyone present and said, "I think most of you already know it, so I'll be clear...Naruto is my son."

After saying this, almost everyone gasped, except for some people who already assumed this or already knew it.

Minato continued, "As you heard, Naruto's full name is: Naruto Namikaze Uzumaki."

Minato waited until someone said something about it, and he didn't have to wait long.

"Hokage-sama! That can't be possible! There has to be an explanation! That demon can't have any kind of relationship with you! Probably he used his demonic powers to make you believe that! There has to be a mistake!" Exclaimed a man of the civilian council.

Everyone had heard the rumors, and they expected them to be just that, rumors.

Minato became angry, but he did nothing. That behavior was his fault, so he couldn't reprimand them for making those comments.

What he would have to do from now on was to change that mindset, even if he had to do it by force. "No, there's no mistake, Naruto is my son, and I hope that you agree with this. Once he wakes up, he'll live with me and will be the heir of my family." Minato stated; the truth was that he wasn't too sure about that. He would have to convince Naruto to forgive him, which would be difficult, but he would do his best to make that happen.

Again, there were several gestures of disapproval in a significant part of the civilian council, and before anyone could heat the matters, Shibi Aburame spoke. "Hokage-sama, I wonder what is the reason for your sudden change of opinion. Something must have happened yesterday to make you change your mind," the Aburame clan leader spoke monotonously.

Minato sighed and stated, "What I'm about to say is something that I hid from all of you. So please, don't interrupt me."

Minato looked at the others and saw them nodding.

Then he glanced at Hiruzen, who gave him the nod in agreement.

Minato continued, "The Kyūbi attack was not something natural as the claims say. That day, a man attacked the village, and that man was controlling the Kyūbi. I fought against him; I defeated him, and I managed to remove the control of the Kyūbi from him. After that, the mysterious man withdrew, but he promised that he would return to take the control of the Kyūbi again."

Minato then paused and looked at the expressions on their faces, many of them had astonished looks while others kept calm. As they promised, nobody said anything.

Minato sighed again, "Everything started there. Most of you already know that the Kyūbi is a being composed of Chakra only, and nobody can kill him because of that. If someone tries it, he will revive afterward, and that would have been something dangerous because that man knew how to control the Kyūbi. If he controlled the Kyūbi again, it would mean the end of Konoha. I thought that that day, and I believed that the only solution was to seal the Kyūbi again. But there were some problems. First, almost nobody can withstand all the power of the Kyūbi because he would try to recover his chakra and would quickly corrupt his Jinchūriki. And the other thing was that I needed a newborn since babies don't develop their chakra networks yet. And only one thing came to my mind that day." Minato made another break so that everyone could process his words.

Most people began to understand where this was going, "I took my two sons. Menma and Naruto. They're twins; they were similar that night, but something happened after the sealing process, and it was then when I made a great mistake. I took my two children and Kushina to the place where the Kyūbi was, to perform the sealing process. That night, I had planned to die, but something else happened. I'm not sure what it was, but I wasn't the one who died. It was Kushina; she took my place. But I think it was also my fault for trusting in something which I didn't have much knowledge in."

The fact that Minato had planned to sacrifice himself that day had surprised them, but they didn't understand why. Thus, they continued listening attentively; the story was getting interesting and revealing.

"As I said, it was impossible for almost anyone to retain the full power of the Kyūbi, so I did something that I thought it would work. I summoned the Shinigami, and by doing so, my life already belonged to him, and once we had completed our deal, he should have taken my soul, but it didn't happen. I didn't know that something would happen to Kushina, so I just continued with our deal. The Shinigami had to remove all the power from the Kyūbi and seal it inside of Menma while I sealed his consciousness inside Naruto with a special seal. But after that, something happened; Naruto suffered some changes, changes that are now visible. His red hair, his elongated fangs, and those whisker marks. I thought that the Kyūbi took possession of Naruto. Maybe if I analyzed things carefully, Naruto wouldn't have to suffer because of me. Sandaime-sama, if I had paid you attention that day, none of this would have happened." Minato said looking at Hiruzen. Again, everyone was surprised; they didn't know that Minato did that just to save their village.

Hiruzen had heard the whole story with great consideration, many details were new to him, but he knew almost everything. So when he heard being appointed by Minato, he wasn't surprised.

He took a puff on his pipe and replied, "You're right, Hokage-sama. You were really stubborn that day, but I see that you finally came to your senses. Naruto-kun is someone cold for what I could see, but I'm sure the reason of that is because he has never known the love of parents, so it's up to you to fix that, Hokage-sama." Hiruzen finished, releasing the smoke.

Minato nodded at his suggestion; it was certainly something that he would do once Naruto woke up.

He then sat back and just then, he heard someone speaking. "Excuse me, Hokage-sama, the story you just told us was fascinating and also revealing. But I wonder, how did you realize that Naruto wasn't just an incarnation of the Kyūbi? What made you change your mind?" Someone of the civilian council asked, many nodded and waited for Minato's answer.

Minato looked at Inoichi, and he quickly understood it, "I can explain that." Inoichi stated, drawing the attention of everyone.

"Let me guess, you went into Naruto's mind, am I wrong?" Shikaku asked from his place. For the first time, he was paying attention to these meetings, he had always found them annoying, but this time, it was the exception.

Inoichi smiled and nodded, "You are quite perceptive, as always. However, you're partly right. Yesterday, Hokage-sama called me to enter into Naruto's mind since he was in a state, let's say it, favorable for us. Although you may not know it, Naruto has amazing mental barriers. Even in his state it was hard for me to make Hokage-sama enter into his mind. I couldn't accompany him because if I did, I would have wasted all my chakra. However, I could hear and see everything that happened there, and let me tell you that Naruto isn't the Kyūbi's incarnation; I saw the Kyūbi behind a cage inside Naruto's mind. Furthermore, there wasn't any sign that he was controlling him or attempting to."

Then Hiashi spoke, "Are you sure that it wasn't due to his weakened state? Perhaps, the Kyūbi lost control of his body because Naruto is now in a coma, and for that reason, he can't control his movements."

Minato shook his head and answered, "No, that's not possible. Not with the seal that Naruto has on his body, as I said, it's special. That seal wouldn't allow the Kyūbi to control Naruto completely; that would only happen if Naruto released the full power of the Kyūbi. But that's not possible since Naruto doesn't possess any of his Chakra. That confirmed my theories. Naruto isn't the Kyūbi. He's my son." Minato ended.

Almost all the Council members changed their mind after hearing the story. They didn't blame their Hokage. It was a mistake, and even the greatest men sometimes made mistakes in their lives.

Someone in the back of the room spoke. "Hokage-sama, what's the current condition of Naruto-kun?"

Minato looked in the direction of the voice, seeing Danzō with his traditional blank expression.

Minato narrowed dangerously; nobody noticed that except for Danzō. Minato shook his head; he would ask for an explanation when everyone left the room. "Naruto is in a very critical condition. According to what the doctors have told me, it's unlikely that he will wake up again."

After saying this, almost everyone in the room opened their eyes with concern, even Danzō because it wouldn't be suitable for his plans.

Minato noticed these reactions and continued, "But don't worry, I know someone who can help him."

Everyone was confused again, and this time, Tsume Inuzuka asked, "Who would be that person who can help your puppy, Hokage-sama?"

Minato smiled at the nickname; he always thought it was funny the way the Inuzuka's called their children.

Minato didn't answer that question; it was another person who suddenly became visible in the room. "That person is Tsunade-hime," Jiraiya replied releasing his camouflage jutsu.

Most of the ninjas and civilians greeted him with a "Jiraiya-sama."

Jiraiya walked across the room and stood next to Minato, who smiled at him and gave him permission to speak. "I think you all are aware of her healing ability. However, you should also know that she left the village for personal reasons. Minato decided that it would be best to bring her back for her to take care of Naruto. I'll take care of that once this meeting is over, I will leave the village to find her and bring her here as soon as possible. Although I'm sure that it'll be quite difficult to persuade her, it involves the life of my godson, and I can't let her whims cost the life of someone who has been through a lot." Jiraiya stated; all nodded waiting for their Hokage say something else.

Minato then looked back at everyone in the room, then he looked at Jiraiya and declared, "Well, you won't have to wait any longer, everyone dismissed."

With that said, everyone rose up and left the room slowly.

Meanwhile, a middle-aged man; stocky and not very tall, was thinking with great concern. "This isn't good, Kyōfu-sama. They might realize about your entire organization if they re-enter into your mind. Let's just hope that that doesn't happen again. I have to report this to Gatō; I'm sure that everyone who has the seal is feeling the same. I must do it quickly before everyone thinks Kyōfu-sama is dying," Kohta thought.

He was a man who had come to Konoha due to Naruto's request. Since yesterday, he had been feeling that the seal on his wrists began burning him, indicating that the leader of the Yakuza was in a situation of extreme risk.

Kohta was a famous man for selling the best jewelry in almost every corner of the Elemental Nations.

However, it was pretty evident that he had dark and dirty dealings with the Yakuza, the reason why he had become so powerful and had achieved a seat in Konoha's Council.

So far, he was the only Yakuza in Konoha, but he had sufficient means to contact the other bases. He had to inform Gatō about all this before things got out of control in the organization.

Danzō also left there without any problems; he also had much to think about, and he hoped that Tsunade returned to the village soon. She must heal his future weapon.

For that reason, he would send several of his squads to find her; they would have to bring her to Konoha, even by force. Little did he know that a man with blond hair would visit his base and complicate his movements even more.

Nami no Kuni – Tazuna's House.

Tsunami was currently thinking worried in the living room. When Tsunami had awakened the day before, she thought Naruto was still there because she had seen him in her bed.

Nevertheless, he had informed her that he was just a clone since the original left because he had something else to do.

She saw nothing unusual about that, so she enjoyed her day with Naruto's clone, like talking and walking around with him.

Inari was with them, and she could see that Naruto had already accepted that Inari called him Oto-san.

Most of the village people laughed at that, but they weren't mocking since everyone respected Naruto, the new hero of Nami.

Nonetheless, after a few minutes of walking through the village, she had seen that Naruto's clone began to sweat and lose his color.

She had worried a bit, but then she remembered that it was just a clone, and he would possibly just disappear. Therefore, she had asked him what about it.

Flashback - One Day Before

"What's wrong, Naruto-kun? Are you about to disappear? I wanted to spend more time with you." Tsunami spoke a little saddened because Naruto would leave, and she would have to wait for him to come back again.

Inari, who was also with them, looked with concern at his 'new' Oto-san, "Oto-san, please stay longer, I still want to introduce you to my friends." Inari pleaded, waiting and thinking that this would make Naruto stay a little longer.

Naruto's clone had seen much of what the original Naruto had witnessed, since he had activated his Rinnegan and unconsciously had shared what he had seen with him.

The clone felt increasingly weaker since that moment, and when he felt that he was about to disappear, he looked at Tsunami and weakly said, "N-No, s-som-mething b-bad h-has-s happ-pened, T-Tsunami-chan. *Gasp* I-I c-can f-feel t-that something serious-s has h-ha-appened t-to the orig-ginal. *Gasp* I'm a-about t-to disappear. *Gasp* T-take c-care you t-two, we'll meet a-again." And then the clone disappeared in a puff of smoke, leaving Tsunami and Inari quite concerned.

Flashback End

Tsunami then sighed and stood up. She had much to do today, and soon they would move because her father was the new Feudal Lord of Nami, so the villagers had unanimously decided that they should live in the former mansion of Gatō.

They didn't like the idea at first, but people convinced them in the week in which Naruto hadn't returned yet.

When she was about to go upstairs, she heard someone knocking on the door. "One moment," she shouted before walking toward the door.

She opened it, and there could see three men with black cloaks and one with a white one, everyone with strange masks.

Tsunami instantly realized that these men weren't a good thing, "Who are you? What do you want?" She asked concerned.

She was sure that it wasn't Naruto this time; she knew he wouldn't do something like that again, plus his clone had told her that something serious had happened to the original.

The Root with white coat stepped forward and asked, "Are you Tsunami? Tazuna's daughter?"

Tsunami narrowed her eyes and replied, "No, I'm not, now stop bothering me and go elsewhere." She then started to close the door, but that Root stopped her.

"I hope that you reconsider this, Tsunami-san. For the sake of your son," The white-coated Root stated, showing one unconscious and tied Inari.

Tsunami opened her eyes in shock; she lunged towards the Root, but she couldn't do much because he jumped back.

Tsunami growled and demanded, "Give me my son back! Why are you doing this? Who are you?"

The white dressed Root looked at the other members of his squadron; he motioned, and they all nodded.

Tsunami then saw that Inari had disappeared in a puff of smoke, and before she could say anything, the four Root men surrounded her.

They tied her up while one of the men carried her on his shoulder. She moved as much as she could, she but could do little.

"Sorry, Tsunami-san, but we have our orders, don't make this more difficult. We don't want Naruto-senpai becoming completely crazy with us."

Tsunami stopped moving; she looked to where the voice came from and saw the man with the white coat.

She glared him and stated, "So, are you going to capture me to kill Naruto-kun later? Then kill me, I'll never let you do that to Naruto-kun! I would rather die before you do that. And if you don't want to do it, I'll do it for you!"

After she said this, all the Root members tensed, and the leader stated, "Well, that's something I cannot allow. The best thing would be to put you to sleep for a while until you are useful to us." Then he made a sign to the Root, who had picked Tsunami up.

He lowered her to the ground and prepared to knock her out. However, before he could, he noticed that some plants began to sprout from the ground.

He and his team instinctively jumped out of the area. All of them drew their Tantō as they stood in defensive stances.

"I can't let you take her, the feudal family of Nami no Kuni is under the protection of Kyōfu-sama. I don't like killing people, but if you don't leave this place, I will be forced to use deadly force," stated a voice. They could hear it coming from all directions; they weren't sure of its exact location.

"Who are you? This is Konoha's business; stay away from this," replied the squad leader.

Just then, they could hear the voice speaking again. "This is your last chance, leave this place or I will have to kill you."

"Well that's not possible; we can't leave this place without our objective. We'll have to kill you then. But before we do that, tell me, what's your name?" The leader demanded, and just then, he heard a voice behind him. "You can call me Kitsune."

Notes:

Yo! What's up?! The chapter's done.

I want to clarify this, if you think Menma accepted Naruto too quickly as his brother, I will say this. I made it clear that Menma would be like Naruto of the canon, only less weak and stupid. Nothing more than that, you can get an idea of what I mean.

Well, the episode was a filler one (I guess); I think that in the next chapter, Naruto would be waking up from his coma, so wait for the outcome.

That's all, and until next time!

Chapter Text

Person talking, "It could be."

Person thinking, "I don't like this idea."

Demon speaking / Invocation talking, "No doubt you are someone to be reckoned with."

Demon thinking / Invocation thinking, "His heart is dark."

Disclaimer: I do not own Naruto, Masashi Kishimoto does.

Chapter 13

"Tell me, what's your name?" Asked the squad leader, hearing a voice behind him.

"You can call me Kitsune." The squad leader turned at the voice.

He could see a 175 centimeters tall man; dark brown skin; long brown hair. He wore a fox ANBU mask and a light blue kimono.

Kitsune then proceeded to give a stab at the back of the ANBU leader, but before he could do it, the other two ANBU—who were at his sides—blocked his attack with their Tantō. After that, they jumped back to get away from the attacker.

Kitsune meanwhile grabbed a confused Tsunami, to take her behind.

Tsunami was about to say something, but Kitsune spoke first, "Excuse me, Tsunami-san. But I must stay here. I don't want you to suffer any damage, and Kyōfu-sama takes retaliation with me. Please, return to your home," Kitsune stated, putting Tsunami on the ground and freeing her from her bonds.

Tsunami rubbed her wrists and looked at the strange man while asking, "Who are you?"

Kitsune shook his head and replied, "Like I said, you can call me Kitsune, but only Kyōfu-sama is worthy to know my name; nobody else."

Tsunami sighed in frustration and asked, "Who is that 'Kyōfu' guy? Is he your relative?"

Kitsune shook his head again and answered, "No. We call him that for another reason. But I repeat you, Tsunami-san, for your own safety; return to your home."

Tsunami sighed; she was grateful to him for rescuing her, but she couldn't deny that she was curious to know who he was and who sent him.

She then shook her red kimono. She was using it—after several years of keeping it in her closet—because Naruto recommended it.

She took a half turn to try to get back at her home, but out of nowhere, one of those ANBU appeared before her. He gave her a nasty blow to the stomach, causing her to lose consciousness.

Kitsune cursed himself for letting his guard down and allowing them to harm the woman of his boss. He then realized that the ANBU picked her up and left the area at full speed.

He quickly made several hand seals and shouted, "I won't let you do it! Shokuton: Kōgō (Plant Release: Grab)!" Kitsune put the palm of his hand on the ground, causing a small tremor.

Further ahead, the man was surprised to hear the name of the technique, but he kept running. He knew the others would take care of that annoyance; he only had to complete the mission successfully. Nothing was more important than that.

However, he realized that several plants began to grow around him and approached him at great speed.

He tried to dodge them, but he couldn't because he still had Tsunami in hands.

The plants caught and wrapped him; he quickly pulled a kunai out from his sleeves to cut those stems; they didn't look strong, but they were squeezing a lot.

Nonetheless, before he could cut them, Kitsune had appeared behind him, thrusting his kunai against the spine of the ANBU, who was shocked when seeing his speed.

Kitsune then pulled his kunai out and freed the already dead ANBU. He looked at Tsunami and took her vital signs; he sighed in relief behind his mask as he realized that she was just unconscious.

He picked her up and put her against a tree so she could rest quietly there.

In the distance, the rest of Danzō's men were shocked.

Kitsune had been near them, and when they were about to attack him, they saw Kitsune immersing underground, and he instantly appeared behind their teammate, killing him immediately.

"What the hell was that?" Asked one of the ANBU.

"I don't know. What should we do, Taicho?" Asked the other one.

The leader then pulled a Ninjato out and stated, "You know how the protocol is. It seems that this person has some relation to the Senju; we must capture him alive and then bring him to our base. Danzō-sama will know what to do with him. But if that isn't possible, we'll just kill him."

They all nodded and ran towards Kitsune, who had disappeared again.

The leader was about to order them to stay alert, but it was too late, since Kitsune had appeared behind them, killing his subordinates with an overwhelming ease.

The leader growled and looked at the person who was already in front of him, "Tell me, do you have some relation to the Senju? How are you able to do that?"

Kitsune shook his head and replied, "I shouldn't be saying this, but you're about to die, so it doesn't matter. No, I have no connection with Hashirama-sama or his clan. I'm just a man, blessed with Suiton and Doton. My dream always was to master the Mokuton, and for years, I trained hard to combine my elements. But the most I could get was the Shokuton. It's not very powerful, but it's very effective, and being able to make something like that, leaves me satisfied." Kitsune finished as he stood in a battle stance.

The last ANBU did the same and stated. "Well, that's a shame. I thought you would be useful. But as I could understand, you don't own a Kekkei Genkai; you just have luck."

Kitsune said nothing and just stayed in the same stance, hearing the ANBU continuing. "My name is Araki; take that to your grave."

Araki instantly made hand seals. "Raiton: Jibashi (Lightning Release: Electromagnetic Murder)!" Araki shouted sending a large number of rays to Kitsune; he realized that he wouldn't have time to dodge it.

Therefore, he made a few hand seals and shouted as he put his hands on the ground, "Doton Doryūheki!" Instantly a small wall appeared in front of him; it was not very big, and he only used it to have time to dodge the attack.

Once he was away, the Jutsu destroyed his wall. "You won't escape, Raiton: Jibashi (Lightning Release: Electromagnetic Murder)!" Araki shouted, throwing the same Jutsu at Kitsune, who got tired of playing. He dodged the attack and yelled after finishing some hand seals. "Shokuton: Bakuhatsu Hosoku Shīdo (Element Plant: Seed Explosive Trap)!" Kitsune then spat a few things out of his mouth.

Araki saw that tiny seeds were coming towards him, and if the name of the technique said was true; he wouldn't like to receive that attack. Hence, he thought of a way to counter the attack.

Due to what Kitsune had said, the Shokuton was much weaker compared to the Mokuton. Therefore, a Fire Jutsu should be able to destroy those plants quickly.

He quickly made hand seals, inflated his chest as much as he could and mentally shouted, "Katon: Goukakyuu no Jutsu (Fire Release: Fireball Jutsu)!"

Kitsune mentally cursed when seeing Araki's fireball, which burned the seeds before they reached their goal, but not before causing a massive explosion.

Both of them stepped back to avoid the impact. When the smoke began to settle down, both fighters were visible again.

Kitsune smiled behind his mask. "Well. There's no doubt that you're someone strong. Not for nothing, you're an ANBU, and you've managed to survive more than your friends."

Araki also smiled slightly. "Don't doubt it, we're the best ANBU of Konoha, you just attacked my subordinates with their guards down, but that won't happen to me."

After that, Araki moved into a battle stance. However, he felt something. It was like a pang; he wasn't sure.

He looked down and saw a Ninjato going through his chest. He turned his head slightly, but he couldn't see his assailant.

It was because that man grabbed him strongly by his head and then crashed him hard against the ground.

Kitsune clenched his fists, grunted and shouted, "What do you think you're doing, Genji?! This is my fight, not yours!" Kitsune stated.

The now identified as Genji was a man of around 196 centimeters tall, tanned skin and an athletic body.

He wore gray ANBU pants, with a dark blue vest and a gray shirt underneath, fingerless gloves. He carried knives on his right leg, multiple scars on his face.

Genji dusted his hands and replied, "Shut up, you stupid. Did you think that I would just stay away like an idiot while you had all the fun? Hahaha, don't make me laugh."

Kitsune growled again, "That's not the point! I was having a battle with him; I had everything under control! You had no reason to interfere!"

Genji made a sign, a sign that said that Kitsune was talking too much, and when he saw this, he got angrier.

However, Kitsune started breathing slowly; fighting wouldn't reach to anything. He looked at Araki's body and realized that he was dead; any normal person would be after being pierced with a sword.

Genji also looked at Araki's body before giving it a kick, "I can't believe that these pieces of trash have made you use your three attempts of 'Escape by Land.' You'll need more training."

Kitsune just sighed as he walked over to where Tsunami was, followed by Genji, who heard Kitsune replying, "I wanted to finish this quickly; I'll recharge my power in two days, so there's no problem."

Genji snorted and replied, "Admit it; you were forced to use that ability. Anyway, where are we going?"

Kitsune didn't respond. Instead, he approached Tsunami and then stated, "We must return her to her home; remember that she is under the protection of Kyōfu-sama."

Genji nodded, "Okay, let's do it before something bad happens to her. Besides, that brat could get angry if that were the case."

"Don't call Kyōfu-sama that," Kitsune answered.

Genji chuckled and stated, "It's been for years since the last time we saw him; I doubt that brat is on my level. You know very well why I agreed to join him."

Kitsune to hear this man's stubbornness could only sigh and add, "You have said it, four years have passed, but remember that his level was impressive for someone of his age back then. It's obvious he'll be someone much more powerful now."

Genji smiled one last time, "Come on, come on; come on. Don't be so serious; I was just kidding."

"Well, I hope so. Kyofu-sama is someone who deserves respect in all circumstances."

He saw Genji cleaning his ear, which made him shake his head, "Genji, take care of these bodies. You know what to do; check their bodies and see if you find something important. I know where and who sent these guys, you just look if they have anything else with them. Then return to the base. We'll be here longer than I had planned it. I won't be able to use my Escape by Land until the next two days, so we'll stay here until then."

Genji smiled but then frowned. "Damn it! Why can't I go with you?" Genji asked depressed.

Kitsune rolled his eyes behind his mask and replied, "First, because you're colossal. You'll scare everyone in this village, remember that just a few weeks ago they were saved by Kyōfu-sama. If they see you, they'll think that you're here to do something bad."

Genji smiled at that and puffed out his chest with pride. Ha! He was really scary.

But then Kitsune continued. "And secondly, because someone must get rid of those bodies and said say that your beloved pets love eating human flesh, so there you have it. Now, I'm leaving." With that said, Kitsune disappeared from the area along with Tsunami in a puff of smoke.

Genji shrugged as he bit his thumb and made some hand seals. "Kuchiyose no Jutsu (Summoning Jutsu)!" Genji shouted putting his hand on the ground.

Instantly a cloud of smoke appeared along with some strange creatures. "Hey, I brought you some food. But you'll have to wait until I finish checking their bodies, then you can do whatever you want with them."

The strange creatures—which turned out to be salamanders—nodded while they passed their tongues over their lips. "Hehehe, hurry up; we don't have all day."

Genji nodded and performed his task.

Konohagakure no Sato – Unknown Location

Danzō Shimura had returned to his base after leaving the Hokage tower; he was very thoughtful, he had a lot to do. There were just a few months left for the Chunin exams and what it entailed.

Besides, there was the thing about Naruto.

He couldn't let him die or stay in that state forever; that was why he had sent his best trackers in search of Tsunade; they had to find her no matter what, or they would regret it.

Danzō strolled through the corridors of the base until reaching his office; he opened the door and turned the light switch on. However, he saw something that displeased him a lot; the Yondaime Hokage was sitting on his chair, with his elbows on the table and folded hands, plus a quite serious face.

"What's the reason for your pleasant visit, Hokage-sama?" Danzō asked feigning politeness.

"Cut the crap; I'll be straightforward with you, and I want you to answer me with the truth, or I swear that you'll regret it. Where did Naruto go? And what happened to him? I'm sure you're aware of this." Minato stated; he was not here for games; he had to know what had happened to his son; maybe that would help the doctors to find a solution for his state.

Danzō approached his desk and sat down in a chair in front of it. He did this under the watchful gaze of Minato. "Hokage-sama, why do you think that I know something like that? Trust me; it saddens me what happened to him. After all, I consider him as my own son; I had to raise him for three years, Hokage-sama." Danzō replied with a blank look.

Minato growled and exclaimed, "Bullshit! I know exactly how you operate in Root; you can't fool me. Now I'll ask you one last time, where did Naruto go?" Minato finished and released some of his killing intent.

Danzō didn't flinch one bit; he kept the same expression.

He didn't have to say anything; he couldn't prove anything, plus he was sure that Naruto wouldn't say anything about his mission. He had been an ANBU of Root after all.

Naruto knew what he would have to do once he woke up. "Hokage-sama, I give you my sincerest apologies, but I don't know what you mean. Naruto-kun and I hadn't seen each other since that day when you removed him from Root. Let me say that if I had the opportunity to speak with him; I would. After all, he was one of my best subordinates, and I can say one of the few people I've grown fond of." Danzō stated quietly.

Behind the desk, Minato clenched his fists, rose up from his seat and stated, "Then so be it, Danzō. I have given you many opportunities, and I have endured you enough. You have one week to dismantle all this, from this day on; Root will cease providing services to the village."

Danzō squeezed his cane and replied, "Hokage-sama, I think you're being extreme. Root has provided innumerable services to the village. Besides, we're a significant force in it. You can't make this decision so hastily, and all because of a misunderstanding. I believe that you're just paranoid, Hokage-sama. What makes you think that I would talk to Naruto-kun? Moreover, what makes you think that he would talk to me? You shouldn't rush this decision. Wait until Naruto-kun wakes up. When he does, you can ask him. I'm quite sure that he'll deny these accusations."

"I don't care. The decision has been made since the days of Sandaime-sama. I repeat, you have one week. If you don't do it, you'll be executed." Minato replied in front of Danzō, who was cursing him in his mind.

"Okay, Hokage-sama. I will do as you say," Danzō replied, looking straight into Minato's eyes.

They fought with their eyes until Minato spoke. "Okay, I hope you do it. Now I'm leaving."

Danzō nodded and saw Minato walking around the room, but he stopped and said, "Oh, I almost forgot..."

"What's troubling you, Hokage-sama?" Danzō asked.

Minato turned around and answered, "I want you to remember this. I'm Naruto's father, and I don't want you to say in front of me or in front of anyone that you took care of him. We both know that it was quite the opposite."

Danzō smiled slightly and replied, "Oh yes, you're absolutely right, Hokage-sama. Maybe I shouldn't have brought him to Root, to the place where he grew up, was formed and where he could have a more peaceful life. Perhaps I should have let him continue being that malnourished, dirty and weak child that he was before coming to Root. Maybe the villagers would have done a better job."

Minato narrowed his eyes. "Be careful, Danzō, don't try to be a smartass with me. But I'll repeat it; I am his father." After that, Minato disappeared in a yellow flash.

Danzō had hit his table and shouted, "Torune! Fu!"

Instantly, both of them appeared kneeling before Danzō. "I want you to have everything ready for tomorrow. We'll change our base's location. We'll go to the one that it's outside the village."

Both nodded and disappeared from there without speaking a word.

Meanwhile, Danzō could not help cursing Minato; once again he was trying mess up his plans, "Damn you, Minato. This is the last time you'll try something to ruin my plans. Enjoy what's left of your life; these months will be your last."

After that, he left the room. He had to prepare everything to move his base to another location, so he had to do it as quickly as possible.

He did not want to raise any more suspicion, but in the end, everything went well.

He knew it would have been even worse if he told Minato the truth; he just had to sacrifice a base, which would be very easy to replace.

Somewhere in Hi no Kuni - Two Months Later

Jiraiya was entering a city within Hi no Kuni. This city was called Onsen; it was known for having the best hot springs of the Elemental Nations, although it wasn't always like this.

Before it was nothing more than a small city that went unnoticed in Hi no Kuni, but it had grown by leaps and bounds until becoming one of the most visited places in Hi no Kuni. Although the place didn't have volcanoes, the city had changed its name to Onsen due to its famous thermal baths.

The reason Jiraiya was here was that his spy network had informed him that Tsunade had been seen around this area.

Jiraiya had looked in every corner in these two months, but it was hard to find Tsunade since all her debts had mysteriously disappeared, and he had also learned that she was no longer taking money from moneylenders.

He didn't know the reason for this, but it was very strange that Tsunade had raised money, or that she had won something. Not for nothing, she was known as "The Legendary Sucker." Maybe she had been lucky after all these years.

Jiraiya just hoped that she was here, he didn't know how much longer his godson would resist. Two months had passed since he left the village, and as he knew the more time a person was in a coma, it was less likely that they would recover. And if they did, they would have consequences in the future; that's why he had made his best effort to find Tsunade.

He owed it to Minato; the poor man had suffered much, but especially Naruto. He didn't have to continue suffering; he had never done anything wrong in the eyes of Jiraiya; he just wanted his godson to have a peaceful life.

Jiraiya marveled after seeing the city's structure. At the entrance was a big Japanese pillar of red color, with a sign saying 'Onsen', and around it were walls of the same color that surrounded the whole city, but much smaller than the pillar.

The streets were immaculate, and the buildings of the site would make Konoha look like an outdated village. "The Fire Daimyo definitely invested a lot of money in this place," Jiraiya thought.

He walked towards the entrance, but when being there, two men of high stature with strange black uniforms cut him off the pace. "Who are you and what are you doing here in Onsen?" Asked one of the men.

Jiraiya realized he was huge, several centimeters taller than he was.

"I have no time to do my presentation, so I'll say it quickly. My name is Jiraiya, the legendary Sannin. Now get out of the way; I need to find someone." Jiraiya replied and then he prepared to enter, but the man blocked his way again while he looked at his partner, who shook his head.

"I'm sorry. You're not on the list, so you can't enter this city; here we only receive people who have made a prior appointment. As you can see, we are very strict with the security in this place. We receive many leaders and influential merchants, so we can't allow just any person to enter this place," stated the man who was in front of Jiraiya.

"But what kind of nonsense is that? I'm a Shinobi of Konoha, and this city is part of Hi no Kuni. You can't deny me entry. Get out of my way; I have things to do." Jiraiya demanded, trying to enter once again.

However, this time, many people, all dressed in the same way that the guards at the entrance, appeared on the scene.

Jiraiya growled; he didn't want to cause problems; he just wanted to see if Tsunade was there and then leave if that wasn't the case.

Nevertheless, these people didn't seem to understand, so he stood in a fighting stance. That alerted all the people who were there, who also did the same.

Nonetheless, before it ended in a disaster, the other guard at the gate continued, "I'm sorry, but if you don't agree with this, you can read this letter." The guard then handed Jiraiya a letter with a strange stamp.

He took it reluctantly, and when he saw the stamp of it, he got surprised; it was the stamp of the royal family, the Fire Daimyo's stamp.

He opened the letter and began to read it; the letter said that no one could enter this place without reservation. Not without provoking an international conflict or cause the loss of their status as a ninja, if this person was a ninja of Hi no Kuni.

Jiraiya couldn't believe it; this was the first time something like this happened to him. No one had ever denied him entry into a city, and he thought that it was strange that they did this here.

Jiraiya didn't know why the Daimyo gave an authorization like that; everything was strange to him.

"*Sigh*, could you at least tell me if you saw this woman?" Jiraiya asked showing a photo to the guards.

The biggest one shook his head and answered, "Sorry, we can't give information of the people who enters this place. Now do me a favor and leave, or if you want, you can go in that direction and buy a pass." The big man pointed to a cottage.

"Are you telling me that I could have bought a pass all this time? Why didn't you say that from the beginning?" Jiraiya asked a little annoyed.

The man shrugged and replied," You didn't ask."

Jiraiya almost fell backward.

But he quickly regained his posture and asked, "And how much would it cost me to enter here?" He had not brought much money with him, so he was hoping that it wasn't much.

The man looked at his partner, who put a finger on his chin as he thought. After a few seconds, he replied, "If I recall correctly, entering is around five hundred thousand Ryō, and if you spend the night here it's one million Ryō."

Jiraiya turned blue at that amount of money; he couldn't pay that. He didn't have that amount of money with him right now.

After a few seconds, he recovered and exclaimed incredulously, "O-O-On-One mi-million Ryo?! Are you crazy? Who the hell would pay that?"

The taller man answered, "I already told you; only the most influential people of the Elemental Nations can enter here. If you can't afford it, I recommend you to leave."

Jiraiya just growled like a child, and when he wanted to argue, he heard someone clapping.

He looked there, seeing that the people who had arrived were giving way to someone. "Come on, come on. Do not treat the great Jiraiya-sama like that; remember that he is one of the greatest Shinobi's in the Elemental Nations," stated a man.

Jiraiya then saw that the men knelt down, and he could see a young man, about 25 years old. Short hair with bangs covering his right eye slightly. He wore a black tuxedo, a white shirt, and black shoes, with his respective tie and gloves to match.

"It is a pleasure to meet you, Jiraiya-sama; my name is Daisuke by the way. I am the man in charge of this place," Daisuke spoke with elegance, putting his right hand on his chest as he made a slight bow.

Jiraiya smiled at this, "Heh, it seems that here are people who know the Great and Only, Jiraiyaaaa!" Jiraiya shouted scandalously, many seeing this couldn't help sweatdropping.

Daisuke smiled and gave more claps. "You are hilarious, Jiraiya-sama. Regardless, what is the reason for your visit? If we had known that someone like you would come to our humble city, we would have prepared a welcome. Though let me tell you that those clothes are very outdated. I think that you need to see an image consultant."

Jiraiya was smiling all the time, but he couldn't help feeling offended at the last comment, "What's wrong with my clothes? They are made of the highest quality. Besides, no one has ever seen anything wrong with my clothes." Jiraiya said.

Who did he think he was? Hum, people were rude nowadays.

Daisuke covered his mouth to hide a giggle, which angered Jiraiya even more. "Excuse me, Jiraiya-sama; what I tried to say was that people could confuse you with a peasant. Besides, those sandals, tch, tch, tch. Do not get me wrong," Daisuke expressed, offending Jiraiya once again.

Jiraiya turned red due to anger, but before he could say anything, Daisuke spoke again, "Anyway, Jiraiya-sama, as you can see, we are busy men. Could you tell me the reason for your visit?"

Jiraiya regained his composure, he swallowed his anger and gave the photo to Daisuke, who looked it over carefully.

After a few minutes, he handed it back and said as he gave a smile, which was starting to piss Jiraiya off, "Oh yeah, Tsunade-sama. She left a few hours ago, Jiraiya-sama."

Jiraiya dropped his jaw, but then he closed it and asked, "Was she here? Tell me in which direction she went." Then Jiraiya put his hands on Daisuke's shoulders.

Daisuke chuckled again and replied, "Jiraiya-sama, I will recommend you to stop looking for Tsunade-sama. Did you not find it strange that you could not find her in all this time? I advise you to stop wasting your time."

Jiraiya released Daisuke and asked, "And why do you think I would do that? I need to find Tsunade! It's for something crucial!"

Daisuke stopped smiling; he put a stern face that also made Jiraiya get serious. "I recommend you to stop looking for her. Tsunade-sama has made it clear that she does not want to know anything about Konoha. That is why Kyōfu-sama is hiding her from you. Did you not find it strange that she no longer have debts or that she no longer ask for money from lenders? I recommend that you stop searching for her, you do not want to have an enemy as Kyōfu-sama."

Jiraiya cracked his knuckles and stated, "It seems that I'll have to take that information by force. I've heard about that guy called Kyōfu and of the great organization that he has, but he doesn't scare me at all. I hope you know how to fight, brat, because I need that information; it's of vital importance."

Daisuke adjusted his gloves, making the men move aside. "Oh no, Daisuke will fight, we must get away from this place." Said one of the men, all they nodded and turned away from there.

"Jiraiya-sama, I know very well that I cannot beat you, but do not think that this battle will be easy. Not for nothing, I got the privilege of being in charge of this city. I am aware of your skills and qualities as a Shinobi. But before you start this nonsense, let me tell you something," Daisuke said as he stood in a fighting stance.

"And what would that be?" Jiraiya asked doing the same.

"You do not want Konoha entering into an economic crisis, do you? Let me tell you that Kyōfu-sama provides many things to Konoha, besides to owning most of the business of your village; he controls much of the means to transport supplies. I recommend you to reconsider this before Konoha is isolated. Besides, Kyōfu-sama can offer his services to other villages, which will be more than happy to receive the investments of a man as successful as him," Daisuke replied.

Jiraiya growled and replied. "And do you think I'll believe something like that? I can't believe that one person can do that to one of the biggest Shinobi Villages."

Daisuke laughed and replied, "Do you not understand it, Jiraiya-sama? Why do you think the Fire Daimyo granted such permission to Kyōfu-sama? He has many contacts, even more, I am sure that Kyōfu-sama can convince the Fire Daimyo to stop providing missions to Konoha."

Jiraiya then began to sweat nervously, "Damn it, he's right. But I can't believe it. Arrgh! Damn it! I'll have to return to the village and inform Minato about this." Jiraiya thought.

He turned around and said, "Okay, but don't think that this will stay like this, I'll take care to find that Kyōfu, and once I do it, I'll have a few words with him."

Daisuke stood well too; he brought his fingers to his mouth and laughed again. "Hehehe. Good luck with that, Jiraiya-sama. The identity of Kyōfu-sama is unknown even to us. Only people of his highest confidence know him. Anyway, I am glad that we could resolve this as the gentlemen that we are. Though again I recommend you to get an image consultant. Oooh, I cannot believe that someone is dressing with so little class," Daisuke stated dramatically, putting a hand on his forehead.

Jiraiya began to grumble while saying things like, "Damn brats." And "The Great Jiraiya-sama doesn't need a consultant."

Jiraiya then turned around to leave the city, heading to Konoha.

Meanwhile, Daisuke looked towards the direction. The truth was that he didn't want to fight against him, not because he would lose, but because they would have damaged much of the city and that wouldn't have pleased his boss.

He then began walked around the city, listening to one of the men talking. "Daisuke-sama, are you sure that that was the most appropriate decision? I'm sure that he'll tell the Hokage about all this, and then he'll ask for an explanation from Daimyo-sama."

Daisuke replied, "Come on, do not worry. Konoha trash cannot do anything; remember that this is the city of Kyōfu-sama; we also have the order of the Daimyo," Daisuke finished with a smirk.

He kept walking, just to hear someone speaking, "Did the pervert leave?"

Daisuke recognized the voice of the woman. He turned around and saw a blonde lady. Another woman—who looked much younger, with black hair and a pig in her arms—accompanied her.

Daisuke exclaimed, "Oh, Tsunade-sama! I did not know that you had woken up," Daisuke spoke with a strange smile on his face, in addition to clapping a few times.

Tsunade rolled her eyes and said, "Could you stop doing that? You look so stupid when you smile and clap at every moment."

Daisuke again put his fingers to his mouth as he laughed. "Hehe, excuse me, Tsunade-sama, but I cannot help but be happy. It seems that Kyōfu-sama is getting better."

Tsunade raised an eyebrow and continued, "Hmm, that guy again. I wonder when I will meet him. "

Daisuke smiled even more and answered, "Aaah; that will not be possible for now, Tsunade-sama. Remember that he is in a very delicate state of health." Daisuke clapped, which caused Tsunade to roll her eyes again. "But do not worry; I am sure that you will have the privilege to meet him someday. I only saw him once, and that was when he left me in charge of this city. It was the happiest day of my life."

Tsunade smiled slightly and stated with amusement, "Wow, it seems that you are in love with him, hahaha."

Daisuke blushed a little at her words as he averted his eyes. "I-I do not k-know what are you talking about, Tsunade-sama. Do not say s-such things."

Tsunade opened her eyes in shock, but after a while, she began to laugh. "Hahaha, so, is that the case? I had already thought that your attitude was strange; you never stop talking about that man. But if you fell in love with someone like him, then I don't know what to think."

Daisuke, who was still blushing, replied, "Hmph, well, yes, I am. But you have not seen him." Then stars appeared in his eyes, as he clasped his hands. "Although I could not see his face, I could feel the power that he emitted; it was something inexplicable. Besides, he is someone very polite, and he is so exquisite. I cannot believe that someone like him exists."

His speech caused everyone to look at him with big sweatdrops.

But then Shizune, the woman next to Tsunade, spoke, "That's fascinating, Daisuke. But changing the subject. Tsunade-sama." Shizune called, attracting the attention of Tsunade, who just now had stopped looking at Daisuke, to look at Shizune.

"What is it Shizune?" Tsunade asked.

Shizune got a little nervous and answered, "I- I think we should have seen what Jiraiya-sama wanted, maybe it was something important."

Tsunade stared at Shizune, which made her feel tiny. "Never, I've told you a million times; we'll never return to Konoha, no matter what the reasons are. Konoha isn't a place I would like to return."

Shizune bent her head slightly at this remark. "But maybe..."

But she couldn't finish because Tsunade interrupted her abruptly. "Enough! I don't care what the reasons are; I'll never return to that place, do you understand?"

Shizune nodded forcibly, and then Tsunade added. "Very well. Hey, Daisuke, show me that casino that you were talking about; I want to earn some money."

Daisuke came out of his fantasy; he regained his composure and asked, "Again, Tsunade-sama? Try to win something this time. Remember that money does not grow on trees."

Tsunade put her hands on her hips and replied, "Ha! You should have thought about that before promising me to cover all my expenses. Shizune, follow me; time to make some money." Tsunade made a sign as she walked towards the casino's direction.

"Hai, Tsunade-sama!" Shizune shouted, following her from behind.

However, Daisuke cleared his throat and said, "*Ahem* That is not the right direction, Tsunade-sama. Remember that I am going to show you the casino. Now do me a favor and follow me."

Tsunade scratched her head with embarrassment and nodded.

She returned to where Daisuke was and then they walked towards the biggest casino of the city.

Konohagakure no Sato - Several Hours Later

Minato was reading several requests, most of them were to engage Naruto in marriage. Many civilians, clan leaders, and traders were sending several requests to have Naruto marry with their daughters.

However, Naruto hadn't even woken up, and Minato hadn't talked with Naruto yet. Therefore, he couldn't take that decision. Also, he had learned that his son had, at least, four girlfriends.

He couldn't believe it at first. He visited Naruto every day during those two months, and there, he had found them all.

Minato had been in shock when they told him that; he just couldn't believe it. Nonetheless, he said nothing about it since he didn't want that his son had more reasons to hate him.

But then the requests started coming, including from people outside the village~they had offered lands and money.

Minato couldn't accept; it wasn't his call.

He already did something like that to one of his sons, but he seemed to agree with that idea. However, Minato didn't know how Naruto would react if he made a decision like that, so the best decision was to reject them all.

He continued denying the requests until he said as he signed the papers. "Did you find something, Sensei?" He asked without looking up.

Jiraiya came in from the office's window; he sighed and replied as he shook his head. "No, I couldn't find any trace of Tsunade."

Minato stopped, crossed his hands and looked at his sensei. "Due to the tone of your voice, I can feel that you found out something important. What is it?" Minato asked.

Jiraiya nodded and told him the events in Onsen. In the end, Jiraiya said, "And that's what happened."

Minato processed the information until he snapped his fingers; an ANBU instantly appeared kneeling before him. "Inu, I want you to send a letter to Daimyo-sama. I want to ask him if this is true, I want his answer as soon as possible!" Minato yelled, starting to lose his patience.

The ANBU nodded and disappeared from his office in a puff of smoke.

"Calm down, Minato. If that's a lie, I'll return to that place. But if it's true, I'm afraid there's little we can do."

Minato just growled because someone had knocked on the door. He calmed down a little bit and said, "Come in."

"Hokage-sama," Minato's secretary spoke.

"What's going on?" Minato asked.

"It's Kitō-san, he says that he has news about Naruto-sama's condition; he wants to know if you can receive him," Megumi stated.

Minato quickly nodded and said, "Bring him in; I want to hear news about my son."

Megumi nodded and quickly left to bring Kitō.

They waited a few seconds until the doctor entered the room with a smile that gave him hope. "Hokage-sama, I have good news," Kitō stated after greeting Minato and Jiraiya.

Minato couldn't help asking excited, "What do you have?"

Kitō smiled again and replied, "Well, Naruto-sama has begun to react to the Medical Ninjutsu, and now he no longer needs the ventilator; he can do it on his own. We believe that he could wake up at any moment."

Both Minato and Jiraiya smiled, and Jiraiya spoke. "It seems that we won't need Tsunade-hime after all, hehe."

Minato nodded and added, "It seems." And then he smiled too.

Kitō then cleared his throat and continued, "*Ahem* However, we have discovered something amazing."

Minato and Jiraiya stopped smiling, and Jiraiya asked, "And what would that be?"

Kitō replied the following, "As you know, Naruto-sama is under constant care, and one of the doctors who is responsible for his grooming discovered that his hair began to turn blonde."

Minato and Jiraiya looked at each other, and the Yondaime spoke next. "What does that mean? Could it be that the seal is regaining its strength?" Minato asked to no one in particular.

Jiraiya replied, "Maybe, or maybe not. We can't be sure; we just have to pray that my godson gets well."

Minato smiled and nodded, "Kitō, thank you very much. I'll tell Menma about this; I'm sure that he'll be happy to hear the news. Oh yeah, and sensei. You don't need to look for Tsunade anymore, due to what Kitō said, now they will be able to treat my son. You do what you have to do."

Jiraiya couldn't help smiling pervertedly.

Nevertheless, Minato quickly added, "And try not to cause problems. I have enough paperwork as it is before you give me more. Now, I'll leave, and please Kitō-san, if you have new news, please let me know."

Kitō nodded and saw his Hokage disappearing in a yellow flash.

Jiraiya stretched out a little bit and said, "Well then, go and take care of my godson. What are you waiting for?"

Kitō quickly replied, "Hai, Jiraiya-sama!" And he ran outside the room, heading to the hospital.

Jiraiya then smiled pervertedly again and muttered, "Time to do some research." Then he left the Hokage Tower toward the hot springs.

Meanwhile, a female ANBU couldn't help smiling. Naruto was finally recovering, and she didn't need to be worried anymore.

That ANBU was Yugao, who in these two months had been unable to visit Naruto since she had been quite busy with missions.

However, she was now relieved and hoped to see Naruto again.

Hospital - Two Months Later

Kurama was quietly resting in Naruto's mindscape. He was still worried, but not as much as two months ago because now he could provide his chakra to Naruto. Even though it healed him slowly, it seemed to be working.

He had seen much of what had happened on the outside, the Hokage and his son came to visit Naruto every day.

Kurama saw this as a thoroughly unpleasant action, and he couldn't wait for him to wake up and send them to hell.

The women had also come to visit him every day; he realized that these women seemed to be happier every day.

He didn't understand much about human feelings, but what he did understand was that these girls were happy because they found out that Naruto could awaken at any moment. He could also feel the characteristic smell that they gave off, although it was very slight, he could notice it.

Hehe, he would definitely be happy to see Naruto catching up with them.

It also worried him the fact that Naruto's hair was almost completely blonde, but it seemed that several sides were still red, and those sides didn't seem to be changing anytime soon.

He then looked at Naruto's body; he was in a simple house, sleeping on a bed, and Kurama was sleeping above him as an average sized fox.

Kurama snuggled a little more on Naruto just to feel some movements coming from him.

Kurama quickly got up and looked carefully at Naruto, who slowly began to open his eyes.

Kurama was surprised to see his Rinnegan, but he didn't worry about that since he heard some moans. "Naruto!" Kurama shouted, jumping on the bed again.

Naruto then looked at the blurry image that was to his front, and he was barely able to identify something of orange color.

But slowly, his eyes began to focus and could identify who was in front of him, "Ku...ra...ma, i-is that...you?" Naruto asked with tiredness in his voice.

Then he looked around; he couldn't identify where he was. "Wh-where... are we?"

Kurama when hearing Naruto speaking couldn't help smiling and licking Naruto's face, who, realizing this, smiled as he could, "D-Did you miss me...? P-perverted...Fox."

Kurama instantly stopped licking him as he looked away. "Uh, that? Fool! As if I, the King of all Beasts, would be happy to see a pathetic human! I was just transferring you my chakra so you can recover faster! Yeah, I did that..." Kurama stated, trying to believe his own words.

Naruto smiled slightly and then asked, "W-What happened? Where am I?"

Kurama raised an eyebrow and replied, "You are in your mental landscape, idiot. About the other, you should know it; I can only say that you were in a coma for four months."

Naruto opened his eyes a little bit, but he opened them widely after recalling everything he had seen before and during his coma. In those four months, the events of Uzushiogakure repeated in his mind; not only the tragedy but he had also seen how his ancestors had lived.

Naruto's face turned dark, so dark that even Kurama believed it was strange. "Hmmm, who was the idiot that made him angry?" Kurama asked himself.

But then he saw something that surprised him; Naruto got up from the bed as if he had never been sick.

Kurama fell and was about to yell at Naruto when he saw the expression on his face, "Oh, oh." Kurama said.

"All...all of them. I can't forgive them...I can't forgive them. How they dared?!" Naruto shouted beginning to surround himself with red chakra as he put his hands on his head; it still hurt him, but it wasn't as much as before.

Kurama got worried and shouted, "Hey! Calm down, Naruto; tell me what the hell is going on. Remember that if you start releasing my chakra in this place, you'll do it outside too. Stop it!" Kurama shouted trying to talk sense into Naruto.

And indeed, he did it. Naruto had fallen to his knees, had put his hands on the ground and had hit it with his fists. "Why did they do that? They never harmed anyone; they didn't deserve that," Naruto whispered, but Kurama was able to hear him. He walked to him, just to see Naruto shedding several tears on the ground.

Kurama licked his face again. "Come on, Naruto. Tell me what happened; what made you cry? It's not normal to see you like this."

Naruto ignored those words; he rose up and tried something. He thought of a particular object and channeled chakra in the palm of his hand.

Nothing happened for several minutes, but Naruto wouldn't give up. If what the representation said was true, then he could summon the Apple whenever he wanted.

Kurama observed in silence until he got tired and asked, "What are you doing?"

However, he saw that something began to appear in Naruto's hand; a golden ball with strange inscriptions, which began to glow when it had contact with Naruto.

Kurama asked in confusion, "What the hell is that?"

Naruto smiled darkly and replied, "Our trump card."

Kurama didn't understand what Naruto meant, but before he could say anything, Naruto spoke again. "Kurama, change of plans, our goal is no longer to destroy Konoha. Our new objective and goal are..." And then Naruto started telling all his new plans to Kurama. After that, he told the story of what he witnessed in Uzushiogakure.

"Besides, I can feel that I have a lot of information stacked in my brain, but they're so many that I can't keep them in order. Besides, when I try to concentrate on a particular seal that is stored in my brain, another seal appears. Arrgh! Until now, I assimilated a few ones, but they're still complicated. I'll need someone to show me how to use these seals. But who?" Naruto asked after telling his whole story to Kurama.

Kurama then shrugged, "Revive your mother," he stated as if it were nothing.

"What do you mean? How do you want me to revive my Kaa-chan? Are you crazy?" Naruto replied.

"No, I'm not; you know you can do that. You only have to learn that Jutsu, and you'll be able to do it. You always said that you wanted to meet her, now you have a reason to. Revive her and she'll help you out with the information that you have in your head. Remember that your mother was quite talented in that art; she taught your shitty father everything that he knows,"

Naruto thought about it, and after a while, he asked, "Don't you think that it would be wrong to revive my Kaa-chan for something like that?"

Kurama answered as he laid down. "Why? I'm sure that your mom would love to see you. You just have to learn that jutsu and bring her back for a while so she can help you to order all the seals and your new memories."

Naruto thought about it again. "I don't know, maybe I could, but you know how I appreciate my mother. I don't want to do something that I may regret in the future."

"And I'm saying that your mother would like to see you. Stop making pathetic excuses; your new plans will be more complicated than before; we'll need all the help that we can to get to accomplish your new goal," Kurama indicated.

Naruto then nodded and acknowledged, "You're right, I must get all possible help. If my mother comes to hate me for what I'll do, I'll live with that pain. But she'll have to help me, even if she doesn't like it. Besides, I'm sure that she won't like what Konoha did to our village."

Kurama nodded, just to see Naruto disappearing from his mindscape.

The Biju and added, "Good luck out there, Naruto. Hehehe."

Naruto didn't understand this and asked, "What do you mean?"

Kurama smiled and answered, "You'll find out."

And then Naruto completely disappeared from his mindscape.

Outside, some people were murmuring, "Hey, get off," someone spoke.

"Don't push me," said another one.

"Hey, you two be quiet. Look, look, he's opening his eyes. Shhhh."

Naruto slowly opened his eyes, which had returned to normal.

However, now they were purple instead of red.

He felt completely exhausted; it was entirely different from when he was in his mindscape. Besides, the headache was much worse.

He spoke wearily. "Wa...Water."

Naruto could hear some people arguing, and after a few minutes, he could feel something against his lips; he noticed that it was a glass of water.

After finishing drinking, Naruto could identify the person, and he greeted with a shaky smile. "Haku-chan...I'm g-glad to see you."

Haku hearing Naruto's voice after a long time felt tearful eyes as she lunged above Naruto—being careful not to hurt him—as she put her arms around his neck. "I missed you so much, Naruto-kun; I thought that you would never wake up again."

Naruto smiled slightly and tried to hug Haku, but he still felt fragile. "Ha, don't...even...think it... Remember that we have…not done it yet."

Haku blushed but couldn't anything because someone else had spoken. "*Ahem* Yeah very nice but...Naruto-kun, we're also here."

Naruto looked towards that direction, and he smiled. "Anko-chan. I believe that you're even more beautiful than before."

Anko puffed out her chest with pride. "Of course, that's a fact," She replied quite happily; she would definitely need to catch up with Naruto.

She was thinking about making pleasant visits to his room once he left the hospital.

Naruto smiled at that; then he looked to the other two. "Ino-chan, Tenten-chan...I'm glad you're here too," Naruto said starting to sound better, but he was still feeling tired.

When Ino and Tenten heard Naruto talking after several months, they quickly ran to hug him, "Naruto-kun!" Both of them exclaimed, shedding a few tears.

Ino sobbed. "We're happy that you've finally awakened; all of us have missed you."

Naruto moved a little from his place, causing the girls to move away slightly. "Naruto-kun, you must stay still; you just woke up. Don't try so hard," Haku spoke with concern.

Naruto smiled painfully and answered, "I wouldn't if you weren't above me."

They instantly turned away from him, but not before apologizing.

Naruto moved a little again; he put his hands where his pants should be, and in doing so, he felt embarrassment. "D-Do I have a diaper?" He finally blushed.

The girls couldn't help laughing, and Naruto couldn't help sighing. This would be one of his worst experiences without a doubt.

They continued talking for several minutes until someone knocked on the door.

Haku went to open it, and in doing so, everyone could see that Menma and Minato walked in.

Everyone greeted the Hokage, but they did it forcedly.

Minato noticed that some machines were still connected to Naruto, but his eyes were open. That mere detail made him smile.

He approached a little more and spoke, "Naruto..."

Naruto stared at him for a moment and then at Menma before looking at the girls, "Girls, please leave us alone for a few minutes. It seems that Hokage-sama wants to tell me something important."

The women looked at each other; they didn't want to do as he ordered.

They wanted to be there with Naruto; they knew that this conversation wouldn't be easy for him.

However, Naruto noticed that and asked again, "Please."

The girls had no other choice and ended up leaving the room.

Naruto then saw that Menma sat to his left and Minato to his right.

He was already guessing what was going on, and he could only think, "Here we go."

At that moment, he heard his father speaking, "Naruto, we need to talk..."

Notes:

DON'T KILL MEEEEEEEEEE. xDDD I'm sorry. But I couldn't help it.

I don't know what I have to clarify; I think there isn't much.

I'll just say the thing about Naruto; I never had thought that Tsunade would heal him; I had always thought that it would be natural since if the Medical Ninjutsu didn't work with him, then not even Tsunade would have been able to help him.

Oh yes, Daisuke is a man, and he's in love with Naruto, hehe. But don't think that Naruto will love him back; there won't be Yaoi; don't worry.

Daisuke looks like "Sebastian Michaelis." Look it up on Google, but it's not him. I didn't even see that anime, I just had luck, and I found somebody who looked like him.

Okay until the next time.

(The OC's on this chapter weren't mine)

Chapter Text

Person talking, "It could be."

Person thinking, "I don't like this idea."

Demon speaking / Invocation talking, "No doubt you are someone to be reckoned with."

Demon thinking / Invocation thinking, "His heart is dark."

Chapter 14

"Naruto...we need to talk," Minato spoke, looking at Naruto, who rolled his eyes as he could, which neither Minato nor Menma realized.

"Hokage-sama...okay...but first I would like something to eat. I'm hungry," Naruto replied wearily.

He wasn't lying; he was starving and was still tired. Maybe he could lengthen the time before the stupid talk.

Minato nodded quickly. He snapped his fingers and instantly an ANBU appeared kneeling before him. Naruto immediately recognized the ANBU and smiled a little, but said nothing. "Usagi, bring some food for Naruto; tell the doctors to bring as much food as they can."

Usagi nodded, she looked at Naruto, who was smiling at her, and she couldn't help smiling as well.

After that, she disappeared, looking for the food.

After a few minutes, someone knocked on the door; Minato said that they could enter and then a doctor came in with a trolley.

He put it next to Naruto before grabbing a small table to put it on Naruto's stomach.

The doctor put a bowl of rice on the table; he looked at Naruto and asked, "Do you need help, Naruto-sama?"

Naruto narrowed his eyes; did he just call him 'sama'? Naruto had thought that he was the 'Demon.'

He looked at the doctor and replied, "No, I'm not a quadriplegic bastard. I just hope that they didn’t put poison in this food; I don't trust hospitals."

The doctor was offended and quickly refuted. "But how can you believe that, Naruto-sama? We never would do that to the..."

Before he got carried away, Minato interrupted, "Thank you, doctor-san. You can go; we don't need you here anymore."

The doctor realized that he almost got carried away. Therefore, he nodded, apologized and withdrew.

Minato then saw Naruto eating, calmly and without haste.

"How's the food, Naruto?" Minato asked.

Naruto had already finished eating the first bowl, reason why he grabbed another one; this time, it was Yakisoba.

Naruto shrugged as he began to put the noodles into his mouth, "I can't complain; I remember eating banana peels from the trash."

Minato and Menma felt a stab in their hearts, and they couldn’t help but feel guilty. Therefore, Menma quickly added, "But the good thing is that now you don’t eat that way anymore..." Menma was trying to hide his nervousness, but he was even more nervous when Naruto looked at him with that emotionless gaze.

"Yes, you're right," Naruto replied and then continued eating.

Menma sighed in relief in his mind; luckily, he didn't say anything else. He didn't want to annoy his brother again.

Naruto continued eating; he was starving and felt the need of eating all that was on that trolley.

When he concluded that it's been enough waiting, he talked as he ate a steak. "Okay, Hokage-sama. You can tell me what you wanted."

"You can call Minato, Naruto," Minato spoke, trying to cool down the atmosphere.

Naruto looked at him before shaking his head. "I'm sorry, Hokage-sama, but it would be disrespectful. You know that I was raised never to disrespect the Hokage," Naruto replied quietly.

Minato felt guilty again; he knew what he meant. It was thanks to Danzō and him that Naruto talked like that.

Menma didn't understand what Naruto meant; he didn't know that someone had raised him; he was aware that most of the village had hated Naruto until a few months ago.

Minato shook his head and replied, "That won’t be necessary, Naruto; I wouldn’t feel offended if you call me by my name."

Naruto looked at him and answered. "Okay, Minato-san." That was starting to annoy him; he just wanted to get out of this place and put more progress in his plans.

But he couldn't; he was still weak and didn't know how long it would take him to recover his strength.

Minato and Menma smiled; they had already made progress, now they just had to tell Naruto the truth.

Naruto, on the other hand, had found a bottle of Sake in the trolley. He could only thank Yugao since he was sure that she had put ‘the drink of the gods’ there.

He grabbed the bottle and poured the liquid into a small glass, Naruto took a sip and released a sound of satisfaction.

Minato, at the sight of the bottle, asked with narrowed eyes, "Is that Sake, Naruto?"

He would need to speak to the manager of the hospital before leaving. How could they give alcohol to their patients? And even more to a child.

"Yes, it is, Minato-san," Naruto replied, taking another sip.

"Aren't you too young to drink that?" Minato asked.

Naruto stopped drinking for a moment before continuing, taking small sips. "Look, Minato-san, I'm tired of giving explanations about why I drink Sake, so I'll this. I've killed so many people that I've lost count; you can draw your conclusions from those words."

Minato felt guilty again; that was a great part of his fault, and he was determined to correct them.

Meanwhile, Menma looked at Naruto with a bit of fear. He still remembered the massacre on Nami's bridge; he couldn't sleep for several days after seeing all those smashed and strewn bodies on the bridge. Therefore, he asked himself who Naruto really was.

Just then, Menma saw that his father got even closer, putting a hand on his brother's shoulder. "Naruto, I think it's time to tell you. I know what I'm about to say will make you hate me with your whole being; even I do it. But I have to tell you; I think it's time for you to know the truth."

Naruto stopped drinking and looked at his father. "Hmm, I don't think I could hate you, Minato-san. After all, everything I am today is thanks to you," Naruto replied.

In part it was true, he didn't hate his father for that reason; it was due to more terrible reasons.

Minato felt relief in his heart but also felt guilty because he knew what Naruto had to go through to be the person that he was nowadays.

He let out a sigh of sadness and continued, "Okay, Naruto; now I'll say it..." Minato paused and then stated, "Naruto, you are my son."

At last; the truth had finally been told, and Minato just hoped that Naruto would say something, anything.

Minato would even accept his hatred, but nothing, Naruto said nothing; he just stayed there, watching the blankets of his bed.

Minato got worried and proceeded as he tried to hold the tears. "I’m really sorry, Naruto. I know what I did doesn’t deserve forgiveness. I-I know I'm the worst father in the world, and that everything you went through is my fault. Naruto, I’m not asking your forgiveness, because I know I don't deserve it. I just want you to know the truth. However, nothing would make me happier than you forgiveness and that you come with us to be the family that we should have been."

Minato could no longer hold it, and he released a few tears, which fell near Naruto.

Naruto rolled his eyes. How pathetic, the Hokage crying for something like that.

Then he heard Menma speaking. "Nii-san, I didn't behave properly with you either. If I had tried to be your friend, rather than put you off with my bad attitude, maybe I wouldn't feel so guilty. Please understand us, Nii-san. Oto-san told me why he did that. Oto-san had seen Kaa-chan dying, and when he saw you surrounding with that chakra, he thought that the Kyūbi did something to you. Though the damage is already done, please, Nii-san, Oto-san didn't mean it. He's very sorry. He just wants your forgiveness, and me too. Please Nii-san, come back with us." Menma finished, hoping that his words would be enough to convince Naruto.

Naruto mentally sighed; he would feel disgusted due to the words he was about to say.

He then looked at Minato and asked, "Are your words right?"

Minato quickly moved away from Naruto; he bowed deeply, which surprised Menma and even Naruto. "Who would have said it?" The Uzumaki thought.

"Everything we've said is true. Naruto, I'm not asking for your forgiveness; I just want you to know the truth. You'll know what to do with it." Minato replied without raising his head.

"I don’t know what say," Naruto replied.

Did he not know? There were many things he wanted to say and do, but he still couldn't.

"Nii-san, please..." Menma pleaded again; he wanted to do everything within his possibilities to get his forgiveness.

Meanwhile, Naruto was speechless. He just wanted to send them to hell, but the best course of action was to pretend, just to have more freedom around the village.

"Argh! What the fuck can I say?!" Naruto shouted in his mind while Kurama looked with amusement at his dismay.

Since Minato noticed that Naruto had said nothing, he got up; he approached him and put a hand on his shoulder. "Are you alright, Naruto?" He asked with concern.

Naruto looked at him and replied. "Yes, I just find it incredible; I can't believe that I have a family. I can't believe that I have a father...Oto-san." And he said it, and by saying those so corny words, Naruto wanted to puke, but he could hold it.

Meanwhile, Minato and Menma felt that their hearts jumped with joy.

A few tears ran down Minato's cheeks, and he couldn't help hugging Naruto, who just hoped that this torture ended. "I’m so happy, Naruto. I'll amend my mistakes from now on; I promise you." Minato stated as he hugged Naruto.

Naruto had tried to attack Minato, but he was still weak, and it would have also been something stupid. Luckily, he didn't do it. Therefore, he touched his father's shoulder and replied, "You don't need to do that. As I said, I'll never hate you," Naruto stated with a warm smile.

Naruto kept thinking about his future as an actor; maybe he could make a film with Koyuki once he went to visit her to take the Chakra armor that Gatō had mentioned.

Menma felt his eyes watery too, but he didn’t say anything. His father had to solve this; he knew that his father wanted to do it on his own.

Minato smiled while more tears of joy continued running down his eyes, "Th-that's great Naruto! You make me really happy. Once you leave the hospital, you can come with us," Minato stated with great happiness.

Naruto didn’t like the idea, but he managed to hide it well. "I'm sorry, but I have to reject your offer, Oto-san. You must remember that I'm in charge of Haku-chan —though I think that's no longer necessary. However, I still have the responsibility of being her protector. Remember she wouldn't have a place to live if I go with you; that's why I must decline your offer."

Minato and Menma were disappointed at this, but it wasn’t a big deal; Naruto had already accepted them, and that was the only thing that they cared about.

They couldn’t be happier. "Okay, Naruto, but try to visit us when you can. I know you'll be a little busy once you leave the hospital," Minato said wiggling his eyebrows, trying to be funny.

Naruto laughed a little, but not because he saw something funny in his words, but due to his predicament. "Hehehe, you're right; I'll be in my bed for another four months once I get out of this place."

Minato laughed, and Menma blushed a little since he understood what Naruto meant.

However, Naruto looked at them with a sad face, which worried them both. "Oto-san, I wish I could go to the place where my Kaa-chan is; I want to pray for her."

He really wanted to visit his mother's grave and pray for her soul. Although he would revive her, he wanted to apologize for what he was going to do.

Menma and Minato looked at each other, both put a hand on Naruto's shoulder, and Menma spoke. "Don’t worry, Nii-san. I'll show you where our Kaa-chan is once you’re out; we'll have some quality family time." He looked sadly at Naruto, who nodded.

"I’m very happy that this has gone well. Naruto, let me tell you this, I'm proud of you. Despite everything you went through because of me, you could stay strong; something that many would have been unable to, not even me. Besides, I can see that you’re a great man. Your mother Kushina would be proud of you." Minato stated, conveying the words he had been feeling for a long time.

"Thank you, Oto-san,” Naruto replied; he was starting to feel exhausted again; all this talk had drained his energy.

"What surprises me are the changes that you suffered in these four months. Who would say that your eyes would be purple?" Menma stated, and Naruto became alarmed.

He thought that he had his Rinnegan activated, so Naruto answered cautiously, "What do you mean? My eyes are red."

Menma and Minato looked at each other; they smiled and then Minato pulled out a mirror from who knows where.

He handed it to Naruto, who took it quickly. Naruto looked at his reflection carefully; his eyes were of a light purple color, and his hair was blond in several parts, although it still retained the red color it used to have.

He sighed in relief when he realized it hadn't been his Rinnegan what those two idiots had seen.

But still, he couldn't help being surprised due to those changes.

He then handed the mirror back and said, "Hmm, I don’t know why I’m suffering these changes. But I don't think it's important. Now I’ll ask you to leave the room; I’m very exhausted, and I need to sleep."

Minato and Menma nodded. "Okay, I hope you get well soon… son." Minato said, and by saying that last word, he felt complete.

Finally, after several years, he felt an indescribable happiness.

Menma stated with a smile, "Get well soon, Nii-san. I want a rematch once you leave. Don't think I've forgotten the beating you gave me at the Academy; I’m much stronger now; it won’t be easy for you the next time."

Naruto looked at him, smiled back and said nothing since he saw that both began to leave the room.

Once they closed the door, he let out a big sigh. "This has been one of my most difficult missions. I can't believe that I kept the sanity and that I’ve talked as if it pleased me what those two idiots were saying. Anyway, the hard part is over. Now I have only to recover quickly, and I hope you do your part, furball." Naruto thought.

"Don't tell me what to do, but you were convincing. I think I should give you a prize as the biggest liar; you even convinced me. I was about to take possession of your body to rip those two idiots apart," Kurama stated with a smile.

Naruto smiled back, but then he sighed and closed his eyes to answer. "Well, I think that won’t be necessary, and yes, I also believe that you should give me a prize. But time to sleep, once I leave this place, I’ll visit Kaa-chan. I remember that the Edo Tensei requires the DNA of the person that you want to summon. I'll hate myself for profaning her grave, but it’s necessary."

Kurama nodded and replied, "Now everything is necessary; rules no longer exist. In order to fulfill our goals, anything goes."

Naruto nodded and began to sleep.

Namikaze Mansion - 10 Minutes Later

Minato and Menma had arrived at their home. Both of them were happy, and the people of the village could notice that, so they congratulated them because everything had gone well in the hospital.

They went to the living room, looked at each other and couldn’t help holding hands as they began to spin in circles due to happiness.

They also shouted 'At last’ or 'Thanks, Kami-sama.' They were like this for a few minutes, until they heard someone clearing his throat, which made them both stop.

"*Ahem* I can see that everything went well with Naruto," Jiraiya spoke, appearing in the living room.

Menma ran to him, hugged him and said "Ero-sennin, I'm glad you're here. Yes, you're right, Nii-san has accepted us; he just said that he couldn’t live with us because a girl is living with him."

Jiraiya smiled pervertedly; he took a notebook out from his pocket and wrote something quickly.

Minato and Menma shook their heads at his antics, and the Hokage spoke next, "Okay, Sensei, stop that; I don't want you to use to my son in your perverted stories."

Jiraiya ignored him and continued writing things in his notebook.

Minato just sighed, and then after several minutes, Jiraiya stopped, "Minato, there's no doubt that your son is a gold mine. I found out that he has more than three beautiful girlfriends, besides his sensei. Hehe, lucky bastard, what I would give to be in his place."

"Yes, you and your fantasies. Anyway, I'm happy, Sensei. Naruto forgave me; he didn't get angry with me, I wish he lived with us, but he's right. He has that girl living with him. Besides, he already lived alone for too long, and he's already a man. I don't think that he'd like to live with his father." Minato continued as he sat on a couch.

Jiraiya did it as well same and added, "Well, that’s good news. I think I could approach him more easily now. Hehe, I could also get some information if I spend time with him. But leaving that aside, the Chunin exams start in two weeks, do you think that he'll be okay by then?"

Minato sighed; he saw Menma sitting down beside him without saying anything. "I don't know, Sensei. He could recover at any time; it could take days or months, he was in bed for a long time, and his muscles will be atrophied. We have to wait. Though I trust that he will be ready for that day." Minato replied.

Jiraiya then rose up from his seat. "Okay, I’ll return to the village in a month for the finals, I need to find more information about 'that' guy. Besides, that which Daimyo-sama said was troubling; I can't still believe that this guy is capable of that. Also, there's the 'other issue'." Jiraiya looked at Menma, who didn't notice it; Minato did it and nodded.

"Good luck, Sensei, I hope you get good information," Minato replied.

Jiraiya nodded and disappeared in a puff of smoke.

Minato looked at Menma and stated, "Okay, Menma, it's time to continue your training. I'll teach you something new." He then showed him a three-pronged kunai, and Menma opened his eyes in shock.

"I-Is t-th-that the...?  A-Are y-you go-going t-to t-t-te-teach me t-the Hiraishin?" Menma asked in disbelief and excitement.

Minato nodded and replied, "Yes, trying times are about to come, and I want you to be strong enough to kill your enemies with a single move. Now follow me; this training won’t be easy, and I hope you're ready for hours and hours of training; mastering this technique won’t be easy."

Menma nodded quickly; he jumped to stand up and followed his father onto the training ground of their mansion.

Meanwhile - Uchiha Compound

"Chidori!" Sasuke shouted, thrusting his attack on a big rock that was in the courtyard of his home.

Sasuke breathed with fatigue, but he was pleased; he was making significant signs of progress in a very short time.

"You are making great strides, Sasuke." Someone stated behind him.

Sasuke turned around and answered, "I can't stay behind; the Chunin exams are about to start, and there'll be powerful people, especially him," Sasuke said, thinking about Naruto.

Itachi smiled a little and continued, "It's good to hear that you no longer call Naruto-kun the other way, Otouto."

Sasuke shrugged and replied, "Well, Menma convinced me. Though I was incredulous that he was his brother, I could do little to dispute that. We argue a lot, but in the end, I couldn’t contradict him more, and I had to accept what he said. Besides, Kakashi-sensei also insisted."

Itachi stood in front of Sasuke and stated, "I'm glad that you've come to your senses, Otouto. Naruto-kun had a terrible childhood; you should be grateful that we have had Kaa-sama and Oto-sama with us. Naruto-kun just now may have at least some of that. But he'll never forget everything he went through.”

Sasuke sighed and replied, "I know, Itachi-nii. But why are we talking about that? Let's continue with my training; I can feel that I'm about to unlock the last tomoe of my Sharingan." And then he began to make some hand seals.

"Chidori!" Sasuke shouted while thrusting the attack on the rock, breaking it because it had already received multiple impacts.

Sasuke then fell to his knees, as he began to breathe hard.

"That will be enough for today, Sasuke. You've managed to make four Chidori's; it's a great achievement. But it's time to get back inside; you have to take a bath and then go to sleep." Itachi said, helping Sasuke to get to his feet.

Sasuke appreciated the help and then stated. "Okay, but I want to continue my training later; you know what my goal is."

Itachi shook his head and replied, "Sasuke, forget that; nothing good will happen if you follow that path. You should focus on other things. Why don't you invite that girl on your team on a date? What was her name? Sakura? Right?" Itachi asked as he began to walk along with Sasuke inside their home.

Sasuke growled and replied, "I don't think so, those things aren't important to me, I have to avenge my clan. Besides, she doesn’t interest me. She's just a fangirl, like most of the Kunoichis in this village, and there's nothing that I hate more than a fangirl."

Itachi smiled. "But I thought your other goal was to revive the Uchiha clan. How do you plan to do that without girls?"  

Sasuke just said, "Hmph," causing a slight laugh from his brother.

"That's i t, brother. Don't follow the path that cursed our clan; revenge won’t bring you anything good." 

Then they entered.

Three Days Later

"Naruto-sama, you are certainly admirable. It's been just three days, and it seems that you are completely healthy. However, your muscles are still atrophied. I recommend you to come every day to perform physical therapy for a month. I think you will be recovered by then," said a doctor looking at Naruto at the hospital's entrance.

Naruto raised an eyebrow. A month? Even if he were crazy, he wouldn't return. Besides, he would be recovered in less than a week; that was what he thought.

He was next to Haku and Anko; Ino and Tenten weren't with him because they went on a mission outside the village, and they wouldn't be returning for another three days.

“I don't think so; I’ll take care of that. I don't need to be in this place anymore." Naruto stated, walking away with Anko and Haku's help since he felt his legs weak.

The doctor sighed, "Okay, Naruto-sama, but let me inform Hokage-sama before you leave."

However, before the doctor could say more, Naruto added, "That's not necessary; I don’t want to bother my Oto-san. You see, he’s the Hokage, so he’ll be very busy."

Even if Naruto had called Minato 'Oto-san,' Anko and Haku didn't see it strange since he had already told them that it was necessary for now.

The doctor nodded, "Oh, you're right. Okay, I wish you good luck, Naruto-sama; remember that you are welcome at the hospital whenever you want."

Naruto just nodded before walking towards his apartment.

Upon arriving, Haku and Anko sat him down on the living room's sofa. "At last!" Naruto exclaimed.

Just then, Anko sat down beside him, putting her hands around Naruto's neck. "Yeah, at last, Naruto-kun. I think we have to catch up." Anko stated before kissing Naruto, who gladly returned it.

Haku squinted as she thought that their kiss had been long enough; she didn’t like this at all, hence so she pushed Anko aside.

Naruto and Anko were surprised at her behavior, and before Naruto could ask what was going on, Haku had kissed Naruto, putting her tongue into his mouth.

Naruto didn't return it at first due to the surprise, but it only lasted a few seconds. Thus, he returned the kiss, playing with Haku's tongue, who started feeling weird in her lower part.

 Anko smiled; she had managed to pervert Haku a little bit in these four months, and she was proud of her excellent job.

Haku then started moving down her hand, touching Naruto's chest slowly. Then she moved it to his stomach, but she didn't stop there.

She continued lowering it, and just when she was about to touch Naruto's 'buddy', he stopped her with one hand, making Haku instantly realize what she almost did.

She blushed exceedingly, and before she could apologize, Naruto smiled and said, "Haku-chan, I didn't remember that you were like this."

Haku lowered her head and tried to apologize again. But she couldn't because Naruto took her by her chin, forcing her to look into his eyes. "But I like it, though I'm sure that a particular woman had something to do with this. However, I can't blame her; she's like that, and I like her in that way." Naruto stated while looking at Anko, who couldn't help smiling.

Naruto winked at her and continued. "But I'm sorry to disappoint you, girls. I'm still not ready to do that, although I would like to have you both with me, locked in my bedroom for a week, I'm ashamed to say that I'm very weak; I think I won't be able to keep up with you. Besides, I have other things to do, and I have to train a lot. The Chunin exams begin within two weeks, as you've told me, and I want to participate. So sorry, but we can't do that yet."

Both Anko and Haku sighed in disappointment. Yes, Anko had perverted Haku, though not entirely; these topics didn't embarrass her that much anymore.

Naruto then rose up and walked to the door, which concerned and astonished both women, since he had needed help to walk just a few minutes ago.

Naruto realized their amazement and said, "Hehe, I get well fast; you already know why. Anyway, I'm leaving; I need to take care of certain issues, I'll see you at night, girls. Oh yeah, Anko-chan, are you now living here?" Naruto asked curiously; he had seen many suitcases, plus Anko's clothing all over his apartment.

Anko smiled and nodded. "Sure, I couldn’t leave Haku-chan alone in this place, and I couldn’t take her to live with me. Besides, someone had to take care of your apartment. Did you not like it?" Anko asked.

She knew that Naruto wasn't upset; he had always told her that she could stay with him whenever she wanted.

Naruto shook his head and answered, "You know very well that the answer is no. Besides, this place is huge; it has many rooms. Anyway, I'm leaving." With that said, Naruto raised his index finger and the middle one, in an attempt of using the Shunshin, but nothing happened.

He repeated the process, but nothing had happened again.

Anko moved closer to him and asked with slight concern, "Is something wrong, Naruto-kun?"

Naruto sighed and answered, "It seems that I can't mold my chakra very well. I think it's because I was inactive for so long, but I’ll fix that with some training. Well, I'll walk around; you stay here, I need to see someone." Anko and Haku nodded.

Naruto seeing the nods spoke again. "And one more thing, from tomorrow on, I want to start a rigorous training, Anko-chan. I want you to be as sadistic as you never had been.”

Anko grinned and replied, "You've said it, Naruto-kun. Don't think that I'll be soft with you."

Naruto smiled back, but Haku didn't see anything funny about that. She had trained with Anko for four months, and she knew how her training could be, and she didn't want a more sadistic training, even her former teacher wasn't so ruthless.

"And Haku-chan, I'm anxious to see how much you've improved in these four months. I can feel that you're now much stronger." Naruto stated.

Haku smiled slightly and nodded.

"And what will we do with that guy that I told you about? The pale boy." Anko asked.

Naruto looked at her and replied. "Nothing; I can't still believe that the bastard of Danzō has managed to make Sai my teammate. But don't worry, he won’t leave his burrow until the day of the Chunin exams. We'll be able to train without interruptions or unwanted eyes."

Anko nodded and said no more.

Naruto then kissed each one before leaving his place, heading to the area where the wealthy people lived.

 One Hour Later

Naruto had been walking for a whole hour; he had never felt so slow; he had even released his gravity seals. However, he noticed that this walk was making him recover faster, so he didn't complain much.

He had seen that the people in the streets approached to greet him or try to talk to him; Naruto hated it.

Damn hypocrites, they only respected him now because they were aware of his origins.

Nonetheless, he didn't pay them much attention; he would make sure of changing these expressions, but it was still too early for that.

He kept walking until he arrived at the area where the important people lived. Many were surprised to see him there, and some of them tried to invite Naruto to their homes, but he had refused.

He went into a corridor and did a Henge; he didn't want people to know where he was going.

He left the corridor and walked until he was in front of a mansion. Two guards were at the entrance, and one of them asked, "Who are you and what are you doing here?"

Naruto, who was pretending to be a much older man, replied. "Excuse me, young man; I came to visit Kohta-san. Please, I would like you to tell him that 'the man who does not forgive' is here."

The other guard looked at his partner and nodded. "We don’t know who you are, but Kohta-sama has told us to let anyone enter if they said those words. Okay, come in. Kohta-sama is working in his office." The guard replied giving way to Naruto.

He smiled and said, "Oh, you are good guards. Now if you'll excuse me, I have to leave." Naruto then entered the mansion.

He didn't knock on the door; he went in, went upstairs, walked through the hallways and entered a room. Kohta was there, reading some papers.

Kohta stopped reading since he heard the door closing; he looked and saw that an elderly man with gray hair, who seemed to be barely standing.

He was about to call his guards when he saw the person change to another one, which caused him to stand up and kneel down before him. "Kyōfu-sama! It's you! You don't know how glad I am to see you recovered!" Kohta exclaimed with happiness.

Naruto made him a sign to stand up; he walked into the room and sat down in Kohta's chair. He put his feet on the desk and spoke, "I hope this doesn't bother you, but my legs are tired."

Kohta shook his head and replied, "Of course not, Kyōfu-sama! My home is yours; everything I have is yours."

Naruto rolled his eyes and continued, "You don't need to say that. Anyway, I think you know why I'm here, so start talking."

Kohta quickly nodded at this demand; he sat in front of Naruto and began to tell everything that had happened in the past four months.

Once he finished, Naruto nodded. "So, did Danzō try to kidnap Tsunami-chan?" Naruto asked, clenching his fists.

"That idiot! I had planned to leave him alive for making me who I am today, but what he did is unacceptable! I'll make sure of killing him!"

He calmed down and continued, "But the good thing is that Kitsune was there; I don't know how I could thank him; he doesn't like money. Well, I'll find a way when I see him again."

Kohta nodded, "Oh yeah, Daisuke also reported that Tsunade-sama left Onsen, and he said that she will go to another city."

Naruto nodded and added, "I hope they continue covering her. Tsunade can be helpful in the future; I only have to convince her to join me. It won’t be something tough to do."

Kohta exclaimed while wiggling his eyebrows, "Aaaaah! So you want to have another conquest, huh Kyōfu-sama?"

Naruto looked at him and seriously answered, "It's for another reason; a reason that the entire organization will know at some point."

Kohta stopped joking when hearing the seriousness in his words.

Therefore, he also got serious and continued, "There is something important that you need to know, Kyōfu-sama. It's something that we found out a few weeks ago; something that you would like to hear."

Naruto put his feet down the table and put his elbows instead as he folded his hands. "Go on."

Kohta nodded, "Our spy network in Iwa informed us that the Tsuchikage is preparing a large contingent of his troops. It started a few months ago, but a few weeks ago we learned the reason for that. It seems that Orochimaru has been visiting the Tsuchikage."

Naruto eyes opened slightly, but he quickly returned them to normal and said, "You're not telling me everything; speak already."

Kohta nodded quickly and answered, "Orochimaru plans to attack Konoha with the help of Iwa and Suna, in addition to his own village, which is a newly founded village called Otogakure. According to our spies, Orochimaru wants to destroy Konoha once and for all. The invasion will be the day of the finals of the Chunin exams. What will we do with this information, Kyōfu-sama? Will we help the other villages to destroy Konoha?"

Meanwhile, Naruto was thinking about it; he knew it was true since his spy network had never been wrong before.

He stood up and answered as he looked out a window. "No, we won’t help the other villages; we'll help Konoha. Konoha won’t resist the attack of Suna and Iwa. We'll send Genji and Kitsune, and a small battalion of our men. The destruction of Konoha, if it happens, will be because of my own hands; no one will take that privilege away from me."

"Are you sure about sending "them', Kyōfu-sama? If I recall correctly, they have always had their differences," Kohta replied.

Naruto turned around and looked at Kohta. "I don't care about their stupid differences; tell them that it's an order. Now I have to go. Oh yeah, and I want you to tell Gatō to get away from Nami. Tell him that he can go to the base that he took as his own; he won’t be necessary in that place anymore."

Kohta nodded at this demand and uttered no more.

He said goodbye with a slight bow before continuing with his affairs.

Mansion Namikaze - One Hour Later

"No, it’s not like that, Menma," Minato said as he grabbed Menma's hand. "You have to take the brush in this way and write the seal like this." Minato talked as he showed him the proper way to write the Hiraishin's seal.

"But it's hard, Oto-san; I can't keep my hand still that much," Menma replied with frustration.

His father had tried to teach him the correct way to write the Hiraishin's seal in these three days, but it was quite difficult for Menma.

"You have to, Menma; you need good calligraphy skills, or you can forget the idea of using the Hiraishin. Just trust me; this is necessary," Minato answered as he guided Menma's hand to write the seal.

Menma sighed but nodded; he couldn't give up; the seals were a specialty of his clan, so it would be a shame if he couldn't write a seal on paper. Although his father had told him that this wouldn't help in learning the Hiraishin, Minato said that he needed to know this as a requirement; his father didn't tell him why.

He didn't ask; Menma trusted his father; there always was a reason behind his actions.

After that, he released his hand, hoping that he had understood it, and it seemed to be the case; now he was writing much better.

As he watched his son, someone rang the bell. He put his Hokage cloak and walked to the door.

Upon arriving at his door, he saw something that made him smile broadly but also worried him. "Naruto! What are you doing here? I thought you were still in the hospital." Minato asked, getting closer to his son.

Naruto smiled slightly and replied, "Don't worry, Oto-san. I'm getting better for every second that passes; changing the subject, I would like you to let me enter."

Minato nodded at this request and led Naruto into his home.

Menma asked himself why his father was taking so long. Therefore, he decided to turn around, just to he see Naruto. "Nii-san!" Menma shouted as he ran to hug him.

Naruto was shocked at first, and again he had the impulse to kill someone, but once again, he hid it.

He forcibly returned the hug before asking, "How are you, Menma?"

Menma ended the hug and answered, "Very well, Nii-san. Oto-san is teaching me a super cool jutsu!"

Naruto raised an eyebrow and asked, "Really? And what jutsu would it be?" He was mildly interested in the technique.

Menma smiled and was about to reply when Minato placed a hand on his shoulder. "It's the jutsu that made me world famous."

That indeed caught Naruto's attention, so he asked, "The Hiraishin? Wow, good luck with that, Menma. I don't think it's something easy to learn."

Minato smiled and stated, "Hehehe, you're very clever, Naruto."

Naruto smiled. "Well, I must be, or I wouldn’t be even half of what I’m now. But if I'm honest, I'm curious to see that jutsu," he asked, hoping that his father would be stupid enough to show him the steps of the Hiraishin.

Minato replied, "Well, I'm still not teaching him the real Hiraishin’s steps; I'm only showing him which seal he has to use. Though I didn't tell him this yet, no one can use the seal that I use; the user must find one on its own, and that's only possible if you have good knowledge in Fuinjutsu, plus lots and lots of perseverance."

That caught his attention again. So, was the jutsu in the scroll useless? Or did it show the steps to create an original seal?

"How can someone create his own seal?" Naruto asked.

Minato answered, "As I told you; that’s something that just happens. The steps aren’t complicated once you have the seal. The challenge is to find the proper seal that will help you to transport yourself. That's why perseverance is critical; not everyone can do this."

Naruto took note of this. Perhaps it wouldn't be tough because he was starting to process the Fuinjutsu information. 

Although Naruto was sure that he would need help to implement most of those seals.

"How rude I am; I came here and didn't say the reason for my visit," Naruto stated, bowing slightly.

Minato and Menma shook their hands in denial, and Minato spoke. "Don't worry, son. You don’t need to give reasons; this house is yours; you can come whenever you please." Minato replied, now sitting on the couch.

Naruto nodded, taking a seat too. "I'm glad to hear that, but I came to ask you a favor. I want to visit the grave of Kaa-chan; I want to pray for her soul."

Minato and Menma looked at each other; they nodded, and Menma answered. "Don't worry, Nii-san. If you want, we can take you right now."

Naruto raised an eyebrow in confusion, "Hmm, you don't have to; I can go alone; I don’t want to bother you."

Minato stood up, shook his head and answered, "It isn't that, Kushina's body isn't in the cemetery; it's in the courtyard of our house."

Naruto was surprised, but also worried; that would complicate his plans quite a bit. "Here? I thought it would be in the cemetery, but that doesn't matter, I'm sure you wanted to have Kaa-chan close to you. Now, could you please show me her resting place? If you don't mind."

Minato and Menma quickly shook their heads. "It's not a problem, Nii-san. Come, I’ll show you where Kaa-chan is." Menma replied, getting up and grabbing Naruto's hand, to get him out to the courtyard.

Naruto resisted at first, but he was not at his maximum to send Menma flying for daring to touch him in that way, he sighed in defeat and just let Menma guide him.

Minato smiled to see this interaction, without doubts, he was happy, and he just wished that Kushina were with them to return to be a complete family.

Naruto then realized that Menma took him to the back of the mansion; he was surprised to see the extent of the courtyard, but he said nothing, he just let him guide him. They walked several feet and then he could see a mausoleum as big as an average house.

"It's here; Kaa-chan is inside the mausoleum," Menma stated, opening the crypt's door.

At that point, Naruto felt that his heart started pumping faster as he walked inside.

"Here, Nii-san. Kaa-chan is behind this wall; I’ll join you," Menma said.

Naruto looked at the wall and saw a small entrance, which had the name of his mother.

Minato also entered and spoke, "I will accompany you too; I want to thank Kushina for making us a family again."

After saying those words, Minato and Menma then stood in a prayer position.

Meanwhile, Naruto looked at them with hatred; they spoke so confidently that it made him angry.

However, the Jinchūriki remembered where he was and calmed down as he stood in a prayer position. "Kaa-chan, first of all, I am very happy to know where you are. I always wanted to visit you and give you my prayers, but nobody ever told me where you were. Well, nobody ever told me that you were my mother. I want to apologize for what I'm going to do soon.; I think that you'll hate me for reviving you for something that you would consider hypocritical, but I don't see it like that. They betrayed our clan, Kaa-chan; our true family, not these two idiots who claim to be. I'm talking about the clan we belong to, so I ask you for your forgiveness. I don't want to do it, but I have to. Kaa-chan, I swear that the Uzumakis will rise again; I'll make sure of that. This time, we'll be feared; no one will betray us again; the ninja world will be at our mercy, and those who disagree with this will perish."

Kurama nodded to each of his words; he would ensure that his Jinchūriki reached his goal. His Jinchūriki; his one and only true friend.

They continued their prayers for several minutes until Minato said that they could come in again.

Once there, Minato asked, "Naruto, could you tell me what happened to you? How did you end up in a coma?"

Naruto tensed a little bit, which Minato noticed. "I don't remember it well. I recall going out to do my escort mission, and when I was in the place agreed upon, several ninjas of Iwa ambushed me. They were Jounin—I think—due to their Chakra level, and one of them managed to inject me something. I couldn't keep pace with them, so I ran like never before. However, I started feeling weaker and weaker. I arrived at Konoha, and thanks to my survival instincts, I managed to get to the hospital. But just as I reached the entrance, I fell unconscious. I didn't believe that I would have luck; I thought that they would let me die there. You know, being the Demon Brat doesn’t give me much popularity around here." Naruto finished his false story.

Minato at the word ‘Iwa’ was incredibly furious, but then he felt guilty about his last words. "Naruto, don't call yourself like that again; I know that you grew up with that nickname, but it was my fault. Besides, I would never abandon one of my sons to their fate." Minato stated with a sad expression.

Meanwhile, Naruto clenched his fists; it seemed that his father had a selective memory.

They continued talking for a few more hours; Minato and Menma were happy, but Naruto was disgusted.

Menma and Minato had offered him to stay for dinner, but Naruto said that he had to be in his apartment since he had promised Haku and Anko to have dinner with them after so long.

Although that was a lie, Naruto really wanted to do it and ask them what they had done in the past four months.

Omake

Konohagakure no Sato - Several Months Before

Naruto was in one of the rooms in the tower of the Forest of Death; Anko had called him, and he didn’t know the reason. "Why did Anko-chan call me here?" Naruto thought, lying on a bed.

After several minutes, Naruto sighed with boredom; he had been waiting for Anko for about two hours, and she still had not appeared.

Naruto decided that it was enough; he got up from the bed and headed to the door, but before leaving, he saw that the doorknob spun.

Anko entered with a smile that baffled Naruto. "Anko-chan why did you call me here?"

Anko continued giving that smile, one that Naruto found very sexy, but he said nothing about it since he didn't want Anko thinking poorly of him.

She approached Naruto, grabbing one of his hands and led him to the bed; both sat down.

Naruto was still confused; therefore, Anko spoke. "Naruto-kun, we've known each other for four years; I still remember the day when we first met. You really surprised me when you detected me. After that, we continue talking and seeing each other several times until I told you my secret. At first, I thought that you would hate me like the villagers, or that you'd try to sleep with me at your first opportunity." Anko said, but Naruto at her proclamation made a face that announced that she was completely wrong.

Anko smiled and continued, "That’s right, and you didn't. For me, you have been the only person who hasn’t spoken to me just to have some fun. I've met many men, and everyone turned out to be bastards who only were interested in my body."

"But I didn't, Anko-chan; I won’t deny that you have a beautiful body. However, I didn't talk to you for that reason, but because I thought you were like me, someone who knows the true meaning of being hated and despised, all because of other people. Anko-chan, don't think that way; you're one of the few special people that I have." Naruto said, making Anko have watery eyes.

Nevertheless, she remembered something; therefore, she smiled cheekily and asked with amusement, "Well, Naruto-kun! Are you trying to woo your dear Anko-chan?"

Naruto smiled and shook his head. "Of course not, Anko-chan. I suck at those things like love; you know why." Naruto replied.

Anko stopped smiling; she had been feeling things for Naruto for a while. Anko knew that it was wrong because he was several years younger than she was, but his appearance said otherwise, as well as his maturity; it made him look much older.

She was in love with Naruto, the only man who didn't want to use her or want something with her just for her body. But she was afraid; she would be devastated if Naruto didn't want to hear from her anymore.

She always asked him subtle questions if he had some sort of infatuation, but he always said he didn't know the meaning of the word. He believed he could never fall in love. That was why she was afraid that Naruto would reject her.

Anko lowered her head, which worried Naruto.

Something was wrong with her. That wasn't the Anko that he remembered; the Anko he knew never lowered her head or felt sadness for anything.

Naruto could feel due to her chakra that she was sad, but he didn't know the reason for it. Therefore, he put a hand on her shoulder, to ask her what was wrong.

However, before he could ask, Anko looked up, and Naruto realized that her eyes held a lot of determination.

Naruto noticed that Anko put both hands on his shoulders; she threw him on the bed and got on top of him, starting to kiss him fiercely.

He was so stunned that he had stopped thinking; he was completely frozen.

Anko realized this, and because of that, she put her hands under Naruto's shirt, to start touching his sculpted body before descending until touching his pants.

That pulled Naruto out of his daze, and he was about to ask her what the hell was wrong with her when a voice in his mind shouted, "Don't you dare, Naruto! Don't waste this opportunity! Don't throw everything that I've taught you in the trash! It's time for you to become a complete man."

Naruto mentally asked, "What do you mean, Kurama? Something strange is happening to Anko-chan; she's not like this."

Kurama growled and replied quite loudly, "Don't be stupid! Use your nose! I taught you how to use it for something; she wants to mate with you, boy! I can feel it from here! So take advantage or I will have to leave this place and eat you slowly!"

Naruto wanted to reply again, but he realized that Anko stopped to say. "Sorry, Naruto-kun. You may be thinking that I'm the snake whore after all," Anko said about to cry.

Naruto felt a lump in the throat, so he grabbed Anko from her waist. He put her on the bed, and this time; he was the one who started kissing her.

After a few minutes, Naruto separated a little and stated very seriously, "Don't ever call yourself in that way again; I won’t let anyone call you that. If anyone does it, I'll break some bones."

Anko looked into those piercing red eyes that were looking at her with a seriousness that she had never seen before, which caused her to start getting wet in her lower parts.

She had a beautiful blush on her cheeks, which caused an erection in Naruto.

Anko noticed this, and this time, she placed Naruto against the bed, "Hehe, Naruto-kun, don't think you will win this."

Afterward, she took Naruto's pants off at full speed, and at an even greater speed; she took her clothes off.

Naruto seeing Anko's body couldn't help blushing; it was the first that he had seen a naked body, and even if he didn't look like, he was still a kid.

Anko saw the blush and couldn't help speaking with extreme sweetness, "Aaah. Naruto-kun has blushed; you don't know how happy you make me."

That caused Naruto to blush again. "S-shut up; it's not what you think. It’s just that it's the first time I've seen a body as beautiful as yours," Naruto stated, and this time, Anko blushed.

Then they looked at each other, and they couldn't help laughing.

Nonetheless, Anko stopped laughing; she looked at Naruto with anxiety, and she saw him nodding.

She moved back and could feel Naruto's member against her ass. Its size surprised her, and she asked incredulously, "Naruto-kun, did you lie about your age?"

Naruto scratched his cheek and answered, "Hmm, no. I'm thirteen years old, but I think the Kyūbi has something to do with it."

Kurama smiled but said nothing; he just kept looking carefully. Today would be the day that his container would become a complete man.

After hearing that, Anko nodded and asked no more; she grabbed Naruto's member to keep it steady. She got up and slowly sat down on it, putting it in her most intimate place, causing her to moan with happiness and pleasure.

Naruto was also feeling the same; he couldn't believe this feeling; it certainly was one of the greatest pleasures he had ever felt.

Subsequently, he felt Anko's barrier, but before he could say anything, Anko sat down completely, tearing her wall.

Anko felt a slight pain, but it quickly was gone. When she was about to move, she heard Naruto's voice. "Anko-chan, are you a virgin?"

Anko blushed in embarrassment; she looked away and answered, "You've finally noticed it; I told you that all the men sought me only for my body, and for that reason I never had anything with them. That's when they started calling me in that way as they could never get anything with me. So they decided to get even with me by giving me that nickname."

Naruto was enraged at this, how did they dare to call her that? Dirty bastards, he would make sure that Konoha suffered by his hands.

They had already done many things, but making a rumor up for not getting a woman was something utterly stupid, and it was something that angered him.

"But I can't still believe it; you're a Kunoichi, after all." He stated in disbelief.

Anko smiled and started to get up and down, which made them moan. "Less talk and more fun!" She shouted, increasing the speed.

Naruto was allowing her to take control; he knew that he had to take it, but still, he was a rookie.

Naruto didn’t much, the reason why he shouted Anko’s name while releasing a large amount of sperm inside of her.

Anko stopped moving; she smiled and decided to play around with Naruto. "So fast, Naruto-kun? Hahaha, it seems that you are a kid after all," Anko mocked, although she almost had an orgasm.

She also thanked that today was one of her safe days, or else, Anko was sure that she would have gotten pregnant. It wasn't as if she didn't want to have a child from Naruto, but she knew it wasn't the proper time.

Naruto had growled, and Kurama as well. "Show her of what you're capable of, boy!" Kurama shouted in Naruto's mind, as he began to release Naruto's pheromones.

Naruto let his pheromones flow freely. Anko felt something strange, but she couldn't tell what it was. For some odd reason, she felt quite excited and sensitive in her lower parts.

She then felt that Naruto put his hands on her buttocks, sending a current through her body. "What is this? Why am I feeling so hot?" Anko thought excitedly.

Naruto then turned Anko and got on top of her. "Let's see who the kid is, Anko-chan!" Naruto shouted and started moving at a demolishing speed.

"W-wait, Naruto-kun! If you keep this up, I'll go crazy!" Anko screamed while receiving his thrusts. He paid no attention and increased the speed even more.

It didn't even pass a minute, and Anko felt she was about the reach the climax, "Naruto-kun, I-I-I'm c-cumming!" This time, she shouted, releasing a great orgasm.

Naruto felt that his penis began to be sucked in and squeezed tightly, but he didn't stop.

Anko, noticing his intentions, could only shout, "Wait, Naruto-kun! Wait! I'm going crazy; if you keep this up, I'll be completely in love with you!" Anko shouted beside herself.

Naruto smiled a little, but he kept moving. "Okay! Love me then, Anko-chan. You are mine alone; no one can touch you, and anyone who dares to do it; they’ll have to deal with me! And I won’t be nice about it!" Naruto shouted.

Anko was happy; Naruto didn't hate her or felt disgusted with her for doing this. Now he considered her as his, and that made her euphoric. Although he didn't say that he loved her, that wasn't important; maybe with time, he could learn about that feeling. It would certainly be the happiest day of her life when Naruto said those words that would mean a lot to her.

They continued this for several more minutes; Anko had an orgasmic expression on her face, which excited Naruto even more until he released his load.

Anko once again had started to squeeze him while both of them shouted their names in a moment of pure excitement.

The snake master had put her arms around Naruto's neck before arching back, and the Jinchūriki could just grab her hips to draw her even closer

Naruto ended his discharge and fell exhausted. He looked at Anko and stated while sighing, "This has been the best thing I've done in my life."

He closed his eyes for a second, and when he opened them to look at Anko, he noticed that she was on top of him again.

"Naruto-kun, what you just did was really mean; it's my turn to get revenge for what you've done," she stated, reintroducing Naruto's sensitive member into her cavity.

Naruto wearily sighed and continued having sex with Anko for several more hours; he couldn’t say no, and he didn’t want to say it either.

The living creatures of the forest would certainly be annoyed because two humans couldn't put a privacy seal to hide their screams.

Meanwhile, Kurama smiled proudly and thought, "Now you're a complete man, Naruto. You’ve grown a lot." 

Chapter finished. The lemon was something that I promised long ago; I hope you liked it.

Okay, Naruto had his conversation with his "lovely family" but don't worry, he was just acting; he can't send them to hell yet.

Naruto had the conversation with Kohta, and he decided to help Konoha, not because Naruto wants to do it, but because he wants to destroy Konoha with his own hands. He doesn’t want the help of the other villages. And you also saw how large Naruto's organization is.

Naruto now knows where he can get Kushina’s DNA, so he will do it I think in the invasion.

On the next chapter the Chunin exams begin, so be ready.

Okay, that's all; until the next chapter!

Chapter Text

Person talking, "It could be…"

Person thinking, "I don't like this idea."

Demon speaking/ Invocation talking, "No doubt you are someone to be reckoned with."

Demon thinking/Invocation thinking, "His heart is dark!"

Disclaimer: I do not own Naruto, Masashi Kishimoto does.

Chapter 15

The Next Day 5:30 a.m.

"*Yawn* I told you we would train, Naruto-kun, but I didn't think it would be so early," Anko said as she wiped her eyes.

They had stayed up late since they had dinner with Naruto the day before.

Naruto smiled and replied, "Come on, Anko-chan, it's strange to see you tired. If I recall correctly, you woke up without problems after having action all night long."

Anko smiled and added, "Hehehe, but yesterday you didn't give me your energies. So it's normal for me to be tired. Maybe if we had done something, I wouldn't be so tired."

Naruto smiled and was about to add something else when he heard Haku clearing her throat. "*Ahem* I think that's enough; we should train and leave those discussions for another time." Haku interrupted, resting against the Kubikiribōcho.

Both Naruto and Anko smiled; the Jinchūriki was still surprised at Haku's change of attitude. She was still reserved for some topics, but now it seemed that she expressed her feelings without problems.

Anko had told him that the reason was that she convinced her that he liked that kind of girls, and it was true; Naruto loved that kind of women.

Naruto then did a few stretching exercises before announcing, "Okay, I'll go with everything I've got from the beginning. I'm still not fully recovered, so if I want to have a head start with you, I must fight seriously."

Naruto stood firmly, closed his eyes and crossed his arms, inhaling deeply.

Anko and Haku didn't know what Naruto was trying to do, but they got no time to ask since he had opened them again.

"Done. Hmmm, I feel lighter, but it's not what I expected. It seems that being inactive during all this time made me lose much of my speed, damn it!"

Anko raised an eyebrow and asked, "What do you mean, Naruto-kun?"

Naruto looked at her, shook his head and replied, "Nothing important; just the seals that Gai-sensei gave me. Anyway, enough talking; let's fight!"

Anko instantly stood in battle stance; Naruto, on the other hand, had to duck because a huge sword had passed right over him.

He looked at Haku and shouted, "What the…?" 

Nevertheless, he couldn't finish because Anko shouted, "Sen'eijashu (Striking Shadow Snakes)!" 

Several snakes came out from Anko's sleeve in an attempt to bite him.

However, Naruto quickly jumped back, disappearing from view for a moment.

His speed surprised both women, but they quickly returned to their stances.

Haku grabbed her Kubikiribōcho and spun it rapidly, which amazed the Jinchūriki. "Wow...amazing, you've managed to get used to the Kubikiribōcho's weight. How did you do that?"

Haku made a face of horror, and Naruto instantly understood it, "I see, so it was Gai-sensei. I guess that you now use weights, don't you?"

Haku stuck the Kubikiribōcho into the ground and replied, "Yes, Anko-sensei managed to convince him, and he gave me some weights. However, I stopped using them once I got used to its weight."

Naruto smiled and then nodded. "Well, I think that you should continue using them; you'll increase your speed quite a bit more."

Haku almost added something, but then Anko shouted, "Katon: Ryūka no Jutsu (Fire Release: Fire Dragon Jutsu)!" She spat a big fire dragon, which went straight at Naruto.

He quickly did hand seals before shouting, "Doton: Doryūheki!" He knelt down, putting his hands on the ground and then an earth wall came out to stop the attack.

Naruto wiped some sweat from his forehead; he noticed his tiredness and the chakra exhaustion.

He stood up again, instantly feeling a powerful kick on his neck, which caused him to go through his Earth Wall and break it.

Naruto went in a straight line, and he could see several trees to the front. He knew it was going to hurt him; therefore, he channeled chakra around his body. He stretched out his arms and instantly stopped, staying completely still in the air.

Anko, who had kicked him, and Haku, who was doing some hand seals, were surprised. "H-He's floating," Haku spoke surprised.

Anko nodded but then shook her head; Naruto stated that he wanted her to be as sadistic as possible. Hence, she went running straight at him.

Haku imitated her; they would ask him about it once they finished training.

Meanwhile, Naruto landed on the ground and sat down; he was certainly out of shape. First, he was getting tired quickly. Second, he had dropped his guard, and Anko gave him that tremendous kick. Third, he let them see one of his secret skills.

Naruto placed his hands behind his back as he closed his eyes; he wanted to try out many things now that he was woken up, but due to the lack of chakra, it would be impossible.

He opened his eyes, just to see Anko and Haku in the air, falling towards him at high speed.

Anko had a kunai in her hand and Haku an ice sword. He quickly stood up but concluded that he wouldn't be able to get away; they were too close.

Anko and Haku noticed this; they tried to put their weapons out of the way, but they couldn't; Naruto would certainly be angry with them after this.

Naruto saw the weapons right in front of him; however, he suddenly felt that time stopped, just to hear a word in his mind that he unconsciously repeated, "Shuradō (Asura Path)…" 

Two arms came out from his shoulders, holding Haku and Anko's wrists before throwing them aside.

Afterward, Naruto looked with surprise at his extra arms as he moved them around. "I can use them at will. This must be from the Rinnegan; I've just unlocked another path. Hmmm, what else can I do?" 

"What the hell is that?" Anko quickly approached him and started touching the rods of his arms. "Wow, they look real, but they feel a bit rough, and they seem to be heavy. Can you control them at will?" Anko asked.

Naruto didn't answer, instead, with his extra right hand; he touched Anko's head, who nodded.

This time, Haku approached and asked, "Naruto-kun, what are you?"

Naruto looked at her, and she saw his purple eyes. "What happened to your eyes?"

Naruto deactivated his Rinnegan and his arms instantly disappeared. He fell to his knees because he had used too much Chakra.

Anko had caught him before he fell completely, "We'll now stop training; you aren't fully recovered yet, Naruto-kun."

Naruto thanked her and then looked at Haku; he motioned for her to get closer. "Okay, I'll tell you more about me, and it has to do with what you just saw."

Haku nodded; she sat down cross-legged on the ground and waited for Naruto.

Naruto sighed with tiredness and stated, "Okay, first I'll tell you the story about the Rinnegan..."

That name didn't surprise Haku since she had never heard of it. Naruto then told the story of the Rikudō Sennin, the battle against the Jūbi and much more; information that this time left Haku surprised.

Anko wasn't it since she already knew it. Well, she was surprised when seeing Naruto with those extra hands, and she couldn't help thinking about some things they could do with those extra hands. It was something that she would love to try out.

After several minutes, Naruto finished his story, and Haku was frankly surprised, "Do you have the eyes of the creator of the Ninja World? Why?" Haku asked.

Naruto shrugged and replied, "I don't know; I've already told you how I awakened my eyes. However, I have no idea why. But I don't care; I just see them as a tool, a tool that will help me to meet my goals."

Haku nodded, and this time, Anko spoke, "Well, we've been training for almost three hours, I think it's time to breakfast."

Naruto nodded; he stood up—now with more energies—and replied, "Sure thing, Anko-chan. What do you say if we get dango?"

Anko quickly nodded; she grabbed one of Naruto's hands and quickly led him to the dango shop.

Meanwhile, Haku smiled at the interaction, but then sighed, "Dango again..."

Then she followed her teammates.

Nine Days Later

Naruto was walking the village streets. There was no doubt that he hated the way that people looked at him now; he preferred the looks of hatred, rather than these stupid looks of respect and admiration; he didn't do anything to earn that consideration.

He only had the stupid ‘Namikaze’ last name; this annoying situation was quite difficult to endure because people approached to greet him or invite him to their homes every time they could.

In these nine days, he trained much; he was about to achieve the same gravity he had before his coma. However, his condition had affected him more than he had believed, and proof of that was the first training that Naruto had after awakening.

He had visited his girlfriend's several times, but he had also received unpleasant visits, mainly of those two geezers of the council: Homura and Koharu.

There was no doubt that those two idiots were on the list of people that Naruto wanted to kill, but he never would, because their heads belonged to Neji.

Regardless, those two idiots went to his apartment to tell him to integrate into the Hokage's family, but Naruto had never greeted them and had always closed the door on their faces.

They had also harassed him in the streets, but with the help of some clones, he had always managed to escape from them.

He also received constant visits from Menma, who kept asking him questions about how he became so strong and if he could teach him some of his Fūton Justus.

Naruto avoided those questions as a champion and Menma could never get anything from him.

His father had visited him too, and had always asked about his health condition; it was certainly annoying.

He thought that he should have sent them to hell that day. However, he had felt a lot of pressure, and because of the exhaustion, he could only say the first thing that came to his mind.

Although it was a good thing, after all, he got the location of his mother's body, in addition to something that would help him to perform the Hiraishin, which he already was starting up. He just needed a bit of blood from his father and then read the steps that the Scroll of Seals contained.

Naruto continued walking until he could feel several presences behind him. He turned around and saw a…stone? Well, it was something like that, but this 'stone' was square, and besides, it had holes in the front.

Naruto just shook his head and continued walking.

That ‘stone’ had followed him, and Naruto tried not to pay attention. However, Naruto growled in annoyance after a few minutes; he unsheathed his Ninjato—which he now strapped to his back—and stabbed it before giving it a kick that sent the 'stone' crashing into the wooden fence.

There was an explosion, and three children showed up, who began to complain of pain.

Naruto approached them and stated, "Udon, Moegi, and Konohamaru. I've already told you not to do this. If you want to be like me, you'll at least need better costumes." Naruto sounded harsh, but it was a fact; if they wanted to be real ninjas, they would have to stop playing around, and he was more than willing to make it clear.

Konohamaru rubbed his head before standing up to exclaim, "Hey, boss! Why did you do that? I thought that the sword would kill me."

Naruto smiled sinisterly and replied, "Well, I told you that I would if you kept bothering me." He came closer and pointed his Ninjato to a pale Konohamaru.

Nevertheless, the boy remembered something and changed his expression to a more serious one.

Naruto smiled and nodded as he sheathed his Ninjato, "Very well; don't ever let anyone intimidate you. Remember that if they do it, they'll kill you easily."

"Hai, Boss!" the three of them shouted.

Udon and Moegi had also been scared, but they had also remembered Naruto's words, so they imitated Konohamaru, who then approached Naruto and exclaimed, "Boss, come on! Teach me a super cool jutsu; you said that you would teach me one."

Naruto stepped back and asked, "Do you remember the requirements?"

Konohamaru thought about it for a moment, but then he reluctantly repeated those words, "You must graduate from the Academy and kill at least five people..."

"Or kill twenty people if you don't want to wait until the day of your graduation," Naruto added, which discouraged Konohamaru even more.

Konohamaru wanted to give another solution but couldn't because someone shouted, "Nii-san!" Everyone turned around.

Naruto sighed and put a forced smile on his face, "Hey, Menma, and… Banshee?" Naruto asked looking at Sakura, who had a very unfriendly face.

"What the hell happened to you? Did Sasuke's idiot decline you a date?" Naruto asked.

Sakura felt as if a big rock had fallen onto her.

Menma quickly waved his arms and whispered, "Shhhh, yes; that's what happened. But Sasuke said worse things, and now she's like this; don't make her angry, Nii-san. Sakura can be terrible when she gets mad."

Naruto shrugged, and just at that moment; he felt a tug. He looked down and saw Konohamaru, who didn't hear a word; he just saw that Sakura was staring at Naruto.

Konohamaru smiled as he continued pulling Naruto's jacket, "Boss, you're better than I expected." Konohamaru stated as he daringly moved his eyebrows.

Naruto raised an eyebrow and asked, "What the hell are you talking about?"

Konohamaru's touch stopped and stated, "She is your..." Then he raised his little finger.

Sakura growled, and Naruto knew what he meant. Thus, he replied. "That? Of course not! I'm not that crazy. Though I don't know; she has got a fine ass," Naruto stated the latter while looking at Sakura, more specifically, at her ass.

Sakura blushed a bit, but she quickly regained her composure and yelled as she clenched her fists. "Narutooooo!" Then she gave a mighty blow to Naruto's face, who went flying until crashing into a fence.

Menma and Team Konohamaru sprinted to his aid, but when they arrived, Naruto disappeared in a puff of smoke.

Konohamaru turned around and yelled, "Hey, what's wrong with you?! You're lucky that the boss threw a compliment to a girl as ugly as you are! You surely are a man!" That was a big mistake, as Sakura made a face that scared everyone.

Konohamaru knew that he was in danger, so he sprinted in the opposite direction, just like everyone else.

The kid kept running without looking his way until he suddenly hit something, which made him stop.

He looked up and saw a teenager with his face painted and a strange black jumpsuit.

Behind that person, a blonde girl with four ponytails was. The person standing before him growled, "That hurts..." Then he reached down and raised Konohamaru by his garment's neck.

"That hurt me, brat." The strange man growled once again.

"Stop it, Kankurō. If you keep this up, we'll be in trouble." the girl spoke.

Sakura got worried; for some strange reason, she distrusted these people. "Sorry, we were just joking and..." However, she couldn't finish because Kankurō glared at her.

Menma was tired of this situation and demanded, "Let him go; he's just a kid, don't you see?"

Kankurō ignored him; he chuckled and replied while smiling, "I want to have some fun before someone comes to bother..."

"Well, I'm sorry for bothering you," someone interrupted him.

Kankurō tried to turn around, but he felt that someone was holding his hand and also felt something against his back. "How the hell did he do that?" Kankurō mentally asked, unable to rotate.

All were surprised; Naruto had appeared out of nowhere—right behind Kankurō—while what seemed to be a clone was holding Kankurō's hand.

Naruto moved his Ninjato, causing a slight cut in Kankurō's ribs, who slightly gasped. "I recommend you release the child. First, because he's the grandson of one of the few people who are important to me, and second, because he's my subordinate, and I can't let you hurt him."

Kankurō chuckled and turned his head, but when making eye contact, he could only think of the worst. His eyes reminded him a lot of his brother Gaara, only that those eyes were even worse.

Kankurō could tell that this boy had killed much more people than his brother. "Who the hell is this guy? Those are the eyes of a murderer." Kankurō thought with fear before sighing in defeat and releasing Konohamaru.

Naruto's clone quickly caught Konohamaru and took him where the other children were, who were staring at him with eyes full of admiration.

Naruto's clone could tell that Konohamaru wanted to say something, so he stopped him with his hand as the original sheathed his Ninjato. "I hope that I didn't ruin your moment," Naruto said apparently to no one.

Many wondered what he meant, and they heard a growl coming from a tree near them. They looked there and saw Sasuke with a stone in his hand.

He jumped down and replied, "Hmph, I was watching in case you needed help. After all, you're a weakling."

Naruto chuckled; he approached Sasuke and ruffled his hair, which made him growl loudly. "Come on, come on, Sasuke-chan, we all know that isn't true. The truth is that the reason I didn't kill you yet is that I don't want to dirty my hands. But if you continue with this attitude, I'll have to."

Sasuke growled even louder, but before he could say anything, Naruto pushed him aside.

The Jinchūriki turned around and looked at the two Suna Shinobi, “How rude I am, behold guests to this humble village, and I haven't even introduced myself yet. My name is Naruto, Naruto Namikaze Uzumaki." He bowed slightly.

Both brothers were surprised when hearing his the last name. It was the Hokage's lost son, and according to rumors, he had defeated two Shinobigatana so far.

Naruto looked at Kankurō, stretched his hand out and stated, "It is certainly a pleasure to have you in this village. Forgive me for what I did earlier, Mr..."

When hearing Naruto's politeness, Kankurō completely forgot what he had seen in his eyes before. Therefore, he smiled, shook his hand with Naruto and replied, "My name is Kankurō. And she is..."

However, before he could say her name, Naruto made a stop sign with his free hand.

He ended the handshake and walked towards Temari, who couldn't help blushing for some reason.

Naruto stood in front of her, and he opened his mouth to speak, but a voice that scared the Suna Shinobis did it before. "Kankurō, you're a disgrace to our village," a sinister voice stated.

Those present were surprised, except for Naruto, who rolled his eyes because 'an idiot dared to interrupt him when he was about to talk to a beautiful girl'.

"G-Gaara," Kankurō stuttered as he gave a nervous smile and looked at a tree.

"Why do you think we came all this way to Konoha?" Gaara asked, hanging with his feet on the branch of the tree.

"Listen, G-Gaara, we've solved the whole problem; y-you don't need to get mad," Kankurō spoke again, but with increasing nervousness.

"Shut up or I will kill you." Kankurō opened his eyes in shock.

Gaara used a Shunshin and appeared right in front of Kankurō, who was much more scared than before.

Sasuke couldn't help glaring at the newcomer, "That hair color..." Sasuke thought, gritting his teeth.

"Please, forgive my siblings," Gaara asked looking towards the others.

After that, he turned and looked at his siblings, "Follow me, we didn't come here to..." However, he couldn't finish because he felt a push that made him fall to the ground.

The Suna ninja's eyes widened at this. "Hey, asshole; I was trying to talk to someone," Naruto interrupted with annoyance.

Gaara stared wide-eyed at Naruto, "How?"

The Uzumaki raised an eyebrow in confusion. "‘How’ what?"

Kankurō took the floor and replied, "How could you touch Gaara?"

Naruto was even more confused than before, "Well, with my hand, didn't you see it?"

Kankurō shook his head at this and replied, "No, it's not that. Nobody can touch Gaara, and when I say nobody, I mean nobody."

Naruto made a face of extreme confusion, but then he moved his hand from left to right and stated, "Well, I don't care about that; I was trying to do something else."

Naruto slowly walked towards a shocked Temari, who blushed once again when seeing him. "Excuse me, miss, but we couldn't talk due to some annoyances. My name is Naruto, could you be so kind and tell me yours?"

"Temari," she instantly replied.

Naruto then took her right hand, looked into her eyes, which made Temari blush even more. He smiled and kissed her hand softly. After that, Naruto released her hand, which made her sigh unconsciously.

In the distance, Konohamaru and his friends looked at Naruto with stars in their eyes; their boss was just too cool for them.

Menma smiled as he asked himself how many women his brother would need to feel satisfied.

Sasuke just growled, and Sakura thought this was romantic, wishing that Sasuke would someday do that with her.

Kankurō also smiled, completely forgetting the fear that he had felt earlier.

Gaara, on the other hand, quietly stood up before walking towards Naruto. Once there, he raised his head and asked, "What's your name?"

Naruto stopped talking to his sister; he turned around and replied, "Are you stupid or just a little slow? Look, I've said my name like four times already. You need some manners, brat."

Naruto was behaving like that because Kurama had told him that he was the Ichibi’s Jinchūriki and that they didn’t get along. Although Naruto still didn’t know why they had been so shocked when he managed to touch Gaara.

Gaara smiled slightly and continued as he walked away, "You are someone interesting, Naruto Namikaze. I'm sure that you'll be able to prove my existence. Even more, because mother tells me to stay away from you."

Naruto didn't take his threat seriously; he concluded that his 'mother' was his Bijū; with all the knowledge he now had in his head, Naruto could tell that he had a poor quality seal. And probably, his Biju was telling him that it was his mother.

Naruto knew Gaara was strong, but the Uzumaki was sure that he wouldn't make him fight seriously. Naruto then said goodbye to the Sand brothers' before disappearing into a Fire Shunshin.

Konohamaru and his friends were surprised again. However, they decided not to follow him; instead, they decided to go to create a better costume to surprise their boss.

Meanwhile, the Genins of Team 7 were still stunned; they didn't know why Naruto was behaving like that, but they believed it was because Gaara interrupted him when he tried to talk to that Kunoichi.

They then looked at each other, and Menma spoke, "Should we train a bit?"

Sasuke automatically nodded and replied, "Let's go."

Menma smiled, both walked towards their training camp, and Sakura decided to follow them.

Behind them, some people —two men and one girl— had been observing from the branch of a tree. "What do you think?" one of the men asked.

"They don’t seem to be good, but that guy with the whisker marks is different. We have to continue observer the black haired guy and the guy with the pumpkin, and especially the other guy," replied the other man; his face completely covered with bandages.

The other two nodded, and he was about add something else when they heard a voice behind them. "Can you tell me why you want to spy on me? Of course, if that were possible."

They quickly turned around, but they couldn’t find anyone.

"Where are you? Show yourself," Dosu demanded.

He continued looking in that direction until he felt a hand on his shoulder, which made him open his eyes in shock, "What do you mean? I'm right here," Naruto replied calmly.

Those present could only think, "Fast." Therefore, Dosu and his teammates jumped back, standing in battle stances.

Naruto smiled and spoke as he waved his hands, "Come on! There's no need to get all emotional; I just asked a question..." However, he made a dark expression that made them sweat. "A question that I want you to answer."

Dosu shook his head and said as he raised one of his arms slightly, "If you want that information, you’ll have to take it from us, but it won't be easy." He leaned down, ready to attack Naruto.

Nevertheless, Naruto made a stop sign. "Don't worry; I'll get the information soon. I'm sure that you're here for the Chunin exams, so I'll get it there. Besides, I don't want to carry and get rid of the bodies of two bastards." The last remark made both men growl.

Naruto ignored them and felt the impulse of saying 'hi' to a girl.

He slowly walked over them; Dosu and Zaku prepared themselves for a fight but noticed that Naruto appeared right in front of their female teammate in the blink of an eye, and they couldn't help thinking what they thought at first.

"Hello, miss. My name is Naruto; could you tell me your name?"

She hesitated at first but then replied with nervousness, "M-my name is K-Kin, K-Kin T-Tsuchi."

Naruto took her hand and kissed it. "Kin, what a beautiful name. May I ask this question? What is someone as pretty as you doing with idiots as ugly as them?"

Both men growled; Zaku raised his hand and pointed it towards Naruto.

However, before he could attack, Dosu stopped him and whispered, "No, don't lose control. Remember our mission."

Naruto heard him but decided to ignore it; he would find it out later.

Meanwhile, Kin was speechless. For the first time in her life, a man had treated her with chivalry, and it was something unusual but pleasant.

She looked at Naruto with a slight blush on her cheeks. "I...I..." She tried to answer, but it was tough. She was unable of conceiving the fact that someone had treated her with chivalry, and she liked it.

Naruto smiled at her hesitation and added, "Don't worry; we'll see each other again. Until next time, Kin-chan."

The female ninja blushed at the affectionate nickname; she smiled before seeing Naruto disappearing in a Shunshin.

She sighed in disappointment and looked at her teammates, who had disapproving expressions.

Therefore, she shook her head and stated, "He's gone; we must continue our mission."

Dosu and Zaku looked at each other; Dosu shrugged and replied, "You're right; let's go." Then they all disappeared from there.

Ninja Academy - The Next Day

"You’ve finally come," Naruto said looking Sai.

"Excuse me, Naruto-senpai, but Danzō-sama was telling me some things," Sai replied looking directly at Naruto, who squinted at the name.

Naruto turned around and looked at Haku while asking, "Are you ready, Haku-chan? This place will be filled with bastards."

Haku nodded and replied, "More than ready, Naruto-kun. We should enter now; Anko-sensei told us that we couldn't be late, or they may disqualify us."

Naruto nodded as well, then turned back to look at Sai and gestured him to follow him, Sai nodded and followed his teammates. They walked into the academy, and Naruto asked, "So tell me, Sai; where will you stay now that you'll have a 'normal' life? I'm sure that my father won't let you return to Root as long as you are my teammate."

"You're right, Naruto-senpai, but Danzō-sama has solved that, so you shouldn’t be worried," Sai replied with a fake smile.

Naruto sighed and replied, "Sai, I give a shit what can happen to you. Remember that you’re only here so we can participate in these exams. If you disappear, I wouldn't even notice it."

Sai continued giving his fake smile and responded, "I'm glad to hear that, Naruto-senpai. According to this book, people can be very sincere with their friends."

Naruto shook his head, but he didn't respond. They continued walking and saw that many people were gathered. Naruto walked through the crowd, pushing them to the sides.

When he was at the front, the Jinchuriki could hear a familiar voice, "Cancel the Genjutsu; I'm going to the third floor." It was Sasuke—Menma, Sakura and the Genin of Team 9 were at his sides.

Naruto then looked at them, specifically at Lee; it had been months since the last time he had seen him, and now he looked completely different.

Now he wore a white ANBU battle armor; his hair had grown much, almost to the point of losing that horrible bowl hairstyle. Besides, now, instead of white bandages, they were black, and he wore ANBU pants and sandals of the same color.

Naruto nodded, it seemed that Lee began to take his career as ninja seriously. Naruto didn't realize how much time had passed, but it had been a lot since Sasuke, and the person at the door tried to kick each other, but in a burst of speed, Lee appeared between them to stop them.

After that, Lee released both of them and Neji approached him, "Hey, what about the plan? It was you who said that we shouldn't attract attention."

Lee said nothing; he just snorted and walked towards the opposite direction.

Tenten and Neji shook their heads but said nothing. "Hey, what's your name?" Neji asked, looking at Sasuke.

The Uchiha replied, "Hmph. It's rude to ask that without introducing yourself first."

Neji ignored that and asked again. "You're a rookie, right? How old are you?"

Sasuke also ignored these questions and stated, "I have no reason to answer you."

Neji squinted and only now, he could see Naruto, who stood behind Sasuke to shake his hair. "Come on, come on, Sasuke-chan; what are those manners? Neji was asking you a few simple questions. There's no need talk like that. Indeed, you should be thankful that someone like Neji wants to know something about you," Naruto stated as he continued shaking Sasuke's hair, who couldn't help grunting.

"Damn you, Naruto!"

Naruto smiled and exclaimed, "Wow! You've called me by my name. It's certainly an honor, Uchiha-sama. Now I can die in peace!" Naruto bowed slightly towards Sasuke, who was red in rage.

Afterward, Naruto stopped bothering him, approached Tenten and greeted her. "Hello, Tenten-chan, good luck with the exam,"

Tenten smiled and nodded. "Of course! You too, Naruto-kun!"

Just then, the other members of Naruto's team stood at his side. "Naruto-senpai, I think it's time to go," Sai commented with his typical expression.

Neji couldn't help asking with a genuine interest in his voice, "Who is he, Naruto-san?"

Naruto shrugged and replied, "Nobody important, Neji. But hey, if you'll excuse me, we must withdraw."

Neji nodded, and after some minutes, he walked away along with Tenten.

Further, back Sasuke growled and returned with his teammates. Menma had laughed when his 'Nii-san' did that to Sasuke, but he didn't want them to fight. First, because he knew that it would be bad for Sasuke, and secondly because he and Sasuke were friends after a long time.

The fact that Neji didn't ask for his name didn't offend Menma since they already knew each other because he visited Hinata's house often.

Team 7 continued walking until they arrived at a large salon, and when they were about to leave, everyone heard a voice, "Hey you two! Wait!"

Team 7 turned around, looked up and could see Lee, who had a solemn expression on his face.

"What do you want?" Sasuke asked, looking directly at Lee, who jumped and landed in front of them.

"Uchiha, Namikaze, fight me… now."

Sasuke snorted and asked, "Do you want us to fight you? Hmph, in case you didn't know, we're the best Genin of the Village. A loser like you would have no chance against us, and much less if you fight against us at the same time."

Lee growled as he stood in a fighting stance, "You're wrong in that. I can fight with you two without any problems. Moreover, you're mistaken about that you guys are the best Genin of the Village. There is one..." Lee then closed his eyes, and the image of Naruto killing Karashi came to his mind.

Lee clenched his fists and shouted. "Sasuke Uchiha, Menma Namikaze, get ready because here I go!" Then he ran towards them.

Both chuckled, but that changed when Lee disappeared from their sight.

"What a speed!" Sasuke and Menma thought at the same time; they stood in defensive stances, but to no avail since Lee appeared among them, with both hands on the floor and giving them a powerful kick that sent them flying in opposite directions before crashing into the concrete wall.

Lee snorted and stated, "Pathetic, you can't beat me. You're brats who don't know what hard work is."

Menma and Sasuke growled, they stood up again, looked at each other and nodded.

Sakura was thrilled because they would now fight seriously. She saw that Sasuke activated his Sharingan, and she couldn't help blushing. Menma crossed his fingers to make a few shadow clones; they would definitely win now.

Nevertheless, she saw something that creeped her out; Lee had appeared in front of them at an entirely different speed, "I won't allow you!"

Menma and Sasuke were surprised as they saw Lee on the floor, using his right hand for support and kicking their jaws strongly, which sent them upwards.

Lee took a big jump, ranking just behind both of them. They were surprised, seeing that the bandages on Lee's arms came off. "The hard work and the desire to overcome are better than a gift." Both opened their eyes and just when the bandages were about to wrap them, a kunai passed in front of them, stopping something that would have ended in tragedy.

"Stop right there, Lee!" Lee at that voice squatted in front of a tortoise. "Lee, you know very well that this technique is forbidden."

Lee snorted and replied, "You always say that, but the techniques are to be used; it doesn't matter if they're forbidden, not for nothing I've trained to perfect the Lotus."

"Lee..." the tortoise whispered, and just then a smoke explosion revealed Maito Gai, who had a sad expression on his face.

"Lee, don't continue with this attitude. Make your flames of youth burn again." Gai begged, hoping that Lee would finally hear him.

However, Lee got up and replied, "My flames of youth died in that mission, and until I finish with him, I'll never be the same."

Gai sighed sadly at his attitude; he walked over Lee and put a hand on his shoulder as he said, "Come on, Lee. You don't have to stay angry with him. That was his mission, I'm sure he didn't want to do that. You must forget it and move on."

"I don't think so." Then Lee jumped back and got away. Gai shook his head and sighed at the attitude of his student, although he was sad, he couldn't blame Naruto due to Lee's change; it was part of his mission.

Neji had told him that the boy had broken his word; hence, he couldn't blame Naruto, and he only hoped that Lee would understand that.

Gai then looked at the Gennin of Kakashi's team, especially at the kids who had just fought against Lee; he approached and announced, "Forgive Lee; he didn't mean what he said. He's going through something very hard right now; he wasn't always like this. Unfortunately, he was on a mission that changed his character, but I'm sure that one day you'll see his flames of youth again!"

Meanwhile, Menma and Sasuke were still stunned; that person had defeated them in a heartbeat. They both groaned; they got up, and Sasuke spoke, "Sakura, we have to go; it's getting late."

Sakura nodded and followed her friends, but not before saying goodbye to Gai, who smiled. Lee had crushed them, but he didn't know how the result would have been in a more open space. Gai then used a Shunshin and went to the Jounin room.

In the distance, some people observed all this and one of them spoke, "That boy is splendid, what do you think, Naruto-kun?" Haku asked.

Naruto, who was smiling, replied, "Yes, there's no doubt that Lee has become stronger. I'm looking forward to having a battle with him; I want to experience at first-hand how strong he has become. Anyway, it's time to go; the test will start in a few minutes."

The rest nodded and followed Naruto, who headed to the test room. After a few seconds, they spotted the room. The members of Team 7 were at the door talking to Kakashi, who was giving them some encouragement words. Afterward, he disappeared in a puff of smoke.

Menma nodded to every word of his other Nii-san, and when they were about to enter, he heard a sound on the floor. The blonde-haired young man turned around and saw Naruto with his teammates.

He smiled and asked, "Are you ready for this, Nii-san?"

Naruto shrugged and replied, "Of course, and although I would love to continue this conversation, I think it's time to enter to get this over with."

Everyone nodded; Sasuke opened the door, and he and the other came in. Shinobi of different villages filled the room, which greatly surprised the members of Team 7.

"W-Wow..." Menma muttered; he was completely shocked.

Sakura swallowed some saliva and added, "W-What is this? So many people, are they going to take the exam too? They seem so strong." She thought the latter, swallowing more saliva.

Naruto wasn't surprised; he just leaned back against the wall and closed his eyes; the Uzumaki thought that he could rest a bit before the exam started. However, after a few seconds, he felt that someone jumped on him, causing him to fall to the floor.

Naruto opened his eyes a little bit and saw Ino, who was smiling widely. "You've finally come, Naruto-kun!" She called, kissing him softly, which Naruto returned.

Most of the Genin were surprised; some of them said nothing since they already knew it and it didn't bother them, but 'others' didn't know it and they couldn't help glaring at Ino.

After separating, Naruto smiled and replied, "Oh, yeah, I got lost on the road of life, and that's why I'm late."

Team 7 felt a Déjà vu moment, and they looked at Naruto in shock, who didn't notice it.

Meanwhile, in the Jounin room, Kakashi sneezed. He looked at the sky and thought, "Another person is following my philosophy."

Gai approached him and asked. "Hey, are you okay, Kakashi? I don't want my eternal rival getting sick and miss how his Genins lose against mine."

Kakashi looked at Gai and asked, "Excuse me, did you say something?"

Gai instantly cursed Kakashi due to his 'cool' attitude, but Kakashi just smiled behind his mask while continuing reading his book.

Returning with Naruto, the couple stood up, just to hear a lazy voice, "Mendokuse, are you going to take this troublesome exam too? I think I should leave now that I have time."

Naruto turned his head and saw Shikamaru and Chouji. "Shikamaru, I can see that you haven't changed one bit since the last time we saw each other."

Shikamaru sighed, "You're right, and that day, you almost ended up fighting against our Jounin-sensei. Only someone like you would be crazy enough to challenge a Jounin. Anyway, *Aaah* I think I'll take a nap until the test starts." Then Shikamaru walked away, but he stopped since someone spoke.

"Yeah! I've finally found you all. So, I can see that everyone is here, but I have no idea who those two are," Kiba pointed, looking at Sai and Haku.

"Hey, dog breath. This idiot with the stupid face is Sai, and the lovely girl next to me is Haku-chan." Naruto replied.

Kiba had almost drooled when seeing her, especially due to that blue kimono that left little to the imagination.

Naruto seeing Kiba's attitude growled and stated, "Lift your eyes, dog breath, or I swear that’s the last thing you'll ever see."

Kiba instantly stopped; he took a few steps and stood in front of Naruto, raising his head to look into his eyes. "Ha! What would you do, Dobe? If I recall correctly, you were the weakest in the academy. Don't think that your attitude intimidated me."

Naruto looked straight into his eyes, with an entirely blank expression, which surprised Sai a little bit.

Kiba stared back, but he couldn't keep it for long because he began to feel intimidated. However, he hid it and just snorted while walking away.

"Hinata-chan!" Naruto heard and saw his brother running towards the Hyūga girl.

She smiled and stated softly, "Hello, Menma-kun, let's give our best effort to become Chunin."

Menma smiled at her, "Of course! I'll become a Chunin, and I'll be one step closer to becoming Hokage."

Far away, Neji couldn't help glaring at them. Naruto was right, after all. Although he had already seen Menma in the Hyūga mansion, he couldn't help feeling angry because Hinata had lied to him.

Naruto approached at his brother's fiancé, looking at her carefully, which scared her a little.

"Hmmm, your name is Hinata, right?" Naruto asked.

Hinata nodded nervously; she had never spoken to Naruto, but she had always felt sorry for him because of the treatment he received when he was a child. She got happy when she learned that he was Menma's brother.

"Hmmm." She heard, seeing Naruto shaking his head.

Therefore, she asked, "I-Is there something wrong, Naruto-san?"

Naruto looked at her and asked, "Why are you wearing that jacket? It's not winter."

Hinata blushed in embarrassment, as she began to play with her fingers.

Menma interrupted, "Okay, Nii-san, don't bother Hinata-chan."

Naruto stared at him for a few seconds until he shrugged, "I just wanted to tell her to pull her jacket off so that you can have some fun with her." With that said, he moved away.

Menma and Hinata hugely blushed since they could understand what Naruto had implied.

Naruto then spotted Shino, shook hands with him and both started talking; they hadn't seen one another since graduation day, and Shino had always been one of the few people who he liked there.

After a few minutes, the rookies heard someone speaking, "Hey, you guys. You should quiet down a little more."

They turned their heads towards that voice, seeing a gray-haired boy with glasses.

"So you're the new rookies that just graduated from the academy, correct? You're wasting your time with those cute faces. Damn, this isn't a field trip," the boy stated.

Ino exclaimed since the boy had looked at her when he said the latter. "Hey, who the hell do you think you are to tell us that?!"

He smiled a little; he moved his glasses up and answered, "My name is Kabuto Yakushi. Look around you."

The rookies looked over there, seeing the angry faces on everyone.

Kabuto smiled at their expressions and added, "They're nervous because there's not much time till the exam starts, so that's why I recommend you to lower the volume a little more."

Kabuto then sighed and stated, "I guess I can't blame you or anything since you're just a few rookies who don't know anything. It makes me remember the old me."

Sakura took the floor and asked, "Is this your second time, then?"

Kabuto sighed and shook his head. "No. It's my seventh time. This exam is done twice a year, and this is my fourth year." Almost everyone was surprised as they asked themselves how hard the test was.

Sakura spoke again, "So you know a lot about this exam, right?" Kabuto nodded.

Menma smiled and added, "Then you must be an expert, Kabuto-san."

Kabuto smiled, and before he could say anything, Shikamaru added, "But he hasn't passed the exam."

Kabuto scratched his head with embarrassment and replied, "Yeah, that's true. But hey, maybe I could give you some information since you are rookies after all."

Kabuto then put a hand in his ninja bag and continued as he pulled something out from it. "With these Ninja Info Cards."

He showed them some orange cards, and they didn't know what those things were, except for Sai and Naruto. The latter was looking suspiciously at Kabuto; his history didn't convince him at all, and he could also tell that he lied about almost everything.

Kabuto knelt down and put his cards on the floor as he explained how the cards worked.

When he finished, Sasuke asked, "And are there cards with detailed information about someone?"

Kabuto nodded and asked one of his own, "Is there someone that interests you?" Sasuke nodded.

Kabuto gathered his cards and continued, "The information of this exam's examinees aren't perfect, but I've burned and saved them. They include the information of all of you, as well. Tell me whatever you know about the people you know that interest you. I'll look it up for you."

"Gaara of Suna. Rock Lee and Naruto Namikaze of Konoha," Sasuke replied.

Naruto sighed; he didn't mind since he was sure that there was only information from his days as a Genin, so he had no reason to worry about.

Naruto's girlfriends looked at him to see if that bothered him, but it wasn't the case because he looked asleep, which made them smile.

"Oh, you know the names. Then it won't take me long."

Kabuto then grabbed three cards; he placed them in front of him and continued, "Here we go."

Sasuke looked at the cards and ordered, "Show me."

Kabuto nodded and took one of them; he put it on the floor and spun it as he charged a bit of his Chakra in it. "Let's look first at Rock Lee. He's just one year older than you are. Mission experience, 20 D-rank and 17 C-rank ones. His sensei is Maito Gai, and his teammates are, Tenten and Neji Hyūga. His specialty is Taijutsu; if you want a hand-to-hand fight against him, you should be good at it, or he will crush you in seconds. Besides, his combat skills have increased dramatically in the recent months. His other skills as Genjutsu and Ninjutsu are nil." Lee clenched his fists as he stared at Naruto, who was still sleeping.

Menma and Sasuke nodded; now they knew why they had lost so fast. They were determined to defeat him if they fought again.

Menma and Sasuke nodded, now they knew the reason they lost against Lee. They were committed to beat him if they fought again.

Kabuto then took another card and continue, "Now Sabaku no Gaara (Gaara of the Desert)." Kabuto did the same.

"Mission experience, 8 C-rank ones and… This is amazing! He did a B-rank mission as Genin!" Kabuto exclaimed, surprising most of the Genin while asking themselves who he was. Gaara, meanwhile, was staring maniacally at Naruto.

"But that's all the information I have about him since he is a foreign ninja. But it seems that he has returned from all his missions unharmed." That information surprised them again, and Shikamaru expressed it, "He did a B-rank mission as a Genin and was unharmed?"

Kabuto nodded and took another card, "And finally, Naruto Namikaze."

All those who had heard the rumors paid attention. "Now, Naruto Namikaze, Jinchūriki of the Kyūbi no Yoko." All those who ignored this information looked at Naruto with extreme surprise, especially Gaara who was smiling worse than before.

"Mission experience… How is this possible?" That certainly caught their attention, and Kiba asked, “Ha! Did the dobe only do D-rank missions or did Hokage-sama create E-rank missions just for him? Hehehe."

Naruto didn't even bother to answer, just his girls showed their annoyance, and Kiba at those angry glances could only feel tiny.

Kabuto shook his head and replied, "No, it's not that...Mission experience, five C-rank missions; four B-rank missions; six A-rank missions, and one S-rank mission. Not a single D-rank mission." Everyone opened their eyes in shock, even Naruto's girlfriends; they didn't know that Naruto had done so many missions... and what a collection of missions they were.

Naruto, meanwhile, could feel that many were observing him. He opened his eyes and stretched out a bit, seeing that the people were still looking at him in that way.

Therefore, he growled in annoyance. "Do I have something on my face?! Stop staring at me or I swear that I'll kill you all!" He exclaimed, pointing to the Shinobi in front of him.

The Genin of his generation knew that he hated being constantly observed, and they also knew that he wasn't threatening them. However, those who didn't know about this were intimidated due to the strength in his voice.

Menma, on the other hand, approached Naruto and asked, "But Nii-san, how could you do these missions?"

Naruto turned his head, shrugged and replied, "Well, Anko-chan and I made a bet if I could do them; the winner touched on top for a week. Hehehe, and let me tell you that I did my best to win the bet."

Almost everyone could understand what he meant, which made them blush. Especially Menma; he had a perverted Godfather, who always talked about these things.

Kabuto stared at Naruto; he coughed and continued, "Yes, it is amazing, Naruto-san, and you haven't even been a Genin for a year yet. Anyway, that's not all..."

People paid attention again. "His specialties are the Kenjutsu and Ninjutsu, besides the tactics of infiltration and stealth. According to this, he has control of four elements. Earth, Fire, Lightning and Wind."

People got surprised, and Kabuto continued, "He has one of the Legendary Swords of Kiri and also managed to defeat two Shinobigatana; Zabuza Momochi and Raiga Kurosuki, obtaining from the last one the Kiba. It's certainly impressive, but that's not all. He also..."

Nevertheless, he couldn't finish because Naruto interrupted him. "I think that'll be enough, Kabuto-san. I don't want them to know more about me..." He paused and looked at the Shinobi, "Or I'll have to kill them all."

Naruto gave a smile that it made Gaara's look ridiculous. People were scared again, and even more because they felt the slightest killing intent that Naruto was releasing. Though it was little, it was enough.

Naruto after making his point view clear leaned back against the wall. He didn't know how much time passed, but he supposed a lot since he heard that Sasuke started shouting things. He opened his eyes and looked again where Kabuto was, who was now lying on the floor with Menma and Sakura by his side, helping him to get up.

Naruto saw that the Sound Ninjas of yesterday were standing in front of Kabuto, and Zaku stated, "Write this in your cards. The three Oto ninjas will become Chunin."

Naruto stood before them before looking at Kabuto.

He shrugged and smiled as he walked towards the young woman, "Hi, Kin-chan, why are you still with these two idiots?"

Zaku and Dosu growled while Kin blushed and replied as she tried to look at him, "G-Good morning, Naruto-kun."

Dosu and Zaku looked at her with anger while grunting. "You fucking bitch! What did we tell you yesterday?! Remember!" Zaku shouted as he tried to slap her, but Naruto stopped his hand before he could.

Zaku turned to him, but in doing so, he felt tiny due to his gaze.

"Listen to me, you fucking trash. I hate when people disrespect women who didn't do anything. I'm sure that Kin-chan isn't that which you said."

Naruto squeezed Zaku's arm, making him show signs of pain. "If you ever disrespect her, or worse, if you try to hit her again... I'll rip both of your arms off; then I'll cut your legs before putting everything inside your ass. And trust me; you'll be alive to feel it."

He squeezed his arm even harder, but before the Uzumaki could break it, they saw a smoke explosion in front of the blackboard.

Naruto instantly released the grip. Zaku fell as he rubbed his arm.

Kin, meanwhile, could only blush as her heart pumped faster.

Haku and Ino were about to ask him where he met this girl, but the smoke explosion avoided it, "Quiet down, you punks! Sorry to keep you waiting. I'm the examiner of the first test of the Chunin Selection Exam, Morino Ibiki."

After that, the examiner pointed to the rookies and shouted, "You three; those of Otogakure. Don't think you can do anything you want before the exam. Do you want us to fail you already? Besides; you Naruto! Behave better!"

Naruto smiled and replied, "Sure, Ibiki-san. But I couldn't allow such disrespect."

Many wondered where Naruto met the examiner. Haku, however, knew it since Anko had told her that they had worked together to get information from people in the past.

Ibiki chuckled before putting a straight face, "It's a chance to say this. I won't allow fights unless the other examiners or I say so. Even if you have permission, you can't kill. Pigs who go against me will fail immediately. Understood?"

Zaku snorted and replied, "This test seems soft and smooth."

The examiners chuckled, and Ibiki spoke again, "We'll now begin with the first part of the Chunin Selection Exam."

Ibiki then explained what they had to do before the exam started.

Once everyone had sat down, Ibiki said the rules. Naruto didn't pay attention since he already knew them.

Therefore, he just waited for Ibiki to give the order to start the test, which came after several minutes.

The problems were quite difficult, and it was evident that they wanted them to copy the answers. Although he could do it, he decided not to. Therefore, he quickly completed all the nine problems before lying down on his desk.

Ibiki smiled. "Anko is right; that brat is nothing compared to those who are here, although she convinced me when he did that to those bastards; that was definitely…interesting."

After several minutes, Naruto felt that something hit his head; he raised it a bit and saw Ibiki with his hand stretched out, "Wake up, I'm about to explain the tenth problem."

Ibiki paused and looked at the rest. "But there is a special rule for this problem..." Ibiki stated, increasing the nervousness of the few who had stayed in the room.

Just then, Kankurō entered, and Ibiki looked at him before chuckling, "You're lucky. Your puppet show wasn't a waste after all." He stated which made Kankurō nervous, wandering to his place in silence.

Ibiki continued as he looked at a window, "I'll now explain it. This is..." He turned and looked at them, "A hopeless rule."

That confused them, and Ibiki continued, "But first, you are going to choose if you wish to take this tenth problem or not."

That confused them again, and Temari spoke, "Choose? So what happens if we don't take the tenth problem?

Ibiki calmly replied, "If you choose not to take it, your points will be reduced to zero. In other words, you will fail. Your two other teammates will fail along with you." He smiled at the end.

Almost everyone said that they would answer it and that it would be stupid not to do it.

Ibiki chuckled and added, "But if you choose to take it and get it wrong, you will… Lose the privilege of taking the Chunin Exams forever!"

Many whispered and others shouted their disapproval, adding that there were people who had submitted the exam before.

Nonetheless, Ibiki laughed before putting a face that scared a lot of them, "You were unlucky. This year, I make the rules. That's why I gave you the option of quitting. Those who are not confident can choose not to take it, and take the exam the next year, or the year after that." Then Ibiki laughed.

After a few seconds, he continued, "Let's begin."

He paused and looked into their eyes, "Those who won't be taking this tenth question raise your hands. After we confirm your numbers, we'll let you leave."

Many raised their hands, and since Ibiki noticed that there were still several people, he added, "This is your last chance, those who don't want to answer the tenth question, can leave."

A few did so, but after that, no one raised their hands.

Ibiki moved closer, looked at each and sentenced, "Very well! For the first exam, all of you... Fail!" 

Notes:

That's all, hehe.                                                                                                                          

Naruto unlocked the Asura Path.

Naruto was weak, and you could see it in the training.

About Gaara and his defense, you’ll know more about it in the future.

You saw Lee’s change.

Oh, yeah, I think I'll add Kin in the Harem. I was watching the Chunin exam’s episodes, and I couldn’t help feeling sad for her.

My notes will be the same of the original fic; I don’t see the need of writing new ones.

Until the next time.

Chapter Text

Person talking, "It could be."

Person thinking, "I don't like this idea."

Demon speaking / Invocation talking, "No doubt you are someone to be reckoned with."

Demon thinking / Invocation thinking, "His heart is dark."

Disclaimer: I do not own Naruto, Masashi Kishimoto does.

Chapter 16

Hokage Tower

"Stupid Ibiki!" Minato shouted as he hit his desk.

He had been watching the test through the crystal ball along with Hiruzen, who laughed "Calm down, Minato. Don't get mad; Ibiki may have flunked them, but they can try it next time. We know that his threat wasn't real."

Minato looked at him and sighed before replying, "I know, Sandaime-sama, but I wanted that my children passed this test. Especially Naruto, we both know that his level is not that of a Genin; that's why I wanted him to participate in the exams of this year. I wanted to promote him to Jounin after this. But now thanks to Ibiki's stupidity, it won't be possible."

Hiruzen took a drag from his pipe; he released the smoke and asked. "So, is this all because of Naruto-kun? Yes, I do know that his level is not of a Genin, and I know the reason for that, but don't worry so much about it. I think you should go to the academy to tell your kids that they can do it better the next time. "

Minato nodded, sighed and was about to say something else when he saw something that caught his attention.

Back at the Ninja Academy.

Everyone heard Ibiki's statement, and they were stunned. However, the complaints and questions started, while some of them said they made the difficult decision of staying.

Ibiki shouted, "The determination you speak of is the worst of the worst! You trash have no right to become Chunin!" He paused for a moment and sentenced as he began walked to the exit, "That's all."

However, before he could leave, the interrogator heard a voice. "Ibiki-san; before you leave, I would like to discuss something with you, and I want everyone here to listen to this too," Naruto murmured from his seat.

After hearing Naruto's voice, everyone laid eyes on him, but after recalling 'something,' they looked at Ibiki, who stood right in front of Naruto.

Naruto folded his arms and looked up, seeing Ibiki's stern expression, and he returned an equal one, which Ibiki noticed and made him mentally smile.

"What do you want, Naruto?" Ibiki asked looking into Naruto's eyes, who did the same.

"I wish to know the reason why we failed," Naruto answered.

Ibiki sighed and replied, "I already told you, you all are trash who don't deserve to become Chunin. Now if I've answered your questions, I'll leave."

He was about to walk back to the exit, but Naruto's voice stopped him again.

"A Shinobi must think beyond the parameters of the mission."

Ibiki turned around and walked back to Naruto before replying, "Interesting, I can see that you've understood the real reason for this test, but too bad that it wasn't enough."

Naruto smiled and replied, "Of course I did, though I disagree with your point of view."

Ibiki raised an eyebrow and asked, "Why?" As he took a chair to sit right in front of Naruto.

The other Genin didn't understand what they were talking about, so they just listened attentively.

Naruto smiled and replied, "It's simple. You think that we should be willing to sacrifice a mission if we are in troubles, just to save our comrades."

Ibiki narrowed his eyes and replied, "And you don't agree with this..."

Naruto smiled and replied, "Of course I don't! For me, completing the mission is the most important thing. I don't care if my comrades eventually die. If they do, that would just prove that they weren't ready for the Shinobi career. Those who can't follow orders are better off dead." That was an absolute truth for Naruto; in Root, his character was formed in that way, but when having an organization as big as his, he adopted that character completely. Moreover, those who didn't comply with his orders in his organization would be dead.

Naruto's girlfriends felt a bit worried. They didn't know that Naruto thought like that, and they hoped that he wasn't talking about them.

Meanwhile, Menma didn't know that his brother could be as cold as to not to care about his comrades. It was completely different from what Kakashi had taught him.

In the Hokage Tower, Minato felt guilty since he was sure that Naruto learned it at Root.

Ibiki stated, "And that's the reason you are not ready to become a Chunin; if you only think..."

Nevertheless, Naruto interrupted him as he stood up, "Tell me, Ibiki-san, what the Shinobi word means to you? Following the orders of a superior, but breaking them just because things get complicated? Or my favorite one, maybe being a hero and helping the needy?"

Ibiki turned his head to look at the Namikaze, who was now leaning against the wall. He got up and stood in front of him, "Maybe a little of both…"

Naruto smiled; he moved away before turning around and stating with the utmost seriousness, "Then I recommend you to stop being a ninja. Someone as pathetic as you makes me sick."

Ibiki widened his eyes slightly; this reminded him of a few words that he had said to someone in the past. The interrogator turned around and stood in front of Naruto again, " You have a lot of guts, brat. But everything you just said only proves me that you are not ready to become a Chunin."

Naruto didn't look away and replied, "Why? Because I only think about myself or because I want to complete the missions even if my decision affects my comrades? Ibiki-san, I assumed that you were a real Shinobi, but you're just another one of those idiots who believe that being a Shinobi is just a game. We're just soldiers, tools to be used by someone superior to us. If a mission is assigned to us, we must perform it even if the outcome could be fatal. We're not here to try to be heroes and help others. We're Shinobi, and our only duty is to kill without hesitation."

Many got angry at his words; they didn't see their work like that. But of course, that didn't apply to Naruto, since he didn't have any loyalty to the village; he was only loyal to himself.

Ibiki realized where Naruto was heading with this speech, so he looked at everyone, seeing their expressions of disgust and disapproval, "Hey! Do you agree with this little piece of trash?!"

Many got up and replied no. "Dobe! Shut up already! You may hate your life, but we don't," Kiba shouted.

Many nodded, but others didn't. Ibiki, meanwhile, looked at the examiners, who smiled and nodded.

Therefore, the Jounin looked at the candidates and stated as he laughed. "Hahaha, give thanks to this little piece of trash! All of you are approved!"

That statement surprised them, and Temari shouted as she got up from her seat, "What?! So, are you changing your decision just like that?"

Ibiki smiled as he took his headband on off his head, revealing that it was full of scars. Most people watched this with horror, "Yes, of course. A mission leader must be willing to change their decisions if that will help them to meet the objective."

He paused to put on a straight face. "Well, now listen carefully; you must always remember that not all information obtained from third parties will be correct. That can cause many things such as the death of your whole team or the destruction of your village. That was the other purpose of the test, of copying without being detected, because you must do this to get real information in the future." Ibiki finished.

He looked at Naruto, who had closed his eyes but opened them to look at the window. "She finally came."

They didn't know what he meant, and they didn't have to ask since a big ball broke the window into a thousand pieces. Ibiki just sighed as he stepped back.

The ball revealed a woman, who put the ball's cloth behind her, "Okay boys and girls, follow me! I'm Anko Mitarashi, the examiner of the second part of the Chunin Selection Exam." She shouted.

Many sweatdropped as Ibiki spoke behind the cloth, "You rushed it, Anko… again."

Anko didn't answer; instead, she looked at the Genin and stated, "Wow, they are a lot, Ibiki. Why did you allow them all to pass? Your exam was very easy; it seems you are going soft."

Ibiki chuckled and replied, "Haha, actually I had flunked them all."

That statement surprised Anko, and she was about to ask why they were still here, but she couldn't because Anko heard a voice behind her, "You hurt me, Anko-chan. You didn't notice my presence yet."

She instantly turned around and saw Naruto with his hands on his chest as he bent his head slightly, feigning sadness.

Anko seized the moment, she grabbed Naruto's head and put it between her breasts, shaking it quickly.

Almost everyone blushed while some of them glared at Anko, who shouted, "Oh, I knew you'd pass Ibiki's silly test!"

Naruto then used a bit of force to pull his head away from Anko's huge breasts; he smiled and nodded but said nothing.

It was Ibiki who spoke instead, "Yes, this brat made me change my mind; you have a good Genin right over here, Anko." Ibiki said looking directly at the Mitarashi, who grinned, and she was about to put Naruto back between her breasts when she realized that he was gone.

She looked at the present Gennin and saw that Naruto was already in his place. She just pouted, which made him smile. "Okay, brats. Follow me; now we'll start the second part of the Chunin exam." All the Genin nodded and followed Anko out of the room.

Naruto was about to leave, but he saw Ino, Tenten and Haku at the door; they had expressions of sadness. However, before they could say anything, Naruto decided to calm them down. "Girls, everything I said in there was true."

They bowed their heads, but Naruto continued, "Yes, that's what I think. However, I would never do that to you because you're very important to me."

They looked up, and Ino asked. "Is that true, Naruto-kun?"

Naruto nodded and took her by her chin, making her blush. "Of course, Ino-chan, I thought I made this clear a while ago. I'll never change you for anything or anyone. "

Ino let out a dreamy sigh, and before the others could add something, everyone heard someone clearing his throat "* Ahem* Hey, Casanova, I think you should follow Anko. You know she will be angry if you take too long," Ibiki stated behind Naruto.

The Uzumaki nodded without turning around; he looked at his girls and left, catching up with Anko while Ibiki returned inside to pick up the tests of those who had passed it.

In the Hokage Tower, Minato smiled knowing that his children had passed. However, it saddened him knowing how it had been possible. The blond released a sigh of sadness, which Hiruzen noticed, "Come on, Minato. Don't worry; you just have to make Naruto-kun change his mind. Make the Will of Fire inside him relight."

Minato this looked at his predecessor before nodding, "You're right." Then they continued watching the ball, seeing that everyone had reached the field 44.

"This is where the Second Exam will take place. The 44th training area, also known as the Forest of Death," Anko informed in front of all the Genin, who were surprised at its name.

Menma, for his part, felt a chill running throughout his body when remembering the day in which Naruto had left him there for bothering him; it had been one of his worst experiences.

He discreetly looked at his brother, who was smiling with some malice, "I hope you're joking, Nii-san." Menma thought, not wishing that Naruto made a joke like that again.

Then Menma heard Sakura speaking, "This is a scary place."

Menma quickly nodded, and Anko chuckled, "You'll be able to experience why this place is called the Forest of Death."

Anko then put her hand into her jacket and pulled out several papers. She stood firmly and handed out the papers, "These are consent forms. Those taking this exam must sign these. "

"Why?" Asked a Genin.

Anko looked at that Genin and answered, "Because from here on, people will die. Therefore, we need people's consent before we continue. Otherwise, I'd be held responsible. Hahaha." All the Genin became serious.

Then she explained what the second part of the exam would consist of. Once everyone asked their questions, she ended her explanation by saying, "We will exchange three consent forms for one scroll at that hut..." She pointed to a hut, which was to her right.

When everyone looked at it, she continued, "And after picking your gate entrance, everyone will begin at the same time."

She then sighed before stating. "Here's the last piece of advice. Don't die! Although that we can't avoid that…" She finished, smiling and looking at Naruto, who smiled back and nodded.

He and his teammates went to the hut to deliver their consent papers.

After a few minutes, everyone had received the scrolls. Therefore, Anko ordered everyone to follow the people in charge because they would assign them to a gate.

Half an hour later each team was at their respective gate, all anxiously awaiting the moment when the gates would open while each person had their own thoughts.

Meanwhile, those in charge began to remove the chains and padlocks of the gates. The examiners waited a few seconds until Anko said that the second part of the exam had started. Therefore, the teams quickly entered, everyone heading in different directions.

Naruto and his team ran until reaching a clearing; they landed there, and Haku asked, "What do we do now, Naruto-kun?"

She looked at Naruto, who sat down while crossing his legs. "Nothing. We'll wait here; the scrolls are coming."

Sai and Haku didn't understand what Naruto meant, so they waited with Naruto.

Sai sat away from them as he checked his Ninja equipment; Haku sat very close to the former ANBU and asked. "Naruto-kun, I know you've said that you would never abandon us, but… Why do you think like that?"

Naruto looked at Haku; he moved closer and stroked her hands as he answered. "Haku-chan, I've told you already. I've experienced many difficult things in my life, things that changed me. I was in a secret organization of the village long ago. There they formed that character in me, although I don't follow all the ideologies of the founder of that place, I share some points with him, which you've already heard. But don't worry; I'll never implement that on you because you girls have gained my trust and a place in my life." Naruto stated, now caressing the cheeks of a blushed Haku, who had closed her eyes as she moved her head closer to kiss him.

Naruto slowly approached his, and when they were about to make contact, the bushes made noises. Sai and Haku quickly stood in defensive stances. However, Naruto just stood up and said, "They've finally come."

At that moment, three clones of Naruto appeared, and one of them spoke as he pulled something out from his bag ninja. "These Genin are dumb; I can't believe they want to become Chunin and couldn't detect the clones that you had put on them, boss."

Naruto nodded before asking, "Scrolls?"

The three clones instantly showed them. Two of them had scrolls of Heaven while the other one had a scroll of Earth.

Sai and Haku were surprised that Naruto had anticipated that, but they didn't say anything.

Naruto approached his clones and took the scrolls as he asked, "Haku-chan, we have the scroll of Earth, don't we?" Haku quickly nodded.

Naruto looked at his clones again. "Good job, I'm sure you took care of everything."

The clones quickly nodded, and Naruto dissipated them.

He slowly turned around as he released a soft but very dark laugh. Sai felt nervous for some reason, and the Jinchūriki revealed the reason when he ran to him, giving him a powerful punch in the stomach that made Sai spit some blood.

Haku became worried, but she didn't intervene because she thought that Naruto was doing this for a reason.

Naruto took Sai by his neck and put him against a tree. He put his forearm on Sai's neck as he stared at him.

Meanwhile, Sai was still shocked; he didn't know why Naruto had attacked him, and his speed had stunned him. There was no doubt that he lived up to the stories said in Root.

Sai opened one of his eyes, trying to hide the pain. "Naruto-senpai, what is going on?" He calmly asked, but he couldn't deny that he was beginning to feel fear due to Naruto's intense look.

The Uzumaki squeezed is forearm, making him choke.

"Sai, I've waited for this moment since the day I woke up. I'm sure you told Danzō about my relationship with Tsunami-chan; that was the worst mistake you could have ever made."

Haku didn't know this Danzō person, but she knew that he wasn't someone good because Naruto almost spat after saying his name. She looked with suspicion at Sai, who gave a fake smile and replied. "You and I know very well how Danzō-sama is, Naruto-senpai. Besides, I saw nothing wrong with telling Danzō-sama about your relationship with Tsunami-san."

Naruto growled and responded. "Don't try to fool me, Sai. I know very well that you did that because you wanted to; you can't deceive me. But you are lucky that I can't kill you." He released his grip, stepping back a little bit.

Sai fell to the ground, rubbing his sore neck. He stood rose up, and when he was about to say something, Naruto turned around again, looking at him straight into his eyes.

"But I can't let you leave this place knowing what I just did. I think I'll have to try out a new toy on you."

Naruto held out his hand, and a sphere—that began to glow—instantly appeared.

Sai knew it was something dangerous; hence, he decided to cancel his mission and return to the Root base. Nonetheless, before he could run away, two of Naruto's clones appeared behind him, holding him firmly.

The artist tried to move, but he began to feel increasingly weaker without apparent reason, making him fall to his knees.

Naruto approached him and gave him a strong blow to his face. Sai said nothing, but this situation really began to scare him, "Tired, Sai?" Naruto asked, taking Sai by his chin, looking at his blank expression.

Naruto smiled and released Sai's chin. "You know, Sai? Nothing would please me more than making your face show fear and horror at its best, but we don't have much time so I'll do this quickly."

Naruto put the Apple in front of him; he closed his eyes and thought about an order.

The Uzumaki then opened his eyes, and after doing so, a beam of light came out of the sphere, wrapping Sai completely and making him shine intensively throughout his body while the clones released him.

Naruto instantly felt tired, which made him fall to his knees. Behind him, Haku's eyes widened in shock because his boyfriends' hair had turned completely white.

She approached him, bent down and noticed that Naruto had several wrinkles on his face. That made her panic, so she asked if he was okay, but Naruto just ignored her.

Within Naruto's body, Kurama was quickly giving him Chakra to make him feel better. "Stupid! Don't ever use that thing again! You almost died! You still don't have enough Chakra to use that artifact; wait to regain some of my power before using it again! Besides, don't use that thing if you're not sure how to do it!"

Naruto looked at Kurama as he gave a weak smile, seeing that he was returning to normal.

He sighed and answered. "I know, Kurama. The old man had warned me that this would happen, but I thought that you would help me. But if you say that I shouldn't use it until we have more power, then I won't. I just couldn't let Sai leaving the forest to tell Danzō everything like the rat he is," Naruto defended himself. Then he looked at his hands and noticed that they had returned to normal.

Naruto thanked Kurama and left his mental landscape. Outside, Haku was still asking Naruto if he was okay, but she could only become more concerned since he wasn't answering. However, when seeing that his hair and skin returned to normal, she sighed in relief.

The Uzumaki then looked at the brunette and drew her into a kiss, which she instantly returned. Naruto ended the kiss and stated, "Don't worry, Haku-chan; everything is okay. You won't see me in that state again; I won't do it again."

Haku just nodded, she helped Naruto to stand up, seeing that Sai had approached them, kneeling before Naruto.

"Kyōfu-sama," Sai spoke in a submissive tone.

Naruto smiled since his plan had worked; he ordered Sai to stand up before commanding, "Tell me everything you know about Danzō."

Sai instantly told him everything, about his plans for the village and his dealings with Orochimaru. He said nothing about putting him under a Genjutsu because Sai didn't know it.

Naruto growled, "That bastard did deals with Orochimaru. Now not even Kami-sama will save him."

Then he smiled, "It seems that I could change Danzō's seal, hehe. But remember not to call me that in front of anyone."

Sai quickly nodded and replied, "Hai, Naruto-sama."

Haku had been watching with great interest; therefore, she decided to ask, "What did you do, Naruto-kun?"

Naruto looked at her and replied, "I only took control over his mind. He won't be a problem anymore."

He approached Sai, who looked tired. The Jinchuriki put a hand on Sai before saying, "Kai."

Sai instantly felt his energies back; he looked at Naruto, who spoke before he could, "Those clones had Chakra suppressing seals. And when they touched you, those seals entered your system. But don't worry, I just deactivated them."

Sai just nodded, and Naruto sat next to Haku, who asked, "What do we do now, Naruto-kun? We already have the scrolls we needed; will we go to the Tower?"

Naruto shook his head, "Naah. We still have five days. Besides, the exam only started an hour ago or so. We're going to stay here to see if we find anything interesting. I know this place like the palm of my hand, so don't worry; we'll be fine."

The truth was that he was still a bit tired due to the side effects of the Apple, but it was almost nothing. He was sure that he would recover completely in a few hours.

Therefore, he could deliver the other scrolls to Ino, not because he thought she couldn't get them on her own.

Nevertheless, with those two idiots on her team, he was sure they would only make things hard for her.

Naruto then looked forward and stated, "Okay, we'll hunt a few Genin." Haku and Sai nodded quickly.

Naruto jumped to the branch of a tree and started running along with Haku and Sai. However, Naruto had to stop abruptly because several Kunai and Shuriken passed in front of him.

Team 13 landed on the ground again while Sai and Haku took defensive stances. However, Naruto just stood there with crossed arms, patiently waiting for the arrival of 'the trash that decided to attack the wrong team'.

Three Iwa ninja landed there, one black-haired Kunoichi and two robust Shinobi. Naruto said nothing and just waited for them to say what they wanted.

"Naruto Namikaze, we come by order of Tsuchikage-sama to offer you to join the ranks of Iwa, plus a large sum of money for your services. Tsuchikage-sama has heard about your lineage, and he's sure that you wouldn't want to stay in Konoha due to obvious reasons," one of the Iwa Shinobi stated.

Naruto chuckled and replied, "Well, that old man is right; I won't stay in this place too long."

Iwa's Shinobi smiled, and the other one added. "So it's decided, you'll come with us."

They turned around, hearing Naruto speaking, "But, who told you that I would go to that filthy village?"

The Shinobi of Iwa growled; they pulled their Ninjato out, "You're a Namikaze trash after all… Kurotsuchi, change of plans. We'll have to kill this bastard."

The girl nodded and stood in a fighting stance. Naruto did it as well, but just when he was about to attack, he saw something interesting.

That girl had stabbed one of her companions, who turned his head, "Why?" It was all he could say because he fell lifeless to the ground.

His partner quickly jumped away as he shouted, "What the hell are you doing, Kurotsuchi?! When Tsuchikage-sama finds out about this, he won't go easy on you, even if you are his granddaughter!"

Kurotsuchi paid no attention; she just did some hand seals before shouting, "Yōton: Sekkaigyō no Jutsu (Lava Style: Quicklime Jutsu)!"

She spat a big ball of lime, which completely covered the poor bastard, who could do little to dodge it.

Most of the lime had covered his body, and before he could yell something, she stabbed him in his heart. The Genin died instantly before bursting into a thousand pieces.

Naruto was frankly surprised; he didn't know what the hell was going on until he could feel something in his wrists, just as the mysterious girl approached him to kneel down.

"Kyōfu-sama, it's an honor to meet you. I'm glad to see you recovered."

Naruto instantly understood it, but he decided to ask to be sure, "Who are you and how do you know that name?"

Kurotsuchi raised her head, revealing slightly blushed cheeks, which Naruto found strange. "I-I, I am Kurotsuchi, Kyōfu-sama. I'm one of your contacts in Iwa. Even if you don't know who I am, your ideals and goals have come to Iwa by the hand of your allies, and many decided to follow you. "

Naruto raised an eyebrow, "Are you not betraying your country? Moreover, I could hear from that bastard that you're the granddaughter of that old man. Why would you join me?"

Kurotsuchi got up—still blushing—and answered. "Because my Grandpa is an idiot. All he's going to accomplish is the destruction of our village. I'm sure that you already know about the invasion plans for the next month. And that's a big mistake; Iwa doesn't have to meddle in something like this, but my fool Grandpa doesn't want to understand that since he hates your father because he defeated his army in the Third Great Ninja War. That's a stupid decision, the Yondaime will have a greater advantage in his village, and he'll destroy the invaders easily. That's why I joined you since I want you to overthrow my grandfather."

Naruto thought about this before laughing while approaching Kurotsuchi. "You're right. But tell me, why do you think I would overthrow the Tsuchikage?"

Kurotsuchi blushed at the proximity but regained her composure and answered, "I don't know, I just thought…" She couldn't finish, because Naruto put a hand on her head.

She blushed at the contact but said nothing. "It's okay, don't worry, this was something that I was going to inform everyone in the organization later. I had planned to destroy Iwa, but now that you're saying that I have many allies there, I'll have to make a slight change of plans. Can I assume that there are Shinobis of Iwa among the allies in our ranks?"

Kurotsuchi nodded and showed her wrists. She channeled Chakra and instantly a seal in the shape of the tattoo was visible. It had a sword pointing downward with a dragon looking up, coiled to the sword.

"Hai, Kyōfu-sama, many Shinobi in our ranks has the seal. When you need us, we'll help you to take the Tsuchikage down."

She tried to bow again, but Naruto stopped her. "Don't bow before me; what you've told me was important. Besides, you're very pretty; a woman as pretty as you doesn't have to bow."

Kurotsuchi blushed again; she didn't know Naruto in person, but she had heard about him from people who had more experience in the organization, and frankly, those stories had always surprised her.

And now that she saw him in person, it was almost a dream coming true. "T-thank you, Kyōfu-sama," she replied.

Naruto smiled and added, "Don't call me that, Kurotsuchi-chan, call me Naruto."

Kurotsuchi blushed due to the affectionate nickname, so she quickly nodded and replied. "Hai… Naruto-kun."

Further back, Haku sighed; she barely knew this girl and could tell that she had feelings for Naruto. Something similar had happened to her; therefore, she couldn't complain.

Naruto pulled his hand away from Kurotsuchi's head before asking. "Kurotsuchi-chan, how long can you stay in the village?"

"A month," Kurotsuchi quickly answered.

"And where will you stay?"

Kurotsuchi thought about it for a moment before sighing, "I may have to return to my Sensei. Even if he's just a Chunin, he'll make me return to Iwa when he finds out that I failed my 'mission.'"

Naruto shook his head and replied, "No, you'll stay here; I still have many questions. Kill your sensei and then go to this address,"

He wrote the indications on paper before handing it over to Kurotsuchi, who nodded. "Hai, Naruto-kun, but what is this place?" She asked with interest.

Naruto smiled and replied, "My apartment…" Kurotsuchi turned completely red but said nothing since Naruto continued, "Once you've killed your sensei, you can go there; I'm sure that you won't have troubles. You had said that he's just a Chunin and due to the way that you've killed your teammates, I'm sure that you won't have problems. There are supplies for several days, stay there and don't leave that place. I'll return in five days after finishing the second phase of the exam. "

Kurotsuchi nodded; though she wanted to stay with him even more, she couldn't because he had to continue his exam. After saying goodbye to Naruto, she went running towards the village, to perform the mission that her 'boss' had ordered.

When Naruto felt Kurotsuchi's Chakra far away, he turned around and said, "It's time to continue."

He stood completely still, placed his index and middle fingers in front of his nose and began to concentrate.

Naruto instantly felt the people in the area, but two Chakras caught his eye. However, he decided to investigate first the higher one. "Follow me," Naruto ordered and started running towards the direction where the dominant Chakra was.

It was perhaps a Jounin, and Naruto thought that it was strange that someone of that level would be in this exam, well, someone besides him.

They kept running until Naruto felt a repulsive killing intent; it was disgusting, it was sickening. It wasn't a very powerful feeling, but the feeling that was simply disgusting, and Naruto didn't know the reason.

He looked back and saw that Sai and Haku were disturbed. "Calm down, don't despair. Don't think too much about it; think of something else. I don't know, something like Sai smiling genuinely."

Afterward, Naruto saw that both of them smiled slightly, so they just continued jumping, now calmer.

They reached a clearing, right in time to see someone throwing a kunai at Sasuke and Sakura; Naruto noticed that both were paralyzed due to the killing intent.

"Tch," Naruto growled in annoyance; he didn't want Sasuke to die yet; he wanted to fight him once he had the full power of his eyes, but an 'idiot' wanted to ruin his plans.

Just when he was about to intervene, he saw that Sasuke stabbed a kunai in his leg, and then picked Sakura up, to run away.

Naruto nodded pleased, and before the strange person could pursue the Uchiha survivor, Naruto ran his hands over his wrists, activating some seals that were there. The Kiba instantly appeared, and these began to glow.

"Rakurai doroppu (Thunderbolts drop)" Naruto shouted, running to intercept the person when he dodged his attack.

Orochimaru was smiling in the distance; he would like to hunt the little boy. However, he heard something and turned to it, seeing that an attack was heading towards him.

Orochimaru jumped up to dodge the attack, but after doing it, he heard a shout. "Swallow this, you piece of shit!" He looked there, seeing someone who made him mentally smile.

Naruto clenched his right fist while it glowed brightly, "Raiton: Raiken (Lightning Release: Lightning Fist)!"

He punched Orochimaru's face, making him fly several meters back, destroying trees and everything that was in his way due to the power behind the punch.

Naruto landed on the ground, and just then, Sai and Haku appeared beside him, the girl asked. "Don't you think you hit him too hard, Naruto-kun?"

Naruto shook his head and replied, "That guy isn't ordinary, and that punch won't kill him. You guys stay away from this; I don't want you to interfere."

Sai nodded quickly; he wouldn't object to the orders of his 'master', but Haku didn't like this, so she decided to protest. "But Naruto-kun! If you think that he's powerful, we should help."

Naruto shook his head again. "No, this is something I want to do, fighting against powerful enemies is my goal, and if I die… it would just mean that this was as far I could reach. Haku-chan, don't intervene," he said with extreme seriousness, which made Haku back down.

In the distance, Orochimaru was getting up slowly from the ground. That punch hurt him, and he couldn't be more pleased. "Kukukuku, it seems that the main course has arrived," Orochimaru thought before walking towards Naruto.

He didn't see the point of pursuing Sasuke anymore; he wasn't ready to receive his seal. He was sure that Naruto was; he didn't have any doubts after that punch.

Orochimaru arrived at that place—still within the guise of the Kunoichi of the rain, "Kukukuku, what do we have here? Ah, a young candidate to die," Orochimaru asked as he released his killing intent.

Sai and Haku felt terrified, and Naruto growled in annoyance. "Hey, you stupid fuck! Could you stop releasing that disgusting killing intent?! It feels as if an aged man wants to take me to a room and do dirty things to me," Naruto expressed about to vomit because of nausea instead of fear.

Orochimaru grinned as he ran his large tongue over his lips. He was about to say something, but Naruto shouted, "I don't know who the hell you are, but you can take that stupid mask off."

That was bothering him, and if he was going to fight someone, he needed to see his face. Besides, he could tell that he was a man; even though his Chakra was extremely confusing, the Uzumaki knew that it was a male person, and the person in front of him was in the body of a woman, so he was aware that it was a disguise.

Orochimaru smiled again, and he said as he placed one of his hands on his face, "Kukukuku you are certainly very promising… Naruto-kun," Orochimaru stated, tearing off the false face.

Naruto's eyes widened when seeing that face, stuttering as he pointed at him. "Y-You, You are…"

Orochimaru smiled as he ran his tongue over his lips. "Yes, I am..."

"Katon: Ryūka no Jutsu (Fire Release: Dragon Fire Jutsu)!" Naruto shouted, spitting an immense dragon, which gave a mighty roar and flew at full speed, burning the ground and increasing the environment temperature considerably.

Orochimaru didn't think that Naruto would attack him so fast, even so he did an earth wall to contain the attack. But it destroyed it quickly, so Orochimaru jumped aside not to be carbonized.

However, Naruto kicked him in his neck and sent him flying again, but Orochimaru quickly regained control of his body, giving a flip in the air before landing safely.

"Kukuku. Naruto-kun, calm down, let's talk a little," Orochimaru said as he wiped the dust from his clothes.

"You son of a bitch!" Naruto yelled, rushing to the attack at a speed that made Orochimaru open his eyes slightly. A moment later, he sensed Naruto to his right, seeing one of the Kiba intensely glowing.

Orochimaru pulled his Kusanagi out from his throat to block Naruto's attack. The Uzumaki, however, pushed harder in an attempt of splitting the Kusanagi in half, but it had been useless.

Therefore, he jumped back as he yelled maniacally, "Orochimaru! You fucking son of a bitch! You'll die today! I swear that I'll tear your head off and then put it on a pike so that everyone can see your repulsive face once you're dead!"

"Well, show me what you can do, Naruto-kun," Orochimaru replied running, his tongue over his lips.

Naruto growled and shouted, "Hyōton: Haryuu Muuko (Ice Release: Tearing Dragon Fierce Tiger)

Haku was surprised after hearing the name of the technique. She had been teaching her Hyōton element to Naruto these past nine days, and although she thought that he would master it someday, she never thought he would do it in such a short time, let alone creating his own technique.

Therefore, she just stood by and watched the outcome.

Meanwhile, Orochimaru opened his eyes enormously as he ran his tongue over his lips again; there was no doubt that Naruto would be a perfect body.

Naruto then summoned a great 'Dragon' with a lion's head, which rushed at him at full speed, catching him with its massive jaws and raising him skyward.

Orochimaru tried to escape, but the grip was powerful. He noticed that the great dragon stopped rising before plummeting while spinning on its axis at an incredible speed. It crashed into the ground, perforating it several meters, burying Orochimaru down.

When the Sannin believed that the technique had ended, the 'dragon' bit him even tighter before exploding into thousands of pieces, which turned into stakes that impaled Orochimaru.

After several seconds, Naruto growled because Orochimaru was taking his sweet time in that pit. He knew that it would take much more than that to get rid of Orochimaru.

However, Naruto suddenly felt a Chakra source under him, which made him jump. In that instant, Orochimaru pulled out his hands from under the ground in an attempt to catch him.

Naruto smiled, but then he saw something that left him disgusted; Orochimaru pulled out his head, and he lengthened it considerably.

Orochimaru reached Naruto, and his neck coiled around Naruto's leg until having him completely trapped.

Once the pale man had Naruto in his clutches, he crashed him into the ground without releasing him.

Naruto growled with pain as he glared at Orochimaru, who had put his face in front of him as he smiled.

That angered the Jinchūriki, who moved his arms in an attempt of breaking free.

The strength that Naruto was using surprised the Sannin, and he knew that his grip wouldn't last much longer; therefore, he said a few words, "Kukukuku. You're definitely amazing, Naruto-kun. I can't wait for you to come to me." And without further ado, Orochimaru bit Naruto's neck.

When Naruto felt the bite, he growled painfully. Orochimaru smirked and released his grip. Naruto fell and put one of his hands over his neck.

Haku and Sai quickly stood beside him; Haku glared at Orochimaru and demanded, "What did you do?!"

Orochimaru smiled sinisterly, "I have given him a parting gift. Naruto-kun will seek me out. He will seek my power. It has been fun to fight him; he's certainly promising."

Orochimaru then proceeded to leave, but he suddenly felt an increase of energy. He looked at Naruto and saw that he surrounded himself with a red cloak. "We're not done, you son of a bitch. I promised to someone very special that I would kill you when I saw you. And it's something that I plan to fulfill."

Naruto then got on all fours while the chakra around him increased. Haku saw that Naruto's hair turned completely red while his eyes changed to the same color.

In the forest, everyone could feel the demonic Chakra, so the Genin decided that the safest thing to do was to get away from it.

Meanwhile, at the Hokage Tower, Minato was quietly talking to Sarutobi until both of them felt the burst of energy, "This Chakra is…" Sarutobi said.

Minato stood up and looked out his window, "Yes, this is the Kyūbi's Chakra. It feels almost like that day. Is it Menma? Or Naruto?"

Minato snapped his fingers, and instantly some ANBU appeared kneeling before him.

"I need four ANBU squads in the Forest of Death immediately; I want them to inform me of the situation."

The ANBU nodded and disappeared in puffs of smoke.

"Minato, do you think that...?" Sarutobi asked, hoping that his concerns were unfounded.

Minato sighed and answered, "I don't know, Sandaime-sama. We just have to hope that nothing bad is happening, but this Chakra certainly says otherwise."

Returning to the Forest, Haku couldn't help trembling when feeling this killing intent. It was much worse than the last one. Besides, it was immensely more powerful.

The Yuki knew that she had to get away; therefore, she jumped onto one of the trees to see the outcome of the battle.

Naruto OST - Need to Be Strong

"GRAAWH!" Naruto growled as his skin peeled off from his body and a dome of black chakra formed around him. A big crater appeared under Naruto while the dome dissipated slowly, revealing a Naruto completely covered with red Chakra as four tails waved behind him.

Orochimaru thought, "Hmmm, this is getting dangerous, but I can keep playing with Naruto-kun a little longer."

That was what he thought, but he didn't know why his Seal wasn't working with Naruto yet. He thought it was because that Chakra surrounded Naruto, so once that Chakra dissipated, Naruto would be at his mercy thanks to the special seal that he had created for him: 'The Cursed Seal of Hell.'

Naruto growled in his Mini Kyūbi shaped form, waving his tails faster. "Orochimaru… I will kill you!" Naruto's distorted voice furiously shouted.

He stood up a little bit, and a huge claw of Chakra came out of his stomach, which went directly towards Orochimaru.

The Sannin dodged it, which frustrated Naruto. Hence, he headed at Orochimaru at an insane speed, breaking the ground apart for every step he took; all this without stopping sending his claw of Chakra at Orochimaru, who before could do anything, felt an extraordinary blow in his face.

Nevertheless, before Orochimaru could get away, he felt that something caught him. The Snake Master looked to his waist, seeing that it was the Chakra claw, and from it, another one had grown, which held him firmly before both claws stretched him until splitting him in two.

Haku and Sai were surprised; they saw Naruto killing an S-rank criminal quite easily. However, the Uzumaki narrowed his eyes as he threw the two parts aside.

Naruto gave a slight jump back as he thought exhausted, "Damn, our connection is about to end, Kurama. I can also feel that the shit that he put me is starting to get into my system. Once I take care of him, I'll take care of that too. We must do it; I have to kill that bastard once and for all."

He placed his tails in front of his mouth and several small spheres of black and white color appeared.

Kurama growled and replied, "Carbonize his sorry ass. He won't survive this, though try not to make your Bijūdama too powerful, or else we'll call a lot of attention."

Naruto growled and responded, "I don't care; I'll kill Orochimaru once and for all. That bastard doesn't deserve to continue breathing even one more day."

The Chakra ball then increased its size considerably, driving away all the living beings of the forest. Sai realized the danger they were in, so he quickly created a Hawk ink, "Haku-san, quick! Get on! We have to get out of here before we receive the attack too!" Sai shouted as he extended his hand to Haku.

The brunette nodded and grabbed his hand, and the Hawk took flight.

Then, behind Naruto, the Genin of Team 7 appeared. A snake had swallowed Menma, but he had easily escaped just to find moments later Sasuke and Sakura in a deplorable state. When he had asked them what had happened, they were unable to answer. A few minutes after that, they had felt a sinister and evil Chakra.

Menma had offered them to see what was happening, but Sasuke had refused until the Namikaze made him come around. And now they were on top of a tree, watching the Kyūbi's miniature form. "W-What is that?" Sakura asked as she trembled due to the killing intent.

Menma felt his stomach twisting, so he held it as he fell to his knees. He raised his head slightly and whispered, "Nii-san."

Sasuke and Sakura opened their eyes in shock while they asked themselves if the Kyūbi had been released. After that, they looked at the big ball in front of Naruto's mouth.

Said ball then shrank considerably, making the ground tremble for a moment while a big crater appeared under Naruto, who then swallowed the now tiny ball of Chakra.

From the mouth of Orochimaru, a whole Sannin crawled out, but he was now completely covered with saliva. He smiled, but it changed when he saw Naruto increasing in size as well in Chakra.

"Well, this is indeed getting dangerous. When I have your body, all that power will be mine, Naruto-kun," Orochimaru thought with a smile as he did hands seals.

Naruto slowly opened his mouth while some steam escaped from it. "Bijūdama!" Naruto mentally shouted, throwing the powerful attack, which destroyed everything in its path and created a powerful wind gust that crushed all things within its range.

In the air, Sai had trouble controlling his Hawk due to the powerful wind gust. The Genin of Team 7 took cover not to fly away due to the blast.

"Kuchiyose: Sanjū Rashōmon!" Orochimaru shouted as he put his hands on the ground, and three enormous gates instantly appeared in front of him, which were visible throughout the village. However, the gates disappeared when the Bijūdama did contact, astonishing Orochimaru.

In the tower Hokage, both Hokage felt the massive explosion that shook the foundations of the building. Minato quickly grabbed his Hokage cloak and spoke. "Something dangerous is happening; I have to see what's going on."

Sarutobi nodded as he took his clothes off, revealing his battle armor. "Just like old times. I'll help you too. This time, I'll make up for all those years when I didn't have the chance to help."

Minato smiled and nodded, "Well, hold on to me, Sandaime-sama. We'll arrive there in a second."

Sarutobi nodded and put a hand on Minato's shoulder, and then both disappeared in a yellow flash.

Returning to Naruto, he was starting to lose his transformation. "GRAAAWH! DAMMIT! THIS SHIT HUUURTS!" Naruto shouted as his Chakra armor retreated slowly.

Then, the members of Team 13 and 7 landed next to Naruto, who had completely red skin, but it was healing quickly.

"Naruto-kun!"

"Nii-san!"

"Naruto-sama!"

Three people shouted while each one held Naruto, who growled due to the pain and because Orochimaru's curse mark was starting to do its job.

"I'm fine, don't worry," Naruto stated as he stood up with some difficulty.

"Nii-san! What the hell was that?!" Menma scandalously asked.

Naruto looked at him, but he heard something that made him growl with hatred. He pushed them all back as a bit of Kyūbi's Chakra wrapped him again.

Naruto OST - Orochimaru's Theme

"Kukukuku! Naruto-kun! You're certainly amazing; I can't wait for you to come to me!" Everyone heard someone's voice coming from the dust cloud.

The dust slowly settled down, revealing Orochimaru lying on the ground. He opened his mouth, and another Orochimaru came out, but this time he looked exhausted. "I've spent a lot of Chakra in this fight. I think I will give Naruto-kun one last test. Then I'll leave; I'm sure we've called enough attention," he thought as he did hand seals.

Naruto saw it, so with the chakra he had left, he pushed back everyone who was behind him as far as he could. He didn't do it because he cared about them. Well, he cared about Haku, but this was his battle, and he didn't want that anyone interfered.

Everyone then saw that several claws came out from his back to grab them and drag them away.

"Naruto-kun! Let me help you!" Haku shouted as she tried to wriggle out of the claw, but it was completely useless. Naruto gave her half-smile before looking straight ahead, which worried Haku even more.

"Kukuku! Is that compassion, Naruto-kun?" Orochimaru asked after finishing his hand seals.

Naruto growled loudly, doing his best to keep the Chakra cloak up. "Shut up; this is my battle! They'll just get in the way!"

Orochimaru smiled even more due to his response; therefore, he threw a powerful fire attack at Naruto, who prepared himself to dodge it. However, his body suddenly felt numb, and he couldn't do anything; his Chakra cloak disappeared, causing him to fall to his knees.

Naruto then saw the technique in front of him; he didn't have any bit of Chakra left. Besides, he didn't recover from his coma completely yet, and the Apple had left him tired; all those factors made this fight quite difficult for him.

However, everything had stopped just like a few days ago. Naruto extended his right hand while his Rinnegan activated by itself. "Gakidō (Preta Path)" Naruto whispered, and instantly everything returned to normal while the Uzumaki absorbed Orochimaru's technique. After finishing absorbing the attack, Naruto fell unconscious.

Meanwhile, Orochimaru could clearly see what Naruto had done and the change in his eyes. "Naruto-kun! KUKUKUKU. It was a good choice to give you that gift. Once you're ready to come to me, I will give you the power you need to destroy Konoha and all those who have harmed you! Come to me, and I promise that you'll be the most powerful Shinobi," Orochimaru shouted as he disappeared underground.

"Then I'll take your body, and the Rinnegan will be mine! And I'll finally be able to master every Jutsu! Kukuku!" Orochimaru then disappeared; he was exhausted. He never thought that Naruto would be so powerful, but that wasn't important because he believed that his special seal would do the work.

After seeing Orochimaru leaving, everyone approached Naruto; Haku was concerned, and she quickly ran towards him to take his pulse. "He's just unconscious," she indicated.

"Haku-san, who was that guy?" Menma asked quite interested.

"Naruto called him Orochimaru," Haku answered.

All the Genin of Team 7 opened their eyes in shock. "N-Naruto was fighting one of the Legendary Sannin?" Sakura asked incredulously

Haku didn't answer; instead, she looked at the direction where he threw the Bijūdama, just like everyone else. "Damn, that attack would have killed any normal person," Menma stated quite surprised.

Haku picked Naruto's body up with Sai's help, so the Namikaze quickly asked, "Where are you taking him?"

"We must get out of here. Remember that we're still in the exams, and Naruto-kun certainly drew a lot of attention. If you don't want to be disqualified, you should leave this place. We'll take care of Naruto-kun until he wakes up; it won't take more than a few hours, you all know why."

Menma didn't like that, but he couldn't argue because Haku was right.

"Okay, take care of my Nii-san. Once I finish this test, I want to ask him some things," Menma stated.

Haku shook her head and replied, "You shouldn't do it. If everyone knows that Naruto caused this, then everyone would hate him again. Do you want that for your brother?" Haku asked, trying to convince Menma.

The blond kid quickly shook his head and replied, "Okay, I won't say anything. But we will have to explain this somehow. Guys, time to leave, let's get the scroll that we need."

Sakura and Sasuke nodded; they were still surprised that Orochimaru attacked them and that Naruto had fought almost on par with him. That only made Sasuke want to increase the level of his training; he would ask Itachi once he finished the exam.

They all left in opposite directions. Haku had wanted to send Naruto to the Tower so he can rest there, but she was sure that he wouldn't like it. Besides, she was sure that he would wake in a few hours.

Meanwhile, one person had seen all this. This man had a black cloak with red clouds and an orange mask. "Hmmm. Naruto Uzumaki, eh? Interesting." After that, he disappeared in a swirling distortion before appearing in front of two individuals who were looking at a village from a tower.

"Where have you been?" Asked a male voice.

"Don't talk to me in that way, Nagato. I have no reason to give you explanations," replied the masked man, looking at the man with rods around his face.

"I am a God, and I can speak to you as I please. Now tell me, where have you been, Madara?" Nagato asked with an emotionless gaze, but that said that he wanted an answer as soon as possible.

Madara chuckled as he sauntered towards him; he was quite disrespectful, but he was necessary for his plans. "I think I've found our missing member…"

Notes:

That's it!

Okay, Naruto can use the Hyōton as you saw, because he has already mastered the Fūton and the Suiton, and since he woke up from his coma, Naruto's Chakra Control improved considerably.

About the Cursed Seal, you will see what will happen in the next chapter.

Oh, yeah, and about the Apple; Naruto almost died because of that; he wasn't quite sure how to use it, and the Apple almost ended up using all his vital energy. However, he will no longer use it again, at least not until he recovers all of Kurama's power.

I hope that you've liked the fight.

You can check in my bio if you want to see how Naruto's Cursed Seal looks like.

Until the next time!

Chapter Text

People talking, "It could be."

Person thinking, "I don't like this idea."

Demon speaking / Invocation talking, "No doubt you are someone to be reckoned with."

Demon thinking / Invocation thinking, "His heart is dark."

Disclaimer: I do not own Naruto, Masashi Kishimoto does.

Chapter 17

Amegakure no Sato - In a Tower

"I think I've found our missing member," Madara stated, moving even closer.

Nagato raised an eyebrow and asked, "Did you manage to convince Orochimaru?"

Madara chuckled, turned around and replied. "No, it's not wise to recruit Orochimaru again, nothing will stop him from betraying us again; I've found someone more interesting."

Nagato narrowed his eyes and ordered, "Don't waste my time. Tell me who it is."

Madara approached Nagato and answered, "Naruto Uzumaki."

Nagato at that name narrowed his eyes and asked, "What do you have in mind? You know very well that he is the Kyūbi's Jinchūriki."

Madara chuckled again; he walked across the room to sit down in a chair, looking at Nagato as he replied, "Indeed, but remember that he has a small portion of the Kyūbi's power. That's not important to us, remember that we're looking for the power of all the Bijū. Besides, he meets the level to be in our group. I realized this when he almost defeated Orochimaru. "

Nagato was a little surprised; he approached him and continued, "Tell me what you have in mind. Don't incur the wrath of a God."

Madara gave a giggle; he waved his hands and answered. "Nagato, Nagato. Come on; I'm not planning anything. Tobi is a good boy. Tobi just saw Naruto fighting, and Tobi says that Naruto is someone very strong to join our group."

Nagato remained calm, but he didn't trust in Madara. He knew that he had to be careful with this person, and though Madara spoke like a fool sometimes, the masked man was someone incredibly powerful, but he was no match for a 'God.'

He turned around and walked over to his partner, who in this case was a blue-haired woman.

"You can do whatever you want, but don't bother me. And remember that it will be your responsibility what that guy does." Nagato stated, looking at the village again.

Madara smiled behind his mask and then said. "Send Sasori, Deidara, Kakuzu, Hidan and Kisame. Tell them they'll have to go in search of our recruit after Orochimaru's invasion. I have to leave; I have things to do." Madara didn't wait for a response; he just disappeared into his characteristic Shunshin.

When Madara disappeared, Nagato's partner asked, "Are you sure about this, Nagato? I'm sure that Madara is planning something."

Nagato looked at her and answered, "Don't worry, Konan. It doesn't matter; if he tries something, he will suffer the full wrath of a God."

Konan nodded and said no more.

Forest of Death.

"What the hell?" Minato whispered in amazement as he watched the destruction of Naruto's Bijūdama.

"Hokage-sama, we found no one here. But we discovered Orochimaru was fighting someone," an ANBU spoke, kneeling before Minato.

Minato squinted at the name, "What are you waiting for? He shouldn't be far away, go and look for him immediately. Kill him on sight, and remember that he's an S rank ninja; he won't hesitate to kill you."

All the ANBU nodded and disappeared. Hiruzen then approached him and asked, "So, who do you think that did this?"

Minato looked at Hiruzen and answered, "It was Naruto, Sandaime-sama. I don't believe that Menma would have been able to do something like this yet, but I can't understand how Naruto could. I'll have to talk to him once the second part of the exam is over. There's nothing else to do here, let's return to the Tower. "

Hiruzen nodded before looking at the place where Naruto threw the Bijūdama. The attack had been undoubtedly powerful since it spread almost entirely through the Forest of Death. Luckily, it wasn't launched in another direction, or otherwise, the Tower at the center would have been obliterated.

Hiruzen then looked at Minato, nodded and felt the blond putting a hand on his shoulder; they both disappeared in a yellow flash.

Elsewhere in the Forest, Orochimaru began to emerge slowly from the ground. He was almost without Chakra; he had used his Body Replacement three times. Naruto was certainly someone amazing, and he was more than willing to take possession of his body.

Once Orochimaru fully emerged, he saw that someone landed in front of him, which made him smile a little bit. "It's been a while… Anko." Orochimaru said, looking directly at Anko, who looked angry.

Anko stepped forward and stated, "Orochimaru, you're someone very dangerous. That's why I will finish you up here and now, even if it costs my life."

Orochimaru smiled more, but the truth was that he didn't want to fight. He wasn't ready for another battle, even against Anko. "Although I would like to witness how much you've grown since the last time we met. I'm sorry to say that I can't fight you. I just had a fight with someone fascinating, and I've also given him a small gift."

Anko placed her right hand on her neck as she furiously growled, "You damn sick bastard! Whose life have you ruined now! You're sick!"

Orochimaru smiled slightly and answered, "Kukuku, the Jinchūriki of the Kyūbi, Naruto-kun. But I think you wouldn't mind." He really believed that Anko wouldn't mind that.

However, Anko had opened her eyes in total shock as she took a few steps back while pointing at Orochimaru. "D-Did you put your mark o-on N-Naruto-kun?"

Orochimaru nodded and replied while smiling, "Of course; Naruto-kun is the only person who deserves my power. You were worthy of it, but that was long ago. Now if you'll excuse me, I have to rest. Naruto-kun made me spend much of my chakra."

Orochimaru slowly submerged into the ground, and Anko left her impassive state. She ran as fast as she could, but it was too late since Orochimaru had disappeared.

Anko fell to her knees; she hit the ground while tears ran down her cheeks. "Sorry, Naruto-kun…" She whispered, cursing herself because Naruto would have to live the same hell she had lived.

Then she got up, wiped her tears and said to herself as she changed her expression. "No, Naruto-kun won't let that a stupid seal takes control of him. I'm sure that he'll find a way to get out of this."

After that, Anko ran towards the Hokage Tower. She had to get there as soon as possible and inform the Hokage.

In another part of the forest, Haku and Sai were on an Ink hawk, with Naruto in the back. "There, land near that river, Sai," Haku spoke.

Sai nodded and landed, putting Naruto on the ground with Haku's help. Sai moved away to make a tent and then prepare a small campfire.

When everything was ready, they put Naruto inside the tent, and Haku approached him as her hands began to glow green. "Hmm. He's just unconscious; he doesn't have a fever or anything, just Chakra exhaustion."

She looked to where Orochimaru had bitten Naruto, and she noticed a strange seal with four Tomoe and with the Kanji 'Hell' right in the center. It was very tiny, but Haku could read it.

When Said saw Haku's hands glowing green, asked. "Are you a Medical-nin?"

Haku turned around; she looked at Naruto while smiling slightly, "I'm not very good at it. But since the time I saw Naruto-kun in a coma, I went every day to the hospital to learn more about medicine. I didn't want to see Naruto-kun in a state like that again, so I decided to train in this field. "

Sai nodded and replied, "Yes, I remember that day very well. Although I didn't care about Naruto-sama in the past, I can say that I'm sorry for not caring more for him."

There was so much respect in his words that Haku decided to ask. "Why do you respect Naruto-kun so much?"

Although she had a slight idea, she wasn't completely sure.

Sai smiled a bit, which surprised Haku, "Because Naruto-sama is an amazing person who opened my eyes," Sai replied in a submissive tone.

Haku just sighed. She knew that she wouldn't get anything from Sai. Therefore, she would ask Naruto once he woke up.

Meanwhile, she focused again on Naruto while Sai went out to stand guard.

Meanwhile - In Naruto's Mindscape.

"Damn it! Hey, Naruto! Give me a hand over here!" Kurama shouted as he pulled some snakes off his body.

Naruto growled and replied, "Hey, can't you see? I'm busy over here!" He was cutting several snakes that were trying to get on him, but he wouldn't allow that not even when crazy.

Kurama growled. Those snakes had appeared out of nowhere, and he could tell that they were trying to take his power away and also get inside him to control him somehow. But he wouldn't allow it.

Then Naruto came, and the snakes had tried to do the same to him, but he had quickly started to kill them. Nevertheless, they seemed to have no end, since more and more of them appeared.

They continued killing those snakes until Naruto got tired and shouted, "Hey, Kurama! Take cover!" Naruto then began to float at an appropriate height and stretched out both arms.

Kurama nodded, he covered himself with his tails just in time to hear Naruto shouting, "Shinra Tensei!" The Uzumaki expelled a strong force from his hands, which lifted the ground and annihilated the snakes.

Kurama took off his tails, seeing Naruto landing and releasing a sigh, "It's finally over." He stated.

Kurama smiled and nodded, and he was about to add something when they heard someone speaking, "Kukuku, the Rinnegan is definitely a wonderful thing, Naruto-kun."

Naruto maniacally smiled; he pointed his hand at the source of chakra, and just when Orochimaru was emerging, he uttered, "Banshō Ten'in."

The pale man instantly felt his body being pulled towards Naruto. He tried to stretch his body out, but he couldn't move because he was feeling a lot of pressure around his body.

"Stupid asshole! You're in my mind! Don't think you can escape!" Naruto shouted with that smile which was even starting to intimidate Kurama.

Naruto caught Orochimaru; he placed a hand over his head and whispered, "Ningendō."

The Jinchūriki yanked Orochimaru's soul out of his body before absorbing it, which he regretted.

"You fucking sick bastard!" Naruto shouted, releasing Orochimaru's body, which disappeared in a puff of smoke.

Naruto smiled; it was just a shadow clone, but he made sure what his clone had seen wouldn't reach the original because he extracted the soul of that clone, a weakness he had discovered in that technique.

Naruto then squinted. "So, is this how Orochimaru's seal works?"

Naruto snapped his fingers and everything around him changed. Now he was in his room of memories.

"Hmm, this has changed a lot," Naruto said while looking around; the walls were now black, and the floor seemed sticky.

Naruto ignored that and walked through the room. He opened a door and saw a similar seal to the one he had on his neck, but this one was much bigger, and it was also glowing in a black color, while some lines came out of it, which seemed to be connected to his neural network.

"Hmmm, that's how it is..." Naruto murmured and walked a little more until he gave jump while shouting, "Ouch! What the hell?"

He looked down and saw Kurama. "Hey! Why the hell did you bite me?"

Kurama chuckled and replied, "You never told me where you were heading, so I had to find you on my own. You know very well that I don't like walking through your mind."

"Oooh. Poor thing, are you afraid of getting lost in my mind again?" Naruto mockingly asked.

Kurama flushed in shame for a moment, but then he growled and shouted, "Shut up! Now tell me, what the hell are we doing in this place?"

Naruto stopped smiling, looked at the seal and replied, "This is the seal that Orochimaru put on me. Those snakes were trying to control us, and then Orochimaru would come to this location to have full control of my body. Moreover, thanks to his clone now I know that Orochimaru leaves his soul in everyone that he marks. After that, his would make a summoning if something bad were to happen with the original, and from the soul fraction that he sealed, Orochimaru would come out to revive later; he's certainly smart."

Naruto paused, approached the seal on the wall and placed a hand on it, causing it to glow and then change to a red color. "And now he won't be able to do that."

Naruto stepped back and stood next to Kurama, who asked because the seal didn't disappear. "Why did you not get rid of that seal?"

Naruto looked at Kurama's diminutive form and answered, "Because this seal will help me a lot in the future."

Kurama raised an eyebrow and asked again, "What do you mean?"

Naruto snapped his fingers and reappeared in his typical mindscape. He entered in a cottage along with Kurama, sat on a chair and responded, "Because it grants its host a significant power boost. And as far as I could see in Orochimaru's memories, the user suffers changes when activating it. I wonder how I'll look when unlocking the third level of my mark," he said the latter while putting his fingers on his chin.

Meanwhile, Kurama was still confused. He could understand most of the explanation, but not everything. "What do you mean by 'the third level'?"

Naruto looked at him and answered, "The Curse Mark has levels. At the first level; some marks appear around your body, increasing your power moderately. At the second level; your body undergoes alterations, completely changing your appearance to a new one and increasing your strength considerably. The feelings of hatred and the fighting desire of its user fed it, and the more powerful these feelings are, the stronger you will get. However, to achieve that level you must go through a process not to die when you reach the second level. Besides, at first, you aren't so powerful because your body needs to get used to such power.

Kurama opened his eyes and asked out of curiosity, "But you didn't talk about the third level. Does that level allow you to exceed the limits?"

Naruto stood up and answered, "I'm not sure; I still can't process all the information from Orochimaru, and I don't want to do it. The mark he put on me is experimental; not even Orochimaru is sure if I will be able to reach the third level. He just put his mark on me, since it would be able to interrupt our connection so that you wouldn't be able to free me of the trance in which I would have been in. Too bad that the bastard never knew about the qualities of my Rinnegan, and now he doesn't know that I know all this, hehe. "

Kurama smiled too, but then changed his expression and asked, "But now he knows that you have the Rinnegan. Are you not worried?"

Naruto shook his head and answered without stopping smiling, "No, Orochimaru isn't stupid; he won't tell anyone about my Rinnegan, he doesn't want anyone touching the future container of his soul. Poor idiot, hehe. Though I could also learn something interesting thanks to that bastard."

"And what would that be?"

"It seems that Orochimaru plans to use the Edo Tensei to kill the old Hokage. And thanks to that, now I know the proper way to use the Edo Tensei; it wasn't as complicated as I had believed. Now I'll be able to revive Kaa-chan. There's just a little more left, and I'll finally be able to leave this filthy village. But I won't allow Orochimaru kill the old Hokage; he won't escape from my hands again..."

He made a short pause, clenching his fists tightly and lowering his head, "I've failed Anko-chan; I couldn't keep my promise."

Kurama quickly added, "Hey, but now you know how to remove the mark from that woman. You should be happy."

Naruto looked up; Kurama was right, but he couldn't help feeling sad for having failed his promise. "Yeah… you're right." He added.

After that, he walked to another room. "Now I'll get some sleep; we must recover the Chakra we've spent in the battle. Besides, I've discovered that the Apple also limited our connection time a lot. I won't use it again until I recover more of your power."

Kurama nodded and accompanied Naruto inside the room. The Jinchuriki laid down on the bed and the Biju on his stomach.

The next day.

Haku was waking up, and the last thing she remembered was watching Naruto until she fell asleep. She fully opened her eyes and looked at the place where Naruto should be, but he wasn't there anymore.

She quickly got up and whispered. "Naruto-kun…"

She walked out the tent to see Sai and asked, "Sai, where did Naruto-kun go?"

Sai turned around, looked at her and replied, "Naruto-sama should be inside, Haku-san; I didn't see him leaving."

Haku growled and quickly went back into the tent; she checked the place where Naruto had been resting, and under the pillow; she found a note.

Haku quickly grabbed it and read it. "Haku-chan, I've gone out to think about what happened yesterday. Don't worry; I'll return in a few hours. And tell Sai to be more attentive, or I'll kill him the next time."

After reading the latter, Haku laughed softly. She saved the note and left to look for something to cook when Naruto returned.

Meanwhile, Naruto was destroying everything in his path. He had failed Anko, and that was bothering him a lot. He had promised her on several occasions that he would kill Orochimaru if he saw him. He had failed, and that was making him furious.

Although Kurama told him that he already knew how to remove the seal from Anko, he couldn't forgive himself.

Naruto continued destroying everything, trees, animals, rocks; with different types of Jutsu, punches, kicks, everything while unconsciously approaching to the second source of the chakra that had caught his attention yesterday.

Meanwhile, Kurama could only sigh; he already got used to Naruto's sudden changes in emotions. There was no doubt that he would never entirely understand humans.

Naruto continued his destruction; he was fully recovered. The seal that Orochimaru had put on him had somehow improved his regeneration rate and his chakra. He didn't know why because not even Orochimaru was sure how his seal would work. Therefore, he didn't mind that now, he would think about it later.

"Where is everyone?!" Naruto heard someone shouting close to him.

He quickly left his state of fury and concentrated, and he finally realized that it was the Chakra that had caught his attention yesterday. In a burst of speed, Naruto appeared on the scene. He didn't know why, but he felt the need to help that person.

He saw a huge bear, which seemed to be trying to attack someone. "Stop right there, bear!" Naruto shouted from the top of a tree.

The bear at that voice quickly stopped as he sat down on the ground, just to see Naruto landing next to him. "What the hell are you doing?" Naruto asked the bear, who now looked quite scared.

The bear then growled, and Naruto nodded. "If you're hungry, go and hunt something at the river. You're a bear, dammit."

The bear growled again, and Naruto could only roll his eyes and sigh when hearing the stubbornness of the animal in front of him.

"Uhm, excuse me. Are you talking to that bear?" asked the person who almost was eaten by the beast.

It was a female voice, so he turned to answer. But he instantly felt paralyzed. The reason? Right before him one of the most beautiful creatures he had ever seen was.

It was a surprising sight, especially her red hair which for some reason made him wish to have that girl on his lap and never let her go.

She saw Naruto frozen; hence, she slowly approached him, with precaution because the bear was still there. Besides, she couldn't see well because her glasses had fallen off. "Sorry, did something happen to you?"

Naruto shook his head, smiled and replied as he took the girl's hand, surprising her slightly, "Excuse me, miss, but after seeing such a beautiful angel, I was speechless. I would be delighted if this sweet divine being spoke her name to this poor mortal." Naruto proceeded to kiss the girl's hand.

She blushed slightly, and although she couldn't see him well, she knew he was handsome and polite.

She then remembered Naruto's request replied, "M-My name is Karin."

Naruto smiled widely, seeing her squinting. He didn't understand it at first until he saw her glasses on the ground. He grabbed it and put it slowly on Karin.

After that, he said, "Thanks for sharing your name. You've certainly made this humble mortal jubilant, Karin-chan," he said, bowing slightly.

Karin blushed more when clearly seeing Naruto.

"I-I... Thank you very much for helping me. If it weren't for you, I would be dead right now." Karin bowed to hide her blush.

Naruto, however, stopped her and stated, "Don't bow to me. I don't like when beautiful girls like you bow before me. There's no reason for you to do it."

Karin blushed again, but then she remembered who he was. "It's you; we passed the first part of the Chunin exam thanks to you."

Naruto smiled and replied as he bowed again, "Hehehe, good to know that you still remember me. My name is Naruto Uzumaki, at your service."

Karin giggled, "Nice to meet you, Naruto-kun. But you don't need to bow before me either."

Naruto raised his head, smiled and replied, "But that's where you're wrong. I'm a man, and a man should always show his respects to a beautiful woman."

Karin blushed, then smiled and was about to say something else when she heard the bear growling loudly. It startled her, which made her fall to the ground.

Naruto growled too, "Stupid! I don't want to do that… Well, not yet."

The bear growled again, a thing that was starting to annoy Naruto, and Karin spoke again, "Naruto-kun, how can you communicate with that bear?"

Naruto shrugged and answered, "As you may know, I'm the Jinchūriki of the Kyūbi."

Karin nodded; she had heard that from the gray-haired guy.

After seeing the nod, Naruto continued, "And by being the container of that poor bastard…"

"HEY!" Kurama shouted.

Naruto chuckled but paid no attention, and Kurama knew that he was trying to annoy him. "I've gotten some abilities; I can understand all the land animals and some of the fliers ones. But I can't understand the aquatic ones at all."

Karin was completely amazed; she didn't know that something like that was possible. She came closer and asked, looking at the bear. "Why did he stop when you ordered him to do it?"

Naruto smiled and replied, "Because the animals of this forest know who the Alpha is. And they're well aware that they can't oppose to me. Well, they can try. But our dear bear over here has already witnessed what might happen to those who disobey. "

The bear growled weakly, which made Naruto laugh. Karin looked at him with great interest, and for some reason, she felt that she wanted to know everything about him.

Naruto felt the same; therefore, he made her sit on the ground as he asked, "Tell me, Karin-chan. Why are you alone in this place? Where are your teammates?"

Karin lowered her head and replied, "They're dead, a team attacked us. I managed to escape but my companions couldn't."

Naruto nodded and continued, "I'm very sorry. But the good thing is that you're safe and sound; that's all that matters."

Karin nodded, "And your team, Naruto-kun? What are you doing here alone?"

Naruto scratched his head, "My team is out there; they know how to take care of themselves. I decided to walk around here. My mind was a mess."

Karin nodded, and then she heard Naruto asking, "How old are you, Karin-chan?"

"I'm thirteen years old, and you?"

Naruto smiled and replied, "Thirteen years old as well, but I'll be fourteen in a few months."

Karin blinked surprised. "You must be kidding. Thirteen? I don't believe you."

Naruto smiled and replied, "That's what they always say, but I promise you that I'm thirteen. Look, I born the day of the Kyūbi's incident, in other words, thirteen years ago."

Karin stared at him, which surprised Naruto a little bit. "Hmm, did I say something wrong?"

Karin stopped; she shook her head and gave him a tender smile, which made Naruto blush slightly. "No, I was just checking your Chakra to see if you were lying or not."

That information surprised him, and just then, Naruto remembered something he had seen when he was in a coma.

"She's an Uzumaki," Naruto thought, but then he shook his head and asked, "Karin-chan; what will you do once you return to Kusagakure?"

Karin unconsciously covered her arms with her hands, which caught Naruto's attention quite a bit, and just now, he could see the bite marks on her arms.

He quickly grabbed one of her arms and seriously asked, "Who did this?"

Karin pulled her arm away so that Naruto couldn't see her marks. "Nobody, N-Naruto-kun; you don't need to worry."

However, Naruto didn't like that answer, so he took her arms again and asked, "Karin, who did this to you? I want to know who those bastards are!" Naruto demanded, getting angry. Not with Karin, but with those people who did that on her beautiful skin.

"Naruto-kun ..." she spoke, but now looking straight into Naruto's eyes, and after doing, she felt her heart jumping with joy because she could only see his concern.

Karin blushed, lowered her head and replied, "I-I have a unique ability, Naruto-kun. When a person bites me, I can heal their wounds. And Kusakage-sama took advantage of this ability, charging money to those who wanted to be healed."

Naruto clenched his fists as he whispered, "He'll die."

Karin could clearly hear him; she got worried and quickly replied, "Naruto-kun, Kusakage-sama is powerful. We're only Genin; you could never hurt him."

Naruto growled; he stood up and stated, "Karin-chan, I don't care if that bastard is the Rikudō Sennin himself. I'll make him pay for what he has done."

Naruto knew he was hasty, but he couldn't help feeling in this way.

Karin stood up again and denied, "You don't understand. I-I ... I d-don't care if Kusakage-sama did that."

She said trying to convince Naruto, who turned, placed his hands on her shoulders and forced her to look into his eyes. "Say that again."

The Uzumaki girl could no longer lie. "I-I, I don't want to return to that place, Naruto-kun," she replied lowering her head.

"Then come with me. I promise you that nobody will use you ever again," Naruto promised, putting his fingers on Karin's chin, raising her head.

Karin blushed and let out a longing sigh. "B-but you're the son of the Hokage, and I a-a simple girl from a village of no relevance. I don't want to bother you."

Naruto smiled, but then he put a serious face and cut distance with Karin. "Forgive me…"

Karin blushed hugely, and unconsciously, she raised her lips. She had just met this guy, and were they now about to kiss?

She didn't know the reason, but something inside her told her that she had to be with him, and well, she wasn't going to resist that urge. He was a handsome, polite and attentive boy. Besides, he had saved her. What more could she ask for? It was a great opportunity for her, for a girl with no opportunities.

Naruto made contact, knocking his lips against Karin's, who had closed her eyes and stood on her tiptoes to have a better reach.

Naruto noticed this; therefore, he put his arms around Karin's waist to bring her up to his height.

The Jinchūriki continued kissing her until he felt something surprising; Karin was pushing her tongue against his lips, requesting permission to enter. Naruto smiled and opened his lips a little, giving permission to Karin's tongue, which quickly played with his.

Naruto went to the ground, put Karin on his lap and started kissing her with more ferocity. The Uzumaki boy just wanted to have this girl in his bed, but at the same time, he didn't want to. Not because he didn't desire it, but because he didn't want to do something like that.

Naruto didn't want her to think that he only wanted to have sex with her; it was something strange, because if he wanted to do it, he would have released his pheromones. However, he hadn't even done that; something stopped him from doing it.

Something inside him wanted that to happen naturally, and he would do it, he didn't want her away from him.

Naruto then ended the long kiss, separating slowly from Karin, who was staring off; she couldn't believe that she had her first kiss and a really intense one.

"Sorry," Naruto apologized again, very close to Karin, who sighed and then looked at Naruto.

"W-why are you apologizing?" She nervously asked; she didn't want to believe he was just playing with her.

"I… I ... we barely know each other, and I have already done this. I don't want you to think badly of me," Naruto replied directly looking at those red eyes that were making him crazy, plus her glasses made her look downright sexy.

Karin put her head on Naruto's chest, and he placed his arms around Karin to hug her. "Why would I think badly of you? After all, I returned the kiss," she replied, raising her eyes to see Naruto, who smiled a little and then kissed her reddish hair.

"Karin-chan, you're beautiful," Naruto stated, stroking Karin's hair.

Karin blushed and asked, "Seriously?"

Naruto nodded and replied, "Of course. Never think otherwise. Though I have to tell you something, and I hope you understand it."

"What is it, Naruto-kun?"

Naruto looked straight into Karin's eyes and answered, "Uhm, I… I have girlfriends."

Karin opened her eyes considerably, so he quickly corrected his words. "Yeah, well. But it's not what you think. Karin-chan, it's hard to explain. Look, I was hated and despised my entire life, until the point I thought about ending all that suffering. "

Karin didn't understand it, "But you're the son of the Hokage. Why would they hate the son of the most important person in your village?

Naruto laughed with bitterness and replied, "Well, that bastard realized that I was his son just a few months ago. He believed that I was the Kyūbi, and for that reason, he threw to the wolves."

Karin opened her eyes significantly; she was about to say she was sorry, but Naruto continued. "But that doesn't matter. What I'm trying to tell you is that I thought that I would only serve to kill those people who had caused me so much pain. However, that changed when I realized that not everyone saw me like that in this place, and those turned out to be my girls. I must say that if they became my girlfriends, it was because I had a lot to do. However, they did it as well since they approached me selflessly; they were the first ones to want to talk to the 'Demon Brat.' However, what I'm trying to say is that I'm very grateful to them. For those reasons, I have a strong attachment to them. And I don't know, but I've started to believe that I love them, just as I'm beginning to think I feel with you. I know it's very fast; we barely know each other, but it's just something that I can't avoid. Something deep inside of me tells that we should be together," Naruto finished, waiting for Karin's response.

Karin smiled, got up a little from his lap and kissed him. "You didn't need to tell me all that. I was just surprised that you had more than one girlfriend; you should be really good to keep them all happy," she paused and moved her eyebrows provocatively.

Her forwardness surprised Naruto; this girl really was sassy, and he could say for sure that he loved it.

Karin continued. "Although I also feel the same. Something tells me that I must be with you; my heart and my mind tells me that. I had never before experienced anything like this."

"So, are you not angry? Would you accept not being the only one?" Naruto asked with interest; he wanted her to accept more than anything else.

Karin nodded and replied, giving him another kiss, "Yes, but if you promise that you won't forget me."

"Never," Naruto quickly replied, giving her another hot kiss, which she gladly returned. After a few minutes, they took distance, and both were blushing.

Naruto smiled; this had definitely escalated quickly, even for him. But as the Jinchūriki had already said it, he couldn't avoid it, and he thought it had something to do with the fact that she was an Uzumaki woman. The old man had told him that something like this would happen when he met Uzumaki women. But hey, the Uzumaki women were beautiful, and that became clear when he saw how the Uzumakis of that time were.

Naruto and Karin stood up as he said, "Okay, Karin-chan. Time to return to my team, I'll tell you a few things as we arrive. Now hold on to me, I know a way to get there quickly."

Karin nodded and grabbed one of Naruto's hands, but the Namikaze quickly carried her bridal style, which made her blush, "Naruto-kun, what are you doing?"

Naruto didn't answer, he smiled and floated, which made Karin's eyes open widely. "You can fly!" she exclaimed fascinatedly.

Naruto spoke, "That's a secret, Karin-chan; don't tell anyone, okay?" Karin nodded quickly.

Naruto then slowly flew where his teammates were. He didn't want to go fast since he knew that Karin would enjoy this experience, and he also wanted to tell her some things before they arrived.

After flying for about 15 minutes, Naruto landed near the river. "We're close," Naruto said looking at Karin, who was looking at him eyes full of admiration. "Uhm, what's up with that look?" Naruto asked.

Karin jumped on him again and exclaimed, "One more lap! Please, Naruto-kun! I want to fly again!" She asked, smiling widely.

Naruto chuckled and replied, "I promise you that we'll do many laps later, Karin-chan, but now I must return to my team and then go to the Tower. Here isn't anything else to see."

Karin nodded, and they walked until spotting the camp. The redheaded girl saw that Sai came closer quickly and knelt down before Naruto. "Naruto-sama, some Genin have said that they've come to kill you. Haku-san and I have already captured them. We thought it would be best to let you decide what to do with them."

Naruto nodded, and when he was about to speak, Haku left the tent and ran straight at him before jumping on him, giving him a kiss.

Then she pulled away. "I'm glad you are already well, Naruto-kun. But don't ever leave without telling me before. You could have ended up destroying the forest," Haku scolded at the end.

Naruto laughed a little as he scratched his head. "Don't worry, Haku-chan; you should thank Karin-chan that I didn't do that. If it weren't for her, I would be lying somewhere in the forest due to the Chakra consumption."

Haku didn't know who Karin was until she saw a girl next to Naruto. "Naruto-kun, is she also? You know…" Haku asked squinting.

Naruto waved his hands defensively and replied, "Y-Yes! But there's a good explanation. I'll tell you later." Then he looked at Karin, who had a strange smile on her face.

Naruto didn't pay much attention to it and continued, "Karin-chan, this beautiful woman is Haku, and Haku-chan, this preciousness is Karin. I hope that both of you can get along."

Naruto stepped back and saw that Karin quickly approached Haku to shake hands with her. "Nice to meet you, Haku-san, I hope we can get along, and that we can satisfy Naruto-kun."

Haku blushed a lot, and Naruto's eyes opened widely; this girl was definitely sassy.

He didn't say anything about it and continued, "Okay, now that you know each other. Please Haku-chan; tell me where my supposed murderers are."

Haku nodded and made a sign for Naruto to follow her.

Naruto said nothing and just did so, and Sai and Karin as well. They entered into the woods until arriving at a small ice dome. Everyone went in, and Naruto saw the three Sound Genin held by what looked like ink snakes.

"Sai, release Kin-chan right now." Sai quickly complied with the order of his master.

Kin rubbed her body; those snakes were squeezing a lot.

Then she saw Naruto standing in front of her and looking at her with an emotionless gaze, which scared her a little bit. "Naruto-kun, I'm so…"

She couldn't finish because Naruto helped her to stand up.

"Don't worry, Kin-chan, I know you couldn't do anything, or else these bastards would have done something that they would have regretted for the rest of their lives." Naruto interrupted.

Kin felt relieved; therefore, she looked at her teammates, who were looking at her with pure hatred.

"Sai, pull that thing off their mouths," Naruto ordered, and Sai quickly pulled their gags off.

Zaku immediately shouted quite angrily, "You fucking bitch! Once Orochimaru-sama finds out about this, he'll do experiments with you!"

Naruto narrowed his eyes. "Idiot! Do you not see the situation you are in? If I were you, I would choose my words properly."

Zaku snorted and chuckled, Naruto, tired of his attitude, took him by his hair. He raised him until having him up to height, and with his other fist, he started giving him repeated blows in his face.

Zaku couldn't help being surprised. These punches were so powerful that he already felt head injuries, and if he continued with that intensity, he would certainly end up killing him. However, Naruto suddenly stopped and threw him to the ground.

The Uzumaki wiped with a rag the blood from his hand. Zaku tried to say something, but he couldn't because Naruto had broken all his teeth. Besides, he felt his life fading way, and for that reason, he didn't have strength to open his mouth.

Naruto then looked at Kin, who had eyes wide open. He grabbed his Ninjato and handed it over to Kin. "Finish him off," Naruto stated, taking her out of her daze.

She took a few steps back, and Naruto growled and exclaimed while approaching her, "Finish him off, Kin-chan! He can no longer hurt you; don't be afraid. Show him that you're the one who has the power now. Kill that bastard," Naruto said, putting his Ninjato in Kin's hand, who held it sheepishly.

"B-but what if..." She tried to say.

Naruto placed a finger on her lips and continued, "Shhhh. Relax, they can't hurt you anymore. You now have the power, face your fears. Trust me; you'll feel better once you do it."

Naruto knew this wouldn't be easy for her, heck, not even he could make his first kill in cold blood so easily.

Kin then grabbed the handle of the Ninjato tightly and slowly walked towards Zaku, who had his face completely ruined and covered in blood.

The Sound Genin saw Kin standing in front of him, and he smirked as he could while he spat some blood in front of her.

Kin grabbed the handle of the Ninjato, she kneeled down, put the tip down and raised her arms as high as she could before lowering it quickly.

However, just when it was in front of Zaku's head, she stopped and said with tears in her eyes. "I can't do it, N-Naruto-kun. I-If Orochimaru-sama finds out about this; then he'll make worse things to me." She shuddered slightly.

Naruto began to get closer, but he couldn't since he heard something that made him outraged. "Y-Yo-you're a u-us-useless b-bi-bitch. D-damn w-whore-e, O-Orochimaru-sama w-will not only f-fi-finish you o-off, b-but also your little whore f-fr-friend." And then he spat directly on the face of Kin, who went completely blank.

Her eyes suddenly lost their brightness; she just squeezed the handle tightly, and at full speed, she stabbed Zaku's skull. However, she didn't stop there, she pulled the Ninjato out and stabbed his body repeatedly. "Shut uuuuupp!" Kin yelled, continuing stabbing to a more than dead Zaku.

Naruto approached her since he concluded that she was losing her mind. He grabbed her arm and pulled her into a hug, which made Kin find herself. "Relax. He can't hurt you anymore." Naruto said stroking her hair.

Kin trembled and felt her legs weak, which made her almost fall, but Naruto hugged her even harder so she didn't. Therefore, Kin could only do one thing... Cry.

Naruto just stroked her hair; he just let her vent. He turned his head slightly and noticed that Karin was trembling slightly, as she covered her face.

Therefore, he created a clone, which walked over Karin and asked, "Karin-chan, let's go. What do you think if we take the ride that I promised you?"

Karin instantly left her state and jumped on Naruto's clone, which quickly caught her in his arms.

The clone just smiled and walked away so that Karin can have a tour around the skies. After a few minutes, Naruto realized that Kin calmed down, so he asked. "Do you feel better now?"

Kin then pulled back and replied as she wiped the tears. "Y-Yes, thank you, Naruto-kun. I-I don't know what happened; I suddenly lost control. I've never done anything like that before."

Naruto gave her a soft kiss, which surprised her pleasantly. "Your reaction is understandable; anyone would react in the same way if someone threatened the people who are precious to us."

Kin nodded, and she then separated entirely from Naruto. Then all those who were still in the dome looked at Dosu, who seemed quite nervous. "Kin-chan, you can leave if you want; I'll take care of him." Kin shook her head and replied, "I want to stay, Naruto-kun; Dosu has been almost as despicable as Zaku."

Naruto then looked at Sai, who nodded and pulled the gag off. Naruto slowly approached him, looked into his eyes and said, "Hmmm, there are so many ways to murder you, I can't settle for just one."

Dosu got quite scared and replied more than nervous, "W-wait, t-think about it, I can be helpful- I know a lot about Orochimaru, I can tell you about his plans. I'm sure that the Hokage will be grateful."

Nevertheless, Naruto laughed aloud, "Hahaha, trust me; I already know about Orochimaru's plans, as well as his future plans. Anyway, it's a shame that you have nothing to offer me. I think that means that you have to die." Naruto smiled darkly.

Dosu got even more nervous; he tried to say something, but he couldn't because the next thing he saw left him quite surprised. Some tentacles of what appeared to be made of metal came out of Naruto's arm, they coiled around his forehead and neck, holding him tightly.

Then all who were there were surprised to see how Naruto's hand changed to what appeared to be a cannon, which revolved for a moment before stopping.

Then the metal tentacles removed the bandages from his, and Dosu saw that Naruto slowly approached a cannon towards his mouth.

He tried to say something again, but he couldn't because the cannon lengthened and became smaller for every inch that it lengthened. Finally, the cannon went into his mouth, preventing him from speaking.

"Look, Dosu. I'll spare your life if you manage to say: Oh great Naruto-sama, please forgive my miserable and pathetic life. I swear to you that I'll never be a bad boy again."

Dosu opened his eyes and tried to say those words, but only gibberish came out from his mouth.

Since Naruto didn't hear what he wanted, he looked at his other hand as if there were a clock. "Hmmm, I'm sorry; your time has run out."

Dosu panicked; he tried to scream, but it was useless. He felt that the cannon in his mouth started to heat up and release a strange sound.

When Naruto saw the look of horror on Dosu's face; he couldn't help smiling. He then released the attack, which destroyed Dosu's head and the ice wall that was behind him as well.

The blood poured everywhere, and much of it ended up on Naruto's face, who didn't flinch. He withdrew the tentacle around of what was left of Dosu's neck before deactivating his Rinnegan. After doing it, his hand returned to normal. "This power is great; I can't wait to use it on another bastard."

Naruto then closed his fist, stretched his arm out and started making noises as if he were shooting with his hand as he pointed it in different directions.

Everyone got out of their shock after seeing him doing that, and they couldn't help but sweatdropping at his childish behavior, even after killing someone in such a way.

After a few minutes, Naruto turned around and said, "Okay, it's time to go to the Tower; we don't have anything else to do here."

Naruto noticed that everyone was looking at him strangely, so he asked, "What are you staring at?"

Haku sighed and answered, "Blood… your face."

Naruto scratched his head clumsily and pulled out another handkerchief. "How do I look now?" Naruto asked, giving a sensual smile.

Kin and Haku blushed a little and answered at the same time. "Handsome."

Both stared at each other before smiling. Naruto did it as well and gave a round of applause. "Okay, wait for me outside while I get rid of these bastards."

All went outside, and Naruto did some hand seals as he activated his Rinnegan.

"Kuchiyose no Jutsu." He put one hand on the ground, and a puff of smoke revealed a two-headed dog. "Have fun," Naruto stated and left the dome.

The dog, which wasn't very big, quickly began to devour Dosu's body before moving on to Zaku's. Once Naruto was outside, he saw his clone landing, along with Karin, who had a big smile on her face. "Naruto-kun, you're incredible!" She stated, still in the arms of the clone.

Naruto approached her, lowering her from the clone's arms and asked, "How was your trip, Karin-chan?" He caressed her cheek, which made her blush again.

"Phenomenal," she whispered, enjoying the touching.

Naruto smiled and stopped, much to her disappointment. Naruto turned around and looked at everyone. "I don't think I have to say this, but I'll do it anyway. All that you have seen in this place is a secret; you can't tell anyone. Understood?"

Quickly everyone nodded, and Naruto smiled before creating a shadow clone. "Here you have a heaven scroll, and the other one is of earth. Search for Ino-chan and give her the one she needs. I'm sure she couldn't find a scroll because of those two cowards that she has as teammates."

The clone nodded, grabbed the scrolls and ran out of there, towards the direction he could feel Ino's Chakra.

Naruto then created another clone; he called Kin and his new clone called Haku. Both girls approached, and both of them carried the girls in bridal style, something that surprised them. "W-What are you doing, Naruto-kun?" Haku asked blushing due to the position.

Naruto's clone didn't respond. Instead, he floated and flew towards the Tower. Karin didn't ask much and jumped on her clone, who caught her in his arms. Then he did the same as the other clone.

"Kin-chan, you're not afraid of heights, are you?" Naruto asked with concern, not wanting her to feel worse.

Kin shook her head and answered, "No, Naruto-kun; I would love to fly."

Naruto smiled and nodded; he looked at Sai and continued, "You can create those hawks of yours, see you at the tower; don't be late."

Sai nodded, seeing Naruto floating and then flying slowly towards the tower.

Naruto didn't rush because he wanted Kin to enjoy the experience, and he also wanted her to think of something else besides her first kill.

Kin couldn't help being surprised; they were flying quite high, and everything looked tiny. She had no idea that flying was possible; for that reason, she was looking at Naruto with surprise, and also with love in her eyes.

Though they had met a few days ago, Naruto was the first man who had treated her with respect, and also had helped her to get rid of those two who had mistreated her since years ago.

She snuggled into Naruto, releasing continuous sighs. She was falling in love with Naruto, and she liked that feeling. She closed her eyes, enjoying the soft breeze that crashed against her face.

When she opened her eyes, she realized they were landing on the roof of the Forest's Tower.

Naruto lowered her gently and then looked towards the others. "Okay, let's enter and take a well-deserved rest."

Everyone nodded followed him to the bottom of the tower.

Once there, Naruto remembered Anko's words; therefore, he opened both scrolls and instantly a puff of smoke appeared, which revealed a silver-haired man.

"Yo!" Kakashi said, raising a hand and giving an eye smile.

He noticed that there were more people besides Naruto's group, so he asked. "Hmmm, what are they doing with you, Naruto?"

Naruto shrugged and answered, "Hello, Kakashi. Hatake. They are with me because their comrades died in the test, and I couldn't leave them alone there. Now if you'll excuse me, I want to rest. Don't worry; we already know the speech of the scrolls. Goodbye."

He didn't pay more attention and walked inside the Tower along the others. Kakashi tried to stop him, but Naruto just ignored him.

The copy ninja sighed; he wanted to approach Naruto. But he had been unable because he had been very busy, and for that reason, he had asked to be the person who would appear on his scroll.

He shrugged, took his Orange book and began to read it as he disappeared in a Shunshin.

Notes

Okay, chapter finished.

Let's talk about someone and that someone is Karin. In this fic, I wanted to add her to the harem at the beginning.

Karin was the first member I had in mind, but unfortunately, it wasn't possible before because only now they would meet.

Another thing, if you think it happened too fast, let me explain it; Naruto developed an ability as well as a debility after touching the Apple, which is to feel attracted to the Uzumaki women. And that's what happened with Karin, and she felt something similar.

Another thing, this will happen with most redheads that you know in Naruto, so I'll make some redheads Uzumaki, but Naruto will have the willpower to resist his impulses after this encounter. Well, at least until some point.

The weakness of the Kage Bunshin is simple. Naruto extracted the small portion of Chakra and the soul of that clone, and without it, the information couldn't return to the original. So, Naruto obtained Orochimaru's secrets.

For people who haven't read "Awakening" yet, I invite you to do it; it's kind of interesting.

Okay, until next time.

Chapter Text

Human talking, "Show me what you got!"

Human thinking, "Pathetic."

Nonhuman talking, "This will be fun."

Nonhuman thinking, "I think I was wrong."

Disclaimer: I do not own Naruto, Masashi Kishimoto does.

Lemon detected.

Chapter 18

After Kakashi had tried to talk with the members of Team 13, they had settled within the Tower. Naruto smiled when being here, the place where he became ‘a complete man,' as Kurama would say it; he saw this place as something special.

They continued walking until they reached the second floor. The rooms were here, and Naruto knew it very well. They proceeded to take the rooms, and the girls had tried to come in the same room as Naruto, especially Karin, but unfortunately, this wasn't possible because the people in charge wouldn't allow it.

At first, the girls had been angry, but Naruto had said that once the exam was over, they would have lots of free time, so they didn't complain more and went in different rooms. Those in charge had allowed Karin and Kin to stay since the examination period wasn't over yet, but once the five days had passed, they would have to return to the village and talk to their Jounin sensei to know what they would do next.

Naruto lay on the bed with crossed arms as he stared at the ceiling. He was still thinking about Orochimaru's curse mark, and about how he would get the second level. He didn't know what Orochimaru had planned because after processing Orochimaru's memories, he decided to block them. That guy was sick, and Naruto didn't want to keep seeing anything else about him.

He could process the information of the ritual that unlocked the second level; he could easily replicate it once he left the village. However, he didn't have the slightest idea how to unlock the third level. Maybe it was something similar, and he would only have to find a way to do it.

He also managed to understand a little more about the seal; it seemed that the reason for the changes was that the Curse Mark absorbed Natural Energy at the second level.

Naruto sighed; he still felt bad for failing Anko. If he had known that the Apple would have affected him in such a way, he wouldn't have used it with Sai yet. However, it was something he couldn't help.

Since he had woken up from his coma, he had realized that his emotions had suffered many changes. Now he became angry and lost control more easily. He also noticed something else, and that's what he told Karin.

He now understood better the meaning of the word 'love.' How could he not? After seeing the way his family lived, how they were, and then seeing them dying, it opened his eyes.

Naruto had always loved his girls, but he had always refused to accept that feeling because no one in his life had given him that, so he denied it as impossible.

But then his girls came to his life, and they had offered him that, and much more; that was strange from him. Though he was grateful to them, he didn't want to accept that there were people who could love him.

However, after what happened on his mission in Uzushiogakure, he concluded that he couldn't deny that feeling anymore.

He had wondered how many people had died that day without telling the people they loved about their feelings just because they didn't want to, or because they were afraid. And Naruto decided to stop being afraid; his girls loved him, and he loved them too. Although it was still a bit confusing for him, he was sure that he would soon get used to his feelings.

And it wasn't all that bad, everyone had the right to love, and he always said he would respect women, as long as they didn't try to kill him.

Naruto sighed again; this wouldn't be easy to say. How could he explain that he loved more than one woman? As far as he knew, one person could only love another one, and this was confusing him. Perhaps love with multiple people was possible? He didn't know it, and this was confusing him a lot. More than ever before Naruto wanted his mother to be with him since he was sure that she knew about these things. After all, she was a woman, and women knew about this stuff, didn't they? He didn't want to ask his girls about it since he didn't know how they would take it.

Naruto sighed again; he was certainly sighing a lot lately. There was much more that he wanted to think about, but he couldn't because someone knocked on the door. He knew who it was since he could recognize her Chakra, so he just said, "Come in."

The person entered the room; Naruto just continued staring at the ceiling and asked. "What's up, Haku-chan?"

Haku closed the door and answered, "Naruto-kun… I want to talk about something."

Naruto rose up a bit and sat on the edge of the bed. He patted at his side, so Haku sat there. "What do you want to talk about, Haku-chan?"

Haku lowered her head slightly and replied, "It's about the girls."

Naruto raised an eyebrow and asked, "What about them?"

Haku looked into his eyes and responded, "I don’t know; I've noticed that you seem to attract more and more women, and I don't think that you're going to stop. In this test, I have seen that at least three girls have shown feelings for you, and it seems that you’ve accepted them. Naruto-kun, what do you think of us?"

Naruto could see the sadness and hope in Haku's eyes. The Uzumaki sighed, stood up and lay back against the wall. "Haku-chan, are you angry?"

Haku looked away and replied, "N-no, it’s not that; it’s just that I thought that maybe you’re getting bored of us, and that was why you wanted to have new girlfriends," Haku stated, now looking at Naruto.

He had opened his eyes a little bit before putting a grave expression as he approached Haku to sit down at her side.

Naruto looked straight into her eyes as he caressed her cheek. "Haku-chan, don't ever think that again. You girls are the best things that have happened in my miserable life. Yes, you're right; I may attract more and more girls. But I don't do it just for fun or because I don't feel anything for you. Haku-chan, I do it because I see something special and unique in each of you. You already know who I am, and if I wanted to play with your feelings, I'd have slept with all those women that want to have me in their beds, not only in my organization but also in this village. You already know of my stupid fan club, and you have seen me avoiding them like the plague. Haku-chan, don't think something like that again because… b-because I-I…" Naruto stuttered at the end.

Haku was thrilled since she thought that maybe Naruto was trying to say those words that she had been waiting to hear. For this reason, she decided to help him a little bit. "Why, Naruto-kun?" She asked blushing while her eyes sparkled with excitement.

She slowly approached her head, and Naruto couldn't help answering, "Because I love you."

Haku's heart jumped of happiness; she knew that Naruto wasn't lying because she could only feel the sincerity in his words.

Both made contact and shared a gentle and loving kiss. They moved away, and Haku couldn't help smiling with happiness before hugging the Uzumaki. "I love you too, Naruto-kun."

Naruto returned the hug and put his chin on Haku's shoulder as he caressed her hair. "I'm glad to hear that, Haku-chan. But don't ever think that again, I will always love you, as well as the others girls. Never think otherwise."

Haku smiled again, but she felt like a fool for doubting Naruto. However, she had been able to bring Naruto's true feelings to the surface. After that, she blushed and pushed Naruto away from her shoulder before directly looking into his eyes. "Naruto-kun… I… I want to show you the love I feel for you."

Naruto understood what she meant, but he decided to play with her. "Haku-chan, we’ve just arrived, where will you get Sake in this place?” Naruto asked with a half-smile.

However, Haku gave a soft knock on his head. Naruto rubbed it and exclaimed. "Hey! That hur... ts."

He stammered at the end due to the glorious sight in front of him. It was obviously Haku, and she was giving such a charming and sexy smile that Naruto was speechless.

Lemon

Haku then took advantage of Naruto's state and quickly pushed him on the bed before placing herself on top of him. "Well, Anko-san told me that there is a drink that you like more than the Sake," Haku stated, rubbing her intimacy against Naruto’s.

The Jinchūriki was frankly surprised. Wow! Haku had certainly changed a lot in these four months, and Naruto loved her new attitude. He smiled as he put his hands on Haku's butt, "Hmmm, where could I get that drink?" Naruto asked while caressing her butt.

Haku, feeling hotter, rubbed faster and replied, "I... I don't know. Anko-san says that you have an exceptional talent for finding 'that' drink."

Naruto smiled; he quickly turned her, got on top of her, and pulled Haku's kimono off. He was definitely surprised to see Haku's body; everything on her was perfect.

Naruto stopped observing her figure and sniffed her body. "Hmmm, I can feel something around here, but I'm not sure."

Naruto slowly moved his head around Haku's body. She blushed but was also happy because they would finally ‘become one.’

He sniffed in different parts of Haku's body; her neck, her face, her underarms, her stomach, anyway, her whole body, causing her to blush in embarrassment.

"I think I'm close," Naruto spoke again, kissing Haku's body and slowly going down to her intimate part.

Once Naruto was there, he exclaimed, "I think it's here!"

Haku smiled and replied, "Why don't you taste it to see if you're right?"

Naruto smiled back and proceeded to remove Haku’s white panty slowly, and she then stretched her legs.

Afterward, Naruto threw it to the floor, and then again, he approached his head at Haku's cavity, breathing deeply.

Haku blushed, "N-Naruto-kun, this is so embarrassing."

Naruto smiled; it seemed that there still was some of the old Haku there, but hey, that just made her even more special. The Uzumaki pulled his tongue out and gave a lick to its entire length, which made Haku slightly arch back.

Naruto smiled and savored the flavor. "Hmmm, it seems that I've found the source, Haku-chan; this is delicious!" He stated and bent down before putting his tongue into her intimacy.

Naruto didn't hurry; he did this slowly because he wanted Haku to enjoy the moment. The Uzumaki continued, giving occasional kisses and licks until he could see that Haku was reaching her climax.

Haku, unable to hold it any longer, put her legs around his head and her hands in his hair, pushing him further inside. "Naruto-kun!" Haku shouted, releasing her fluids on Naruto's face, which he drank without complaint.

When Naruto felt that Haku's grip became weaker, he pulled his head away, and he wiped his mouth with a smile. "Hmmm, the drink was delicious, Haku-chan. But what do you say if we continue with the main course?"

Haku wiped the sweat from her forehead, already recovered from her recent orgasm; she smiled and nodded as she opened her legs a little bit. "Well, I would say, go ahead."

Naruto smiled and pulled his clothes off; he placed himself on top of Haku and raised her legs before holding her ankles.

This position made Haku blush; therefore she looked away. Naruto giggled as he put his member in front of Haku's entrance, slowly introducing it until breaking her hymen.

Naruto stopped and looked directly into Haku's eyes. "You can move," Haku instantly said.

Naruto told her that there was no need to hurry, but she replied it was fine. He asked no more and slowly began to move.

She moaned while increased the speed of his thrusts. *Naruto-kun! This is great! I can't believe I didn't try this out long ago!" Haku shouted as she clutched the blankets.

After a few minutes of constant thrusting, both felt their impending climax. Naruto gave one final thrust and released his load inside of her, and Haku released a mighty scream and an intense orgasm.

The Uzumaki slowly pulled his member out before lying down beside her. He looked into her eyes as he pushed some of her tufts to the sides. "Haku-chan, you're so beautiful," Naruto stated, giving her a soft and gentle kiss.

The Yuki felt her eyes a bit teary and returned the kiss. "I love you, Naruto-kun," she added.

Naruto smiled and nodded, "I love you too, Haku-chan."

Haku sighed in happiness; she moved closer and gave him a hug, which he returned. After a while, they both fell asleep; the events at the Forest of Death left them exhausted.

Three Days Later.

Today was the last day of the second part of the Chunin exam. The teams that made it through the test were in a large hall.

The Jounin Sensei of each approved group were there too, in addition to several doctors, some ANBU, and Minato. They were in front of the Genin, who were patiently waiting for the beginning of the last part of the exam.

Many things happened in those three days. Naruto had forgotten to place a privacy seal in the room, and needless to say what the reactions of the next day were.

Regardless, Naruto had spoken with Karin quite a bit; he wanted to know more about her. He also told her what to do once she left the forest. The Uzumaki boy said the same he told Kurotsuchi, but of course, without killing her sensei; Naruto would take care of that once he left this place.

He talked a lot with Kin; she was still a bit shocked due to what had happened in the forest, but he always knew how to calm her down, and nothing made him happier than seeing her happy.

He saw the brothers of the Sand a couple of times too; Naruto had flirted a lot with Temari.

He had also joked with Kankurō a couple of occasions, and Gaara kept looking at him like a maniac.

That same day Ino's Team had arrived. She thanked Naruto for giving her the scroll that she needed, and Chouji and Shikamaru were grateful to Naruto for once in their lives. Then Tenten's Team had arrived, and then at night... Well, there was no need to give details about that.

Before the day of the final test, Naruto had sent Karin and Kin to his apartment to wait for him until his arrival.

And now they were listening to a boring speech of his father about the reasons of the Chunin Exams. Naruto didn't pay attention until he could hear a familiar voice. "All right, brats! The preliminaries for the third exam are about to start; this test will consist of one against one combats. All who qualify will pass to the third round of the Chunin exams that will be held a month from now."

Naruto looked up and saw Anko, who looked at him with a smile, but Naruto lowered his head as he clenched his fists.

After seeing his reaction, Anko got worried. "What's wrong with you, Naruto-kun?" 

She looked at Naruto fists and saw that blood was coming out of them. Now she was anxious; she just wanted to go there and ask him what was wrong, but unfortunately, it wasn't possible yet.

They would speak once the test finished. She knew that he now had Orochimaru's mark, and she will need to ask him about that too.

Within Naruto’s body, Kurama could only sigh. He looked happy these days, but now he looked guilty and angry. The Nine-Tails would never understand humans.

The fact that this was just a preliminary surprised most of the Genin; there were a few who had just arrived, and they would have to fight already. Many asked why, and Minato replied that there were many candidates and other reasons that Naruto didn’t pay attention to.

After that, a sickly-looking Jounin stepped forward; Naruto recognized him instantly. However, he said nothing. "Very well, *cough* *cough* *cough* those unwillingly of participating may withdraw now. *Cough* *cough*."

Kabuto raised his hand and then withdrew. Naruto knew that Kabuto was up to something, the reason why he needed to keep an eye on him.

There were six teams of Konoha counting his, the team of Suna, and the team of Kumogakure.

Naruto paid attention to the last ones, especially to the girl who was with them, feeling the same impulse he had felt with Karin. However, he held it back and looked to the front; he would talk to her later.

"Now we'll start the fights. Remember, it will be one against one fights; everything is permitted. *Cough* But I can stop a fight if I see it necessary. Anyway, let's start with the battles… Open it."

With that said, something on the wall opened and revealed a display that showed the Genin’s names randomly.

After a few seconds, it stopped. "Sasuke Uchiha and Yoroi Akadō take a step forward; the others leave the arena so that the fight can be performed," Hayate said.

Everyone left and headed to the observation area.

All the teams along with their Jounin Sensei were in different spots, all but Anko; she had to stay with the other examiners.

Those present looked towards the arena while Naruto stared at the redheaded girl of Kumo. He was sure that she was an Uzumaki, and he would definitely speak to her once Sasuke's fight was over.

Menma, meanwhile, shouted that he wouldn't forgive Sasuke if he lost, which only made the Uchiha smile. After a few seconds, the fight started.

Sasuke had trouble at first because he had underestimated his opponent, and Yoroi took advantage of that to absorb his chakra.

Sasuke took the battle seriously, and after a few moments, the Uchiha defeated him after giving him a strong kick called ‘the Lion Combo.’ The technique reminded Naruto of Lee's Omote Renge, who was staring at him as he squeezed the bars sharply.

Hayate declared Sasuke as the winner, so he returned with his teammates, but not before looking at Naruto, who was still staring at the Kumo girl.

The Uchiha shrugged and returned to his companions, who congratulated him for winning his battle so quickly.

Karui, who was this girl's name, noticed that Naruto was staring at her. That bothered her a bit, but of course, she couldn’t see Naruto very well because he was on the other end of the room. "Who the hell is that guy? And why the hell is he looking at me like that?" She whispered.

Her companion, a young, dark-skinned Kumo-nin with short, spiky, white hair; replied. "Maybe he wants you to fall in love with him, so you betray the village, or maybe he wants you to assassinate Raikage-sama, or maybe he wants…"

However, he couldn’t finish because Karui had hit his head. "Shut up, Omoi!" Karui shouted.

The other woman of their team observed impassively; this girl was Samui.

They looked at the display again since the names reappeared.

"Shino Aburame and Rock Lee, please come to this place."

Lee instantly jumped down, and Shino approached slowly. Naruto wanted to see this fight, but since he had already seen Lee fighting before the exams; he knew that Lee would win. Shino was an excellent Genin, but that wouldn’t be enough to defeat Lee.

Naruto, tired of waiting, used a Shunshin and appeared right next to Karui, surprising her team. "This guy really knows how to move. Bakayaro! Konoyaro!"  Their Jounin Sensei thought.

They quickly turned around, seeing with surprise the guy who changed the mind of the first examiner. Karui was about to yell something, but she couldn’t for some strange reason; she just stared at him.

Naruto smiled and took one of Karui's hands; he bowed his head before kissing it. That action surprised Karui; what the hell was this guy thinking? She wanted to scold him, but she was unable to.

Samui and Omoi were also surprised, even more so because Karui didn’t punch the guy yet.

"Excuse me, Miss, could you be so kind as to share your name with me?" Naruto kindly asked with a smile.

Karui mentally squinted, "Don't think that I'll say it, stupid idiot!"

 "M-My name is K-Karui,” she automatically answered.

The redheaded girl opened her eyes in surprise, "What the hell? Why did I respond to this idiot?"

Naruto smiled and continue, "Nice to meet, Karui-chan; my name is Naruto."

Karui then remembered the kiss, and she unconsciously touched her hand. It was the first time she experienced something like that, and she found it odd.

The Kunoichi squinted again, and just when Karui thought that she could scold Naruto, an impulse made her say, "Nice to meet you, Naruto-kun."

The eyes of the Kumo-nin widened, even Samui’s, who always seemed to have an emotionless gaze. Something strange was happening to Karui since she had never shown interest in boys. And it was odd that she already called him affectionately, to a guy she had just met.

They couldn't understand what was happening. Too bad they didn’t know about the Uzumaki attraction, if they did, it wouldn't have been so difficult to comprehend.

Naruto smiled again and was about to say something when he heard a voice behind him. "Yo! Nine Boy! My name is Killer Bee; I'm the Jounin sensei of this team."

Naruto turned and looked at him while remembering how he had called him; the Uzumaki looked into his eyes with a severe expression and uttered, "Hachibi."

His Genin were surprised; they were sure that that information was unknown for Konoha, even more for a Genin. Even though his father had fought against their Sensei in the past; they doubted that his father had shared that information.

Bee smiled again and was about to make another of his bad rhymes when a voice in his head shouted, "Bee!"

Bee automatically entered in his mindscape, appearing over the nose of a huge octopus. "Yo! What's up my friend?"

Gyūki put on a serious face and replied, "This guy… Don't joke with him. This guy isn't ordinary; I can feel a great power within him."

Bee didn’t see anything unusual and replied, “The power of your brother flows inside him! Bakayaro! Konoyaro!"

Gyūki shook his head and answered, "No, I can't explain it, but it's something else. Bee, don't joke with this guy; I can feel a great evil within him, and it’s not Kurama... Besides, this is not the essence of Kurama; that within him is not the Kurama that I remember. This Kurama is pure evil, but for some strange reason, it seems that he trusts his Jinchūriki. Bee, I repeat you, don't joke with him. Avoid him if you can. "

Bee believed that his companion was exaggerating, and just when he was about to talk about it, something made him leave his mindscape. "Are you done talking to him? If you'll excuse me, I want to keep talking with Karui-chan."

The Genin didn’t understand what Naruto meant, but Bee could, and he was frankly surprised.

The Jounin tried to say something, but he couldn’t because Naruto started talking with Karui, who surprisingly was starting to blush.

"And how is the weather in Kumo, Karui-chan? Is it cold?" Naruto asked; he already knew the answer since he had traveled to the Land of Lightning in his days as an ANBU.

Karui had an internal struggle, much of her wanted to talk with Naruto, but her other hand, and though it was minimal, wanted to scold him. Nevertheless, she couldn't, so she smiled and was about to answer him when they heard in the arena, "Winner Rock Lee."

She didn’t bother to look there since Naruto continued looking at her with such a charming smile.

She smiled, and just when she was about to answer Naruto's question, someone else interrupted her.

"Naruto!" Lee shouted.

A vein popped out on her forehead; she clenched her fists and was about to yell when Naruto placed a hand on her shoulder.

She looked up and saw an expression that would have made Samui proud, which surprised her a little bit.

"What do you want?" Naruto asked, staring at him.

Lee clenched his right fist tightly; he raised it before pointing his thumb down. "You're going down."

Naruto mentally smiled. He would be more than happy to see if he was able to do that.

Those who knew Naruto didn't take Lee's threat seriously, but those who didn't know him well couldn’t help but wonder why he said that. Though most wondered what Naruto was doing with these ninjas of Kumo; especially Neji, who felt quite annoyed with their presence, but he just kept his impassive gaze. He trusted in Naruto; maybe he had a reason.

Hayate approached Lee and continued, "Alright, Lee. * Cough * you can return to your place, we have to continue with the fights."

Lee shrugged before looking back at Naruto, seeing him talking with a blushing Karui.

Lee growled and clenched his fists, but then jumped up and returned with the rest of his teammates. Tenten and Gai congratulated him, but Lee didn’t care; he only cared about Naruto.

Back in the arena, Hayate coughed again while doctors took Shino away. After they had left, the names appeared on the display.

"Sakura Haruno and Karui, please come down to the arena. *Cough* *cough*" Hayate asked.

Karui sighed in disappointment since she was having a good conversation with Naruto.

The Jinchūriki put a hand on her shoulder, approached his head at Karui's ear and whispered, "Karui-chan, if you win, we'll have some Kenjutsu practices… alone."

Karui shuddered when feeling his breath against her ear. She blushed, but nobody besides Naruto noticed it.

Naruto watched Karui walking down the stairs; she was pretty, but her clothes hid much of her beauty. Perhaps the people in Kumo didn’t appreciate her as they should, which made him angry. Especially because he was sure that she was the daughter of an Uzumaki woman, who Kumo kidnapped to use her for breeding.

The thought of what the woman had to suffer made him boil with anger. However, he wouldn’t say anything about it yet.

Naruto leaned back against the wall and saw that the other two Genin of Kumo were looking at him incredulously.

"What's up?" Naruto asked while looking at Omoi, who was watching him open-mouthed, but he closed it, shrugged and turned around without responding. Samui also did the same, to watch Karui's fight.

Bee was carefully looking at Naruto. He couldn’t detect the evil that the Hachibi had spoken about; in fact, he seemed very quiet. The Jounin tried to take a step forward to talk to Naruto, but a shout in his head stopped him, "Bee! I told you already, don't bother him!"

Bee squinted; he could feel some fear in his words, why would one of the most powerful Bijūs be afraid of a child? Also, he was a mere Genin; Bee didn't understand this, so he decided to ask. "Yo! Hachibi my friend, what's wrong? Why are you talking like a scared chicken?"

Gyūki didn't answer; he only cut the connection. It wasn't fear, but there was something about Naruto that made him feel insecure. He wasn’t sure, but the only thing he knew was that Bee had to avoid that guy; nothing good would happen if that boy got angry.

Meanwhile, Karui and Sakura were facing each other. Sakura had a Kunai in her hands and Karui her Katana; Hayate was right in the middle of them.

Hayate then looked at both, raised his hand and lowered it quickly while saying. "Start."

Sakura wanted to make fun of her clothes, but luckily, she didn’t get the chance because Karui immediately went on the attack.

Sakura was surprised but blocked Karui's attack just barely on instinct. The redheaded girl moved her Katana, pushing Sakura's Kunai aside. When seeing the opening, she kicked Sakura's stomach, throwing her a few meters back.

Naruto shook his head; what the hell did she do all these months? She was pathetic.

The Uzumaki sighed, maybe he would ask Anko to train her a little; just because training with her wouldn’t be easy. And maybe she would stop fawning over Sasuke if she managed to endure Anko’s training.

Menma cheered for Sakura, who slowly stood up, with one hand on her stomach. "That…didn't... hurt me," Sakura stated, but everyone could tell it was otherwise.

"Give up; little princess, you can't beat me," Karui expressed, returning to her first stance.

Sakura smiled; she made hand seals and exclaimed while running towards Karui, "I'll show you who the princess is!"

She ended her hand seals and four replicas of herself appeared, which were running at full speed towards Karui.

Naruto led his hand to his forehead; this was so pathetic that was making him cringe. He would tell Anko to help Sakura a little bit.

Ino couldn’t believe that Sakura was only able to do something like that. The blonde Kunoichi thought that she would be stronger because Menma and Sasuke were her teammates.

Sakura smiled since she was about to reach Karui, believing that the Kumo Kunoichi didn’t notice which was the real one. However, Karui moved towards her, knocking her down to the ground as she placed the edge of her Katana against Sakura's neck.

Hayate quickly declared, "Winner *cough* *cough* Karui."

Karui stood up while sheathing her Katana. "Wow, girl. If this is all you can do, I wouldn’t be surprised if something awful happens to you on a mission."

That reminded Sakura of Naruto's words that day at the Academy. Therefore, she looked at him, seeing his expression of total disapproval.

Sakura sighed; everyone was right. She had never taken her career as Kunoichi seriously. Perhaps it was a good time to increase her training.

She got up but was curious to know how Karui discovered whom the real one was. However, she didn't ask after seeing her shadow. She instantly felt like an idiot, and she was supposed to be the smartest Genin of her generation. Sakura returned to her team; Sasuke didn't even look at her, but Menma and Kakashi tried to cheer her up.

The Haruno looked at Kakashi and asked, “Kakashi-sensei, I want you to train me seriously from now on."

Kakashi closed his orange book and gave her an eye smile before nodding. After that, he looked to the front.

Karui slowly went upstairs; that girl was indeed weak; she wondered if all Konoha's Ninjas were like that.

After arriving, she looked at her team and Naruto. He was smiling, and she couldn't help smiling back.

"What the hell? Why am I feeling in this way around this guy? Arrgh! Karui! He's a ninja of Konoha, and you are of Kumo. Even if he wants something with you, it would be impossible!" Karui thought as she stood next to him.

Karui blushed again, and this time, everyone could see it. "Oi, Karui, what the hell is happening to you?" Omoi asked.

She blushed a bit more before changing her expression to one of annoyance while hitting Omoi’s head. "Shut up, Omoi!" She yelled.

"Ouch! Hey, why did you hit me?" Omoi asked while rubbing his head.

Karui growled again as she raised her fist. Therefore, Omoi decided it would be best to stop bothering her.

Naruto couldn't help smiling; Karui was a girl with character, just as he liked.

The names appeared again, this time stopping at Tenten and Temari, making Naruto smile.

The Uzumaki saw that Temari descended to the arena over her fan, and Tenten jumped down. Once both were there, both looked at him. He smiled, and they did it too. Afterward, both girls looked at each other, this time, with a more serious expression.

Hayate then gave the order to fight, and Gai instantly cheered for Tenten, who quickly began to throw an endless supply of weapons at Temari, who merely opened her fan to divert her weapons.

Temari smirked and stated, "You can't beat me. When you see the third moon of my fan, you will lose."

Tenten squinted, concluding that the fan was the problem.

However, she smiled and looked at Naruto with a requesting expression.

Naruto gave a nod, and Tenten smiled again as she moved her hands into her ninja bag, pulling a scroll out.

Gai believed that she would already use ‘that’ attack, but on a closer look, he noticed that the scroll was different. This one was much smaller, plus it was green, and it had strange white inscriptions around it. He didn't know what that scroll would do, so he just stood by and watched.

Most people didn't know what she would do with that scroll, not even Minato, who knew about a lot of scrolls, but it was the first time he saw something like that. However, he understood that Naruto made it because she asked him permission to use it.

Tenten threw the scroll at the ceiling, and it embedded on it. After that, some seals came out of it, spreading over the entire length of the ceiling that covered the arena—without reaching the place where the spectators were.

Minato couldn’t help being surprised; those were some quite complicated seals. He managed to identify some of them, but there were others that he didn’t know what they were for. Nevertheless, he understood what the scroll would do.

The Hokage looked subtly at his son, who was nodding. Minato was surprised, his son was a master in the sealing art, and maybe he would surpass him shortly. That thought made him happy.

Tenten smiled and spoke as she made a hand seal, "You know? I didn't want to use this scroll. The person who gave it to me told me that it would be my trump card; I'm sure it wasn’t easy for him to make it. However, I realized that it would be the only way to defeat you. Give it up now, or this will hurt you.”

Temari felt a bit nervous; she didn’t know what those seals on the ceiling were, but she knew they weren't a good thing. Therefore, she grabbed her fan, opened it completely, and just when she was about to launch the final attack, she heard Tenten shouting, "I won’t allow you… Kai!"

The seals on the ceiling glowed and changed to white color while a barrier of the same color that completely covered the arena came out from the ends.

The barrier disappeared, and Temari took this as her chance, ignoring that the seals on the ceiling were still glowing. However, she believed that Tenten's attack had failed.

Temari fully opened her fan and shouted, "Ninpou Kamaitachi (Sickle Weasel Technique)!" 

A strong whirlwind came out of her fan and headed at Tenten.

She didn't move, and everyone thought that she would lose, but when the attack was about to hit her, it hit something. The white barrier became visible, and it disappeared after a few moments.

"What the hell was that?!" Temari shouted.

Tenten smiled, and Temari growled angrily. "Ninpou Kamaitachi (Sickle Weasel Technique)!" Temari threw her attack but got the same result.

She growled, and Tenten spoke again. "Very well, I think it's time to finish this battle. Look up." She pointed to the ceiling, and Temari and the rest looked up.

"As you may notice, not all the seals are glowing. Do you know why?" Tenten asked as she made a hand seal again.

Temari didn't answer; instead, she stood in a defensive stance. "Because this is not over yet... Kai!" Tenten shouted, and those seals glowed. Another barrier appeared again, and this time, it reduced Temari's space.

The blonde woman tried to break it with her fan, but every hit pushed her fan backward. She growled again; she wouldn't give up so easily, perhaps the barrier had a weak point, and perhaps its weakness was the floor. If she could break it, maybe she could escape.

She tried to carry out her plan, but she felt that something began to fall on her head. She looked up and saw water drops coming out of the ceiling. The drops quickly changed to spurts, and it filled the place with water.

Minato could only think, "Impressive." He couldn't believe that tiny scroll could do all this.

The water filled Temari's place from the floor to the ceiling. Therefore, she quickly channeled her chakra in her lungs to keep the air; she still had time to carry out her plan; 'a bit' of water wouldn't stop her.

Hayate was about to finish the match, but after seeing that Temari seemed unaffected, he continued watching.

Temari swam down, looked at the floor and bit her thumb as she thought. "I'll have to use that Jutsu; I just hope I can make it."

Naruto shook his head. "That won’t work, Temari-chan. This…"

"Is over!" Tenten shouted, finishing Naruto's line of thought.

Right then, some inscriptions appeared below Temari; they glowed intensely, and she felt an electric current running through her body.

She screamed and released the air she had left before losing consciousness.

Tenten sighed and did another hand seal, removing the barrier while the inscriptions at the ceiling sealed the water, leaving the arena completely dry.

Temari fell from a great height, and Hayate tried to enter. However, there was a barrier that was pushing him back. The other Jounin Sensei also tried it, and Tenten was unable to disable it.

Naruto put a foot on the railing and jumped there, going through the barrier and catching Temari before she hit the ground.

He raised his hand; the barrier instantly disappeared, and the scroll fell into his hands. He grabbed it and then walked slowly towards Tenten.

"Tenten-chan, did you forget how to disable the main barrier?" Naruto asked.

She bowed her head due to the embarrassment. "Sorry, Naruto-kun," she replied.

Naruto smiled and whispered as he handed her the scroll over. "Don't worry about it. But remember, use the Ram and Tiger seals to disable it. And don't worry, I've already charged energy to the scroll. You won’t have to wait so long to reuse it."

Tenten nodded, and Naruto walked in the opposite direction. "You can now enter."

Hayate shook his head and declared Tenten as the winner while some doctors took Temari away.

Naruto watched her leaving; she certainly gave a good fight, but that barrier was a weakness for users who didn't use Doton or didn’t have powerful Jutsus to destroy it. It was one of the simplest barriers that Naruto could do so far. He didn't know that Temari and Tenten would fight, and maybe if Tenten hadn't used that scroll, the result would have been different.

Naruto used a Shunshin and returned with the Kumo ninjas, who looked at him with open eyes.

"Yo, Nine Boy! Your scroll rocks!" Bee said as he moved his fingers.

The Hachibi just shook his head; it seemed that Bee would always be a stubborn one, who would never pay attention to his advice.

Naruto ignored him; he looked at Karui and spoke, "It was nice to meet you, Karui-chan. However, I have to go back to my team. If you want to meet again, you can go to this address. I usually train there at noon."

He wrote something on paper before handing it over to Karui, who blushed at the thought of training alone with him.

Naruto said goodbye to the other Kumo Ninjas and walked slowly to where his team was. The Jinchūriki noticed that almost everyone was looking at him, which was pissing him off. And just when he was about to yell at everyone, someone hugged him from behind, whispering in his ear. "Naruto-kun, how are you?"

Naruto recognized her voice and lowered his head while replying, "Anko-chan, I'm sorry."

Anko hugged him even harder; she couldn't understand why Naruto was like this; he sounded guilty and sad. "Naruto-kun. You don't need to feel sad; I'm not mad at you. You've not done anything wrong to me," Anko whispered again.

She then looked at his neck and saw the Cursed Mark. However, this one was entirely different from hers, and it was also red, which surprised her.

The seal didn't appear to be affecting him, so it didn't worry her much.

She turned to Naruto and realized that he still had his head down. Therefore, she lifted it with her fingers and continued, "Don't worry, Naruto-kun, you can explain to me what's going on with you once we're... alone." She stroked Naruto's chin while giving him a sensual smile.

Naruto smiled and nodded; Anko was right, they could speak better later, and he would finally remove her Cursed Mark. It was the only thing he could do for failing his promise.

Far away, Karui growled as she clenched her fists tightly. "Who is that woman? And why is she hugging Naruto-kun like that?" She thought, instantly realizing what she did. "What the hell? Why should it bother me what he does? After all, we are nothing," She thought the latter disheartened.

Everyone looked at the arena when Hayate coughed to attract their attention. They looked at the display, and Gaara used a sand Shunshin before his name even appeared.

Then it stopped, and Chouji turned pale. "Whew, I feel sorry for you, Chouji. It’s troublesome that you have to fight against the crazy one," Shikamaru said looking at Chouji, who was on his haunches and holding the railing bars.

"I don't want to…" Chouji stammered.

Ino shook her head. Yeah, that guy looked creepy, but he should at least try before saying that.

Asuma smiled and added, "Chouji, if you win, you can eat all you want."

Chouji didn't care and stood up before shouting, "Examiner, I give up!"

"Are you sure about that? You could at least try *cough*," Hayate replied.

Chouji looked at Gaara, who had an insane smile on his face. The redheaded Jinchūriki was like this due to what he had seen Naruto doing. He desired to prove his existence now more than ever.

Chouji after seeing his expression shook his head and shouted, "I'm more than sure!"

Hayate shrugged and declared Gaara as the winner, who snorted and returned to his team.

His expression intimidated Baki and Kankurō, and they both knew that Naruto had caused it.

Meanwhile, Naruto could only shake his head; there was no doubt that Ino's teammates were cowards.

The names reappeared, and Naruto immediately heard Sai talking in a questioning tone. "Naruto-sama…"

Naruto looked at him and nodded. "Don't hold back."

Sai then nodded and used an Ink Shunshin, and Naruto looked at Ino, who walked down there.

"Show me how strong you have become, Ino-chan," Naruto thought.

Notes

Chapter finished!

Naruto revealed his feelings.

Naruto created the scroll. It’s one of the simplest ones he can make so far, and the barrier isn’t very powerful. An attack like the Rasengan can destroy it, but Temari didn’t have such attacks.

I plan to add Karui in the Harem. This time, Naruto could control his impulses, but trust me, if it weren’t for Karin, her teammates would have been more than shocked.

I’ll announce that there will be a ‘marathon’ of Lemons (maybe two Lemons per chapter, each chapter) after the finish of the preliminaries.

That is necessary, and I think it will be the only occasion that I’ll do something like that.

Chapter Text

Human talking, "Show me what you got!"

Human thinking, "Pathetic."

Nonhuman talking, "This will be fun."

Nonhuman thinking, "I think I was wrong."

Disclaimer: I do not own Naruto, Masashi Kishimoto does.

Chapter 19

Tower in the Forest of Death - Battle Arena.

"* Cough* *cough* Okay, come down here so we can start the sixth match. *Cough* *cough*" Hayate coughed even louder, and some of those present stared at him with a sweatdrop.

Ino saw Sai talking to Naruto, who had nodded at his words. Therefore, she concluded that his partner would fight with all his strength, which she would do too.

She arrived at the arena and stepped in front of Sai, who had come before her.

She didn't know anything about Sai, so she was unsure what he was capable of; Ino had met him just a few days ago. However, she could tell that he was one of those Root ANBU due to his emotionless expression, one that looked like Naruto's when he wanted to intimidate someone. Nevertheless, his stare wasn't as intimidating as Naruto's, but it was enough for her to realize that he was one of them.

That only meant that this fight wouldn't be easy, so she would give her best, even if she lost the match.

Hayate looked at both of them, coughed one last time before giving the order to start the match. Neither of them moved; they just stared at each other. Ino tried to find a weakness, and Sai looked at her with a fake smile.

Meanwhile, Naruto heard Menma speaking to his right, "Hey, Nii-san, who will win, your teammate or Ino?"

Next to Menma the members of Team 7 were. Naruto looked to his left and saw Anko and Haku, plus the members of Team 9, except for Lee, who was at the other side of the room.

Naruto never noticed their arrival; it probably was when he was talking to Anko.

He recalled Menma's question and answered, "Hmm, I don't know. They're both good, so we'll just have to watch."

He looked back at the arena, just to see Ino jumping back, and pulling three Kunai and some Shuriken out from her ninja bag. She threw them towards Sai, who blocked them with his Tantō, still with that fake smile.

Ino nodded as she thought, "There's no doubt; he's one of those ANBU."

She grabbed a Kunai and went in straight line to attack him.

Sai continued giving his fake smile, standing and doing nothing. However, just when Ino was about to stab him, he gave a slight turn and blocked her Kunai with his Tantō.

The pale boy continued smiling while pushing his Tantō. His smile faded away after seeing Ino throwing herself to the floor, making him lose balance. She used her hands as support before kicking his wrist, which made him drop his weapon.

Sai regained his balance, just to see Ino standing with her hands and spinning to give him a powerful kick with the heel of her sandal right to his cheek, making him fly a few meters back before falling to the floor.

Naruto smiled; he had taught Ino how the Root ANBU blocked that kind of attacks. Naruto showed her that because he didn't know what to expect from Danzō, and he wanted her to have an opportunity if Danzō attempted something.

The members of Team 10 were surprised; they didn't know that she could do something like that. They saw her standing up before dashing towards Sai.

She jumped up and fell above Sai, who was just starting to stand up. He couldn't dodge, and therefore, she stabbed his stomach. The artist was surprised and tried to get Ino off of him.

Regardless, he gave a fake smile and quietly said, "I see," before turning into ink.

That action surprised most of those present; many didn't know what Sai had just done. "Wow, what Jutsu is that?" Menma asked amazed.

Kakashi replied, "It was an ink clone. That boy, it seems that he can use ink Jutsu. It's certainly unusual and surprising for a boy of his age. Although only Danzō teaches ink Jutsu, maybe he…" Kakashi thought while looking towards Naruto.

Ino stood up again and saw Sai without a scratch. The pale boy drew something on his scroll before saying, "Ninpou: Chōjū Giga."

At least five ink lions came out of there, all of them heading towards Ino, who repeatedly jumped backward to dodge them.

However, these lions were fast, and they followed her wherever she went. She growled and made hand seals as she continued jumping. "Katon: Goukakyuu no jutsu!"

The members of Team 10 dropped their jaws, even Asuma; he didn't know that Ino had an affinity for fire. He believed that she had no affinity for anything, since never before he had seen a Yamanaka using elemental Jutsu, only the mental ones.

Naruto smiled, and Kakashi spoke, "I didn't know that the Yamanaka could use elemental Jutsu; they've always relied on their mental manipulation techniques."

Naruto replied, "Of course they can, we all have at least one natural affinity, but as you said, the Yamanaka have always relied on their mental Jutsu. I helped Ino to use her element. Although it was difficult, she managed to do it. I told her that her mental Jutsus wouldn't always work, so I decided to teach her some Jutsus. Moreover, I can see that she has wasted no time in these four months, now she can make a bigger fireball. "

Kakashi nodded, and 'someone' exclaimed, "There's no doubt that your flames of youth burn brightly, Naruto-kun! You will become a great master! And the scroll you gave Tenten was fantastic!" The Uzumaki looked at Gai before nodding.

He tried to look at the arena, but Menma's voice interrupted him. "Yeah, I wanted to ask you about that, Nii-san. How did you make that scroll? Oto-san has already taught me a few things, but that one was quite complicated. And due to Oto-san's reaction, I think that not even he knew what some of those seals were for."

Many nodded and waited for the response of Naruto, who turned around with a questioning expression. "Did you say something, Menma?"

His brother was speechless; Gai had an equal reaction since those words reminded him much of what Kakashi used to tell him, and Kakashi was proudly looking at Naruto. "I've finally found the person who follows my philosophy, and I couldn't be happier that it's him." Kakashi puffed out his chest, and Sakura and Sasuke just shook their heads.

Menma almost repeated his question, but he didn't because Naruto looked back at the arena. He sighed in defeat and did it too, just in time to see a great Taijutsu display between Ino and Sai; the last one seemed to have troubles to stop Ino's advances.

Sai couldn't help thinking as he blocked Ino's punches. "I see, Naruto-sama taught her how we fight in Root. In that case, I have to…"

He couldn't finish his line of thought because Ino kicked his nose.

That blow had hurt him, but he quickly made a backflip while drawing something on his scroll. "Ninpou: Chōjū Giga"

This time, some bats came out of it and covered Ino's eyes, reducing her vision considerably.

Before Ino could think of a way to get rid of those annoying bats, they moved aside, revealing a few ink lions right in front of her.

Ino had no time to dodge them; therefore, she received the attacks, which sent her backward until crashing into the concrete wall.

Hayate returned to the arena; he was about to declare Sai as the winner since the blonde-haired woman wasn't moving. However, he heard her moans and saw her standing up, surprising the members of Team 10 again. "How troublesome, I can't believe that Ino is so strong. I even believe that she's stronger than I am. That Naruto is a troublesome person."

Chouji asked, "What do you mean, Shikamaru? What does Naruto have to do with this? "

Shikamaru sighed as he shrugged. "Well, it's likely that Naruto taught Ino all that because those two had trained a lot together before he went into the coma. Besides, Asuma-sensei has never taught us anything like that," Shikamaru looked at Asuma, who still was open-mouthed.

He regained his composure while carrying his fist to his mouth. "* Ahem* Uh, yeah, well; I..." Asuma nervously spoke.

Shikamaru sighed, looked forward and heard the examiner asking, "Are you sure you still want to continue?"

Ino smiled while wiping the blood that dripped from the corner of her lips; she looked at Hayate and nodded, and the examiner withdrew.

Ino did some hand seals, but Sai's fake smile made her stop. "What's so funny?"

That smile was getting on her nerves; Ino knew that she should calm down, but she couldn't help it.

Sai just giggled again. "Examiner-san, I give up."

Many in the room asked themselves the reason for this declaration, especially Ino, who shouted, "Hey! You can't give up now! We've just started. Come on, let's continue!"

She attempted to finish her hand seals, but Sai laughed, and Hayate asked him if he was serious.

The artist nodded, and Hayate declared Ino as the winner. She clenched her fists tightly and shouted again, "If you only surrendered because you think that Naruto-kun will do something to you, then you're dead wrong! You're just a coward!"

Naruto looked at Sai; he didn't know why he surrendered, but he didn't believe it was for that reason. He would just wait for Sai's explanation.

The artist gave her a fake smile and replied, "It wasn't for that reason, Ino-san." Then Sai disappeared in a swirl of ink to appear next to Naruto.

Ino growled angrily; this victory had left her a bitter taste in her mouth since she couldn't show what she was capable of. She sighed, shrugged and returned with her teammates.

Naruto looked at Sai, who approached him and whispered a few words, "Sorry, Naruto-sama. I must be at the Root base in the invasion's day. I couldn't be in the finals even if I wanted to. So I thought that it would be the best decision if I surrendered and she saved her best cards for the finals."

Naruto nodded; he had forgotten that. He would tell her that later; he knew that she was upset. Naruto couldn't blame her; even he would be upset if something like that were to happen him.

Hayate coughed again. "Samui and Misumi Tsurugi please come down to the arena * cough *."

Both fighters went down, and after a few moments, Hayate started the combat. It was a quick and easy fight for the Kumo girl because her opponent could only bend his limbs, but Samui was faster than he was; he never had a chance to trap her.

He lost after Samui had inflicted him a deep cut in one of his arms, making Misumi surrender due to the pain.

Samui returned with her teammates; they congratulated her while the doctors helped Misumi to go to the nursing.

Everyone looked at the board. "Ugh, I wanted to fight you, Nii-san," Menma exclaimed as he looked at Naruto, who looked at him with a questioning expression.

"Sorry, did you say something, Menma?"

Menma was speechless, and just when he was about to tell Naruto to stop doing that, Hayate called him. "Menma, your opponent is already down here, hurry up or I will disqualify you."

Menma nodded and jumped before landing in front of Kankurō.

Many of those present wanted to know how powerful the Hokage's son was, especially the ninjas of Kumo. Hayate asked them if they were ready; they both nodded, and Hayate started the eighth match.

Kankurō grabbed what he had on his back before putting it on the ground. "Ha! Do you seriously are Naruto's brother? Look at you; you're just a brat, I wanted to fight him. But since that won't be possible, I'll have to settle for you," Kankurō mockingly looked at Menma.

The blond growled and exclaimed, "Yeah?! Well, I also wanted to fight him! Don't think that I'm happy to fight against someone who stole his sister's makeup! And I'm not a brat!" Menma yelled.

The audience laughed at Kankurō due to the makeup remark.

A vein popped out on Kankurō's forehead, so he ran towards Menma while yelling, "This is not makeup! It's war paint!"

Menma stood in a fighting stance, ready to intercept his attack.

Kankurō had forgotten to use whatever he had between those bandages because he just wanted to punch the 'cocky' kid in his face.

The Namikaze didn't allow him since he made a shadow clone as he extended his right hand while the clone charged Chakra in his palm.

The ball of Chakra surprised many of them, and before Kankurō could do anything to dodge it, Menma jumped to him. "Rasengan!" Menma yelled, hitting the not very powerful Rasengan into his stomach, which sent him flying several meters backward.

The blonde-haired boy stood right next to him before looking down with a smile, "Who's the brat now?"

Kankurō laughed, and his face peeled off, which astonished the blond-haired Jinchūriki. "Well, you are!"

Kankurō jumped towards him as he transformed into a puppet. The puppet 'hugged' Menma, making him show signs of pain.

That surprised many of them, while it worried Hinata. Meanwhile, the thing that Kankurō left on the floor had unbandaged by itself, revealing the Suna-nin with his hands glowing blue.

"That fool lost. That's what he gets for being so gullible," Sasuke spoke.

Naruto shook his head and answered. "No, Menma won't lose; that was his plan."

They looked to the arena again, just to listen Kankurō saying, "Give it up, brat, or you'll die," Kankurō stated while his Karasu (Crow) squeezed Menma tightly.

Menma could feel it; however, he smiled.

Before Kankurō could ask what was so funny, he heard someone behind him shouting. "You give it up, Rasengan!"

Kankurō turned around, just in time to see Menma crashing a Chakra ball into his stomach, but this time, it was brighter than before.

Kankurō growled while the technique 'liquefied' his insides, sending him flying toward the wall. The hit knocked him out, and Hayate declared Menma as the winner.

He sent thumbs up to Naruto, his teammates, and to a blushing Hinata, who congratulated him softly. The Namikaze walked upstairs with his hands behind his head, and his father congratulated him on an excellent fight.

This time, Menma approached Hinata. The Hyūga girl congratulated Menma while blushing, remembering how 'cool' he looked when he defeated Kankurō.

"Haku Yuki and Omoi, come down," Hayate asked.

Naruto raised an eyebrow. "Did you choose to use your clan's surname again, Haku-chan? Well, it doesn't matter, go and kick that guy's ass." He gave her a kiss, which she returned before jumping to the arena.

In the distance, Karui felt her world falling apart. She growled softly while squeezing the guardrail. "I don't care what that idiot does, why should I care? He can do whatever he wants. Arrgh! Damn it, you're an ass, Naruto!"

Ultimately, she felt sad; it was too good to be true, after all. Karui glared at Haku; the Yuki was stunning, and she couldn't deny it.

Meanwhile, Haku and Omoi were looking at each other, and Hayate was in the middle. The Kumo-nin didn't know Haku's fighting style, but he guessed that she was strong due to being on the team of the Hokage's son.

He decided to fight seriously to avoid any unnecessary damage. Hayate gave the order to start, and therefore, he quickly unsheathed his Katana.

However, Haku spoke before he could attack, "What do you say if we have a fight with Kenjutsu only?" She carried her hand to her ninja bag.

Omoi moved his lollipop. Maybe it would be a good idea; this girl didn't seem to be physically strong. He nodded, and Haku pulled out a scroll.

Haku smiled, opened the scroll and charged chakra into it. Omoi then saw something that almost made him drop his lollipop.

Haku smiled as she took the Kubikiribōchō by its handle and spun it before sticking it into the ground, leaning against it. "Shall we start?" Haku asked with a smile.

Omoi and several Genin were open-mouthed; they couldn't believe the size of that sword and that Haku could use it so easily.

Omoi shook his head and put his Katana in front of him.

Haku grabbed the handle of her sword and spun to attack him with the edge of her sword.

Omoi blocked it, but the force behind the attack pushed him back.

He quickly put his foot and hands on the floor to avoid being pushed further back. Once he stopped, he sighed; that blow was certainly powerful and had almost broken his Katana.

He looked up and saw Haku falling toward him with the edge of her sword pointing forward. He rolled on the ground and dodged the attack.

Haku growled and crashed her Kubikiribōchō into the ground, making a crater that raised a bit of dust.

Naruto smiled. "I want to throw Haku-chan to the ground and try all the positions of the Kama-sutra with her. Hold me, Anko-chan, or I'll do it!" He joked, but almost everyone took it seriously, which made them blush.

Anko just smiled and added, "Go ahead, Naruto-kun; give us a show." She finally gave him an encouraging push.

Naruto smiled continued, "Okay, I won't do it just because there are too many bastards. And I don't want them to see Haku-chan's beautiful body."

Anko smiled too, and when she was about to add something else, she heard a loud impact sound coming from the arena.

The Mitarashi looked there and saw that Omoi was once again blocking an attack from Haku.

However, this time, the boy's sword was glowing and cutting the Kubikiribōchō.

Omoi smiled; he concluded that cutting her sword would make things a lot easier. However, Haku smiled, and before he could say something, some seals appeared around the Kubikiribōcho.

He saw a white cloak around her sword, which made his Katana stop shining.

Therefore, Haku moved it to one side, shattering his Katana.

Kakashi and many of those who had knowledge about the swords of Kirigakure were surprised. They were sure that it was difficult, not to say impossible, to add an element to the Kubikiribōchō, and a girl, no older than 15 years, had managed to do something that many swordsmen were unable to do.

Minato observed with surprise, thinking on the seals that had appeared around the Kubikiribōchō. He subtly looked at Naruto and saw him smiling, concluding that it was another of his designs.

The Yondaime was determined to train him; he needed to teach him everything he knew so that his son could be ready to defeat those Akatsuki.

His son certainly was powerful for someone of his age, and he didn't doubt that he would surpass him in a few years.

He looked back to the arena, just to see the Kumo-nin dropping the handle of his Katana; he shrugged and stated, "I surrender."

Hayate didn't ask him if he was serious since both had agreed to have a fight with Kenjutsu only, and now he no longer had his sword.

Hayate declared Haku as the winner, so she smiled and went back to her place while Omoi put another lollipop in his mouth and returned to his team.

The bad rhymes of his Sensei, the indifferent look of Samui, and the angry expression of Karui received him, "Omoi, you idiot! How could you lose against that useless Kunoichi?" Karui asked angrily.

Omoi looked at her with curiosity and asked, "What's wrong with you, Karui? You are acting like this since that guy left."

Karui just growled; she was infuriated, but she didn't feel like getting even with Omoi. If she did it, it would be with Naruto when she was near him.

She crossed her arms and waited for the next fight. Her companions just looked at her; something strange was going on, and everyone knew it had to do with Naruto.

Meanwhile, Naruto and the girls congratulated Haku, and after that, the Jinchūriki started talking to Ino, who was still upset.

The names appeared on the display again. Shikamaru sighed in relief and Kiba shouted, "Well, I'm very lucky! He can't win. Right, Akamaru?" His dog gave a bark in assent.

Menma shook his head and warned, "Kiba, don't be overconfident, my Nii-san is strong..."

Kiba snorted and replied, "Ha! The dobe can't beat me. You lost against him because you lowered your guard. He won't be able to keep up with me."

Menma shook his head again, and Hinata added, "K-Kiba-kun, I think you should listen to Menma-kun's warning; Naruto-san is indeed very strong. Remember that he almost defeated Sasuke-san too; he lost because he surrendered."

Kiba looked at Hinata and replied, "You too, Hinata? Don't worry; I'll defeat the dobe in a heartbeat; I'll be right back." Then he went down to the arena.

Menma just shook his head and couldn't help but think that Kiba was an idiot. Naruto was the most powerful person in this room, even stronger than most of the present Jounin.

He didn't doubt that after seeing his transformation and after feeling that terrifying killing intent in the forest. He just hoped that Naruto didn't do anything too bad to Kiba.

Naruto changed his face to one of total seriousness; he said nothing and walked down there.

Anko smiled and spoke, "Oh, hehe. It seems that Naruto-kun is going to kill him. I think I have to warn Kurenai-chan that she'll have one less Gennin in her team, hehe. See ya."

Sakura nervously asked, "S-She's not talking seriously, is she? Naruto won't kill Kiba, right?"

She looked at Naruto's teammates, who just shrugged as they looked towards the arena; that only increased Sakura nervousness.

What would happen if Naruto killed someone as he did with the people at Nami no Kuni, or if he transformed into that thing again? She wasn't sure if she could take it again.

The Inuzuka was looking mockingly at Naruto, and the Uzumaki had closed eyes and crossed arms. "Tenth combat, Naruto Namikaze against Kiba Inuzuka."

In the stands, everyone was eagerly awaiting the combat; most of them wanted to see how strong "the lost son" of the Hokage was, while others observed this with a little bit of concern.

Minato also wanted to know how strong his son actually was, and Gaara was calmer now, but his eyes were open to see Naruto's abilities.

Naruto finally opened his eyes, and this time, Kiba could see his cold eyes, which scared him a little bit.

However, he shook his head; he was sure that Naruto was only good at intimidating people, but he wouldn't allow him; it was time to put him in his place.

Naruto directly looked into Kiba's eyes and spoke, "Kiba, if you don't give up now, I assure you that you'll end up losing something from your body. If you want to keep all your limbs intact, I don't recommend you to leave; I command you to do so for your own safety." He moved his right hand to the handle of his Ninjato on his back.

Hayate looked at Kiba, and the Inuzuka chuckled as he snorted, "Dobe, you talk too much. As I told you, your attitude never intimidated me, and never will do."

Meanwhile, Anko and had reached Kurenai's place, "Hey, Kurenai-chan."

Kurenai turned her head and smiled, "Hey, Anko, what's up?"

Anko smiled and pointed to the arena. "Well, I just came to tell you that your Genin should withdraw, or else, Naruto-kun will kill him."

The eyes of Hinata and Menma widened in concern. Menma placed a hand on her shoulder and told her to calm down, that his brother wouldn't do something like that, and that there was nothing to worry about. However, neither he believed his own words.

Kurenai squinted and replied, "I think you hold your Genin in high regard, Anko. According to reports from the academy, he never did anything special. He always had the worst grades in combat and target practice."

Anko laughed loudly, "Kurenai-chan, do you not remember? Naruto-kun was the 'Demon Brat', and the Academy teachers always tried to boycott him. Anyway, I already warned you. Naruto-kun is really annoyed by the glances that your brat threw to the blonde girl." She pointed to Ino.

Kurenai's eyes narrowed again but said nothing since Hayate gave the order to start the match.

"Akamaru, stay back. I'll do this myself." Kiba spoke with extreme confidence and with a cocky grin on his face.

Naruto just stood still, with his hand on the handle of his Ninjato.

Kiba put on a straight face as he raised his right fist, "I'll defeat you with a single punch."

Naruto didn't say anything yet, which made Kiba laugh, "Oh, why are you so quiet? What happened with that attitude of yours? Did the rats eat your tongue?" Kiba mockingly asked as he crouched to do the Tiger's seal.

All those who knew Naruto couldn't help feeling sorry for Kiba, that idiot was just digging his own grave.

The Inuzuka put himself on all fours before saying, "Let's go."

Kiba disappeared and reappeared in front of Naruto, giving him an elbow in his stomach that threw him several meters back.

That surprised many, but some of them continued looking at the arena.

Kurenai looked at Anko and stated, "You see, Anko? You hold your Genin in high regard."

Anko just chuckled, so she looked back at the arena, seeing Kiba getting to his feet.

"He's not going to get up in a while, examiner-san."

Hayate just coughed, knowing that Naruto didn't lose yet.

Kiba snorted again, and when he was about to walk away, Naruto slowly stood up, still with his hand behind his back.

"If this is all you can do, you should give up now, or when you see my Ninjato unsheathed, your body will turn into a stain on the ground," Naruto stated with such a cold voice that chilled the blood of many.

Kiba growled and looked at his companion, "Let's go, Akamaru!"

The dog barked, and both ran towards Naruto while Kiba threw smoke bombs at the Uzumaki, who stood still in the same position.

Neji asked himself why Naruto didn't attack yet. Therefore, he activated his Byakugan and looked at Naruto's back, noticing that his sword was at a high temperature. It seemed that he was sending Chakra to it, so the Hyūga assumed that he was preparing an attack and that he needed some time to cast it.

He continued observing, just to see Kiba hitting Naruto repeatedly all over his body, but especially, in his face.

Naruto didn't flinch; he just continued receiving his punches as he continued sending Fire Style Chakra to his Ninjato.

The smoke cloud dissipated slowly, which angered Kiba since Naruto hadn't left that place, and therefore, his plan had failed

The Inuzuka jumped back and landed next to Akamaru. Just then, the smoke had dissipated completely, and everyone could see Naruto in the same stance as the beginning.

Kiba growled and carried his right hand into his ninja bag as he pulled out a pill. He looked at Akamaru and threw it to him, "Let's do it, Akamaru."

The dog barked and swallowed it, which made him growl, and changed his hair to red color.

Naruto knew that technique, but he didn't care; he would make sure of finishing him off within a few moments.

Kiba got on all fours again; Akamaru jumped to his back, and Kiba did the Tiger's seal again, "Jūjin Bunshin (Beast Human Clone)!"  The jutsu turned Akamaru into Kiba, and both growled wildly towards Naruto.

Both rushed at him, trying to scratch him. Naruto, however, jumped back and dodged all their attacks; without unsheathing his Ninjato yet.

Kiba growled in frustration; Naruto was excessively fast; he failed to keep up with his speed even after using his soldier pill.

The Inuzuka looked at his dog, who nodded, and both jumped and spun towards Naruto, "Gatsūga (Fang over Fang)!"

Naruto smiled and finally unsheathed his Ninjato, revealing that it was red hot.

The Uzumaki moved his Ninjato majestically, almost in a hypotonic way, and many could swear that they saw several replicas of his Ninjato every time he moved it.

"Uzumaki Kenjutsu: Uzu Ran'nau~ei Shōkyaku Katto (Uzumaki Kenjutsu: Burning Cut of the Overwhelming Whirlpool)" Naruto whispered, and instantly appeared above one of the Gatsūgas.

The redheaded man could clearly see Kiba spinning in slow motion. He smiled before changing his expression to one that he used to have before murdering someone. He made a descending cut, moving his right hand at an astonishing speed.

However, he didn't stop there, and with a speed that an average person wouldn't have been able to see, Naruto performed over thirty cuts around the entire body of Kiba, turning him into tiny pieces.

Everything returned to normal, and Kiba's pieces instantly fell to the ground, for the horror, concern, and amusement of some of those present.

"Kibaaaa!" Kurenai cried out.

"Kiba-kun!" Hinata exclaimed, crying and sobbing.

Anko, on the other hand, couldn't help smiling.

Minato also opened his eyes in shock; he could clearly see what his son did. First, he whispered a few words, which he didn't catch. Then he went straight to Kiba's Gatsūga and performed more than twenty cuts in less than a second; he couldn't count them all.

The Yondaime finally looked at what was left of that boy; it exactly was as Naruto had said; there was only a large stain of organs and blood all over the place.

However, those organs were too small for someone of Kiba's size, which the Yondaime found strange, but Kiba's piercing scream gave him the correct answer. "Akamaruuuuuuuuuuu!" His pet had died, not Kiba.

The Inuzuka ran over there, falling to his knees as he cried out in that place, "Akamaruuuuuuuuuuu!"

"HAHAHAHAHAHA! You're a fucking idiot! HAHAHAHA! I told you, bitch! You're lucky that I didn't finish you off. I concluded it'd be funnier to see you mourning near the pieces of your stupid dog," Naruto exclaimed as he increased the heat of his Ninjato, which increased its glow.

The Jounin noticed this as they saw Kiba turning around to face Naruto; they knew that Kiba would die if they didn't stop him.

The Uzumaki felt that several people had moved from their places, so he put his Ninjato horizontally and pointed it at Kiba, who had stood up and started to run towards him.

Naruto smiled and whispered a few words just when the Jounins were behind him, "Uzumaki Kenjutsu: Buraddokuresento (Uzumaki Kenjutsu: Crescent of Blood)."

A technique, shaped like a crescent of red color, came off from his Ninjato, going quickly towards Kiba.

Just then, several people grabbed him behind while his father held his right hand. They all cursed when the attack came off; however, Kakashi used an Earth Wall to protect Kiba.

Everyone sighed with relief, but Naruto chuckled and stated, "That won't be enough."

They didn't understand what he meant, but when they looked towards the Earth Wall, the attack went through it without any problems.

Meanwhile, Kiba was still running; everything had been fast for him.

He had heard Naruto mocking the death of his best friend, then he had started running, and after a few seconds, he saw an Earth Wall appearing before him, which was melted by a Jutsu that went straight to his neck.

However, Naruto moved his index finger down a bit, and the attack shifted its trajectory, going straight to Kiba's forearm and instantly cutting it.

"AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAHHHHHHHH!" Kiba gave such a piercing scream that chilled the blood of those present.

Half of Kiba's arm fell to the ground, which made the audience gasp in terror; they could also perceive the unpleasant smell of burned flesh, and some of them almost puked while others shivered with fear.

The Inuzuka began to squirm on the ground due to the indescribable pain he was suffering until it made him pass out.

Several medics instantly landed beside him and began to examine him. Miraculously, the arm wasn't bleeding since it seemed that the attack had cauterized the arm. However, they didn't want to take any risks, and therefore they took him away.

Meanwhile, Naruto chuckled, "Hehehe, stupid idiot. He should have paid attention to my warning."

That pulled the Jounin and Minato out of their daze.

"Naruto, why did you do that? Why did you go so far?" Minato asked, looking at Naruto with a reproachful look.

Naruto stopped smiling and shrugged with an indifferent look, "Hmmm, I don't know, because I wanted to?"

His statement made Kurenai furious, "Because you wanted to? Just that? Do you realize what you've done, you damn brat?! You just ruined the life of a person who had many goals for his future! How the hell can you talk so calmly after doing that?!"

Naruto turned to her, seeing her angry expression and Asuma placing a hand on her shoulder to reassure her.

Naruto put on a serious face and replied, "First, if you want to speak to me, introduce yourself, whoever you are. Secondly, he asked me a question, and I answered it. Thirdly, you should thank me for diverting the attack. Although… hehe, you're right; I ruined someone's life. But, that's what it makes it so funny, hehe," Naruto laughed again, now with more mobility since almost everyone had released him.

However, that angered Kurenai even more. "Hokage-sama! This can't remain like this; he committed a crime! He must be punished, even if he's your son!" Kurenai yelled trying to hold the tears back; she felt devastated and could only blame herself.

Minato gave a sad smile, but before he could respond, Naruto spoke, "Hey, the girl with the red eyes."

Kurenai glared at him, and he continued, "Well, to begin with, what I did is not a crime. We're in an exam where everything is allowed. If you don't want to understand that, let's say that you can seek revenge whenever you want. But let me tell you that you won't have the same fate as the bastard of Kiba." His stare turned cold, and his voice turned dark, which worried his father.

Therefore, Minato decided to put a stop before they could fight. "Enough! Kurenai-san, Naruto is right. Kiba knew the risks, so you can't accuse him of anything. And you, Naruto, don't threaten her. Understand that this is her reaction to what you did to one of her students; something that was completely unnecessary, and we'll talk about it once this is over," Minato interrupted with an authoritative voice.

Naruto sighed; he already sensed that he would have a talk with his 'dear daddy' after what happened in the forest. Therefore, he just nodded before using a Shunshin to return to the stands.

Sai congratulated him, Haku 'scolded' him for 'showing off', Tenten and Ino nodded, and Sakura looked at him with fear.

The Jounins returned to their respective teams. Kurenai noticed that Hinata was crying, so she decided to calm her down along with Menma.

Meanwhile, the blonde-haired kid couldn't help glancing angrily at his brother; he didn't see the need of doing that to Kiba, even if what his Sensei had said was true. Something so 'insignificant' couldn't be enough to maul Kiba's best friend and cut one of his arms off.

He would talk to him later, even if Naruto got angry with him. He needed to talk some sense into his brother; he wanted him to be more sensitive and kind to his fellow villagers.

Meanwhile, Anko watched with amusement. Well, Naruto had warned him, but the brat had decided not to hear him. Therefore, she decided to leave the place.

She didn't want to disturb Kurenai right now; she didn't want to be in one of her Genjutsus.

Once she was next to Naruto, the Mitarashi congratulated Naruto for a good display of skill, but she decided not to show anything emotional. She would do it once they had time to talk alone; she desired to know what made him so sad and angry minutes ago.

Everyone looked at the arena, seeing several people cleaning up Naruto's mess. They were careful with Akamaru's remains because they seemed to be piping hot.

"Naruto, did you use Lava Release?" Kakashi finally asked.

The Uzumaki shook his head and replied, "No, it was just molten iron; I'm not able to use that element, though I don't know why the hell I'm telling you this." He looked at Kakashi before looking forward again, waiting for the last match. Nobody spoke again and did the same as Naruto.

When the workers left, Hayate coughed and gave the order for final combatants to appear. Naruto subtly looked towards Neji, who was already walking down to the arena.

At the other end, Menma gave cheers to Hinata, who already seemed calmer, but it was still evident that she had been crying. She smiled at Menma and walked down there.

Once there, she smiled at Neji and said, "L-Let's do our best, Neji-niisan."

Neji didn't answer; instead, he just stared at Hinata, who got surprised by his intense gaze. He never did it before, and she didn't know the reason. However, after seeing him nodding, she smiled.

Hayate gave the order to start the combat. Hinata tried to get into the Juuken stance, but Neji was already in front of her, with two fingers that he aimed at her heart, "Ow," Hinata complained while spitting some blood.

That action shocked many; Neji had attacked Hinata's heart without hesitation, a blow that could be fatal.

Menma widened his eyes and clenched the railing tightly. When he was about to ask Neji what was wrong with him, he saw something that made him growl.

Neji closed his fist and gave her a powerful Upper Cut that 'spun her world'.

The Hyuga girl didn't know why Neji was attacking her like this; Neji seemed so angry that he was using normal attacks instead of Juuken blows.

Naruto sighed and mentally said, "He's losing control. I didn't believe that he would get even so fast. Anyway, this will just make things a lot easier."

Kurama raised an eyebrow and asked, "What do you mean? If he keeps hitting her like that, everyone will know that he holds a grudge against her."

Naruto mentally smiled and replied, "Hehehe, you will know it eventually, Kurama; you just have to wait."

Kurama nodded and continued observing.

Hinata slowly stood up, carrying her hand to her chest, "W-What's w-wrong, N-Neji-niisan? * Cough * *Cough*" Hinata asked with difficulty, spitting more blood. That worried Kurenai; she didn't believe that she would be able to see another of her students becoming physically challenged.

Neji growled, activated his Byakugan and ran towards her, "What's wrong? Do you still have the gall to ask me?!" Neji exclaimed as he closed the distance with Hinata, who could barely dodge another attack that he aimed at her heart.

Neji gave a swing, and this time, he used the fingers of both hands, giving her accurate blows to her heart and another one to her liver. Hinata spat a lot of blood.

She didn't know why Neji was so angry; he had stopped showing hatred towards her years ago, so she had thought that he had already accepted her.

It was different, it seemed, and she didn't know why. For that reason, these blows had caught her off guard; she didn't know that Neji would attack her like this.

Hinata stopped thinking when Neji gave her another blow to her heart.

Kurenai and Menma opened their eyes in shock; an attack like that could kill someone. Kurenai decided to stop this fight; she wouldn't allow that anything bad happened to another of her students.

She and Menma tried to jump there, but they couldn't because Neji had thrown Hinata to the ground, then got over her and started giving her repeated blows with closed fists to her face.

Gai was quite disconcerted; he believed that Neji held no grudge against the Main House because he had never expressed unconformity or hatred towards the Souke (Main House)

Naruto could feel a slight increase in power, so he looked at his brother and noticed that his eyes had turned red.

He sighed, and before his brother could do something foolish, Naruto decided to put an end to the fight, "Hey Neji!" Naruto shouted.

Neji stopped, and Kurenai and Menma looked at Naruto. The Hyūga boy looked at the Uzumaki, who continued speaking, "Come on, stop playing with that piece of shit; end with this once and for all."

Menma didn't like the way he had called Hinata. Even so, he said nothing.

Just now Neji noticed his loss of composure; therefore, he nodded and glanced at Hinata, who was barely conscious, but she seemed to have a look of sadness.

Neji didn't mind that and knocked Hinata out after hitting one of her pressure points.

Hayate declared Neji as the winner, who slowly rose up before ducking and jumping backward.

Neji smiled because Menma had tried to hit him and had failed miserably; he said nothing about it since Hayate spoke first, "Stop, Menma! You can't attack him; Neji is not your opponent, *Cough* *Cough*. Besides, they're already carrying Hinata away."

Menma came out of his state of rage; he turned around and looked at the doctors, who were taking her to the infirmary.

The Namikaze wanted to go with her, but he couldn't because his father stopped him, "Menma, don't worry. Neji didn't attack Hinata in the way that you're thinking. Most of his attacks were external ones; she'll get well, trust me."

He was there because the combats had ended, but especially, because he could also feel the slight power increase in Menma, so he decided to calm him down so that nothing bad happened.

Menma nodded, and then he looked at Neji, who was already walking away; the blonde-haired boy growled and yelled, "Neji!"

The Hyūga turned around, seeing Menma crouching and picking up some of Hinata's blood with his fingertips. "I will win!" He closed his fist and pointed it at him.

Neji said nothing and continued walking away. However, Hayate told him to stay in the arena because the battles had already ended.

Meanwhile, Shikamaru stated, "Whew, I was lucky. I didn't have to fight with anyone."

Chouji looked at him and replied, "Indeed, you're very lucky. What would have happened if Naruto had fought against you instead of Kiba?

"That would have been very troublesome," Shikamaru replied.

Hayate called everyone's attention, saying that the preliminary battles had ended and that those who had passed had to come down to the arena.

After a few minutes, everyone was there along with the examiners and the Hokage.

Minato explained when and where the finals would be held. No one complained because almost everyone was tired. The Yondaime then said that each of them had to grab a number from a box before they could leave.

Anko stepped forward and put the box in front of each of them; the first one to pull a number out was Sasuke, who took the number five.

Menma grabbed the number one.

Samui took the number eight.

Shikamaru grabbed the number nine.

Ino took the number seven.

Neji grabbed the number two.

After that, Anko approached Naruto; she smiled, and Naruto smiled back.

He put his hand inside and took the number 3.

Anko continued passing the box to the remaining Genin.

Karui took the number twenty and then she noticed that Naruto was looking at her with a smile. She glared at him before looking away, which surprised Naruto, "Now, what did I do?" The Uzumaki asked himself.

He would ask her later; he could tell that she was angry with him, but he didn't know why.

Anko stood in front of Lee, who took the number four.

Gaara took the number six, and the last ones were Tenten and Haku, taking the number eleven and ten, respectively.

Then Ibiki told everyone to say their numbers, and once everyone did it, he wrote them down on a tablet.

"Now we'll tell you the fights for the tournament; Ibiki, show the pairings," Minato spoke.

Ibiki nodded and the tablet to the front.

Menma vs. Neji / Naruto vs. Lee / Sasuke vs. Gaara / Ino vs. Samui / Shikamaru vs. Haku / Tenten vs. Karui /

Everyone looked towards their respective opponents, some of them with looks of determination, and others of disinterest.

Ibiki stepped back, hearing Shikamaru asking if just one person could become Chunin.

Minato replied no before proceeding to explain more things, things that Naruto didn't pay attention to since he was looking at Karui again, trying to recall what he did to make her angry.

Kurama knew it, but he said nothing; his Jinchūriki was still stupid on some things, but that just made things funnier for him.

After a few seconds, nothing had come to Naruto's mind, so he sighed in defeat. Just then, his father said that they could leave.

Everyone nodded; some of them headed to their homes to rest, while others went to train. Naruto, on the other hand, didn't get to enjoy any of these options because his father had told him that he wanted to talk with him in the Hokage Tower.

Naruto nodded and slowly walked in that direction.

He would talk to Karui and the other girls who were in his apartment later on.

Notes:

Sorry, Hinata fans, but that fight was necessary

Naruto mutilated Akamaru and cut half of Kiba's arm off. He could have killed him, but Naruto thought that it'd be funnier if he continued living, knowing that he wouldn't be able to continue being a Ninja (and that his best friend died).

Naruto learned those Uzumakis techniques after leaving his coma. Don't think that the Uzumakis only used seals (well, they didn't do it in my fic.)

Ino can use Katon Jutsus, and Sai surrendered just because he had to be at the Root base for the finals.

Oh yeah, and now the 'marathon' of Lemons will start (they will be censored, on Fanfiction).

Until the next time.

Chapter Text

Human talking, "Show me what you got!"

Human thinking, "Pathetic."

Nonhuman talking, "This will be fun."

Nonhuman thinking, "I think I was wrong."

Disclaimer: I do not own Naruto, Masashi Kishimoto does.

LEMON!

Chapter 20

Konohagakure no Sato - Somewhere in the village

"The preliminary matches have concluded, and now the main matches are about to begin," Kabuto informed kneeling before Orochimaru, who was leaning against a red pillar with crossed arms.

The Sannin spoke with a smile, "This place has become so peaceful, no, this country has become soft, too used to peace. The rest of the countries are busy increasing their military influence."

Kabuto stood up and asked, "Are you able to kill him now?"

Orochimaru smiled and replied, "Yes, although I'm not sure if it’s going to be fun killing that old geezer. Minato is another thing; maybe I'll take care of him after I deal with the old man, or maybe Naruto-kun will do it, kukuku. "

Kabuto stepped forward and asked with a half-smile. "Really?"

Orochimaru's eyes narrowed but said nothing since Kabuto continued, "To me, it seems like you are hesitating. The individual Hidden Villages are about to clash violently, and it'll be a long conflict. Otogakure will be one of them. You are trying to be the trigger for it. And he is the bullet, right?"

Kabuto looked at Orochimaru while placing his glasses correctly. "Namikaze Uzumaki Naruto-kun, was it?"

Orochimaru chuckled, "Your speculation is so good that it creeps me out."

Kabuto also chuckled, "That’s not true. I didn’t know about Dosu, Zaku, and Kin. When I was gathering information about Naruto-kun and Sasuke-kun, I had to get purposely hit to find out their abilities. You think too highly of me. It seems I have not gained your full trust yet.”

Orochimaru looked back at Kabuto and replied, "Was there a need to tell you, my right hand, about those mere children? That’s the proof that I trust you. But now that you’ve mentioned them, I can see that they didn’t return from the forest, which means that their mission was a failure, but it wasn’t for me, kukukuku. It seems that Naruto-kun is appropriately reacting to my unique curse mark. "

Kabuto asked, "Orochimaru-sama, if you don't mind answering; why did you choose Naruto-kun to bear that mark? Why did you not choose Sasuke-kun?”

Orochimaru sinisterly chuckled as he looked at Kabuto, "Kukukuku. Tell me, Kabuto, what do you know about the Apple of the Uzumakis?"

Kabuto quickly answered, "According to the information I could gather, it was an artifact that caused the destruction of that clan. I just know that it was something with unimaginable capabilities, and for that reason, the Elemental Nations allied to destroy Uzushiogakure since they thought that they wanted to do something with it. But what does Naruto-kun have to do with this?"

Orochimaru couldn't help licking his lips, "Kukuku, Naruto-kun has everything to do with it! You're right, Kabuto. That artifact is capable of unimaginable things, things that you would believe impossible. And Naruto-kun is the key; he's the only one who can get that artifact since it remains in the ruins of Uzushiogakure, and only a pure-blooded Uzumaki can enter there."

Kabuto raised an eyebrow in confusion and asked, "But Naruto-kun isn't a pure-blooded Uzumaki; remember that he's the Hokage's son. Though I still don't understand why you want that artifact so much."

Orochimaru smiled and replied, "Well, that's very easy to answer. In the past, I searched for Uzumakis to possess their bodies to go to Uzushiogakure, and I was lucky to meet some of them. Unfortunately, none of them were pure-blooded. I decided to keep some of them as subjects for my experiments, and I decided to join the others in my ranks,” Orochimaru said thinking on Tayuya.

However, he continued, "And thanks to Danzō’s stupidity, I realized that Naruto-kun is one."

Kabuto hearing that name raised an eyebrow but said nothing since Orochimaru continued, "When I found out that Danzō had one of the Hokage's children, I was surprised. Therefore, I offered Danzō to participate in the invasion plan so that later he could be the Hokage of the village, in exchange for a little bit of Naruto-kun’s blood. He refused at first, but he changed his mind after a few years. Then I discovered that Naruto-kun had somehow become a pure-blooded Uzumaki. I made many comparisons with my test subjects, and there I realized that Naruto-kun's blood was equal to theirs, but at the time, completely different. A single drop of his blood was enough to overshadow theirs. It was revealing, and there I concluded that Naruto-kun should someday become the final container of my soul," Orochimaru finished smiling.

Kabuto raised an eyebrow in confusion. His final soul container? He was sure that he needed to change his body every three years. He wanted to ask, but he couldn't because Orochimaru continued,

"As to why I want that artifact so much. Well, the reason is very simple. There is a legend about this artifact; it says that the one who achieves full mastery of it will get what I most desire: eternal life. That's why I want Naruto-kun to come to me; I want to check if that legend is true. With the body of Naruto-kun, I'll be able to go to Uzushiogakure and thus master that artifact. That is the reason why Naruto-kun will be my last body; if that legend is true, I won’t need to change my body anymore, kukukuku. "

Kabuto was surprised, but he realized that it was enough talking; he wanted to try something else now, so he looked at Orochimaru while some sweat fell from his forehead.

He said nothing and began to leave, but Orochimaru’s voice stopped him. "You…"

Kabuto looked back, just to see Orochimaru smiling. "If you are planning to attack Naruto-kun, I'm telling you that that will be the last thing you will ever do. You may be as strong as Kakashi, but Naruto-kun will murder you before you know it. If you still want to go to test Naruto-kun, I just hope that you're ready to suffer a horrible death. Kukukuku, Naruto-kun isn't a soft person."

Kabuto turned around and put on a nervous smile. "What are you talking about, Orochimaru-sama? Naruto-kun is someone crucial to you, so it would be stupid on my part to do something like that."

Orochimaru chuckled, but then he put on a serious face that increased Kabuto's nervousness. "I'm telling you this very seriously, Kabuto. Stay away from Naruto-kun; he's a Ninja Sensor. He will notice your presence, and he will kill you before you know it. You are also important; you're a good spy, and I can't let you die just because you want to test Naruto-kun. Now go, and remember my warning."

Kabuto didn't discuss more and just withdraw. Meanwhile, Orochimaru was thinking on all the things he would do once he possessed Naruto’s body.

Hokage Tower - 30 minutes after the preliminaries.

Naruto had arrived at the Hokage Tower. He had told Haku and Anko that he would return in a few hours. His father had offered to take him with his Hiraishin, but he refused by saying that he wanted to walk.

Minato asked no more and waited for Naruto in the Tower, and he arrived a half an hour later.

The Yondaime told Naruto to come in when he knocked on the door.

The Jinchūriki looked at his father and asked, "What did you want, Hokage-sama?"

"Please Naruto, don't call me that. We’re alone; you don't have to be that formal."

Naruto nodded, "Okay, Oto-san. But why did you call me?" He already knew it but asked regardless.

Minato sighed and gestured Naruto to sit in front of him, "Naruto, I want you to tell me what happened between Orochimaru and you."

Naruto wasn't surprised; he shrugged and responded, "At first, I didn't know it was Orochimaru. I saw a guy attacking Sasuke and Sakura in the forest, so I decided to help them."

Minato nodded and asked, "How did you realize that it was Orochimaru?"

Naruto sighed; he saw nothing wrong in telling him this; he didn't care. Besides, he just wanted to answer these questions so he could remove Anko's mark, and Neji’s as well.

"Well, Orochimaru attacked Sasuke, but he managed to escape along with Sakura. Then I took the chance, and I gave him a strong blow. After that, he returned to where I was, and he tore his face off right there, revealing me his repulsive face. I instantly lost control. As you may already know, and I see no need to hide it from you, Anko-chan is someone very important to me, and when I saw the person who made her life hell, I lost it. I blindly attacked Orochimaru with everything that I got to finish him off. But that bastard was tough, and he managed to survive from all my attacks.”

Naruto paused as he looked at the surprised expression of his father, "After that, Orochimaru bit my neck, placing his Cursed Mark on me. At that moment, I felt that the Kyūbi's power began to emerge, and I couldn't do anything to control it. I think that the Kyūbi was defending himself from an invader. I don't know that because the Kyūbi took temporarily control over my body, and he began to destroy everything in his path. Haku-chan told me that the thing that I turned into almost ended up killing Orochimaru. After that, I retook control over my body, only to see Orochimaru fleeing. I don't know how that happened; I think the Mark had something to do with it. I finally lost consciousness and woke up a few hours later," Naruto finished his false and compelling story.

Minato got up from his seat, walked towards Naruto, and once there he bent down to look at Naruto's neck. He narrowed his eyes and stated, "I will kill him…"

Naruto mentally squinted, if someone were to do that, it would be him. However, he said nothing, not wanting to say anything that could extend this unnecessary talk.

"Follow me, Naruto, I'll seal Orochimaru's mark," Minato said as he walked to his desk to grab something from there.

Naruto quickly replied, "That won’t be necessary, Oto-san."

Minato turned around. "What are you saying, Naruto? We can't waste any time, for every minute that goes by, Orochimaru’s mark will influence you more. I must seal it before it's too late."

Naruto shook his head and answered, "No, it won’t influence me. A stupid mark won't tell me what to do. Not even Danzō could do it when he put me through his training to remove my emotions. So don't worry, I have everything under control. Besides, there is another reason I don't want you to seal it."

Minato felt guilty again; he knew how bad that training was, and to think what Naruto had to suffer only made him curse himself. But he still didn't want Naruto to keep that mark.

“I will master this Mark, and I won't fall under Orochimaru’s influence. That’s a promise, and Naruto Namikaze Uzumaki always keeps his promises," Naruto stated with a determined look.

"Hell! Koyuki-chan, just wait a few months and we’ll make a movie, hehe."

Kurama smiled too but said nothing. Naruto could be very convincing when he wanted to.

The conviction in his son's words surprised Minato; he smiled in happiness since Naruto had used his surname without problems.

He decided to accept his word. If there were any problems, he would just have to remove the seal. Though he still didn't know how to do it, he was sure that with the help of Naruto and of his Sensei, they would be able to find a way to remove the Cursed Mark; too bad that Naruto already knew it.

Minato smiled and nodded, "All right, son. However, I wanted to ask you something else, and I'm very curious to know the answer. How did you do the scroll that Tenten used in the preliminaries?"

Naruto mentally sighed; he didn't want to continue with this, so he quickly answered. "From an early age, I realized that I was excellent at seals. I thought if I kept doing seals, then the villagers would no longer see me as a nuisance or would just cease seeing me as the Demon Brat. But I couldn’t achieve that because Danzō rescued me and trained me. There I could learn much faster about this art since Danzō was very interested. Maybe he wanted to get some benefit, but I don't know," he paused and looked at his father's sad expression.

What Naruto had said was in part true. He always was good at seals, but he didn't make them so that people stopped seeing him in that way, but rather to get revenge for what they had done to him, but that was just on standby for now.

Naruto continued, "But that won’t be necessary because thanks to you people don't hate me anymore, and I can say that I'm very happy. Now, if you'll excuse, Oto-san, I want to get some rest. We can talk another day. I'll be free for a month, so if you want to speak to me, you can send one of your ANBU to call me. I'm a little tired, and I want to rest a bit in my home."

Minato nodded and said goodbye to Naruto, who walked to his home. Once Naruto was out, he squinted, "I won’t be able to continue with this façade for much longer, one of these days I won’t be able to control myself and I'll end up doing something stupid. It's time to get that bastard's blood; I have to get out of this damn village as soon as possible."

Kurama growled in acceptance and added, "Neither can I; I just wish I could leave this place and eat that fucking bastard slowly. Now just go to your apartment, I want to see something good when we get there, hehehehe," Kurama finished with a perverted smile.

Naruto smiled and replied as he walked to his apartment. "Pervert."

Naruto's Apartment - 10 minutes later

The girls were in the living room of Naruto's apartment having an interesting conversation that Anko and Karin were leading. Meanwhile, Haku, Kin, and Kurotsuchi blushed at their vivid talk.

Anko and Karin kept talking; the first one looked at the latter one with a big smile. Naruto had indeed chosen well. The conversations stopped when someone put a key in the door's lock.

Naruto opened the door, and someone instantly jumped into his arms. The Jinchūriki caught the person in his arms as he felt that she put her arms around his neck.

"Naruto-kun," Karin whispered as she approached her head to Naruto’s, who smiled and lowered his head to give her the kiss that she had been waiting for days.

They continued kissing, feeling that their bodies’ temperature increased significantly, but before they could give a show, someone cleared her throat. "Hey you two, if you're going to do that, you have to invite me," Anko spoke while trying to take her clothes off.

She couldn't because Haku stopped her as she looked at her in disbelief. "W-what are you doing, Anko-san?" Haku asked with eyes wide open.

Naruto smiled and lowered Karin, who let out a dreamy sigh. Both approached while Anko answered with a smile, "What's wrong, Haku-chan? We're between sisters; there should be no shame between us."

"B-but," Haku stammered, stopping because Naruto stood before her; he knelt down and gave her a kiss that left her speechless. Thrilled, she raised her hands and put them on his cheeks to deepen the kiss, which ended after several seconds.

Naruto whispered Haku a few words, and she smiled and nodded. The others couldn't hear them, but they didn't care because Naruto did the same with everyone.

The Uzumaki didn't tell them what he had told Haku because he wanted to do it when he was alone with each of them.

The kiss with Anko was the longest, and it would have ended in something else if Haku hadn't intervened again.

Kin sheepishly returned the kiss, happy to see Naruto again. Now she was much better; the deaths of Zaku and Dosu didn't bother her anymore; she could now continue her life quietly.

After finishing the kiss, Naruto approached Kurotsuchi, who lowered her head and said, "There is no need Kyo… Naruto-kun."

Naruto smiled and replied, "What are you talking about, Kurotsuchi-chan?" he raised her head and gave her a soft kiss, which left her mind completely blank.

Kurotsuchi couldn't believe it, what she had always dreamed, and what she thought a fantasy, became real.

Her grandfather had at least done something good for her. But of course, she couldn't tell anyone about this, besides the girls already present.

Kurotsuchi lowered her head, hiding her blush and her smile. Naruto sat next to her and asked, "Kurotsuchi-chan, did you complete the 'mission'?"

Kurotsuchi nodded, raised her head slightly before putting on a straight face. "Hai, Naruto-kun. It wasn’t difficult. But can I ask you something? What will I do now? Tomorrow I have to send to my grandpa a report about my mission."

Naruto put a finger on his chin as he began to think under the watchful gaze of his girls. After a few seconds, he smiled and replied, "Well, if you're the one who has to do the reports; that will make things even easier! Tell your grandpa that your 'mission' got complicated, that you couldn’t find me in the forest and that you'll take advantage of the day of the invasion to do it. When that day comes, you can return to your village and say that your mission failed due to the chaos. After that, I'll go for you to Iwagakure; once I go to overthrow your 'dear' granddaddy, hehe. "

Kurotsuchi blushed and cautiously asked, "W-what d-do y-you m-mean by ‘go for you,' N-Naruto-kun?"

Naruto smiled but couldn't answer because Anko spoke first, "You know very well what that means, girl! He will search for your special place, hehehehe."

Kurotsuchi turned red like a tomato but said nothing. Naruto smiled before looking at Karin. It was time to free her from Kusagakure, and he already had a plan for it.

He stood up and walked towards her; once there, he placed a hand on her head, surprising her a bit.

Everyone carefully looked at Naruto, who tensed and clenched his fists on several occasions.

After a few minutes, he took his hand away, and Karin asked, "What is it, Naruto-kun? Did I do something that made you angry?"

The Jinchūriki knelt down and stroked her cheek with his thumb, causing her to blush slightly. "Karin-chan, you haven’t done anything; remember what I told you in the forest."

Karin remembered that beautiful day; therefore she nodded and saw him standing up. "Okay girls, what do you say if we go shopping?"

The girls instantly stood up, which made him smile. "I think that's a yes. Well, you can buy whatever you want; Ino-chan and Tenten-chan will be waiting for us at the mall. Come on, let's go. And I think I'll buy some bottles of Sake for me, hehehehe," Naruto thought the latter.

Karin and Kin didn't know who Naruto really was and about his immense fortune, but they didn't care. They weren't with him for his money, but because he was someone attentive, loving and very friendly, but who could be villainous when he wanted to. That, however, didn't bother them because they knew that he would never hurt them.

Naruto accompanied them to the mall to spend the day shopping. However, before leaving, he made a Shadow Clone, which went to Kohta’s mansion.

Kohta’s Mansion - 30 minutes later.

Naruto’s clone was in Kohta’s office; he knelt before the clone, who told him to stand up before sitting behind his desk.

"What do you need, Kyōfu-sama? By the way, congratulations for passing to the finals of the Chunin exams.”

Naruto raised an eyebrow, "How do you know that? The preliminary matches have just finished."

Kohta sat in front of Naruto and answered, "Well, it’s easy to get that information. Besides, you are participating. It was obvious that you would get to the finals."

Naruto nodded, looked directly at Kohta and asked, “How things are going?"

Kohta changed his expression, "Everything is going well; Kitsune and Genji said that they will do it. They stated that they are very excited about doing something after such a long time. We also have a battalion of at least one thousand five hundred men; we believe that this number could increase if we find more people who meet the requirements to join in our campaign. Besides, he will come too; he will command the troops. "

Naruto thought for a few seconds until the image of a man who gave him the beating of his life came to his mind, "Hmmm, strange; I thought that he didn't like this kind of stuff, but I think that I'll take the opportunity to greet him that day. I have a great desire to fight him again."

Kohta smiled too; he knew the history between Naruto and the General of his army. That person had defeated him on many occasions until something happened between them, and the man decided to join Naruto. However, that was history for another time.

Naruto stopped smiling; he rested his elbows on the desk as he crossed his hands. "Moving on, I want you to send a committee to Kusagakure in my name. If possible, I want Kitsune to go there as the leader of the delegation; he is an excellent diplomat."

Kohta nodded and was about to ask why, but Naruto continued, "Besides, I want them to carry at least one hundred million Ryo for the Kusakage.”

Kohta swallowed and almost gasped after hearing those numbers; the Kusakage must have done something important to receive such a gift.

Naruto took a pen and wrote something on paper.  Once he finished, Naruto handed it over, and Kohta read it carefully until he could understand what was going on.

"You want to kill the Kusakage, aren’t you?" Kohta asked as he looked at Naruto, who had a malicious smile on his face.

"Killing that bastard would be a favor. No, I don't want to do that. I'll beat the shit out of him; then I'll take his village as my own, and maybe turn it into a great brothel with all the women of that village, or something else. However, that bastard won’t die. No, some people will properly take care of him," he finished twisting his smile.

Kohta just felt sorry for the Kusakage, if Naruto said he would do something, it was because he would. Naruto wrote something else again; it was a letter to the Kusakage. It said that the leader of the Yakuza found a redheaded girl, who was attacked on her way to Kusagakure and that one of his men decided to take her to his organization because of her peculiar ability.

It also said that he was more than willing to pay the necessary price and that the money he would receive was just a token payment.

Kohta smiled and carefully kept the letter to send it later to Kitsune. Naruto stood up and walked to the door.

He opened it but stopped to turn around, "One last thing, Kohta. Inform all the bases that I'll contact them soon. Tell them to get ready; I have something imperative to say, and tell Koyuki-chan that I'll visit her in two months or less.”

Kohta nodded and knelt down one last time. The clone left before dissipating in a puff of smoke.

Konoha’s Mall - 2 hours later

Naruto Uzumaki was sitting with his arms resting on the edge of a bench; he was surrounded by endless bags that were filled with clothes, perfumes, and shoes that his girls had bought.

He was tired; he didn't know that women loved to buy so much. "I'm exhausted," Naruto stated, which caused a smile in his pal.

The Jinchūriki searched through the bags until finding what he was looking for; it was a small white bottle with a cork at the top.

He took it out and drank its contents, making him regain some of his energies. He shook his head and let out a small grunt due to the burning in his throat.

Just then, his clone’s information came back to him; he stood up and pushed the bags aside. "What the hell? When did they put all this around me?" Naruto mentally asked.

"Hahaha," Kurama couldn't help laughing, "Naruto, you're weak with your women, hehe. But that only brings big rewards," Kurama stated with a smile.

Naruto sighed but didn’t answer because he decided to carry out the plan to free Karin from Kusagakure. He came into the shop where his girls were buying; he saw them accompanied by several receptionists, who were helping them to find the clothes.

Naruto approached them, and they turned to give him a smile. "I'm glad that you all are enjoying this, ladies. However, something has come up, and I must leave. Don't worry and continue enjoying yourselves."

He made a shadow clone and handed his wallet over.

The clone accepted it but whispered, "Hey, boss, can't you leave me some support over here? I don't think I'll be able to handle this alone."

Naruto smiled and shook his head, "It's up to you."

The girls didn't mind because they had made him suffer through this. They knew that he didn't want to get rid of them since they could tell when he was lying; they were the only ones who could notice this. They didn't question him more and allowed Naruto to do whatever he needed.

The Uzumaki kissed each one before leaving the place. It definitely was a huge building, and it was something entirely new in the Elemental Nations.

Naruto had the great idea of putting several businesses inside one building and collect high amounts of money to those who wanted their shops inside, and Konoha had been one of the first villages to have one of his malls.

But of course, nobody knew about it because the mall was under the name of another person. Naruto was sure that his father wouldn't allow a Yakuza business in his village.

Naruto's Apartment - 5 minutes later.

"Done," Naruto thought as he put his Oni mask on. He had come to his apartment to get his Root clothes; he could have gone with his casual clothes, but it was his habit to use these clothes when performing this kind of missions.

Naruto left his apartment and headed to Karin’s Jounin sensei hotel. After checking Karin’s memories, he got his location but not the room because Karin didn't know it.

He reached his destination and went to the back of the hotel. He came in and sneaked to the reception. 

There were two civilians, so Naruto used a Genjutsu on them; they never noticed anything because everything looked normal to them.

Naruto read the guest book, and once he got the room's number, he headed to the building's roof.

He stood above the specific bedroom and sat down before writing a seal on the ceiling. Naruto could instantly hear what was happening inside that room. "What the hell is Karin doing? She should have returned days ago. When Kusakage-sama finds out…" The Shinobi said.

The Uzumaki wanted to go in there and tear him to pieces, but he couldn't damage his body if he wanted that his plan succeeded.

And since that person was a Jounin, Naruto didn't want to have a battle that could severely damage the body. He never was one to underestimate his enemy, so he just patiently waited.

It was around 4 pm when Naruto heard the Kusa Ninja entering the bathroom to take a shower. Naruto took this as his opportunity; therefore, he opened the bedroom’s window slowly.

Once inside, Naruto used the Tōton Jutsu and patiently waited in the shadows until the Ninja returned. When he saw the individual, Naruto stood behind him, neared his hands to his head and held it before giving it an abrupt turn, breaking his neck and killing him instantly.

Naruto put the body on the bed and stared at it, "What are up to?" Kurama curiously asked.

Naruto sighed and answered, "There's something that I always wanted to try, but I could never do it. Let's see if it works, if it does it, then this will help Karin-chan a lot."

After that, Naruto extracted two black Chakra rods; smaller than the regular ones.

The Uzumaki looked at the body; he stuck one in his heart and the other one in his right pectoral.

Naruto concentrated, and the next thing Kurama saw widened his eyes. In front of him, the man who had died a few minutes ago was getting up as if nothing had happened.

He moved his arms and cracked his neck. "Looks like it worked,” the Kusa ninja spoke with a smile.

Then he looked at Naruto, and Kurama could see the Rinnegan.

"What the hell did you do, Naruto?" Kurama asked, genuinely surprised.

Naruto didn't answer; the Kusa ninja did so. "I'm not sure, but I think the Rinnegan gives its user the freedom to divide their soul for each path that they have unlocked. But I must stay close to my original body because I need to send my chakra to the bodies. If I get far away, the chakra rods will stop receiving my chakra, and therefore, I'll lose control over the bodies."

He stood up, and Naruto pulled out a scroll, unsealing some clothes. Once Naruto finished changing his clothes, he created a clone. "Find Karin-chan; take her to the Hokage Tower." The clone nodded.

Kurama was still surprised. That skill would have helped Naruto a lot in the past, but he usually left unrecognizable bodies on his mission, so it probably wouldn’t have worked.

Naruto approached to his other body and both into each other's eyes. "Wow, this is odd," they said at the same time, waving their hands in front of their faces. "Yes, really odd."

Both lowered their hands, and his body deactivated his Rinnegan; luckily, Naruto could still control his body.

The Jinchūriki left the room; the Kusa Ninja accompanied him, and both walked towards the Hokage Tower.

Hokage Tower - 10 minutes later.

Karin and Naruto’s clone were about to arrive at the Hokage Tower; she didn't have the time to try her new clothes out because the clone told her that they had to go to the Hokage Tower.

She nodded and said goodbye to the other girls, who returned to Naruto’s apartment; Tenten and Ino went to their respective homes.

Karin didn't know why she was here and was nervous because she was about to meet the Hokage. The redheaded girl didn't know what he was like; she just knew that he was Naruto's father. Karin didn't know anything else because Naruto never spoke about him.

Both entered the tower, and the clone disappeared in a puff of smoke, but before she could worry, Naruto spoke behind her, "I’m glad you came, Karin-chan; follow me, we'll talk with my father about your staying in Konoha."

Karin turned around quite worried; what if they sent her back to Kusa? Would she ever see Naruto again? No! She didn't want to think about that possibility. "Naruto-kun," she whispered with concern.

He gave her a reassuring kiss and stated, "Don't worry; everything will be all right."

Karin felt calmer; she nodded and followed Naruto through the corridors of the tower. They walked upstairs until she saw someone that worried her immensely.

"S-Sensei," Karin fearfully whispered. No! If he was here, that only meant that they would send her back to Kusa.

She grabbed one of Naruto's hands and squeezed it tightly, and the Jinchūriki squeezed back. He couldn't blame her; she didn't know that her Sensei was him. Regardless, she would get a pleasant surprise very soon.

Naruto stood in front of her sensei; both stared at each other and fought with their stares. Karin hid behind Naruto, without releasing his hand.

Both stopped, and Naruto knocked on the door. The Hokage gave them permission to enter, and everyone came in.

Minato smiled, so he quickly stood up to receive him, seeing a girl behind him and a Kusa-nin behind them.

The Yondaime noticed that they were holding hands, and her hair color reminded him of Kushina.

He pulled those thoughts away; they had come for a reason, so he asked, "What can I do for you son and what are they doing with you?" He returned to his desk and invited them to sit down.

Naruto's body didn't; he put on a serious face and stood next to Karin, "Hokage-sama, I demand that this girl comes back with me to Kusagakure. I stumbled upon your son, and he has stated that he will not allow that. Therefore, I demand you, as his Hokage, to tell him that this girl cannot stay in Konoha unless you want an international incident. Karin is of great importance for Kusagakure, and we cannot afford to lose someone with her abilities."

Karin got scared; she bowed her head as she felt the need to cry. Naruto put on an angry face and exclaimed, "Important?! I'm aware of Karin-chan's ability, and you dirty bastards just want to keep using her! You don't care if she suffers! Oto-san, if you agree, I will go to Kusagakure, and I will kill the Kusakage. I don't care if I become a missing Nin. I'm more than willing to accept that if it is for Karin-chan’s sake! So, listen to me you bastard." Naruto pointed to his other body, who was doing his best not to burst into laughter due to the excellent performance they were giving.

Everything Naruto had said was true; he would do that for any of his girls. "If you dare to lay a single finger on Karin-chan, I'll make sure of ripping your head off and send it to the Kusakage so that he knows what awaits him."

Karin's heart pumped faster; she squeezed Naruto's hand sharply, and he turned around to look at his father, who didn’t know what to do.

If he sided with the Kusa-nin, Naruto would hate him for the rest of his life, and he knew that Naruto would fulfill his threat. Therefore, he would end up turning into a missing Nin and be internationally sought.

If he refused, there was a strong possibility that war could break out between Konoha and Kusa, and perhaps other villages would use that opportunity to attack Konoha too.

Minato didn't know what to do; both options were bad, and both had something in common. "Hokage-sama, you must decide now. It doesn't concern you what we do with our Shinobis. They are simply tools; if we want to use Karin as a breeding machine, that shouldn't concern you. She is a Kunoichi of our village, not of yours!" Naruto’s body exclaimed.

Minato saw that the girl next to his son sobbed and shed tears. The Jinchūriki hated himself for doing this, but it was necessary.

The Uzumaki man stood up in an attempt to attack his other body, but the Yondaime's voice stopped him and made him mentally smile. "Wait, Naruto!"

Minato looked towards the Kusa-nin and continued, "I'm sorry, but now that I know what you want to do with her, I can't allow you to take her back. We can reach an agreement; war is not necessary. "

The Kusa-nin shook his head before saying, "Sorry, that’s not an option."

Minato sighed, and the Kusa-nin looked at Karin. "Karin, tell them that you want to return to Kusa. If you accept, Kusakage-sama will be very grateful."

Karin shed tears again; she wanted to say no, but if she did, it would only harm Naruto, and she didn't want that anything bad happened to him.

She was about to say yes, but Naruto spoke before, "The answer is no! Karin-chan won’t go there. If you want to start a war, okay! I just hope that you bastards have the necessary resources to fight Konoha and its allies, in addition to being able to control the fury of the Jinchūriki of the Kyūbi!" Naruto stated with a lot of conviction.

Minato got surprised, Naruto conveyed a lot of security and strength; he was a born leader, and Minato thought that he would be an excellent Hokage, though he knew that Naruto wasn't interested in that position.

Karin couldn't help being surprised, and her doubts instantly vanished. She wouldn't return to that horrible place; she would follow him to hell itself.

The body of Naruto looked at Karin and asked, "Karin?"

She said nothing and the body shook his head while carrying his hand behind his back, place where he had a hidden Kunai. "I see… Then by order of the Kusakage, I sentence you to death!"

Karin raised her head, just to see the Kunai a few inches from her head. Minato tried to do something, but that Ninja was very close to Karin.

However, Naruto pushed Karin away, receiving it instead of her, a stab which went near his heart.

Minato growled in anger, and in a burst of speed, he appeared behind the Kusa ninja, smashing a Rasengan on his back as he placed his Hiraishin Mark on him.

The Kusa Ninja went flying, crashing into the wall, breaking it and continuing his flight. Minato, however, didn't stop there.

He appeared above him with a Rasengan on his right hand, but it was much bigger than the last one.

"Odama Rasengan!" Minato yelled, impacting his Rasengan in the man's ribs, plummeting along with him before crashing into the ground. The impact created a crater and an explosion that rose up a curtain dust.

The people in the streets took cover; they thought that someone was attacking the village. However, when the dust settled down, they saw their Hokage with a furious expression and getting away from a Shinobi's body.

Everyone approached to see, but they suddenly heard their Hokage shouting while several ANBU appeared on the scene, "Naruto!" Then they saw him disappearing in a yellow flash.

What he saw in his office left him horrified; Karin was crying on Naruto's chest, surrounded by a puddle of his blood. Some ANBU were there, among them Yugao was; she also was about to shed some tears. The female ANBU didn't do it because she had to stay strong. She would avenge Naruto in the war with Kusa; she would kill as many of them as she could.

Minato fearfully approached. "No," Minato whispered, not wanting to believe what his eyes were seeing.

Naruto wasn't breathing, and his skin had lost color.

"Naruto," Minato whispered again, now kneeling down to take his pulse, and indeed, there was nothing.

Minato couldn't believe it. When they were finally starting to be a family, something like had happened. "Naruto… Dammit!" Minato yelled, hitting the floor, not being able to hold his tears back.

Then he looked at his ANBU and yelled, "What the fuck are you waiting for!? Bring a fucking medic!" The ANBU nodded, and they all disappeared in puffs of smoke to find the nearest doctor.

The Yondaime looked back at Naruto, "Damn it! If I had been faster!" Minato cursed himself, and just at that moment; someone opened his door's office.

"Oto-san, what the hell was ...?" Menma asked, stopping when seeing Naruto.

"I-Is he?" Menma asked in disbelief.

Kakashi had also come with Menma; they had been walking when they heard the powerful explosion near the Hokage Tower.

Kakashi opened his eyes in shock, so he quickly approached Minato, "Sensei, you must take him to the hospital; use your Hiraishin."

Minato had forgotten about that; his state didn't let him think clearly. He nodded, just to see Menma standing beside him. "Nii-san! Come on! Wake up! You can't die! You're too powerful to die like this; please!" Menma desperately yelled as tears ran down his cheeks.

Inside Naruto, he and Kurama were laughing aloud. But the Jinchūriki decided to put a stop to his fake death. "Okay, do your job, furball. That certainly was funny, but now Karin-chan won’t have to worry about returning to that place. And after the invasion, I'll send her to Nami. She'll be safe there until I can be with her. Though I feel sorry for doing this, it would be best not to tell her anything."

Kurama smiled again and surrounded Naruto with his Chakra.

Outside, Minato shed more tears, but he shook his head. He had to get Naruto to the hospital; maybe there was still time to save him.

The Hokage was about to grab Naruto, but a red cloak that completely wrapped him stopped Minato.

Everyone moved away, and Minato observed with hope, waiting for the Kyūbi to save his son. Naruto stood up with a loud roar, while everyone looked surprised at his change in appearance, except for Menma; he had already seen his brother's transformations, although he didn't want to see the diminutive form of the Kyūbi again.

Minato smiled with happiness since it seemed that his son had been saved, but the next thing he heard left him in shock. "Finally free!" Naruto's distorted voice yelled.

He didn't want to finish the show yet because he was sure that his father would no longer bother him with the Kyūbi’s topic after this demonstration.

"K-Kyūbi?" Minato incredulously asked.

Kakashi took out the band that covered his Sharingan and stood in a defensive stance.

"You bastard!" The 'Kyūbi' yelled.

Kurama was laughing, and he laughed even louder after seeing Naruto punching Minato’s face; he couldn't dodge it due to the shock.

Minato flew out through the hole of his office; unable to stop because of the fear that had invaded him. No! It couldn't be! The Kyūbi couldn't have taken possession of his son’s body!

Minato finally reacted, but it was late since Naruto was above him, giving him a mighty blow right in his stomach.

It sent him plummeting to the ground, crashing with tremendous force.

Naruto landed with an insane smile on his face while getting on all fours; the villagers observed with fear. "Now you will pay for locking me up inside the body of this damn brat! I'll kill you and then I'll destroy this fucking place! HAHAHAHA!" Naruto exclaimed while two tails appeared behind him.

Everyone fled in panic, and several ANBU landed in the area. Kakashi stood right next to his Sensei, helping him to stand up, "Sensei, it seems that the Kyūbi took advantage of Naruto’s state to take possession of his body. We must suppress the Kyūbi so that Naruto can return to normal. Tenzō is already here; he's just waiting for you."

Minato wiped the blood that was dripping from the corners of his lips; he nodded, just to see an ANBU sitting down beside him with crossed legs as he clasped his hands. "Do it, Tenzō," Minato ordered as he took a three-bladed Kunai.

Tenzō did some hand seals before pointing his right hand to him while some strange totems emerged from the ground.

"Mokuton…" Naruto thought amazed.

Those totems lengthened and went to him. Naruto pretended to avoid them, but he wanted to be caught to end this once and for all.

He pretended not to notice the traps placed behind him, which held him for a moment, enough for Tenzō’s Jutsu.

"Nooooo! Just one more minute, you bastards! I was finally free! Nooooo!" Naruto yelled, surrounded and firmly held by these wooden totems; he used a bit of force to try to break free, to be more convincing.

"I don't think so! Return to the cage where you belong to, Kyūbi!" Minato yelled, appearing above Naruto. He put his fingers on Naruto's stomach and closed the seal on his belly. However, there was no need for that because his seal had never lost power, but Minato didn't realize that due to the adrenaline.

Naruto instantly lost his Chakra cloak, and his hair recovered its traditional reddish-blonde color. He fell 'unconscious', thought he had lost power when his father 'closed' his seal, and when the wood jutsu absorbed his power. Everyone let out a collective sigh.

Minato picked his son up, and Karin appeared next to him with tears in her eyes. "Naruto-kun!"

Minato smiled; this girl certainly loved his son, and his son did it as well. The Yondaime asked himself how many grandchildren he would have, but he pushed that thought away and gave a reassuring smile, "Don't worry; he's just unconscious. He'll wake up in a few hours. The Kyūbi is now under control."

Everyone heard that, and many thought that the Kusa-nin had caused this.

The people heard Naruto grunting; they looked at him, and he opened his eyes, "Arrgh, my head. What happened, Oto-san?"

His eyes widened and asked again as he grabbed his father's arms, "And Karin-chan? Where is Karin-chan?" He already knew it, but he had to continue with the act.

Minato didn't answer and put Naruto to the ground, and Karin lunged at him, knocking him to the ground before giving him a loving kiss.

Many of the girls who were close felt that their hopes vanished, while the older women thought it was cute.

However, that opinion changed when Naruto stroked Karin’s ass, which made hear release a moan. Everyone blushed, and Minato quickly grabbed them before disappearing in yellow flashes.

Menma was there along with the crowd; he got scared when the Kyūbi took possession of his brother. However, now everything seemed fine. Nevertheless, he didn’t know what had caused this; he would ask his father later.

Minato reappeared in his office while the young couple continued kissing, now with much more passion than before.

Minato sighed, "Now I have to explain all this mess to the council."

He cleared his throat because those two were about to do it in his office, "*Ahem!*."

He sighed because it didn't work, now his son started kissing Karin's neck.

"Hey, you two! Wait a minute; I want to say something. You can continue later!" Minato yelled in an attempt to stop them; he didn't want to see his son having sex in front of him, much less with a young girl.

Naruto bit the earlobe of Karin, who almost had an orgasm because of it; she held Naruto's hair tightly, just to feel him stopping and whispering. "Wait a minute, Karin-chan. We’ll continue this soon."

Karin nodded excitedly, though she first released a sigh of disappointment.

Minato continued, "Okay. Well, what I wanted to say was that this might start a war. So I just want you to get ready. I will send a letter to the Kusakage informing him about this."

Naruto knew that his father would say that, so he quickly added, "Oto-san, it would be best not to do that."

Minato raised an eyebrow and asked, "What do you mean?"

Naruto replied, "We should keep the Kusakage in the dark. We must think about our village. Therefore, I recommend you to get rid of the Kusa-nin's body, and forbid everyone from talking about what happened here. And if someday the Kusakage asks about Karin-chan, you just have to say that she died in The Forest of Death; that you know nothing about her, and that her Sensei left just when he heard about this."

Minato placed a finger on his chin as he thought, "Hmm, you're right; that would be the best decision. Now I will have to make a meeting with the council, will you accompany me to explain this?" Minato offered, only to see them going at each other again.

The Yondaime sighed again; he approached and grabbed them before disappearing in yellow flashes.

They arrived at a room with a large bed, "This is a cottage outside the village. Menma and I usually come here to rest. Do whatever you want, but try not to make too much of a mess in here."

Naruto instantly put Karin on the bed as he kissed her body, waving his right hand towards his father to make him leave.

The Hokage smiled and added, "Hormones." He disappeared in a yellow flash.

Lemon Start

Naruto directly looked into Karin's eyes and whispered, “I love you, Karin."

Tears of happiness ran down her cheeks; she was finally free, and now she could live happily with Naruto. "I love you too, Naruto-kun," she replied, putting her arms around Naruto's neck to draw him into a kiss.

Naruto returned it, and Karin put her legs around his waist to bring him even closer. Naruto smiled and gave her descending kisses, stripping her off her clothes.

He paused and licked Karin’s breasts, gently biting her nipples.

Karin couldn't hold it any longer and released the first orgasm of her life. Naruto smiled and slowly removed her skirt and her red panties. "My favorite color," Naruto stated before throwing the panties aside.

Karin smiled, although she was nervous because she was about to 'become' a woman. However, she knew that she had nothing to be afraid of, and Naruto stopped the foreplay because he saw that Karin was wet enough.

The Jinchuriki stood up and slowly took his jacket and mesh off, giving Karin a pleasant show. She ogled him when seeing his sculpted body.

Naruto smiled and took off his pants.

When the redheaded girl saw her member, she licked her lips, spread her legs and led her fingers to her vagina to open it slightly. "Stuck it in, Naruto-kun," Karin whispered impatiently; she couldn't help it. She had never felt like this. Since the day they met, she started to feel it.

Her position made him ogle her back, so he slowly approached her; he pushed her a little so that her back rested on the head of the bed, and he finally grabbed Karin's ankles to raise her legs.

The Uzumaki man placed his member in front of her vagina. He didn't wait anymore and slowly stuck it in.

Karin let out several moans, some of them were of pleasure and others of pain.

Naruto broke her barrier and continued until he filled her completely, and she almost lost her mind due to the pleasure.

Naruto stopped so that Karin could get used to the feeling, but he didn't wait long because Karin pushed her hips as much as she could.

Therefore, he gave slow thrusts because she was still getting used to his penis' size.

However, it didn’t last long because she requested in a whisper, "Faster. Please, Naruto-kun."

Naruto nodded and increased the speed. "Karin-chan, you're too tight," Naruto stated between moans.

"You have it t-too big,” Karin replied, biting her lips because Naruto was hitting the entrance of her womb.

They continued in the same position until Karin squeezed much more than before and sucked his penis in.

She felt Naruto's powerful discharge that almost filled her insides. Karin released a massive and delicious orgasm that soaked the blankets.

Anko certainly was right; Naruto could make you 'touch heaven' in just one night.

When Naruto finished, he fell back, and Karin fell above him; both were still 'connected'.

Karin suddenly trembled as she shed some tears, which worried Naruto greatly; but before he could ask what was happening, Karin whispered, "Thank you."

Naruto looked at Karin, who had her head on his chest. He stroked her hair and replied, "You're welcome; I would do the same with each and every one of you. Nothing and nobody will separate you from me. I swear to you by my name, Naruto Uzumaki."

Karin raised her head; she wiped her eyes before smiling. "Who would have thought that I would have such a handsome and attentive cousin?"

Naruto smiled back and replied, "Well, I don't know if we are cousins, but it doesn’t bother me to have such a beautiful and cute cousin as my girlfriend."

Yes, Naruto had told Karin about that when they were in the tower of the forest.

She had been confused at first, but she was happy to know that someone of her family was alive.

Karin rose from Naruto's pectorals; she placed her hands on them and moved her hips up and down once.

They both moaned, and Karin spoke with a smile as she continued moving her hips, "T-Then, i-is our duty as Uzumakis to rebuild our clan."

Naruto smiled, and although that was still impossible due to his deal with Kurama, he would make sure of restoring his clan with many of his children.

A few moments later, Karin squeezed his member and scratched his chest; therefore, Naruto used his hands and grabbed her ass, giving her a final thrust to enter into her womb. Karin felt watery eyes as she gritted her teeth tightly, looking up at the nothingness.

A great pleasure surrounded her while she released another powerful orgasm, which soaked the sheets and Naruto a little bit; her tongue came out of her mouth by itself as she felt Naruto releasing his load inside of her.

That expression turned him on; therefore, he got on top of her and gave her deep and accurate thrusts at a bestial speed.

She put her hands on Naruto's back, digging her fingernails due to the pleasure. "Arrgh, Karin-chan! You’re squeezing way too much!" Naruto yelled.

Karin didn't answer because she couldn't speak; the pleasure left her speechless. She could only scratch his back until receiving the final thrust that released a significant load, which made her come.

Naruto fell exhausted beside Karin. Dammit! He was tired; maybe the Mokuton and what his father did had something to do.

He sighed and looked at Karin, only to find out that she was no longer there. He felt a hand on his penis, so he looked down there and saw Karin playing with it.

"Naruto-kun, I hope you can still continue because I still want more of this," the Uzumaki girl stated.

She stopped and opened her mouth, slowly introducing it in her mouth.

Naruto sighed, "Luckily, Anko-chan didn't come, or else, I wouldn’t have been able to keep up with them," he grunted while enjoying her bobbing; she was doing her best put its entire length inside her mouth.

Kurama smiled and replied, "Pathetic! And you call yourself my Jinchūriki? You should be able to keep up with at least four women!"

Naruto snorted and replied, "To give you a show? Yeah, sure."

He laid his head back and continued enjoying Karin's attention.

Kurama smiled and kept watching in silence.

Meanwhile – Council Chamber

"And that's what happened," Minato finished conveying the details of what had happened.

Almost everyone was there, except for Tsume since she was in the hospital with her son; he was fighting to survive to his wounds.

Shikaku spoke, "I see; I wonder what skill she has. It should be splendid if Kusa is willing to start a war because of her."

Hiashi didn't like the story at all; he had other plans for Hanabi; he wanted that she married Naruto to ensure his clan's supremacy. However, a no-name brat was trying to prevent that.

"Hokage-sama," Hiashi spoke, attracting Minato's attention.

"What is it, Hiashi?" The Yondaime asked.

"I don’t think it’s wise for you to allow this relationship any longer; I recommended you to separate them. It wouldn’t be in the best interests of your family that a foreigner girl date the son of the most important person in the village. It would degrade your image, so I recommend you..."

Hiashi couldn't finish because an angry Minato interrupted him, "Enough, Hiashi. I already told you; that's not my call."

His words bothered him a lot since his wife had also been a foreigner, and he saw nothing wrong with that.

Hiashi quickly apologized, "Excuse my boldness, Hokage-sama.”

The Hyūga leader wouldn't give up; maybe Hanabi would be useful if she could make Naruto fall for her.

Inoichi was furious, was Naruto playing with the feelings of his beautiful little princess? He would talk to him later and ask him his true intentions.

Minato declared the information as classified and said that those who spoke about it would go to jail, or he would personally kill them. He finally dismissed everyone.

Danzō was also there; now it would be easier to have Naruto under his control. He would kidnap the girl and attract him to put him under his Genjutsu, turning him into his loyal weapon.

He never succeeded in capturing the woman in Nami since his squads never returned; he thought that someone was protecting her, and therefore, he stopped sending units.

Notes:

Let's start.

Orochimaru explained why he wants Naruto's body, and he's right, the Apple can do that. Naruto knows it, but he doesn’t know how to do it, but neither wants to.

As you saw, Naruto can divide his soul into other bodies; he always knew he could do it, but he never tried it out due to the reasons I mentioned earlier.

Naruto made quite a show so that they don’t bother Karin anymore. He can fake his death for a few minutes; he just stops his bodily functions, and Kurama restarts it. That ability helped him in the past.

Now Minato will no longer annoy Naruto about the Kyūbi.

Until the next time.

Chapter Text

Human talking, "Show me what you got!"

Human thinking, "Pathetic."

Nonhuman talking, "This will be fun."

Nonhuman thinking, "I think I was wrong."

Jutsu / unknown names, "Katon: Goukakyuu no jutsu."

Disclaimer: I do not own Naruto, Masashi Kishimoto does.

Lemons and Limes everywhere you are warned. This chapter has plenty of that. It also has an Omake.

Chapter 21

Outside Konoha - 3 hours later.

Both Uzumakis were lying on the bed and covered by the sheets. Karin had her head resting on Naruto's chest as she ran her fingers over his abs, and the Jinchūriki was drawing her closer.

"You're so warm, Naruto-kun," Karin whispered.

"What do you mean Karin-chan?" Naruto asked softly.

"Your Chakra is so warm and cozy; it makes me feel safe as if nothing could happen to me if I am with you," Karin replied as she sighed and closed her eyes.

He knew she could sense that, although he had to make some effort to hide his other hand, which wasn't as warm and welcoming.

Her statement didn't surprise him because it exactly was as Karin had said; nothing would happen if she were along with him, and he would make sure that his girls were always along with him. Naruto kissed Karin's head, and she fell asleep.

The Uzumaki girl had endured much; they had just finished their activities a few minutes ago. Karin resembled Anko in stamina; he didn't know what would happen when she was older, and he had sex with both Anko and Karin at the same time; he wasn't sure if he would endure it.

Naruto created a clone that appeared out of the bed. The original looked at him and whispered, not wanting to wake Karin up, "You have Chakra for about one hundred clones, create them and divide them into groups of ten, and dispel them every thirty minutes; it's time to implement our plan."

The clone nodded, got out and searched for a place where he could perform that.

The first thirty minutes passed, and Naruto received the information from the first group of clones. He used a Substitution Jutsu with a clone; it said nothing and hugged Karin, who didn't realize the change.

The Uzumaki approached a desk; he lit the lamp and sat down on a chair.

Naruto pulled a sealing scroll out and unsealed it, revealing several blueprints. He took one and put it on the desk as he took a ruler, a pencil, an eraser before writing.

As he put the blueprint on the desk, something caught Naruto's attention. He saw the photograph of a red-haired woman; she was in profile with special clothes for pregnant women, sitting on a chair with a hand over her belly, which was quite swollen up.

Naruto grabbed it and carefully looked her. "She's my Kaa-chan," Naruto thought with a smile.

It was the first time he saw his mother; she looked happy, and that made him happy as well.

The Jinchūriki shook his head and put the picture back in its place, He grabbed the blueprint and continued making lines, writing mathematical equations and much other stuff.

As time went by, the information from his clones returned, which increased the speed of his work.

10 hours later

It was around 9 in the morning, and Naruto continued writing. Now many more blueprints than before were there; many were rolled up, and others were wrinkled because Naruto had made some mistakes.

"Naruto, are you still with that? Why the hurry? You have plenty of time to do it later," Kurama asked.

He didn't know what Naruto was doing since he had only said that it wouldn't be a good thing for the Elemental Nations.

Naruto growled in annoyance and turned the blueprint into a ball. "Don't interrupt me, damn it! This isn't easy!"

Kurama rolled his eyes but said nothing; he couldn't understand those equations, drawings, and theories.

He wasn't good at these things, so he decided not to bother him anymore and waited to see what he wanted to do with them.

Naruto continued writing until someone put her arms around his neck; he instantly stopped as he raised his hands to caress Karin's hands.

"What are you doing, Naruto-kun?" Karin whispered near his ear.

Naruto sighed; he didn't notice when she woke up; he was focused on his work.

He stood up and gave her a passionate kiss, which she instantly returned.

They separated after a few seconds, which seemed like minutes. Karin didn't know why Naruto had kissed her like that, but she enjoyed it.

She looked at the desk and finally saw what he was doing. "Wow, are you doing this?" Karin asked quite amazed; she grabbed the one that Naruto was using moments earlier before analyzing it.

The Jinchūriki scratched his head, "Yes, it's something that I'll need in the future. It's something that the people in Uzushiogakure used, but I'm improving it significantly. However, I've concluded that it'll heat up quite a bit, and I still can't find a way to avoid it. Besides, if I don't find a way to cool this down quickly, a serious accident could occur. I just have to think a little more."

There was no doubt that he was a genius, and she could prove it by looking at this work.

"Maybe you could try this..." Karin added and wrote something down.

Naruto almost told her to stop because he didn't want anyone to harm his blueprints. But when he approached, he gasped in surprise.

"And that's all. You just have to find a place with lots and lots of water," Karin stated.

She turned around and saw Naruto's shocked eyes, "H-How do you know these things, Karin-chan?" Naruto asked genuinely surprised.

Karin scratched her head as a flush of embarrassment appeared on her cheeks, "W-Well, I don't know. I've always liked everything about technology, and I've always been good at these things. My dream is to become a great scientist."

Naruto smiled; he slowly approached Karin and held her by her shoulders, throwing her to bed.

The Uzumaki girl was surprised, and before she could say anything, Naruto got on top of her and tore her clothes to pieces.

Karin instantly felt wet, and the next thing she felt was Naruto sticking his penis into her and touching the bottom, making her release a tremendous moan, "Kyaa!"

Naruto didn't wait any more second and thrust savagely, "Well, I'll make sure that that dream comes true. B-Besides, you've saved me a lot of time; we should use it on something else," Naruto stated, thrusting even faster.

Karin nodded while putting on an orgasmic expression as she received his accurate and constant thrusts. They continued doing this for a few more hours before returning to the village.

Meanwhile - Hokage Tower.

Minato was signing some papers; many were requests to engage Naruto in marriage, which he denied before moving to other documents.

He continued until feeling someone's presence; he ordered his ANBU to leave as he placed a privacy seal.

"Sensei, you came earlier; I thought you wouldn't be back for another two weeks. Tell me, what did you find out?" Minato asked looking towards the corner of his office.

Jiraiya instantly became visible, showing a severe expression as he sat in front of his student.

"I can see that you don't bring good news," Minato added.

Jiraiya sighed and replied, "Minato, the Daimyo didn't even allow me to enter the Royal City. When I stated the reason for my visit, he wouldn't let me in. He even threatened to remove my Shinobi status if I kept asking about Kyōfu. It seems that the information that the guy in Onsen provided us is accurate, and the truth is that I don't know what we can do. That guy has almost total control of the means of transport, everyone except for Gatō Transportation, but making deals with that guy is like making deals with the devil."

Minato thought for a few moments; that guy had too much power, and that wasn't good. Finding him should be his top priority, but he should be stealthy. He didn't want that the Daimyo know about this; he wanted to avoid problems.

Minato sighed, "I see. Doing business with Gatō isn't an option for now. I'll continue allowing that guy to provide us resources; but at the first sign of problems against the village, I'll send the best ANBU squads to track him down and bring him to me. In any case, did you find out anything else? "

Jiraiya shook his head before asking, "No, but I heard that something happened yesterday. I heard it was something about an incident with the Kyūbi. What happened?"

Minato smiled a bit; it certainly had been a very hectic day, and even more so for Naruto.

He was sure those two were still doing it; that's why he didn't bother them at his cottage. Besides, his son could return on his own.

Minato smiled again before replying, "Well, it all started when..."

Naruto's Apartment - 2 hours later

Naruto was along with Karin in front of his door; she was covered by a blanket and looked embarrassed because she had walked through the entire village with it, but luckily, nobody had seen her thanks to his boyfriend.

Both entered and saw that the place was a mess; bags, boxes, and papers everywhere. Naruto sighed; although he didn't like the mess, he knew that his girls had been excited, and he couldn't blame them for that.

The Uzumaki took a few steps forward, and someone instantly put his head between her breasts.

"Naruto-kun! You've finally come; I wanted to surprise you last night, but you never came back," Anko spoke while shaking Naruto's head. The Snake Mistress didn't see Karin due to the excitement.

Naruto placed his hands on Anko's shoulders and pushed his head out of her breasts.

Anko sighed in disappointment; he always did the same; she just wanted to play with him and maybe do something else.

Naruto sighed with a smile, and before he could say something, Anko approached Karin. "Aaaaah. Now I understand why you didn't return, Naruto-kun. Tell me, Karin-chan, how was Naruto-kun's penis? Did he fill you completely up or did he go soft before you were done?" Anko asked with a smile.

Karin answered, "I took it all." She proudly smiled, and Anko nodded satisfied.

"Hehehe, you have talent, girl. But tell me, why are you using that?" Anko asked looking down.

Karin pushed her glasses and smiled as she explained Anko about her recent sexual adventure with Naruto, who just shook his head while smiling.

The Uzumaki man walked to the kitchen because he was smelling a delicious odor coming from there.

He saw Haku cutting some potatoes, and Naruto stealthily approached.

He placed his hands on her waist as he whispered near hear ear, "Haku-chan, this new Red Kimono is giving me a serious problem down here," Naruto stated while rubbing the bulge in his pants against her ass.

She instantly stopped while putting both hands on the edge of the table, feeling Naruto putting two fingers inside of her. "N-Naruto-kun, not here. They can see us," Haku whispered quite excited, although she wanted Naruto to throw her to the floor and do her in every possible way.

Naruto put two more fingers inside, increasing the speed until Haku released an orgasm that completely soaked her panties and much of Naruto's hand.

He pulled his fingers out and licked them under the watchful gaze of Haku, who decided to return the favor.

She quickly grabbed Naruto by his shoulders and pushed him hard against the countertop, surprising him quite a bit due to her sudden change attitude.

Haku crouched down, pulled his ANBU pants and his boxer down, and she held his member firmly with her right hand.

Naruto continued observing until Haku started rubbing it slowly, "Haku-chan, your hands are very soft," Naruto stated in a whisper.

Haku smiled and looked back at his penis, stopping rubbing it.

She opened her mouth a bit and pulled her tongue out, slowly approaching it at the head of his member. After making contact, she carefully licked it and got it wet.

She stroked Naruto's balls with her fingers, surprising him due to her ability.

After moments of countless licks, Naruto grunted when Haku started to suck, pressing it gently with her lips as she moved her tongue against every inch she swallowed.

Haku continued descending until she couldn't go any further. It was her first time doing this, and she couldn't take it completely.

Haku slowly took it out, stopping at the head to suck it strongly, making a loud noise.

Naruto squeezed the countertop's edge and almost came.

"Exquisite," Haku stated before putting it back into her mouth, now sucking him off with moderate speed.

However, she couldn't continue much longer with that speed since Naruto's cock was enjoying her attention, the reason why she increased the speed as she stuck two fingers into her wet vagina, pulling them in and out while sucking Naruto's penis vigorously and rapidly.

The way she moved her lips and her tongue, the noises she made, and those lustful eyes; Naruto could only enjoy this magnificent act as he felt his imminent climax.

However, Naruto suddenly heard a voice approaching the kitchen. "I just want to help her prepare lunch," Kin spoke while looking at Kurotsuchi.

They looked at the countertop and saw Haku sucking Naruto's penis with great passion.

They blushed and felt wet as they stared at those two. Both saw Naruto grabbing Haku's face before moving his hips at high speed.

He did what Haku could not, which made her tear up while releasing the orgasm that dripped on the floor.

Naruto just continued fucking her throat until releasing his seed.

She swallowed what she could, but it was too much, and some sperm escaped from the corner of her lips.

After a while, Naruto took his penis out, using a bit of strength at the end because Haku didn't want to let it go.

He looked at her cloudy eyes; she had her mouth open and was drooling. She moved her tongue and revealed that there was still a bit of his seed. The Yuki gave him an orgasmic smile before swallowing the rest of his seed.

Naruto got quite excited and raised her, holding her by her butt. Haku instantly put her hands around his neck, and when Naruto was about to fuck her, he put her back on the floor.

Haku thought that he wanted to try out another position. Therefore, she looked back at him, but after doing so, she saw both women at the entrance looking at them with eyes wide open and blushing.

Haku blushed as well, and when she was to say it wasn't what they were thinking, Naruto stuck it in.

She moaned, and Naruto started thrusting rapidly. "W-Wait, Naruto-kun. The girls..."

She couldn't finish because he thrust so fast and so hard that her eyes rolled up.

"I can see them, Haku-chan. Don't worry, let them watch. Let them know how much you're enjoying this, and how much they will enjoy it once they get their chance," Naruto spoke amid grunts as he increased the speed. He stuck his thumb in her anus, which made her reach her climax.

Her eyes rolled up to unexpected levels while a bit of her saliva escaped from her mouth. "This... This is heaven! Fuck me harder, Naruto-kun! I want you further inside! Get me pregnant; I want to bear your children, Naruto-kun!"

She was lost in pleasure; the fact that they were observing them excited the Yuki immensely.

Kin kept watching with astonishment; even though she tried, she couldn't look away. She could only see these two fucking like animals in heat.

She suddenly heard moans at her side; Kin looked there and saw Kurotsuchi touching herself.

The Oto Kunoichi blushed even more, and she finally ran away, sprinting to her room to lock herself in there as her heart beat a mile a minute; Naruto had said that he wanted to do it with her as well, and that made her feel thrilled and happy.

Back in the kitchen, Kurotsuchi continued touching herself; this was her chance.

She fell to her knees after reaching her climax, just to see Naruto raising Haku and putting her in the position they were before Haku noticed their presences.

Kurotsuchi looked at Haku's expression; she looked so happy and excited while riding his cock that Kurotsuchi couldn't help crawling towards them. She wanted to do it; she desired it.

Naruto continued thrusting until Haku's pussy squeezed tightly. Right then, Haku drew him into a passionate kiss that silenced the shouts of their orgasms.

Naruto filled her up with his load, and even though the Uzumaki had told them the reason why he couldn't have children yet, she kept some hope.

Naruto was still holding her butt, feeling Haku shivering due to her recent orgasm.

The Jinchūriki slowly took his penis out, and a bit of his sperm escaped from her.

He smiled because Haku was falling asleep, so he created a clone, and before Naruto could say anything, he felt that someone started licking his penis.

He looked down and saw Kurotsuchi.

Naruto didn't say anything, and his clone silently took Haku to her bedroom. Naruto didn't want Anko to notice this, or else he would be locked up all day in his apartment, and he didn't want that because he had to meet Karui in a few minutes.

"Kyōfu-kun," Kurotsuchi whispered as she sucked one of his balls and rubbed his penis.

"Kurotsuchi-chan, do you want to have sex with your boss?" Naruto jokingly asked.

Kurotsuchi instantly stopped; she stood up and answered, "N-Naruto-kun, I-I know I shouldn't be doing this. Y-you're the most important person in the Elemental Nations, a-and I am a simple K-Kunoichi. B-But if I don't seize this opportunity, I'll have to wait until you go to Iwa, and that'll t-take l-long."

Naruto stopped smiling; he lowered his head slightly and gave her a kiss as he put his hands on her ass, grabbing it strongly to pick her up before placing her on the edge of the dining table.

Kurotsuchi was surprised, but she did nothing because she was inexperienced; she would let him do whatever he wanted and without complaining.

Naruto, with his sharp nails, tore Kurotsuchi's new skirt off; she got wetter when seeing the wild side of her boss.

"It's okay, Kurotsuchi-chan. Your wish is my command." Naruto reached down and approached his head at Kurotsuchi's vagina as he put his arms around her hips to draw her closer.

Kurotsuchi put her legs on Naruto's head and felt him licking the whole length of her vagina. She leaned her head back, and Naruto smiled as approached two fingers at the lips of her vagina to open it.

The Uzumaki stuck his tongue inside, and Kurotsuchi arched back. He moved it all over the place as if he were trying to memorize and explore her depths. He put it in and out while his forefinger cooperated with his tongue.

Naruto pulled his left hand away from her hip because, this time, she was getting him closer.

He led that hand to her vagina, and with his thumb and forefinger, he pinched her clitoris.

She instantly placed her hands on Naruto's head as she pushed him hard inwards, forcing him to drink her juices.

Naruto said nothing; he drank them and swallowed them until Kurotsuchi's orgasm stopped. She couldn't help falling back on the table as she wiped the sweat from her forehead.

She let out a sigh; she loved what Naruto had done, and just moments later, she felt that Naruto started rubbing his penis against her vagina.

She quickly got up a little, only to fall again when Naruto stuck his penis in, opening her walls for the first time.

"Hehe, another virgin in your history," Kurama stated.

Naruto ignored him and continued until reaching the end. He stopped there until Kurotsuchi started moaning and pushing her hips to get Naruto moving.

Naruto did so; he took his penis out, making her moan in disappointment.

However, Naruto quickly thrust his hips, touching the entry of Kurotsuchi's womb.

She orgasmically smiled and stated, "Kyōfu-kun, you're incredible."

Naruto smiled and leaned down to lick her stomach; she had a very definite shape for someone of her age. She was the Tsuchikage's granddaughter, after all, and he surely made her train regularly.

After that, Naruto's tongue went up, and he sucked Kurotsuchi's erect nipples.

The Jinchūriki stopped and stood straight again, raising Kurotsuchi's legs as he ordered. "Kurotsuchi-chan, hold your legs."

She instantly did it and continued smiling as she gladly received his thrust.

Naruto stood onto the table, which was moving and making a lot of noise. He got on top of Kurotsuchi and brought his head to hers as he moved his hips in this new position.

Kurotsuchi could feel Naruto getting deeper and penetrating her more rapidly, almost as if he wanted to break her in two.

She stopped holding her legs and put them on Naruto's hips. He felt his climax close while Kurotsuchi squeezed him tightly.

Incapable of holding it any longer, Naruto released a powerful discharge. Kurotsuchi arched back and rolled up her eyes, releasing a juicy orgasm that came out like an explosion that soaked the dining table.

After Naruto had finished his discharge, he asked himself if he could ever get empty. It had never happened, and he suspected that Kurama had something to do with that. Anyway, it wasn't as if he had a problem with it.

Naruto stood up a bit, pulling his arms away from Kurotsuchi's back —when he had started to cum, he had stuck to her.

Kurotsuchi gave him a passionate kiss, which he instantly corresponded.

They stopped again, and Kurotsuchi quickly put her hands on Naruto's back, drawing him into a hug. "Naruto-kun, I-I ... I-I love you, Naruto-kun," Kurotsuchi whispered.

The Uzumaki returned the hug, but he sighed and answered, "Kurotsuchi-chan, I can't respond in the same way. Though I'm not saying it's impossible for me to end up having that feeling, I'm just saying we should get to know better before that. Perhaps we should have some dates before you return to your village." Naruto smiled at the end.

Kurotsuchi smiled too. Well, that was better than nothing. Regardless, this whole mission had been the best thing that had happened in her life.

The 'fool' of her grandfather had indeed done something good for her.

Kurotsuchi was going to tell Naruto to keep going, but both heard the table crunching.

They looked at each other with confusion, not knowing why the table was making that noise. However, both of them heard an even louder crunch, and the legs of the front of the table broke into two, which made them fall to the floor, and both immediately detached.

Kurotsuchi fell to one side while Naruto fell beside her.

Both couldn't help but laugh aloud; it was obvious that the table wouldn't have resisted after such a bestial act.

After a while, Kurotsuchi stopped laughing; she tried to get on top of Naruto again, but she couldn't because he got up and went in search of his pants.

"I'm sorry, Kurotsuchi-chan, but I have a pending appointment; we can continue another day," Naruto spoke as he put on his pants.

Kurotsuchi nodded with a bit of disappointment, but maybe she could do it later.

She had a whole month to do it; she would take this month as a vacation; no training, no missions, no nothing, just be with her dear and loving boss.

Naruto approached Kurotsuchi, who was still on the floor with half of her clothes ripped apart while some of his semen escaped from her vagina.

He reached down and kissed her.

They came out of the kitchen; Kurotsuchi went to her bedroom to change her clothes while Naruto went to the living room, the place where Anko and Karin continued talking, the latter was still wearing the blanket.

Luckily, they didn't hear anything because each room of the apartment had privacy seals. Naruto didn't know what would have happened if those two had joined them; he would have definitely fulfilled Kurama's dream of seeing him fucking four women.

Meanwhile, in the kitchen, a more than envious clone was finishing preparing lunch.

"Damn stingy boss; he didn't even ask me for help," the clone muttered.

He turned around and saw that the table was destroyed.

"The living room will be then," the clone concluded, carrying lunch there.

It was stew; he just finished preparing what Haku had started cooking.

The clone came in, seeing the original kissing Anko and fondling her breasts.

The clone reached his limit; he put the pot on the table and furiously looked at Naruto as he exclaimed while running toward him, "You bastard! Share!"

After noticing another case of independent thinking by one of his clones, Naruto dispelled him, chuckling when he received the information; that clone was furious.

Naruto looked at the Mitarashi and informed with a straight face, "Anko-chan, I need you to take Kin-chan to the tower of the Forest of Death about eight at night. I also want you to be there. I gotta do something important."

Anko mentally smiled; maybe she could use that meeting to do something 'else.' However, she will ask him in all seriousness about why he was sad and angry yesterday, and if all went well, they could have a good time.

After that, Anko saw Kurotsuchi entering with a radiant smile, followed by Haku, who had an almost equal smile but with a slight blush, and by a slightly blushing Kin.

"Did you do it?!" Anko shouted and stood up while pointing to them and Naruto.

The Mitarashi noticed that Haku and Kurotsuchi lowered their heads, and Naruto chuckled.

The Snake Mistress pouted and sat back with crossed arms. "It's not fair. I wanted to do it as well; it's been four months since the last time we did it, Naruto-kun," Anko protested.

The Jinchūriki smiled, "I'm sorry, Anko-chan, but I was in a coma. Besides, I had two weeks in recovery, so there was a reason. Anyway, let's eat. I have a pending appointment; once I finish that, we'll go to the hot springs. "

They all nodded while some of his clones served the food.

In a Training Camp - 2 hours later

After finishing eating, Naruto arrived at the place where he agreed to meet Karui while he did some warm-up activities, but it seemed that she wouldn't come because he couldn't feel her Chakra close.

He stopped training and thought that he should return with his girls. He had sent a clone to tell them that he would meet them at the hot springs; they surely were there already.

He decided to tell Ino and Tenten about this personally. Naruto didn't want them to think that he didn't want to see them in person.

The Uzumaki wandered through the streets of the village, feeling increasingly sicker by the admiring glances of the stupid villagers. The truth was that he wanted to throw a Bijūdama right in the center of the village so that people stopped looking at him with those stupid smiles. Maybe he should have done that yesterday, but he didn't because Karin had been there.

Naruto continued walking until he spotted Ino's family flower shop; he came in and saw Ino with a boring and sad look on her face. It seemed that she didn't hear the door's bell as she continued in the same position, with her right elbow on the counter as she rested her chin in the palm of her hand.

Naruto grabbed a bouquet of red roses; he came closer and put it before her. "60 Ryō," Ino automatically said without looking up.

Naruto chuckled; he pulled his wallet out and put the money on the counter.

Ino grabbed it and kept it, surprisingly, without noticing Naruto's presence yet. What she did realize was that someone was still standing before her with roses in front of her face.

She thought it was a suitor, so she raised her head and said, "Sorry, but I already have..." She stopped when seeing Naruto with a smile.

The Yamanaka immediately lunged at him, putting her arms around his neck as she put her head on his chest.

Naruto returned the hug and put a hand on her waist. He could feel her sadness, but he didn't know the reason for it.

"Naruto-kun," Ino whispered.

The Jinchūriki just stroked her hair until he heard someone's voice approaching.

"Hey, Ino, do you know where your mother went?" Inoichi asked, entering the store through the door behind the counter.

"Stay away from my daughter!" Inoichi shouted after seeing them hugging, advancing toward them to separate them.

Naruto just squinted at Ino's father attitude.

Ino exclaimed as she stood in front of her dad, "Oto-san! I've already told you! Naruto-kun isn't taking advantage of me!"

Inoichi ignored his daughter and directly looked at Naruto, "Namikaze, you can't see my daughter anymore. If you want to date her, you have to end the relationship with that red-haired girl. I don't care if you're the son of Hokage-sama; I don't want to see you with my daughter while you're dating another woman; I don't want you to hurt her purity," Inoichi said the latter unaware that Naruto had already taken her 'purity' away.

Naruto stared at Inoichi; he couldn't disrespect Ino's father even if he wanted to kill him. He would never do it because Ino loved his father, and Naruto didn't want to hurt her, even if her dad got in his way.

Naruto finally spoke, "I understand your concern, Inoichi-san, but if you think that I'm playing with Ino-chan's feelings, let me tell you that you're wrong. I don't want to expound upon the reasons, but I assure you... No, I promise you that I'll never do anything that could make your daughter feel sad; I'll only leave her if she wants it."

Inoichi looked at Ino, who grabbed one of Naruto's hands and quickly shook her head. There was no way she'd do that; she had already decided to spend the rest of her life with him.

Inoichi shook his head and stated, "Sorry, but it's not an option; you can no longer see Ino. It's a decision."

He took one of Ino's hands to separate her from Naruto, who right now was infuriated. But as he had said, he wouldn't do anything; not because Naruto respected him, but because he was Ino's father.

The blond girl put some resistance, but she could do little since her father had more strength than she had. She was going to yell at her father; she was already a Kunoichi and Ino believed that she could take her own decisions.

However, she didn't do it because Naruto put a hand on her shoulder and spoke as he looked at her father, "At least let me say goodbye to your daughter, Inoichi-san."

The Yamanaka leader nodded, seeing Naruto approaching his head to his daughter's ear to whisper a few words.

Inoichi saw that Ino bowed her head, but nothing more after that.

Naruto left the store, furious about how everything turned out. "Damn it! That stupid Inoichi; if he weren't Ino-chan's father, I would have stabbed him long ago. Argh! Anyway, now I've to visit Tenten-chan, her parents are much more understanding," Naruto thought as he received a nod from Kurama.

Near the hot springs - 15 minutes later

Naruto and Tenten were about to reach their destination. As the Uzumaki had predicted it, Tenten's parents didn't object and let her go with him.

The Kunoichi was very close to Naruto, holding hands while talking about some things, especially about the finals.

She asked if he knew anything about her opponent, but Naruto replied that he didn't know much about her abilities. He had also told her that she shouldn't be overconfident and that she had to fight seriously from the beginning.

When arriving, Naruto felt a powerful Chakra source nearby; it was too powerful. Naruto didn't know who it was, but he knew the person was somewhere at the thermal baths.

He ignored this Chakra for now and kept walking, getting closer to that Chakra source by each step, and approaching to a place that made him squint.

When they reached the bathroom —which was a mixed one and reserved by Naruto— the Jinchūriki told Tenten to come in and that he would follow her in a moment. She nodded and told him to hurry.

Once she left, Naruto walked to the back of the bathroom, hearing some perverted giggles.

There he saw a man with long white hair writing something on a notepad.

"Hehehe, this is a gold mine," the man stated.

Naruto recognized him from a fleeting memory that he had buried long ago.

However, he angrily growled and released his killing intent, which made Jiraiya stop. "Who are you and why the fuck are you doing spying on my women?" Naruto asked with closed eyes and crossed arms.

Jiraiya turned around surprised. This killing intent was repugnant; he recognized the voice, but he didn't believe that the person he had met years ago would be able to release such sensation; he must have killed hundreds of people.

Jiraiya then remembered Naruto's first question; perhaps he had forgotten him. Therefore, he smiled and exclaimed while doing hand positions to summon an orange toad. "Thanks for asking!" Jiraiya yelled as he moved his head and hands in a ridiculous way.

He stood above his toad and continued, "I'm the hermit of the Myouboku Mountains. Also known as the Toad Sage."

Naruto stopped releasing his killing intent and continued, "Jiraiya of the Sannin. I knew it was you, but I didn't mean that. What I meant was, who the hell do you think you are to spy on my women?"

Jiraiya saw his blank expression; there wasn't even a sign of emotion there. Jiraiya instantly though on Danzō.

He waved his hands defensively, "Hey! It's not what you're thinking, brat. Besides being one of the Legendary Sannin; I also am a famous writer," Jiraiya replied, pulling out an orange Icha-Icha book.

"I was just using these women as inspiration for my next..." Jiraiya couldn't finish because he jumped to avoid a lightning attack.

The Sannin landed and stood on the channel of thermal water.

Naruto lowered one of his Kibas that he released from one of his wrists. "That was just a warning shot; if you're looking for inspiration, go to a brothel or something. Konoha has plenty of them, but stop spying on my girls. I don't care if you're one of the Legendary Sannin; if you ever spy on some of my women again, I'll kill you," Naruto stated with a cold stare.

Jiraiya smiled; hehe, the brat had balls. He jumped up and landed in front of Naruto, "Okay, as a token of my apology, I'll give you my new book. It's not for sale yet," Jiraiya spoke with a smile as he pulled out a small purple book from his ninja bag.

He handed it to Naruto, who received it before throwing it to the ground. "I don't care about your stupid book; I can do the stuff you write in your books with my women. And please, don't spy on them again, or I'll have to fight with all my might. You're one of the Legendary Sannin and the Sensei of my father, after all."

The latter surprised him a bit, "Did Minato tell you?" Naruto shook his head, "I was instructed very well in Root, and I know many things because of that. I'm sure that my father has commented you about my past."

Jiraiya was surprised again, but he quickly added something because he was already walking away. "Hey, Naruto! Wait!" Jiraiya shouted, running towards him.

Naruto stopped and turned around, seeing Jiraiya putting a hand on his shoulder. "Hey, I'm sorry for my behavior. I know what you went through in Root wasn't good, but I've been talking with Minato, and we have decided to train you. What do you say? Do you want to train with us? We know much, and you're my godson after all."

It seemed that he had forgotten the first time they had met. But he had been a small kid back then, after all. He didn't want to make him remember either.

Both Kurama and Naruto smiled; how could he reject such an offer? Those two were powerful people, and he wouldn't deny training from those of their kind.

"Of course, Jiraiya-sama. But I'm busy right now; my girls are waiting for me. When I need your help, I'll go to Oto-san's house. I still have to do some things this week, so most likely I won't train with you until next week. But don't worry, I'll be there."

Jiraiya smiled; it had been easier than he had thought. He believed that Naruto would be an unfriendly and emotionless person after being in Root.

Both said goodbye to each other, and Naruto entered the mixed bath.

Jiraiya smiled and whispered. "Lucky bastard."

He turned around and picked up his book. "Hmph, he can't appreciate true art."

The Sannin finally disappeared in a puff of smoke.

Omake 2

Naruto takes over Gatō Transportation

On the coast of an island between Kumogakure and Kirigakure - 7 years ago

"This mission won't be hard. I just have to sabotage Gatō's cargo. Hehe, but I'll do something else," Naruto mentally said, camouflaged by the crowns of some trees; he wore his new ANBU clothes.

The Jinchūriki observed a few men carrying several boxes onto Gatō's boats that were stranded on the coast.

Danzō had entrusted Naruto to sabotage this shipment because Gatō was illegally providing weapons to Kumogakure. Danzō couldn't accept that; Konoha was still weak after the Kyūbi’s incident.

The Root leader couldn't kill Gatō either since he was very useful due to the low costs of transporting goods, besides his confidentiality.

Naruto continued observing them; many were ordinary civilians, but others were, at least, Chunin. Some of those people were from Kumo, and others were rogue ninjas; all of them were standing guard at the port.

Naruto decided to ignore them; he would do something he had planned with Kurama's help after Danzō had assigned him this mission.

He had managed to steal Danzō’s seal formula, modifying it to his liking. He had also created another unique seal that was already operating in some people, but that seal wouldn't be necessary yet.

Naruto jumped down to the roof of a building; it was the only one since it was a heavily wooded area.

Gatō had indeed chosen a good place to have a port; it was very well hidden from other Shinobi villages. Naruto didn't think it was strange that Danzō knew the location; he made deals with Gatō, after all.

Naruto took his clothes off and sealed them in a scroll. After that, he pulled out other garments; these were dirty and worn. Naruto put them on and gathered a bit of dust with his hands to put them all over his body; now he looked like a street child.

He left his ninja equipment on the roof before jumping down to the back of the building. He pretended to walk with tiredness until reaching the front door. There were two tall guards, who looked at him with suspicion. However, they held him because he fell right in front of them.

Both looked at each other in confusion until one of them picked him up, just to see him opening his eyes slightly. "W-W-Wa-a-t-ter," Naruto whispered tiredly as he weakly raised his right hand.

That person looked at him with sadness, and even if he wanted to look like a tough guy, seeing a child in this situation made him feel sorry for him.

He looked at his other companion, who nodded. Both turned around and opened the door. Everyone inside looked at them; there were like a dozen of men. Some of them were checking their weapons, and the other ones were chatting; all of them were mercenaries incapable of even using their Chakra.

"Boss, we found a boy," said the man who had Naruto in his arms.

Gatō looked up; he was signing some papers when he heard that. He curiously looked at the child; it was strange to find a child in this place.

Maybe he could sell him; that red hair was very unusual, and some people would be willing to pay a large sum of money for someone like him. He looked very healthy, just tired and dirty; a shower would solve that.

Gatō gestured toward his men to come closer; they did so, and the man with Naruto in his arms sat down in a chair.

Gatō grabbed a pitcher of water and poured it into a glass to give it to Naruto.

The child weakly accepted it and drank its contents; he thanked Gatō, who looked at Naruto with a malicious smile. "And tell me, boy, what are you doing on this island? This place is uninhabited; how did you come here?"

Naruto bowed his head with sadness as sobbed, "My Oto-chan and my K-Kaa-chan told me that they found something called gold in this place. T-They brought me with them because they wanted me to see the moment we w-would be rich. But I got lost because I was playing with some animals. I couldn't find them anymore; I've been here for weeks. I have barely eaten; I just found this place because I heard some noises, and I-I thought my parents were here. Please help me find my parents." He looked at Gatō while several tears ran down his cheeks.

His words saddened Gatō’s men, and his tears had been way too much for them.

Meanwhile, Gatō stopped paying attention after hearing the word 'gold,' which made him ask, "Do you remember where your parents were before this? Maybe they're still there waiting for you."

Naruto shook his head, but Gatō insisted, "Any description, anything that you remember. Did you see another island when you arrived?"

Naruto nodded and replied, "I did, but there also was a port, but it was much uglier and older than this one."

Gatō smiled; that was his former port. Maybe this brat's parents were still there; he just had to kill them and steal their gold before selling this brat.

"Very well, boy. What do you say if you wait here while my men find your parents? I don't think it'll take them too long," Gatō stated with a sinister smile.

Naruto knew why he did that, but he smiled while wiping his tears. "Hai!"

Gatō ordered his men to search for his parents; only the two guards stayed.

When everyone left, Naruto smiled and winced in pain while looking at the man who had picked him up. "Sir, my knee hurts," Naruto said while touching it.

The man smiled, knelt down and touched his knee. "Is it here? Does it hurt you here?" The man asked with a smile.

Naruto smiled and nodded. The man lowered his head and continued rubbing.

The Uzumaki finally changed his expression; he moved his hands to the man's head, holding it firmly and breaking it.

The eyes of Gatō and the other man widened in shock, and before they could do anything, Naruto jumped gave the other guard a powerful kick on his neck, instantly breaking it.

Gatō panicked; this kid killed two of his men in a heartbeat, and maybe he would do the same to him. Terrified, he grabbed a knife from his desk as his hands trembled. "Stay away! Or I'll kill you, I-I swear! W-W-why are you doing this?! W-who sent you?" Naruto sinisterly smiled; he pointed his left hand toward Gatō and whispered, "Banshō Ten'in."

Gatō instantly felt a force surrounding him, sending him towards the boy, who had a black rod in his other hand.

When Gatō was at inches from him, Naruto stopped pointing and gave him a slap that sent him to the floor, and before he could get up, Naruto stuck the rod in his arm.

Gatō screamed in pain, feeling his body completely numb.

Naruto smiled; Gatō's entire body was stiff as a rock; those chakra rods were really useful.

The Jinchūriki stood before Gatō, knelt down and looked into his eyes.

Gatō looked back with fear and begged, "D-Don't kill me, p-please. I'll do whatever you want; I will give you money, j-just say the amount."

Naruto gave an angelic smile and asked, "Will you do that, Gatō-san?"

It didn't surprise him that he knew his name because he concluded that he was a Ninja, "O-Of course!"

Naruto asked with a smile, "What do you say if you work for me from now on?"

Gatō was quite surprised. "I-I d-don't think that's possible. You're just a kid; b-besides, my b-business are tricky."

Naruto stopped smiling and changed his expression to a cold and dangerous one, something that frightened Gatō even more. "I don't care, from now on, you'll work for me, and there's nothing you can do to avoid it."

Naruto activated his Rinnegan, and Gatō turned pale because he could feel the sense of death that his eyes conveyed.

The Uzumaki put his hand on his head and whispered, "Ningendō."

The man instantly felt that something came out of his body; it almost felt as if his soul had been taken out or something like that; he couldn't explain it.

Naruto then put a finger on his tongue, and Gatō felt something entering his body while a slight burn remained in his tongue.

After placing his modified seal, the boy stood up and pulled his Chakra rod out. "Gatō, from now on, you'll be my subordinate."

Gatō stood up; he could finally move. He looked towards Naruto, scared because he still had those strange purple eyes.

"H-Hai." He felt completely intimidated; this kid wasn't someone ordinary, and his expression confirmed it.

"From now on, you'll call me Kyōfu; we'll be the Yakuza. We'll discuss our goals later. You only have to continue with your business as you always have done. But simultaneously, you must secretly recruit people for our organization. Our primary goal, for now, is to grow; we must recruit as many members possible. I already have a bunch of them, but you can't hire just anyone you see; you have to put them through a ritual that I will show you and place a special seal on them. But it's not equal to the one you have now," Naruto finished with a serious face.

"A seal? W-What kind of seal do I have, K-Kyōfu-sama?" Gatō respectfully asked, not wanting to upset his new master.

"You have a seal that will kill you if you say anything, or tell anyone about anything you saw today. Besides, I've taken out half of your soul," Naruto replied.

Gatō turned completely pale, now knowing what he had felt. "P-Please, Kyōfu-sama, I beg you, don't kill me! I'll do whatever you say; I'll make sure that your organization has ten thousand subordinates in less than five months."

Naruto smirked, "I would like that. Now I'll explain to you the application of the seal. You won't do anything; I'm just letting you know, other people will do it. Those people will meet you on the outskirts of Hi no Kuni, more specifically, at these coordinates."

Naruto then handed him a paper, which he timidly received.

"Now, remember this very well, Gatō; if you try anything against me, I'll kill you. I can extract the rest of your soul wherever you are, and you will die if you loosen your tongue; remember that very well. Now follow me, I've to tell you something else. Let's do it quickly; I can't stay in this place too long."

Gatō nodded and followed Naruto as he explained his plans.

Once Naruto noticed that Gatō understood his orders, he returned to the roof to retrieve his Ninja equipment.

Then he performed his other mission; it wasn't hard, he just placed some explosives tags that exploded after ten minutes. Enough time for him to leave the island before going to the Land of Snow.

According to Danzō, that village had the best scientists in the world, and they were responsible for making the best technologies of the Elemental Nations.

If Naruto could have them in his organization, it would grow by leaps and bounds, and what better way of doing that than by eliminating those who were oppressing them.

Notes

Let’s talk about the chapter.

You’ll see what Naruto was writing in those blueprints once he goes to the Land of Snow.

The conversation between Jiraiya and Minato (about the Royal City), I want to make clear that each Daimyo of the Great Nations has a Royal City, which will have its own army, and numerous ones, indeed.

Inoichi has forbidden Naruto from dating Ino, but don't worry. And yes, Naruto wants to kill Inoichi, but he won’t do it for the reasons already stated.

I think the next chapter will have a lemon with Kin and Anko (ahem... Maybe).

Jiraiya and Naruto already met in the past. However, you’ll see more about this in future chapters. (Naruto was pretending not to remember him, and Jiraiya didn’t notice it, so he let it be).

Just a reminder, this is a translation. The original one is in Spanish, which I also write.

Until the next time.

Chapter Text

Human talking, "Show me what you got!"

Human thinking, "Pathetic."

Nonhuman talking, "This will be fun."

Nonhuman thinking, "I think I was wrong."

Jutsus / unknown names, "Katon: Goukakyuu no jutsu."

Disclaimer: I do not own Naruto, Masashi Kishimoto does.

LEMON

Chapter 22

Tower Forest of Death - 8:45 PM

Anko and Kin were in the Forest Tower, specifically in one of the rooms, waiting for Naruto's arrival. "Anko-san, do you know why Naruto-kun called us here? He's late; did he forget that he called us?" Kin asked; she was sitting on a chair and looking at Anko, who was on a table with crossed legs and looking at her nails.

Anko looked at her and shrugged, "I don't know; Naruto-kun didn't say anything. He just wanted us to be here, but he sounded very serious. Hehehe, maybe he wants to spend quality time with us. But don't worry, he'll arrive at any moment; maybe something held him up."

Kin blushed a little bit; she still remembered what had happened in Naruto's apartment, and especially what he had said, and that made her excited, getting more excited when seeing a fire Shunshin in the center of the room.

Naruto appeared and walked with a straight face towards them.

Anko got off the table; Kin stood beside her and Naruto in front of them. "Girls, I'm sorry for being late, but I was thinking about something, and I couldn't make a decision. It has to do with you, Anko-chan, but before I get to that point; Kin-chan, I need to ask you something."

Kin straightened; the seriousness of Naruto's words worried her; she felt that something was wrong.

"W-What is it, Naruto-kun?" The Tsuchi asked looking up because Naruto was several inches taller than she was.

The Uzumaki replied, "Kin-chan, when you were in Otogakure, did Orochimaru do something to you?"

He already knew the answer; he just asked to be sure.

That name made both women shudder slightly; the older one more so than the younger one.

Kin quickly shook her head, but Naruto sighed and decided to choose his words better. "I mean to you, Dosu and Zaku. Did Orochimaru do something to you before coming to Konoha?" Naruto asked again.

The Tsuchi thought of that day, recalling her conversation with Tayuya, Orochimaru giving orders, and another thing that had happened before leaving Oto.

"Well, I remember that Orochimaru made us go through a ritual. I remember that he placed the three of us one side to another while doing a Jutsu. I can't remember the name, but what I do remember is that some strange marks appeared on the ground. I think there was a scroll too, but I don't remember it very well," Kin replied with more nervousness.

Naruto sighed and continued, “What I feared."

That made her even more nervous, but before she could ask, Naruto spoke again, "Kin-chan, I'll be honest with you. Orochimaru used a forbidden jutsu on you. It uses your soul as payment for a dead person to return to the world of the living. That means that you'll die once Orochimaru uses that jutsu again. Well, you'll become a puppet that will go where Orochimaru is, and then you'll die."

Kin's eyes widened in shock and felt watery eyes. However, before she could lie down to mourn, Naruto spoke again, "But I won’t allow that; I know how to cancel the contract; you don't need to worry. The only bad thing is that when I cancel the contract, Orochimaru will notice this. But I also know how to avoid that. That was the reason I told you to come her. Right now a barrier surrounds the tower, which will prevent that anything leaves this place until I undo the barrier. So, once I cancel the contract, the information will try to return with Orochimaru, but when it tries to do that, it won't succeed because of the barrier; the Uzumakis used it to counter Jutsus of this type. In other words, Jutsus that return to the person who used it once they finish."

Naruto paused for a moment so that Kin could understand his words. "And the information can't be trying to get out for too long because if it does, it'll end up vanishing away. This will take a few hours, so we have to stay here tonight. And don't try to leave, the barrier isn't safe; it has a defect, which is... Well, just don't touch it, okay? Not even I would survive if I touch it; it's something I have to fix later," Naruto muttered the latter.

Kin was visibly calmer, but she decided to ask, "D-Does that mean I won't die? C-Can you cancel the Jutsu, Naruto-kun?" Kin hopefully asked. Both women would follow Naruto's advice and wouldn't touch the barrier.

Naruto nodded at Kin's question; she sighed with relief, and the Uzumaki stretched a little bit before shaking his hands. "Kin-chan, take off your clothes."

She blushed but it; maybe this was necessary to cancel the Jutsu.

She brought her hands on the edge of her new blue blouse and took it off, throwing it to the floor before doing the same with the skirt that matched with her blouse.

She was in her undergarments, pretty embarrassed, even more so because Naruto was carefully examining her body as he nodded, which made her feel flattered and excited.

She was about to take off her bra, but Naruto made a stop sign with his hand. "Wait, Kin-chan; you don't have to."

The Uzumaki approached Kin and grabbed her right hand.

With his free hand, the Jinchūriki pulled a Kunai out from his Ninja bag, cutting Kin's palm slightly, which made her grimace in pain.

The Uzumaki put her blood on the tip of his thumb and opened his left palm to put her blood there.

"Now, please don't interrupt me. This is the first time I've done this jutsu, and the hand positions are way too much."

Kin and Anko nodded, and Naruto clasped his hands before doing at least seventy hand seals.

He knelt down and finally said, "Edo Tensei (Impure World Resurrection)"

Black inscriptions and a large circumference instantly appeared around the Tsuchi.

The Tsuchi didn't move; Naruto pulled out a scroll and continued, "Everything is going well for now, and now I have to cancel the contract."

Kin nodded, and Naruto opened the scroll to put it on the floor, right where the inscriptions started.

The Uzumaki raised his hands, biting his right thumb and putting the blood on the scroll before crossing his hands to say, "Edo Tensei: Kai (Impure World Resurrection: Release)"

The scroll that Naruto had put on the floor absorbed all the marks on the floor; Naruto picked it up and kept it in his ninja bag.

"Done, you have nothing to worry about anymore, Kin-chan," Naruto stated with a reassuring smile.

The Tsuchi sighed with relief; she thought it would be more complicated.

Anko decided to ask; she had stepped away when Naruto started doing the hand seals, "What did you do, Naruto-kun?

He looked at Anko, who stood beside an almost naked Kin Tsuchi. "Well, firstly, I changed the summoner; instead of Orochimaru, I got possession of her soul thanks to her blood. Lastly, I canceled the contract with the scroll... That's the easiest way I can explain it. "

Anko and Kin nodded; they perfectly understood his explanation.

The Tsuchi asked blushing, "C-can I put my clothes back, Naruto-kun?"

Naruto looked at her and nodded.

Kin picked up her clothes and put them on, "But, why did you want me to take them off, Naruto-kun?"

The Uzumaki smiled and replied, "Well, I just wanted to see your body, Kin-chan. You have a beautiful body, and your breasts are big for someone of your age. I wouldn't be surprised if they're as big as Anko-chan's in a few years. And by the way, you look much prettier without the headband," Naruto stated with a wink.

Kin blushed further but thanked Naruto. Once she finished dressing, the Jinchūriki continued, "Kin-chan, could you leave me alone with Anko-chan, please? I want to talk to her alone. I'll let you know when you can enter."

Kin nodded and went out to wait at the door.

Once she closed the door, he approached Anko and stood in front of her, staring into her eyes.

The Snake Mistress looked back, and Naruto hugged her as he placed his chin on her shoulder.

Anko did the same as she rubbed his back. "I'm sorry, Anko-chan. I couldn't keep my promise," Naruto apologized.

The Mitarashi couldn't help feeling sad; she hated seeing Naruto sad; she just couldn't stand it, and knowing that he was like this because of her, it made her feel even worse.

"Please, Naruto-kun, tell me what happened; I don't want to see you like this," Anko whispered near his ear.

Naruto pulled his head away and answered, "I promised you that I'd kill Orochimaru when I saw him. I couldn't because I did something stupid before he appeared. But that's no excuse; I should have given more of myself to beat him; I was so close... Damn bastard!" Naruto exclaimed getting angry.

However, Anko blinked with disbelief before smiling, giving him a light tap on his shoulder. "Fool! I thought I had done something wrong. Don't scare me like that again." She hugged him with a smile.

Naruto pushed Anko slightly and looked into her eyes with a serious expression. "That's not the point, Anko-chan. I take my promises very seriously. If I break them, what will that say about me in the future? That's why I'm so angry; promises to me are sacred. And not fulfilling them is a sin for me. Regardless, as I failed that promise, I think it's the time to fulfill the first promise I made you. And I want you to tell me what to do."

Anko's eyes widened as she pushed Naruto slightly. "D-Does t-that mean that you...?" Anko incredulously asked.

The Uzumaki nodded and added, "Yes, I can do it, and this is what I want you to decide. Do you want me to remove your mark, or do you want to keep it to use its power? I know I should remove it without asking; you've suffered enough because of it. But I was thinking, and I concluded that you had to decide."

The Mitarashi changed her expression to a more serious one; Naruto wasn't playing, and she would listen to what he had to say.

"I can remove it like it never existed. But if you decide to keep it, you won't suffer those nightmares anymore, and neither the connection with Orochimaru."

Anko placed her right hand where her Cursed Seal was. Since the day when Orochimaru showed up, her mark started to burn.

"Yes, right there; I can make that feeling go away, and I can also make you enjoy its benefits without it corrupting you. You have the Cursed Seal of Heaven, and although it's not the new one, you can still achieve the level two of the mark, which would give you a big boost in power. Though of course, it's up to you. If you want me to remove it completely, I won't object; I'll do as you say."

Anko couldn't deny that she was thrilled; she could feel the seriousness in his words, and everything indicated that he knew how to remove it.

She wasn't sure about keeping the mark; there were good reasons to do it, but she wanted nothing that reminded her of Orochimaru.

"Why are you so sure about that, Naruto-kun? How do you know that the mark won't corrupt me?" Anko curiously asked.

Naruto took his jacket off and showed his Cursed Seal, and she understood it. "Here is the proof. I still have it, but I got rid of that which corrupted the user. Anko-chan, I'm not forcing you to keep the mark, it's just a suggestion; I'll remove it if you want."

Anko thought about the possibilities and analyzed them one after another. After several minutes of looking at the odds, she spoke again, "Are you sure I will no longer feel Orochimaru?"

Naruto nodded, and she took her decision; though she wasn't sure yet, she trusted in the love of her life.

"Then do it, I want to keep the Cursed Seal."

Naruto nodded, "Sit down in that chair, Anko-chan." 

Anko did it, and Naruto activated his Rinnegan; those eyes always surprised her.

The Uzumaki came closer and placed his right hand on her head, and the next thing she felt was being transported to another location.

Anko’s Mental Landscape

"Ugh!" Anko exclaimed falling to her knees; she didn't know what happened.

The Mitarashi stood up and noticed she was in a hallway; it was completely dark, and she could barely see her hands.

"Welcome to your mental landscape," Naruto spoke behind her, which made her jump.

"Naruto-kun! Don't do that again! Where are you?" she asked, taking a few steps forward and waving her hands to try to touch him.

He grabbed one of her hands, "I'm here."

Anko nodded and asked, "So, this is my mental landscape. Why is it so dark?"

"Because you've never come to this place; you have never given a shape to your mental landscape, and besides that, there is someone who took advantage of that to shape it to his liking."

Anko squinted while thinking of Orochimaru.

Naruto continued, "Now I want you to close your eyes and concentrate; try to illuminate this place a bit."

She closed her eyes and focused; she tried for several minutes until some candles appeared on the walls.

Naruto nodded and added, "Well, this should be enough; you can open your eyes."

She did it and saw that candles lighted the hallway, "Sorry, this is the most I could do; it's tough."

Naruto shook his head and replied, "Don't worry, Anko-chan. It's difficult because there is someone who has more control over your mental landscape than you have. But enough of that; it's time to get rid of that bastard. Oh, and try not to lose your temper; you can't attack Orochimaru, leave it to me."

Anko just nodded and walked along with Naruto through the long corridor.

The walls were black and had strange circles.

After walking for about five minutes, they reached a large room, which looked grim.

Several snake statues were there, which had a sinister aspect. The floor was black and sticky. Besides, there was an unpleasant smell of snakes.

At the end of the room was a platform, and at the top of it was an elegant armchair, which was empty; this placed disgusted her.

Moments later, several snakes headed to the armchair and started to take shape.

Anko growled furiously, but Naruto placed his forearm to stop her because Anko wanted to attack Orochimaru, who after taking shape, smiled and sat down on the armchair.

"Kukuku, but what do have we here? It's my dear Anko. You have grown a lot. How long has it been since the last time we met? Ten years? I'm not sure. And even though I've seen your growth in all these years, seeing you in person makes me really happy," Orochimaru stated with a sinister smile.

He looked at the person next to Anko and raised an eyebrow. "And I can see you brought someone with you. Though I don't know who he is, I know he's your mate. I can say that you two have made my stay in this place entertaining since you've started doing it. Who would have said that you liked brats, Anko? Kukuku," he spoke with a mocking smile.

Anko growled furiously, and Naruto grimly smiled, "Oh, it's so bad that you don't remember me anymore. It seems that I was right."

Naruto cracked his fingers and stated, "I think it's time to end your miserable existence."

He pointed his right hand at Orochimaru and activated his Rinnegan again, which surprised the Sannin a little.

"Rinnegan," Orochimaru whispered, just to feel being pulled toward Naruto at a tremendous speed.

This time, it was different; since Naruto wasn't in his mental landscape, he didn't have as much power as in his mind, and also because Anko didn't have much control over her landscape; therefore, Orochimaru turned into several snakes that headed in different directions.

Naruto growled angrily. "Damn, he's a sneaky bastard; this won't be easy. I think it'll take more time. Anko-chan, I need your help. This is your mental landscape, try to wrest control from Orochimaru; change this room to a smaller one, without exits for that bastard to escape."

Anko nodded and tried to concentrate.

"Kukukuku. So, are you here to remove the seal? That's impossible, nobody but me can do it. Besides, if you eliminate me, my original will find out about this. And I'll only have to put my mark on Anko again; though I doubt she'll have as much luck as before. And since you have the Rinnegan, I'm more than sure that my original will be happy to put the Cursed Seal on you, and I'm sure that you'll survive. That evil within you is something that catches my attention. We could become allies, if you and I cooperate, we'll be able to do incredible things," Orochimaru offered hidden somewhere in the room, which was slowly changing its shape.

That concerned Orochimaru's clone, which was making a great effort so that the room didn't change completely.

Naruto snorted and replied, "You have nothing to offer me; come on, just give it up. Don't prolong this; I’ll end up catching you sooner or later. Rather, sooner."

He smiled because the room took the shape he was looking for, and even though Orochimaru had been here for who knows how many years, he couldn't do anything against the fury of an angry woman.

She was upset, and maybe that was the reason why she was trying so hard to regain control over her landscape; Orochimaru could see her sweating and making effort gestures.

There were no places where Orochimaru could escape, and Anko finally sighed; this had been hard, but now she felt control over her mental landscape.

Naruto smiled at Anko before looking at Orochimaru, who was retaking his human form.

When he finished, the Sannin looked at her former student with a grin, "Wow, Anko, you surprise me; you grew up a lot in all these years."

Naruto growled and activated his Rinnegan, pointing both hands at him.

Orochimaru didn't care since he already knew how to counter this technique. He just had to do what he did at first, and wait for those two annoyances to leave this place; he had all the time in the world, but they did not.

The Sannin prepared himself for the previous attack, but Naruto's arms lengthened and headed to him.

Before Orochimaru's clone could react, those metal tentacles held him firmly, and though he tried to get rid of them, he couldn't. It was as if those arms were absorbing his chakra, preventing him from using any Jutsu.

Naruto approached Orochimaru, and his arms returned to their original length. Once the Uzumaki had the Sannin close, Orochimaru tried to say something, but the Jinchuriki wouldn't waste his time with a simple clone.

Therefore, he extracted the clone's soul, absorbing it again to his disgust, but he quickly blocked the memories that started coming into his mind like a tide.

"Done," Naruto spoke tiredly; his Rinnegan had used much of his Chakra in Anko's mindscape, something he had just found out and that he would have to solve.

His girlfriend approached Naruto; he looked a bit sweaty, but it didn't look bad. "He's gone? Won't he try to corrupt me again?" Anko asked with a hint of hope.

The Jinchuriki wiped the sweat from his forehead and shook his head. "There's something more I need to do; we'll have to find the place where your memories are; I don't think it'll take too long."

Anko didn't understand what Naruto meant by that; maybe it was her brain or something.

She just nodded and walked alongside Naruto through her mind; they quickly found the place that he meant.

They entered a room with no doors, seeing a small altar that had something drawn on it.

They came closer, and Anko saw the Cursed Seal. She knew it had something special, Anko could feel it; she could feel her neck burning, and besides, Naruto was carefully staring at it.

The Jinchuriki decided not to wait any longer and charged some of his and Kurama's Chakra in the mark; it was the only way of removing the soul that was sealed there. Just a harmful Chakra like the Kyūbi's could eliminate it, and his Chakra was to prevent Anko from suffering the consequences of his friend's Chakra.

Though it was little, it could be harmful to her; he only wanted to avoid any regret in the future, though he added his Chakra for another reason.

Anko instantly felt that the burn disappeared and saw the drawing glowing red before switching to that color.

Naruto decided not to wait any longer and left Anko's mental landscape along with her; the Rinnegan was taking its toll.

The Uzumaki shook his head, and the Mitarashi opened her eyes slowly before looking at Naruto with surprise.

"Naruto-kun, what is this feeling?" She asked confused.

The former ANBU sighed; he knew what she was feeling, maybe he should have told her before doing what he did.

"What do you feel Anko-chan?" Naruto asked.

Anko stood up and approached Naruto as she touched her hands, "I don't know, It's like I have a connection with you."

Naruto nodded and added, "Indeed, that's what you are feeling; you and I now have a connection. Instead of feeling a connection with Orochimaru, I changed it so that you feel it with me, and I can also feel you. When I say 'feel,' I mean everything. But it's not bad, I can just feel your emotions, and you can feel mine."

Anko was surprised. Yes, that explained it, but it was still a bit weird for her; it was as if Naruto was blocking some part of him.

Lemon

She coquettishly smiled and slowly took her jacket off. "Naruto-kun, we need to catch up."

She threw it to the floor and lunged at Naruto, knocking him to the floor and kissing him fiercely.

The Uzumaki kissed her with the same intensity, and both stopped after several seconds.

"You know, Naruto-kun? Since the day I saw you with extra hands, I asked myself if you could do the same down here," Anko spoke while touching the bulge in his pants. "And when I saw you lengthening your arms, I concluded that you could do it."

The Uzumaki became a little nervous. "I-I... I don't know, maybe I could, but... Wouldn't it be weird?"  "Please," she begged with puppy eyes.

Naruto's bulge tried to break through his pants after seeing those eyes; Anko noticed it and quickly pulled his pants and underwear down.

She grabbed his member strongly, making him groan. "Come on, Naruto-kun, don't be a killjoy. Just try it; I know you can do it," Anko spoke with a smile as she headed her head toward his penis.

Naruto sighed in defeat and answered, "I'll try it. But with one condition," he paused as he let out a moan because Anko completely swallowed his cock.

The woman took it out to rub it. "What condition?"

"Train Sakura," Naruto replied as Anko put his cock between her breasts, stimulating it slowly.

"Why? Do you want her to be part of your 'harem?” She asked with a smile, rubbing it faster and sucking it strongly.

"N-No, though it wouldn't be a bad idea; Sakura has a great ass. Oh God, how can you be so good at this?" Naruto asked.

Anko smiled, stopped sucking him off just and moved her breasts only. "Hehehe, thank you, Naruto-kun; I have natural talent, hehe," she looked into his eyes before sucking again.

The Jinchūriki smiled while his hips started to move up and down on their own, which made her smile.

"W-Well, as I was saying. Though it isn't a bad idea, I won't do it; S-Sakura doesn't attract me in that way.  But I don't want to talk about that, the reason why I want you to train Sakura is that her attitude and level disgust me. Argh..." Naruto growled because he felt his climax close.

Therefore, he said to finish, "And you're the only one who can change her, Anko-chan... Argh!" Naruto gritted his teeth as he came, and Anko completely swallowed his cock and seed.

Once Naruto finished his discharge, she took his cock out and pressed it gently against her lips, licking the glans clean.

She licked her lips and nodded, "Okay, I'll train that brat if you manage to do 'that,' Naruto-kun."

She looked at his penis, and he sighed in defeat before nodding.

Anko instantly stood up and clapped as she jumped, which made him giggle.

"Well, I'll do my best, but I don't know if it'll be possible; I just hope that my 'friend' doesn't get mad if I manage to do it," Naruto stated.

He activated his Rinnegan and used the Asura Path before concentrating.

Anko quickly knelt down while putting both hands on the floor to stare at that place, but Naruto suddenly stopped.

"And where do I put it?" He asked.

Anko pointed at a place that made Naruto sweat; this would be tough.

After several minutes, he managed to do it, but although he was finding this weird, feeling Anko's excitement made it worth.

The Mitarashi then watched in amazement as another penis came out just below the one whose Naruto already had.

She smiled and quickly grabbed it before putting on a face of surprise, "You said it would be fake, but this feels real."

Naruto let out a soft moan, which made her smile.

"I-I don't know, maybe it's an exception," he added.

Anko continued smiling before stopping rubbing the new penis.

She stood up and took her skirt and panties off before starting to sit down.

However, Naruto spoke, "Anko-chan, there's something I wanna tell you before we start."

Anko paused halfway and looked at Naruto, "What is it?" She impatiently asked.

Naruto could see that her vagina was dripping wet and could feel her impatience due to the connection they now shared.

Therefore, the Uzumaki finally released the feeling he was hiding from Anko.

She easily recognized it; it was the same feeling she had been feeling since the moment she declared her love to him. She felt thrilled, her lips trembled, her eyes got watery and shined with emotion.

The Snake Mistress didn't say anything because the Jinchuriki continued, "That day, in this very place, you told me that you loved me, and I didn't answer in the same way. I was a stupid idiot;  I've always loved you. But I was so afraid of fucking it up that I neglected your feelings. I was so wrong; I made you go through something you shouldn't have gone. Please, forgive me, Anko-chan; I love you, and I want you to be with me forever."

Tears were running down her cheeks like never before, "I... I," she tried to say something, but she was so happy that the words wouldn't come out of her mouth.

Therefore, Anko did the only thing that came to her mind; she lunged at him and started to kiss him.

However, this one was different from the other ones; it was soft, tender; it was pure love.

Naruto returned the kiss, which didn't last long because Anko separated as she finally found the words; she was still shivering, and tears continued running down her cheeks. "I love you too, Naruto-kun, I love you too..." She hugged him and kissed him again.

When she calmed down, Anko returned to the initial position and continued going down.

"You don't know how happy I am right now, Naruto-kun; you don't know how happy your words have made me. However, now that we clarified our feelings, we need move on to the main course."

Anko slowly sat down, introducing both members in her holes; she enjoyed this new feeling so much that her tongue came out.

She put her hands on his chest and stammered as she drooled, "I'll become addicted to this."

Anko moved her hips up a little bit before moving it down; they both moaned.

Meanwhile, Kin was still waiting at the door; it had already been 15 minutes since Naruto had told her to wait outside.

She didn't know what they were doing; she assumed it had something to do with Anko's Cursed Seal.

Surely Naruto was removing it, which the Tsuchi found great. Her friend Tayuya had the mark too, and if she were to see her again, Kin could convince the redheaded girl to leave Orochimaru and come with her.

Not necessarily as a girlfriend of Naruto, but she wouldn't mind either. Regardless, Naruto could remove the seal from her if he managed to do it with Anko.

She continued waiting for another 30 minutes; she was bored, and she wanted to know what they were doing there; perhaps something went wrong.

That thought worried her, and for that reason, she turned around and opened the door.

"Naruto-kun, Anko-san are you both... okay?" She asked with shock.

For the second time in a day, she was seeing Naruto fucking someone, but this time, it was bestial.

Naruto was thrusting at an incredible speed; Anko was resting her hands on the wall as she received them.

She was yelling, encouraging him to increase the speed and strength of his thrusts, which Naruto gladly complied.

However, what shocked her was to see that Naruto had not one but two penises; both were coming in and out from Anko, who seemed about to fall to her knees.

She finally saw her falling, but Naruto quickly held her and moved her hips even faster.

Both of them finally fell on their knees, which indicated that both had reached their climaxes.

Kin took this as her chance and slowly turned around to leave.

However, she didn't see the chair that was behind her, so she stumbled and caused a loud noise as she fell to the floor.

She looked to her right and tried to get up quickly, but someone helped her to get up. The Tsuchi saw the pretty legs of 'someone', and as she looked up, she couldn't help blushing since something white was dripping between her legs.

She directly looked into the eyes of Anko, who was mischievously smiling. "Hehehehe, but what do have we here? Kin-chan, were you unable of holding it any longer that you came here in search of some fun? Hehehe, I know what happened today; surely you wanted to try it out," Anko spoke, wiggling her eyebrows.

Meanwhile, Naruto had put his pants on and added as he approached at them, "Come on, Anko-chan, don't bother her."

Naruto stopped looking at Anko, who was smiling with innocence.

The Uzumaki looked at Kin, who had lowered her head. "Don't mind her, Kin-chan; she's just kidding."

The Tsuchi was having a fight, most of her wanted to do it with Naruto, but she was insecure; she feared that this experience could finish and that she ended up in the clutches of Orochimaru again.

She slowly looked up, blushing more and more when seeing Naruto's abdomen. She unconsciously raised her right hand and touched one of his abs, and their hardness surprised her.

Anko grinned widely, and Naruto smiled slightly.

The young woman moved her fingers through his abs, slowly moving them up.

Naruto chuckled and continued, "It seems that I was wrong, hehe."

Kin finally realized what she was doing; she looked into his eyes, only to blush because of his charming smile; she looked away because of the embarrassment.

However, she instantly felt a tic that made her bow her head and whisper, "I want to do it."

Naruto raised an eyebrow and looked at Anko, who was still smiling.

He looked at Kin again and put his hands on her shoulders before whispering, "You don't have to, Kin-chan; we can do it another day."

The Tsuchi raised her head and looked at Naruto with determination, "Who told what I want? Look, Naruto-kun; I think you had a bad first impression of me. I'm not that shy. Moreover, I'm not shy at all. So, stop telling me what to do because I'm the only one who knows what I want," Kin stated in a firm voice.

Naruto looked at her with surprised eyes; he finally smiled and looked at Anko, who gave him the nod.

The Jinchūriki grabbed one of Kin's hands and used a Shunshin to go to another room.

Anko smiled and thought, "I just have to wait a few minutes, and then I'll have a partner to spend the night with Naruto-kun." She left that room in search of Naruto and Kin.

Meanwhile, the Tsuchi was kissing the Uzumaki voraciously, and he corresponded it while removing her clothes; Kin also helped him, but it was easier for her since he wore his pants only.

After taking her underwear off, he picked her up before placing her on the bed.

He approached his head to her vagina, trying to give her an exceptional service, but Kin quickly stopped him, "Do it already, Naruto-kun; I don't want to wait anymore. I should have done it when you and Haku-san were doing it, but Kurotsuchi beat me. Come on, hurry up and don't keep me waiting."

Naruto smiled again; he liked this side of her. If it were up to him, he would like if she continued with the same personality from now on.

As requested, Naruto brought his member closer to her entrance, which was already wet.

He slowly introduced it, obtaining the congratulation of 'someone' for adding another virgin to his record.

Kin moaned and placed her arms around his neck, drawing him into a loving kiss before telling him to continue.

He slowly began to move, which annoyed her; therefore, she told him to move faster and stop treating her like a little girl.

Naruto smiled again and thrust at a speed that made her think that she shouldn't have asked.

The Tsuchi continued moaning as she did her best not to cum too fast. But even though she tried it, Kin released her first orgasm as Naruto continued thrusting.

He felt her tightening; however, he didn't stop. Instead, he increased the speed.

Kin's eyes widened and rolled up, her mouth drooled and her hips shivered. "I-If you keep this up, I'll lose my mind," Kin stammered before putting her legs on his hips.

Naruto held her hips still to penetrate even deeper as he felt his climax close. A few seconds later, Naruto grunted and gave a final thrust, releasing his seed and making her cum as well.

She shouted and scratched Naruto's back, finally drawing him into a kiss.

They stopped, and Naruto fell beside her, smiling as he looked at her. "Sorry for being so rough, but I love girls with attitude."

Kin smiled but couldn't say anything because someone opened the room. "That's great! Now it's my turn!" Anko jumped to the bed, and they continued for a few more hours.

The next day

Naruto and Anko were at a clearing in the Forest of Death.

After the information that would return to Orochimaru had vanished, Naruto had removed the barrier.

The Uzumaki had sent the Tsuchi to his apartment; Naruto had told her that he had to see if Anko could properly use her Cursed Seal.

The young woman didn't complain but asked him to do it again before he got into his rigorous training; the Jinchūriki promised they would do it.

He was now observing Anko, who was trying to activate her mark.

Naruto smiled and spoke, "Well done, Anko-chan. See? I told you that you could use your Cursed Seal without problems."

Anko was covered by marks that looked like red flames.

The Mitarashi was surprised; she felt powerful, much stronger than ever before. She was looking at her fists as she opened and closed them.

"But you won't be able to reach the level two yet. I need some things that I won't be able to get in Konoha. I can't do it either; we both need to go through a ritual so that our bodies can resist the power charge at that level. But it doesn't matter for now. Tell me, how do you feel?" Naruto asked, ducking to dodge a kick.

Naruto looked back and saw the big crater she made after hitting the ground. "I think that means you're okay," Naruto continued with a smile.

Anko stood up, shaking the dust from her jacket. "I don't feel okay; I feel great. This power is incredible. Thank you, Naruto-kun. You were right. Anyway, now I want to see you using your Cursed Seal."

Naruto nodded; he focused, and his mark glowed, giving off lines that spread to his arms, chest, and stomach; the place where his father's seal became visible.

His facial expressions became much wilder, and his fangs and nails were now larger.

Naruto's sclera turned completely black, and his eyes turned red.

His hair grown quite a bit, and he seemed to have horns, but it was just hair.

"Wow," Anko whispered surprised.

Naruto felt amazed by the power increase, but he wanted to see how strong he could get.

"Anko-chan, I'll try something; it may be dangerous. So I ask you to stay away."

He had a feeling that something bad could happen, and he didn't want Anko to be close if that were the case.

He would have to put a barrier to avoid some things. First, he didn't want that the people from the village felt his Chakra or Kurama's. Lastly, to contain him if something bad were to happen.

Anko moved away and saw Naruto creating four shadow clones that sat with crossed legs on the ground, forming between them a square of about 200 meters.

The barrier branch was incredibly easy for him since they weren't that complicated. However, there were other branches that he couldn't focus on because the information mixed fast

Red triangular barriers surrounded each of the clones, and lines that took a height of about 20 meters appeared from the tips; they joined and formed a square.

She saw him returning to his normal form before standing on all fours while a red cloak surrounded him.

Naruto took the mini Kyūbi form; it was the first time she saw him with this transformation, and a slight chill ran down her spine.

"Now you can go a little further," Kurama spoke.

His container raised an eyebrow and asked, "Do you mean that I can use another tail?"

The Biju nodded and replied, "Yes, somehow, that mark also increased my Chakra, not only yours. Since we're both connected, we both suffered the benefits of that mark. Go ahead; now you can use five of my tails.”

Naruto nodded and concentrated until the fifth tail emerged along the others; this new form came accompanied with a skeletal structure that appeared on his back and head.

"Well, this is a significant power boost; it doesn't compare to the previous form at all," Naruto spoke, getting used to this new power.

"Well, time to do something stupid," Naruto continued, trying to concentrate.

However, Kurama's voice interrupted him, "You know that's not a good idea; combining two different kinds of Chakra is crazy, and you want to combine not two, but three. I hope you're ready for the consequences."

Naruto just smiled and replied, "What's the worst that could happen? Besides, you're here in case that something happens; don't be so paranoid."

With that said, Naruto concentrated, and black lines appeared around his red body. Everything was going well until something happened.

Anko was seeing his boyfriend trying something; she understood what it was when the black lines started to come off from his neck.

Nothing wrong had happened, but that changed when these lines increased considerably in thickness, completely wrapping Naruto.

She heard him screaming in pain, and also heard the horrible cracks of his bones while a thick Chakra of black color came out of his body.

The Chakra continued growing until reducing visibility to zero percent.

"Naruto-kun!" Anko yelled with desperation as she ran toward there.

"What's happening?!" She looked at his clones, who didn't know what to answer.

She was about to cry; she could feel the immense pain he was suffering and wanted to do something to stop it.

However, Naruto suddenly stopped screaming; there was only silence, a silence that made her nervous.

Anko heard ghoulish grunts and an equally evil laugh, which made her feel intimidated.

She took a few steps forward, even though she knew it was a bad idea.

The Mitarashi stood a few inches from the barrier but had to step away quickly since something hit the barrier sharply.

The Snake Mistress fell back as she heard a mocking and macabre laughter; whatever it was inside, it wasn't Naruto.

She couldn't feel him anymore; something had happened to him.

The next thing she saw almost made her panic, a pair of horrible yellow eyes that glowed in the thick Chakra; they were pure evil.

She could feel malice, hatred, revenge, and another dozen of negative feelings; they were just repulsive.

Worst of all was that it was staring at her as if it were trying to do something bad to her.

She heard it growling before it started hitting the barrier repeatedly, in an attempt to reach her... and kill her.

The clones were keeping the barrier with troubles, those blows were so strong, and they were sure that the barrier wouldn't resist too long. Therefore, they quickly activated the Chakra Suppressor Seals to contain the original.

That thing put a lot of resistance as it released several frightening squeals, but it couldn't do much to fight against those seals.

Once the original had calmed down, the clones removed the barrier; there no longer was traces of the Chakra that had reduced the visibility.

Anko quickly returned to her feet and approached Naruto, who was staring at the nothingness.

The Jounin put a hand on his right cheek and forced him to look at her. "Are you alright, Naruto-kun? What happened?"

"Yes, I'm all right, Anko-chan. I won't do that anymore. I'm sorry about what you saw and about what it attempted. It wasn't me; it was something else, not even the Kyūbi. Anyway, let's return to the apartment; I need to go somewhere else at noon."

"But are you okay? Will it appear again? I could feel 'its' emotions, and they weren't good ones. It was like if it wanted to destroy everything; it was as if it wanted to destroy this world," Anko whispered scared as she remembered those feelings.

"Don't worry; I'm fine. It just hurt me like hell. But now I'm okay; there's nothing to worry about. But let's put that aside and let's get back to the village," Naruto replied while giving her a kiss.

Anko nodded, and both walked toward his apartment.

Notes:

Let's see.

Naruto saved Kin, and both had their moment.

Naruto removed the Cursed Seal. Oh, and I do know that the ‘double penis thing’ was weird, but it was something that I believe that Anko would have asked.

Well, Anko can use her Curse Seal without trouble, and I'll put a picture in my bio so that you can see how Naruto’s level 1 transformation looks like.

Until the next time.

Chapter Text

People talking, "I underestimated him!"

People thinking, "This is getting very hard."

Nonhuman talking, "It would be best to think of a better plan."

Nonhuman thinking, "It didn't work."

Jutsus / unknown names, "Katon: Goukakyuu no jutsu."

Disclaimer: I do not own Naruto, Masashi Kishimoto does.

Chapter 23

4 hours later

Naruto was heading to the training camp where he should meet up with Karui, hoping that this time, she would be there.

Nothing unusual had happened at his apartment, but his girls noticed that he had been very silent and thoughtful. They asked him if something was wrong, but the Uzumaki had replied that he was fine and had a few things to think about.

However, Anko knew he wasn't entirely honest; she knew that his condition was due to what had happened earlier. The Mitarashi was worried and scared; she would never forget those yellow eyes.

Minutes later, the Jinchūriki had left the apartment in silence, which concerned his girls even more; they were sure that something was going on.

Naruto used to be thoughtful and serious most of the time, indeed, but he always talked with them before leaving; this time he didn't even say goodbye.

Anko sighed sadly and proceeded to tell them what had happened in the Forest of Death.

Meanwhile, Naruto thought while walking, "Kurama, do you have any idea on how I could avoid going crazy when using that power? I feel bad for lying to Anko-chan, but I didn't want to tell her that it was me, but in a state of madness. I don't know what she would have thought if she knew it was me."

Kurama sighed and shook his head. "Sorry, but I don't have the slightest idea; you'll have to figure it out on your own. When you get the full power of your mark, try it again, but for now, don't ever combine chakras again. I'm sure that that thing you turned into has already adapted to the situation; I don't think that some Chakra suppressor's seals will work with you again. As for the human girl, well, I don't know. I think she'll understand if you tell her the truth. Besides, I'm sure she is telling the others about this. I noticed that all of them were concerned because you ignored them."

Naruto nodded; maybe Kurama was right, maybe he should get full control of his Cursed Mark before trying it out again. The power he had felt was something out of this world; it was as if he could do everything and no one would be able to stop him. However, the price to pay was high. He couldn't distinguish between friends and enemies in that state; he just wanted to kill, destroy, and cause pain everywhere.

The Uzumaki should avoid using it for that reason; he almost harmed Anko, and if he did it, Naruto would never forgive himself for it.

He stealthily created a Shadow Clone that went to Kohta's Mansion to give him new instructions.

Meanwhile, Naruto arrived at the training camp and decided to implement what he decided to do after seeing the ANBU using the Mokuton. He had already succeeded in making the Hyoton, and the Jinchūriki wanted to combine the three elements to make the Mokuton; the Suiton, Doton and some Yōton (Element Yang).

Therefore, he concentrated on detecting if people were around. There was no one, so he activated his Rinnegan and created thirty Shadow Clones so that everyone could try to combine the Elements.

Some of them decided to combine Doton with Suiton while others tried to measure the exact amount of Yōton.

They continued training for about two hours without any significant progress. The Element Yang was hard to use. Besides, it was necessary to put an exact measure for the Mokuton to work. The Scroll of Seals didn't indicate that amount; it only said the Essential Elements, and for that reason, Naruto asked himself how that ANBU was able to use Mokuton; he surely was a Senju.

But that couldn't be possible since he was sure that the Senju no longer existed. Tsunade was the last one, but she couldn't use that Element; there surely was another explanation.

Naruto dissipated all of his clones so that the progress returned to him, which made him nod. Those who progressed more were the group that was trying to combine the Doton and Suiton, although it wasn't much, it was enough for Naruto to have an idea of what to do next.

He sighed as it seemed that Karui wouldn't come this day either; he wanted to talk to her. He could look for her and ask her what was happening, but the Uzumaki knew that he had to give her some space. He didn't to ask for explanations that could make her angrier; the best decision would be to wait until she felt that they should talk.

The former ANBU turned around to leave, but he quickly unsheathed his Ninjato and blocked a cut that was headed to his crotch.

He raised his Ninjato again because the person decided to attack his right arm.

Naruto jumped back, seeing Karui's furious expression; he couldn't deny that it surprised him a little bit; now he was confused. "Hello, Karui-chan, did you come to train?" Naruto asked with a smile.

Karui growled and ran back towards Naruto. "You liar!" Karui shouted as she jumped up before putting the edge of her katana forward, in an attempt to cut Naruto in two.

The Uzumaki blocked the attack again, this time while raising an eyebrow. Liar? When did he lie to her?

"Womanizer!" Karui shouted again, now trying to cut his waist.

When the Jinchūriki heard that word, he understood it; he had to explain it before she could continue misinterpreting things.

He pushed Karui's Katana to one side before stepping back, waving his hands defensively. "Hey, wait, Karui-chan, let me explain."

Karui ignored him and continued attacking. "Don't call me that! I'm only Karui to you. You hear me?!"

Naruto just sighed; she was outraged. But even if she was, the Uzumaki noticed that she attacked neatly, although she occasionally left openings that could be fatal.

The Jinchūriki continued blocking her attacks, waiting for the Kunoichi to detect these openings, but it seemed that she wouldn't.

Therefore, he turned his Ninjato and slapped Karui's ribs with the back of his Ninjato.

The blow took Karui with her guard down because she didn't think that Naruto would attack her; it was a blow strong enough to knock her down.

"Ouch, that hurts," Karui complained.

She looked at Naruto angrily. "What?!  Now are you going to hit me? It wasn't enough for you to lie to me?" Karui asked calmer but still angry.

Naruto sighed and shook his head. "I was just trying to help you, Karui-chan. You were attacking me very well at first, but as time passed, you started to leave openings that could prove fatal. I was just showing you pointing them out so that you can remember them in future. About the other, how did I lie to you, Karui-chan?" Naruto asked with a questioning face; he felt that Karui was calmer now, so he decided to sit crossed-legged on the ground.

Karui growled and crossed her arms. "I saw you kissing your teammate," Karui replied as she looked away.

Kurama smiled but remained silent, and Naruto wanted to hit his head repeatedly. Of course! That was the reason! He had been an idiot.

How did he not notice that before? He couldn't say anything because Karui lowered her head as she clenched her fists.

"I thought you were different; I thought I was lucky and that someone was finally interested in me. But it was only a lie," Karui whispered, now unable to hide what she was feeling.

Naruto quickly stood up and hugged Karui tightly. "Please, don't say that," Naruto replied, tightening the hug while his Uzumaki genes returned to bring out his feelings.

Karui was also feeling something similar, but her temperament was stronger that these feelings. When the Kunoichi was about to return the hug, she pushed Naruto aside. "Stay away! You're nothing but a liar and a womanizer!" Karui exclaimed, getting angry again.

The Uzumaki couldn't help feeling sorry and was unable to hide his surprise when hearing the last word.

"Do you think that I don't know? Do you think I'm stupid? Everyone knows what happened three days ago when you lost control over your Bijū, and everyone knows the reason. You're not only dating the girl on your team but also that Charin girl that everyone speaks about. And although I don't want to think about it, I believe that you're dating your Sensei too... Your Sensei!" Karui exclaimed, staring angrily at Naruto.

"Her name is Karin," Naruto whispered, ducking his head. Who would have said it? Naruto Uzumaki, bending his head in front of a woman, and they thought he could conquer them in a jiffy. He had never received a lecture from a woman; moreover, he had never received a lecture from anyone. The "lectures" from Danzō were nothing compared to what Naruto was suffering right now, and Kurama couldn't help smiling and chuckling.

Karui growled and turned around. "So you admit it. You know what, Naruto? Stay away from me; I don't want to know anything about you anymore."

She didn't mean that; something was telling her that it was a terrible mistake, but she chose to ignore it. The Kunoichi wanted to end the conversation as soon as possible because she felt that she was about to regret it and apologize to Naruto.

The redheaded girl walked away, but Naruto grabbed her right hand. She quickly turned around in an attempt to tell him to let her go, but in doing so, she felt her heart twisting.

The Uzumaki was giving a sad look as if he were feeling very guilty and unhappy. Karui didn't know the reason for the latter feeling; after all, they were nothing.

"Forgive me, Karui-chan. I-I didn't know that this would bother you so much. You're right; it’s my fault. But I planned to tell you about this as soon as we met here. Believe me that I never wanted to lie to you. If I didn't say anything in the preliminaries was because it wasn't the right place to talk about it. Believe me, Karui-chan; I'm truly sorry about all this. Please don't walk away from me; I want you to be with me, at my side, please," Naruto stated, bowing to the ground; he couldn't help it anymore.

"W-What?" Karui asked blushing in surprise. That had been so sudden, but for some reason, she couldn't help smiling slightly in happiness. However, the Kunoichi quickly shook her head and replied, "No is no!"

With that said, the redheaded girl turned around in an attempt to walk away, but he stopped her again, which make her turn around.

Naruto instantly placed a hand on her neck and drew her into a soft kiss.

Karui immediately kissed back; she didn't doubt it for one second. She didn't think of the consequences or the risks of kissing a Shinobi of another village; she just did it. She couldn't hold back the impulse that was telling her to throw herself into Naruto's arms.

Karui didn't return a soft kiss; rather she began to devour his lips as if they were bathed in honey, she just wanted more and more.

For that reason, Naruto placed his hands on her hips and raised her up to his height.

After that, he put his tongue into her mouth, and they fiercely fought with their tongues. And although this was Karui's first kiss, she knew how to live up to the situation. But of course, she couldn't do much against Naruto's experience.

After seconds that seemed like minutes, they separated. Naruto had a small smile on his face, and Karui's eyes were bright with emotion.

The Kunoichi then did something she had never done in her life; she bowed her head. "Why?" Karui asked, raising her head again and looking into his eyes.

"Why not?" The Uzumaki replied, putting his forehead against Karui's.

The Kumo-nin bowed her head again and nervously touched her hands. "I-I'm not very feminine or p-pretty."

"Who was the bastard that told you that? Karui-chan, you're pretty, you're beautiful; don't let anyone make you think otherwise," Naruto angrily replied because he was sure that people disparaged her in Kumo.

"B-But compared to your teammate, I-I," the redheaded girl tried to say, but a kiss silenced her. She returned it, but this time, it was softer than before.

They separated again. "Karui-chan, that's enough. You're beautiful; there's no need to compare yourself to other women. Every woman has something special, and you have many things that make you special."

Karui blushed and asked, "What are those things, Naruto-kun?"

The Uzumaki nervously scratched his head and replied, "Well, if I tell you, you might end up hitting me. But what I like the most about you is this..."

Karui didn't understand it, why would she hit him? The next thing she saw was that Naruto touched her hair; he smelled it, making her blush again.

"Your hair is beautiful; it drives me crazy. Though you have something else." Naruto glanced on the sly toward her ass.

Luckily, Karui didn't notice it, or otherwise, he would have to reassure her again.

The Kunoichi couldn't help taking one of her hands to her hair. "Are you serious?" she asked, getting a nod and a smile from him

She smiled back, and he spoke, "By the way, you said that you weren't very feminine, Karui-chan. You may be right about it," Naruto stated, seeing a vein of annoyance popping out on her forehead.

But before she could get angry, Naruto added, "But that's because of your clothes; it doesn't bring out your beauty. But that has a solution. Accompany me; I'll present you to your "sisters". After that, we can go shopping at the mall, what do you say?"

Karui nodded quickly; going to Konoha's Mall was one of the things she wanted to do. Rumors said that the place had a little of everything. But since she was an orphan, the Kunoichi didn't have much money, so Karui thought she would never get a chance to go there.

However, Naruto was offering her an opportunity; she didn't believe that it was bad to accept. If she was honest with herself, she also wanted to get rid of her clothes, and since Naruto was the Hokage's son, it was likely that money wasn't a problem for him. But of course, she didn't care about money.

Naruto invited her to join her arms into his. She did so, and both walked towards Naruto's apartment; he wanted her to meet the other girls to get to know them better.

As they walked away, something that looked like sand was slowly approaching behind them. Naruto was already aware of this. Regardless, both kept walking.

The responsible person was Gaara, who was hidden among the trees with a hand on his head. "Naruto Uzumaki, you will prove my existence."

He pointed his hand towards Naruto and Karui, and just when he was about to attack them, he heard a voice. "The next time you try something like this, you won't live long enough to regret it."

The Suna-nin quickly turned around, just to see Naruto with an angry face and his right fist just a few centimeters of his face.

Gaara just stood still with a neutral look, trusting that his sand would protect him. But it didn't even move, and Gaara received the entire power of the blow.

The redheaded boy felt surprised; this was the first time he felt the physical damage. It was something new and inexplicable to him.

Also, it wasn't a soft blow; it was a very powerful one that sent him flying in the opposite direction. He tried to regain his balance, but after looking forward, he could see that Naruto was already there.

This time, he gave him a powerful ascending kick, which sent him to the sky at high speed. At this point, Gaara was practically unconscious; these two blows had done him more damage than he could have imagined.

Just before he lost consciousness, he saw Naruto in the air, waiting for him with fists together. "Sweet dreams, you son of a bitch!" Naruto exclaimed, giving him a mighty blow on his neck that sent him towards the ground.

Gaara created a big crater after hitting it, losing consciousness due to his powerful attacks.

The clones looked at each other, and the main one activated his Rinnegan to get into Gaara's mind.

Once inside, the clone walked around the place. Gaara's mind was simple, but it looked corrupted. It was as it were breaking or something like that; the Uzumaki couldn't explain it.

The diminutive form of Kurama was next to Naruto, and the Biju was grinning as they walked.

They soon reached their target, who was growling and squealing at them. "Stay away or I'll kill you!" A crazed Ichibi shouted.

Kurama looked into his brother’s eyes. "Hello, Shukaku. It’s been a long time, silly little brother. Three hundred, four hundred years? I'm not sure." Kurama spoke with amusement.

Shukaku growled and shouted even louder, "Stay away! You're not Kurama! Get out of here before I kill you both!"

The Kyūbi raised an eyebrow in confusion. That he wasn’t Kurama? Surely being sealed for so much time had already made his younger brother stupid. But his threat didn't scare him. "Hahaha, only in your dreams, bro. Anyway, we’re here for another reason, and I think that my Jinchūriki will be the most appropriate person to explain the reason for our honorable visit," Kurama stated while chuckling.

Naruto chuckled as well and stepped forward to see the great beast before him. "Well, I'll be quick and direct. I'm here to warn you about something."

Shukaku growled even louder because he understood what his warning would be.

"As you see, my dear friend Kurama had suffered a great injustice a few years ago. A poor bastard, my father, decided to extract all his power to give it to another poor bastard. And for that reason, Kurama and I decided to regain his power... And more," Naruto stated with a sinister smile.

He continued, "We both came to the conclusion that we couldn't forgive such injustice. Therefore, we came up with something interesting, and you, Kurama's brothers, have a lot to do, hehe," Naruto wickedly laughed.

Shukaku only growled, waiting for Naruto to finish his speech. "Our decision was to wrest the power from all of you and give it to Kurama to make him the most powerful Bijū. But unfortunately, I still don't have a Jutsu capable of extracting you from your Jinchūrikis. But there was another problem. The Rikudō Sennin took care of giving consciousness to each one of you, and it wouldn't be good if you're tormenting Kurama while you're inside of him. That was a big problem for us, but I've found a solution."

Kurama smiled as he watched Naruto concentrating and making the Apple of Eden appear in his right hand, glowing intensely.

"You!" Shukaku growled after seeing the golden sphere.

"Oh? Do you know about this device? Well, that's good! I guess that you're aware of its capabilities," Naruto spoke with a smile.

Shukaku growled and replied, "Yes, I know it. I could feel it when my Jinchūriki was near you," he paused and looked at Kurama. "Do you really trust this human? Nothing good will come if a human deliberately uses that artifact; you're making a great mistake.”

Kurama chuckled and replied, "It's the only human who can have my trust. No other human has proved to be even half of what Naruto is.”

Shukaku shook his head and heard Naruto talking again, "Thanks, Kurama. Anyway, as I was saying; I still don't have a jutsu to extract you from your Jinchūrikis. However, I do know how to delete your consciousness forever, and I'll do it with this." He raised the sphere and continued, "Once I'm able to extract you from your Jinchūrikis, I'll put you inside this sphere, and then I'll command it to erase all signs of life stored within it. The Rikudō Sennin did something almost similar, but he gave a consciousness to each of the parts of the Jūbi after dividing it. Anyway, that doesn't matter."

Shukaku growled. "Indeed, I know that it can do that even though Oto-sama tried to erase that memory from all of us. He couldn't do it with me because I was in contact with it for a longer period. But why are you telling me about this? I could ruin your plans if I tell my Jinchūriki about it," Shukaku asked.

Naruto smiled and replied, "As I said, it's just a warning. It wouldn't be fun to hunt down a poor maniac who believes that his Bijū is his mother. For this reason, I've come to tell you to help your Jinchūriki. There's no fun when things are easy, you know? That's the reason; I just want you to help Gaara. But of course, you're right. I also came to tell you that this is the last time that you'll influence your Jinchūriki. I'll add something to his seal. As you already know, his seal is of poor quality. I won't do anything complicated; I'll just add a seal that won't allow you to communicate with Gaara. But hey, we gotta go. And remember my warning. Help Gaara if you want to have a chance of surviving. Until the next time, Ichibi."

With that said, Naruto and Kurama faded away.

Shukaku was furious; they confirmed his theory. That object was dangerous, and he didn't doubt that the human would try to capture him someday.

He had Kurama's help, and even if he managed to escape from his Jinchūriki, the Ichibi wouldn't be able to hide for long. Kurama would find him sooner or later. Therefore, the best decision would be to help his Jinchūriki, just to ensure his survival, not because he wanted to.

Gaara would need to train with his sand because Shukaku could no longer protect him automatically, not while Naruto had the Apple in his possession; that was the only way that Gaara would be able to recover his defense against Naruto.

"I think you were wrong, old priest. Humans don't want to accept each other," Shukaku stated, thinking of his first Jinchūriki.

Outside of Gaara's mind, Naruto had finished placing the seal that would interrupt the connection between Gaara and Shukaku. "Done, with this suppressor seal, Shukaku can no longer communicate with Gaara. His seal was garbage, how could Suna have Shukaku for so long?" Naruto shook his head.

Kurama growled. "If you can do it better, why don't you take a look at your seal?"

"I've already told you, Kurama, releasing you is not an option; our souls are linked. The only one who can release you is my father, and I don't think he wants to do it. The only thing I could do is allow you to manifest temporarily outside of my body. But for now, that's not possible. Perhaps with Kaa-chan's help, but for now, we must wait."

Kurama nodded and saw Naruto picking up Gaara's unconscious body. He put him on his shoulder and walked towards the village.

Apartments Area - 15 minutes later